Ep 3 51

THE M I L L E N N I U M E X P E R I E N C E
GREENWICH
HEALTH
& SAFETY
FILE
SECTION 3
FILE REFERENCE
- EP-
3 - 51
V O L U M E 1 of 7
GREENWICH
PAVILLION
(INCLUDING FIT-OUT)
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
- GREENWICH
HEALTH
& SAFETY FILE GREENWICH
PAVILION
(INCLUDING
FIT-OUT)
The existing works covered by this section of the Health & Safety File
(volumes 1 to 7) have not been altered/amended by any activities
carried out during the decommissioning/demolition operations
managed by McAlpine/Laing Joint Venture and as a result the status
of the document represents that prevailing at the time of handover of
the Health & Safety File from The New Millennium Experience
Company Ltd to English Partnerships.
The user of this manual should note the following:
1.
2.
The following drawing 1001 R indicates the location of the

Greenwich Pavilion.
Details of the Protec fire alarm systems can be found in file
section EP-3-26 and the Fire Strategy in Section EP-4-01.
H E A L T H & S A F E T Y FILE
D O C U M E N T C O N T R O L R E G I S T E R - EP-3-51
Revision
D1
Description of amendments
Updated following decommissioning/demolition
Date
Sept. 2001
WHERE ANY WORKS ARE CARRIED OUT ON THE P R O J E C T THAT

AFFECT THE CONTENTS O F THIS F I L E T H E N T H E APPROPRI-ATE~
I~VISION/, D ~ I O N / D A ~ . i ~
SHOO]I~D!BEi-EN~,EP~D'~,:I
LOCATION OF GREENWICH PAVILION
cY'i
!~"
/f- 1
.
.....
9
..,-.3
MILLENNIUM
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
- GREENWICH
HEALTH & SAFETY FILE GREENWICH

PAVILION
(INCLUDING
FIT-OUT)
VOLUME
INDEX
Volume 2
As Built Drawings - Architectural/Structural
Volume 3
Mechanical Services Installation

drawings)
Volume 4
Electrical Services Installation

drawings)
Volume 5
Fit-out (C-Beck - Pavilion Exhibitions)
Volume 6
Catering Facilities - Part 1
Volume 7
(including as built
(including as built
INDEX OF VOLUMES
Volume 1 of 7
(ELLMER
CONSTRUCTION
SUBMISSION)
Contents
Introduction
Contents
Design, Criteria & Basis of Design
Materials, Maintenance & Trade Details Sheets
Volume 2 of 7
Contents
As Built Drawings
Volume 3 of 7
Contents
Mechanical Services
Volume 4 of 7
Contents
Electrical Services
1.0
Introduction
This Health Rr Safety File has been prepared with respect to the fit out of the
Greenwich Pavilion, which is located adjacent to the Meridian Time Line
outside the Dome
perimeter
road. The works
to the package
include.-
Twin layer metal roof incorporating

roof vent. Sealed unit double glazed
fenestration with glazed double glazed double door and opening ribbon
windows. Internal blockwork
core providing office, toilet and conference
facilities in addition to kitchen and plantroom
areas, but excluding final tit out,
catering fit out and exhibitions
Incorporated
within the fitout works is the installation of mechanical and
electrical services to provide light. power and ventilation
to the structure. These
works incorporate
the provision and installation of all necessary mechanical
plant
This Health
& Safety File has been prepared
Construction
(Design & Management)
comprises of the following
contents.-
2.0
to meet the requirements
Regulations
1994
under the
The complete
Contents
tile
Section
21
Design Criteria
22
Maintenance
and Basis of Designs
& Trade Details
These give information

.
.
Sheets
on:-
Element/Trade
Location
Supplier/Contractor
.
.
OperationsKleanin~Maintenance
Recommendations
Residual Risks/Method
Statements
.
.
.
.
Drawing/Schedules
Trade Literature
Guranteeswarranties
COSHH
Special Disposal
Recommended
Contract
Instructions
Spares
Details
1
2
2.1
Design Criteria & Basis of Design
This originates from the Design Intent drawings and Contract Specification
from R.R.P.
Design Development has been controlled by:9 The Master Document Index (MDI)
9 or Sample Approvals (Sample Approval Form)
9 or Benchmarking (Benchmarking Form)
All the above already in client's possession.
It should be noted that whilst Ellmer did not have any Design Responsibility,
they were responsible for developing RRP and BH design criteria and
performance specification.
Where design development has been undertaken, this is identified within the
relevant part of Section 2 of this document.
Design for all elements of work is based on good working practice and where
applicable design calculations.
All design has been subject to full sign off and approval by the Clients Design
Team.
2.2

These have been pr ovi de d for:9
Mechanical Services - Please refer to V o l u m e 3 o f 7
Electrical Services - Please refer to V o l u m e 4 o f 7
9
9
Flooring
RC Slab/Retaining Wall
Roof
9
9
9
R o o f Vents
Fenestations & Glass Screens
Dry Lining & MF Ceilings
9
9
Ceramic Wall Tiles

Laminated Toilet Cubicles
9
9
W ar m Air Hand D r y e r
Steel F r a m e / S o l a r C a n o p y Support
9
9
Ironmongery
D e c or at i ons
Balustrades
Mirrors
Sanitary W ar e
MATERIALS, MAINTENANCE & TRADE DETAILS SHEET
ElemenETrade
Location
Mechanical Services
Pavilion
Suppfier/Contractor
Atalan Mechanical Services Ltd
Ringway House East
Kelvin Road
Newbury
Berks RG13 2DB
Tel: 01635 582 323
Fax: 01635 582 527
Operating~Cleaning~Maintenance Recommendations
As 'Stand Alone' Operation & Maintenance Manual.
Please refer to Volume 3 ot"7
-Residual Risks~Method Statements

I
Refer to above O & M
Dra wings/Sch edules
Useful Trade Literature
Guaran tees/Warran ties
COSHH Data Sheet
-Special Disposal Instructions

- - Recommended spares
'-7
Elemen t/Trade
Location
Electrical Services
Pavilion
Supplier/Contractor
Robert Ebdon Ltd
Unit 154 Cannon Workshops
5 Cannon Drive
London E14 4AS
Tel: 020 7515 5154
Fax: 020 7515 5710
--Operating~Cleaning~Maintenance Recommendations
As 'Stand Alone' Operation & Maintenance Manual
Please refer to manual
Volume 4 o1"7
Residual Risks/Method Statements

Please refer to above 0 & M
~-Dra wings~Schedules
COSHH Data Sheet
Special Disposal Instructions
Recommended spares
.1
Element~Trade
Flooring - Resin Bonded 6mm
Screed, clear, blue, grey
Location
Pavilion - conference toilet, office and main
floor areas
Supplier~Contractor
Conren Ltd
Readwither Road
Wrexham Ind Estate
Wrexham LL13 9RD
Tel: 01978 661991
Fax: 01978 661120
Operating/Cleaning/MahTtenance Recommendations
As Conren Ltd Maintenance Instructions behind. For minor repairs, cut out with
angle grinder using wet diamond blade and replace with matching materials.
Residual Risks~Method Statements

None
None
None
Guarantees~Warranties
COSHH Data Sheet
As main works contract douments
Decorseal
Decorscreed
Recommended spares
None
N/A
ConrenLimited
RedwitherRoad
Wrexham|nduscria| Estate
WrexhamLL139RDUK
TeE+44 (0)1978 661991
Fax:*44 (0)1978661120
emaik info~conren.com
web:www.conten~
conr'en
FACSIMILE MESSAGE
To: 4 ~ t _ _ ~ I ~ T T ~
~-~ ~_~J'~_.~_.
Fax No:
C~r
From: H E ~ - ~ | ~ - L ~ -
~1"~'1~
FaxNo:
~ ' ~ -
~J-~
Copy:
,-~ \ C ~ . k ~
Date:
Number of Pages (/ndud;ng this sheet):

Please
phone 01978 661991 if this transmission is inoomplete.
Thank you for your recent enquiry regarding Conren products. Please find attached
information, as requested, relating to:~
Dustguard
Aquasol
LevelayHD
[~
Enamelcoat
Patchfast
F.S. Screed
Lapidelith
Rooftex
[~
eloorplate
An original brochure will be forwarded by post.

We trust that the ;nformation supplied is of interest.
However. please do not hesitate to contact our Sales Office on 01978 661991 for
further details on the Conren range of products and services.
Kind Regards
CONREN LIMITED
Registered in ~nglanU N o 1022~99

Registered Office: A_~te'alHouse, Imperial Way, Warlord, Hefts WD2 4YX.
CONREN LIMITED
DECORSCREED
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Conren Limited
Redwither Road
Wrexham Industrial Estate
Wrexham LL13 9RD
CONREN
DECORSCREED
A Conren Decorscreed floor is one of the best investments a company can make in terms
of the provision of a decorative nonslip, durable, high performance floor finish. In order to
realise the full potential life of the Decorscreed finish, it is essential that good housekeeping,
cleaning and maintenance programmes are implemented immediately the floor goes into
service.
,Good Housekeeping
Good housekeeping practices form a key part of the maintenance of any floor finish. An
effective housekeeping programme is beneficial in terms of the good visual appearance of the
floor, the prevention of damage to the floor resulting from the presence of debris and is of
course, part of good health and safety practise.
Spillages -
Spillages of liquid or dry contaminants should be mopped or brushed up

immediately. If any delay in removal is likely the area should be cordoned off
to prevcnt the contamination being spread over a larger area and to avoid
accidents. Every effort should be made to remove spillages of aggressive
chemicals without delay. Extended contact with some chemicals can
result in irreversible damage to the Decorscreed finish. (Please consult with
the Technical Service Department).
Dirt & Debris -
The floor surface should be swept regularly to avoid a build up &dirt

or debris on the surface. This is a useful preventative measure both to
protect against accidents, and to reduce the likelihood of mechanical
damage to the floor occurring as a result of the dirt or debris being
ground into the Decorscreed surface by passing foot or vehicular
traffic.
Movement of Equipment and Machinery In the event that it is necessary to move heavy equipment or machinery
across the floor surface, care should be taken to avoid damage to the
floor surface caused by dragging or dropping heavy items while they
are in transit. The use of suitable trolleys, pallet trucks or fork lift
trucks to carry the objects to their destination where possible is strongly
recommended.
Cleaninl~
The correct selection of floor cleaning and care products is important for the efficient,
optimum cleaning of the Decorscreed surface. Certain types of unusual soiling may require
the use of special cleaning agents. If difficulty is experienced in removing contamination from
the Decorscreed floor surface, please consult the Technical Service Department for further
advice.
The First Stage

The new Decorscreed floor should be allowed to cure for as long as possible before general
traffic is allowed onto the floor surface. The Decorscreed floor will achieve full strength
7 days after application and except under special circumstances the floor should be left for at
least 48 hours before allowing more than very light foot traffic across the surface.
Traffic during the remaining 5 day period should be controlled in such a way as to avoid
unnecessary damage being caused to the Decorscreed surface as the full hardness of
the finish develops. Before the floor is opened to normal service use, it is advisable to remove
any dirt or debris by brushing, clean the floor using a neutral detergent cleaner and finally to
apply a metallised floor polish to the surface. The polish can then be carefully buffed to
develop the hardness of the polish and enhance the gloss. The metallised floor polish will
serve to both enhance the visual appearance of the floor and will also act as a protective
film reducing the effects of service wear.
The Cleanin~ Proeramme

With the operation of a good housekeeping system, the Decorscreed surface should
always remain free of loose surface dirt, debris and clutter. However, as with all floor finishes,
a layer of more firmly attached soiling will gradually build up on the Decorscreed surface.
The rate of soil build up and therefore the absolute requirement for regular cleaning of the
floor surface will vary from one situation to another. The time intervals between cleaning of
the Decorscreed surface will therefore need to be tailored to each individual location.
Notwithstanding this, it is common practice and good procedure to operate a daily cleaning
routine which by virtue of its regularity keeps the floor in optimum condition at all times.
Further, as the degree of soiling is never allowed to build up, the cleaning operation will be
kept to within manageable proportions in terms of the effort required to return the floor to its
original condition. The degree and nature of soiling will determine the type of cleaning
compound used on the surface. A floor which has attracted a low level of airborne dust
contamination may require simply mopping with clean water whereas a car showroom area
which might be contaminated with grease, oil and tyre marks would require the use of a heavy
duty neutral detergent degreaser. In normal circumstances, on a floor with average soiling, it
is appropriate to clean the Decorscreed with a good quality neutral heavy duty detergent.
The detergent may be scrubbed into the surface using manual or machine agitation but care
should be taken in the choice of brush or pad type used. There is no universal industry
standard for floor pad colour coding but a light duty nylon pad should be used wherever
possible. In most cases this type of pad will be coloured red or blue but if in doubt as to the
suitability of a particular pad type please refer to the Conren Technical Service Department.
The metallised polish applied during the first stage preparation of the floor should be stripped
and reapplied on a regular basis to maintain the visual appearance of the surface. The
period between subsequent application of polish will again vary from floor to floor
according to the level of traffic and degree of soiling but on an average floor the
interval might be in the region of 16 to 20 weeks or longer.
Obviously, in areas of heavy soiling or high traffic levels the interval might be considerably
shorter and re-application might be required as frequently as once every 4 weeks or less.
The time period between metallised polish applications can be extended by the use of
polymer based floor maintainer type polishes which will act to refurbish the appearance
of the metallised polish sheen. These can be applied using a "spray buff" type method.
Suitable types of cleaning compounds are listed in generic terms in Appendix A attached to
the back of the document Sources of supply fbr cleaning chemicals and cleaning machinery
are listed in Appendix B.
This maintenance guide is not intended to cover all the possible combinations of traffic levels
and soil types in detail, however, the Conren Technical Services Department is available to
advise on individual situations. We trust that you will enjoy a long service life from your new
Decorscreed floor finish.
T E C H N I C A L S E R V I C E AND G U A R A N T E E
Conren Limited offer a comprehensive technical and after sales service. We are available to
contend with most problems in the field. All information provided in this leaflet is based on
results obtained from our own experience and tests and is given in good faith. We guarantee
to replace, free of charge, any goods supplied by us which are provided to our satisfaction to
be defective, but, as the application of these materials is necessarily beyond our control, we
will not accept responsibility for any consequent damage or loss arising wholly or in part from
the use of these materials or information. Except as herein provided, any express or implied
condition, warranty, statement or representation, statutory or otherwise as to the quality of the
goods is expressly excluded.
SUPPLY
Direct through our sales office in Wrexham. All our products are normally available ex-stock.
Conren Limited
Redwither Road
Wrexham
LL 13 9RD
Tel: 01978 661991
Fax: 01978 661120
APPENDIX A
Cleaning
1.
GeneralPurpose
Neutral Detergent
2.
MediumSoiling
Heavy Duty Neutral Detergent
3.
Heavy Soiling
Solvent Containing lteavy Duty

Neutral Detergent
Heavy Duty Alkaline Detergent
(May act to strip Metallised Polish
Finish)
_Polishing
1.
MetallisedDrybright Floor Polish.
2.
Floor Polish Stripper
3.
Polymer Based Maintainer Polish
Ammonia Free Type
APPENDIX B
Sources of Supply
1.
Cleaning/Polishing Chemicals
Conren Limited
Redwither Works
Redwither Road
Wrexham
LL13 9RD
Lever Industrial Limited

Ashville Industrial Estate
Ashville Way
Runcorn
Cheshire
WA7 3JZ
Initial Supplies Limited

7 Tatton Court
Kingsland Grange
Woolston
Warrington
Cheshire
WA1 4RR
2.
Cleaning Machinery
Floor Cleaning Machines Limited

Wetrok Powerboss Organisation UK
Corporate Headquarters
Europa Boulevard
Gemini Business Park
Warrington
Cheshire
WA5 SUN
APPENDIX C
Combination Sweeper/Scrubber Machines
Combined Sweeper/Scrubber Machinery is suitable for use in the maintenance of Decorscreed

floor finishes. It is important that the correct scrub brushes and cleaning materials are used in
order to obtain the best results from the machinery without damage to the floor surface. In
general, a light or medium duty scrub brush should be used together with the type of cleaning
compound applicable to the degree of soiling as shown in Appendix A.
The Conren Technical Service Department is available to offer advice on the selection of
cleaning materials and scrub brushes.
NORWEST HOLST GROUP

CONTROL OF SUBSTANCES HA_~,..4d~DOUSTO HEALTH
SUB~T.ANCES ASSESSMENT FQ_RM
NAME OF COMPANY:
C O N K E N LIMITED
L OCA TION:
WREXHAM INDUSTRIAL ESTATE

REDWITH~R ROAD
WREXHAM
CLWYD
NAME OF SUBSTANCE:
DECORSEAL
CHEMICAL NAME OR TYPE:
TWO PACK SOLVENT BASED EPOXY

RESIN SURFACE COATING
MANUFA CTUER/SUPPLIERS' DATA ,SHEET A FFA CIiED YES
GENER4L NATURE OF.U~g
HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE- NO
(Hrr 25oc)
IRR~ANT- YES
co~os~- YEs
EXPLOSIVE
OXIDISING
-
FOR VAPOUR OR
GAS
LIGHTER THAN AIR-
TOXICITY DATA
LOWSP.~ S _ n ~
HEAVIF.Jt "mAN
TOXIC
AIR - YES
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE
STANDARD :
IOOPPM(8-.HOURTWA: XYLENE)
Lnvmt.l% voi (XVLEmZ)
PARTICULAR_RISK - Flammable. Harmful by inhalation. Both product components contain

Xylene, which may cause systemic toxicity e g on central nervous system. Decorseal base
contains Bisphenol-A-Epichlorohydrin (Av tool wt 700). Epoxide resins act as irritants to the
eyes and skin. They can cause skin sensifisation in susceptible individuals. Decorseal hardener
contains 4,4-Methylene bis-2-methyi oyclohexanamine. Cyolir amide materials act as irritants
to eyes, skin and respiratory tract. Inhalation may cause sensitisation of mouth and throat.
SA__EETY~P_.RECAUTIONSREQUIRED - Keep away from sources of ignition - No smoking

or naked lights.
Do not empty into drains. Ensure adequate natural ventilation and, if
necessary local exhaust ventilation to maintain vapour Mvels below the OES_ If ventilation is
not available Operatives should wear approved solvent vapour respiratory protection. Care
should be taken to ensure that people nearby are not affected by the product vapour. Gloves,
goggles and overalls should be worn to prevent skin and eye contact with the material. If skin
contact occurs wash immediately with soap and water, obtain medical attention if irritation
persists. In the event of eye contact rinse immediately with copious amounts of clean water and
obtain medical attention.. If the product vapour is inhaled and any effects noted remove to
fresh air and rest. In the event of any persistent effects obtain medical attention.
PACKSIZ..E (Combined Base and Hardener)
4.5kg
CONCLUSION- Decorseal contain approximately 40% Xylene and can theoretically contain
very low levels of Epichlorohydrin. The Epichlorohydfin levels have been confirmed by the
resin manufacturer to be below detectable levels and do not constitute a hazard of any
significance. The cyclic amide activator is of low volatility and is also unlikely to present a
s'tgnificant b~Tard. The major product hazard relates to the presence of Xylene. Care should
be taken to ensure that the product is not exposed to sources of ignition and to ensure that the
product vapour levels do not exceed the OES value. Under normal use conditions, with good
natural ventilation and if the recommended safety precautions are followed, the product does
not represent a significant health hazard. The ventilation level should always be assessed
before work commences and be monitored thereafter. In general terms a gentle detectable air
movement will be sufficient to ensure that vapour levels do not build up to unacceptable
concentrations. The Xylene vapour is heavier that air and in large open spaces even an
intermittent level of ventilation is likely to suffice. In the event of any doubt as to the level or
effectiveness of the natural ventilation, a single shift solvent vapour respirator should be worn.
The respirator should be discarded at the end of each shift or in the event that it is perceived to
be becoming less effective. In enclosed spaces, where forced ventilation is possible, it is
essential that air movement equipment is used.
APPROVED
POSITION Technical Manager
Date I.1.95
(issue002)
NORWEST HOLST GROUP

CONTROL OF SUBSTANCES HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH
SUBSTANCES ASSESSMENT FORM
NAME OF COMPANY,"
CONREN LIMITED
LOCATION:
WREXHAM INDUSTRIAL ESTATE

RFI)WITHER ROAD
WREXHAM
CLWYD
NAME OF SUBSTANCE:
DECORSCREED
CHEMICAL NAME OR TYPE:
THREE PACK EPOXY RESIN

SCREED
MANUFA CTUER/SUPPLIERS ' DATA SHEET A TTA CHED YES
GENERAL NATURE OF It]SK
MFUL-
HIGHLY
FLAMMABLE- N O
IRRITANT -YES
,covatosrvE- ~ s
~oa vx~vR OR
EXPLOSIVE
OXZDISnqG -
3AS
TOXICITY" D A T A
TOXIC
HEAVIER T H A N AIR YES

L I G E r J ~ THAN A I R -
OCCUPATIONAL EXPOSURE
STANDARD
LOWEREXPLOSIVELIMIT
(8-HOLrR TWA)
vol
PARTICULAR RISKdecorscreed contains 2, 2,4- (2,4,4-)

trimethylhexamethylenediamineand 3 Aminomcthyl -3,5,5- ~imethylcyclohexylamine.
Cyclic amide materials act as irritants to eyes, skin and the respiratory tract. Inhalation
may cause senisitsation of mouth and throat. Decorscreed base contains
Bisphenol-A-Epichlorohydrin(Av tool wt 700). Epoxide resins act as irritants to the eyes
and skin. They can cause skin sensitisation in susceptible individuals.
SAFETY PRE(MUTIONR REQUIRED- Do not empty into drains. Ensure adequate
natural ventilation and if necessary local e
ventilation. Care should be taken to
ensure that people nearby arc not affected by any product vapour. Gloves, goggles and
overalls should be worn to prevent skin and eye comac~ with the material, ff skin contact
occurs wash immediately with soap and water, obtain medical attention ifimmtion
persists.
**
SO'3g~d - ~ 1 7 7 * *
In the event of eye contact rinse immediately with copious amounts of clean water
and obtain medical attention. If the product vapour is inhaled and any effects noted
remove to fresh air and rest. In the event of any persistent effects obtain medical
attention.
(Combined Base, Hardener and Aggregate) 20.0kg
METHOD OFAPPLICATION- Decorscreed is mixed using a forced action mixer and

is then applied by pouring onto the floor surface and smoothing with a hand trowel.
- Decorscreed base can theoretically contain very low levels of
Epichlorohydrin. The Epichlorohydrin levels have been confirmed by the resin
manufacturer to be below detectable levels and do not constitate a hazard of any
significance. The cyclic amide hardener is of low volatility and is also unlikely to present
a significant hazard in use. The hardener will start to react with the epoxide immediately
on mixing further reducing any potential hazard from the material. Under normal use
conditions with good natural ventilation and if the recommended safety precautions are
followed the product does not represent a significant health hazard. The ventilation level
should always be assessed before work commences and be monitored thereafter. In
general terms a gentle detectable air movement will be sufficient to ensure that vapour
levels do not build up to unacceptable concentrations. In the event o f any doubt as to the
effectiveness of the natural ventilation or in very enclosed spaces in which a vaFour
problem is expected and where forced ventilation is possible, air movement equipment is
used.
APPROVED
POSITION Technical Manager
DaIe 1.1.95
(issue 004)
Element/Trade
Location
R.C Slab/Retaining Wall
Pavilion - North Elevation external works

enclosure
Supplier/Contractor
Byrne Bros. Ltd
13-15 White Hart Lane
Barnes SW13 OPX
Tel: 0181 878 9161
Fax: 0181 878 3848
Operating/Cleaning/Maintenance Recommendations
N/A

Use structural engineer for advice/design on any alteration work/cutting holes etc.
Dra wings/Schedules
By Buro Happold
N/A
COSHH Data Sheet
As main works contract documents
N/A
Recommended spares
None
N/A
Element/Trade
Location
R o o f - Metal Deck & 3 Layers
Pavilion - Roof over whole building with

1.5m overhang on N & S elevations
Supplier/Contractor
Met-Clad Ltd
Hazelford Way
Newstead Industrial Park
Newstead
Nottinghamshire NG15 0DQ
Tel: 01623 720032
Fax: 01623 721393
Refer to Manual at back of this section.

Risk of falling
Risk of damage to finished roof
Dra wings/Sch edules/Design
Design by Buro Happold. For As built

drawing - see Book 2
Gasell data sheets

PVF2 used externally
Polyester used internally
Guaran teesANarran ties
COSHH Data Sheet
As Main Works Contract Documents
Gasell, Liquid trocal, rockwool, Sisalkraft

50, profil vapour barrier
Recommended spares
None
None
lJu11997 I
S 302
For facades requiring high colour durability

FIELD OF APPLICATION
PROTECTION AGAINST CORROSION
PVF2 coating system is recommended for facades,

and in certain cases roofs, in normal environments
where a high priority is placed on colour retention
and dirt repellent properties.
PVF2
provides excellent protection against
corrosion. The technical useful life is longer than the
aesthetic one, but is in principle influenced by the
same factors. The thickness of the paint coat is
significant for protection against corrosion, damage
caused by scratching during assembly and
processing work, may occur because of the thin coat
system. It can therefore be finished off with clear
lacquer, which increases the resistance to corrosion
and the flexibility of the paint layer itself, see data
sheet for Clear Lacquer.
PRODUCT DESCRIPTION
PVF2 is a thin layer coating for outdoor use. The
coating has a friction-reinforced surface, and is well
suited to facades and roofs where a high priority is
placed on dirt repellent properties and retention of
lustre. PVF2 is a finishing paint based on a mixture
of fluorpolymer and acrylic resin with mixture at least
70/30%
BASE MATERIAL
PVF2 is coated on to hot-galvanised steel, stainless
steel and aluminium.
PRE-TREATMENT
Cleaning and pre-treatment in several steps for best
adhesion, and chromating which provides additional
protection against corrosion.
COLOURS
COLD WEATHER WORKING

The temperature of the plate must not go below
+10~
At lower temperatures, there is a risk of
micro-cracks occurring in the paint coat.
AESTHETIC AND TECHNICAL USEFUL

LIFE
Aesthetic useful life / Colour durability
,~|
aAa|
19 standard colours in accordance with the N C S

system and special colours produced at extra cost.
Ask for our colour chart for the full colour range.
Against additional payment, minimum quantities of
PVF2 can also be supplied coated on both sides.
DURABILITY OF COLOUR
PVF2 colour durability is excellent. The aesthetic
useful life is influenced by many factors, e.g.
environmental effect of chemical fall-out, the area of
use, structural factors in the form of rain shadow,
design and workmanship, maintenance, etc. PVF2
has good workability, very good surface hardness
giving good dirt-repellent quality and retention of
lustre. The aesthetic useful life is at least 15 years in
a normal environment.
Technical useful life I Resistance to corrosior
R E S I S T A N C E TO C H E M I C A L S
PVF2 has very good resistanceto most chemicals.
SLIP P R O T E C T I O N
The coating has a friction-reinforced surface for use
o n roofs.
RETOUCHING AND REPAINTING

PVF2 retouches or repaints well. Ask for a special
maintenance brochure for further information.
PVF2 DATA
COATING
PRODUCT
SYSTEM
PROPERTIES
....
" '__
:_~-~JL'u~[*.~
' :."..:J'...:, :
~-;.-..~:~-: .
. : j-~r
2 ~ ~ -
......
'~.l~:J.. '~ ._ _: . "::z
................... ~ = . - - - : ~ - ; ~ , ' - ~ -
.. :
::
.:
:-
')The v a l u e s g i v e n a r e n o t a b s o l u t e . V a r i a t i o n s o c c u r d e p e n d i n g o n b a s e m a t e r i a l , t h i c k n e s s , c o l o u r , etc. T h e
c o m p a r a t i v e v a l u e s a r e f o r o x i d e red c o l o u r . M a x i m u m t e m p e r a t u r e for u s e 1 2 0 ~
M i n i m u m t e m p e r a t u r e for u s e 30~
Information in this data sheet refers to before publication. Gasell Profil

reserves the right to make changes and/or additions as a result of
continuous product development. The most recent data available for
the product is available on request.
Gasell Profii
l Ju11997
S 301
For facades and external roofs in normal environments

FIELD OF APPLICATION
PROTECTION
Polyester is the most common coating system on the

market for thin profiles. Polyester is recommended
for all types of products for buildings in normal
environments.
Polyester provides good

protection against
corrosion. The technical useful life is longer than the
aesthetic one, but is in principle influenced by the
same factors. Polyester, which is a 25~ thin- coat
system, offers very good protection against
corrosion on surfaces not exposed to wear and tear
or being worked on.
PRODUCT
DESCRIPTION
Polyester is a thin layer type coating for indoor and

outdoor use. The coating has a friction-reinforced
surface, and is well suited to external roofs and
facades in normal environments. Polyester is a
finishing paint based on a polyester bonding agent
with high dry matter content. The high dry matter
content makes the coating very economical and
reliability of production rate.
BASE MATERIAL
Polyester is coated on to both hot-galvanised steel
and aluminium, and on to cold-rolled steel for
industrial purposes.
PRE-TREATMENT
Cleaning and pre-treatment in several steps for best
adhesion, and chromating which provides greater
protection against corrosion.
AGAINST
COLD WEATHER
CORROSION
WORKING
The temperature of the plate must not go below

+10~ At lower temperatures, there is a risk of
micro-cracks occurring in the paint coat.
AESTHETIC
LIFE
AND TECHNICAL
USEFUL
Aesthetic useful life I Colour durability
vCLEAR LACQUER
~.~w,N~
COLOURS
20 standard colours in accordance with the NCS
system and special colours produced at extra cost.
Ask for our colour chart for the full colour range.
Against additional payment and minimum quantity,
Polyester can be supplied coated on both sides.
DURABILITY
OF C O L O U R
Polyester colour durability is good. The aesthetic

useful life is influenced by many factors, e.g.
environmental effect of chemical fall-out and
dumping, the area of use(roof or facade), structural
factors in the form of rain shadow, weather direction,
design and workmanship, maintenance, etc.
Polyester has good workability, very good surface
hardness giving a good dirt-repellent quality. The
aesthetic useful life is 10 to 15 years in a normal
environment.
Technical useful life I Resistance to corrosior
RESISTANCE TO CHEMICALS
SLIP PROTECTION
Polyester has good resistance to chemicals.
The coating has a friction-reinforced

specially for use on roofs.
surface
RETOUCHING AND REPAINTING

Polyester retouches or repaints. Ask for a special
maintenance brochure for further information.
POLYESTER DATA
COATING SYSTEM
PRODUCT PROPERTIES
,The values given are not absolute. Variations occur depending on base material, thickness, colour, etc. The
comparative values are for oxide red colour. Maximum temperature for use 80~ Minimum temperature for use
-30oc.
Information in this data sheet refers to before publication. Gasell Profil
reserves the right to make changes and/or additions as a result of
continuous product development. The most recent data available for
the product is available on request.
Profii
Gasell P r o f i l A B Box 7, 231 08 AnderslOv. Tel 0410-214 00. Fax 0410-214 50.
GA20M-35
DECKING
9 DACH
9 SUPPORT
Steel Stahl Acier]

1993
E244 /
D'ETANCHEITE
35 ~ ~ 100
1000 tam
S E C T I O N PROPERTIES 9 Q U E R S C H N I T T S W E R T E
Colour side
Farbseite
Face laqu~e
9 CARACTERISTIQUES UTILES
Nominal thickness
Blechdicke
Epaisseur nominale
tno m
mm
0,65
0,70
0,75
mm
0,587
0,636
0,885
fty
N/ram=
350
350
350
kN/m =
0,06
0,07
0,07
Lmax
12,0
1 2,0
12,0
S u p p o r t reaction - width of s u p p o r t 50 mm
Auflagerluraft
- Auflagerbreite 50 mm
Rdact]on d'appui - largeur d ' a p p u i 50 mm
Rd
kN/m
28,37
32,84
37,59
Bending m o m e n t - narrow f l a n g e in compression

B i e g e m o m e n t - schmaler Gurt unter Druck
M o m e n t de flexion - nervure dtroite en compression
Md
kNm/m
1,03
1,16
1,29
M o m e n t o f inertia - narrow flange in compression

Tr~=gheitsmoment - schmaler Gurt unter Druck
M o m e n t d'inerde - nervure d t r o i t e en compression
104. m m 4 / m
3,5
3,9
4,2
Bending m o m e n t - wide flange in compression

B i e g e m o m e n t - breiter Gurt unter Druck
M o m e n t de flexion - nervure large en compression
Md
kNm/m
1,03
1,16
1,29
104. m m 4 / m
3,5
3,9
4,2
Design thickness
R e c h n e r i s c h e Blechdicke
Epaisseur de calcul
Yield point
SlU'eckgrenze
Umite i~lastique
We~ht
Gewicht
Poids pcopre
M a x i m u m sheet length
MaxJmale Blechlz~nge
Longueur maximum
M o m e n t o f inertia - wide flange in compression

T r S g h e i t s m o m e n t - breiter Gurt unter Druck
M o m e n t d'inerfie - nervure large en compression
NOTIES
ERLAUTERUNGEN
EXPLICATIONS
Sheet material is structural steel FeE 350G hotdip zinc coated Z275 according to European
Standard EN 10147.
Das Material ist Stahlblech FeE 350G

feuerverzinkt Z275 gem~i(~ Europli~,cher Norm
EN 10147.
The calculations are in accordance with

Eurocode 3 (ENV 1993-1-3) - Design of Steel
Structures, Coldformed thin gauge members and
sheeting. The section properties Md, Rd and the
values in load/span tables are ultimate values
with a partial safety factor I,M= 1,1.
Die Berechnungen wurden gemitt~ Eurocode 3

(ENV 1993-1-3) ausgefQhrt. Die Remessungswerte Mr RdUnd die Werte in den LastStt3tzwe=ten-Tabellen beziehen sich auf den
Grenzzustand der Tragfiihigkeit mit einem
Teilsicherheitsbeiwert von Ym= 1,1.
Le mat~riau de base se compose de tC[e d'acier

galvanis6e ~t chaud FeE 350G, classe ~.e
galvanisation Z275 selon Norme Eurol~enne
E)110147.
Design loads Q are derived from dead load,

snow and wind load multiplied by the load
factors y. Load factors should normally be
chosen according to National Codes. If these are
not available the following recommendations
may be used.
Die Bemessungswerte der Einwirkungen Q sind

die y-fachen Werte der st~lndigen Einwirkungen
der Schnee- und Windlasten. Die Teiisicherheitsbeiwerte der Einwirkungen werden normalerweise den nationalen Norrnen entnommen. Falls
derartige Werte nicht angegeben sind, werden
folgende Werte empfohlen:
Ultimate limit state:

Dead load G
Snow S
Wind W
Example: Designload
y=1,3
y= 1,5
y= 1,5
Q = 1,5.S + 1,3.G
ServiceabilT~y limit state (deflection):

All loads
y=l,0
Example: Design load Q-1,0.S + 1,0.G
If snow and wind act at the same time one of
the loads can be reduced by 50% (~u=0,5).
The design loads must not exceed the maximum
loads in the load/span table.
Standard approval certificate issued by the
National Board of Housing Building and Planning,
Sweden.
Grenzzustand der Tf-agfMligkeit:

Eigengewicht G
y= 1,3
Schneelasten S
y=1,5
Windfasten W
y=1,5
Beispieh Bemessungslast Q = 1,5.S + 1,3.G
Grenzzustand der Gebrauchf~ddgkeit (Durchbiegungen):
F~r alle Lasten
V = 1,0
Beispieh Bemessungslast Q = 1,0.S + 1,0.G
Los calculs ont dt~ effectu~s conform.ament ~l la

norme Eurocode 3 (ENV 1993-1-3). Los
constantes de la section droite Md, Re et les
valeurs indiqul~es darts le tableau char;e/po~de
sont donndes pour un dtat de rdsistance ~ la
rupture par traction avec un coefficier: partTel ce
s~curitd YM= 1,1.
Les charges ex~drieures dimensionelles Q sont
calculdes en multipliant les charges du poids
propre, de la neige et du vent par les fac:eurs ce
charge y. Normalement los facteurs de charge
sont adoptds en conformitd avec les r~rmes
locales. Si celles-ci ne sont pas acces~.bles, :n
pourra utiliser los recommendations sL-va~tes.
Etat de rdsistance & la rupt~Jre par trac'3on:
Poids propre G
y=1,3
Neige S
y=1,5
Vent W
y= 1,5
Exemple: Charge dimensionelle Q = 1,~S - 1,3-G
Etat limite en service (fll~che):
Toutes charges
y= 1,0
Exemple: Charge dimensionelle Q = 1,C.S - 1,3-G
Be; gleichartiger Einwirkung yon Schnee- und

Windlasten darf eine der Lasten auf die H~lfte
reduziert werden (~u=0,5). Die Bemessungswerte der Einwirkungen sollen die maximalen
Lasten tn den Last-St6tzweiten-Tabetlen nicht
6berschreiten.
Si la neige et le vent agissent en m~rr~e :eml;s

on peut diminuer de 50% I'une des ct%rges
(w=O,5). Les charges dimensionelles "e 7,euaer:
pas ~tre supdrieures aux charges max.males ~u
tableau charge/port~e.
Die Zulassung wurde vom Staatlichen

Schwedischen InstJtut fur Bautechn=k
ausgestellt.
Cert~ficat d'homologation Ce]ivr~ par ','$ff!ce

national suddo~s de I'habitat, de la cc~ :~r-.;c*. ~
et de I'amdnagement.
G A 11 8 - 6 3
DECKING
f..sf
DACH
,=
E Steel Stahl A c i q
L 1993
SUPPORT
D'ETANCHEITE
SECTION PROPERTIES 9 QUERSCHNll-I'SWERTE

Nominal thickness
Blechdicke
Epaisseur nominale
Colour side
Farbseite
Face laqu~e
9 C A R A C T E R I S T I Q U E S UTILES
tnom
mm
0,65
0,70
0,75
0,85
1,00
1,20
mm
0,587
0,636
0,685
0,783
0,930
1,126
fry
N/mm =
350
350
350
350
350
350
kN/m ~
0,10
0,11
0,12
0,14
0,16
0,19
Lmax
18,5
18,5
18,5
18,5
18,5
16,5
S u p p o r t reaction - w i d t h of s u p p o r t 1 0 0 mm
Auflagerkr.aft
- Auflagerbreite 1 0 0 m m
R~antmn o'appui - largeur d ' a p p u i 1 0 0 mm
Rd
kN/m
24,53
29,17
34,37
44,69
61,98
88,42
Bending m o m e n t - narrow flange in c o m p r e s s i o n

B i e g e m o m e n t - schmaler Gurt u n t e r D r u c k
M o m e n t de flexion - nervure dtroite en compression
Md
kNm/m
11,58
12,73
13,85
15,82
18,63
23,18
104. m m 4 / m
233
253
272
310
369
447
Md
kNm/m
9,53
10,81
12,12
14,66
18,72
23,01
104. m m 4 / m
227
249
271
311
369
447
Design thickness
Rechnerische Blechdicke
Epaisseur de calcul
E249~
Yield p o i n t
S~ecf(grenze
U m i t e ~,lasldqtJ~
Weight
Gewmht
Poids propre
M a x i m u m s h e e t length
M a x i m a l e BlechlSnge
Longueur maximum
Moment of ~
- n a r r o w flange in c o m p r e s s i o n
Tr~gheitsmoment
schmaler G u r t u n t e r D r u c k
M o m e n t d'inerde - nervure dtroite en compression
riding m o m e n t - wide flange in c o m p r e s s i o n
i e g e m o m e n t - breiter Gurt unter D r u c k
M o m e n t de flexion - nervure larc~e en compression
M o m e n t o f inertia - wide flange in c o m p r e s s i o n
Tr-~gheitsmoment - breiter Gurt u n t e r D r u c k
M o m e n t d'inerde - nervure large en c o m p r e s s i o n
NOTES
ERLAUTERUNGEN
EXPUCATIONS
Sheet material is structural steel FeE 350G hotdip zinc coated Z275 according to European
Standard EN 10147.
Das Material ist Stahlblech FeE 35OG

feuerverzinkt Z275 gem~i& Europlischer Norm
EN 10147.
The calculations are in accordance with

Et=rocode 3 (ENV 1993-1-3) - Design of Steel
Structures, Coldformed thin gauge members and
sheeting. The section properties Md, Rd and the
values in load/span tables are ultimate values
with a partial safety factor YM= 1,1.
Die Berechnungen wurden gema~ Eurocode 3

(ENV 1993-1-3) ausgefGhrt. Die Bemessungswerte Md, RdUnd die Werte in den LastStC~tzwe,-ten-Tabellen beziehen sich auf den
Grenzzustand der Tragf~ihigkeit mit einem
Teilsicherheitsbeiwert von Yrn = 1,1.
Le matdriau de base se compose de t~le r

galvanis~e d chaud FeE 350G, classe de
galvanisation Z275 selon Norme Eutop~enne
EN10147.
Desert loads Q are derived from dead load,

snow and wind load multiplied by the load
factors y. Load factors should normally be
chosen according to National Codes. If these are
not available the following recommendations
may be used.
Die 8emessungswerte der Einwirkungen Q sind

die y-fachen Werte der st~ndigen Einwirkungen
der Schnee- und Windlasten. Die Teilsicherheitsbeiwerte der Einwirkungen werden normalerweise den nationalen Normen enmommen. Falls
derartige Werte nicht angegeben sind, werden
folgende Werte empfohlen:
LlltJmate limit state:

Dead load G
r=1,3
Snow S
y= 1,5
Wind W
y= 1,5
Example: Design load Q = 1,5-S 1,3.G
S e r , u ~ e , l l l ~ limit state (deflection):
All loads
y= 1,0
Example: Design load O= 1,0.S + 1,0.G
If snow and wind act at the same time one of
the loads can be reduced by 50% (~u=0,5).
T~e design loads must not exceed the maximum
loads in the load/span table.
Standard approval certificate issued by the
National Board of Housing Building and Planning,
Sweden.
Grenzzustand der Tragfihigkeit:

Eigengewicht G
y=1,3
Schneelasten S
y=1,5
Windlasten W
y=1,5
Beispiel: Bemessungslast Q = 1,5.S + 1,3.G
Gren~,ustand der Gebrauchfiihigkeit (Dutch.
biegungen):
FOr alle Lasten
y = 1,0
Beispieh 8emessungslast Q = 1,0-S + 1,0-G
Les calculs ont ~td effectuds conform~me~t ,~ la

norme Eurocode 3 (ENV 1993-1-3). Les
constantes de )a section droite M d, Rd et les
valeurs indiqudes dans le tableau cha~ge/r, or:=te
son: donndes pour un dtat de r6sistance ~ la
rupture par traction avec un coeffic:en: partiel C=.
sdcuritd YM = 1,1.
Les charges extdrieures dimens,one!les Q son:
calcul6es en multipliant les charges du pc,ds
propre, de la neige et du vent par les facteurs ca.
charge y. Normalement les fac:eurs de charge
sont adopt~s en conformit6 avec les nct~es
locales. Si celles-ci ne sont pas access.b:es, cn
pourra utiliser [es recommandations suivartes.
Etat de r~sistance i la rupture par 17at-don:
Poids propre G
),=1,3
Neige S
y=1,5
Vent W
F=1,5
Exemple: Charge dimensionelle Q = ",E'S o 1 , 3 ~
Bei gleichartiger Einwirkun 9 yon Schnee- und

Windlasten darf eine der Lasten auf die H~lfte
reduziert werden (V/= 0,5). Die Bemessungswerte der Einwirkungen sollen die maximalen
Lasten in den Last-StQtzweiten-Tabellen nicht
L~berschreiten.
Etat limite en service (fl6che):

Toutes charges
y = 1,0
Exemple: Charge dimens,onelle O = ".C.S - I . . : ' r
Si la neige et mevent agissent en m~me te .m~s
on peut diminuer de 50% rune des char;~-s
(V/a0.5). Les charges dimenslonelles r'e ;,~.u','e" "
pas ~tre superieutes aux charges n'axi-~a =.s :'tableau charge/port(~e.
Die Zulassung wurde vom Staatlichen

Schwedischen Institut for Bautechnik
ausgestellt.
Certificat d'homologatlon d~livr~ pat r o f ' :e

national su~dols de I'habJta:, ~e la ~.or'st~.c, :.~
et de I'amdnagement.
Maintenance
Normally, rain is sufficient to keep sheets clean
of deposits and dirt. However, it is important
to examine sheets every year, to identify any
damage as soon as possible.
CLEANING
Rain is normally sufficient to keep sheet surfaces clean.
The deposits which the rain does not wash away may
be easily cleaned off using a high-pressure hose, or a
brush and water. Extra care must be taken in areas of
rain shadow, in which there is no rain to clean the sheets.
In industrial areas with corrosive air such as smoke
emissions, or in coastal areas etc., a detergent may be
required to get sheets clean. Use a standard dishwashing detergent or industrial cleaning agent. Avoid
over-strong, abrasive or organic detergents, and
use the amount recommended by the manufacturer.
Work from top to bottom and finish by rinsing with
clean water. It is important to wash the sheet entirely
clean from residues.
T O U C H I N G UP
Touching-up should be carried out regularly as damage
occurs. Scratches, cracks and cut edges are areas
to which close attention should be paid. Be careful also
of areas in which mechanical damage may occur,

under roof ladders and so on.
Follow the instructions below for the best results.
REPAINTING
When the sheet surface reaches such an age, or for
other reasons becomes so damaged, that repainting is
considered necessary, a reference square should be set
up. Follow the instructions below for the best possible
adhesion and result.
Easy to Look After

Undercoat and top coat may be applied by brush,
roller or spray. Use brushes with long bristles. When
spraying, bear in mind that spray dust flies a long way
and that surfaces already painted should be protected.
Nor should paint be applied to surfaces heated by the
sun, or at temperatures lower than +5 ~

Suppliers of paint and painting systems may be able
to provide more detailed advice and hints as regards
both maintenance and repainting.
H O W TO DO IT
Touch-up and repainting procedure
1. Clean the sheet surface, preferably with a high-pressure hose.
2. Scrape, rub or sand-blast away all loose organic material.
3. Remove any rust by sand-blasting, machine-grinding or wire brushing
until the surface is clean.
4. Clean with an alkaline degreasing agent.
5. Rinse with water and allow to dry.
6. Paint with a zinc undercoat.
7. Apply one or two layers of top coat depending on base, >50 mm dry.
Suppliers of paint and

painting systems
Becker Industrif~rg AB,

Ma.rsta
Akzo-Nobel AB,
Gamteby
AB Runo Ahlqvist,
Bromma
Dickursby F~rg AB,

Sp&nga
CNP,
Angered
Long-life Structural Steel

Gasell Profil manufactures structural steel
sheets, and we sell chiefly to construction companies. However, we also sell to private house owners. Our ready-painted sheets are suitable for both building from scratch and renovation.
,,.. c,.~,~.---.
Under normal circumstances, Gasell Profil's readypainted structural steel sheets last for many years. They
have a long lifetime, in both technical and aesthetic
terms. When sheets are no longer capable of protecting
the building structures behind them, their technical
lifetime is at an end.
The aesthetic lifetime lasts until the a p p e a r a n c e of
a plate is considered unacceptable.
I N S P E C T I O N - EVERY YEAR
A N EVEN L O N G E R LIFE
There are a n u m b e r of points which should be

reviewed as part of the annual inspection.
The lifetime of structural steel shee~s can be still longer

if they are regularly maintained. The paint on them becomes dull in time, "chalking" occurs and the surface
becomes tarnished and grainy. If steps are not taken,
the paint will eventually crack and loosen, and the sheet
will let in the wind and weather.
1. Check the condition of the surface. If the surface

of the sheet shows dulling, colour change or crack
formation, consider whether washing, touching-up or
repainting should be carried out. The greatest risk is
in areas of rain shadow, since there is no rain to wash
the sheets clean. Carry out special checks on cut
edges and seamed ridges.
2. Rubbish in gutters, gullies and wells increases the
risk of damage and of leakage into the building.
Remove and clean up after rubbish which retains
moisture and other corrosive substances.
3. Accretions of dirt and rubbish on the surface of the
sheet increase the risk of damage, since the surface
will be constantly moist. Remove the rubbish and
clean the surface to let it dry.
4. Damage to the layers of paint increases the risk
of corrosion. Touch up, repaint or consider replacing
damaged parts.
5. Loose attachments, rivet splinters, drill chips or
other metal objects lying directly on the sheet should
be swept away.
6. Faulty or incorrectly-fitted attachments may cause
leakage. Replace faulty attachments, and if threads
have become stripped, change to a larger diameter.
7. Cut edges at overlaps and sheet ends, bandages, upright seams and other seams are expcsed
points at which corrosion may become established if
it is not dealt with in time. Damaged areas must be
cleaned, treated and painted.
8. Draw up an inspection record. Make exact notes
of the condition of the sheet and any measures which
should be taken or have been taken.
Gasell Profiles Ltd
CONTROL OF SUBSTANCES HAZARDOUS TO HEALTH

Coated Profiled Sheets.
COATINGS
This data sheet covers the following coatings applied to steel and aluminium
sheets.
Plastisol, PVF2, Acrylic, Deck Enamel, Silicon Polyester, Galvanised
HAZARDS
1)
Skin laceration and eye injury may occur when:a) cutting the strapping to open up the bundles of material.
b) handling the edges of the product.
2)
Where plain galvanised material having a protective layer of oil is

delivered, contamination may occur where the skin has been lacerated.
3)
Where coated material having a film of wax is delivered, laceration may

occur as a result of slippage of the material during handling.
4)
Cutting at elevated temperatures should be avoided as not only does it

damage the product's durability but fumes are produced.
s)
The coatings listed above are, under normal storage and use, non toxic.
The pigments within the coatings are not hazardous provided the
recommendations for cold cutting are followed.
6)
The coatings listed above are not flammable but may be consumed by
fire. The major products of combustion/decomposition are listed below.
The principal mode of entry into the body of these products of
combustion/decomposition is by inhalation and their inhalation should
be prevented.
PRECAUTIONARY AND PROTECTIVE MEASURES
7)
Protective clothing should be worn to prevent laceration and

contamination of the skin.
8)
When breaking open the strapping on bundles of materials, appropriate

protective clothing and equipment such as hand and eye protection
should be worn.
The Steadings Business Centre Maisemore Gloucestershire GL2 8EY

Tel: 01452 421234 Fax: 01452 421155
email:sales@gasell.co.uk www.gasell.co.uk
Directors: J. Tonleri ~s,c 9 I. Svensson 9 J. E. Forrest MCIM - ,~,~lMgt
Registered in England. Registration N o . 3 1 6 0 7 7 3 A subsidiary of Gosell Profil AB, Sweden.
9)
No profiled sheet is safe to work on until it is permanently fixed and the

thinner lining sheets are not designed to support the weight of a person
at any time.
10)
Depending on site conditions eye protection may be required when

cutting and drilling.
Cutting should be carried out with a power nibbler or manually with a
fine toothed hacksaw.
All burrs, lubricant, dust and any other foreign matter should be
removed from the area of work immediately.
11)
When protective film has been supplied to protect the coating, this film
should immediately after removal be deposited on a site rubbish
receptacle and in such a manner as not to be dislodged during a windy
period.
12)
In the event of fire, appropriate respiratory protective equipment should

be used by the fire fighters.
13)
All profiled material should be handled by experienced personnel having

a knowledge of the current regulations for health and safety on building
sites.
Fixing etc of the products should be carried out in accordance with
current HSE regulations for the roofing and cladding industry.
14)
To ensure the Occupational Exposure limits set out below are not
exceeded when fumes/dust is generated, adequate ventilation should be
provided. Alternatively, where necessary, appropriate respiratory
protective equipment should be provided for use by those at risk from
inhalation of fumes.
Current Occupational
Exposure Limits
..
Type of Limit
8h IWA*
10 Min TWA*
Recommended
Iron Oxide, fume (as Fe)

mg/ms
Recommended
5.00 mg/m 3
Zinc Oxide, fume

mg/m3
Recommended
5.00 mg/m3
10.00
Carbon Monoxide
ppm
Recommended
50 ppm
300
Hydrogen Chloride
ppm
Recommended
5 ppm
Hydrogen Fluoride
Recommended
3 ppm
6 ppm
Chromium (hexavalent)
compounds (as Cr)
Recommended
0.05 mg/m 3
Recommended
0.25 mg/m 3
Acrolein
mg/m3
Phthalic Anhydride
mg/m3
Phenol
10.00 mg/m3
20.00
Aluminium Oxide
mg/m3
Recommended
Recommended
6.00 mg/m 3
10.00
0.80
24.00
19.00 mg/m 3
mg/m3
* TWA Time weighted average for quoted time period.
RELEVANT REFERENCES
15)
Re.qulations
a) The Protection of Eyes Regulations 1974.
38.00
b) BS 2092 - Specification for Industrial Eye Protectors.

c) Current Health & Safety at Work Act.
16)
HSE Guidance Notes
17)
a) MS15: Welding
b) EH18: Toxic Substances; a precautionary policy
c) EH26: Occupational skin diseases; health and safety precautions
d) EH40: Occupational Exposure Limits
e) EH42: Monitory Strategies for toxic substances
f) EH43: Carbon Monoxide
g) EH44: Dust in the work place; general principles of protection.
HSE HEALTH & SAFETY AT WORK BOOKLETS
a) No 1: Lifting & Carrying
b) No 18: Industrial Dermatitis; precautionary methods.
CONCLUSION
As at the date of preparation of this document the foregoing information is
believed to be accurate and is provided in good faith. However no warranty or
representation with respect to such information is intended or given.
Date: 10/08/92
Issue: 1A
GUIDE SPECIFICATION
FOR CLEANING A N D M A I N T E N A N C E
OF PAINTED A L U M I N I U M E X T R U S I O N S
AND C U R T A I N WALL PANELS
Publication No.
AAMA 6 1 0 . 1 - 1 9 7 9
Table of Contents
Page
S c o p e ..........................................................................................
2.
Purpose .......................................................................................
3.
General ........................................................................................
4.
Cleaning P r o c e d u r e s a n d C a r e After Installation ..............................
5.
Cleaning of M e d i u m to Heavy Soil .................................................
6.
S u m m a r y of G e n e r a l C l e a n i n g Tips ...............................................
7.
General I n s p e c t i o n a n d P r e c a u t i o n s ...............................................
8.
R e c o m m e n d a t i o n s for the M a i n t a n e n c e of A l u m i n i u m Gutters ........
This voluntary s p e c i f i c a t i o n w a s d e v e l o p e d by r e p r e s e n t a t i v e m e m b e r s of the Architectural

A l u m i n i u m M a n u f a c t u r e r s A s s o c i a t i o n (AAMA) a n d is p u b l i s h e d as a p u b l i c service by A A M A .
A M M A d i s c l a i m s all liability of a n y king for the use, a p p l i c a t i o n or a d a p t a t i o n of material
p u b l i s h e d in this d o c u m e n t .
AAMA
610.1-1979
V O L U N T A R Y G U I D E S P E C I F I C A T I O N FOR
C L E A N I N G A N D M A I N T E N A N C E OF P A I N T E D
ALUMINIUM EXTRUSIONS AND CURTAIN WALL PANELS
1.
SCOPE
This recommendation covers procedures for cleaning and maintenance of painted aluminium
extrusions and curtain wall panels. The procedures are intended for application with painted,
architectural aluminium extrusions such as w i n d o w frames, door frames, railings and trim as
well as curtain wall panel, column covers, spandrels, mullions, Iouvres, vertical trim, etc.
2.
PURPOSE
These recommendations are intended to assist architects, contractors, owners, building

managers, who are c o n c e r n e d with the care and maintenance of painted, architectural
aluminium. The information contains suggested m e t h o d s as an aid in establishing safe, sound
cleaning and maintenance procedures.
3.
GENERAL
3.1 Organic coatings on aluminium do not normally s h o w an appreciable a m o u n t of dirt

collection. In m a n y atmospheres dirt or soil would not indicate a detrimental risk to the
coating, but cleaning and surface care may be desirable in areas where heavy industrial
deposits have dulled the surface, where materials from construction processes have
soiled the surface or where cleaner has r u n - d o w n from other surfaces should be removed.
Local atmospheric conditions as well as building location within a geographical area quite
naturally have an effect on cleanliness. Very often, rainfall may be sufficient to keep
exterior surfaces appearing clean and bright. These factors coupled with owner attitude
regarding surface a p p e a r a n c e probably would determine cleaning schedules. Areas that
are in direct sight at lower levels would more likely be cleaned. Less obvious areas would
be less frequently cleaned or in s o m e instances, hardly at all. Cleaning of painted
aluminium may be scheduled with other cleaning. For example, glass and painted
aluminium c o m p o n e n t s can be cleaned at the s a m e time.
3.2 Cleaning will be m o r e often required in areas of low rainfall or in heavily industrialised
areas. Foggy coastal regions with frequent cycles of condensation and drying may tend to
give a build-up of atmospheric salts and dirt. In any climate, sheltered areas such as
overhangs, may b e c o m e soiled because of lack of rain washing. Thorough rinsing is
especially important after cleaning of these sheltered areas.
3.3 If automatic wall cleaning equipment is to be used on a building, a test should be m a d e
early in equipment design to insure that the cleaning solutions, brushes, as well as the
frequency of cleaning should be taken into consideration to insure that there is not
detrimental effect on the coating.
2
4.
CLEANING PROCEDURES & CARE AFTER INSTALLATION
Construction soils, including concrete or mortar, etc, should be removed as soon as possible.
The exact procedure for cleaning will vary depending on the nature and degree of soil. Try to
restrict cleaning to mild weather. Cleaning should be done on the shaded side of the building
or ideally on a mild, cloudy day. Method of cleaning, type of cleaner, etc., of one c o m p o n e n t
of the building must be used with consideration for other c o m p o n e n t s such as glass, sealants,
painted surfaces, etc.
4.1 Rem0vsI of Light Surface S0il
Removal of light surface soil may be accomplished in several ways. Some testing is
r e c o m m e n d e d to determine the degree of cleaning actually necessary to accomplish the
task. Ideally, an initial step of forceful water rinse from the top clown is r e c o m m e n d e d
prior to any cleaner application. Significant benefit is gained with s o m e type of surface
agitation. Low water volume with moderate pressure is much better than considerable
volume with little pressure. Physical rubbing of the surface with soft, wet brushes,
sponges or cloth is also helpful.
4.1.1
The simplest procedure would be to apply the water rinse with moderate pressure to
dislodge the soil. If this does not remove the soil, then a concurrent water spray with
brushing or sponging should be tested. If soil is still adhering after drying, then a
mild detergent will be necessary.
4.1.2
When a mild detergent or mild soap is necessary for removal of soil, it should be
used with brushing or sponging. The washing should be done with uniform
pressure, cleaning first with a horizontal motion and then with a vertical motion.
Apply cleaner only to an area that can be conveniently cleaned with out changing
position. The surface must be thoroughly rinsed with clean water. It may be
necessary to s p o n g e the surface while rinsing, particularly if cleaner is permitted to
dry on the surface. The rinsed surface is permitted to air dry or is wiped dry with a
chamois, s q u e e g e e or lint free cloth.
4.1.3
Run down of cleaner (from any operation) to the lower portions of the building should
be minimised and these areas should be rinsed as soon as and as long as
necessary to lessen streaking, etc. from unavoidable run down, lower areas should
be kept wet or flooded with water. Do not allow cleaning chemical to collect on
surfaces or to "puddle" on horizontal surfaces, crevices, etc. These should be
flushed with water and dried. Always clean coated surfaces d o w n from top to
bottom and follow with a thorough rinsing with clean water. (With one story or low
elevation buildings, it is r e c o m m e n d e d to clean from bottom up and rinse from top
down).
4.1.4
Mild Detergents - Mild soaps or detergents ruled safe for bare hands should be safe
for coated aluminium. Stronger detergents such as s o m e dishwater detergents
should be carefully spot tested. Some of the latter would necessitate rubber gloves,
long handed brushes etc. With any, the finish should be thoroughly rinsed with clean
water and dried. S o m e mild cleaning solutions, which would comprise of selected
wetting agents in water solutions, are available for automatic building washing
machines. These machines would have built in brush agitation, squeegee,
filtration and recirculation, in some, a fresh water connection may be provided.
"5.
Cleaninq of Medium to Heavy Soil
5.1 Some type of mild solvent such as mineral spirits may be used to remove grease, sealant
or caulking c o m p o u n d s . Stronger solvent or solvent containing cleaners may have a
deleterious or softening effect on paints. To prevent harm to the finish, these types of
solvent or emulsion cleaners should be spot tested and preferably the coating
manufacturers should be consulted. Care should be taken to assure that no marring of
the surface is taking place in this m a n n e r since this could give an undesirable appearance
at certain viewing angles. Cleaners of this type are usually applied with a clean cloth and
removed with a cloth. Remaining residue should be w a s h e d with mild soap and rinsed
with water. Use solvent cleaners sparingly.
5.1.1
It may be possible for solvent s to extract materials from sealants which could stain
the painted surface or could prove harmful to sealants ; therefore, these possible
effects must be considered. Test a small area first..
5.2 If cleaning of a heavy surface soil has been postponed or in the case of an especially
tenacious soil, stubborn stains, etc., a more aggressive cleaner and technique may be
required. Cleaner and technique should be matched to the soil and the painted finish.
Some local manual cleaning may be needed at this point. Always follow the
recommendations of the cleaner manufacturer as to proper cleaner and concentration.
Test clean small area first. Cleaners should not be used indiscriminately. Do not use
excessive, abrasive rubbing as such may alter surface texture or may impart a "shine" to
the surface.
5.2.1
Concrete spillage that has dried on the painted surface may b e c o m e quite stubborn
to remove. Special cleaners and / or vigorous rubbing with non-abrasive brushes or
plastic scrapers may be necessary.
Diluted solutions of Muriatic Acid (under 1 0%) may be effective in removing dried
concrete stains, however, a test area should be tried first and proper handling
precautions must be exercised for safety reasons. Also, effective proprietary
cleaners for concrete and mortar staining are available.
5.3 Never Mix Cleaners - The mixing of cleaners may not only be ineffective, but also very
dangerous. For example, mixing of chlorine containing materials such as bleaches, with
other cleaning c o m p o u n d s containing ammonia, can result in poison gas emission.
5.4 Always rinse after removal of heavy surface soil.
6.
SUMMARY OF GENERAL CLEANING TIPS
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
6.10
6.11
6.12
6.13
Overcleaning or excessive rubbing can do more harm than good.

Strong solvents or strong cleaner concentrations can cause d a m a g e to painted
surfaces.
Avoid abrasive cleaners. Do not use household cleaners that contain abrasives on
painted surfaces.
Abrasive materials such as steel wool, abrasive brushes, etc. can wear and harm
finishes.
Avoid drips and splashes. Remove run d o w n s as quickly as possible.
Avoid temperature extremes. Heat accelerates chemical reactions and may evaporate
water from solution. Extremely low temperature may give poor cleaning effects.
Cleaning under adverse conditions may result in streaking or staining. Ideally, cleaning
should be done in shade at moderate temperatures.
Do not substitute a heavy duty cleaner for a frequently used mild cleaner.
Do not scour painted surfaces.
Never use paint removers, aggressive alkaline, acid or abrasive cleaners. Do not use
trisodium phosphate or highly alkaline or highly acid cleaners. Always dO a test
surface.
Follow manufacturers r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s for mixing and diluting cleaners.
Never mix cleaners. (See 5 . 3 for precautions).
To prevent marring, make sure cleaning sponges, cloths etc, are grit free.
"An once of prevention is worth a pound of cure".
"'7.
GENERAL INSPECTION AND PRECAUTIONS
7.1 Inspection
It is suggested that the building owner provide a qualified inspector who will see that the
desired effect is being obtained with the use of sound procedures. Inspection should
c o m m e n c e early in the cleaning procedure.
7.2 Buildinq Surroundinqs
Consideration must be given to possible effects of run d o w n on shrubbery, personnel,
equipment, etc. located below. These factors may require consideration toward m e t h o d s
of timing.
8.
RECOMMENDATIONS FOR THE M A I N T E N A N C E OF A L U M I N I U M GuI"rERS
Periodic Inspection and Cleaning

The frequency of such cleaning will depend on many factors including :1)
2)
3)
4)
5)
6)
7)
The geographical location of the building

The environment surrounding the building ie marine, industrial, alkaline / acidic etc.
Levels of atmospheric pollution
Prevailing wind
Protection of the building from other buildings
Possibility of air born debris (eg. sand) causing erosive w e a r to the coating
Changing environmental circumstances during the lifespan of the building (eg. rural to
industrial)
The best method of cleaning is by regular washing. Nothing harsher than natural bristle
brushes should be used.
In an industrial environment the frequency of cleaning should be at no more than three monthly
intervals. However, where there is high atmospheric pollution or an extremely hazardous
atmosphere the period between cleaning should be reduced.
Where the atmosphere is d e e m e d as non-hazardous eg. rural or urban, then the period
between cleaning can be extended to a m a x i m u m of 18 months. However, if heavy soiling
occurs more regular cleaning is r e c o m m e n d e d . The internal surface of gutters can often be
classed as heavily soiled and these r e c o m m e n d a t i o n s could therefore apply.
Where ponding occurs, gutters should be flushed out with clean potable (drinking) water ever~
three months to ensure no surface d a m a g e occurs.
Any defects found during maintenance inspections must be remedied as soon after noting as
is possible. Information and instructions on carrying out remedial w o r k s are available on
request.
The above maintenance schedules should be instigated from the date of gutter installation.
NOTE
Gratings or wire balloons are not r e c o m m e n d e d , as they are a potential source of blockage.
Rockwool
FIRESAFE
MATERIAL
SAFETY
Rockwool
1.
DATA
SHEET
- BONDED
INSULATION
PRODUCTS
Roils1 Slabs1 Sections
IDENTIFICATION :
Mineral wool products for Thermal Insulation, Fire Protection and Acoustic purposes, produced by
Rockwool Limited, Pencoed, Bridgend, CF35 6NY.
2.
COMPOSITION :
Insert vitreous silicate mineral wool bonded with a small amount of thermosetting phenolic resin which has
been urea extended. Up to 0.3% of mineral oil. Products for special applications will have up to 0.5 %
silicone oil, or silicone emulsion.
3.
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION :
May cause transient mechanical skin irritation. High dust levels may irritate the throat and eyes. The fibres
from which Rockwool products are made are classified as Irritant (Xi:R38) under the CHIP Regulations
1998.
4.
FIRST AID MEASURES :
Eyes :
Skin :
5.
If irritation occurs, wash eyes with water. If symptoms persist seek medical advice.
If irritation occurs, wash under running water prior the washing with soap and water.
FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES :-
The products are generally non-combustible and do not pose a fire hazard. However, some facings and
packaging materials may burn.
a)
b)
c)
d)
6.
Suitable Extinguishing Media - water, foam, carbon dioxide or dry powder.

Unsuitable Extinguishing Media - None.
Products of combustion - carbon dioxide, carbon monoxide and some trace gases.
Observe normal fire fighting procedures.
ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES :
No special measures required.

7.
HANDLING AND STORAGE :
Avoid unnecessary handling of unwrapped product. Store in a dry place, in original packing if appropriate.
Packaging materials should not be exposed to a heat source.
8.
EXPOSURE CONTROLS AND PERSONAL PROTECTION :-
Maximum Exposure Limit (MEL) 5mg/m =, 8 hour time weighted average gravimetric measure. Ensure
good general ventilation. Local exhaust ventilation may be required if the method of use produces dust
levels in excess of the MEL.
If the MEL is likely to be exceeded, disposable face masks complying
Respiratory protection :
with EN149 FFP1 or FFP2 should be used and are suitable for most
applications.
Not normally required but industrial gloves can be worn.
Hand protection :
When
working with product above head height, eye protection is advised.
Eye p r o t e c t i o n :
No
special
requirement ;loose clothing advised.
Skin p r o t e c t i o n :
2
9.
P H Y S I C A L AND C H E M I C A L P R O P E R T I E S
:-
Appearance - brown vitreous mineral wool supplied in the form of rolls, slabs or sections.
Melting point - above 1000~
Solubility - insoluble in water and generally chemically inert.
10.
S T A B I L I T Y AND R E A C T I V I T Y :
No special physical conditions need to be avoided. No health and safety restrictions regarding
incompatible materials.
11.
T O X I C O L O G I C A L EFFECTS :
Human epidemiological studies show no link between exposure to mineral wool fibres and lung disease or
any other chronic effects. Rockwool fibres are not classified as a carcinogen by the European Commission
Directive 97/69/EC.
12.
ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION :
Stable product with no known adverse environmental effects.

13.
DISPOSAL C O N S I D E R A T I O N S :
No special precautions. Rockwool products are not classified as special waste under the Special Waste
Regulations 1996.
14.
TRANSPORT INFORMATION :
No special precautions.
15.
REGULATORY INFORMATION :
No special labelling required.

Mineral wool products are not classified under CHIP as hazardous, but are listed in the Control of
Substances Hazardous to Health Regulation (COSHH) with a MEL.. For insulation wools the appropriate
limit is 5mg/m = (gravimetric).
16.
OTHER INFORMATION :
Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note EH46 - Man- Made Mineral Fibres.
Eurisol Health Statement.
HSE Guidance Note EH40 : Occupational Exposure Limits.
CHIP Regulations 1998 Approved Supply List.
This information reflects typical values and is not a product specification. No warranty expressed or
implied is hereby made.
This safety data sheet does not constitute an assessment of workplace risk.
Further written information about Rockwool products can be obtained from :
Sales Promotion and Advertising Department,
Rockwool Limited,
Pencoed
Bridgend, CF35 6NY
Telephone
: 01656 862621
(Revised 2 FEBRUARY 1999)
Telefax : 01656 868176
BSk
BSk- British Sisa]kraft
Commissioners Road, Strood, Rochester, Kent ME2. 4ED
Tel: +44 (0) 1634 292700 Fax:+ 44 (0) 1634 291029
PRODUCT
Product
Hazard Classification
Non hazardous
Components
HEALTH
& SAFETY DATA SHEET
Name
Sisalkraft 50
& Approximate
Proportions
Flame retardant Water repellent Kraft paper

100%
9
Health hazard Information
Route
Effect
Loarar
I n ~
Treatment
Not applicable
Similar to other paper products

Woduct=)
If breathing difficulties occur

move victim to fresh air. Consult
doctor if requital
Very unlikely.
Low toxicity
Eye cocttr
NO effect
s ~ Contact
No effect
9 Handling Precautions
No special precautions. Handle as for standard paper-based materials.
Fire h a z a r d s
Unusual haTards
Material is Flame retardent.. Will char at temperatures above 2OOC and may eventually
ignite..
British Sisalkraft Limited

Registered in England No. 457850
Registered Orifice:16 Great Peter Street, London SWIP 2B
British Si~lkraft Limited trades as agent for David S Smith Packa~'~g Limited
Registered in England No..~1594
BSk
BSk-
British Sisalkraft
Commissioners Road, Strood, Rochester, Kent ME2 4.ED

Tel: +44(0) 1634292700 Fax:+ 44 (0) 1634291029
Combustion Products
Carbon dioxide,, water and carbon monoxide may be produced on buming. Smoke (solid
particulates) will also be produced.
Flash Point
Not applicable
Extinguisher type
Water carbon dioxide or foam may be used.
Autoignition Temperature
Paper chars at 200~ and will ignite above this temperature
9 Waste Disposal
May be disposed of by landfill in compliance with Local Authority Regulations and Control of
Pollution Act 1974.
9 Storage
Store rolls on sides or ends. Ensure rolls do not fall over and cause injury.
Emergency Telephone No
Medway (01634) 292700
9 Authorisation
Prepared by-
Signature-
S Waight
~
R~cstnoc H A S A W A
Position- Technical Services
Date-
July 31, 1998
..'BSK/6.-93
British Sisalkraft Limited

Reg/stered Office:16 Great Peter Street, London SW1P2BX
British Si~Ikra~ Limited trades, a~ agent for David S Smith PackagingLimited
C t ) 11~ i ] i i . ~ i t ) l L e l ~ ],(t),] d
,I
i],
,
D
, ~s. ] : ~ -~1 L-~
: ~,
British Sisalkraft
i
!
9i
Strood
Rochester
Kent
IXIE2 4 E D
,< .~_~&.
~ H _ ~.%i
Tel:
+ 44 (0) 6 3 4 2 9 0 5 0 5
F a x : + 4 4 (0) 0 3 4 2 9 1 0 2 9
PACKAGING
PRODUCT
Product
Name
Profoil
Hazard
SAFETY
Health
& Approximate
Proportions
foil: p o l y t h e n e film: p o l y e s t e r
67%
hazard
Inhalation
(particles)
Inhalation
(decomposition
Not a p p l i c a b l e
or
combustion
products)
Ingestion
contact
reinforcing
11%
Treatment
Possible nausea,
d i z z i n e s s or b r e a t h i n g
difficulties
If b r e a t h i n g
d i f f i c u l t i e s occur m o v e
v i c t i m to fresh air.
Consult d o c t o r if
required
Very unlikely.
Biologically inert
Consult d o c t o r
Not a p p l i c a b l e
Skin C o n t a c t
No known h a z a r d at room
temperature. W h e n
b u r n i n g will m e l t and
can adhere to skin
9
Handling
Precautions
No special precautions. If s u r f a c e s b e c o m e
Fire
SHEET
Information
Effect
DATA
FSI 862 V a p o u r b a r r i e r
Route
Eye
&
Classification
Non hazardous
Components
Aluminium
22%
9
HEALTH
Do not remove m e l t e d
m a t e r i a l - f l u s h with cold
water. Cover burns with
sterile d r e s s i n g and
obtain medical advice.
wet then can be slippery..
hazards
Unusual hazards
M a t e r i a l has low flame spread c h a r a c t e r i s t i c s but is combustible.
The m a t e r i a l will melt and flaming molten m a t e r i a l will spread
fire.
C o m b u s t i o n Products
P o i y t h e n e melts at 1 0 5 C - 1 2 5 C . D e c o m p o s e s over 300C to give carbcn
m o n o x i d e and soma aldehydes (acrid sme!l).Burns to give m a i n l y
carbon d i o x i d e and black smoke.
I.~v:.tlqvrt,d in } n,.:[,irkl \ ~ .157,'.:'~0

l.L.,~.41qcr,..d tdlllo.': ]l~ t a-,.*al ['vh,r .':'qlcot. I.ol:dor, %\V 11' 2 B \ .
i:rill:.h Si.alkl,lit l.imltv,.I Ira,.t,.'~, ,'t~.,b.:,..'cd h , D,ivM .%Scmth I'a,:k,12.4iiW l.lmltvd
I~.,.':=i,.tcrcd in l!n~l,md No. 5015"4
@
/ AI //Ll,~ltl
l;q ";7",0 Girt 3
I"( I *;llrl2
Flash Point
Not
applicable
Extinguisher type
Water,
carbon
dioxide,or
foam
may
be used.
Autoignition Te_~erature
Not
applicable
Waste Disposal
"
scrap LDPE is not c l a s s i f i e d as 'notifiable waste' u n d e r the
Disposal of P o i s o n o u s Wastes A c t 1972, and m a y be d i s p o s e d of by
landfill or b y i n c i n e r a t i o n in c o m p l i a n c e with Local A u t h o r i t y
C o n t r o l of P o l l u t i o n A c t 1 9 7 4 . M a t e r i a l is not b i o d e g r a d e a b l e .
Storage
Store rolls on
cause injury.
sides
or ends.
Emergency
Telephone
Medway
(0634)
Authorisation
Prepared
by-
Ensure
do not
fall
over
and
No
290505
Position-
Waight
SignatureDate-
Reference
rolls
I~.SAWA / B S K /
11-93
Lab
Services
Manager
TROCAL
CARE & M A I N T E N A N C E
Access
Trocal waterproofing sheets are not intended to be trafficked surfaces, but will
accommodate reasonable and considerate access - for example for occasional
maintenance footwear should be soft soled with a pattern for grip, ie. everyday shoes or
trainers.
To avoid personal accidents, care should be taken when walking over exposed Trocal
waterproofing sheets, particularly on slopes and in wet conditions with certain footwear,
and when ice or snow is lying on the roof.
When the occasional use of ladders is required from Trocal waterproofing surfaces, a 'load
spreader' or a suitable sized plank of wood should be used to avoid damage to the
waterproofing and/or insulation boards.
Inspections
Sharp or rough edged foreign matter such as screws, metal off-cuts, broken glass etc.,
should be removed form the roof during the annual inspections, which should check on
the state of all edge details, noting particularly disruptions to flashings and pointings.
Vegetation
Sodium Chlorate solution can be used as a weed-killer on ballasted roofs, but the solution
must be rinsed off exposed surfaces of Trocal S as the combined influence of UV light and
the solution may create a detrimental effect. Vegetation is readily removed from
unballasted Trocal S, without any need for weed-killer, because the roots cannot
penetrate the membrane.
.o
R a i n w a t e r Outlets
Rainwater outlets, gullies, spouts and gutters can become blocked, and as with any type
of roof waterproofing, the blockage needs to be removed to ensure roof drainage is able to
perform as designed.
Solar Gain
Exposed surfaces of Trocal roof waterproofing are light grey (Trocal S) and therefore do
not require painting to reduce solar gain.
Painting
The use of paint on Trocal surfaces is not recommended. Spots, drips and spillage of
paint onto Trocal are to be avoided as the solvents in paints may adversely affect the life
expectancy of the sheets, as can oil, pitch, tar, bitumen, solvents and other hydrocarbon
based materials.
Repair
If, in spite of all precautions, damage does occur to Trocal waterproofing, the sheet can be
restored to its original watertight condition simply by welding on a patch of fresh material.
The patch must have rounded comers and be larger than the damaged area by at least 50
mm in each direction. Water that has entered through the damaged area should be
removed - residual dampness will in most instances be able to be 'breathed out' from
under the Trocal waterproofing.
The surfaces to be welded must be clean and dry. Contamination can generally be
removed with warm soapy water, very stubborn soiling can require the sparing use of
Trocal L100 cleaner.
The addition of new or replacement items of roof furniture or roof lights, extractor fans,
etc., will necessitate connection to the existing Trocal waterproofing and should be done
by an HT (UK) Ltd Licensed Contractor in accordance with the Handbook.
E T - C L A D
COSHH ASSESSMENT
Prepared by : R. W h i t e h e a d
- HAZARD
DATA SHEET
Position : Manager
Date 9
27/09/99
TROCAL LIQUID P.V.C
Product Name
Application :- Joint Sealant for Trocal Membrane
v"
v"
Explosive
Flammable
Toxic
Corrosive
Harmful
Irritant
v"
Precautions to be taken :
1 : Keep Mastic container tightly closed while not in use
and store in a well ventilated cool place
2 : Keep away from sources of ignition and
DO N O T S M O K E
3 : Avoid contact with skin and eyes
4 : Avoid inhalation of v a p o u r
5 : Protect against electrostatic discharges
First Aid
Inhalation
Contact with skin
Contact with eyes
Ingestion
Seek fresh air, monitor breathing and seek immediate medical advice
Clean with soap and plenty of water
Rinse opened eye for several minutes under running water and consult doctor
In case of persistant symptoms call a doctor
Harmful Properties
Inhalation of concentrated vapours may cause narcotic effects
Irritating to the skin and mucous membranes
Irritating to eyes
Hazardous Ingredients
Tetrahydrofuran and Cyclohexanone
Manufacturers hazard data sheet checked ?
Yes copy kept at head office
Details of air monitoring / Environmental testing
Not required, due to open air working
Element~Trade
Location
Roof Vents
6 vents in total, one to each bay
Supplier~Contractor
Euro Register
Unit 3
Leagreen Business Park
St Helens
Lancs. WA9 4TR
Tel: 01744 810810
Fax: 01744 810008
Mob: 0411 333588
As details behind

N/A
Drawings~Schedules

None
COSHH Data Sheet
N/A
Recommended spares
None
Element/Trade
Location
Fenestations and Glass Screens
Pavilion - All elevations
Supplier/Contractor
Glass Systems (UK) Ltd
Glass Works
Brightside Lane
Sheffield $9 2SP
Tel: 0114 243 0808
Fax: 0114 242 2106
Please see 'Stand Alone' Operation & Maintenance behind

Broken glass to be removed/replaced by Glass Systems. Refer to above O & M.
Drawings/Schedules/Design
COSHH Data Sheet
Recommended spares
INDEX
1.
JOB DESCRIPTION
1.1
GLASS WALLING TO SIDE ELEVATION
1.2
VERTICAL GLASS WALLING

GLASS ENTRANCE DOORS TO FRONT
ELEVATION
1.3
GLASS DOOR COMPONENT LISTING
2.
MAINTENANCE
Gig,s Systems{UK) brmre;l

lhe G!assWorks
350 B!lgiltslde L,3:!e
Shelfield
S9 2se
United i(ingdom
1el: t 44(0)1142430808
Fax: 4 44 (0) 114 242 2106
E-moil address:
enqui~es@llloss-sysl~s(ulOIld.com
!
i
2.1
GENERAL CLEANING TO GLASS SURFACES
2.2
GENERAL MAINTENANCE TO PAINTED

SURFACES
2.3
GENERAL MAINTENANCE TO DOOR

COMPONENTS
3.
DAMAGE/REPLACEMENTS
3.1
INSPECTION, TEST, MAINTENANCE &

REPLACEMENT
4.
SUPPLIER INFORMATION
5.
DRAWING FILE
Glass Systems (UK) Limited

NEW MILLENNIUM EXPERIENCE
OPERATIONS & MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
SheHiel'J
1. VERTICAL GLASS WALLING INCORPORATING GLASS

ENTRANCE DOORS
PRODUCT IDENTITY: SYSTEMWALL 2000 GLASS WALLING
SYSTEM
The construction of these high visibility screens and doors is relatively simple
and comprises of the following components.
1.1
GLASS WALLING TO SIDE ELEVATIONS
The framing to both head and vertical abutment of steel column (see section 5.
Drawings P2-P9) is a specialised aluminium extrusion which is part of a suited
system known as systemwall 2000. These are extruded from alloy T6063-T6 to
BS1474.
All glass panels and doors are 12mm Clear Heat Soaked tested toughened to
BS6206 Class A. all glass edges have been machined polished to a high
standard in order accurate butt joints can be formed linking glass panels
together forming larger spans. The joints are formed by leaving a 6mm gap
between glass panels and filling the gap with translucent silicone (arbosil 1081
to BS5889 Type A)
At the base of glass walling are clamp angle brackets (see section 5. Drawing
P9), which are 125mm deep and have been manufacture to meet design and
performance criteria. The clamp brackets are fixed to the concrete floor slabs at
300mm centres, with M12 stainless steel stud anchors, which are secured into
pre-drilled holes using chemical resin (Rawl R-KFZ) supplied by Rawlplug.
The clamp angle a manufactured from mild steel having 8mm wall thickness,
the glass panel are clamp between continues hardwood spacers which allows
compression between steel brackets and glass panels, which once clamp is then
finished by applying a silicone capping, preventing any water or moisture
penetration.
$9 2SP
UnitedI~jdom
Tel:+ 44 IO) I14143 0808
['o~+ 44 (0) II4 242 2106
s
All visible fixing bolts to clamp angles are covered by 'cosmetic' aluminium
extruded channel capping, which is bonded to the base of the clamp bracket
using arbosil 1081 silicone, that firmly fixes the capping but allows removal in
the event of the screen being relocated or replacement panels.
All vertical and head framing have a push in clear wedge gasket either side,
which provides easy de-glazing of glass panel, maintenance free, high standard
of finish, re-useable and waterproof seal.
All framing and clamp bracket are polyestcr powder coated to RAL 9006 30%
gloss.
1.2
VERTICAL GLASS WALLING INCORPORATING GLASS

ENTRANCE DOORS TO FRONT ELEVATION
GI:~s~c,u
(UK) LllmtC J
lhe Gl,~ssWork'.
3~0 Bn.~ht~l~eL~ne
Shefheld
$9 2SP
Uniled Kingdom
lel: .~ 44 (0) 114 243 0808
Fox: f44 (0) 114 242 2106
E-mail oddress:
enq,~ll~~'~ gJo~ s~lems(ul~lld.co m
The construction of the fixed panels is the same as the side screens and the
doors that are positioned between are built up as follows:
-~p
:K.';
The glass toughened door assemblies are Type A configuration having both
full width rails 100mm deep (see section 5. Drawing P3) glass door panel is
manufactured from 12mm Clear Heat Soaked Tested Toughened to BS6206
Class A.
1.3
GLASS DOOR COMPONENTS LISTING
2no 100mm door rails full width extrude from aluminium alloy T6063 T6 to
BS1474 (Dorma)
lno BTS 80 Heavy duty floor springs 53 new tonne rated (Dorma)
lno Deadlock with Eurocylinder incorporating into bottom rail
lno Systemwall 2000 spring loaded top concealed pivot (Glass Systems)
lno 2860mm Long stainless steel handles 32mm dia tube with five point fixing
(Ingersol Rand)
lno 12mm Clear Heat Soaked Tested Toughened door blanks having all edges
polished with five holes drill to accept handle (Glaverbel)
All door rails have been polyester powder coated to RAL 9006 30% Gloss
,.+'-,'~L,~.
"
. ~
"~"
'
,~;',-~,!
X,A,I',V
2.
MAINTENANCE
GENERAL
TO GLASS WALLING
CLEANING
TO GLASS SURFACES
Glass should be cleaned using a recognised proprietary brand of fluid and a

clean dry cloth. Using water with a soap solution is not recommended as
usually there is excessive run off onto carpet and smearing is to be expected.
Care should be taken not to use too much rubbing action at the silicone joints.
It is recommended that Glass Systems UK Ltd specially formulated glass
cleaner be used (Available in lltr spray bottles)
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
TO PAINTED SURFACES
The basic process consists of regular washing with water, no other agents being
needed to remove deposits; mild detergents may be added to the initial wash
then removed by a final application of clean water avoiding excessive amounts.
(See frequency of cleaning chart)
In exceptional circumstances such as scuff marks or stubborn grease marks, a
light cream cleaner can be used followed by a normal wash & rinse.
After washing, dry and polish with a soft duster or chamois leather.
GENERAL
MAINTENANCE
TO DOOR COMPONENT
Generally maintenance should be done every 6 months.

All fixing screws should be checked to ensure all screws have not become
loose, and if required to be re-torqued. The covers to door rails will need to be
removed to access the fixing screws, it is recommended that Glass Systems
(UK) Limited carry out these inspections or trained maintenance operatives.
TORQUE
SE'Iq'INGS
Screws M6: 10NM (4mm Allen key size)

Locks to bottom door rails should be lubricated during every inspection.
Check that the floor spring closers are closing at the required closing speed.
Glc~sS'isrems(UK) L,m,led
lh~ Gl~ssWorks
350 Br,ghtsidetc'~e
Sheflmld
$9 2SP
United Kingdom
lel: - 44 (0) I 14 243 0808
Fox: -t 44 (0) l l4 242 2106
[-nmil oddm'~:
en(~ims@oloss-sT,lems(uk)lld.com
5Ilk
_-
It is very important never to force the doors closed. The doors should always
be left to close under the control of the floor spring.
Closing the doors using force may result in damage to the hydraulic seals
within the floor spring unit, which is not repairable.
If the closing speed needs adjusting then contact Glass Systems (UK) Limited.
The special design spring loaded deflection concealed top pivots (Systemwall
2000 by Glass Systems (UK) Limited) having been design for maintenance
free and anti noise operation.
Dorma BTS 80 floor springs are maintenance free.
The door handles only need a wipe down using a mild soap and water solution
to remove grease marks, avoid using abrasive scourers or cream, as this will
scratch the surface.
).~.:.::,, " '..'<~ ,i
,','.: ~
(,."::'r ;~.:~:~",!l<"l.~
2~.2o 84
Ok:s,,S',,~I~m
~,(U~) L.n:te:!
lhe GI~issWofk~
350 dri~ht~,I~eLane
Sheffleld
59 2SP
United KingCiom
lel: t- 44 (0) I 14 243 0808
Fax: t- 44 (0) 114 242 2106
E-moil address:
enq~Jes~oss-s'ys~s(uk)~.com
-~m
FREQUENCY OF CLEANING
9
THE TABLE BELOW GIVES AN INDICATION OF

CURRENT PRACTICE AND RECOMMENDATIONS
FREQUENCY DEPENDS GENERALLY ON THE
CONVENIENCIES & STANDARD OF CLEANLINESS OF
THE OWNER/OCCUPIER
Ground floor
Facing street
lhe Gl~ssWorks
B,ighrs=deLane
Sheffield
350
$925P
Umled l(ingdom
lel: ~- 44 (0) 114 243 0808
T A B L E 1-Recommended Frequency of cleaning per year.
Location
Glo~sSystems(UK) t,m,te~
Fox: H 44 (0) 114 242 2106

E-moiloddress:
enquires~--~gtass-sy~tems(uk)~.mm
other
areas
" ."i
London postal area &

Smoky industrial areas
Of large cities
16
Semi-industrial cities
12
Non-industrial cities
Actual frequencies for cleaning per year
Building Type
Offices & public area
',' : ,l,,
;. V.:):,
Maximum
24
Average
12
Banks
24
Shops
52-260
Minimum
University Buildings
Halls of Residence
Schools & colleges
Hospitals
: r
,.:,:: ;~:y., ~.~ .;,r:r,, 'i,.: ~O~2L/~
Building Type
Maximum
Factories - Light
- Heavy
12
-
Housing
24
Average
12
6
12
hk
_ . m
Minimum
OI.IsSSystems(UK) Lmnte:l
Tim GIossWorks
350 BIi,']hls!~e!o;m
Sheffield
$9 2SP
Uniled Kingdom
]el -.- 44 (0) I 14 243 0808
fox: +44 (0) 114 242 2106
E-nmil oddmss:
enclu~m@ 91oss-s,f..Ims(uk)l~l.r nl
%,. . . . . . . . ;?-~'i~ ~:~, ~t':. :~, -
i"~,',~" ,: ~',~: ~ I ~',.: .~
'.c:" r:", ;:,ii ',',;!'- 'i~ 7~2~;'?
3.
DAMAGE/REPLACEMENTS
Should the paintwork be scratched for whatever reason then a special touch up
paint can be used for minor repairs, a tin of which has been provided, further
supplies may be ordered from Glass Systems (UK) Limited.
In the unlikely event of glass breakage then it is recommended that the
replacement be carried out by Glass Systems (UK) Limited who carried out the
installation by a general maintenance contractor.
Should further information or assistance be required the contact:
Alan Wallis
Declan Healy
3.1
Managing Director
Estimator
INSPECTION, TEST, MAINTENANCE AND R E P L A C E M E N T S
Glass Systems (UK) Limited products have been manufactured to give long
and trouble-free service. Regular inspection of the door closer system and its
accessories by a competent specialist organisation ensure that any necessary
adjustments are made, and that you get the very best from our products.
The scope and frequency of inspection will depend on the type, frequency of
use, and operating conditions of the door closer systems involved. Under
conditions of normal usage however, Glass Systems (UK) Limited considers
that at least an a n n u a l inspection, test and maintenance schedule should be
carried out as follows:
Inspection of safety relevant components of the door closer system and its
accessories to determine continued security of fixings, and the extent of any
wear which may have taken place;
9
Checking of the closing speed and any other hydraulic functions, and
adjusting the setting if required;
Lubrication of relevant moving parts;
Checking for ease of door operation;
Checking of special accessories particularly hold-open devices whcther or

not electro-mechanical in operation;
Replacement of parts as necessary using only parts~components

manufactured or approved by Glass Systems (UK) Limited.
Gh~ Su
(tJK) Ullllde~
lhe GlossWorks
~0 I~rl~!ilsido L(:r;e
Sheffield
$9 2SP
Unitedl(ingdom
lel: -~ 44 (0) 114 243 0808
Fax: - 44 (0) 114 242 2106
E-moil oddress:
en~i~es@gJoss-sygem.~uk)hd.com
During maintenance work specialist organisations should ensure that only saf~
and suitable cleaning agents are used which contains no corrosive or damaging
constitutes likely to damage components of the door closer system. In order to
maintain the appearance of high quality finishes, Glass Systems suggests that
they are wiped clean of dust and dirt as necessary with a soft cloth. Do not use
abrasive cleaners or metal polishes.
If a door closer system shows signs of malfunction a competent specialist
organisation should be called in to perform the necessary checks and
component replacement.
If the closer is not performing as required, contact Glass Systems (UK) Limited
at the following address:

The Glass Works
350 Brightside Lane
Sheffield
$9 2SP
TEL: 0114 243 0808
FAX: 0114 242 2106
O!n~ C,S'/~t~lil~ (~K) Lmnllted

[he GIo~sWt~rk~
350 Br'.ghls,deLane
Shell,eld
$9 2SP
United Kingdom
lel -t 44 (0) 114 243 OB08
Fox: +44 (0) I14 242 2106
E-nmil address:
~u.es@g~-sr~ms(u~.com
% t~
, . ~r~'~:~ / :
~.J.'.~ ~ "~ ~ % ' t
SUPPLIERS INFORMATION
Dorma Door Controls Ltd

Dorma Trading Park
Staffa Road
London
El0 7QX
TEL: 0181 558 8411
FAX: 0181 558 6122
61o~,sS~Slell!S (UK) Ll1111tt2(!

1he 6~n~sWorks
3b0 8:l,jl',Isldetc~i~
Sl@leld
S92SP
united Kingdom
]el: -i 44 (0) 114 243 0808
fox: +44 (0) 114 242 2106
[-n~oil oddress:
enquifes,@gloss.systems(u~hd.com
Glaverbel (UK) Ltd

Chestnut Fields
Regents Place
Rugby
Warwickshire
CV21 2XH
TEL: 01788 535 353
FAX: 01788 560 853

The Glass Works
350 Brightside Lane
Sheffield
$9 2SP
TEL: 0114 243 0808
FAX: 0114 242 2106
~i? ?" ~i~: ; : : ::~
..... /,.-,-.
. - . ~
~..-..,r--
- 9T~--.-,,- "
$,,,,,~,I---.. .....
I...~.~ . I - -
,w-..t
ELEVATION VIEW SHOWING
_ _
I,...I
.;
i.-.Q--
GLASS WALL CONSTRUCTION

q
j~
I?
SIZE TO BE CHECK ON SITE
F/E:E:
\,
SECTIONAL VIEW SHOWING
GLASS WALL CONSTRUCT
DETAIL
.-.:.
,..~
>
:.:--:
9
E
,~
\
\,
.~E
E P a oE
\ "\
"
~
:_:L- .L:::_."L ' _ _

_.,~
,(9
2~:
C/_
u-i
OzZC~
.j
---
.R=_L__ Z. Z . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
~L._._~.._
-'~
..................
i-
~\
......
--..._
_J
~zu <
/'
S,ZE TO BE CHECK ON SITE
v1 l.,a> v~ -
~"'g"G"E~ L-"
-c
14j
-4
ALL FRAMING TO BE POWDER COATED RAL9O06 30% GLOSS
,r/
L.j
rag g U i L T
I SCALE
, N/S
AUTHORIZED BY: DRAWING NUI,ABER: I PROJECT:

AJ.
..2,1oo.io.o.i.2
' .,L.[..,o.
DRAWN BY:
ISSUED BY:
"
PJW
PJW
9 SECT!ONAL VIEW
oo.E
i MATERIAL:
...........
I ~)ALL
i
RIGHTS RESEJRVED
!DATE:
.............
1.17Zo8/98
REVISION:
.......
D .............
i
t
II
Ill
>
0
I
(._)
(Z?
~. Z.:
__Z /
2
~;-.J
o o
E,~
o 0
oo
.........
Z ~ _ - /-~__Z._V
/~_T~-~__-
i":
x08 IN3~JD 09S18 ~oJ "IlVlJQ

1170 I N 3 ,800],:1 JO ,~]IA NOIID3S S$O~JO ?~OHS /'~/
X08 1N31'43D 9NI8dS HO0"]:I O8S18 SMOH$
u~uuoz O[ LHOI]H ]ONY~Iu
800(] ]SY]~3NI "1JIM
ONladS ~lO0]J OgSll] OL 3]QmdS IOAI,t Q ] ( J N ] I X ] (3)
1"18P~35S~ JO d O 1 0 N V
n01108 Hs
01 S'IIV~ YP~IO~ w w O 0 l SMOHS "IIYJ.]O (0)
NOILD]'IJ]O uuu~IK HOI M O 7 7 V "I7LM lOAld (]](]N]IX] Jill
31V7d ~ ] A O D NI dVN~ a N Y IOAld (]3aN31X3 S ~ O H S (3)
k 18~1355V ~ O O O
(]]N3HOnOL MOJ l.OAld d01 S3SF~OH HDIH/,~ Hid3(] tuuuS$.
71,1710 ~OV3H 73NNVHD v~JOlM 000~ 7]Vh~43LSAS 181
wuuot ~ x mu(;,['~; ~NY]8 I~JOddflS 1Ills ONIISIX]
S3t0N
....................................
I,i
Si~.::/2"_
2_
" ...... ~0~ ....
-.)
~.__.
V-',
.~J
-4
h~
. . . . . . . . .
~'- 7
.~z_7 7
J
-. . . . .
,,\
--
i
i
i~
w
.>
!I
I
L__ t
L~_'_
_._[
~~
.....
i/
I___!
......
.........
// //~
~C-_Z-Z
ZZ-
F',~
_x_-7
"
x 210n~m
2OOO MICRA CHANNEL HEAD DETAIL
~cOO
I'1
<
3>
I'1
~0
4Smm DEPTH WHICH HOUSES TOP PIVOT FOR TOUGHENED

R ASSEMBLY
) SHOWS EXTENDED PIVOT AND SNAP IN COVER PLATE
TIlE EXTENDED PIVOT WILL ALLOW FOR 25ram DEFLECTION
(D) DETAIL SHOWS IOOmm DORWA RAILS TO BOTH BOTTOM
AND TOP OF ASSEMBLY
(E) EXTFNDED PIVOT SPINDLE TO BTSB0 FLOOR SPRING
WILL INCREASE DOOR CLEARANCE NEIGt41 TO 2Omrn
/~/ SHOWS BTS80 FLOOR SPRING CEMENT BOX
S H O W CROSS SECTION VIEW OF FLOOR CUT OUT
DETAIL FOR BTSBO CEMENT BOX
SYSIEMWALL
NOTES
l;I EXIST'NO STLLL SUPPORT BEAM 5 3 5 m m
7--7 - 7
; '_TL ._J
:-7..7~_
r~
o o
,'.t o
~.,~
Do
.,'7__ 7 " ; . . . . . ;
--.....
PLAN
] 47
4-"
!,:7
9 ,::T
VIEW
! 47
",47
i,47
D O O R FOLD B A C K
FTO
BE ADVISED
ANGLE
~/
/\
Z_
"\ /
J
J
/__ J
,~-+-
/'
NOTES:
(A~ SPRING BOX SETTING OUT ARRANGEMENT NOTE
I 1Bmm x 38' m m x 7Dram :S TH r. D.MENS:ONS rOR
.CJ.~T OUTS TO FLOOR SLAB /
1452mm IS THE D,MENSICN :
TC THE BACK EDGE OF CUT OUT
(B) SHOWS GLAZING LINE BASE ON 45ram FROM OUTS,r,F
EDGE OF VERTICAL STEEL COLUMNS T~ CENTER ~INE 0 r
GLASS PANELS
SPECIAL NOTES:
. GLASS DOORS TO BE MOUNTED ON HOLD 0PEN DOOR
SPRINGS AND RESIRICTED 10 OPEN OUEWAHD. IT I~
RECOMMENDED THAT VISIBILITY STRIPS ARE A~PLiED TO
VERTICAL EXPOSED EDGES.
6ram WIDE SILICONE JOINTS

,,--FORMED USING ARBOSIL'081 TO
// BSSB89 "YPE A
/-
,/
SEE DRAWING
7821/DOM/GSbK/PS
FOR ABUTMENT DETAIL
!
il
!
i
t----~-'~' D[TA;. cOR WALL

/i~--I,-I,~[ ? A BUTMEN T FRAME
, 9 .-,E:
i l ./ .J
9 452
/
-,..
-~--~
--a'.
:~ i l h / I
i l
+ ......
-:47_
1147
........
"i47_
. . . . . .
__1..'+..7.
CRSSS
9 ~7
SECT!DN
1.4_7___
1,47
.__L
1AZ . . . .
~:APs SUBJECT TO
- ~ P P R O V A L
i+
.'~q
.:
VIE~
ILT
;
IAU'HORIZED BY: DRAWING
SCALE
,,,'~,-%,~~ . ~ , ~,
N/S
; AJW
DRAWNpjw BY:
NUMBER:! PROJECT:
,,~,,~O,]O~-I.SSU#j%B~:I
MILLE NNIL;M DOk4E

SPRING BOX SETTING OUT T~PICAL CORE
: ~ATERIAL:
~kl[NkCmS JJl[ m m~41(l*S
: ~ ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

I
[I ~ I O N : - -
;2/~o/98
I
..........
_,'
,,,-; .......
PLAN VIEW
1.4381 , 1.438t , !.438,1, .438

/\
/_
ico
~ T O
O ~
DOOR FOLD BACK ANGLE

BE ADVISED
NOTES:
(A) SPRING BOX SETTING OUT ARRANGEMENT NOTE
l l 8 m m x 381ram x 7Dram IS IHE DIMENSIONS FOR
CUT OUTS TO FLOOR SLAB /
1413mm IS THE DIMENSION
TO THE BACK EDGE OF CUT OUT
) SHOWS GLAZING LIN~BASE ON 4Smm FROM OUTSIDE
GE OF VERTICAL STEEL COLUMNS TO CENTER LINE OF
GLASS PANELS
SPECIAL NOTES:
GLASS DOORS TOBE MOUNTED ON HOLD OPEN DOOR
SPRINGS AND RESTRICED TO OPEN OUTWARD. IT IS
RECOMMENDED THAT VISIBIUTY STRIPS ARE APPL;ED TO
VERTICAL EXPOSED EDGES.
SEE DRAWING
7821/DOM/GSUK/PS
fOR ABUTMENT DETAIL
CORPORATE
HOSPITALITY
J
~
DETAIL FOR WALL

' ABUTMENT FRAME
VIEW
.4~3 !
1,438
.~
1,438 z 1,438,~ ~,438
~i,iI,, ~,Y?',u'~~
ER
--4] IIII I,.__L~PPROVAL
~ IJJ!] ~
.:.~z:4.:..;.;a.-~;-~.+
::LbT~&
ia.S /'~U IL.T
~J
DRAWING NUMBER: PROJECT:

SCALE AUTHORS
I EDAJwBY: 7021/DOM/GSUK/P$
IISSUED By:
I MILLENNIUM DOME
DRAWNBY:
N/S
PJW
PJW
SPRING BOX SETTING OUT TYPICAL CORE
MATERIAL:
(~) ALL
RIGHTS
RESERVED
DATE:
l R%VISION:
i
12/}0/9B
PLAN
--"1
VIEW
7-]
L-,-I
\
~3
"
"'
9r'
T '
-,,
. . .2. < , ~'
'
iI / . ' ~ 7 ,
~I Z ' ) 7
'\
\
\
: ..... . :__.#
9I
,[:
._ ",,-
NOTES
(A) ELEVATION VIEW OF GLASS WALLS
TO TYPICAL CORES
(B) SHOWS GLAZING LINE BASE ON 3 5 m r n i
--e
ALL SILICONE
/liiil
BUTT .CIN]'S TO BE 6ram WIDE
E HOSPITALIT~
FROM OUTSIDE EGDE OF VERTICAL STEEL
COLUMNS TO CENTRE LINE OF GLASS

PANELS....
tC/
-~-
~~:i
S SECT!ON
SEE DETAIL TWO
\,
,/
/
WALL ABUTMENT DETAIL . ~ 1 ~ 1 " T ' I
vIEw
:,/ . . . . .
'\ DETAIL 1
t~----/--,IJ
/
/
..
. . . . ~.
'~' .~ I
S/
/
_.~
SEE DETAIL ONE
;~ ~.
-,'~
:37
#-
~~
~-
t4
,,
1,4371
,.f
-,r
' I '
: 1:37
j-
-~ --:
I:
"
i"
'
,. -,=:~-
-J II I'
"~
2:1:%
4Y#s sM%, ~E,
i I _..._~__ L:
.... ' ....
.,i. . . . .
j- ........
ALL FRAMING TO BE RAL9006 30% GLOSS
FLOOR ABUTMENT
DETAIL
,r/
A.~
s c A LE
./s
I AUTHORISED BY: DRAWING NUMBER:
AJW
I DRAWNBY:
PJW
,,=,IDCMIGSUK/P$
ISSUED BY:
I
PJW
PROJECT:
I MILLENNIUM DOME
: PLAN / CROSS SECTION VIEW O!r (;LASS WALLS
gOILT
MATERIAL:
(.~ ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

IDATE:
::
~2/~o/9B
'REVISION:
t.
NOT
.......
//
~ ~ i
/
i
~.//
//
//
//
EXCEED S.F.L
TO
//
//
/~
I"
I
"--- PACKING SHIMS WHERE REQUIRED AND SUITABLE GROUTED COMPOUND APPLIED ,N VO.DS
-/
,._.__
i
F~4
"--0
7I
I
"y/
//
//
//
//
//
I
H
//
//
//
//
//
NOTE:
FLOOR SPRING BOXES ARE TO BE CONSTRUCTED FROV lOmrn
SHEET MILD STEEL AND FIN'SHZD IN RED OXIDE PRIMER
, ,~ F]-~,i
~,r,
371
#,
i
t
I
i
i
-K
SCALE
N/S
AUTHORISED BY: DRAWING

AJw
DRAWN BY:
PJW
PJW
PROJEC1:
NUMI3ER:
7BzV~176
/issue
D By:
MILLENNIUM DOME
! FLOOR SPRING VIEWS
~(~ ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
~,ATER,AL:
,,l ,ele
t m
~e ~ T '
II
TD
ATE: 1/07/98
iREVSON:
A
~-)--ALLRIGHT-S RESERVED ....

"
SCA LE
.
)RAWING
-~
DAT-~ -[2Zl~_~-~
!
---.
:.--
--
J I"I' D;"~' ~~ AR[I ~ IIW"I=[ ' ~ ]
..........
-- - ~ N~_" . .A. . . ............

1- ~'C) ~Ev_,s~
..........
NUMBER: 782~\DOI~\OSUK\P9 I DEIAIL OF
:.. -i ~
AI ~
R~ E D ~ Y I I A J I ~ ;
~, ........
_ ~.t~o~_ ~ c o.s o ,,sstLu.,ct,]MILLENNIUM EXPIENCE
125ram
x75mm
ANGLE CLAMP
BRACKET
l'~:s B g l L T
S~STtW~V~k
Oee
.l.ll~ l ( f
12mm
9 p ~ T
LrUll(1)
CLEAR HEAT SOAKED TOUGHENED
'0
SILICONE
--~---
HARDWOOD
L~
,r'L.
/_
NUT TYPE & MATERIAL

/ FINISH TO BE
../~ APPROVED
[
i'Y
""
' ~kl
i )0
, ~ ~ ~ I
q~
.......
14x20 SLOTTED HOLE

TO
~ u,
i ' :'-~
....
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . .
"q~.
2 OVING
SLOT
..j,,7~TSx8 RSA
.
L-.3
z3
FULL
---
z3
<7
<7
WIDTH %7
PACK~IG AS NECESSARY
~7
r....
.-,k
IIII.
i,
, ~-'.Z ,L
' TN~L
TVpicA L
Tr-"
E~R
ARF~ANGEMENT
SUPP,~RT
E!NS
/
I
__AL_
.L.
li>
4S DEG...~,RNER
CSNSTRUE-;-IYX
/
/
lq& I~91uT
SCALE
1:2
AUTHORISED BY: DRAWING NUM~ER:i PROJECT:
AJW
DRAWN
PJW BY:
7821/O~
I: ISSUED
PJW BY:
' MATERIAL:
MILLENNIUM DOME
- ~ L. j O',_NTCONSTRUCT'ON DETAIL/TYPICAL CORE [
i ~ ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
i~TE: ~S/OS/gB
i~EV'S'~
Element~Trade
Location
Dry Lining & MF Ceilings
Pavilion - Core block
Supplier~Contractor
& G Interiors Ltd
468 High Road
Leyton
London E l 0 6QA
Tel: 020 8588 5643
None

Nothing significant
Drawings/Schedules
None
The British Gypsum White Book
COSHH Data Sheet
None
Recommended spares
None
None
9.
. "
. . . .
~.:.
..+.,-,
'
..'."
"
.~.
" ~...,'t.:
"'~
.~3
9 ~.~"
f;..
Y.
:'~
+ ',~,,~,
'
'~. i" :,")~ " ~
C[/SIB
Section
"~'-+~-"' \" '~. ': :~ " " '"' . . . . . ~~+"~"%
Rr7 [ (Ka)
I
c 10
S e p t e m b e r [ 993
M / F SUSPENDED
CEILING SYSTEM
Technical
in.formation
IDENTIFICATION
Introduction
The G y p r o c M/F S u s p e n d e d Ceiling System is a m e t h o d
of screw-fixing one or two layers of G y p r o c
p l a s t e r b o a r d or Glasroc Multi-Board to the u n d e r s i d e of
a metal suspension grid to p r o v i d e a smooth, joinfless
ceiling. The subsequent lining can r e c e i v e most forms
of direct decoration. W h e n using t a p e r e d e d g e
p l a s t e r b o a r d a smooth surface is o b t a i n e d with the
joints taped and filled. Light fittings, a c c e s s p a n e l s and
ventilation openings can b e a c c o m m o d a t e d .
The system is suitable for use w h e r e s u s p e n d e d
ceilings are required without visible joints or e x p o s e d
supporung members, for example, in a r e a s w h e r e a
smooth ceiling is r e q u i r e d for r e a s o n s of hygiene; to
p r o v i d e sound attenuation fl'om r o o m to room; to
contribute to sound insulation of floors and roofs.
IDESCRIPTION
Metal components
See table 1.
Plasterboard
G y p r o c Wallboard, 12.5ram or 15ram thick with t a p e r e d
e d g e s for jomting and direct decoration.
G y p r o c Duplex Wallboard, 12.5rnm or 15ram thick, with
t a p e r e d e d g e s . This b o a r d has a b a c k i n g of reflective
metallised p o l y e s t e r film which acts as a thermal
insulator when u s e d in conjunction with an a i r s p a c e . It
can also b e u s e d w h e r e a vapour control l a y e r is
required. See Performance, W a t e r v a p o u r resistance.
G y p r o c Fireline Board, I2.5mm and 15ram thick (also
available as G y p r o c Duplex Fireline Board).
Glasroc Multi-Board lOmm and 12.Srnm thick.
The system can b e u s e d to contribute to the fire

resistance of certain floor constructions. It can also
p r o v i d e fire resistant s u s p e n d e d ceil/ngs for protection
to a floor or roof cavity a b o v e the ceiling.
Standards
BS 2989:1982 Specification for continuously hot-dip
zinc coated and iron-zinc alloy c o a t e d steel, etc.
BS 2994:1976 Specification for cold rolled steel
sections.
BS 1230: Part 1:1985 Specification for p l a s t e r b o a r d
excluding materials submitted to s e c o n d a r y operations.
BS 5750: Part 2:1987 Specification for p r o d u c t i o n and
installation. All British G y p s u m p l a s t e r s a n d
p l a s t e r b o a r d s are manufactured u n d e r this quality
assurance system, which is a p p r o v e d b y the BSI.
f
The system satisfies the r e q u i r e m e n t s of the PSA
'Method of Building' Performance Specification and is
incorporated in the P r o g r a m m e for S u s p e n d e d Ceilings
with a structural classification G r a d e 3, H e a v y Duty.
The r e c o m m e n d e d size of p l a s t e r b o a r d for u s e with the

G y p r o c M/F S u s p e n d e d Ceiling System is 900ram w i d e
x 1800mm long. W h e r e longer b o a r d s a r e u s e d they
will n e e d to b e lifted and held against the ceiling g r i d
b y a b o a r d j a c k (Gyproc tool M6).
Weight
Typical weights of MfF s u s p e n d e d ceilings:
One l a y e r of" 12.5mm b o a r d
Two layers of 12.Smm b o a r d
13kg/m z
24kg/m 2
PERFORMANCE
Fire protection
P l a s t e r b o a r d is d e s i g n a t e d a 'material of" limited
combustibility' within the Building Regulations 1991.
The e x p o s e d p l a s t e r b o a r d surfaces a c h i e v e a Class 0
rating as a result of their p e r f o r m a n c e w h e n t e s t e d to
BS 476: Parts 6 and 7. See References for s o u r c e s of
detailed information.
Glasroc Multi-Board LSnon-combustible when tested to
BS 476: Part 4:1970
M/F s u s p e n d e d ceilings can contribute to the fire
resistance of steel beams, steel b e a m s s u p p o r t i n g
c o n c r e t e floors and timber joist floors9 The fire
resistances given m table 2 apply to floor constructions
incorporating imperforate ceilings t e s t e d m a c c o r d a n c e
with BS 476: Part 8:1972 or Part 23: 1987.
,1
~;:.
~:~ .~;~'~,-:i~..:..
~, ~ . . . .
:~
, . . . . ....
. . . ,:.,
. . .. . ... . -~.,
. .
9 . :,,.~,.='!,'
~.@~;,
I Components
Apphcation
Code
Dimensions (mm)
Approximate
requirement
per 100mZof
ceihncj area*
MF5
80 x 26 x 0.55 x 3600
230m
20 x 27 x 30 x
Varies
Fzxed round the p e r i m e t e r to

receive ends of M]:'5 and to
p r o v i d e p e r i m e t e r fixing for
boards
15 x 45 x 0.9 x 3600
80m
Pr umary support
for MF5 sections
25 x 0.55 x 25m (coil)
64m
Used as a h a n g e r f r o m
the structural soffit
GAI
25 x 25 x 0.55"x 2900
64m
Used as a h a n g e r f r o m the
structural s o ~ t
MF9
2.65
184
Used to connect MF5 ceiling

sections to M F ' / p r i m a r y
channels
NEll
64 x 12 5
96
Used to connect lvg:'8strap hangers

or GA1 angles to so~t cleats, arid
for joining ends of Mr'/channel
Mare s u p p o r t i n g section to
" wh=ch boards are fixed
ceihng section
IvE6A
0 5 x 3600
Perimeter channel
MF?
Pnmary support channel
S~ap hanger
or
<
Steel angle
2"
Connecting chp
sections together
Nut and bolt
MFI2
27x37x25xl.6
64
To provide a suspension point

from the structural soffit
251ong
1800
For one layer of board
36long
1800
For second layer of 12 5ram board
421ong
1800
For second layer of 15ram board
12 5 x no 8 panhead
~jack-pomt)
312
Used to connect metal

components together (except
where nuts and bolts are
specdled)
Somt cleat
Gyproc Drywall Screw
MFI3
Pamhead screw
These quanmles are It: gu~,lancc
~."~.'Z,l,i] Hlatltltr
on!",'
and ale base,:1 on
0 tOlt'] .I:!L'~'5 , I ~ ' ] V IL) |)[O.r
l m depth o1 su.~pens~or~
9 ~ ] I P . h ' t l s : o n .~: QIVOI~ a ~ O V ( '
I 9
..........................................................
Y ,
2 Fire r e s i s t a n c e s of c o n c r e t e a n d t i m b e r f l o o r s with G y p r o c M/F s u s p e n d e d
ceilings
Detail
Fire
Cethng constructton
Ftre
resistance
resistance"
(hours)
substantmt,on
One layer of 12 5ram Gyproc Firehne Board
BGSI 1169
One layer of 12 5mm Glasroc Mulu-Board
BGSI 1506
One layer or" 10ram Glasroc Mulu-Board

(MFS's at 400ram centres)
I '.'2
BGSI 1078
Two layers of I25mm Oyproc Wallboard
,/,
BCSI 1oo7
Two layers of 15ram Gyproc Firehne Board

(primary channels at 90Omm centres)
BGSI 1336
Two layers of 10ram Glasroc Multi-Board

(MF5's at 400mm cemres)
BGSI 1632
One layer of 12.5mm Oyproc Fireline Board ***
V,
BGSI 1008
One layer of 12.5ram Glasroc Multi-Board r~

(MF5's at 400mm centres)
BGSI 1353
Two layers of I2.Smm Gyproc Wallboard ***
',.~
BGSI 1009
Two layers of 12.5ram Gyproc Firelme Board * * "
BGSI 1010
Two layers of lOmm Glasroc Multi-Board w
BGS[ I IZB
Two layers of lSmm Gyproc Ftrelme Board ***

(primary channels at 900ram centres)
1'.4
BGS[ 1220
Three layers of lOmm Gl~roc Multi-Board ~d~
BGSI 1592
Concrete floors supported on steel beams **
(MF5's at 600ram centres)
r""--r-~
_~-"'1
" " " " " ~'~" " i
* The fire reststance performances are based on imperforate ceilings uning tapered edge boardn for single layer or the lower layer of double layer
ceilings with all the jomtn taped and failed in the recommended manner. Glass wool insulation may be laid over the back of the ceiling grid and does
not detract from the fire resistance of the floors. The fire reststances are achieved only it"Gyproc components are used and Bntish Gypsum's fixing
recommendations are strictly observed
** Concrete floors as described m BS 476: Parts 8 or 23. The steel beams subjected to test had a section factor (Hp/A) of 205m" calculated on the
basis of three sided profiled exposure. The suspended ceding will alto provide adequate protection to steel beam,, wath a lower secUon factor. For
beams wath a l'ugher section factor, the advace of Brit,r Gypsum should be sought
*** Timber joist floors incorporating any structurally suitable wood board flooring on umber joists not less than 38mm wade at 600ram centres
wTimber joist floors incorporating any structurally suitable wood board flooring on timber joists not less than 47ram wade at 600mm centres
21mm minimum t and g wood board floormg on timber joists not l~.r that-. 44rrma wide at 600mm centres
~j~ 21ram mimmum t and g wood board flooring on timber josts not less than 38ram wide at 600ram centres
Fire resistant ceilings

T h e s y s t e m c a n b e u s e d a s a fire r e s i s t a n t s u s p e n d e d
c e i l i n g to p r o v i d e p r o t e c t i o n to a floor o r r o o f c a v i t y
a b o v e t h e ceiling.
In a d d i t i o n , t h e r e q u i r e m e n t for p r o v i d i n g c a v i t y
b a r r i e r s in the s a m e p l a n e a s fire r e s i s t a n t w a l l s m a y n o t
a p p l y to c a v i t i e s m f l o o r s a n d r o o f s if t h e c e i l i n g
b e n e a t h the floor o r r o o f c a v i t y p r o v i d e s a m i n i m u m of a
full half h o u r fire r e s i s t a n c e (30:30:30 m i n u t e s ) * in
a d d i t i o n to s a t i s f y i n g o t h e r r e q u i r e m e n t s .
*Slabdztymtegnty,nsulatlonasreferredtoinBS476. Part 8 1972
3 Fire resistant suspended
ceilings below floors/roofs
Suspended ceiling construction
Fire
resistance
Fire
resistance
substantiation
Oyproc M/F Suspended Ceihng
% hour
BGA 0022
System incorporating two layers 30 30 30 ~

of 12 5ram Gyproc WaUboard
minutes
(alljoints staggered) with
100ram Oypglas 1000 glass wool
mat laid over the back of the
(assessment)
ceiling grid
Gyproc M/F Suspended Ceding
60 60 30"
System incorporating two layers minutes
of 12 5ram Gyproc Fireline Board
(all joints staggered) with 30ram
rock wool slab (denmty 45kg/m 3)
fitted between MF? channels and
supported on MF5 sections
BGA 0020
(assessment)
.,
'."
".%
Water vapour resistance

It may b e c o n s i d e r e d n e c e s s a r y for the G y p r o c M/F
Suspended Ceiling System to perform the function of a
vapour control layer in o r d e r to help r e d u c e the risk of
interstitial c o n d e n s a t i o n In these situations, G y p r o c
Duplex Wallboard or G y p r o c Duplex Flreline Board can
b e used to provide a vapour control layer. T h e s e
boards provide a water v a p o u r resistance of at least
15MNs/g. When a d o u b l e layer ceiling is b e i n g used,
Gyproc t a p e r e d e d g e Duplex b o a r d should always b e
fixed as the lower layer. See References for s o u r c e s of
detailed information.
The water vapour resistance of Duplex b o a r d s can b e

increased b y the application of two coats of G y p r o c
Drywall Sealer to the entire e x p o s e d surface of the
board after the joint treatment has dried. The s e a l e r is
not suitable for first decoration with vinyl and other low
permeability wall coverings due to the risk of restricted
drying of the adhesive,
Other precautions, such as cavity ventilation, m a y b e
necessary to r e d u c e the risk of interstitial condensation.
The advice of BritishG y p s u m should be sought before

Gyproc M/F suspended ceilings are specified for use in
excessively hurmd conditions.
Thermal properties
Thermal conductivity and thermal resistance

Refer to the relevant p l a s t e r b o a r d section for the
thermal conductivities and resistances of the b o a r d s to
b e used in the system.
Thermal transmittance
Glass or rock wool insulation can b e laid o v e r the
suspension grid to p r o v i d e the r e q u i r e d s t a n d a r d of
thermal insulation. For example, 100rnm thick glass
wool (with a t value of 0.04W/mK) will give a U value of
0.35W/m~K or better, with any roof construction.
Sound insulation
The following information d e s c r i b e s the s o u n d
insulation p e r f o r m a n c e s which can b e a c h i e v e d when
using the G y p r o c M S S u s p e n d e d Ceiling System in
conjunction with timber joist floors, c o n c r e t e floors, and
Gyproc Metal Stud Partitions (as a continuous ceiling
above adjoining rooms).
The results which have b e e n obtained from a s e r i e s of
laboratory tests c o n d u c t e d to BS 2750 a r e tabulated to
show the improvements with single and d o u b l e layer
Gyproc p l a s t e r b o a r d ceilings. In s o m e instances the
ceiling has b e e n b a c k e d b y 80m,,n G y p g l a s 1000 glass
wool mat.
Existing timber joist floors (see table 4)

A number of treatments are given to show how various
d e g r e e s of improvement to an existing b a s i c Umber
joist floor can b e a c h i e v e d These include c a s e s w h e r e
the ceihng is retained and others w h e r e it is r e m o v e d
." . ~',: :;~,r
Exzsting ceihng removed

In this case the final result may be independent of
parameters such as joist width and spacing. Further
improvements can be obtained by increasing the mass
of the floor surface by fixing a layer of plasterboard
(19mm Gyproc Plank) to the underside.
In addition, results are given for a new sound resisting

platform type floor which has a higher p e r f o r m a n c e
than a floor with a directly fixed ceiling of the s a m e
thickness.
Lightweight concrete floors (see table 5)

Results are given for specifications which incorporate
single and double layer 12.5mm G y p r o c W a l l b o a r d
ceilings, with and without an 80mm G y p g l a s 1000 glass
wool mat backing. The difference in p e r f o r m a n c e
b e t w e e n the b a s i c floor and the i m p r o v e d floor can also
b e used to estLrnate the likely p e r f o r m a n c e of M/F
ceilings with other hghtweight c o n c r e t e floors of known
sound insulation.
Flanking transmission
The results w e r e m e a s u r e d in the laboratory in the
a b s e n c e of flanking transmission. It ~s likely that an onsite installation will b e g o v e r n e d b y flanking
transmission. This is parucularly the c a s e w h e r e
support walls are of lightweight m a s o n r y construction*
and a weighted s t a n d a r d i s e d level difference in e x c e s s
of 50riB is r e q u i r e d for the floor. The use of t i m b e r joist
or lightweight c o n c r e t e floors to m e e t Building
Regulation r e q u i r e m e n t s with this t y p e of a s s o c i a t e d
structure may, therefore, r e q u i r e the addition of s o m e
flanking transrmssion control.
The use of timber joist s o u n d resisting floors in t i m b e r
framed support structures (although again g o v e r n e d b y
flanking transmission) g e n e r a l l y results in p e r f o r m a n c e s
in keeping with the r e q u i r e m e n t s of Building
Regulations.
* See BREDigest 334 'Sound m~ulationof separating walls and floors.
Part 2: Floors'
Addition al considerations
The sound unsulation contribution of the existing floor
will play a significant part in the p e r f o r m a n c e of the
u p g r a d e d construction. It is, therefore, important to
optimise this b y sealing all g a p s in and around t h e
existing structure prior to the installation of the n e w
ceiling. Perimeters of floors and ceilings can b e s e a l e d
with Gyproc Sealant. G a p s b e t w e e n floor b o a r d i n g can
b e treated b y fining a layer of h a r d b o a r d on top. It is
equally important to seal the p e r i m e t e r and joints of the
new ceiling Joints a r e s e a l e d b y the normal p a p e r
reinforced jointing treatments. Perimeters can b e
treated in this m a n n e r but, if this is not possible, then
Gyproc Sealant or G y p r o c C o v e / C o r n i c e is
r e c o m m e n d e d Additional impact sound insulation can
b e achieved by using a soft resilient floor c o v e r i n g
W h e r e v e r possible, the ceiling to an existing timber
joist floor should b e retained
Exlstmg ceiling retained

The performances are given for both the basic
flooI and the improved floor The differences m
performance can also be used to esumate the
hkely performance of ME" ceihngs with other
t~mber lo~sl floors of known sound insulation
]4
,..
9 : " . ~.,. .~: . Laboratory sound insulation

Floor
( I O0-31SOHz)
depth
Airborne
Impact
(ram)
R (dB)
L (dB)
,,..,.., $,;,,~!:.
Acoustic lest
report number
226
42
78
BCATR857
Upgrading a simple timber joist floor
B u i c floor:
i
195ram x 45ram limber loists

at 60Omm centres with 18ram
tongued and grooved wood
chipboard flooring and a ceiling
of 12.5mm Gyproc Wallboard
nailed to the joLsts
Sound insulation i m p r o v e m e n t s to b u i c floor:

!
As basic floor but wnth Gyproc

M/F ceiling system hung underneath
to give a 150ram cavity. 80mm
Gypglas 1000 glass wool mat in
the cavity. Ceiling of 12.Smm
Gyproc Wallboard
389
58
66
BGATR857
As basic floor but with Gyproc

to give a 150mm cavity. 80ram
Gypglas 1000 glass wool mat in
the cavity. Ceiling of double
layer l.~'-.SmmGyproc Wallboard
with all joints staggered
402
61
60
BGATR 857
As basic floor but with ceiling

removed. Gypfoc M/F ceiling
system hung underneath to give a
277mm cavity. 8Omm Gypgias
1000 glass wool mat in cavity.
Ceiling of double layer 12.5mm
Gyproc Wallboard with all joints
staggered
320
60
60
BGATR 872
As basic floor" but with ceiling

removed. A layer of l gram
Gyproc Plank Rxed with screws to
underside of chipboard. Gyproc
to give a 2S8mm cavity. 80ram
Gypglas 1000 gla.~ wool mat in
cavity. Ceiling of 12.5ram Gyproc
Wallboard
307
58
62
BGATR871
.As basic floor but with ceding

removed, A layer of 19mm Gyproc
Plank ~ e d w~th s c r e w s to
underside of cl'upboard. Gyproc
M/F ceihng system hung underneath
to g~,e a 258mm cavuy. 80ram
Gypglas 10OO glass wool mat m
cavity. Ceiling of double layer
12 5mm Gyproc Wallboard with all
joml~ staggered
320
63
57
BGATR 8"/1
L.
Continued overleaf
Nole: A.s a remedial Irealment to exlstmg floors, con.structioms Z. 3.4. and 5 meel the acoustic requirements for conversLon work as delalled In the
currenl B m l d m g Regulahons
* The sound insulallon performances are based on amperforate cezllngs using taper t~-.ledge boards ['orsingle layer, or the lower layer of double layer
cedings w,th allthe lolnts laped and fiUed m the r e c o m m e n d e d manner The performances are based on Oyproc components being used and BrltLsh
Oypsum's [ixmg recommendallons being strictlyobserved
4 Sound insulation p e r f o r m a n c e s * of t i m b e r joist floors (continued)

Detail
Lat" :>:atorysound insulation
Construction
Floor
depth
(ram)
( 100-3150Hz)
A~rborne
Impact
R (dB)
L (dB)
376
66
50
Acoustic test
repot1 number
Upgrading a simple limber joas: floor

New sound resisting
timber jon;t platform
floor:
L
195mm x 45ram t,mber joLsts at

600mm cemres overhned with
12ram plywood Floating/]oor
of 18ram tongued and grooved
wood ch2pboard spot bonded to
] 9ram Gyproc Plank on 25ram
Gypglas 6405 Gyproc M/F ceihng
system hung from joists to gwe a
277mm cavity 80ram Gypglas
1000 glass wool mat in cavity
Ceiling of double layer 125ram
Gyproc Wallboard w*th all joints
staggered. (Double layer
12 5mm Gyproc Firehne Board
if a one hour tire reststance ts
requu'ed)
BGATR
835
Note As a remedial treatment to exulting floors, construction 6 meets the acoustic requirements for conversion work as detailed m the current Buflchng
Regulatlons
* The sound insulation performances are based on imperforate ceilings using tapered edge boards for single layer, or the lower layer of double layer
ceilings with all the iomts taped and filled |n the recommended manner The performances are based on Oyproc components being used and British
Gypsum's fixing recommendations being stncfly observed
Suspended ceilings/ Gyproc Metal Stud Partitions
Presentation of data
T h e a i r b o r n e s o u n d insulation of a G y p r o c M e t a l S t u d
Pamtion d i v i d i n g two r o o m s with a c o m m o n G y p r o c M/
F Suspended Ceiling System (600mm plenum depth)
h a s b e e n m e a s u r e d for v a r i o u s p a r t i t i o n / c e i l i n g
c o m b i n a t i o n s . T h e r e s u l t s g w e n in t a b l e 6 i n d i c a t e t h e
levels of overall s o u n d insulation e x p e c t e d for e a c h
partition/ceiling c o m b i n a t i o n . T h e c h o i c e of c e i l i n g m a y
b e d i c t a t e d b y t h e l e v e l of s o u n d i n s u l a t i o n r e q u i r e d
from r o o m s a b o v e ( s e e t a b l e s 4 a n d 5). It is p o s s i b l e
that l o w e r l e v e l s of s o u n d insulation will b e a c h i e v e d if
additional flanking t r a n s m i s s i o n t a k e s p l a c e via
adjoining walls, floors ( s u c h as c o n t i n u o u s t i m b e r
b o a r d i n g ) , or s e r v i c e s .
Both a i r b o r n e a n d i m p a c t l a b o r a t o r y s o u n d i n s u l a t i o n
m e a s u r e m e n t s w e r e m a d e o n e a c h floor to
BS 2 7 5 0 : 1 9 8 0 (Parts 3 a n d 6). In t a b l e s 4 a n d 5 t h e
s i n g l e figure r a t i n g s a r e g i v e n , c a l c u l a t e d in
a c c o r d a n c e with BS 5 8 2 1 : 1 9 8 4 . T h e s e a r e the w e i g h t e d
s o u n d r e d u c t i o n i n d e x (R,) for a i r b o r n e s o u n d
insulation a n d w e i g h t e d n o r m a h s e d i m p a c t s o u n d
p r e s s u r e level ( L , ) for k'npact s o u n d insulation.
T h e tests on c e i l i n g / p a r t i t i o n c o m b i n a t i o n s w e r e t r e a t e d
as site tests a n d m e a s u r e d to BS 2750: Part 4: 1980. T h e
w e i g h t e d s t a n d a r d i s e d l e v e l d i f f e r e n c e (D r,,) is g i v e n .
Note:
A i r b o r n e s o u n d insulation p e r f o r m a n c e d e s c r i b e s t h e
c a p a b i l i t y of t h e s t r u c t u r e u n d e r t e s t to r e d u c e t h e l e v e l
of s o u n d s , s u c h as s p e e c h o r m u s i c , b e t w e e n s p a c e s .
Therefore. the higher the airborne sound insulation
r a t i n g the b e t t e r t h e p e r f o r m a n c e . T h e i m p a c t s o u n d
insulation p e r f o r m a n c e d e s c r i b e s t h e r e s u l t a n t n o i s e
l e v e l in the r o o m b e l o w w h e n t h e floor is i m p a c t e d , for
e x a m p l e , b y footsteps. T h e r e f o r e , t h e l o w e r t h e i m p a c t
s o u n d insulation r a t i n g t h e b e t t e r t h e p e r f o r m a n c e .
Ic,
..-~,
~. ~,..~
~i ~.,',i . . . . . . .
5 Sound insulation performances* of lightweight concrete floors

Floor
depth
(mm)
Laboratory sound ii%suJatton

(100-3150Hz)
Airborne
ImpaCt
R(dB)
L..(dB)
Acoustlc test
report number
ISO
35
91
BGATR 806
A~ basic floor but with Gyproc M/F ceiling 363

system hung underneath to gwe a 240mm
cawty Ceiling of 12.Smm Gyproc
Wallboard
57
67
BGATR 806
As ba.~ic floor but with Gyproc M/F ceiling 376

system hung underneath to gwe a 240ram
cavity. Ceiling of double layer 1Z.Smm
Gyproc Wallboard w~th all join,,, staggered
60
64
BGATR 806
61
60
BGATR 806
L~ , '1[~1 ~ ~ '1
basic floor but with Gyproc M/F ceiling 363

system hung underneath to give a Z40mm
cavity. 8Omm Gypgias 10OOglass wool mat
in cavity. Ceiling of 12.5ram Gyproc
Wallboard
64
57
BGATR 806
I~ 'i J~ 't
Aa basic floor but with Gyproc M/F ceiling 376

system hung underneath to give a 240ram
cavity 80ram Gypglam 10OOgla.~ wool mat in
cavity. Ceiling of double layer 12.5ram
Gyproc Wallboard with all joint,,
staggered
Construct=on
Detatl
Upgrading a concrete floor
Basic floor:
0.
0 01
S o u n d insulation i m p r o v e m e n t s
I O 0 0 ~--~i o
to b a s i c floor:
0I
l i'"l i
I
F ~pRLy
2
l.,ghrweight concrete joist floor with

insulated concrete panel inhll (weight of
infiU g0kg/m2)
"'"
"/
'
I"" 1~
* The sound insulanon performances are based on imperforate ceilings using tapered edge boards for single layer, or the lower layer of double layer
ceilings,with allthe jointstaped and flUed in the recommended manner. The performances are based on Gyproc components being used and British
Gypsum's fixing recommendations being strictlyobserved
71
;,:~'.
_ .~
J;~
::.> ".q,,~.., :.'~.:",~"
: ... : . :....:'~:
6 Sound insulation performances* of G y p r o c Metal Stud Partition/suspended ceiling combinations

plenum
celhng
par~on
Gyproc M/F Suspended Ceihng System

Double layer 12 5mrh
Gyproc Wallboard
80ram Oypglas I000
on back
Single layer 12 5mm

Gyproc Wallboard
80ram Gypglas 1000
Double layer 12 5mm

Gyproc Wallboard
Single layer 125mm

Gyproc Wallboard
on back
M Iil
Gyproc Metal Stud Panmon
Weighted standard~ed level difference ('D .~.)dB

(Acoustic test report number)
146ram Gyproc metal studs at

600ram centres 2Smm Gypglas
19ram Gyproc Plank and 125ram
Gyproc Wallboard each side
51
50
50
48
(BGATR 907)
(BGATR 913)
(BGATR 954)
(BGATR 966)
146ram Gyproc metal studs at

600turn centres 25ram Gypglas
Double layer 12.5rnm Gyproc
Wallboard each side
49
48
48
45
(BGATR 800)
(BGATR 912)
(BGATR 958)
(BGATR 967)
70mm Gyproc metal studs at

600ram centres. 25mm Gypglas
1200 glass wool mat m cavity
Double layer 125ram Gyproc
Wallboard each side
45
45
44
45
(BGATR 828)
(BGATR 909)
(BGATR 960)
(BGATR 969)
* The sound u'~ulat~on performances are based on imperforate ceilings using tapered edge boards for single layer, or the lower layer of double layer
ceilings, with all the joints taped and filled in the recommended manner. The performances are based on Gyproc components being used and Britmh
Gypsum's fixing recommendations being strictly observed
DESIGN
CONSIDERATIONS
Suspension
Fixing points for s u s p e n d i n g the metal grid a r e

required at 1200mm centres in each direction. W h e n
the ceiling is intended to p r o v i d e fire protection the
fixings to the structure must b e n o n - c o m b u s t i b l e
Imposed
loads
The table below p r o v i d e s loading data for the

suspension grid b a s e d on a hmit~ng deflection factor of
7 Maximum r e c o m m e n d e d loads on the O y p r o c M/F

grid
Suspension grid layout 9
MF7 channel
suspension poln: centres
cenlres (ram)
[mm)
900
Maxmlum load
lncluchng welghl
of board (kg/m:)
1200
1200
1200
MF5 sect:ons
structure.
Fittings
L/400.
Fixings
Fixings to the system s h o e d always b e m a d e into the
metal grid or to s u p p l e m e n t a r y framing as m a y b e
found necessary: fixings or attachments should not b e
m a d e into the p l a s t e r b o a r d m e m b r a n e . Some
adjustment of the primary grid m a y b e r e q u i r e d to
support particularly h e a v y loads, s e e table 7.
W h e r e loads outside this r a n g e a r e anticipated,
i n d e p e n d e n t suspension should b e p r o v i d e d from the
alV. a v s
1200
900
30
40
600
IZ00
60
35
and access
panels
W h e r e lighting fittings, a c c e s s p a n e l s and similar

components are incorporated as part of the d e s i g n
requirements, consideration must b e given to
maintaining the mtegTity of the ceiling when fire
resistance and sound insulation a r e also important
factors Further advice and g u i d a n c e concerning
special conditions and the n e e d to maintain fire
protection and sound insulation p e r f o r m a n c e can b e
obtained from Brmsh O y p s u m
Proprletory access panels to suit the M.rg system can b e
obtained from Profilex Limited. Dodwell's Road,
Dodwell's Bridge Industrial Estate, Hmckley. LelCS,
LE1O 3BU. Tel 0455 612009
sp.lced a! 450mm cenues
.....................
:~.-
9:
..... ,
" t".:"~'.-~~. " ..............
~. "-' -. . . . . .
.........
..."~'.,y~
I
|i
I
I
screw centres 230ram
m a x i m u m in f i e l d o f
boards
I
I
DI
I
I
.
I
I
I
I
.... ill
8 Typical layout (900mm wide boards)
Gyproc MEF Suspended Ceiling System and

Gyproc Metal Stud Partitions
Extensive tests carried out with the Gyproc M/F
Suspended Ceiling System u s e d in conjunction with
Gyproc Metal Stud Partitions resulted in the following
important factors emerging:
In situat/ons where the Gyproc Metal Stud
Partition, which must b e securely fixed to the
structure, penetrates the M/F ceiling, the
structural p e r f o r m a n c e of the parution can b e
b a s e d on the floor to s u s p e n d e d ceiling height
irrespective of the construction. Therefore,
lightweight partitions which are r e q u i r e d to
divide lofty buildings will b e significantly
strengthened b y the ceiling system.
Where an M/F ceiling is il,tstalled on one side
of the partition, only a slight loss of flexural
strength will occur when any loading is
applied on the ceiling side of the partition.
Cavity barriers
W h e r e cavity barriers are required, these can b e
formed using 12.5mm G y p r o c plasterboard
screw-fixed to a simple metal framing. The framing
should b e fixed to the structure to avoid u n d u e loading
of the ceiling s u s p e n s i o n grid or, alternatively,
additional hangers should b e incorporated to support
the ceiling alongside the cavity barrier.
Control Joints
Gyproc Control Joints m a y b e r e q u i r e d in large areas of
ceiling to help relieve stresses i n d u c e d by movement in
the surrounding structure. It is r e c o m m e n d e d that such
joints coincide vath m o v e m e n t joints in the surrounding
structure. See References for sources of detailed
information.
The structural performance of a Gyproc Metal

Stud Partition fixed to the framework of an M/F
ceiling, or to n o g g i n g s cut from MF5 channel
set at 600ram centres, is equal to the
performance of a metal stud partition of the
same height fixed direct to the structural soffit.
The load levels and criteria used for the tests involved
in determining safe structures are those normally
specified by Consortia and public b o d i e s
....
- ',
9 ". '~,.../v,,'".-"%"'",.:" "
"
:., ")...,
" "t :,~:,~i~.":,'~~
" 'u':..
. -.....i~.;~
MF8strap
or GAI
SITEWOR.K
MFI2
angle /
clear
hanger,e.,/~
Handling and storage
See References for sources of detailed information.

Installation
The general assembly is shown in drawing 9.
soffit
at
9 J200mm~ r ~ ~ M } " I |
MF6Apenrneter channe]---....V.,~
rnaxlmum~ I T - nut
~ . , ~ ' . , ~ cenrres | I
and
Framework
I.
bevel and fix MF6A perimeter channels to the

walls with suitable fasteners at 600mm centres.
2.
Fix MF12 somt cleats to the structure at 1200rnm

centres to form a series of 1200mm x 1200mm
grids.
3.
Fix MF8 strap hanger or GA1 angle section to

each soffit cleat using an MF11 nut and bolt9
Note:
When suspending from timber joists the MF8 or GA1
hangers can be screw fixed directly into the timber
using two wood screws. See drawing 10.
4.
Form the primary grid by fixing MF'7 support

channel to each h a n g e r using two MF13
screws.
5.
Form the secondary grid by running MF5

section at right angles to the underside of the
primary grid at 450rnm centres and connect
together by locating MF9 connecting clip. See
drawing 11.
6.
Join channel sections b y overlapping and fixing.

See drawing 12. Ensure that joins do not
correspond with the intersection of channels
otherwise e n g a g e m e n t of the MF9 clip will b e
impaired.
7.
Change of level/bulkhead details. See

drawings 13 and 14.
8.
Access panels can b e installed up to a

maximum size of 600mm x 1200mm See
drawings 16 and 17.
Board Fixing - Single Layer
Fix boards with the long e d g e s at right angles to the
MF5 section using Gyproc Drywall Screws. Lightly butt
b o a r d ends and stagger end joints. Maximum screw
centres are 230ram in the field of boards and 150mm at
board ends. See drawingS.
MF7 primary channel/- ~

'
at 1200rammaxlmurn
cemres
single or double
layer lmmg
~
MF5 ceiling
secuon at 450ram
centres
9 General assembly
,-~ timber joist
o
#
wood s c r e w s
MF8 strap or GAI

angle hanger
10 Fixing to timber joists
Board Fixing - Double Layer

Stagger all board joints in relation to the fu'st layer.
/,
Surface finish
]ointing
For flush jointing, tapered e d g e boards are finished
with a Gyproc jomtmg system.
Plastering
With joints reinforced with G y p r o c Joint Tape, Thistle
Board Finish or Thistle Multi-Finish can be used to
provide a plaster finish
t- primary channel
l",'Lt'7
Decoration
After ]omt treatment has dried, decoration including
any decorators' preparatoi-y w o r k should follow with the
minimum of delay A plaster finish must be allowed to
d:%, before decorauon commences
See References for sources of detailed mformauon
ll0
"~
MF5 celhng section
I 1 Method of fixing M F ceihng sections to primary

cha:mets
. ': ,'.~--+~,.,~
9
MF7 pr=mary channel
MF8 strap or GAI

angle hanger boiled
to MFI2 soffit cleat
lSOmm minimum overlap
[~
I- ~
._n
hanger fixed to primary
-I~1
,wo Mrla s~re,,s
I" I~
a Primary channels
MF9 connecting clip
II ~
ME7 support channel w|th
osingle or double layer
Alb~eu.stedl
ma velcYhst~13eMoflo3:eC;:;s may
gs
14 Ceiling bulkhead junction
overlap
"~
~E5 ceiling secuon.-~
MF7 primary
channel ~
b MF5 ceiling sections

12 Detail showing method of joining metal sections
MF12 soffit
cleat
~L'r e w $
. clip \ . ~
t
I
two MFI3
MF9
conneoting
Z,++
M~ cemng sectio~==..~
~ "
MT8 strap or
GAI angle hanger
" ~
I I ~)
" t -
"
"
single or double layer L g j

hanger fixed to
I
15 Typical cross-section
,-v.,_k
W'
I ! I
MF8 strap or GAI

angle hanger
LJI
. ~~
~'doublelayer
MF7 primary channel wuh

board in[ill, a~ sttgener to
access panel, set at 500ram
centres
GA3 angle fixed to

perimeter channel
w~th pop rivets
MF6A
perimeter
channel
12 5ram hnmg
1- i
access
panel
0
I,,
t
~
o~
o
o
Gyproc
Bead
Edge
oI
-\
oo
125mm board wuh Oyproc

Edge Bead to area round
access panel t'~ed to
penmete~ channel with
Cyproc Drywall Screws
o,o
13 Ceiling ch,mge of level junction
' ~ Ulli
16 A c c e s s p a n e l Ln s m g t e l a y e r M/F c e i l i n g
,,!
?. .
CA3 angle for
fire rated
cedmgs fixed lo
per~meler
channel w~th
pop rwets
MF6A perimeter channel
access panel
boards screwfu,~ed through to

MF7 primary
channel stiffeners
set at 500mm
c e ~
o
'
~1
12 Sin/hnmg
~o
SPECIFICATION NOTES
See References for suggested Specification Clauses.
British Gypsum products are available through most

builders' merchants.
[TECHNICAL SERVICE
o.,., . l ~
/--
/
access panel
Gyproc Edge
Bead Io both
12.5mm board with

Gyproc Edge Bead to
boards m access
panel
area round access

panel fixed 1o
perimeter channel with
Gyproc Drywall
Screws
British Gypsum technical staff are available for

discussion and to render technical advice when the
Company's products are being specified or used.
These serv~ces are available nationally through the
numbers listed.
ol j5",=1
TEL: 0602 456123
FAX: 0602 456356
PRODUCT TRAINING
Courses on British Gypsum systems and products are
provided at the Company's Product Training Centres
shown below. In addition to practical training courses
on installation techniques, product update and product
appreciation courses are available. Further details can
be obtained by telephoning the appropriate number.
17 Access panel in double layer M/F ceiling
East Leake, Leics

Cocklakes, Cumbria
Erith, Kent
[',vR~
MF6A perimeter
channel fixed al 9
6~176
["M"]
I I MF8 strap or CA1 angle hanger
two ~13 I
ma.xlmum
screws
oeot,es
L,- /
I
MF7 primary channel
I"1"
0602 844844
0602 844844
03224 41122
ENQUIm~S
Written enquiries should be addressed to:British Gypsum Limited

Technical Information Department
East Leake
Loughborough
Leicestershire LE 12 6JT
IREFER.ENC ES
"
ol
o r double /
layer hnmg
single
The British Gypsum White Book

British Gypsum Specification Clauses
Product and Safety Information Sheets (giving safety,
handling and storage details) available on request.
MF6A perimeter channel

/ ~ " 5 ceiling sectzon
t
oO
,~
single or double layer hnmg
18 Perimeter details
,~,j
!
o j
@
O 5973
A ~,~}..~ Gypsum Company
~" ~(: ;'.:~h C~'V~.~::;J,":.! .q~'~'I('HIt~t':
I'"
I 9: I
Gyproc control joint
J ,t4 I u/
April 1991
IDENTIFICATION
Introduction
Designers should allow for control or movement
joints in the structural elements of buildings to
comply with the C o d e s of Practice relaung to the
various building elements and building methods. In
such cases it is desirable that a solution b e available
for the lining system applied to the basic structure.
Similarly, with individual elements such as long
partition runs or large ceiling areas the effects of
change in hurmdity and temperature in the internal
environment should be considered. The Gyproc
control joint is a metal accessory which can be
adopted where requ.u'ed in Gyproc wall limngs,
pa.~tions and ceilings to meet the movement
associated with these factors.
Standards
There is no British Standard covering this accessory.
It is manufactured from a high quality zinc alloy to
resist corrosion.
control joints occur, when fixing channels to the

ceiling and floor. If a ~ n b e r sole plate is used, a
c o r r e s p o n d i n g 65ram gap should also b e allowed.
S p a c e studs at 600ram centres, working away from
fixed points. Before m.stalhng studs on either side of
the control joint, they should b e b a c k e d with a strip of
12.5ram G y p r o c wallboard. Cut the w a l l b o a r d to a
neat fit b e t w e e n the floor and ceiling a n d the width of
the stud. Fix the strip of wallboard to the stud w e b
with 32ram drywall screws at 300mm centres. On
Gyproc jumbo stud, two lines of fixing are requn'ed.
Each line of fixing should be parallel to and not less
than 25ram from the edge of the wallboard. Cut strips
of rock wool batt, density not less than 23kg/m ~, to
suit the stud width. The batts should be inserted
between the studs placed either side of the control
joint. It is important to ensure that the mineral wool is
cut to a tight fit and no gaps are left, particularly at
structural floor and ceiling junctions.
DESCRIPTION
The Gyproc control joint is manufactured from rolled
metal strip 0.38mm thick. It is 47mm wide and is
supplied in 3048mm lengths. It is perforated on both
flanges to ensure adhesion of applied finishes, and
the open slot is p r o t e c t e d b y plastic tape which is
r e m o v e d on completion. There is a 2rnm upstand to
p r o v i d e a ground on e a c h flange to which jointing
materials are applied. The control joint weighs
approx/mately 0.16kg/m.
Start b o a r d i n g from a fixed point in the normal

manner, working towards the control joint. W h e n
fixing the b o a r d adjacent to the control joint, the face
b o a r d should b e cut to master the strip of wallboard
previously fixed to the stud web. Fix the b o a r d to the
stud with drywall screws at 300ram centres, ensuring
that the e d g e is plumb. Before continuing b o a r d
fixing, it is n e c e s s a r y to positively locate the other
stud adjacent to the control joint. Accurately position
the stud to maintain the 40mm g a p and fix top and
bottom to the channels with a G y p r o c c r i m p i n g tool.
PERFORMANCE
The accessory provides a control joint which will
accept movement up to 7mm as lateral expansion or
contracuon. When appl/ed to parutions and ceilings
in accordance with the r e c o m m e n d e d detail the
general performance of the s y s ~ m is not affected.
w h e r e other situations occur, advice on performance
should b e obtained from the Technical advisory
department, British Gypsum, East Leake.
It is r e c o m m e n d e d that control joints are
incorporated m the systems at 10m maxunum centres
or approx.unate to structural movement joints,
p r o v i d e d no mechamcal bridging occurs.
SITEWORK
Installation
Gyproc metal stud partition
Continue b o a r d fixing in the normal manner. If it is

n e c e s s a r y to cut a b o a r d at the control joint, the offcut
should b e u s e d on the adjacent side to maintain
b o a r d layout. When board fixing on the other side of
the partition, ensure that a 12mm g a p is left at the
control joint positions. See drawing 6.
Wall lining systems

In principle, wall hnmg systems are treated as
partitions in that the linings are fixed to a line of
support finished to leave a 12mm g a p in the lining. In
the c a s e of the G y p r o c Dri-wall system the support on
e a c h side of the g a p is a vertical line of dabs. With
the M/F" system it is a metal fl..tmng section, and in the
G y p r o c independent wall lining system it is an I s t u d
See drawings 3 and 5. The fimng of the rock wool ban
and the control joint m all Gyproc wall lining systems
will b e to the same accuracy as d e s c r i b e d a b o v e in
G y p r o c metal stud partition.
The general sitework recommendatiorts are followed

Then deterrrune the position of control joints when
marking out partitions Allow for a 65ram gap. where
sl.~ 1
" ~:~ ~ .:~i ~ ~::~ ,:.-~:~i :
Gyproc M/F suspended ceilings

The precise position of the joint will largely d e p e n d
upon the general area of the ceiling and m a y occur at
maxu'num 10m centres parallel with the intermediate
channels (MFT) or in a transverse position to this
member, see drawings 7 and 8.
The normal s e q u e n c e of construction is followed.
Allow a 12ram g a p in the p e n r n e t e r channel in the
line of the p r o p o s e d control joint. W h e r e the joint is
sited transverse to the MF7 intermediate channels
(drawing 7), MF5 ceiling sections should b e
positioned on a parallel centre line 60mm either side
of the centre line of the control joint.
Gyproc wallboard is fixed with the b o u n d e d g e at
right angles to MF5 ceiling sections and s e c u r e d at
230ram maxu'num centres with G y p r o c drywall
screws to all ceiling sections and p e r i m e t e r channel.
End joints must b e staggered 9 When G y p r o c Flrehne
board is used, b o a r d e n d screw fixings are r e d u c e d
to 150mm centres, and the long e d g e s of the b o a r d
are s c r e w e d to the p e r i m e t e r channel only w h e r e it is
joined by an M/F ceiling section. Boards should b e
accurately cut to p r o v i d e a neat g a p of 12mm in the
line of the control joint.
When the control joint occurs parallel with the
intermediate channel MF7 (see drawing 8), it is
necessary to site two lines of MF7 section 60mm
either side of the control joint centre line. The MF5
ceiling secuons are installed cut to length providing a
30mm gap in the line of the control joint. G y p r o c
wallboard is fixed as d e s c r i b e d before, c o m m e n c i n g
at the control joint using the boun d e d g e of the b o a r d
to provide a neat 12mm g a p accurately aligned.
To maintain the integrity of the ceiling system when it
is designed to p r o v i d e fire protection, the control
joint must b e b a c k e d with 60mm thick r o c k wool bart,
density not less than 23kg/m 3, which is installed as the
fixing of the p l a s t e r b o a r d p r o c e e d s .
Fixing of Gyproc control joint

The section can b e cut with a fine-tooth hacksaw. Butt
end joints should b e aligned accurately to p r o v i d e a
neat fit. Place the control joint into position and s e c u r e
to the wallboard with 13mm corrosion resistant
staples, at 150mm max/mum centres through both
flanges, ensuring the control joint is cut to a neat fit at
structural floor and ceiling or ceiling perimeters, and
the ends sealed with G y p r o c sealant or an acrylic
caulk.
!
Jointing
Apply a layer of G y p r o c Jointex 200ram wide to both
s~des of the control joint and feather out the e d g e s
with the jomtu~g s p o n g e When set and dry, apply a
further thin coat extending 50ram b e y o n d the first
coat and again feather out the e d g e s . Alternatively,
apply a layer of G y p r o c joint filler 200rnm wide to
each s~de of the control joint and feather out with the
jomtmg sponge When the joint filler has set, apply a
coat of Gyproc joint finish 50mm b e y o n d the e d g e s of
the joint fillez When tt'us has dried, another layer
should be apphed 50ram b e y o n d the s e c o n d coat and
fea',hered off with the iomt~ng s p o n g e
s ! 2 :'
9 ,
Decoration
When all the jointmg has set and dried, apply one
coat of G y p r o c drywall top coat to the entire area.
When the top coat has dried, r e m o v e the plastic tape
and decorate, s e e secuon f]3
, ~ ~ 4 / i "~
9~
! '++.: + "
balls between
control joint
'
wool ball
I studs
5 Independent wall lining
1 Gyproc control joint
16
insulationbehind control joint

see re!evantdetail
12
12 5mm tapered edge

plasterboard
o
/ I
oO
,~,
~
O
OO
~
~ 0. . ~ . /
I
'~
oo
'
~176
'~' j l
controIlomt 40rnm
rock wool batt

not less than
23kg/m:
~ A I
two layers of Oyproc
125ram plasterboard
each rode
compound
A!!0 o,~176
o ]
oO~
9 ~
~
sn.ld
feathenng of
Gyprocjomung
O
Gyprocme!al ~
I
k
12
channels held short by 65ram
6 Metal stud partmon

Oyproc j
jomtmg compound
60ram thick 23kgZmJ

rock wool ba.
Oyproc controljomt
maple fixed to plasterboard
forfirerated ceiling
ceding sec~on
2 General fixing detail
60
60
channel
I+'I
,
Vl
T-/
k~
feathenng
of Gyproc
jomtmg compound
VI
(M~')
Oyproc
control joint
12 5rnm Oyproc Fa'elme

board or Gyproc wallboard
Oyproccontroljoint
Oyproc 12 5ramtapered
edgepl~terboard
7 Joint transverse to intermediate channel

3 Gyproc Dri-wall M/F systerr~
6O
6O
~o~k woof b+. ,'or
_L
1/
primary
channel (MTT)
cethng sechon
(MFS)
(,
I
>
>~Z_,.-
Gypr]ionlrol l~mt
4 9
Drt-waU system
~o
t
Oyproc 12 5mm tapered

edge plasterboard
el
i
Gyproc controllomt /
C yproc Firekne board
or C;yproc wallboard
8 Joint parallel to intermediate channel

S tI. .
,~
Metal Sections
I t co , o . -rTNc.
FI. E---,
Information' i
1
Products:
Gyproc metal studs, channels, ceiling sections, angle sections, beads, clips etc.
Manufacturer:
British Gypsum Limited

(A member of the BPB Industries Group)
Head Office
East Leake
Loughborough
Leics
LE12 6HX
1.
Contacts:
Nottingham (0602) 456123
Use
Gyproc metal sections are used in conjunction with Gyproc plasterboards, plasterboard laminates and
Glasroc glass fibre reinforced gypsum to form internal wall and ceiling systems, linings and encasemenm.
2.
Typical composition
Steel sections comply with the following standards:

BS2989:1982
BS2994:1976
BS7364:1990
linings using
Specification for continuously hot-dip zinc coated and iron-zinc coated sheet steel
Specification for cold rolled steel sections.
Specification for galvanised steel studs and channels for stud and sheet partitions and
screw fixed Gyproc wallboards.
The steel sections may have a residual coating of roll-forming lubricant. This is typically a blend of
mineral oil, emulsifiers, corrosion inhibitors and biocides.
3.
Physical and chemical properties

Physical state:
4.
Galvanised mild steel

Weight: Up to 2.5kg/m
Unloading and storage
Steel sections are normally strapped or banded for transport and storage purposes. They can be off-loaded
mechamcally using a suitable fork lift truck. Safety retaining ropes or slings should be used with hoists or
cranes.
I'
Store under cover in clean, dry conditions, out of contact with dry cement, lime, plaster or mortar. The
secuons should be stacked flat and supported along their length. Full bundles should not be stacked more
than eight high with each bundle separated by timber or other means of adequate proportion.
5.
Disposal
At a tip designated for building products, an authonsed land-fill site, or for scrap.
Keep out of reach of children.
6.
Health hazards, precautions and first aid
Steel sections are not intended to support body weight. Fixers must work from an independent support
system.
a.
b.
Eye contact
Health hazard
Eye injury could occur when breaki.ng open the strapping, due
to the release of tension. Steel shavings and sparks are produced
when using power tools.
Precautions
Wear suitable eye protection when cutting the strapping and when
using power tools.
First aid
In the event of eye
injury,
seek medical attention.
Skin contact
Health hazard
Laceration on sharp c o m e r s and edges; or when breaking open the

strapping, due to the release of tension.
Contamination with residual forming lubricants may cause irritation.
Steel shavings and sparks are produced when using power tools.
c.
Precautions
Wear gloves and suitable protective clothing when manually

off-loading and unpacking. Individuals w~th existing skin problems or
those sensitized to mineral oils should protect hands using a skin
barrier cream or suitable gloves9 Wear suitable protection when
using hand or power tools.
First aid
If irritation or injury occurs, seek medical at'tendon.
Inhalation
Not applicable.
d.
Ingestion
Not applicable.
e.
Exposure lirmts
Not applicable.
f.
Fire and explosion hazards

None.
HS3
Date of issue [ -I 92
(ALso avafl,lble on Ommtarc ele.ctromc data :etrlev,d systerr
". {
.:- 9 .:
. .. , . ~i.., !:~-~'~"
Plasterboards
Products:
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
Manufacturer:
Bnush Gypsum Limited

(A m e m b e r of the BPB Industries Group)
Head Office
East Leake
Loughborough
Leics
LE12 6HX
1.
W~T,t,ROARD
PLANK
CORE BOARD
LATH
DUO EDGE W~.T,IttOARD
BASEBOARD
DUPLEX WAT.T.ROARD
DUPLEX FI~'~.rNE BOARD
DUPLEX BASEBOARD
FI~I:~1,rNEBOARD
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
GYPROC
MOISTURE RESISTANT BOARD

MOISTURE RESISTANT SHEATHING BOARD
MOISTURE RESISTANT F I ~ , r N ' E BOARD
GYPWALL BOARD
INDUSTRIAL GRADE BOARD
FIP~,rNE INDUSTRIAL GRADE BOARD
M/G BOARD
COVE
CORNICE
Contacts:
Nomngham (0602) 456123
Use
Gyproc plasterboards are used as internal linings in buildings. Moisture resistant grades may also b e used in protected
external situations or in temporary exposure conditions. Gyproc Cove and Cornice provide a decorative feature at
ceiling / wall angles.
2
Typical
composition
Plasterboard Cove and Corrdce comprise a core of calcium sulphate d/hydrate encased in p a p e r liners. Natural constituents include clay, limestone, and small amounts of anhydrite and quartz. Minor additives include starch, foaming
agents and dispersants.
Moisture resistant boards and Core b o a r d include a silicone and/or bitumen wax additive in the core.
Fireline Boards and Core Board comain small quantifies of m a n - m a d e mineral fibre, vermiculite and/or mica.
M/G Boards and Industrial Grade Boards are faced with a polyvinylchloride film.
Duplex boards are b a c k e d with a memlli~ed polyester film. M/G Boards and Industrial g r a d e boards are b a c k e d with
aluminium foil.
3.
Physical
Physical state:
4.
properties
Boards
Weight:
9.5mm
12.5mm
15ram
19ram
6.5 - 9.5 kg/m z

9.5 - 12.5 kg/m 2
12 - 15 kg/m 2
14 - 17.5 kg/m z
Cove/Cornice !
Approx weights
100ram Cove
127mm Cove
135mm Cornice
1 kg/m length
1.3 kg/m length
1.5 kg/m length
Unloading and storage
Plasterboards are supplied stacked singly or m bound pairs d e p e n d i n g on the grade. Industrial grade boards are
supplied m bound stacks to prevent slippage during transportation. If plasterboards are off-loaded manually, they
should be c a m e d on their edge. Do not drag boards one over the other. VVhenoff-loading mechamcally, the carrying
platform should provide fl.fllsupport. Safety retaining ropes or slings should be used with hoists or cranes.
Cove and Cormce products are supplied in cardboard cartons ( usually 18m/carton ). Cartons may b e delivered singly
or in pallets. Precautions for mechamcal handling should b e as d e s c r i b e d above.
All products should be stored flat m a dry place on a level surface and protected from rising damp and inclement
weather The stack should b e nea: and should not exceed l O00mm in hmght for convement manual handling.
5.
Disposal
D~spose o[ .ill products at ,i t'p desxn'.,lted for bmldmg products or an ,luthonsed ktnd.ffll site
6.
Health hazards, precautions and first aid
Plasterboards ':,'ill not support body ',velght between rafters, joists or [:rammg members. Fixers must work from an
independent support system.
Dust is generated when cutting or sanding. Observe the following advice whenever dust is being produced.
a.
b.
Eye contact
Health hazard
May cause irritation.
Precautions
Ensure adequate ventilation when cutting or sanding boards. If dust levels

cannot b e controlled by ventilation, use dust extraction eqmpment or wear
suitable goggles.
First aid
In the event of eye contact wash the eye immediately with plenty of clean
water. Seek medical attention if discomfort persists.
S~an contact
Health hazard
May cause irntation or lacerations.

Ensure adequate ventilation when cumng or sanding boards. If dust levels
cannot b e controlled by ventilation, use dust extraction eqmpment. The
wearing of gloves is recommended.
Individuals sensitive to man-made fibres should take partlcttlar care in
respect of Fireline boards. Wear goggles together with gloves and loose
fitting protective clothing.
Lacerations may occur when sanding and cutting surfaces and edges with
hand or power tools. Wear gloves and suitable clothing.
First aid
C.
d.
Inhalation
Health hazard
May cause irritation.
Precautions
Ensure adequate ventilation when cutting or sanding boards. If dust levels

cannot b e controlled b y ventilation, use dust extraction equipment.
Alternatively, wear a suitable dust mask.
First aid
If irritation occurs, move to fresh air.
Ingestion
Health hazard
No biological hazards.
Precautions
Avoid ingestion b y taking normal hygiene precautions.
First aid
e.
In the event of skin irritation rinse the affected area thoroughly under runninr
water before washing with soap. If skin problems persist, seek medical
advice.
-!
Wash out mouth and give patient plenty of water to drink.
Exposure limits
Occupational Exposure Standards (OES) for gypsum and plaster dust.
Total inhalable dust = 10 mg/m 3 8 hour Time Weighted Average
Respirable dust = 5 mg/m + 8 hour Time Weighted Average
The current Health and Safety Executive Guidance Note EH40 idennfies Occupational Exposure Standards
for other constituents. This Note is revised and reprinted annually
Note: Firelme boards contain man-made mineral fibre which has a Maxunurn Exposure Limit of 5mg/m 3
(8 hour Tune Weighted Average) and a Maxunum Exposure Limit of 2 fibres/ml (8 hour Time Weighed
Average). The man-made mineral fibres utilused are non-respirable v,nth fibre diameters in excess of
i0 ~m. Listed in the current Health and Safety Guidance Note EH40
[".re and exploszon hazards

None
Element/Trade
Location
Ceramic Wall Tiles
Pavilion - all toilets and splashbacks to

cleaners sink
Supplier/Contractor
Cranbrook
214 Roding Lane South
Ilford
Essex IG4 5PP
Tel: 0181 550 8673
Fax: 0181 550 5812
Clean with damp sponge and warm soapy water, and polish dry with soft cloth.

None
Drawings/Schedules
None
None
Guarantees/Warranties
COSHH Data Sheet
None
Recommended spares
None
None
cranbrook tiling Itd

t - 020
8550
8673
f - 020
8550
581 2
Fax _Sheet
F.B EIImer Ltd
to-
attention
from
o f - Mr B Wates
- vic
d a t e - zs-os-oo
number
re
o f p a g e s - oz
- The Pavillion Building-NMEC
m e s s a g e - Please find attached the information that you have

requested,Sorry for the delay in getting this over to you it
completly slipped my mind
Best Regards - Vic
0 & M Manual
Pavillion Building i
New Millennium Expe ence
The following ceramic tiles were installed at the
Pavillion building at the Millennium Experience
Floor Gres 125mmxE4Smm Blu Electrico
Ref 6631 glazed ceramic tiles to walls
along with Internal corner pieces to
match Ref 6295.
Both Obtainable From Domu$ Tiles Limited
33 Parkgate Road
London
SW11 4NP
Tel- 020 7223 5555
Fax - 0Z0 79Z4 2.556
Contact - Lynette Butler
Adhesive
Ardex X7 Adhesive with Ardion 90 additive
Grout
Ardex CZ Grout Colour- Grey
Both Obtainable From Tower Ceramics Limited
91 Parkway
London NWI 7PP
Tel - 020 7485 7192
Fax - 020 7267 9571
Contact - Mr Michael Parry
Element/Trade
Location
Laminated Toilet Cubicles
Pavilion - All toilets
Supplier/Contractor
D K Beer Contracts Ltd
6 Faygate Business Centre
Faygate Lane
Faygate
Horsham
West Sussex RH12 4DN
Tel: 01293 852555
Fax: 01293 852558
Clean with soap, clean water and soft cloth.

None
None
N/A
COSHH Data Sheet
N/A
Recommended spares
None
NIA
D K BEER CONTRACTS Ltd

PAINTING, DECORATING, BUILDING REPAIRS & REFURBISHMENTS
Telephone 01293 852555 or FAX01293 852558
Fax
11"o:
Bill Wares
From: Andrew Beer
Fex:
01342 893465
Pages: 2
m.
Phone:
Re:
Date:
Dome
I-I Urgent
April 17, 2000
CC:
[] For Review
[] Please Comment
I-i Please Reply
[] Please Recycle
9 Comments:
Bill,
Here are the details,
Colour and materials : 13mm TRESPA E3-42 Gold.
Cleaning: Doors, soap and water, (mild non-toxic detergent and soft cloth) All metal stainless steel,
including alJ fixings etc.
Replacements: As they were bespoke I suggest that all replacements be ordered either directly to DK
Beer Contracts Ltd after warranty, but during the warranty period go through EIImer Construction.
My view on this is having been to the Dome and seen them in situ. they can (ll~f_.be damaged or
damage caused by people mis-treating. There is no way that they are going to fall apart1
Hope this helps.
Regards,
Andrew Beer.
LgL~'682bs
~ ~
t-,
8~qRqR~ARTn
:l,dn~-~ ) 7 : n T
8nL'I~-M~IH-)T
t,
@
9
l
~'~"
,.I I.,
~'rl#
'~>-
_V"
" F" _ (
#
_.%.
FXL+al~+ivy ( ttY Jde.t+ for ws

re.~.l~.~ O0~Jr .'=ll')f)hCi:.ll,~x~
2.1
K~IL sl.~inl~-.S~ Sluk~: wilh ~-',~es.~ SlOCJ l+].n
-Its-
,-+:~
I
l~n~ll'l
rn
:
711 - - .
-i-
- -
- 1~";
- - '
[]
.I
Condn~ous s e ~
Olx;r, ~
2.6
101
- i 2S i~-
'~ t
--I
hinge
C,3
3,~
n1,~',
Puckif~:
I.
1 p~ 12. I m lu~cJlhSI
@
03+2
9
"
l_'il CorltiaUOUll
I leuYy<'~,ty
9
9
~.~ m ler~t~
Ma~t$1aJnle~ ~te~ w;m ~ainte~.~S~I p~n
hinge
-+~,~
-~1- -- I - - I - . - ' - _ ~
Conmrmous
C+r
I
_ ~
l_C]Continuous hln.ll,e
9
9
M ~ . +n Ckaly
I O ill rtm'~'l,lh
POI~;PI(~J ++l*eli~4ess $lt.:~l '~I11 m S i ' 1 ~
,."_C+- - - -+.y. . . . .I
.
I-.,---+
++I(~.I l~r~
[ ] C0tsfinuous hinge
~er.Jum du~/
1 ~ m l~'K;Jth
351.1
I DC (1 +R m/~glh.~:)
~I~
~1.1~
3.51.14
3.,'~I .'l 4
__113i.
I
- 14~
.---..-+
"1 ~
P
9
~1.1
[ S~ ,~',
~.
h.
~cI
PSCk~g:
hinge
[ . ~ I m,h
l-'ackim'1. 1 i'.,c 11.~ re, l e ~ l ' ~ )
+IP
03.+
'+:+++++
+j ....
+__,
-I +-;o
:.~.~- ::,
_.
[]
+'
Contlnuo~ h~n~e
wirJlh
C~v. N
"~"T~7 --
++',.m.~
:, I +'r,.,P3cktnu: I ix:: (1 R m Ir
35+ .16~
@
Lrit3P i ~ m,,,~
9
LJqhl 10 tttlChJIll duly

1JJ m leP,~lh
o~ j
,-<p
9
,+,m, G_
4'- _.,,,,
i "L._ 1'
,-
++
e~.3
+, ]
P2--" -'
[]
Plimomnge
+,.+
25 n~1
3hi .15.q
351.159:
[ ."1~,l".n
P~n~,~'~j: 1 L'1C(1 A m I ~ l h $ )
188
OCC~O~Tn
~l.lA~J
~n~QT
NnN~-I~I,I-QT
D K BEER CONTRACTS Ltd

6 FAYGATE BUSINESS CENTRE
FAYGATE LANE, FAYGATE, WEST SUSSEX RH12 4DN
PAINTING, DECORATING, BUILDING REPAIRS & REFURBISHMENTS
Telephone 01293 852555 or FAX01293 852558
Fax
If~
Bill wares ( WATES ASSOC )
From:
David Taylor
Fax:
01342 893767
Pl~
PlmMr 01342 893465
I~t~
May 16,2000
I~
r162
[ ] Urgent
I"-1 For b v l e w
I-] Plelse r
9 Comments:
THE DOME-.PAVILION
TOILET CUBICLES I PARTITIONS.
Details as requested :1/TRESPA--Duncan Reeds Ltd.

Unit 11
G~ilrnans Industrial Estate
Natt$ Lane
Billingshurst
West Sussex. RH14 9EZ
E] Pleal4 Reply
[ ] Plelse Recycle
May 16, 2000
?J Security Fixings and Screws.---Bryant Fixings Ltd.

Unit 8
Redldln Close
Horsham
West Sussex. RH13 5QL
31 Hiinges etc.
Hafele U. K. Ltd.
Swffl Valley Industrial Estate
Rugby. CV21 1RD
41 AngUs.
Baztig Ltd.
,~)ndells Yard
Crawley Road
Horsham
West Sussex. RH12 4HG
TRESPA DETAILS IN POST
9 Page2

Elemen t/'rra de
Location
Warm air hand dryers with SIS finish
Pavilion - all toilets
Supplier/Contractor
F.C Frost Limited
Watrous Architectural Products Division
Bankside Works
Benfield Way
Braintree
Essex CM7 3YS
Tel: 01376 329111
Fax: 01376 347002
As O & M behind

Refer to above 0 & M
Dra wings/Schedules
See 'As Built' details
COSHH Data Sheet
As Main Works Contracts Documents
N/A
Recommended spares
Refer to above 0 & M
M A I N T E N A N C E D A T A SHEET
STAINLESS STEEL
1.0 NEVER USE CLEANING MATERIAL CONTAINING ANY OF THE FOLLOWING:ABRASIVE MATERIAL
CHEMICALS
BLEACH
2.0 WASH ALL EXPOSED STAINLESS STEEL SURFACES WITH SOAP AND WATER AND
DRY USING A CLEAN SOFT CLOTH
3.0 TO MAINTAIN FINISH AND ASSIST IN CLEANING OF THE EXPOSED SURFACES IT
IS DESIRABLE TO USE AN INDUSTRIAL STEEL CLEANER, POLISHING OFF WITH A
CLEAN SOFT CLOTH
4.0 IT IS IMPORTANT THAT BOTH CLEANING AND POLISHING OPERATIONS ON
STAINLESS STEEL SHOULD BE CARRIED OUT ALONG THE GRAIN AND NEVER
ACROSS IT.
5.0 MOVING PARTS SUCH AS LOCKS, HINGES ETC SHOULD BE PERIODICALLY OILED,
TAKING CARE THAT OIL DOES NOT COME INTO CONTACT WITH THE STAINLESS
STEEL SURFACE.
6.0
F.C FROST LIMITED RECOMMEND THE FOLLOWING CLEANING AGENT:VITOPAN
OBTAINABLE FROM:-
VITOPAN LIMITED
EXPRESS TRADING ESTATE
STONE HILL ROAD
FARNWORTH
BOLTON EL4 9TP
Phone 01204 578315
March 1999
fros
Tel: +44 (0)1376 329111

Fax: +44 (0)1376 347002
E-mail: sales@fcfrost.com
Website: www.fcfrost.com
Bankside Works
Benfield Way
Braintree
Essex CM7 3YS
F. C. FROST LIMITED
OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
W-1121-A
Warm Air Hand Dryer
Directors: F C Post. M I P M R S H
D M Frost
Incorporating
Registered m Fr, gland No 1024973
.._ ..
Registered Office
Barl,~s,de Works. Ber~fleld Way. Bralntree
Essex CM7 3YS
FROST Drainage Products Division

where
solutions
flow
WATROUS Architectural Products Division
frost
Tel: +44 (0)1376 329111

Fax: +44 (0)1376 347002
Eomail: sales@fcfrost.com
Bankside Works
Benfield Way
Braintree
Essex CM7 3YS
F. C. FROST LIMITED
INDEX
3
4
BROCHURE, WARM AIR H A N D DRYERS A N D

COMBINATION UNITS
INDEX
NAME, ADDRESS AND TELEPHONE NUMBER OF
MANUFACTURER
DIAGRAMMATIC DRAWl NGS OF W1121A A N A
4248 - RECESSED UNIT
HAND DRYER INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
CON N ECTION DATA, OUTPUT, MATERIALS
DECLARATIONS OF CONFORMITY
CONSUMABLE ITEMS
GEN ERAL MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
10
GUARANTEE
Directors; F C Frost. M I . P . M R S H
D.M. Frost
Registered In England No 1024973
Registered Office:
Bankside Works. Benfield Way. Bramtree
Essex CM7 3YS
Incorporating
where
solutions
flow
frost
Te I: +44 (0) 1376 329111

Fax: +44 (0)1376 347002
Bankside Works
Benfield Way
Braintree
Essex CM7 3YS
F. C. FROST LIMITED
F.C. FROST LIMITED

Bankside Works
Benfield Way
Braintree
Essex
CM7 3YS
Tel. 01376 - 329111

Fax: 01376 - 3 4 7 0 0 2
'}&g~2,,
Directors: F C Frost. M I P . M R S H
D M Frost
Registered in England No 1024973
Regqsterad Office
Banks~de Works, Benfiald Way. Bramtree
Essex CM7 3YS
Incorporating
where
solutions
flow
T,.S
C'n.:,',.h,G iS Tu-
C.')Pr~,,:;~"
q~
Of
F C '-#CLr
t;D
*'h!) ',~:j.,"
ir~ ,,.+i,OL{ OR PaRT O"1 L.,'SE:) FOR Tr~L

",'dT:~OLIT T~-:R WR,FT,E', peR,., SSiC:d
I~U" ~[Z ;'-'PROf)'JCL'.

E'ECUT 0:, OF r
FLOW
F,,,. _
L '.' TS O;.. DEGU.:LS

R-'AO'," A~_ 8JR=S
0C5
e-hC:s
"1/2"
IF~OUBT
ASK - THIRD ANGLE PROJECTION
-(-~_. ~-T__
.375
so
'\,
I--..-.7-0-.-
\l
-T_
"C'='~
i
-r.!
-Q
U),
H,"4",D DRYINC BOWL

DRYJ'4C iNiTIATED BY
P HO TO-- F-LE~-CT--R I C CE~L.
L__
tS_
L*..
0
CorJCEALED
P~A,NO
HIr'~o c
i
-o-
i\I,_
E
E
oo
uD
/
/
C'q
Ob
O
~'~
9 r-cF'~OS T LTO ~995
-.9
~,
DO NO ~ SCa_s
-~.
frost\
" ~ O U D
MOUhTI~'IC, b',l; r
I~IISH: -
L.___.._._.j~o ,,o-
Ar,~
~2-;8
F-,
o:-,
fros
+44 (0)1376 329111

Fax: +44 (0)1376 347002
E-mail: s a l e s @ f c f r o s t . c o m
Tel:
Bankside Works
Benfield Way
Braintree
E s s e x CM7 3YS
E C. FROST LIMITED
INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS FOR

YOUR HAND DRYER
UN PACKI NG
Your hand dryer has been tested before leaving the factory. If any part
should be damaged in transit, please return that part for immediate
replacement. Each hand dryer car~on contains:1. ttand Dryer
2. Hexagon key
2.4x No.8 wall plugs 3. Instructions

5.4x No.8 wood screws 6. Rubber spacer
SITING
Your hand dryer should be sited in such a position that the outlet is
approximately the following height above the floor according to use:Men:-48" (1219mm) Women:-46" (1168mm) Children:-41"
(1042mm)
NOTE: as this hand dryer relies on 'reflection' there must be a
minimum gap of 36" (9OOmm) between the underside of the dryer

and any surface.
FIXING
Remove the front cover by screwing in the two ~xing screws using the
Hexagonal key provided. Position the chassis on the wall and mark
through the four flxing points. Drill the wall to suit No.8 wall plugs
(enclosed). If the supply is to be concealed, drill a hole through the
wall in line with the 2Omm hole in the back plate. Use the four rubber
spacers when fixing to the wall.
DDirectFrost
~ FC Frost.M I P MR S H
Registered in EnglandNo
Registered Office:
I ~ r l I~ ~ i
Incorporating
1024973
BanksldeWorks,BenfieldWay.Braintree
Essex CM73YS
W h e r e
s 0 I u t I 0 n s
f I 0 w
T e l : +44 (0)1376 329111

Fax: +44 (0)1376 347002
frost
Bankside Works
Benfield Way
Braintree
E s s e x C M 7 3YS
E C. FROST LIMITED
WIRING
WARNING:- THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE EARTHED
The 220/240 volt 5OHz supply must be connected to the hand dryer
via a double pole fused isolator using a mains lead of at least 1.25mm.
bring the mains cable through the grommet to the terminal block.
Wire up as follows:The red or brown lead to the terminal marker L
The black or blue lead to the terminal marked N
The green or green and yellow lead to the terminal marked E
Ensure that the mains cable cannot get into the fan inlet. It is
recommended that the electrical installation be carried out by a
quali~ed electrician and is inspected every six months.
COVER
Replace the cover and fix with the two screws provided. Ensurethat the
earth lead is connected between the chassisand the front case.
SERVICE
The hand dryer has been designed to give many years of trouble free
service. It is recommended that the dryer cover is periodically removed
and any dust removed
Incorporating
i~
\~
~)
u ... /

Registered Office:
Bankslde Works. Benfield Way, Brainlree
Essex
CM73YS

Wh e r e
s o Iut io n s
f Io w
fros
Tel: +44 (0)1376 329111

Fax: +44 (0)1376 347002
Bankside Works
Benfield Way
Braintree
Essex CM7 3YS
F. C. FROST LIMITED
CONNECTION DATA
Supply, 23OV, 5OHz, single phase;
other voltages are available on request.
Maximum load, IOA.
HEATER RATING
2.3 kW
MATERIALS
Covers are of No.4 satin finished brushed
stainless steel or mild steel with polyester powder coat finish.
Equipment chassis consists of corrosionprotected steel.
The units are automatically operated by an
infra-red sensor and associated circuitry
with automatic safety cut-out.
SAFELY
ALWAYS DISCONN ECT TH E POWER SUPPLY BEFORE REMOVI NG
TI-t E COVER.
The operational range of this unit has been factory set. It may be
necessary to adjust this range depending upon the environment. Please
contact the manufacturer for further information on adjustment.
~ , , u~,
,
Directors F C Frost. M I P. MR S H
/
'~.~....~
Registered in England NO 1024973

RegisteredOffice:
8ankside Works. Benfield Way. Bra,ntree
Essex CM7 3YS
I~1~
~I~L/~
~1~
Incorporating
W h e r e
s 0 I u | i 0 n s
f i 0 w
,DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
SECTION ONE:-
F.C.FROST LIMITED
BANKSIDE WORKS
BENFIELD WAY
BRAINTREE
ESSEX CM7 6YS
TEL'FAX:-
01376 329111
01376 347002
SECTION TWO:-
WATROUS WARM AIR HAND DRYERS
MODEL NUMBERS:-
HAND DRYER Wl121 A / P A l PAB

240V AC
50Hz, RATED INPUT 2200W
.................................................................
SECTION THREE:-
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COMPATABILITY (EMC)

89/336/EEC
WITH REFERENCEBSEN50081.1 USING THE
THE LIMITS OF BS EN 55022 Class B
SECTION FOUR:-
DECLARATION
THE MANUFACTURER AS DETAILED IN SECTION ONE OF THIS DECLARATION

HEREBY DECLARE THAT THE PRODUCT(S) AS LISTED IN SECTION TWO OF THIS
DECLARATION HAVE BEEN ASSESSED AND / OR TESTED BY AN INDEPENDENT
THIRD PARTY AND HAVE BEEN FOUND TO COMPLY WITH THE SPECIFICATION(S) /
STANDARD(S) AS LISTED IN SECTION THREE OF THIS DECLARATION.
QUALITY MANAGER
Mr.A.J.Simmons
......................................................................................
SECTION FIVE:-
CE MARK AFFIXED 1995
(95)
fros
T e l : + 4 4 (0)1376 329111
Fax: + 4 4 (0)1376 347002
Eomail: sales@fcfrost.com
Bankside Works
Benfield Way
Braintree
Essex CM7 3YS
F. C. FROST LIMITED
CONSUMABLE ITEMS
This hand dryer is designed to give many years of service. Should
you require spare parts, please contact the manufacturer.
Incorporating
~
~__
Registered ~nEngland No 1024973

Reg,sleredOff,ce
Bankside Works BenfieldWay, Bramtree
EssexCM73YS

Wh e r e
s 0 Iu t I0 n s
f I0 w
frost
Tel: +44 (0)1376 329111

Fax: +44 (0)1376 347002
Bankside Works
Benfield Way
Braintree
Essex CM7 3YS
F. C. FROST LIMITED
MAINTENANCE DATA SHEET

STAI N LESS STEEL
1.0
Never use cleaning materials containing any of the following:

ABRASIVE MAIL-RIAI_
CtIEMICALS
BLEACH
2.0
wash all exposed stainless steel surfaces with soap and water and dry using a
clean soft cloth.
3.0
To maintain ~nish and assist in cleaning of the exposed surfaces it is desirable

to use an industrial steel cleaner, polishing off with a clean soft cloth
4.0
It is important that both cleaning and polishing off operations on stainless

steel should be carried out ALONG THE GRAIN and NEVER ACROSS IT.
5.0
Moving parts such as locks, hinges etc should be periodically oiled, taking care
that the oil does not come into contact with the stainless steel surface.
6.0
EC.Frost Limited recommend the following cleaning agent:

V I]-O PA N
Obtainable from:
Vitopan [_imited
Express Trading Estate
Stone Hill Road
Farnsworth
Bolton
EL4 9TP
Directors: F C Frost M I P. M R S H
D M Frost
Registered Office
Bankslde Works. Benfield Way. Bramtree
Essex CM7 3YS
Incorporating
where
solutions
flow
T e l : + 4 4 (0)1376 329111
Fax: + 4 4 (0)1376 347002
frost
F. C. FROST LIMITED
Bankside Works
Benfield Way
Braintree
Essex CM7 3YS
GUARANTEE
Guarantees and warranties are set out in F.C. Frost Limited
standard terms and conditions of Sale. Copy available on request.
......
:~
%Wjj
D,rectors:FC Frost.M.IP.MRSH
~i
Registered
in EnglandNo 1024973
Registered
Office
8anksldeWorks,BenfieldWay.Braintree
EssexCM7 3YS
Incorporating
Whe r e
$0 Iu t I0 n s
f I0 w
Element/Trade
Location
Steel Frame/Solar Canopy Support
Pavilion - Main arch & support structure
Supplier~Contractor
Britlands
Tilmanstone Works
Pike Road
Eythorne
Dover
Kent CT15 6ET
Tel: 01304 831 583
Fax: 01304 831583
N/A

Use structural engineer for advice/design on any alteration work.
Drawings~Schedules~Calculations
Yes - please see drawings &

calculations in Book 2.
None
Guaran teesANarran ties
COSHH Data Sheet
Fabrication Primer
Recommended spares
None
None
Element/Trade
Location
Ironmongery- 'D' Line
Pavilion - all doors
Supplier/Con tractor
AIIgoods Hardware Ltd
297 Euston Road
London NW1 3AQ
Tel: 0171 387 9951
Fax: 0171 380 1232
~,s Maintenance Guide behind

None
Drawings/Schedules
Ironmongery Schedule by RRP
D Line Catalogue
COSHH Data Sheet
None
Recommended spares
None
1 spare for each set of ironmongery used,

including screws
MATERIALS,
MAINTENANCE
& TRADE DETAILS SHEET
Element/Trade
Decorations - 2 to Pack steelwork
Vinyl matt - Emulsion to walls
Vinyl silk - Emulsion to joinery
Supplier/Con
Location
Pavilion - Core block, all wall & ceilings,
main steel structure
tractor
SJ Cannon
96 Argyle Road
London El6 3NE
Tel: 07930 862 458 (Mob)
0171 366 0698
Fax: 0171 366 1160
Operating/Cleaning/Maintenance
Recommendations
Wipe marks with clean damp cloth. Damaged paintwork to steelwork to be rubbed
down to base metal and recoated with 2 pack.
Statements
When dry these substances are generally accepted as being innocuous. Normal
decorating procedures should be observed.
Ora wings/Schedules
Colour: 9003 (off white)

April Green for 2 pack
( ES 14 E 51)
Permaglaze
COSHH Data Sheet
Permaglaze
Special Disposal
Recommended
Instructions
None
None
spares
SAFETY
DATA
Prnduct
R,lllj$!
Date of Issue
1.
SHEET
f'~'rillogl;l/r'
water
DECEMBER
1997
IDENTIFICATION
OF THE
Proc!uct
na?e
and code
Intended
use.
artd
REVISION
AND
Permoglaze
Permoglaze
Permoglaze
Permoglaze
Permoglaze
Permoglaze
Permoglaze
Permoglaze
Permoglare
Celllrl~)
Page
ON
presentrng
a health
hazard
and PackagIng
for Supply1
lrmits
Name
wrthrn
the
Regulations
f%)
ceilrngs
spray.
HAZARDS
IS not
Avord
4.
AID
FIRST
classriled
rnhaiatron
Irrigate
apart,
copiously
and seek
Coatrngs
? of 8
If breathmg
has stopped,
If unconscrous,
place rn a
and seek medrcal
advice
with clean,
fresh
medical
advice.
skin thoroughly
with
solvents
or thrnners.
soap
and
Keep
water
water
at rest.
for
at
or use
Do
NOT
FIRE
of Chemicals
or assrgned
R-phrases
Xn
XnN
R22
R22-36138-51-53
MEASURES
media:
alcohol
resrstant
foam,
COz,
powder,
water
spray/mist
Recommendations:
As the product
contains
combustible
organic
components,
fire
can produce
dense
black smoke
containing
hazardous
products
of combustion
(see Sectlon
101.
Decompositron
products
may be a hazard
to health.
Approprrate
self-contamed
breathmg
apparatus
may be required.
Cool closed
containers
exposed
to fire with water
spray.
Do not allow run- off from fire fighting
to enter drains
or water
courses.
(Hazard
occupatronal
Symbol
Letter
FIGHTING
(1
<7.5
<5
<2.5
6.
16.
as dangerous
of atomrzed
warm
and at rest.
nothing
by mouth.
(recovery
posrtion)
ingestion:
If accidentally
swallowed
obtain
Immediate
medical
attention.
induce
vomiting.
If conscious
give milk or water
to drink.
5.
for supply
paint during
according
to the
spray
applrcatron.
CHIP
MEASURES
General:
In all cases
of doubt,
or when symptoms
persist.
anythrng
by mouth to an unconscrous
person
seek
rnedrcal
attentron.
Never
ACCIDENTAL
RELEASE
MEASURES
Exclude
non-essential
personnel.
Avoid
breathrng
vapour.
Floors
may become
slippery.
Refer to protective
measures
listed in Sectrons
7 & 8.
Contarn
and collect
spillages
with non- combustible
absorbent
materrals,
e.g. sand,
earth,
vermiculite,
diatomaceous
earth and place rn a clearly
labelled
surtable
contarner
for disposal
in accordance
with the waste
regulations
(see Sectron
131.
Clean preferably
with a detergent;
avoid the use of solvents.
Do not allow to enter drains
or water
courses.
If the product
enters
drains
or sewers
the local water
company
should
be contacted
immediately;
rn the case of contamination
of streams,
rivers
or lakes,
the Environment
Agency.
IDENTIFICATION
This product
Regulatrons.
Based Intenor
Wall and Celling
VERSION:
REVISION
1
Paoe
OBG
Water
1997
Skin Contact:
Remove
contaminated
clothing.
Wash
proprietary
sktn cleaner.
Do NOT use
onlv:
>2
Permoglaze
DECEMBER
Eye Contact:
Contact
lenses
should
be removed.
least 10 minutes,
holding
the eyelids
Extinguishing
Recommended.
meaning
(CHIP)
SHEET
Inhalation:
Remove
to fresh
arr, keep the patient
admrnister
artifrctal
respiratron.
Give
prone position
wrth head to the side
Vrnyl Matt Emulsion

& Bases
Vrnyl Matt Ant1 Mould.
High Opacity
Matt Emulsion
Vinyl Silk Emulston
& Bases.
Vinyl Silk Anti Mould.
Surecover
Matt Emulsion.
Maxilite
Flat Vinyl Emulsion.
Acrylic
Eggshell
& Bases.
Clear Glaze.
INGREDIENTS
Cont.
Range
Acrylrc
Eoqshell
and Glazes
Propane-i:2-drol
Trnted
Bases oniy
Ethane-1
.2-dloi
Nonylphenol
ethoxylate
(1 for full text see Sectron
Product
Range:
Date of Issue:
I of 8
COMPANY.
and
and
DATA
Coarmgs
Akzo Nobel Decorative

Coatings
Ltd.
PO Box 37, Crown
House,
Hollins
Road,
Darwen,
Lancashrre,
Unrted
Kmgdom,
883
Telephone:
01254
704951.
COMPOSITION/INFORMATiON
Substances
lnformatron
exposure
VERSION:
Wall
Decoratron
of rntenor
walls
Applicatron
by brush,
roller
See container
for details.
Name,
address
and telephone
ilumber
2.
Irltcrlor
PREPARATION
1 PGMA/MZ
1 PGFMIMB
1 PGHM
1PGSl
1PGSJ
1 PGSUIV
1 PGML
1PGES
1 PGCG
+6
SAFETY
t3ased
give
19
SAFETY
DATA
Product
Range:
Date of issue:
IDENTlFlCATlON
Permoglaze
DECEMBER
OF THE
Product
codes
and names:
Intended
Name,
address
telephone
SHEET
Solvent
1997
number:
2PGGP
2PGBP
2PGRM/P
3PGSP
1 PGEP/Q
Highly
Flammable
VERSION:
REVISION
AND
Permoglaze
Permoglaze
Permoglaze
Permoglaze
Permoglaze
Use
as indicated
Specialist
1
within
(CHIP)
Cont.
<2.5
<2.5
<2.5
>25
>lO
<2.5
<2.5
<2.5
~2.5
>2.5
>2.5
>2.5
<2.5
<2.5
Xylene
Methanol
Ethanol
Propanol
Butanol
Phenol
Cresol
(HPCt PA 21 Primer.
(HPC) PA 140 Boalloy
Primer.
(HPC) PA 24, Pigmented.
(HPC) PA 24, Clear
(HPC) PA 10 Etching
Primer.
on the
container
PA 24 only:
acid
SHEET
Product
Range:
Date of issue:
Permoglaze
DECEMBER
Notes:
OES
MEL
TWA
4m
mg m-3
Sk
STEL
occupational
exposure
standard
(EH40/94
table 21.
maximum
exposure
limit fEH40/94
table 1, COSHH
Schedule
time weighted
average.
parts per million.
milligrams
per cubic metre.
indicates
a risk of absorption
through
skin.
short term exposure
limrt.
Solvent
1997
Based
Highly
Flammable
VERSION:
REVISION
Specialist
1
Finishes.
1).
label.
Personal
Protection
Respiratory
protection:
If exposure
to hazardous
substances
identified
above cannot
be controlled
by the provision
of
local
exhaust
ventilation
and
good
general
extraction,
surtable
respiratory
protectrve
equipment
should
be worn.
Where
high levels of solvent
vapour
are likely
to arise (eg,
painting
large interior
surface
areas
or in confined
spaces)
air-fed
respiratory
protective
equipment
should be worn.
OBG.
the meaning
of Chemicals
(Hazard
or assigned
occupational
exposure
Range
~50
~25
~10
<lO
<lo
(%I
Symbol
Letter
Information
limits.
R-phrases
(*I
~2.5
< 2.5
>2.5
<lO
<2.5
<2.5
<2.5
<2.5
>50
<95
Hand Protection:
When skin exposure
may occur
wear
suppliers
on appropriate
types.
Barrier
but are not substitutes
for full physical
has occurred.
C
Xn
T
R34
R20
R23/25
Eye Protection:
Eye protection
Xn
T
T
R20
R24/25
R24l25
Skin Protection:
Cotton
or cotton/synthetic
clothrng
should
be removed
cleaner.
Xn
T
Xn
T
T
R20/21
R23/25
C
T
R34
R23/25
Xn
T
T
Xi
R20
R24l25
R24/25
R36/37
R20
R24/25
R24l25
R38
R34
designed
to protect
impervious
gloves,
advice
should
be sought
from glove
creams
may help to protect
exposed
areas of the skin
protection.
They should
not be applied once exposure
against
liquid
splashes
should
overalls
or coveralls
are normally
and the skin washed
with soap
be worn
suitable.
Grossly
contaminated
and water
or a proprietary
skin
R38
PHYSICAL
R34
R34
Bu_t_a_rlone--~-.-~~----~----~~~--.
For (HPC)
Phosphoric
Methanol
Ethanol
Propanol
Butanol
Phenol
Cresol
Butanone
DATA
ON INGREDIENTS
Substances
presenting
a health hazard
and Packaging
for Supply)
Regulations
PA 21 only:
acid
Finishes.
COMPANY.
Akzo Nobel Decorative

Coatings
Limited,
PO Box 37, Crown
House,
Hollins Road,
Darwen,
Lancashire,
United Kingdom,
BB3
Telephone:
01254
704951.
COMPOSlTlON/lNFORMATlON
Name
For (HPC)
Phosphoric
Toluene
Methanol
Ethanol
Butanol
Phenol
Based
PREPARATlON
use:
and
SAFETY
R34
R34
AND
physrcal
state:
flash point:
viscosity:
specific
gravity:
vapour
density:
lower explosion
limit:
solubrlrty
in water:
CHEMICAL
PROPERTlES
Lrquid.
10C
65-75
sets 85 cup
0.9 - 1.15
Heavier
than air.
2% vv.
partrally
miscrble.
method:
method:
method:
BS 3900
BS 3900
BS 3900
AS.
A6.
Al 2
SAFETY DATA SHEET

Product
Range:
Date of issue:
Permoglaze
DECEMBER
For (HPC) PA 10 only:

Phosphoric
acid
Methanol
Ethanol
Propanol
Butanol
Phenol
Cresol
(1 for full text see Section
3.
HAZARDS
Solvent
1997
Based
Highly
Flammable
VERSION:
REVISION
C
T
Xn
T
T
<50
<lO
~50
FIRST
Product
Range:
Date of issue:
R34
R23l25
R20
R24l25
R24l25
seek
6.
Ethanol
Ethanol
attention.
Inhalation:
Remove to fresh air, keep the patient warm and at rest. If breathing
artificial
respiration.
Give nothing
by mouth.
If unconscious,
place
head to the side (recovery
position)
and seek medical advice.
Eye Contact:
Contact
lenses should be removed.
minutes,
holding the eyelids apart,
Irrigate copiously
and seek medical
with
advice.
Skin Contact:
Remove contaminated
clothing.
Wash skin thoroughly
with
proprietary
skin cleaner.
Do NOT use solvents
or thinners.
Ingestion:
If accidentally
swallowed
obtain immediate
medical
hospital accident
emergency
unit. Show this safety
vomiting.
If conscious
give milk or water to drink.
clean,
soap
Based
Highly Flammable
Specialist
VERSION:
REVISION
1
ACCIDENTAL
Finishes.
.
I.
.
MEASURES
alcohol resistant
water jet.
foam,
C02,
powder,
water
RELEASE
II
spray/mist.
combustion
(see
MEASURES
Exclude
sources
of ignition and ventilate
the area. Avoid breathing
vapours.
Warn others
of
the dangers
present
and exclude
non-essential
personnel.
Floors may become
slippery.
Refer
to protective
measures
listed
in Sections
7 and 8. Contain
and collect
spillages
with
non-combustible
absorbent
materials,
eg, sand, earth, vermiculite,
diatomaceous
earth and
place in a clearly
labelled
suitable
container
for disposal
in accordance
with the waste
regulations
(see Section
13). Clean preferably
with a detergent;
avoid the use of solvents.
DO
not allow to enter drains or water courses.
If the product
enters
drains or sewers
the local
water company
should
be contacted
immediately;
in the case of contamination
of streams,
rivers or lakes, the Environment
Agency.
to health.
medical
FIRE flGHTlNG
Solvent
1997
Recommendations:
Fire will produce
dense
black smoke
containing
hazardous
products
of
Section
10). Appropriate
self-contained
breathing
apparatus
may be required.
Decomposition
products
may be a hazard to health.
Cool closed containers
exposed
to fire with water spray.
Do not allow run-off from fire fighting
to enter drains or water courses.
R34
R34
AID MEASURES
persist,
Permoglaze
DECEMBER
Extinguishing
media:
Recommended:
Not to be used:
IDENTlFlCATlON
General:
In all cases of doubt, or when symptoms
by mouth to an unconscious
person.
Finishes.
16
HARMFUL
Harmful
by inhalation
and in contact
with skin.
HIGHLY FLAMMABLE
Highly flammable
liquid and vapours.
Inhalation
of organic solvent
vapours
may be hazardous
For (HPC) PA 140 and (HPC) PA 24 only:
These ingredients
to be detailed on the label:
Butanone,
For (HPC) PA 21 and (HPC) PA 10 only:
These ingredients
to be detailed on the label:
Butanol,
4.
Specialist
1
.
5.
<2.5
<2.5
>25
>2.5
>25
<2.5
<2.5
SAFETY DATA SHEET
Never
give
7.
anything
has stopped,
administer
in a prone position
with
fresh
water
and water
for
or use
at least
attention,
preferably
at the nearest
data sheet. Keep at rest. Do NOT induce
10
HANDLING
AND
STORAGE
Handling
Apply product
only in accordance
with methods
stated in Section
1. Solvent vapours
are
heavier than air and may spread along floors. They may form explosive
mixtures
with air.
Prevent the creation
of flammable
or explosive
concentrations
of vapour
in air and avoid
vapour concentrations
higher than the occupational
exposure
limits. Additionally,
the product
should only be used in areas from which all naked lights and other sources
of ignition have
been excluded.
Electrical
equipment
should be protected
to the appropriate
standard.
Keep
the container
tightly closed.
Exclude sources
of heat, sparks
and open flame. Avoid skin and
eye contact.
Avoid inhalation
of vapour.
Smoking,
eating and drinking
should be prohibited
in
areas of storage
and use. For personal
protection,
see Section 8. Never use pressure
to
empty; the container
is not a pressure
vessel. Always
keep in containers
made of the same
material as the supply container.
Good housekeeping
standards
and regular safe removal
of
waste materials
will minimise
risks of spontaneous
combustion
and other fire hazards.
The
Manual Handling
Operations
Regulations
1992 may apply to the handling
of containers
of
this product.
Packs with a volume content
of 5 litres or more may be marked
with a
maximum
gross weight.
To assist employers
the following
method
of calculating
the weight
for any pack size is given. Take the pack size volume
in litres and multiply this figure by the
specific
gravity
value given in Section
9.This will give the net weight of the coating
in
kilograms.
Allowance
will then have to be made for the immediate
packaging
to give an
approximate
gross weight.
MATERIALS,
MAINTENANCE
8s TRADE DETAILS SHEET

Location
ElementfTrade
I
Pavilion
E3alustrades
I
tSupplier/Con trac for

i_ D Engineering Ltd
(Sreat Northern Works
tiartham Lane
tiertford SG14 1 QW
MO1 992 584049
f-ax: 0 1992 584927
Recommendations
Check tightness of fixings annually
N/A
Statements
Drawings/Schedules
Yes-See drawing schedule

N/A
Special Disposal
N/A
Instructions
Recommended
N/A
spares
MATERIALS,
MAINTENANCE
Element/Trade
Location
MIRRORS
Pavilion
- all toilets
Supplier/Contractor
The Belgravia Mirror & Glass Co. Ltd
Unit 1
Rich Industrial Estate
Devon Street
London SE15 1JR
Tel: 0207 277 7281
Fax: 0207 277 9006
Operating/C/eaning/A#aintenance
Recommendations
As Maintenance for Cleaning Glass sheet behind.

Residual
Risks/Method
Statements
Cuts from broken mirrors

Dra wings/Schedules/Calcu/a
tions
N/A
N/A
COSHH Data Sheet
N/A
Special Disposal
Recommended
None
Instructions
None
spares
THE BELGRAVIA
MIRROR
& GLASS COMPANY LIMITED

SPECIAIJSTS
TELEPHONE:
0171 277 7281 FACSIMILE
0171 277 9006
Apply recommended glass cleaner sparingly over the glass

(usually in spray cans), using a clean cotton rag.
Gently clean surface of the glass until all cleaner is removed
MATERIALS,
MAINTENANCE
Element/Trade
Location
Sanitary Ware
Pavilion
Supplier/Contractor
Installed by Mechanical Services
Contractor (Atalan)
C. P. Hart
Newham Terrace
London
SE1 7DR
Tel: 0207 902 1000
Fax: 0207 902 1001
Recommendations
Clean with warm soapy water,rinse and polish dry. Do not use abrasives
Statements
None
Drawings/Schedules
Sanitaryware Schedule by RRP
None
COSHH Data Sheef
N/A
Special Disposal
Recommended
None
Instructions
Toilet Seats
spares
Health & Safety File - Package 8980

Ellmer Construction
Greenwich Pavilion
Sanitaryware Schedule
For all sanitaryware details please refer to the Sanitaryware
Schedule produced by the Design Team @RF) and included within
Section 2 of the Health & Safety File.
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH
HEALTH
& SAFETY FILE

SECTION 3
FILE REFERENCE
- EP - 3 - 51
GREENWICH
PAVILLION
(INCLUDING
FIT-OUT)
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
- GREENWICH
HEALTH
diz SAFETY FILE GREENWICH
PAVILION
(INCLUDING
FIT-OUT)
VOLUME
INDEX
Volume 1
Architectural/Structural
Ltd)
Detail ( Ellmer Construction
Volume 3

drawings)
Volume 4

drawings)
Volume 5
Volume 6
Catering Facilities - Part I
Volume 7
(including as built
(including as built
INDEX OF VOLUMES
Volume 1 of 7
(ELLMER
CONSTRUCTION
SUBMISSION)
Contents
Introduction
Contents
Materials, Maintenance
& Trade Details Sheets
Volume
2 of 7
Contents
As Built Drawings
Volume
3 of 7
Contents
Mechanical
Volume
4 of 7
Services
Contents
Electrical
Services
B&lands
1B
2B
3c
4D
5B
6C
7B
8
9c
10A
1lA
12B
13A
14A
1OlB
102B
103B
104B
105B
106B
107B
108B
109A
1lOA
1llA
112A
113B
114A
115
117
118B
119B
120B
121B
122
123
124
125A
126
127
1OOlA
1002B
1003B
1004A
1005B
1006B
1007B
1 OOSA
1009B
lOlOB
lOllA
1012B
1013A
1014B
1015A
1016A
1017A
1018
1019
2001A
2002
2003A
2004A
2005A
2006
2007A
2008
2009
2010A
2011B
2012
2013
2014
Calculation
Sheets
1 to 46
Sketch 1
Sketch 2
L D Engineering
3994-1B
2c
3B
4
5B
6B
7B
8
10B
11B
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
HEALTH
DRAWING
EXPERIENCE
- GREENWICH
& SAFETY FILE

CROSS-REFERENCE
Where drawings are cross-referenced in the following

section and are not included as part of the Health & Safety
File, the user should consult the English Partnerships
drawing archives for further details/information.
6V
As Other End
----------------------_
.-------m-m
l%#I.iid.
63
\r\
s
/ 4
) lo
3 No. 127x76~13 UB x f572 :G.
/l&k Bf
3 No, 127~76x13 UB x 47Z
LG,
Mark B2
/
/
Id S. Brifland
1 No 127x76~13 UB x 3472 LG,
/dark Bl2w
Greenwich Pa villionA
,
I
Drawing NdOO3a.
Contract Nu.SX?O
63
130x10 FL T x 15U LG,
2 NQ 022 HOLES
/
J
1 Ho. 127x76~13 UB x 2055 LG.
e
/
/
) IO
X
Mark B3.
/
1 No. 127~76x13 UB x 3865 LG.

/
Mark B4.
&IS..Brifland
Greenwich Pa villion,
Dru wing No200&~

Contract NaS712~
4 k.
127x76~13 UB x 33&/ LG.
Mark BS.
//
W..
S. Britlancl
Greenwich Pa villbn
_ Drawing Ivo,Z&~a.
Contmct Nas71!0
----
_____-___________________--~~-_---_----__-___-_-____
++
6 t@. 822 HOLES

++
-y--
/dark B6.
W,S. Britland
Greenwich Pa villion.
Drawing Ivo.2006.
contract No.S7120
1130
//
70x70~6 RSA-equal x 1350 LG.
6mmFIT/etweld 75Ohlf300 /&s.
(180
btnmFret Weld75Ohlf300 Miss.
//
113u
/'
70 ~+MJ..H~LES
995:
90
/-
1440
995-
1~0.203xl33x25 UB x 5160 LG-
Mark BZ
h/.S. BriHand
Green with Pa vill/on.
Druwing Na2007u.
Contrucf Nos7120
--
-~
2 hJ0, a22 HOLES
ha-
AN holes CSK Far Side
130 / 1 No 70x70~6 RSA-equal x 5665 LG,

/
hs/
bmmF/)y.750
//
200
/
H# 300
5782 1
1 b40 70~70x6 RSA-equal x 5665 LG, for:,

F/t)!150
%s.
//
I
bmm.
90
/
5782
1 No 200x75~23 PFC x 11730hi

11
--
WS. Britland
Greenwich
flif 300
Pa vf/lion.
// I
Drawing No2009.
Contract No. S7lZO
75x12 FLT x 200 LG
75x@ FLT x 200 Lt.
2OOxZ5x23 PFC
--
--F-P----
---
--~~
imm Studs @PO0crs

5-o L-6
100
1 No. 70~70x6 RSA-equal
x 5577 LG.
/
6mm, F/K 150 flit 300 hks,
200
//
1 No. 70x70~6 RSA-equal x 5577 LG. 100

//
bmm, FN750 Hit 300 l&s,
/
1 No. 200x75~23 PFC x 7755-4 LGu --I, n,1/,
W.S.Britlmd.
Greenwich Pa viiii~n,
\iqF?-5
Drawing A/o2OlOa.
Confracf No. S7120
1 No. 70x70~6 RSA-equal x 2800 LG.

1 No. 70x70~6 RSA-equal x/ 2455 LG.
//
//
1 No. 70x70~6 RSA-equal x 2800 L
/
//
1 ilo, 70x70~6 RSA-equal
// ml /
200
/(
//
200
/'/
200
75xfZ FLT x 200 LG.

2 ik2 022 HOLES
x 2732 LG
// loo
/'
38,,
21\
\\
+
c
200x7923
--_-
-----_----_
I
+-++++-+
----I
I
70x5 RT x l-Z5 LCi

38
2572
so
I
----.
WC
8
-----____--
t
I+
----.
2910
SO
I
2910
I-
hI
2 Afug022
All hole:3 CSC Far Side
I
I
HOLES
so
+
I
I-
----
-g
2932
6mms F/&T150 H/t 300 ivbs,
/y
//
W.SBritland
1 No 200x75~23 PFC x ff632 LG

Mark Bff (as drawn),
1 No- 200x75~23 PFC x 11632 LG.
Greenwich
Pa vi(lion.
Drawing )vo.
Contract No. S7l20
100x%?FLT x 150 LG,

4 NO. 022 HOLES 8 50 CKRS
WS. Bri/land
Greenwich Pa viMon-
____
6.
-^---
-___
----
. Drawing No.2&!2.
Confracf ~aS7120
fI30
//

bmm RlIef weld fSOhlf 300 Mss-
f80
70~70x6 RSA-equal x f350 LG.
6mm Fillet Weld f5Ohft 300 Mss.
//
1130
2
R
~ONcw.2ZHOLES
\
\
R
45 ,
/ /i
995
/ ,90 / ,
1240
1~o.203xl33ti5
90
7X40
UB x 57X0 LG-
Mark B14.
W.S. Britland
Greenwich Pa villim
/'
No 822, HOLES
* W.S.Brifland
Greenwith Pa villim
Drawing AbZO.
Cuntrucf No.s7l2o
01622
FROM
_I.
01622
)---------:
755573
JOHN
755573
ARCHER
MAf.07.33
11
Designed
Date
Checked
CLIENT
:16
P-003
- - ---
Date
by
M
+.;,
by
Sheet
99
No.
/
Contract
7-k
No.
81622
EfL?sE
) I,
0 1622
755573
JOHN
755573
ARCHER
[!!!i@Britland
~&=..vJ/w
PROJECT
CLIENT
f?gY+4LdEi+4
Titmanstond
WQkS
MAY.07.99
Fik. Fload. tyihorn.

Own.
Kent CTIS 4NB
Engbd
Tolophono:
Fu;
Designed
65
by
0~04 W I 56s
0304 831983
Date
Checked
Date
65
11
m&y
17
Sheet
bL
y,9
by
P-004
No..
7
Contract No.
7/a
01622
JOHN
CLlEtiT
c$-cr*&Gw
ARCHER
MAY.07.93
Tilmmsro~
Wwks
ISkI Rclad. Eylhom~
C~vw.KwlCT15
4NB
Eng(ad
Tsl~na:
0.304 8315833
@JIMland
PROJECT
755573
Fu:OJO4
Fh//u&+4
631983
11:18
Oesigned
Oate
Date
P.005
by
4469
Checked
by
Sheet
79
No.
3
Contract
NO.
FROt
01622
755573
JOHN
ARCHER
MAY.07.99
Checked
CLIENT
I Date
11 :20
P.006
by
Contract
I
7~za
No.
01622
FROM
_ 1.
1t
- !0-6Z?g
755573
Britland
755573
JOHN
ARCHER
MAY.10.33
12248
Designed
Date
Date
by
#R-j
Checked
by
P.002
Sheet No.
99
5
Contrrct
7f20
No.
Tilmanslone
Works
Pike Road. Eythorne
Oovw. Kent CT15 4NB
Telephone: 0304 83 1583
Fax:O304.%31983
PROJECT
CLIENT
-Q--A&
&+4LJ.Bec/
Date
MP-~
Checked
by
99
I
Contract
I
Date
SH
No.
01622
FRW
0 1622
755573
JOHN
755573
.
MAY.
ARCHER
T&phone:
0304 83 I WI
Fax:@304 831983
PROJECT
CLIENT
-SIN*
d+-dcce-J
12:49
10.99
Date
m&y
Checked
Date
bv
P.003
yp
CL
Contract
7Y-zo
No.
.
FROM.
01622
0 1622
755573
JOHN
755573
ARCHER
MAY.
10.33
Designed
12:50
P.004
Sheet No.
by
7
Checked
CLIENT
by
Contract
7/m
Date
L
NO.
01622
01622
FROt.
755573
JOHN
755573
ARCHER
MAY.10.99
12x51
Designed
Date
by
by
CLIENT
-4%
w-33
68
//O-Q9
--ST
Sheet No..
bntrrct
7/w
Date
/So
P.005
99
may
Checked
No.
01622
FROF
01622
755573
JOHN
755573
MAY.10.93
f%=?CHER
12:52
P.006
by
Sheet No.
WC* fw4d. Eylhoma

Oovu.
Kmt CT15 4NB
Designed
Date
#-I&V
Checked
CLIENT
Date
L
by
99
Contract No.
;7/20
01622
FROM
01622
755573
JOHN
755573
ARCHER
MAY.10.93
12:53
Designed
Date
by
~?PJ
Checked by
CLIENT
@ate
P-007
Sheet No.
72
/O
Contract
7ezcJ
No.
.
Tiknanstone
Works
Pike Road. Eytta~rne
Dover. Kent CT15 4NB
England
Telephone: 0304 83 1583
Fa*:lJ304831983
[&!@ritland
PROJECT
CLIENT
&e-.eEJGe
k334ld
Designed
Date
m--j
Checked
Date
by
PL
99
by
Sheet No.
//
Contract
I/20
N6.
\
mnanstone
Works
Pike Road. EythOrne
Dover. Km1 CT1 5 4NB
England
[f@Britland
PROJECT
CLIENT
~f=-#J+/A+
Telephone:0304 a31583
Fa.x:@304831983
A?i+A~~
Designed
Date
~69
Checked
Date
by
Sheet No.
,99
by
A2
Contract
7/z.&
Nb.
@#3ritland
liknansbne
Works
Pike Road. Eylhome
Engbnd
Telephone: 0304 93 1593
Fax0304
9.31993
Designed
Date
by
MP-~
Checked
CLIENT
by
Sheet No.
,99
73
Contract
7/7LJ
Date
N6.
@/Britland
PROJECT
CLIENT
Tiimanstona Wcfks
Pike Road. Evlhorne
Dover. Kent &-I 5 4NB
Englad
Telephone: 0304 a3 1583
Fax:O3048319t33
Designed
Date
MP-~
Checked
Date
by
by
Sheet No.
$79
/c+
Contract
7120
Nb.
k@Britland
Tiknans~one Works
Pike Aoad. Eythoms
Dovw.KenlCTl54NB
England
T&phone:
0304.33 1583
Fax:CW4831993
.
Designed
Date
~6-7
Checked
CLIENT
Date
by
by
Sheet No..
99
d!5Contract
7/za
N6.
T~lmanstone Works
Pike Road. Eythome
OOVW. KenI CT15 4Nf3
EnglXld
Telephone: 0304 83 t 583
Fax:0304 831983
.
Designed
Date
PROJECT
CLIENT
Checked
Date
by
mJ$
Sheet
f
9
by
No..
ds
Contract N&
@lQ3ritland
lilmanstone
Works
Pike Road. Eythorne
Oovw. Kent CT15 4NB
England
Telephone: 0304 83 1583
Fax: 0304 831983
Designed
Date
Checked
CLIENT
t Date
L
by
Fu^,
by
Sheet No.
99
7
Contract
7/za
N6.
@!k/Britland
lihanstone
Wwks
Pike Road. Evthorne
Oovw. Kent CT-IS 4NB
England
Telephone: 0304 83 1583
FaxC304831983
PROJECT
CLIENT
~w.A-i/cM
~%+-lL-,~
Designed
Date
Checked
Date
by
CZU~J
by
Sheet No.
9 9
/8
I 7120
Contract
No.
~lmanstone
Wcnks
Pike Road. Eythorne
Dover. Kent CT15 4NEi
England
Telephone: 0304 83 I 583
FaxO3CM831983
.
Designed
Date
&%^/
Checked
Date
by
by
Sheet No.
f
99
/9
Contract
7ho
N&
Britland
Tdmansrone Works
Pike Road, Eythorne
Dover. Kent CT15 4N0
England
Tel@one:
0304 83 1583
FexCBJ4
831983
.
Designed
Date
Checked
CLIENT
Date
by
5-L
by
Sheet No.
99
Contract
No.
Tdmanslone Works
Pike Road. Eythorne
C~vw.KmlCTl54NB
England
Telephone: 0304 03 1583
Fax:0204831983
PROJECT
CLIENT
.
Designed
by
Date ?U,J
Checked
Date
Sheet
9 9
No.
z/
by
Contract
7120
t
No.
Tilmans~one Worka
Pike Road. E~~XMJ
Oova. Kent CT15 4NB
England
Telc@m~:
0304 83 1583
FaxG3Od831983
Britland
Designed
Date
Checked
PROJECT
CLIENT
&cEzL.l~~~
h?h.4,&
Date
by
5urJ
by
bL
99
Sheet No.
zz
Contract
7/zzD
Nd.
Tlmanslone
Works
Pike Road. Ey~horne
Cover. Kent CT-15 4NB
England
Tslephcne:03W 83 1583
Fax:0304@3!983
ritland
PROJECT
CLIENT
&e..ca4/e
0%+4LdE+d
.
I
Designed
Date
Checked
by
TcJd
by
Sheet No.
99
z.3
Contract
No.
;r-lI
ritland
-~
Tilmanslone Woks
Rke Road. Eyfhorna
Dover. Kml CT15 4NB
England
Telephone: 0304 83 I 583
Fax:0324831983
.
Designed
Date
Checked
CLIENT
Date
by
5-L..J
by
1$
Sheet No.
99
Contract
Nd.
lilmanslona
Worka
Pike Road. Eythorna
Dover. Kent CT15 4NE3
England
elepbne:
0304 83 I583
Fax0304831983
Britland
Designed
Date
by ,bL
5AJ
CLIENT
~~~~
~5gAL2a9-4
ZS
99
I
PROJECT
Sheet No.
Checked
Date
by
Contract
7/D
N6.
Tilmanslone Works
Pzke Road. Eyihmw
.Oovw. Kent CT1 5 4NB
England
Telephone: 0304 83 1583
Fsr:WO4
831983
Designed
Date Z&A
Checked
CLIENT
by
Date
by
bL
Sheet No.
9 9
Contract
71522
Nd.
lilmanslone
Waks
Pike Road. Eyuwrne
Dover. Ken1 CT15 4NB
England
Telephone: 0304 83 1583
Fax0304
831983
ritland
Designed
Date
Checked
PROJECT
CLIENT
y$&.&=Jv&w
e?MuBcJ
Date
by
5-cuf-J
by
Sheet No.
If
9 9
27
Contract
N6.
ritland
Tdmanslone Works
Pzke Road. Eyrhome
Cover. Kent CT15 4N8
England
Telephone: ox-4 83 1se.3
Fax0304831983
.
Designed
Date
Checked
CLIENT
Date
by ,i7L
CL-J
by
Sheet No.
99
Contract
Nd.
IihanSfone
Works
Pike Road. Eyihome
Dover. Kent CT I5 4NB
England
Telephone: 0304 03 I583
Fax:0304 831983
PROJECT
CLIENT
~I-/.w-
e?h/k,e-J
Designed
Date
Checked
Date
by
5kJ
by
bL
99
Sheet No.
29
Contract
Nd.
2
Ie
PROJECT
ritland
+ee/!sJG,w
lilmanatone Work!,
Pike Road, Eythome
Dover. Kent CTI 5 4NEl
England
Telephone: 0304 831583
Fax:XO4&31983
Designed
by
Date
SAJ
Checked
~3$+//Ued
602
4@
Contract
I
Date
No.
30
99
by
CLIENT
Sheet
bL
No.
4
..I,:3
.a
BtMand
...r
lilmanstone
Works
Ptke Road. Eylhorne
England
releph3n.3:0304 83 I se3
Fax: CO04 831983
Designed
Date
by
&JC
Checked
by
Date
f
99
Sheet No.
3
Contract
N&
$qBritland
PROJECT
CLIENT
lilmanstone
Works
Rke Road. Eythome
Dover. KenI CT1 5 4NB
England
Telaptme:
0304 83 I 583
Fax:0304
831983
.I
Designed
Date
by
p9
6~
Checked
Sheet No.
by
32.
Contract
7/-20
Date
N6.
Tilmanstone Wcrks
Pike Road. Eylhorne
Dover. Kant CT15 4NB
England
felephooe:
0304 03 1583
Fax:O304&31983
Designed
Date
PROJECT
CLIENT
&-e..EJ>/e
Y3!3!~&3d
Checked
Date
by
t7L
>9
fit
by
Sheet
No..
33
@#3ritland
Tilmanstone Works
Pike Road. Eythome
England
Telephone: 0304 83 1583
Fax:Lt30453l9.33
.
Designed
Date
CLIENT
by
Contract
7/D
Date
No.
3e
59
fit
Checked
Sheet
by
No.
Sheet No.
35
PROJECT
CLIENT
+c&cA5JGe
Checked
FWLJM
I
I Date
by
Contract
I/Q22
Nb.
1i!!@ritland
Tilmansfma
Waks
Pike Road. Eyrhorne
Dover. Kml CT15 4NB
England
Telephone: 0304 83 1583
Fax:831963
Designed
Date
Checked
CLIENT
Date
by
AL
by
Sheet No.
9s
.36
Contract Ni.
I--
Ii3lBritlana
I
,-
lilmanslone
Wcfks
Ptke Road. Eythome
England
Telephone: 0304 831583
Fex:0304.331983
Designed
Date
&L&i-
Checked
CLIENT
Sheet No.
by
by
>9
37
Contract
7/20
Date
No.
$qBritland
lilmanstone
Woks
Pike Road. Eytfwrne
Dover. Kent CT15 4N8
England
Telephone: 0304 83 1583
Fax:0304831983
.
Designed
Date
Checked
CLIENT
by .bL
Sheet No.
>9
fit
by
3Lp
Contract
7/zo
Date
..
No.
Elmanstone
Woks
Pike Road. Eyttmme
Dow.
Kent CT1 5 4NB
England
elephone: 0304 831583
Fax0334
831983
.
Designed
Date
Checked
CLIENT
Date
by
&L
99
by
Sheet No.
3P
Contract
N&
@iBritland
Tilmanslone Waks
Pike Road. Eylhome
England
I
I
FacLXlO4~~9~
I
.I
Designed
Date
Checked
PROJECT
CLIENT
Date
by
fit
by
)f
1 Sheet No.
199
I
Contract
No.
lilmanstone
Works
Pike Road. Eythxne
Cover. Km1 CTI 5 4NB
Erqland
Telephone: OX-4 83 1583
Fax:0304831983
@3)Britland
.
Designed
Date
by
SC
Sheet No.
)9
Q-/
.Checked
PROJECT
CLIENT
/S/O67
37G7*3
CA3
Contract No.
71522
Date
z x 5
by
j:31
Designed
Tz%g
Britland
Far:OX-i831983
Date
Checked
PROJECT
-4/e
by
Sheet No.
59
fin
9-z
by
Contract
05+-4uE3-4
I Date
CLIENT
65
/5
7120
Nd.
lilmanslone
Works
Pike Road. Eythorne
England
elephone: 0304 83 I583
Fax:@304 831983
li3jBritland
PROJECT
CLIENT
l&Q45Ai/e
7
/ued
.
Designed
Date
Checked
Date
by
SC
by
Sheet No.
59
Contract
N6.
I 53)
PROJECT
CLIENT
Britiand
lilmanslone
Waks
Pike Road. Eythome
Oova. KenI CT15 4NB
Efl.$aXl
T&phone:
0304 a3 1583
Fax0304831993
Designed
Date
99
4te
Checked
. Date
by
by
Sheet No.
4-P
Contract
7120
No.
lilmsnslono
Works
Pike Road. Eythome
Telephone: 0304 83 1583
Fax:0304831983
PROJECT
CLIENT
w+.fGe
Fz+%.bud
Date &u+
Checked
Date
99
by
4-s
Contract
7/a
Nd.
$3/Britland
lilmansloms
Waks
Pike Road. Eythome
OOVS~. Km-11CT15 4Nl3
England
Telephone: 0304 83 I 5.33
Fax0304831983
.
Designed
Date
R@+
Checked
CLIENT
Date
by
by
Sheet No.
99
Contract
7/z22
Nd.
i-
300.0
I
i
II
200
_I
I
360
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH
HEALTH
& SAFETY FILE

SECTION 3
FILE REFERENCE
- EP - 3 - 51
GREENWICH
PAVILLION
(INCLUDING FIT-OUT)
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
- GREENWICH

PAVILION
(INCLUDING
FIT-OUT)
VOLUME
INDEX
Volume 1
Ltd)
Volume 2
Volume 4

drawings)
Volume 5
Volume 6
Volume 7
(including as built
INDEX OF VOLUMES
Volume
1 of 7
(ELLMER
CONSTRUCTION
SUBMISSION)
Contents
Introduction
Con tents
Contents
As Built Drawings
Volume
3 of 7
Contents
Mechanical
Volume
4 of 7
Services
Contents
Electrical
Services
OPERATING AND
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
MECHANICAL
SERVICES
Mechanical Contractor:
Atalan Mechanical Services Ltd.
Ringway House East.
Kelvin Road,
Newbury,
Contract:
Greenwich Pavilion
The Millennium Dome
Greenwich
London.
Berkshire.
SE10 OAR
RG14 2DB.
Tel: (01635)-582323.
CONTENTS.
CONTRACT
DIRECTORY.
SECTION 1:
INTRODUCTION.
SECTION 2:
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.
SECTION 3:
TECHNICAL
DATA OF PLANT.
SECTION 4:
OPERATING
PROCEDURES.
SECTION 5:
MAINTENANCE
SECTION 6:
EMERGENCY
SECTION 7:
AS INSTALLED
SECTION 8:
TEST CERTIFICATES.
SECTION 9:
COMMISSIONING
SECTION 10:
EQUIPMENT
PROCEDURES.
PROCEDURES.
DRAWINGS.
CERTIFICATES.
SCHEDULES.
ATALAN
MECHANICAL
SERVICES
LTD
GREENWICH
PAVILION-MILLENNIUM
CONTRACT
DIRECTORY
Client:
The New Millennium Experience
Architects:
Richard Rogers Partnership

Thames Wharf Studios
Rainville Road
London W6
Tel: 020 7385 1235
Fax: 020 7385 8409
Consultim
Engineers:
Buro Happold
41-43 Praed Street
London W2
Tel: 020 7927 9700
Fax: 020 7927 9701
Main Contractor:
McAlpine Laing Joint Venture

Site Office Gate 1
Drawdock Road
Greenwich
London SE 10 OBB
Tel: 020 8293 8600
Building Sub-Contractor:
Ellmer Construction Ltd

Tudor House
26 Upper Teddington Road
Hampton Wick
Kingston upon Thames KTl 4DY
Tel: 020 8943 5252
Fax: 020 8943 3969
Mech. Services Contractor:
Atalan Mechanical Services Ltd

Ringway House East
Kelvin Road
Newbury
Berkshire RG14 2DB
Tel: 01635 582323
Fax: 01635 582527
DOME.GREENWICH
ATALAN
MECHANICAL
SERVICES
LTD
GREENWICH
CONTRACT
Electrical Contractor:
Controls & Control

Wiring Contractor:
PAVILION-MILLENNIUM
DIRECTORY
R.E.L. Electrical Ltd

Unit 154 Cannons Workshop
5 Cannons Drive
London E 14 4AS
Tel: 020 7515 5154
Fax: 020 7515 5710
Satchwell Control Systems Ltd

Farnham Road
Slough
Berkshire SLl 4UH
Tel: 01753-550550
Fax: 0 1753-824078
DOME.GREENWICH
SECTION 2:
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION.
2.1.
MAIN EXHIBITION
2.2.
OFFICE & FUNCTION
2.3.
WC EXTRACT
2.4.
KITCHEN
2.5.
SHEET METAL
2.4.
COOLING
2.7.
DOMESTIC
WATER
2.8.
CONTROLS
& CONTROL
AREA SUPPLY AIR SYSTEM.

ROOM EXTRACT
SYSTEM.
SYSTEM.
EXTRACT
SYSTEM.
DUCTWORK
SPECIFICATION.
WATER PIPEWORK
SYSTEM.
SERVICES.
SYSTEMS.
2.1.
Main Exhibition Area Supply Air System.
This section should be read in conjunction with drawing number:

C/3203-1/3.
From the existing air handling unit, located above the plantroom area, as indicated
on the above drawing, a new, sheet metal ductwork distribution system has been
installed to provide conditioned air to the exhibition area.
Fresh air is drawn into the air handling unit via 2 no. 1350mm x 155Omm weather
louvres located at low level within the plantroom. The air then passes through inlet
attenuators, pre-filters, bag filters, the internal heater/cooling batteries, & 2 no.
centrifugal fans.
From the discharges of the fans 2 no. 900mm 0, spirally wound supply ducts have
been installed along the entire length of the building incorporating discharge
attenuators, at high level.
Conditioned air is delivered into the area via 28 no. side wall diffusers, generally as
detailed on the above drawing.
The above system has been designed to provide supply air between the ranges of
1.80m3/sec (min) & 10.0m3/sec (max) upon the dictates of sensors located at high
level monitoring the building requirements.
2.2.
Office & Function Room Extract Air System.

C/3203-2/3.
From a new 630mm 0 axial type extract fan with a duty of 1.15m3/sec, located
within the plantroom area as indicated on the above drawing, a new, sheet metal
ductwork distribution system, incorporating inlet & discharge attenuation, has been
installed.
Air is removed from the function room area at a rate of 0.95m3/sec, via a ceiling
mounted, linear slot diffuser. A bell mouth, ducted inlet located above the false
ceiling has been installed, thus utilising the ceiling void as a plenum, generally as
detailed on the above drawing.
Air is removed from the office area at a rate of 0.20m3/sec, via a 150mm 0 branch
duct which terminates with a ceiling mounted, perforated face diffuser, complete
with factory fitted opposed blade damper & rear adapter box, generally as indicated
on the above drawing.
2.3.
WC Extract Air System.

C/3203-2/3.
Within the plantroom area a new cabinet type, twin fan with a duty of 0.24m3/sec
and incorporating auto change-over has been installed, as indicated on the above
drawing. From this fan a new, sheet metal ductwork distribution system,
incorporating inlet & discharge attenuation, has been installed.
Air is removed from the individual WC cubicles via ceiling mounted, extract valves,
complete with factory fitted air volume control .
2.4.
Kitchen Extract Air System.
Again, within the plantroom area a new 400mm 0 axial type extract fan with a duty
of 1.0m3/sec has been installed. From this fan a new, sheet metal ductwork
distribution system, incorporating inlet & discharge attenuation, has been installed,
generally as indicated on the above drawing.
A single, 85Omm x 500mm extract duct which terminates within the kitchen area
has been provided for future extension by the nominated kitchen fit-out contractor.
Each of the 3 no. galvanised sheet steel discharge ducts from the above extract
systems are connected to bright, stainless steel, twin wall insulated flues prior to
exiting the plantroom area centrally above the main access doors. These flues then
rise up the front face of the building and discharge to atmosphere 1OOOmmabove
the apex of the roof, as indicated on the above drawing.
2.5.
Sheet Metal Ductwork.
All sheet metal ductwork has been manufactured and installed to the latest HVCA
code for low velocity and low pressure ductwork, DW 144, and all ductwork is
manufactured from best quality galvanised sheet steel.
Where these ducts pass through floors, the fire integrity of the structure has been
maintained by the installation of fire dampers. These dampers are of the 2 hour,
folding shutter type with the blades held out of the air stream by fusible links set at
70 c.
Volume control dampers have also been installed to balance the volume of air to
each area and are supplied complete with manual lockable quadrants.
2.6.
Cooling Water Pipework.

Q240 10499/3-3
Cooling water has been provided via reclaimed water from the adjacent, below
ground, Thames Water treatment tank from pipework connections provided by
others at low level within the plantroom.
From these connections a new, pumped, black steel pipework distribution system
has been installed.
The 2 no. Pullen, direct drive pumps have been selected to deliver cooling water at a
rate of 8kg/sec, as specified, and are provided with all necessary isolating valves,
strainers, check valves, flexible connections, test points, gauges and differential
pressure switches.
The air handling unit cooling coil has been connected to the cooling water system by
means of black heavyweight welded pipework complete with all necessary 3-port
motorised control valves, isolating valves, commissioning stations, air vents,

flexible connections and drain cocks and routed as detailed on the above drawing.
All flow & return pipework has been insulated, as specified, to prevent
condensation.
Additionally, the reclaimed water has been utilised to provide water to the WC and
urinal flushing cisterns
2.7.
Domestic Water Sevices.

Q240 1049913-3
Domestic water services have been provided via a new incoming boosted water
supply from a 50mm 0 pipework connection provided by others at low level within
the plantroom.
From this connection a new, copper pipework distribution system has been installed,
as indicated on the above drawing, to serve all the wash hand basins, cleaners sinks
etc. Additionally, a 35mm 0 valved and capped supply has been provided to the
kitchen area for future connection by the nominated kitchen fit-out contractor.
This boosted cold water supply also serves the Heatrae Sadia 2000/45 electric water
heater located within the plantroom. This water heater has been installed with all
necessary valves, safety devices and accessory packs, as recommended by the
manufacturer, to operate on an un-vented system.
From the above water heater a copper flow and return pipework distribution system
has been installed, as indicated on the above drawing, to serve all the wash hand
basins, cleaners sinks etc.
All the above pipework, where, concealed has been insulated and each draw-off
point has been provided with Ballofix type isolating valves for ease of
maintenance.
2.8.
Controls & Control Systems.
The control systems for this project have been designed, manufactured, installed and
commissioned by:
SATCHWELL
CONTROL SYSTEMS LIMITED

BUILDING 208
EPSOM SQUARE
HEATHROW AIRPORT
HOUNSLOW
MIDDLESEX
TW6 6ES
Tel:
0181-564-8777
Facsimile:
0181-897-6931
MILLENNIUM EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVILION
MOTOR
CONTROL
Designed By
Satchwell Control Systems Limited

POBox 57
Farnham Road
Slough
Berks.
SLl4uH
Reference
6002295lSCS/MCPIO 1
P-ANEL
Contents
Section 1
MCP - Circuit Diagrams
Section 2
MCP - Field Wiring Diagrams
Section 3
MCP - Equipment Data Sheets

.
Section 1
MCP Circuit Diaczrams
.
FUSE
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD
CF4
1DA
--aCONlROL
CIRCUIT LIVE
PUSH 70
TES1
I/-
LJ!J
I
LAMP TEST
I
CONTROL
CF9
lOChA
I
CIRCUIT
BMS OUTSlA?lONS
CONTROL CIRCUIT/
SOCKET OUTLET/
EXTERNAL IlOV FEED
r
LlCHlNlNC SURGE
24V CONTROL
CIRCUIT LIVE
I
24V CONTROL fIRCUlT
r
11lol
I
BV-DC
POWR SUPPLY
TO KEYPAD
NOlE: TERMINAL No.3 l-38

24OV CONTROL
Ll
L2
L3
TERMINALS No.3 loo-137

24VAC CDNTROL
MAINS
SUPPLY
(FUSED
TERMINAL No.s
BMS
AT ?? AMP)
,7x,-I,
FJ
,a,cn*eu
,,^
301-347
LAS1 RELAY USED R26

..^.
LllOl
,ys,ems
LM
MODIFICAION
TllLE
n&e
CIRCUIT
MOTOR
-
DIAGRAM
CONTROL
PAN EL
--
1 FZEV.
1
_-I
-
SHEET
.__
ISSUE No.
DRC. No. 6002295/CD/MCP

1
Of
17
.EV. NO. 0
SUPPLY
FEED
ON
G--
MOlOR
SPEED
c-1L/1
AIR HANDLING
UNIT
SUPPLY FAN
@ Solchwell Conlrol Syslem3 Lid
POBOY57. rLRNHAYROLO
9WM. FJIRHS.91 4UI
lhi drorleg II Ill* propaly a,
Solchndl Conk, S~lcmr lld and may
ml br cwird cs dlscbsed lw ml purpose crcrpl as
nhxm.cd in rrilhq by Salthwdl Conlm, Systmn Lid
7ZY
ezs=- .I
RUNNING
PROJECT
DATE
1lTLE
MILLCNIIJM EXPERICNCC
GREENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH, LONDON
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANE .L
l---l
-. I==
___~-___
MODIFICATION
l
__c_-
fAUL1
- REV.
.
ORG. NO. 6002295/CD/MCP
SHEET
__
WitIf
2
No.
OF
17
TV.
No.
SUPPLY
FEED
SUPPLY
FEED
-----El
-1
----El
121y)-
OFF
F2A
?A
F28
?A
THYRISTOR
CONlROL UNIT
???
1HYRISlOR
CONlROL UN11
???
.
Ll
All
INPUT
OUlPUl
OUTPUl
11 I
.
CONTROL
SIGNAL
11
THYRISTOR
OUTPUT
MODULE
2/
UNIT
2/
1Ll IL2 lL3
THYRISTOR
OUTPUT
MODULE
UNIT 38
???
3A
137
--
--
54.OKW
--
-El
???
1
Yilfl
r.I
I
I
I
I
-1
54.OKW
ELECTRIC
HEATER BATTERY
AHU
t.y 3IUllWtYl Lcm,,O, >yr,ems LIO

POBOX51. lLmMP ROAD.
5LWG. EWXS.XI au,,
hi3 dmwhg if lhc propa,y 0,
hldwdl Control S+,m Ltd. cmd may
nal be copied a dx,o,cd ,a my pu,po,c rap, o,
,,,-
A k r.llh h Clr*.-llP^^I.^Ir,^.^.....I IA
PROJECT
DATE
.
TllLE
MILILENNIUM EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH, I -DON.
SAFETY
CIRCUIT
CUT-OUT
HEAKR
ON
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
~t-l
1
I
MODlFlCAllON
*
ISSUE NC -
j REV. No.
-.
--- . .
...--I#
SUPPLY
FEED
OFF
ON
r---I
I
I
-I
I10
--------------
ON
I
II
INPUT
OUTPUT
I
MOTOR SPEED
CONTROL
U2 V2 W2 PE
I
30 18
I
I
I
27
12
r
c
START/STOP
I
61 53 55
I
CONrROL
(SHI 15)
FUNCTION
EXTRACT
0
/7Lz3
ROOM
FAN
Salchwell Conlral Syrlems Ltd.
POBOX57. lLRM,U RWO.
RUNNING
PROJECT
DATE
1lTLL
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
MODIFICATION
FAULl
1 REV.
~~
ORC. NO. 6002295/C0/MCP
SHEET
OF
17
-47
ISSUE No.
REV. No.
SUPPLY
FEED
[1
F4
?A
ON
I OFF
AU10
-----El
-----El
ON
ob
.
Cd
I
_I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
14
2
i
I
I I
I
AUTOMAW.
;ti;NCEOVER
FAULT
?
--I
IO
L&L
EuAlW
,
k
RS
1
f
t
-23
-
.0
@ Salchutell Conlrd Syslems Ltd.

POBOX51. I*,
rIOLO.
ncuwc. ERIC%Sal 4ui
This &orb9 is ihr propaly of
hlchrdl ConhI Syhns Ltd. md may
o+d c, dixbscd lo( my wq.ose excepl as
... . ^-* . .~A..,.., C._l.-. I,>
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVJLION
GREENWICH. L
)ON.
RUNNING
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PAN
TRIPPED
REV.
MODIFICAlION
DATE
1llLE
PROJECT
i-----E
KITCHEN
EXTRACT FAN
TOILET
EXTRACT FAN
UNIT
DRG. No. 6002295/CD/MCP
^..rrl
nr
47
SUPPLY
FEED
F6
?A
F7
?A
ON
1 .
- -I
CHILLED
PUMP
/---lLzs
WATER
No.1
@ Satchwll Contrd Systems Ltd.

w BOX57. rmawl mm.
CHILLED
PUMP
PROJECT
WATER
No.2
TRIPPED
DATE
IITLE
MILLENNIUM EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH. LaIDON.
.
170
[x3
7c2
Ix2 7c3
L-711
. . . .
-:I
PI---i
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
REV.
MOOlFlCAllON

SHEET
ISSUE No.
OF
.-I
17
REV. No. 0
---
-m
PROJECl
MODIFICATION
TIlLE
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH,
LohlDON.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
ORG. No. 6002295/CD/hKP
Lid
POBOX51. lLRmLM ROLO.
slcnw1. Emts. XI I
7th Coring is lhe ptopaly 0,
%!ctwdl Conhd S,slrms Lid. and my
nol be cwied a dndosed la my puqose except 01
wlhc./I
by Solchwll Cmlrol Swlrmn , ld
PROJECl
DAlE
IllLE
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GRECNWICtI PAVILION
GREENWICH, LOmON.
CIRCUIT
DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANE
MODlFlCAllON
FIRE
Sla(U
I
?
FIRE ALARM
SYSTEM
@ Solchwell Conlrol Syslems Lld.

PROJECJ
PO BOX51. TMlMw R010.
9.cuM Elms sll um
lbil d4ovingb Itle popefly 01
hidwdl Corlrd Sptems Lid md may
ml bs COW w &scbwd lor my w~~ac cxccpl o,
cwthalsed h wiling by Solchrall Cmlrd Splcm~ Lid.
7lJLE
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH. LONDON.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
DATE
MODIFICAJION
- REV.
ORG. No. 6002295/CO/MCP

SHEET
ISSUE No.
OF
1
17
REV. No. 0
AIR HANDLING
UNIT
23
24
.
1
.--.-*--DUCT SMOKE
DETECTOR
@ Solchwell Control Syale~ns Lid
I0 BOX51. IARIIHAROAD.
Pcm. BLRKS.%I IW
ltd. drarbg is Ihc propnly 01
hlchwil Conlral Syrtmrt Ltd. md may
ml be copied o( dmlorrd lu my pu,prxe rmp, w
oulhc,lted h rtilhq by Solchwll Conlrol Syrlcmn Lid
SUPPLY FAN
AIR FLOW
PKOJECl
BAG FILTER
DIRTY
FRESH AIR
DAMPER
DATE
lllli
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GRLENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH, LONDON.
pJ
4
PANEL
FILTER DIRTY
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
___.
MODIFICATION
.
REV.
1
DIG
No. 6002295/CD/MCF
__
SHEET
10
__
ISSUE No.
OF
1
17
REV. No.
-_
41
fFJ
LOCAL THAMES
WATER
--
,
CWlRcl
IHIERLDW
(:lYfl,
.
131 1
121
1
L12
u
2
-Z===,-
5olchwell Control Syslems Lid

,hirr &tJjlT)t~p~%~~;
%lch~dl Conlrol Syrlm Lid and may

rol be copied w dixloscd ia any purpose cxcepl 03
oulhaised In rrilhq by Salchwell Conlrol S~lrm Lid
PROJECT
DATE
117LE
MILLENNIUM
GREENWICH
GREENWICIH,
EXPERIENCE
PAVILION
LONDON.
CIRCUIT
MOTOR
REV.
PANEL
-~
ORG. No. 6002295/CO/MCP
~.
DIAGRAM
CONTROL
tJODIfICAlION
-
SHEET
11
ISSUE No.
OF
1
17
REV. No. 0
&icy
@ Salchwell Conlrol Syslerns Ltd.

POBOX57. IImw ROU).
PWCH. EiRltS.SLI w,,
1hiS dlowiy b Itle prqmly 0,
Salchrell Conlrd Splcms Lid ond my
oulhorised in wiling by Solc+well Control Sy;lem Lid
PROJECT
DATE
.lllLE
MILLENNIUM
EXPERILNCC
GREENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH, LONDON.
CIRCUIT DlAGliAM
MOTOR CONTROL- PANEL
MODlflCAllON
---
__REV
DRC. No. 6002295/CD/MCP

SHEET
12
Of
___
__
ISSUE No.
17
REV. No.
--
FROM SHl.
I
CF7
6A
@ Salchrell Conlrol Syslems Lld

POBOX57. ImNw. RcJ*.
SLWM. EJRKS.XI I,,
lhir dravinq is Ihe propnty 01
Salchwll Conlrol Syrlm Lld and my
PROJECT
DATE
f
1IlLE
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH. LONDON.
CIRCIJiT DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
REV.
.
MODlFlCAllON
.

SHEET
--
l-l-
13
ISSIJE No.
OF
1
17
REV. No.
LJNC
No.
-~
OSN No.
132
???
DIGITAL/ANALOGUE
INPUTS
---__
-+
-
- -I-
--
_
f
c-
--
--
-_
-_
---
-0
II
-----
-II-
r--
II
Thin
L&y
lhe
propnty
al
Solchwrll Conlrol Splcmn Ltd. ond may

ml be copiedo( disclosedIry any putpate tncepl 03
a~lhcdred In rrllhq by Sotchwrll Conlcd Systems I Id
PROJECl
(TRIAC)
._
-[-
DATE
1lllF
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH, LONDON.
OUTPUTS
@ Solchwrll Cotil~ol Sy,le,ns Lid.

POwx 57. ,PNllA OAD.
sLcwI1. ERiei %I 4,1
&P
-/
-I r-I
r-P
-.
__
.
DIGITAL
ClRClJlT OIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
MODlFlCATlON
__REV.
DRG. No. 6002295/CD/MC
.~
SHEET
14
__
ISSUE No.
OF
1
17
REV. No.
ylo
__- 532
ITiN No. ???
POINT No.
mA=
CHANNEL NO.
DIGITAL/ANALOGUE
1 11
111
111
121
131
121 IJI II
121 104 131
@ Solchwrll Conlrol Syslems I Id

POWY 51. rml+IA ROArJ.
YWO. BtKS. 511 I,4
This dmrinq L Ihe properly al
Salchrdl Conbol Sptana Lid. und may
/4&L@
ml
LWlh
OUTPUTS
(41
DIGITAL
INPUTS
15
151 161 17
Ial lb4 15
PROJECT
DATE
lllLE
MILLENNIUM
IIXPERIENCE
GREENWICti
PAVILION
GREENWICH, LONDON.
CIRWIT
REV.
MODlFlCAllON
DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
-____-
DRC. No. E;002295/CD/MCP
^. .-rr
.C
-__
ISSUE No.
REV. NO. 0
--
IJHC No
OSN No
132
???
POINT No.
T=R~~INAL
NO.
____.
1AEJNFI
No
DIGITAL/ANALOGUE
171
181
191
Izy
1261
p7j
1281
11 t
121
lorl
IJI
1101
1291
I41
INPUTS
pq
Inki
1111
1311
151
DIGITAL
1121
1321
Ifi1
134
Id
1131
1141
1341
19
lr(
171
I--
1251
OUTPUTS
(TRIAC)
28
46
4
-..I
- -I
_
-_1
-IT
-II
(---J&y
@ Sukll*rll Cwlrol Sydrlna lid.

POOX $7. IAhNII~ Kl
YWC. BIHI(S.SLI 4JIi
lhin dmhq b 11~plenty al
S0ldwdl Conlrol Splcm Lid and may
no, be FPiCdcd dodorcd Lx an* prpOIC c*cepl 0,
arlhwlredIn wrlthqbySatchWeII
Conlro,SyJanlr,,d
PROJECl
DATE
IllLE
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GRC ENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH. LONDON.
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL f-ANEL
--
___
REV.
I
MODlFlCAllON
.
SHEET
16
__
ISSUE NO.
Df
17
REV.No. 0
=Ho
~-- 532
OSN No
???
BlNT
Plo.
TERMINAL No.
T.HANNEL
DIGITAL/ANALOGUE
111
111
/II
121
121
Izl
131
loti
131
141
OUTPUTS
141
151
IdI
131
161
I4
DIGITAL
151
161
171
151
131
Ial
191
tOi
(1
QSolctwrll
CurlhI
Sy>lrm
LIJ
PO
BOX
57.
ILMU(AU
HOA.
PROJLCl
SLOUCH.
mftns. %I (11
lhir drarkq b Ihe propuly al
Solciwcll Conlrd S~lcms Lid and may
MIILLENNIUM EXPERIENCE
GREENWICI-i PAVlLtON
7llIE
CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
INPUTS
Section 2
MCP Field Wiring Diaaams
MISCELLANEOUS
POWER/CONTROL
FIRE
SIGNAL
SMOKE
DETECTION
CRITICAL
ALARM
(24V)
VvlRING
NON-CRITICAL
ALARM
(24V)
FIRE ALARM
PANEL
MAINS SUPPLY
POWER/CONlROL
L .? I,
:: Fl 2
/ I ?.?mmZ - '
It
OPEN/CLOSED
riOOF
OPENING 1
:: .: w
?.?mm2
OPEN/CLOSED
dOOF
OPENING 2
SolLilwrll Cdrol Syskms I IJ

POcm 51. ILRM(LYfmcl.
YCUC. BtRKS.SLI I11
lhis drorivq ;I Ihe pfqprrly of
SalciwellConlrd Splanglid. a,uimy
ml be copiedo( drclosd Iw MY pvrpote rxcrpt a
3
mllmlsedIn *rll!ngbySalch*cllConl~dSyslemn
I Id
I ?.?mm2
OPEN/CLOSED
dOOF
OPENING 3
WIRING
x c, x
-
?.?rnm2
OPEN/CLOSED
dOOF
OPENING 4
PROJECl
DAlE
1llLE
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVIILION
GREENWICH, LONDON.
FIELD WIRING DIAGRAMS

MOTOR CONTROL PANEIL
___
-~
___~
MODlFlCAllON
REV.
DRG. No. 6002295/FW/tJCF

SHEET
ISSUE No.
OF
1
1 REV. No.
AIR HANDLING
UNIT
POWER/CONTROL
i-t;2
+ ;a
FREOIJENCY INMRTER
TYPE:VSDE 6027
AIR
WRING
DIFFERENlIAL
PRESSSWITCH
SPA1 401
AIR FLOW
SUPPLY FAN
HANDLING
UNIT
SUPPLY FAN
PowER/c0~m0L
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESS.SVvlTCH
ELECTRIC HEATER
BATTERY
AHU
SPA1401
BAG FlLlER
DIRTY
WIRING
SMOKE
DETECTOR
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESS.SWIlCH
SPA1401
PANEL
FILTER DIRTY
???
SUPPLY AIR
DUCT
DAMPER
ACTUATOR
ARM2601
FKCSII AIR
DAMPEK
@ hlctuwll ConM Syslem, Lld

DOBOX51. IArltw4 Rout.
Pax. a&is. s,, tun
This drwinq i. Ihe prcpaty ot
Solc+wdl Contrd S,stemn Ltd. cad may
not be copied w dirclorcd la MY pwpose we,,, o,
wthwlsed ill wiling by S&hwtlt Ccalrti Systems tld
PROJECl
DATE
117LE
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GHEENWICI-1 PAVI\.ION
GREENWICH, LONDON.
MODtflCAllON

MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
-~
_-
- REV.
SHEET
ISSUE No.
I
>
-
DRG. No. 6002295/FW/MCF

OF
1
6
REV. No.
AIR HANDLING
UNIT
POWER/CONlROL
TEMPEf?A?Uf?E
DETECTOR
DD71701
FRESH AIR
TEMPERATURE
AHU
TEMPERAllJRE
DETECTOR
DDTl701
SUPPLY AIR
TEMPERAlURE
AHU
1EMPERATURE
DETECTOR
DRT3453
ROOM
TEMPERAlURE
AHU
TEMPERATURE
DETECTOR
DRT3453
ROOM
TEMPERATURE
AHU
TEMPERATURE
DETECTOR
DRT3453
ROOM
IEMPERATURE
AHU
hlRlNG
TEMPERATURE
DETECTOR
DRT3453
ROOM
TEMPERATURE
AHU
VALVE
ACTUATOR
???
COOLER
BATTERY
AHU
POWER/CONTROL
LI
WlRlNG
.--.-
--...
AIR HANDLING
UNIT
POWEt?/CONTROL
DANFOSS
FREOLIENCY INVERTER
lYPE:VSDE 6004
-.
WRING
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESS.SWITCH
SPA1 401
AIR fLOW
EXTRACT FAN
TEMPERATURE
DETECTOR
DR13453
ROOM
TEMPERATURE
TEMPERATURE
DETEClOA
DR73453
ROOM
TEMPERATURE
FUNCTION
EXTRACT
ROOM
FAN
POWER/CONTROL
@ Satctwell Control systems Lid.

POBOY51. IARNNHAIA
Ram.
Pout. IRKS. SLI ,,I
Thin dmring b Ihe prc~aly ol
Salclwdl Conlrul S@mo Ltd. and may
ml be copied o( &xIased C my pvrpore rmpL 01
mthcskd
in wrllhq
by Sotdwell
Cmlrd
Syrtemn
Ltd
PROJECT
WlRlNC
DATE
7llLf
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH, LONDON.
FIEI-D WIRING DIAGRAMS

MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
---2---
MODIFICAlION
f
REV.
___
*
DRG. No. 6002295/FW/MCP

SHEET
ISSUE No.
Of
1
8
REV. No.
-,
-aI
-.
TOILET EXTRACT FAN/

KITCHEN EXTRACT FAN
POWER/CONTROL
CWNGEOKR
UNIT
I
?
l/-19\
,.;
gi
+++--+#
?.?rnrn2
n,
UIFFERENTIAL
PRESS.SHIITCH
SPA1 401
AIR FLOW
EX-IRACT FAN
2 I 0.37 KW
2 I 1.6A FLC
MRING
I
yq
$$I
Elal
r,l-
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSSYU1lCH
SPA1401
AIR FLOW
EXlRACl FAN
KITCHEN
EXTRACT
FAN
TOILET
EXlRACl FAN
UN17
POWER/CONTROL
VvlRlNC
DATE
MOOIFICATION
1 REV.
i&
a*
EL
ISSUE No.
REV. No.
---
.-
-.
.~
.--.--
CHILLED WATER
SYSTEM
POWER/CONlROL
VvlRlNG
I
CHILLED
PUMP
WATER
CHILLED
PUMP
No.1
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSSWITCH
SPU1201
WATER FLOW
CHW PUMP
WATER
No.2
TEMPERATURE
DElEClOt?
DWTl701
FLOW
7EMPERAlURE
CHW
1EMPERAlURE
DETECTOR
DWll701
RETURN
1EMPERAlURE
CHW
POWER/CONTROL
MRINC
(E) Solchaell Cm:lrol Syslms Lid

POIUX 51. ,LRN,I*Uwcw
z&WC. HrK*s. %I lull
lhis &ormg is Ihe propaly of
PROJE Cl
GREENWICH.
EXPERIENCE
I tHVILIUIl
n., I.. .-.,
LONDON.
MODlFlCAllON
DATE
TITLE
MII.LtNNIUM
emvr..,.,,-.
.;KttlUWILki
FIELD WiRING DIAGRAMS

MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
~
------I
~__
__REV.
DRG. No. 6002295/fW/MCP

SHEET
Of
8
REV. No. 0
LOCAL THAMES
WATER
??
LOCAL THAMES
WATER
ALARM
STATUS
POWER/CON?ROL
WlRlNG
POWER/CONTROL
WlRlNG
I,,
I 21,3
VALVE
ACTUATOR
ALXS1251
LOCAL THAMES
WATER
DATE
ICl
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICti
PAVILION
CRFFNWIPCI
I fINnON

MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
-__ *
~
~
MODlFlCAllON
1)
__REV.
SHEET
OF
lrr#lC LI^ 3
DC\, Mr. n
COMMUNICATIONS
NETWORK MCP
CONTROL
SEClION
IQ sultbuclt collllol Syslellrs LIJ

POBOY51. ILKNIW HCIIO.
YCUCII.FLRKS.SLI 4H
lhi. drovinq b Ihc prc+a,y 0,
Salctwdl Control Splcms Lid. md may
nol be copied a disclosed Ia MY purpore rxcepl 01
wlhwlred in wilinq by Saldwell Cmlral Syzlrmr ~td
PROJECT
DATE
*
TllLE
MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVILION
GREENWICH,
LONDON.

MOTOR CONTROL PANEL
___
MODlFlCAllON
*
REV.
.

SHEET
ISSUE No.
OF
1
8
REV. NO
Section 3
MCP Equipment Data Sheets
CC
EMC
q Satchwell#
05 1 .Ol
April
1996
AIR TEMPERATURE SENSORS

Types DR, DD, DRT & DDT
Specification
No.
DD/DDT
DWDRT
336-X-XxX
337-X-XxX
The sensors described

below are for use with Satchwell
controllers
provide temperature
control of heating and air conditioning
plant.
typical applications
see relevant controller
data sheets.
DR,
LED
DRT
to
F:or
DRT 3652 only
Bwkplale
DD,
DDT
13.5 PGROmm conduit entry

Dimensions in mm
SPECIFICATIONS
Room
Tme
Adjustable
d%
For further
lnforrnatlon
For uss with controller
Stem
Sensing
range
length
mm
sea data sheets
--f
ET
CXR
DS2.21
DS2.20
DS2.25
csc
DS2.40
CMC
CSMC
DS2.45
DS2.47
or controller
actuator
MMC
BAS
czu
DS2.70
D;$;$
DS13.41
2i3l4
DS2.80
types
KMC
DS2.55
IAC
;S&;;
Not CXT
Sensing
Wiring:
Negative
element:
DRT
Adjustment:
Ambient
31
Temperature
Scale
temperature
limtts:
temperature
See page 2.
Housing:
DR, DRT
DD, DDT
Accept 3
DR, DRT
DD, DDT
DR, DRT
to read +
and RPW
Accessories:
thermistor
dc.
DR, DD, DDT 2 wire low voltage dc.

Where applicable.
concealed
adjustment
DR. DRT -40C to +7OC.
DD, DDT -40C to +loOC.
Characteristics:
Terminals:
coefficient
2 or 3 wire low voltage
accessible
by removing
cover.
Tough fire resistant plastic case and back plate (IP20).

Sealed aluminium
tube, alloy head, with plastic cover. (IP. 43)
x 1.5mm2 wires or 2 x 2.5mm2 wires (DD, DDT). 1 x 2.5mm2 (DR, DRT)
Guard kit: 837-l-203.
Weatherproofing
kit: 836-l-203.
(Improves
protection
of sensor head to IP47).
+/- scale converter:
837-l -352. Used to convert standard
exposed
adjustment
room sensor scales
Suitable
for use with DR 3251, DRT 3451/3651
and-only.
Consists of just the sensor front cover.
440114425.
04196
Room
DS 1 .Ol
2
Sensor
Types:
DR, DRT
1. Select a loC!At&n for the sensor which is representative

of the space to be controlled and where lt will ta readily affected by changes in the generaiqace
temperature
level. The sensor location should also be reasonably clean and free from damp and condensation.
Remove the backpiate by pushing in the fixing lugs on the top and bottom of the sensor with a small screwdriver
or similar tool.
Thread the ekes through the backplate and baffle card and fix lt to the wall or conduit box wlth the arrow pointing upwards, The baffle card is used to ensure that
there are no draughts from the cable entries to influence the sensed temperature.
4. COnrWct the WiraS to the sensor terminals on the sensor, See the data sheet for the controller the sensor is to be connected to for the temrlnal designations.
5. Refit the sensor houslng to the backplate.
DRT 3651,3652
Remote
Set Value
Fig. 3
Fig. 1
DR 3251,3252,3253
Cover llxing screws
Not Polarised
:I-:1
Fig.4
DRT
I
3453
Not Polarised
i;;
scmwed13.5PGeomm
Duct
Sensor
type
Fig. 5
Drilling dimensbx
DD DDT
DRT 3451
1. Select a location where the temperature sensitive stem is fully immersed in the
controlled air stream. The location must not suffer from direct hot or cold
radiation effects. For heater batteries the distance from the battery should not
ba less than 2 meters (6ft). For aoler batteries and spray coils the minimum
distance can be reduced to 25-50mm (1Qins).
2. fix the sensor to the duct using the fixing screws provided. Allow a sufficient
length of flexible conduit to permit complete withdrawal of the sensor.
3. Remove the cover for access to the terminals.
4. Connect wires (non-polarised).
6. Repiaca the cover and tighten the fixing screws.
DD, DR SENSOR
CHARACTERISTICS
RACTERISTICS
DESIGNATIONS
8393
TmFbBCrahlm
RS+lSncS
n
7132
05
1:
Z%
1911
5025
5573
1;
1%
1764
ii%
EG
1:
3
1740
1716
1690
ifi
2359
2792
2s
;i
z
1821
1596
1571
E
40
45
50
1452
1336
1219
1113
1013
-5
0
+5
7881
1:
Ei
WIRING DIAGRAMS AND PRECAUTIONS

Refer to tha Data Sheet refevant to the controtier
Connected. (Sea Table on Page 1).
kfaximum resfatance is 15 Ohms per core.
to which the sensor
is to be
__-.___
-.-_.__.
-,___
-- ..___
.__.
I._.._____.
.-__,
I
Satchwell Control Systems Limited, Farnham Road, Slough, Berkshire.
Tel: +44 (0)1753 550550. Fax: +44 (0)1753 624076
United Kingdom SLl 4Ul-f
REOKmAL 9Md (0117) sQ777os

EE&$s {t%z 1,?.E
k$.p&$~)
44lam
Londoncay (0171 403Sam
LJxdmMmlol 1w-
Lodx s.xd? @17U, Nuu**(o1sl,

ua-rOs
h%E
w-m
lO11S,ea sss5
s?.n*d (01279 sax27
w.m (Olss3) s 47123
DS 1.0302
.
q Satchwell#
FAN COIL UNIT RETURN AIR TEMPERATURE
SENSORS
Specification
No. 338-l-803
The DDU temperature
sensor is specifically
designed
for use in the
return air space of terminal units.
The DDUs are provided
with a single fixing clip and a 1.5m long 2
core fly lead for quid installation
within a terminal unit.
FEATURES
0 Simple fixing
0 Compact
size
0 1.5m Fly lead
A Slebe
Group
Product
DDU
07/97
07197
DS 1.030
2-2
SPECIFICATION
Ambient
Temperature
Limits:
Operating:
-40 to 70%
Housing:
Tube: Painted Aluminium
Clip: Stainless steel
Fly lead: 2 core 1.5m long
Type:
DDU 1803 - Return air sensor - Specification
no. 336-l -803
Temperature
Range:
-5 to 40C (non adjustable)
Associated
Controllers:
CZU (DS 2.80/2.201),
IAC (DS 2.81/2.801).
URC (DS 13.301)
Senslng
Element:
Negative Temperature
Coefficient
(NTC) Thermistor.
For senscr characteristics
(non linear) see table below.
Wlrlng:
2 wire fly lead, low Voltage dc non polarised
INSTALLATION
1. Select a location where the temperature
sensitive
part of
the tube is fully immersed
in the controlled
air stream.
2. Fix the DDU sensor in to the duct using the screw and clip
provided.
Note:
If the DDU protrudes
out of the duct, the wire end of the DDU tube
should be blocked to stop the controlled
temperature
from being
aftered by the main ambient air.
3. Check that the flying lead does not rub where it exits the
duct. If the lead rubs use a grommet
or another suitable
protective
Item.
4. Connect the 2 wires (non polarised)
to the controller,
ensure
that the wire is not stretched
or pulling across sharp edges.
DDU 1803 SENSOR

CHARACTERISTICS
Temperature
C
-5
0
+5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
Resistance
R
8093
7661
7182
6667
6126
5573
5025
4492
3987
3518
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Refer to the Data Sheet relevant to the controller
to which
is to be connected
(Associated
Controllers
are above).
Maximum
resistance,
15 Ohms per core.
so
12.5
15CGnm
Fly Lead
the sensor
12 Terry Clip
w
Dimensions
in mm
CAUTION
0 Thla sensor
Satchwell#
Sat&well Control Systems Limited
Famham Road, Slough, Berkshire,
United Kingdom SL14UH
Tel: +44 (0)1753 550550
Fax: +44 (0)1753 824078
be;,
3
A Siibe
Group
Company
must only be used In conjunction

with ths
controllers
shown on page 2.
0 Obsenfe wiring precautions
Iven on the data sheet for the
controller
that the sensor wll B be connectad
to.
0 Do not exceed the maxlmum ambient tamparaturer.
0 Interference with parts under sealed covers Invalidates the guarantee.
appropriate
Design and performance

of Sat&well equipment is subject to continual
improvement and therefore liable tc aiteratIon without notice.
0 Information is given for guidance only and Satchwell do not accept
responsbil
for tha selection and installation of Its products unless
information Ta s been given by the company in writing relating tc a
spdfk
application.
0 A perfodic system and tuning check of the control system is
recommended.
Please contact your bcal Satchwell service office for
details.
DS 1.201 1
.r
n SatchwelI#
WATER TEMPERATURE
Specification
DWT, DST
SENSORS
No.
DWT 336-X-XxX
DST 339-X-XxX
The sensors described
below are for use with Satchwell
controllers
provide temperature
control of heating, air conditioning
and solar
heating systems.
If a fast acting water loop is to be controlled
see
the DWT 1801 on DS 1.26\1.202.
For the full swcification
with the appioprtate
number
redace
to
the 4Xs
figures from tl-k Type column
in the table on pag% 2.
MU 1.2/l 201 - hhmiig Deails

conlmllen
DS 2.24LZ.110 - CXR
DS 24112.021 -CSC
DS 2.22R.lOl - CXT
DS223!.?.lD5-CZT
DS 24712.541 -CSW
DS 27412.701 - MMC 4701
DS 27212.751- MMC 4601
A Sleba
Group
Product
om8
DS 1.201
2-4
SPECIFICATION
Type
Mounting
&
Stem Length
DWT 1701
DWT 1702
Immersion
125mm
200mm
DST leO1
Pipe Surface
Sensing
element:
Wirlng:
Ambient
Temperature
- at Head:
Characteristics:
Head:
Stem:
Terminals:
Pocket:
Flxlng Strap:
Accessories:
Adjustable
Temperature
Sensing
Range
Proportional
Adjustment
5573
No
-10
CMC.
CXR,
MMC. CSMC, BAS, IAC

czr, CXT, csc
5573
No
5 to 120C
CMC,
CXR,
MMC, CSMC, SAS

CZT, cxr,
csc
Resistance
at
20C (ohms)
Negative
temperature
2-wire non-polarised
coefficient
low Voltage
to 120C
Band
thermistor
dc
Limits
-40 to +7OC (Type DWT only: 40 to 106C)
Non linear - See table on Page 4.
Aluminium
alloy die-casting
with moulded plastic cover.
Protection
Class: I.P. 43.
DWT only: Aluminium
alloy tube
Accept 3 x 1 .5mm2 wires: Larger sizes not recommended.
DWT only: Corrosion
resisting
bronze pocket screwed
V? BSP parallel.
Maximum
working
pressure of 16 bar. Retaining
screw to fix sensor in position.
Pocket is included in specification
type number and is supplied as standard.
Stem lengths quoted are overall, including pocket.
DST only: Length supplied is sufficient for pipes up to 1OOmm dia.
Weatherproofing
kit (gasket and screws for head cover) all types: 636-l-203
(improves
protectiin
of sensor head to I.P. 47)
DS 1.201
3-4
02l96
INSTALLATION
Immersion
Sensor
type DWT
1. Select location where water can circulate

freely around the sensor
pocket ensuring that the whole of the pocket is immersed
in the
water to be controlled.
The pocket should be plugged to prevent entry of foreign matter
before sensor is fitted.
NOTE: For chilled water applications
pocket should be mounted
horizontally
or sloping downwards
towards
mouth to allow
condensation
to drain away.
If this is not possible the pocket may
be filled with a suitable oil, e.g. Fine Solco AC43 or Shell Dial0
Oil B.
2. Ffx sensor pocket into pipe. Allow a sufficient
length of flexible
conduit to permit complete withdrawal
of the sensor.
3. Insert sensor and tighten clamping
screw.
4. Remove cover for access to terminals.
6. Replace cover and tighten flxlng screws.
V2 BSP parallel
Pocket fixing screws
Cover fixing
screws
Screwed
13.5 PGG?Omm
WIRING DIAGRAMS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Refer to Data Sheet relevant to the controller
connected
(See Table on Page 2).
Maximum resistance,
15 Ohms per core.
to which
sensor
is to be
Surface
Sensor type DST
1. Select location on pipe surface which has an unrestricted

flow of
water.
2. Clean pipe contact area and assemble
the strap to the sensor.
Fix
to the pipe as shown in the diagram.
Allow sufficient flexible
conduit to avoid straining sensor fixing.
3. Remove cover for access to terminals
and temperature
adjustment.
5. Replace cover and tighten fixing screws.
6. Keep pipe insulation dear of cover.
3
WIRING DIAGRAMS
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
Refer to Data Sheet relevant to the controller
connected.
(See Table on Page 2).
Maximum resistance,
15 Ohms per core.
to which
sensor
is to be
Fixing strap details
Fbdng strap
13to 1OOmmpipe
Cover fixing screws
Keep insulation clear
of sensor
p
Screwed
13.5 PGnOmm
DWT
DWT
02l98
4-4
DS 1.201
1701 -10
1702 -10
to 120%
to 120C
DWS
Stem Length
,I
V2 BSP
7880
7182
DST
Dimensions
in mm
r-s3-7
Thermal
contact
Fixing strap
13.5 PGQOmm
conduit
entry
Satchwell#
Setchwell
Control Systems
Limited
Farnham
Road, Slough, Berkshire,
United ffipgdom
SLl 4UH
Tel: +44 (0)1753
Fax: +44 (0)1753
550550
824078
/ C .
J
A Siebe
Group
Company
CAUTION
0 Thesa sensors
must only ba used In conjunction
with tha
aooroorlata
Satchwell controllem
shown on PIIW 2.
~,. .
0 Observe wlrlng precautions
Iwn on iho data sheet for the
controller
Wiat ths senaof wll f be connected
to.
0 Do not exceed the maximum ambient temperature.
0 Interference with parts under sealed covers invalidates guarantee.
0 Design and petformanca
of Setchwell equipment are subject to
continual improvement
and therefore liable to alteration without notice.
0 Information Is given for guidance only and Satchwell do not accept
responsibili
for the sektion
and installation of tts products unless
information x as been given to tha Company in writing relating to a
specific application.
0 A periodii system and tuning check of th-a control s tern is
;zosnanded.
Please wntact your local Satchwe yI se~ce office for
DS 3.215 .
12l99
fl Satchwell#
ARM, ARX, ARE
ROTARY ACTUATORS
The Satchweil
AR range of reversing
actuators
have a rotary output
for coupling to air dampers
or rotary valves requiring
a rotary drive
through approximately
95O. Models are available for mains voltage,
24Vac and 0 to 1 OVdc. All can be used for either modulating
or ONI
OFF control depending
on the control signal supplied to the actuator.
The AR actuators
are supplied with the stroke limiter required to
prevent the fully-open
and fully-closed
positions
being achieved.
FEATURES
Compact
size
Hollowactuator
drive output shaft accommodates
any length of
damper
shaft without
the need to cut it
Simple to install, most dampers
do not require
universal
joints
or rods
l Accommodates
shaft diameters
from IO to 20mm and square
shafts from 10 to i6mm square
l Single socket
screw fitting to damper
shaft
Stroke limiter supplied
with the actuator
l 1.5 metre fly lead supplied
for electrical
connections
(terminals
and/or conduit
entry may be used if required)
l Complies
with all relevant
EC directives
for EMC and electrical
safety
l Double
insulated,
no earth required
Case sealed to IP 54 to prevent
ingress
of dust and moisture
l Tamper
resistant
settings
and wiring
l Actuators
can be connected
in parallel
l Comprehensive
range of accessories
and linkages
available
l 0-1OV Feedback
signal for monitoring
the actual actuator
position
via BMS (ARE only)
l
l
Ib
CC
An lnvensys
company
MU
3.215 -Installation Inslrudions
12199
5-6
OPERATION
AND
Adjustment:
SLIDE
ADJUSTMENTS
Marked:
]:Factory
Function:
direct or reverse
action.
+ signifies increase
of actuator position
- signifies the reverse
of this.
POTENTIOMETER
Start
o-1ov
Sets the command

zero position.
POTENTIOMETER
Span
41ov
Sets the change

through complete
Actuator
positlons
Sliie switch at
forvarlous
set at:
Selects
@@
SWITCH
: .::
ONLY
-ARE
signal
voltages
signal
voltage
with increasing
at which
the actuator
in command
signal voltage
stroke to position 10.
at different
which
input signal
commences
will cause
actuator
(vdc).
to move from
OV
to move
1ov
settings
Slide switch at
0
+
Fig.7
Signal Volts
Signal Volts
CONNECTION
DIAGRAMS
Thennostel or other
switching device
Controller
ARM (220 - 24OVec)

I
L
. ? Drives towards
(Blaok)
1
,
ov
WW
ARX (24Vlc)
1
, si Drives towards
10
II
23OVac
I
Fig.8
POWER
Fig.9
VIA CONTROLLER
ARE
ControlWBAS
S4 makes to S5 at 0 or set position

Sl makes to 52 at 10 or set position
II
Recorder
Output
over range
o-5
POWERED
SEPARATE
FROM
TRANSFORMER
Supply
(Blact
ControllermAS
24hc
(Blue)
ARE
connected in parallel to the

same O-1OVdc input signal
(assuming an adequate
24Vac supply is available).
Fig.10
li Recorder
(Orange
i si_
L-------
Adjustable
war range
I 5-10
au-2-208
Auxiliary Switch
Kit
631-2-301
Potentiometer
Kit
Output
Fig.11
f
3
6-6
DS 3.215
DIMENSION DRAWINGS
3
lm
Dimensions
In mm
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
0 to 10VdkS~gnal
1 .when wiring to BAS outstations
for wiring precautions
1OOm
refer to the appropriate
1 50R
outstation
1
data sheet
WARNINGS
AUXILIARY
SWITCHES
(WHEN FITTED) AND ARM ACTUATORS
ARE AT MAINS POTENTIAL.
OBSERVE
LOCAL
WIRING
REGULATIONS,
EARTHING
REQUIREMENTS
AND ALL USUAL
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS.
When working
on actuators
containing
mains voltages
ensure
that they are fully isolated.
Mains voltage
isolators
must conform
to EN 60336-l.
For longer lengths,
up to 300m,
observe
the maximum
resistance
screen at the controller
only.
ARM,
ARX
or ARE actuators
24Vac devices
EN 60742.
must
increase
the cable size and
also screen
wiring and earth
can
he supplied
he connected
by a transformer
in parallel.
conforming
to
WARNINGS
CERTAIN MODELS (AND AUXILIARY SWlTCHES WHERE FITTED) ARE

AT MAINS POTENTIAL.
LOCAL WIRING PRECAUTIONS
AND USUAL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE OBSERVED. NOTE EARTHING
REQUIREMENTS.
CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN WHEN MANUALLY
MOVING THE DAMPER.
DO NOT SWlTCH ON POWER SUPPLY UNTIL COMMISSIONING
CHECKS HAVE BEEN CARRIED OUT - SEE PAGE 4.
Caution
l
l
l
l
l
SatchwelI#
Satchwell
Famham
Slough
Control
Road
Systems
l
l
Limited
An lnvensys
company
Observe
maximum and mlnlmum ambient temperatures.

Check maxlmum
torque of the actuator
is sufficient to drlve the
dam
r at the maximum
sir flow of the system. Do not exceed
max Imum actuator
torque.
Interference
with parts under sealed covers Invalidates the
guarantee.
9 Design and performance

contlnual Improvement
Berkshire
SLl 4UH
United Kingdom
Telephone
+44 (0)1753
Fawimile
+44 (0)1753
www.satchwell.com
24Vac devices must be supplied by e transformer

conforming
to
EN 60742.
Mains Voltage lsolatore must conform to EN 60336-l.
Obeetve wlrlng precautions
on Page 6.
Observe installation
instructions
on Page 3.
Ensun wires ere not bisdvertentty
crossed over. Wlrfng errors not
;II;~~~u;
malfunctfone;
they may also damage controllers
and/or
550550
824078
of Satchwell
equlpment
is subject
to
and therefore liable to alteration without

notice
lnfonnatfon
Is Herr for guidance only and Satchwall do not accept
responsiblllty
Bor the selection and Installation
of Ita products unless
Information
has been given by the Company In wrltlng relatfng to a
speclflc application.
A periodic system and tuning check of the control system is
recommended.
Please contact your local Satchwell service office for
details.
DS 3.401:
ill99
C.-jSatchwell#
ALM, ALX, ALE
LINEAR ACTUATORS
Specification
no. 477-X-XXXt
Satchwell Linear Actuators
type AL are reversing
actuators
having a
linear output, for direct coupling to Satchwell
lift and lay seat-type
control valves or other seat valves requiring a linear driver over stroke
lengths of up to 38mm (I%), within the limits of output thrust stated
overfeaf and with compatible
mounting arrangements.
c..
1)
These actuators
are suitable for either two-position
or modulating
control, dependent
on the controller
or other switching
device providing
the input signal. The ALM is suitable for a mains power supply, the ALX
is 24V. and the ALE is 24V, but accepts a 0-IOVdc
input signal.
The ALE actuator can be set to operate a low hysteresis
when used for
tight control applications
on microprocessor
based controllers
such as
the KMC and MMC.
t For the full specifvxtion
appropriate figures from

on page 2.
number replace the 4Xs with the

the TYPE column in the table
FEATURES
l
l
l
l
l
l
Direct coupling
to Satchwell
seat valves without
extra
mounting
brackets
or linkage
kits, saving
site time
Direct coupling
to other makes of seat valves,
where stroke,
thrust and mounting
are compatible
Universal
for valve strokes,
up to 38mm (1%). Actuator
stroke
is self-setting
to suit valve stroke,
including
ALE by simple
adjustment
Alternative
stroke times, to suit application
Manual operation
or override
facility
built-in
Standard
or low hysterisis
selection
on ALE to cater for
different
application
types
Case sealed to IP 54 as standard
Auxiliary
switch
kit available,
see Accessories
DS 4.410 -M. VSF. VZF

DS 4.610 - MZ MJF, MZF
An lnvensys
company
DS 3.401
2-10
11199
SPECIFICATIONS
TYPES
ALM
STROKE
ALX1201
Standard
POWER
SUPPLY:
RUNNING
1.6 s/mm
2.5 s/mm
5.0 s/mm
6.5 s/mm
Standard
220 to 24OV +lo% to -15%,

50160 Hz
POWER
CONSUMPTION:
LIMIT 8 TRANSFER
SWITCH
RATING:
3.5 VA
3.5 VA
5A
0.75A
0.75A
MAXIMUM
STROKE:
16 mm (S/6)
36mm (1%)
THRUST
3llN
638N
1327
Standard
24V *lo%,
transformer
9.5 VA
1 ALE
1
CMC,
See DS 4.610
CSMC
csc
12VA
9.5 VA
Reversing
Time:
.
.
.
.
Max. Ambient
Limits:
Humidity:
Operator
and Override:
Operation
CXT,
IAC, URC
DDTE,
DSTE,
DWTE,
MMC, KMC,
BAS, IAC
VSF up to 25mm
vz up to 2
VSF up to 25mm
VZupto2
VSF 32 to
50mm
VZF 65 to
150mm
VSF 32mm to 50mm

VZF 65 to 150mm
MJF up to 25mm
MZ UD to 2
MJF up to 25mm
MZ UD to 2
MJF 32 to
50mm
MZF 65 to
150mm
MJF 32 to 50mm
MZF 65 to 150mm
Instructions
8 Storage:
feature
O-l OVdc
MMC, KMC, DRTE,

CZT, EA.9 IAC
CXR,
on page
Operating:
-20 to 50C
Storage: -40 to 7OC
Standard
Two 5A, 2501

Adjustable
Use kit
831-l-21
1
MMC.
IP 54
Temperature
One SA,
250V
Fixed
Built-in
Modulating
control from any controller
providing a O-l OVdc
positioning
signal.
Start and Span adjustments,
also DAlRA switch included
Refer to Operation.
- modulating
See Installation
Two 5A, 250V

Adjustable
Use kit 631-1-211
- 24V
See table above
Attitude:
12VA
Modulating
control from any
controller
having a pulsed
24V output.
csc
MJF up to 50mm
MZ up to 2
MZF up to 150mm
Action:
One 5A.
250V
Fixed
Built-in
Pulsed
Pulsed - Mains
(220 to 24OVac) Voltage
Mounting
1376
Standard
Two 5A.
250V
Adjustable
Use kit
831-l-211
Two-position
control from
thermostat,
time switch or other
switching
device having (220/
240Vac)
mains rated
changeover
contacts.
Modulating
control from any
controller
having a J-wire
mains output (220 to 240Vac).
Class:
1 ALE
1
SO/60 Hz supplied by a
conforming
to EN 60742
Two 5A, 250V

Adjustable
Use kit 631-1-211
Protection
1362
Short
95% rh non-condensing
with all types
ACCESSORIES
.T.
Standard
( ALE
ASSOCIATED
CONTROLLERS:
Manual
1302
APPLICATION
Ambient
ALE
INPUT: CONTROL
SIGNAL (for
modulation)
Stroke
Short
4.5 VA
3 -Port:
1251
24V *IO%. 50160 Hz

supplied by a transformer
conforming
to EN 60742
SPEED:
(46 s/in)
(84 s/in)
(127 s/m)
(216 s/m)
AUXILIARY
SWITCHES
(3
1601
1 AU
Auxiliary
Switches:
Kit 831-l-211
available for internal mounting.
Two voltage-free
change-over
switches
rated 5A, 25OV. Adjustable,
one from position 0 to 5, the other from position 5 to 10 (see Table on
page 2 for usage).
Spindle Adaptor:
Kit 862-l-402,
% 32-UNEF
female x 3/s 24-UNF
mate. One supplied with each actuator,
except ALX 1251 and
ALE 1352, for which it is not required.
VSF 32 to
50mm
VZF 65 to
150mm
MJF 32 to
50mm
MZF 65 to
150mm
11199
3 -10
UNKAGE
DS 3.401
KITS
VALVE
MANUFACTURER
SPECIFICATION
VALVE
LNK 1501
Landis
LNK 1502
Honevwell
V501 IA
LNK
1503
Fisher
YBody%tolW,A0odylW
LNK 1604
Fisher
Y Body
LNK 1505
Hymatic
1700 % to 1%. 1450
LNK 1606
Hvmatic
1400R
t LNK 1621
B Gyr
VVF52
I Siebe
2 to 3, A Body
2 to 4
I%,
1400R
1%
2 to 3. 1700 2 to 3
1 VB uo to 2
Note: Actuators
ALX 1251 and ALE 1352 are short
and cannot connect to any valves using the linkage
above table.
stroke actuators
kits detailed in the
CONSTRUCTION
Case:
Mild steel baseplate

to UL94V-0).
Mountlng
Bracket:
Protection
Class:
with moulded
polycarbonate
housing
Motor:
Split phase,
Gear Ratio:
Standard
speed
Medium speed
Fast speed
Super Fast speed
Splndle
Freely rotating coupling,

screwed:
Y{24-UNF.
female (ALM 1601. ALX 1201, ALE 1302,
% 32-UNEF,
female (ALX 1251, ALE 1352)
(.i
Llmlt
Coupling:
Operator
EL Override:
Hand
Indicator:
on screw-jack
capacitor
operator
principle,
reversing
(8.5
(5.0
(2.5
(1.8
driven
type,
s/mm)
s/mm)
s/mm)
s/mm)
Switches:
by a reversible
continuously
synchronous
motor
via a gear
with gear train disengagement
1327,1376)
feature.
stroke scale on mounting
bracket.
Marked
to suit valve stroke, see Commissioning.
ALM & ALX: Load dependent

switches,
self-adjusting
to match valve stroke. Control
from terminal
1 to IT and 2 to 2T at respective
limits of valve stroke (not electrically
Positioner:
Accept
Entries:
2 x 1.5mm
Three
Switches:
or 1 x 2.5mm
x 21 mm dia. knockout
Available
as add-on
accessory,
between electronics
sequencing
is derived
time related
to type,
size and stroke
to
plate).
(Use only bottom
two on ALE.)
see specification.
single pole change-over
limit switch at position
VALVE STROKE TIME

total stroke
signal transfers
separate).
cable
(detachable
Note: ALX 1251 and ALE 1352 have one voltage-free

built-in. Operating
point, non-adjustable,
is just before
This table gives
0 to 10,
Built-in printed circuit board connected

by plug and socket for easy servicing.
Internally
connected
1000 Ohm position feedback
potentiometer,
driven via gears from output shaft. Separate
0-1OVdc
output signal available to monitor position or as a service aid.
Terminals:
Auxiliary
train.
rated.
ALE: Limit switches

operate as for other actuators,
but are internally
connected
card and motor windings.
The transfer function is not necessary
as multi-stage
from the O-10 Volt output signals from the MMC or other multi-stage
controllers.
Conduit
(fire resistant
89:l
51:l
51:l
27:l
Spindle anti-rotation
plate moves against
representing
0 to 100% stroke. Fix scale
& Transfer
Electronic
(ALE only)
cover
IP 54
Operates
Position
terminal
Die cast aluminium
Drive:
Manual
and removable
of valve
with type
of actuator
used.
switch
0.
rated 5A. 25OV.
DS 3.401
4-10
11199
OPERATION
(I
WHEN ACTUATOR
IS OPERATING
FINGERS
ETC.
The stroke of the AL Linear Actuator
dependent
switches,
and is determined
ALE requires only a simple adjustment,
specifications
of actuator are universal
valve having a stroke length within its
Specifications
on page 2 and Valve
BEWARE
OF TRAPPING
is self-setting,
using loadby the stroke of the valve. The
Consequently,
all
and can be fitted to any seat
nominal range, see details under
Stroke Time on page 3.
The following adjustments

board, accessible
behind
ADJUSTMENT
are made on the electronic

the removable
front cover.
The load-dependent
limit switches
terminal 1 to IT and from terminal
valve stroke.
ALE Actuators
transfer the control signal from

2 to 2T at the respective
limits of
The ALE incorporates

an electronic
positioner
and provides
modulating
having a 0-IOVdc
output. Using
the START and SPAN adjustments,
the actuator can be set to make
a complete stroke over any span from 4 to 10 volts, starting at any point
within the signal range, providing the sum of START Volts plus SPAN
Volts does not exceed 10. The loaddependent
limit switches
operate
basically as described
for the ALM and ALX, but are internally
connected
between the electronics
card and the motor windings.
Where additional switching

or interlocking
functions
are required,
use
the add-on auxiliary switch accessory
or built-in auxiliary switch
detailed under Specifications.
A separate 0-IOVdc
output is available (terminal
11) for indicating
actuator position to a Building Management
System or as a Service
and Commissioning
aid.
ALE actuators
can be set to operate a low hysteresis
when used for
on microprocessor
based controllers.
The
hysterisis
is set by using a jumper link on the actuator
PCB (see the
commissioning
section for details). A low hysterisis
setting gives 200
steps between 0 and IOVdc input and the standard
setting gives 25
steps.
circuit
MARKED
set at:
Slide
B/Q
Switch
Selects
0
@
The drive can be disconnected

for manual operation.
A button located
on the top surface of the enclosure
is connected
to a spring loaded
push rod assembly.
When depressed
this moves the 2nd gear out of
mesh, this mechanism
can be locked in place by moukfed ledges in the
housing. Adjacent to this is a manual operation
key, which is clipped in
place on the top surface of the enclosure.
The key can be fitted into a
slotted feature in the end of the main drive shaft, which protrudes
through the top surface of the enclosure.
Wtih the drive shaft
disconnected
from the gearbox/motor
the manual operation
key can be
used to provide manual operation
of the actuator.
ALM and ALX Actuators
The load-dependent
switches
perform a combined
limit and transfer
function. The limit switches de-energise
the actuator
at the end of
stroke, whilst the transfer switches
are used basically for sequence
operation in multi-stage
applications.
Where additional
switching
or
interlocking
functions
are required,
use the add-on auxiliary switch
accessory
or built-in auxiliary switch detailed under Specifications.
When energised
between terminals
1 and 3, the actuator
moves its
spindle towards the fully extended
position, to open a Satchwell
P-port
or 3-port valve to the heat exchanger.
Conversely,
when energised
between terminals
moves its spindle towards
the fully retracted
position, to close the
valve.
printed
Direct
or Reverse
Action
signifies increase
of actuator
oosmon with increasino
inout
bc Volt signal.
-
signifies the reverse of this.
Potentiometer
START
(0-l OV)
Sets the command

signal voltage
at which the actuator
commences
to move from zero
position.
OV
Potentiometer
SPAN
(4-l OV)
Sets the change in command

signal Voltage which will cause
actuator
to move through
complete
stroke to positing 10.
1ov
Potentiometer
STROKE
ALE ACTUATOR
POSITION
SPAN AND ACTION
Matches
desired
operation
of actuator
valve stroke.
FOR TYPICAL
Slide switch at
10
SETTINGS
to
16mm
OF START,
0
+
Actuator
Position
0
Fig. 1
Slide switch at
Signal Volts
AUXILIARY
SWITCHES
An auxiliary switch kit 831-l-21
I, comprising
two single-pole
changeover
switches,
is available
as a separate
accessory.
The two
electrically-separate
switches
can be independently
set, one to
operate at any point between
positions
0 and 5 and the other between
positions
5 and 10.
(Not applicable
to ALX 1251 or ALE 1352, which have one fixed
auxiliary switch built in).
DS 3.401
5 - 10
11199
:T
INSTALLATION
\
\,ir
Observe the following IMPORTANT

points:
WARNINGS
WHEN OPERATING
A VALVE HANDU? JG FLUID ABOVE lOOC,
NOT MOUNT ACTUATOR
ABOVE
VAL VE, BUT TO ONE SIDE.
WHE,
- --..---.- ---.-._.-Y
ACTUATOR
IS
OPENATING
BEWARE
OF TRAPPING
.-..,A,
rirtvCRS
ETC.
DO
- Do notswftch
on powersupply
until commiss - ioning checks
have
.~.->
~~.
oeen completea
-see page f.
l Steam
Applications:
Following
a shutdown
of the steam system
it Is important
that the control
valve is fully open before
introducing
steam into the pipeline
(purging)
or damage
may
occur to the actuator
spindle
or valve plug.
l Do not apply
power unless
the actuator
Is fitted to a valve.
Ambient
Do not install valve with actuator

directly underneath
it.
Allow sufficient clearance
for ffiting and wiring, also minimum of
11 Omm between manual operator
knob and nearest obstruction.
temoerature
must
Complete
mechanical
fitting
connecting
electrical
wiring.
due to load-dependent
limit
l Ensure
location is reasonably
Note: The following diagrams
and ALE 1352 are not shown).
be within
limits -20 to 50C.
of actuator to valve BEFORE

This avoids damage which may occur,
switches
not being operated.
clean and dry.
are typical internal views (ALX 1251
ACTUATOR FITTING INSTRUCTIONS

1.
2.
il:
3.
4.
5.
a.
Actuators
ALM 1601, ALX 1201 and ALE 1302,1327,1376
are supplied
with adaptor A fitted, for direct coupling to valves with Y diameter
spindle.
When coupling any of these actuators
to valves with Vs diameter
spindle,
first loosen locknut F then remove and discard adaptor A.
b. Actuators
ALX 1251 and ALE 1352 have coupling E to suit valves with %
diameter spindle only. Adaptor A is not applicable.
Remove lug nut C from valve bonnet, locate actuator
mounting
bracket over
valve bonnet, replace lug nut and tighten, with actuator
correctly
positioned
to
give clear access for conduit entry and wiring.
For size 125 and 15Omm valves, remove and discard lug nut and fix actuator
mounting bracket to valve bonnet, using the four screws D supplied.
Lift valve spindle into actuator
coupling E or adaptor A, as applicable
and
screw on fully. Do not over-tighten.
Lock using nut B supplied.
Use manual
operator to position coupling E to required extension,
as necessary,
particularly
when assembling
to small size valves, but avoid over-extending
or
retracting
actuator
spindle to prevent malfunction
or damage.
If subsequently
removing
the actuator to service valve gland, for example,
it is
IMPORTANT
to isolate power supply to controller
or actuator
or otherwise
select the Manual position on the manual operator
push button. This will avoid
malfunction
or damage.due
to actuator
spindle being accidentally
driven
beyond its normal stroke limits.
Fig.2
WIRING
1.
2.
Remove cover A and conduit plate B (see Fig.3).

conduit to plate, allowing sufficient
length to permit
actuator.
Fit flexible
removal of the
Connect cables in accordance

with system wiring diagram or refer to
diagram inside cover in conjunction
with controller
diagram.
Earth
actuator, where applicable,
using the top (ALM, ALX) or bottom
(ALE) terminal screw. Observe
Wrring precautions
(page 7). Keep
wiring clear of internal moving parts.
3. Replace conduit plate and cover.
Caution
Do not switch
on power supply
until commissioning
checks
1 to 6
have been completed.
--A
Fig.3
6 - 10
DS 3.401
11199
FITTING AUXILIARY SWITCHES - KIT 831-1-211

\
WARNING
AUXILIARY
Note: When
carrying out
1.
Remove
SWITCHES
MAY BE AT MAINS POTENTIAL.
used with the ALE actuator,
fit auxiliary
switch
stroke setting procedure.
See Commissioning.
kit AFTER
cover.
8.
2. Undo fixing screw of main terminal

3.
4.
5.
8.
7.
I
3
block bracket A and reposition

adjacent to conduit entry (Fig.4). Use the locating hole to position
bracket and tighten fixing screw. (Not applicable
to ALE).
Push the switch operating
rod C into the large hole in the base of
the actuator
case (see Fig.5) until it clicks into the anti-rotation
bracket (G above).
Fii auxiliary switch kit bracket B in original position of main
terminals,
adjacent to vertical switch operating
rod c (Fig.5). Use
the locating holes provided
and tighten fixing screws.
Note that micro-switches
are adjustable,
one (Sl, 52 8 53) between
actuator
positions 0 and 5. the other (S4, S5 & S6) between
positions
5 and 10.
To adjust the switches,
energise
actuator (if commissioning
in
progress)
at correct voltage and run to position at which one switch
is required to operate. Alternatively,
use manual operator facility.
Loosen micro-switch
fixing screws D and slide assembly
with
terminal block to point at which vertical operating
rod c just
operates switch (Fig.6). Hold assembly
in this position and re-tighten
fixing screws.
9.
Now energise
actuator,
or use manual operator,
to run actuator in
opposite direction
to position at which second
switch
is required to
operate, then repeat the setting procedure,
as items 5 8 6.
Connect
cables in accordance
with system wiring diagram.
Ensure
that all wiring is kept clear of internal moving parts. Replace cover.
C
D
C
D
Fig.6
Fig.5
11199
DS 3.401
7 - 10
COMMISSIONING
WARNING
WHEN ACTUATOR
IS OPERATING
BEWARE
OF TRAPPING
FINGERS
ETC.
BEFORE
SWITCHING
ON POWER
SUPPLY:
ALM and ALX Actuators
1. Check that all control equipment
is correctly
located and fitted
2. Check ambient temperature
conditions.
3. Check that actuator has been correctly
assembled
to valve, up to
the stage when electrical power is called for.
4. Remove terminal cover and check that all control circuit wiring is
correct and in accordance
with the overall control system wiring
diagram. Check that the electrical
supply voltage is correct.
5. Note: Wking errors not only cause malfunctions;
they may also
damage controllers
and/or actuators.
6. Replace terminal cover. Set manual override
push button to Auto
position.
7. Now switch on power supply.
6. Check that the actuator functions
correctly
by operating
the
controlling
switch or adjusting
the controller
set value above and
below the temperature
(or humidity)
currently
existing at the sensor
(or simulated).
This must be within the scale limits.
If the actuator
forms part of a multi-stage
system in which several
actuators
operate in sequence,
wait until the appropriate
stage is
reached.
9. Whilst checking
actuator travel over full stroke of valve, run
actuator
to fully retracted
position. Select self-adhesive
indication
scale to match valve stroke, from set of four scales provided.
Fix
scale along outside edge of actuator
mounting
bracket, in position
where it will be most clearly visible, lining up top edge of anti
rotation plate on actuator spindle with position 0 on scale (Fig.7).
IO If auxiliary switches
are fitted, remove terminal cover to check for
correct operation
and switching
functions.
Replace terminal cover.
ALM,
ALX WIRING
4.
5.
PRECAUTIONS
Max. length of 1Smm

cable unscreened
1 OOm
FITTED)
USUAL
Max. resistance
per conductor
s-2
When wiring to BAS outstations

outstation
data sheet for the wiring precautions.
For longer lengths, increase cable size and observe max. resistance.
Screen feedback
wiring, or use MICC or run in a separate
conduft.
when applicable.
Caution
Do not connect
ALM or ALX actuators
in parallel.
A D c
1.
2.
3.
WARNING
ALM ACTUATORS
AND AUXILIARY
SWITCHES
(WHERE
ARE AT MAINS POTENTIAL.
OBSERVE
LOCAL WIRING
REGULATIONS,
EARTHING
REQUIREMENTS
AND ALL
SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS.
Wiring from actuator
to controller?
24Vl24OVSupply
ALE Actuators
BEFORE
SWITCHING
ON POWER
SUPPLY:
l
Check that all control equipment
is correctly
located and fitted
l Check
ambient temperature
conditions.
l Check
that actuator
has been correctly
assembled
to valve, up to the
stage when electrical
power is called for.
l
Remove terminal cover and check that all control circuit wiring is
diagram.
Check that the electrical
Note: Wiring errors not only cause malfunctions;
they may also
damage controllers
and/or actuators.
Setting the Actuator
The following instructions
MUST be followed to initially set the actuator
stroke and each time the actuator is transferred
to a different valve.
Set all adjustments
as follows (see Fig.8):
Setting
Adjustment
START C
10
10
SPAN D
STROKE
A
max. (fully clockwise)
DA/RA SWITCH
8
+ (DA)
HYSTERESIS
JUMPER
G A-B or B-C
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Set manual override

push button to auto position.
Remove
wire from terminal 9, ensuring
a OVdc supply.
Switch on 24V supply. The actuator
drive screw will run until it is
fully retracted
(position 0) operating
its limit switch.
Wait until the drive screw has stopped moving before continuing.
Loosen the pot fixing screw l-l. By sliding the pot assembly
towards you, disengage
gear E from the main drive shaft. Turn the
pot gear E by hand in the anti-clockwise
direction
(when viewed
from above) until the end stop is reached.
Gently slide the pot
assembly
back into position so that the pot gear E engages
with
the main drive shaft. Do not apply too much force in meshing the
gears as over pressure
will result in reduced
lie. Re-tighten
the
location fixing screw H.
Check that the voltage between terminal 7 and 11 is O.lV *lOOmV.
Reconnect
wire to terminal 9.
Adjust controller
set value to give IOVdc output.
Check that the Voltage between terminals
7 and 9 is approximately
1 OVdc.
Change the START setting from 10 to 0. The actuator drive
screw will now run until it is fully extended
(position
10).
Waft until the drive screw has stopped
moving before continuing.
Adjust the STROKE
setting in an anti clockwise
direction until
Voltage measured
between terminals
7 and 11 is Q.QV flOOmV.
Select and fix the appropriate
self-adhesive
stroke indication
label
to the actuator bracket. The relevant stroke length can be found on
the appropriate
Satchwell
data sheet for the valve being used.
Re-set START.
SPAN and DA/RA adjustments
as required,
to
suit control system.
DO NOT alter STROKE
setting. Recheck
operation
by adjusting
controller
set value so that actuator runs to
position 0. If limit switch does not operate,
adjust START setting
very slightly anti-clockwise
for DA swftch mode (clockwise
for RA
switch mode) until limit switch does operate.
Now adjust controller
set value so that actuator
runs to position 10. If limk switch does
not operate, adjust STROKE
setting very slightly clockwise
for DA
and anti-clockwise
for RA until limit switch does operate. Re-adjust
controller
set value as required,
to suit control system.
0 -10
DS 3.401
15. Set the required hysterisis
for the actuator
using jumper G. Low
hysteresis
(200 steps) is used for tight control applications
using
microprocessor
based controllers
and standard
hysteresis
(25
steps) is used for analogue
controllers
and standard
applications.
See the table below for details:-
16. Fit, set and check auxiliary switches,

if used, as described
for ALM
and ALX (section 9).
17. Replace terminal cover.
ALE WIRING
PRECAUTIONS
WARNING
IF AUXIUARY
SWlTCHES
ARE FITTED AND USED AT MAINS
POTENTIAL,
OBSERVE
LOCAL
WIRING
REGULATIONS,
EARTHING
REQUIREMENTS
AND ALL USUAL SAFETY
PRECAUTIONS.
lWiring from actuator1
to controller?
24vl24ovsupply
O-l OVdc signal
Max. length of ISmm

cable unscreened
1OOm
1OOm
) Max. resistance
per conductor
5n
5on

outstation
data sheet for the wiring precautions.
For longer lengths of 24 Volt supply wiring, increase
cable size and
observe maximum
resistance,
also run separate
return from terminal 7,
as Fyl.12.
Terminals
7 and 10 are both at ground potential, provided
for
convenience
of wiring.
Where screening
is required,
use either screened
cable, MICC or
cables run in a separate
conduit.
11199
DS 3.401
9 -10
11199
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
BASIC
DIAGRAM
FOR ALM
Signal on 1 drives towards

MAINS
:ASIC
ACTUATORS
10
0
DIAGRAM
FOR
ALX

Sianal on 2 drives towards
Note: Do not connect

ALM actuators in parallel
24 VOLT
Note: Do not connect

ALX actuators in parallel
10
0
ALX
Controlter
WARNING MAINS VOLTAGE
ISOLATORS
MUST CONFORM
VARNINGS hUXILIARY SWlTCHES MAY BE AT MAINS POTENTIAL

MINS VOLTAGE ISOLATORS
MUST CONFORM
TO EN 60336-l.
!4VAC DEVICES MUST BE SUPPLIED BY A TRANSFORMER
:ONFORMING
TO EN 60742.
TO EN 60336-1.
Fig.9
BASIC
DIAGRAM
IEPARATE
FOR ALE ACTUATORS
Controller
ACTUATOR5
24 VOLT
POWER
SUPPLY
Fig.10
TO ALE
ALE
ALE
Non-adjustable
WARNtNGS AUXILIARY SWITCHES MAY BE AT MAINS POTENTIAL.
MAINS VOLTAGE ISOLATORS
MUST CONFORM TO EN 60336-I.
24VAC DEVICES MUST BE SUPPLIED BY A TRANSFORMER
CONFORMING
TO EN 60742
TWO-STAGE
SEQUENTlAL
from one O-10 volt command
OPERATION
slgnal incorporating
dead
Fig.11
UARNINGS IUXILIARY SWtTCHES MAY BE AT MAINS POTENTIAL

6AlNS VOLTAGE ISbLATORS
MUST CONFORM
TO EN 60336-l.
I4VAC DEVICES MUST BE SUPPLIED BY A TRANSFORMER
:ONFORMING
TO EN 60742.
zone
STAGE 1
(Heating)
Set Switch to
set START to
set SPAN to
-0
STAGE 1
(Heating)
STAGE 2
(Cooling)
-0
AUXILIARY SWITCH 831-l-211
------m-w-I
I.-----------d
Adjustable over
I range O-5
I
1 Adjustabta over
I range 5-10
I
54 makes to S6 at 0. or set position

Sl makes to S2 at lo, or sat pOSitiOn
WARNINGS AUXlLtARY SWITCHES MAY BE AT MAINS POTENTIAL.
MAINSVOLTAGE
ISOLATORS
MUST CONFORM TO EN 603351.
Fig.14
0
F
ov
4v
Fig. 13
STAGE 2
(Cooling)
0
w
6V
4v
Controller Output Signal

OUTPUT DlAGRAM
Fig.12
DS 3.401
IO - 10
11199
DIMENSION DRAWING
Allow 1lOmm for removing
actuator from valve
ci
Dimension
in mm
Refer to Maximum
Stroke details
Short Stroke Version

l H = 285mm (height)
Standard Stroke Version

H = 310mm (height]
Weight: 2.2Kg approx,
Weight:
2.4Kg appmx.
WARNINGS
CERTAIN MODELS (AND AUXILIARY
SWITCHES WHERE FllTED) ARE
AT MAINS POTENTIAL.
LOCAL WIRING REGULATIONS
AND USUAL
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE OBSERVED.
NOTE EARTHING
REQUIREMENTS.
MUST CONFORM
TO EN 60335-l.
WHEN ACTUATOR
IS OPERATING
BEWARE OF TRAPPING FINGERS
ETC.
Cautlons
l $4$;;7T2vIces
must be supplied by a bansformer
conforming
to
SatchwelI#
latchwall
Famham
Slough
Control
Berkshire
United
Systems
Limited
Road
SLl
4UH
Observe
inotallatlon
lnstructlons
on page 6.
* Observe wfrtng precautfons
on page 7.
l Do not apply
power unless the actuator Is fitted to e valve.
l Do not switch
on power supply until commissioning
checks have
been completed
- see page 7.
l
Ensure wfres are not Inadvertently
crossed
over. Whing errors not
onfv cause malfunctions:
thev . mav- also damaae controllers
and/or
ict;laton.
l
Steam Appllcatlons:
FolIowIng
a shutdown
of the steam system It Is
Important
that the control valve Is fully open before lnboduclng
steam into the plpellne (purging)
or damage may occur to the
actuator spindle or vefve plug.
l
Observe maxlmum
snd mlnimum ambient temperatures.
l
Check thrust requirements
and maxlmum
dlffemntlal
of pressure of
valve to be driven. Do not exceed rated output thrust.
l
Interference
with those parts under sealed covers renders the
guarantee vold.
l
of Satchwell equlpment
are subject to
cozotkual Improvement
end therefore
Ilable to alteration without
Kingdom
l
Telephone
+44 (011753
Facsimile
+44 (0)1753
wwwsatchwellxom
An lnvensys
company
550550
824078
lnformatlon
b gfven for guidance
only and Satchwell do not accept
responslblllty
for the selection and lnstallatlon
of Its products unless
information
has been given by the company
In wlrlng relating to s
speclfk
applfcatlon.
DS 3.5Of
:
u Satchwell m
i i
SPRING
RETURN
Specification
no. 487-X-XxX+
LINEAR
D8m
ALMS, ALXS,
ALES
ACTUATORS
Satchwell
Linear Actuators
type AL-S are power failure return
modulating
actuators
having a linear output, for direct coupling to
Satchwell
lift and lay seat-type
control valves. They are also suitable
for other seat valves requiring a linear drive over stroke lengths of up
to 25.4mm (I), within the limits of output thrust stated overleaf, with
compatible
mounting arrangements
and spindle projections.
These actuators
are suitable for either two-position
or modulating
control, dependent
on the controller
or other switching
device providing
the input signal. The ALMS is suitable for a mains power supply, the
ALXS is 24V, and the ALES is 24V, but accepts a 0-1OVdc input signal.
The ALES actuator
can be set to operate a tow hysteresis
when used
fort;$ttc;troo;Tni;nsCon
microprocessor
based controllers
such
l
l
l
replace the
the WPE
Positive
power failure operation
by mechanical
spring
- does
not rely on any other power source
Patented
maintenance
free air brake system
Spring return action to spindle
retracted
or spindle
extended
position,
select from table overleaf
Direct coupling
to Satchweii
lift and lay seat valves type MZ,
MZF, MJF, VZ, VZF and VSF without
extra mounting
brackets
or
linkage
kits, saving site time
Direct coupling
to other makes of lift and lay seat valve, where
stroke,
thrust,
spindle
projections
and mounting
are
compatible
Universal
for valve strokes,
up to 25.4mm
(1). Actuator
stroke
is self-setting
to suit valve stroke,
including
ALES by simple
adjustment
Made under United Kingdom patent number

2211274 B and European patent number 0313290.
Patents
held by Satchwell
Control
Systems
Standard
or low hysteresls
selection
on ALES to cater for
different
application
types
l Case sealed
to IP 54 as standard
s Built-in
auxiliary
switches
operate
at each end of the stroke
l
DS4.16/4.110-VZ,VSF.W
DS 4.W4.610 - I.42 MJF. MZF
A Siebe
Group
4Xs
column in the table on page 2.
FEATURES
l
For the full specification

number
with the appropriate
figures from
Product
Ltd.
DS 3.501
ml99
2-10
SPECIFICATIONS
TYPES
ti
ALMS1601
POWER
SUPPLY:
230V
POWER CONSUMPTION:
CLUTCH
CONSUMPTION:
LIMIT & TRANSFER
SWITCH
RATING:
ALMS
1651
ALXSl201
ALXS
1251
ALES
1302
1 ,.ALES
1352
24V fl O%, 50160 Hz
24V 210%. 50160 Hz supply by a

transformer
conforming
to
EN 60742
16 VA 0 240V
9.5 VA 0 240V
16 VA 0 240v
9.5 VA 0 240V
15 VA
6 VA
15VA
6VA
16VA
6 VA
5A
5A
0.75A
0.75A
5000
5000
5000
5000
RUNNING
SPEED:
7 slmm (176 s/In)
SPRING RETURN
SPEED:
0.3 s/mm (6 s/h)
NO. OF POWER
FAILURE
OPERATIONS:
5000
5000
18VA
6VA
SPRING RETRACTS
ACTUATOR
SPINDLE:
SPRING EXTENDS
ACTUATOR
SPINDLE:
MAXIMUM
STROKE:
25.4mm (1)
THURSE
311N
AUXILIARY
.
.
SWITCHES:
Two,
INPUE CONTROLSIGNAL
[for modulation)
5A, 250V
Pulsed
Fixed
(Built-in)
Two,
5A. 240V
- 230 Volts
Pulsed
Fixed
(Built-in)
Two,
5A, 250V
Fixed
(Built-in)
O-1 OVdc
- 24 Volt ac
APPLICATION
Two-position
control from
thermostat.
time switch or other
switching
device having 240V rated
change-over
contacts.
Modulating
having a
3-wire mains output.
Modulating
control from any
controller
having a pulsed 24V
output.
ASSOCIATED
CONTROLLERS
CMC,
MMC,
ASSOCIATED
VALVES:
2 - Port: See DS 4.16
VSF, Vi!, VZF up to 100mm
VSF, VZ, VZF up to 1OOmm
VSF, VZ, VZF
up lo 1OOmm
3 - Port:
MJF, MZ, MZF
MJF, MZ, MZF up to 1OOmm
MJF, MZ, MZF
up to 100mm
See DS 4.36
Actlon:
Stroke
CSMC,
Reversing
Time:
CSC
up to 1OOmm
CXR,
- modulating
See table on page 3.
Mounting
Attitude:
Ambient
Temperature
Max. Amblent
it O%, 50160 Hz
Humidity:
See Installation
Llmlts:
Instructions
on page 5
Operating:
-20 to 50C
Storage:
-40 to 70C
Operation
8 Storage:
95% rh non-condensing
CXT, IAC, CSC,
Modulating
control from any
controller
providing
a O-l OVdc
positioning
signal. Start and Span
adjustments,
aleo DA/RA switch
included.
Refer lo Operation.
URC
MMC, KMC, DRTE, DDTE,

CiT, BAS, IAC, URC
DWTE
06/99
3 - 10
DS 3.501
.i
CONSTRUCTION
Case:
ti
Spring
Housing:
Mounting
Bracket:
Protection
Class:
Moulded
plastic
Pressure
die cast zinc base
Pressure
die cast aluminium
Operates
Motor:
Split phase,
Ratio:
142:
on screw-jack
capacitor
Clutch:
The electro-magnetic
Return
Sprlng:
Multi-turn,
Coupllng:
Position
Indicator:
Limit
terminal
cover
(tire resistant
to UL94V-0)
alloy
principle,
driven
reversing
type,
by a reversible
continuously
synchronous
clock
clutch
type,
is continuously
hardened
energised.
and tempered
steel.
Switches:
via a gear train.
Freely rotating coupling,

screwed:
3/8 24-UNF,
female, adaptor to % 32-UNEF,
female,
supplied
fitted.
Spindle anti-rotation
plate moves against stroke scale on mounting
representing
0 to 100% stroke. Fix appropriate
self-adhesive
scale
Commissioning.
81 Transfer
motor
rated.
Spring
Splndle
and removable
IP 54
Drive:
Gear
housing
ALMS & ALXS: Load dependent

switches,
self-adjusting
transfers
from terminal 1 to IT and 2 to 2T at respective
separate).
bracket.
Marked 0 to 10,
to suit valve stroke, see
to match valve stroke. Control signal

limits of valve stroke (not electrically
ALES: Limit switches operate as for other actuators,

but are internally
connected
between
card and motor windings.
The transfer function is not necessary
as multi-stage
sequencing
from O-IO Volt output signals from multi-stage
controllers.
hL.4
electronics
Is derived
Electronic
Positioner:
(ALES only)
Built-in printed circuit board connected

by plug and socket for easy servicing.
Internally
connected
to
1000 Ohm position feedback
potentiometer,
driven via gears from output shaft. Separate
0-1OVdc
output signal available to monitor position or as a service aid.
Terminals:
Accept
Conduit
Auxllfary
Entries:
Three
Switches:
2 x 1 Smm*
x 21mm
or 1 x 2.5mm*
dia. knockouts
cable.
(detachable
plate).
Two built-in voltage free single pole change-over

points at either end of the travel, approximately
(Use only bottom
VALVE STROKE TIME

This table gives
VALVE
TYPE
total stroke
AND
SIZE
time related
to type,
size and stroke
of valve
with
used.
NOMINAL
VALVE
STROKE
TIME (sacs)
VALVE
STROKE
Motor speed
7 e/mm
two on ALES.)
switches
rated at 5A, 25OV, built-in fixed operating
1.5mm of actuator
stroke before each limit switch.
Spring
speed
0.3 s/mm
VZELMZ
VSF & MJF
H&%15mm
9.5mm
(3W)
67
Vt 8 MZ
VSF & MJF
l-2
20,25mm
15.9mm
(5/8)
111
VSF & MJF

VZF & MZF
32-50mm
65-100mm
254mm
(1)
178
OPERATION
The stroke of the AL-S Linear Actuator
is self-setting,
using loaddependent
switches,
and is determined
by the stroke of the valve. The
ALES requires only a simple adjustment.
Consequently,
all
specifications
of actuator are universal
and can be fitted lo any lift and
lay seat valve having a stroke length within its nominal range, see
details under Specifications
on page 2 and Valve Stroke Time on
page 3.
ALMS and ALXS Actuators
The load-dependent
switches
perform a combined
limit and transfer
function. The limit switches de-energise
the actuator
at the end of
stroke, whilst the transfer switches are used basically
for sequence
operation in multi-stage
applications.
Where additional
switching
or
interlocking
functions
are required,
use the built-in auxiliary
switches
detailed under Specifications.
When energised
between terminals
1 and 3, the actuator moves its
spindle towards the fully extended position, lo open a Satchwell
e-port
or 3-port valve to the heat exchanger.
Conversely,
when energised
between terminals
moves its spindle towards the fully retracted
position, to close the
valve.
The load-dependent
limit switches
transfer the control signal from
terminal 1 10 1T and from terminal 2 lo 2T at the respective
limits of
valve stroke.
ALES Actuators
The ALES incorporates
an electronic
positioner
and provides
modulating
having a 0-1OVdc output. Using
the START and SPAN adjustments,
the actuator can be set to make
a complete stroke over any span from 4 to 10 volts, starting at any point
within the signal range, providing the sum of START volts plus SPAN
volts does not exceed
10. The load-dependent
limit switches
operate
basically as described
for the ALMS and ALXS, but are internally
connected
between the electronics
card and the motor windings.
Where additional switching
or interlocking
functions
are required,
use
built-in auxiliary switches detailed under Specifications.
A separate
0-1OVdc output is available
(terminal
11) for indicating
actuator position lo a Building Management
System or as a Service
and Commissioning
aid. This signal follows the complete
actual stroke
of the valve, not the input Voltage.
ALES actuators
can be set lo operate a low hysteresis
when used for
on microprocessor
based controllers.
The
hysteresis
is set by using a jumper link on the actuator
PCB (see the
commissioning
section for details). A low hysteresis
setting gives 200
steps between 0 and 10Vdc input and the standard
setting gives 25
steps.
The following adjustments
are made on the electronic
printed circuit
board, accessible
behind the removable
front cover.
:ac1oty
set at:
#de
Switch
Selects
@
@
OWGG
4-10
DS 3.501
Direct
or Reverse
Action
CD
signifies increaseof
actuator
position with increasing
input
dc Volt signal.
signifies the reverse of this.
otentiometer
START
(0-1OV)
Sets the command

signal Voltage
at which the actuator
commences
to move from zero position.
ov
otentiometer
SPAN
(4-1OV)
Sets the change in command

signal Voltage which will cause
actuator
to move through
comolete
stroke to position 10.
I
1ov
otentlometer
STROKE
1Matches
1desired
operation
of actuator
valve stroke.
lo
16mm
ALE ACTUATOR
POSlTlON
SPAN AND ACTION
FOR TYPICAL
Slide switch at
SElTlkGS
OF START,
0
+
Signal Volts
Fig. 1
Slide switch at n-
Signal Volts
MAINTENANCE
The spring power failure operation
must be regularly checked
by a
competent
person and can normally
be carried out as part of the
regular maintenance
schedule.
The spring checks are detailed below.
Depending
on site operation,
this check should be carried out every 6
months minimum.
If the checks are only every 6 months then one of
them should be carried out at the start of the heating season.
CHECKING
POWER
FAlLURE
OPERATION:Remove all power from the actuator
and check for correct spring
operation.
WARNING:
Hands should
be kept away from the actuator
during
this operation.
5 - 10
06/99
I._
INSTALLATION
Observe
the following IMPORTANT
points:
l Warnlng:
This is a spring
return actuator.
Keep clear of all
movlng
parts when removing
power,
l DO not apply
power unless the actuator
Is fitted to a valve.
l Do not switch
on power supply
until commissioning
checks
have
been completed
- see page 6.
l When
operatlng
a valve handllng
fluld above lOOC, DO NOT
mount actuator
above valve, but to one slde.
l Steam
Appllcatlonr:
Following
a shutdown
of the steam system
It Is Important
that the control
valve Is fully open before
lntroduclng
steam Into the plpellne
(purglng)
or damage
may
occur to the actuator
splndle
or valve plug.
c Ambient temperature
must be within limits -20 to 50%
c Do not install valve with actuator
directly underneath
it.
a Allow sufficient clearance
for fitting and wiring, a minimum of 120mm
between the top of the actuator
and the nearest obstruction.
c Complete
mechanical
fitting of actuator
to valve BEFORE
connecting
electrical
wiring. This avoids damage which may occur, due to loaddependent
limit switches
not being operated.
l Ensure
location is reasonably
clean and dry.
ACTUATOR FITTING INSTRUCTIONS

ALL ACTUATORS:
DO NOT REMOVE
DESPATCH
BOLTS 0 UNTIL
INSTRUCTED
TO DO SO IN THE COMMISSIONING
SECTION
ON PAGE 6.
Nttlng ALMS 1601, ALXS 1201 and ALES 1302 to valves with a 9.5mm
(s/s*) or 15.9mm (5N) stroke.
1. Using locknut B ffi setting collar K to support the valve spindle fim~ly in
the fully extended
position.
2. Remove lugnut c from valve bonnet. Locate actuator
mounting frame
over valve spindle, followed by lugnut c. DO NOT ENGAGE
WITH
BONNET
THREAD.
3. Locate valve spindle into adaptor A and engage thread by hand rotation
of coupling nut E until actuator
mounting
frame just rests on the valve
bonnet clamping surface. Engage lugnut c to bonnet thread and securely
tighten.
4. Carefully loosen locknut Bland remove the setting collar K. Hold adaptor
A steady and tighten locknut 73.
Fitting ALMS 1651, ALXS 7251 and ALES 1352 to valves with a 9.5mm
(Ml.)
or 15.9mm (s/B) stroke.
1.
2.
3.
Remove lugnut Cfrom valve bonnet, locate actuator mounting frame over
valve spindle, followed by lugnut c. DO NOT ENGAGE
WITH BONNET
THREAD.
With the valve spindle held fully depressed
locate valve spindle into
adaptor A and engage thread by hand rotation of coupling nut E until
actuator mounting frame just rests on the valve bonnet clamping
surface.
Engage lugnut c to bonnet thread and securely tighten.
Hold adaptor A steady and tighten locknut B.
Fitting ALMS 1601, ALXS 1201 andALES

1302 to valves with a 25.4mm
(7 ) stroke.
1. Remove adaptor A and transfer
locknut F to the valve spindle.
2. Remove tugnut c from valve bonnet and locate actuator mounting
frame
over valve spindle followed by lugnut C and securely
tighten lugnut C to
bonnet thread.
3. Extend the valve spindle to engage spindle thread with coupling nut E,
rotate coupling nut E by hand until fully tight. Lock to spindle using locknut
F, holding coupling nut E steady.
Flttlng ALMS 1651, ALXS 1251 andALES
1352 to valves w/th a 25.4mm
(1) stroke.
1. Remove adaptor A and transfer locknut F to the valve spindle.
2. Remove lugnut c from valve bonnet and locate actuator
mounting frame
over valve spindle followed by lugnut C. DO NOT ENGAGE
WITH
BONNET
THREAD.
3. Hold spindle fully depressed
and engage thread with coupling nut E,
rotate coupling nut E by hand until actuator
mounting frame just rests on
the bonnet clamping surface.
4. Engage lugnut Cto the bonnet thread and securely tighten. Lock coupling
nut E to the spindle using locknut F, holding coupling nut E steady.
Note:
Soma ofder Sat&well
these appticatbns
!3
valves witft a 25.4mm
stroke have a % thread on the spindle.
the spindle adaptor 662-1432
DS 3.501
For
must be used, not the adaptor supplied.
PIN
Do NOT REMOVE
F-B-
Note:
Locknut
B is supplied tied to the actuator
mounting frame. Transfer to valve spindle

before fining actuator to valves with 9.5mm
(3/W) and 15.9mm (5W) strokes.
06/99
6-10
DS 3.501
WIRING
1.
2.
3.
Remove cover A and conduit plate 73. Fit flexible conduit to plate,
allowing sufficient
length to permit removal of the actuator.
Connect cables in accordance
with the system wiring diagram or
refer to diagram inside cover in conjunction
with controller
diagram.
Earth actuator, where applicable,
using the top (ALMS, ALXS) or
bottom (ALES) terminal screw. Observe
Wiring Precautions
below.
Keep wiring clear of internal moving parts.
Replace conduit plate and cover.
I29 NOT SWITCH
ON POW=R SUPPLY UNTll
1 TO 4 HAV+ BFrwMPI
Pm
CO-
Fig.3
COMMISSIONING
ALL SPECIFICATIONS:
Whilst checking
actuator travel over full v&s
stroke as detalled below, a visual check should be mads to ensum that coupling
up to ths vahm is cormct. The coupling
anti-rotatbn
plats must not bs seen to over-lap the despatch
bolt hobs (0) by mom man lmm at either end of
the stroke (Flg.4). If this Is not correct, replace the despatch
bolt8 (G), power fall, and repeat the appropriate
flfflng Instructlons
glven under Installstlon
an ostm 5.
kib
ALMS and ALXS Actuators

BEFORE
SWITCHING
ON POWER
SUPPLY:
Is correctly
located and fitted.
conditions.
3. Check that actuator
has been correctly
assembled
to valve, up to
the stage when electrical
diagram.
Check that the electrical
Note: Wiring errors not only cause malfunctions:
they may also
damage controllers
and/or actuators.
6. Now switch on power supply.
7. For ALMS 1601 and ALXS 1201 actuators,
drive the actuator so
that the spindle is fully extended.
Remove
despatch
bolts G
(Fig.5).
For ALMS 1651 and ALXS 1251 actuators,
drive the actuator
so
that the splndle Is fully retracted.
Remove
despatch
bolts G. DO
NOT REMOVE
STOP BOLTS H (Flg.6).
NOTE: BOLTS G AND SElTING
COLLAR
If SHOULD
BE
RETAINED
FOR RE-USE,
IF THE ACTUATOR
NEEDS TO BE
REMOVED
FOR VALVE MAINTENANCE,
BY WIRING THEM TO
THE BOIlTOM
OF THE ACTUATOR
FRAME.
Check that the actuator functions
correctly
by operating
the
controlling
switch or adjusting
the controller
set value above and
below the temperature
(or humidity)
currently existing at the sensor
(or simulated).
This must be within the scale limits.
If the actuator
forms part of a multi-stage
system in which several
actuators
operate in sequence,
wait until the appropriate
stage is
reached.
9. Whilst checking
actuator travel over full stroke of valve, run
actuator to fully retracted
position. Select self-adhesive
indication
scale to match valve stroke, from set of three scales provided.
Fix
scale along outside edge of actuator
mounting bracket, in position
where it will be most clearly visible, lining up underside
of antirotation plate on actuator
spindle with position 0 on scale (Fig.4).
10. Remove all power from the actuator
operation.
WARNING:
Hands should
during thls operatlon.
8.
1mm max
D&patch
bolt holes (G)
ALXS l2&AjLg
I
ALMS,
ALXS
Wiring from
controller?
24V/24OV-
WIRING
actuator
ALXS 1251, ALMS 1651,

ALES1352
I
I
1601,
I
PRECAUTIONS
to
Supply
Max. length of 1.5mti

cable unscreened
1OOm
Msx. resistance
conductor
per
50
For longer lengths, increase cable and observe max. resistanw. Screen
feedback wiring, or use MICC or run in a separate conduit, when applicable.
Note: DO NOT CONNECT
ALMS OR ALXS ACTUATORS
IN PARALLEL.
ALMS actustors
and auxlllary
switches
am at malns potential. Observe
local wiring regulations,
earthlng mqulmments
and all usual safety
pmcautlons.
*When wiring to BAS outstations
the wiring precautions.
outstation data sheet for
DS 3.501
7-10
COMMISSIONING
(Continued)
ALL SPECIFICATIONS:
Whllsl checking
actuator traval over full valve stroke as detallad balow, a visual check should ba mada to ensun that coupllngup to tha valm Is corract. The coupling anti-rotation
plate must not be saan to over-lap tha daspatch
bolt holes (0) by mom ban lmm at alther end of
tha stroka (Flg.4). If this Is not corract,
replay tha daspatch bolts (G), powar fall, and repeat tha approprlata
flttlng Instructions
glVen Undar InStalfaUOn
on page 5.
ALES 1302 Actuator

BEFORE
SWITCHING
ON POWER
SUPPLY:
is correctly
located and fitted.
conditions.
3. Check that the actuator has been correctly
assembled
to the valve,
up to the stage when electrical
Note: Wiring errors not only cause malfunctions;
they may also
damage controllers
and/or actuators.
Note: The following instructions
MUST be followed to initially set the
actuator stroke to match the valve stroke and each time the actuator
is
transferred
to a different valve.
Set all adjustments
as follows:
Adjustmant
START C
Sefflng
SPAN D
STROKE A
OAlRA SWITCH
HYSTERESIS
JUMPER G
18
max. (fully
B
Re-adjust
controller
14. Set the required
hysteresis
for the actuator
using jumper G. Low
hysteresis
using
microprocessor
based controllers
and standard
hysteresis
(25
steps) is used to analogue
controllers
and standard
applications.
See the table below for details:Jumpar
Yes
Yes
No
Yes

16. Remove
power from actuator
operation.
WARNING:
Hands
should
during
this
WIRING
Wlrlng from
controller*:
ALE
operation.
PRECAUTIONS
actuator
24V- supply
O-l OVdc signal
to
Max. length of 1.5mm

cabla unscreened
1OOm
1OOm
For longer lengths of 24 Volt supply wiring,
maximum
Terminals
wiring.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Now switch on the 24V power supply.

Set switch Bto - (RA). this will drive the actuator
so that the
actuator drive screw is fully extended
(position
10). Wait until the
drive screw has stopped moving before continuing.
See Fig.5. Remove despatch
bolts G.
Remove the 24V power supply; the spring will return the actuator
drive screw to its fully retracted
(position 0). Wait until the drive
screw has stopped moving before continuing.
See Fig.7. Loosen the pot fixing screw H. By sliding the pot
assembly
towards you, disengage
gear E from the main drive
shaft. Turn the pot gear E by hand in the anti-clockwise
direction
(when viewed from above) until the end stop is reached.
Gently
slide the pot assembly
back into position so that the pot gear E
engages
with the main drive shaft. Do not apply too much force in
meshing the gears as over pressure
will result in reduced life. Retighten the location fixing screw H.
Set switch B to the +(DA) position and Reinstate
the 24V supply.
Check that the voltage between terminals
7 and 11 is O.lV
*l OOmV.
6.
9.
Adjust the c&troller

Check the voltage
1OVdc.
10. Change the Start
will now run until
limit switch. Waft
set value to give a 1OVdc output.

between terminal 7 and 9 is approximately
setting from 10 to 0. The actuator drive screw
it is fully extended
(position
10) and operate its
until the drive screw has stopped moving before
continuing.
11. Adjust the STROKE setting in an anti-clockwise

direction until the
voltage measured
between terminal 7 and 11 is 9.9V t100mV.
12. Select and fii the appropriate
self-adhesive
stroke indication
label
to the actuator bracket. The relevant stroke length can be found on
the appropriate
Satchwell
13. Re-set START, SPAN end DA/RA adjustments
as required,
to
suit control
system.
DO NOT
alter
STROKE
setting.
Recheck
operation
by adjusting controller
set value so that
actuator runs to position 0. If limit switch does not operate, adjust
START setting very slightly anti-clockwise
for DA switch mode
(clockwise
for RA switch mode) until limit switch does operate.
Now adjust controller
runs to position
lo. If limit switch does not operate, adjust STROKE
setting very
slightly clockwise
(applicable
lo both DA and RA switch modes)
Until limit switch does operate.
0 set to
DRTE, DDTE, DSTE,

DWTE, Czt
ALES
A-B or EC
Jumpar
MMC, KMC, IAC, BAS
cbckwise)
+ 0-9
0 sat to
-y?Lyyy*
increase
Max. reslstancs
conductor
par
5R
5oa
cable size and observe
resistance, also run separate return from terminal 7, as FiQ.12.

7 and 10 are both at ground potential, provided for convenience
of
Where screening is required, use either screened cable, MICC or cables run in a
separate conduit.
If auxlllary switches
ara usad at rnalns potentlal, observe local wlrlng
regulations,
earthlng requlremants
and all usual safety precautions.
*When wiring to BAS outstations refer tc the appropriate outstation data sheet for
8 -10
DS 3.501
COMMISSIONING
06/99
;f
(Continued)
ALL SPECIFICATIONS:
Whilst checktng actuator travel over full valve stroke as detailed below, a vlrual check should be made to en&m that coupling
up to the valve Is correct. The coupling anti-rotation
plats must not be seen to over-lap ttw clerpptch bolt holes (Q) by mom than lmm at otther end of
the Stroks (110.4). If thlr la not correct, replace the despatch bolts(G), power fall. and repeat tha appropriate
flfflng InstructIons
glvbn under Inrtallatlon
on pa90 6.
ci
ALES 1352 Actuator

BEFORE
SWITCHING
ON POWER
SUPPLY:
is correctly
located and fitted.
conditions.
3. Check that actuator has been correctly
assembled
to valve, up to
the stage when electrical
correct and In accordance
Note: Wiring errors not only cause malfunctions:
they may also
damage controllers
and/or actuators.
Note: The following instructions
MUST be followed to initially set the
actuator stroke and each time the actuator
is transferred
to a different
valve.
Set all adjustments
as follows:
Adjustment
Sattlng
S-rART C
SPAN D
1:
STROKE A
mar. ffullv
DAIRA SWITCH
HYSTERESIS
JUMPER G
ClOC&Gi)
+ WV
11. Set the required hysteresis

for the actuator
using jumper
hysteresis
microprocessor
based controllers
and standard
hysteresis
(25 steps) is used to analogue
controllers
and standard
aoolications.
See the table below for details:-
\,
YW
YOS
DRTE. DDTE. DSTE.
No
Yes

13. Remove
power from actuator
operation.
WARNING:
Hands should
be kept awey from the actuator
during this operstlon.
ALES WIRING
PRECAUTIONS
from
actuator
controller?
24V- supply
O-1 OVdc signal
ALE
OVdcJ
OVdc
WAC, KMC, IAC, BAS
Wlrfng
A-B or EC
L. Low
using
Max. length of 1.5mnP

cable unscreened
lOOIll
to
lOOIll
Max. mslstance
per
conductor
5R
50R
For longer lengths of 24 Volt supply wiring, increase cable size and observe
maximum resistance, also run separate return from terminal 7. as Fig.12.
Terminals 7 and 10 are both at ground Potential, provided for convenience of
wiring.
Where
screening
separate
If auxlllary
regulations,
Fig.8
1.
2.
3.
u
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Now switch on the 24V power supply. This will drive the actuator so
that the actuator drive screw is fully retracted
(position 0). Wait until
the drive screw has stopped moving before continuing.
See Fig.6. Remove despatch
bolts G. DO NOT REMOVE
STOP
BOLTS H.
See Fig.8. Loosen the pot fixing screw M. By sliding the pot
assembly
towards
you, disengage
gear N from the main drive
shaft. Turn the pot gear N by hand in the anti-clockwise
direction
(when viewed from above) until the end stop is reached.
Gently
slide the pot assembly
back into position so that the pot gear N
engages
with the main drive shaft. Do not apply too much force in
meshing the gears as over pressure
will result in reduced life. Retighten the location fixing screw M.
Check the voltage between terminals
7 and 11 is O.lV *lOOmV.
Adjust the controller
set value to give a 10Vdc output.
Check the voltage between terminal 7 and 9 is approximately
1 OVdc.
Change the start setting from lo to 0. The actuator drive screw
will now run until lt is fully extended
(position
IO) and then operate
its limit switch. Wait until the dtfve screw has stopped
moving
before continuing.
Adjust the STROKE setting in an anti-clockwise

direction Until the
voltage measured
between terminal 7 and 11 is 9.9Vdc il WmV.
9. Select and flx the appropriate
self-adhesive
stroke indication
label
to the actuator
bracket The relevant stroke length can be found on
the appropriate
Satchwell
IO. Re-set START, SPAN and DAIRA adjustments
as required,
to
suit control system.
DO NOT alter STROKE
setting.
Recheck
operation
by adjusting
controller
set value so that
actuator
runs to position.O.
If limit switch does not operate, adjust
START setting very slightly anti-clockwise
for DA switch mode
(clockwise
for RA swltoh
mode) until limit switch does operate.
NOW adjust controller
runs to position
IO. If limit switch does not operate, adjust STROKE
setting very
slightly clockwise
(applicable
to both DA and RA switch modes)
until limit switch does operate.
Readjust
controller
is required,
use either screened
cable, MICC or cables
conduit
switches
sarthlng
run in a
are used at mains potential, observe local wlrlng

mqulremanta
and all usual safety precautions.

outstation data sheet for
06t99
9 - 10
DS 3.501
.j
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
BASIC
DIAGRAM
FOR ALMS
MAINS

Slgnal on 2 drives towards
Thermostat
ACTUATORS
IASIC
DIAGRAM
10
0
24 VOLT
ACTUATORS
IN PARALLEL
LUXILIARY SWITCHES MAY BE AT MAINS POTENTIAL.

lAlNS VOLTAGE ISOLATORS
MUST CONFORM TO EN 60335-l.
!4Vac DEVICES MUST BE SUPPUED BY A TRANSFORMER
:ONFORMING
TO EN 60742.
Fig.9
FOR ALES
ACTUATORS
;EPARATE
24 VOLT
POWER
SUPPLY
AUXILIARY SWITCHES MAY BE AT MAINS POTENTIAL.

MAINS VOLTAGE ISOLATORS MUST CONFORM TO EN 60335-l.
24Vac DEVICES MUST BE SUPPLIED BY A TRANSFORMER
CONFORMING
TO EN 60742.
OPERATION
signal Incorporating
dead
Fig.1 1
L-----------
STAGE 2
(Cooling)
J 0 II 0 I
MP----?
ALE
ALE
SetSTART
SetSPANto
to
OV
4V
Fig.13
.J
zone
0
set Switch
to P-
4UXILlARY SWITCHES MAY BE AT MAINS POTENTIAL.

flAINS VOLTAGE ISOLATORS
MUST CONFORM
TO EN 60335-l.
!4Vac DEVICES MUST BE SUPPLIED BY A TRANSFORMER
:ONFORMING
TO EN 60742.
STAGE 1
(HeaW
Controller
0
-E
6V
4V
Fig.10
TO ALES
I!
64 makes to
Sl makes to
TWO-STAGE
SEQUENTlAL
from one g-10 Volt command
ACTUATORS
10
0
ALXS
AUXILIARY SWlTCHES MAY BE AT MAINS POTENTIAL.

MAlNS VOLTAGE ISOLATORS MUST CONFORM
TO EN 60335-l.
DIAGRAM
ALXB
or other
Note: DD NOT CONNECT ALMS

ACTUATORS
IN PARALLEL
BASIC
FOR

Slgnal on 2 drives towards
Gom
Controller40%Put
Signal
OUTPUT DIAGRAM
lOV
Fig.12
06/99
DS 3.501
10-10
:i
DIMENSION DRAWING
Allow 120mm for removing

actuator from valve
172
Dimensions
Weight:
in mm
4.5 Kg approx.
5.0 Kg approx.
w
ALXS, ALMS)
I ALES)
CAUTION
l
Certain models (and auxlllary
switches
where fltfed) are at mains
Potential. Local wlrlng regulatlons
and usual safety precautions
must
be observed.
Note earthlng requirements.
l
;g:s
spring return actuator. Keep clear of all rnovlng parts at all
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
)
)
Satchwell fl
Srtchwell
Control
Systems
Fernham Road
Slough
Berkshire
SLl 4UH
United Kingdom
Telephone
Facsimile
+44 (0)1788
+44 (0)1753
A Siebe Group
Company
Limited
p
b
m
)
)
580550
824078
These actuators
are not safety devices.
24Vac DEVICES MUST BE SUPPLIED BY A TRANSFORMER
CONFORMING
TO EN 60742.
MUST CONFORM TO EN 603351.
Observe installation
Instructions
on page 5.
Observe wlrlng precautions
on page 6.
Do not switch on power supply until commlsslonlng
checks have
been completed
- sea Page 6.
Do not apply Power unless the actuator Is fltted to a valve.
Ensure wires am not Inadvertently
crossed over. Wlrlng errors not
only cause malfunctions;
they may also damage controllers
and&
actuators.
Ca
out regular checks on the spring power failure operation as
defar led on psge 4 under Maintenance.
Steam Appllcatlons:
Following a shutdown
of the steam system It is
Important that the control valve Is fully open before introducing
steam Into the pipellne (pufglng)
or damage may occur to the
actuator spindle or valve plug.
Observe maximum and minimum ambient temperatures.
Chedc thrust requirements
and maximum differential pressure of valve to
be driven. Do not exceed rated output thrust.
Interference with those parts under sealed covers renders the guarantee
void.
of Satchwell equipment are sub+13 to continual
improvement and therefore liable to alteration without noba%
Information Is gfven for guidance only and Satchwell do not accept
responsbility
for tha selection of installation of Its products unless
information has been Qivm by the Company in WdtinQ relating to a spedfic
af@cation.
A periodic system and tuning check of the amtrol system Is recommended.
Please contact your local Satchwell service office for details.
DS 13.310
BAS
:^
g Satchwell#
UNC 532
BUILDING AUTOMATION
SYSTEM
UNIVERSAL NETWORK CONTROLLER
The Universal
Network Controller
(UNC 532) is a fully intelligent
alone* outstation, specifically
designed
for sites and applications
low point counts.
The UNC 532 incorporates
16-bit microprocessor
technology
permitting
true peer to peer communications
directly between
*
the elements on a network.
rl,
standwith
any of
Each controller
can monitor and control upto 32 individual items of
plant. The inputs and outputs can be configured
to match the
monitoring
and control requirements
of plant. The UNC 532 continually
surveys sensors,
logs data, checks status and automatically
decides
on any control action necessary.
After initial programming,
outstations
perform independently
of other
system components.
Each outstation
incorporates
a clock, calendar
and memory to allow completely
stand-alone
operation.
This standalone operation
may be further secured and assured by the EEPROM
data back up option. The optional Electrically
Erasable Programmable
Read Only Memory
(EEPROM)
is available to store the pointfile
permanently
in the outstation
in addition to the site specific data
(pointfile) stored in the battery retained memory.
The integral keyboard
and display, also available as a retrofit
offers an extensive
range of local overrides
and interrogation
conditions.
option,
of plant
After initial programming

from a BAS terminal, the UNC 532 can be
used in a stand-alone
configuration.
In the event of a power failure
the EEPROM
option will hold the configuration
until power is
restored.
FEATURES
32 configurable
input/output
points
Cycle time: Typically
<I scan per second,
each point
l Fully
stand-alone*
outstation
l Compact
and cost effective
l Cable
management
system
l 16-bit
microprocessor
technology
l Two
communication
ports
l Optional
EEPROM
data back up
Local displays
and overrides
l Retrofit
keyboard
option
l Upto
50 sofhvare
points
l SMT
(Surface
Mount Technology)
based
l Maximum
Demand/Load
Shedding
control
l
l
also
configurable
for
capability.
Cf
An lnvensys
company
ON99
ix
13.310
06199
2-6
-,.j
SPECIFICATIONS
Type:
UNC
UNC
UNC
UNC
Heat Dissipation:
Fuse:
Power Failure Reserve:
Limits:
BAS
BAS
BAS
BAS
LAN with keyboard,

LAN with keyboard,
LAN, 579-l-663
LAN, 579-l-864
579-l-661
579-l-862
charged)
(assuming
giving a typical 90 day power failure

the battery is in good condition).
Operating:
10 to 90% rh
Storage & Transit: 5 to 95% rh
NEC V25+. Is-bit running at 1 OMHz
512k bytes
512k bytes
1 M byte (allows permanent
storage of site configuration
data and telephone
numbers
if applicable).
Optional EEPROMs
available to permanently
back up the complete
outstation
pointfile.
512k bytes - Specification
no. 579-I-490
EEPROM:
Ports:
INPUTS
Analogue
8 off - 0 to IOk Ohms
resistor kits:
Range
0 to IOV
0 to 20mA
Analogue inputs can
Voltage Free SPST
Opto-isolated
Non-isolated
Opto-isolated
Non-isolated
25W max.
400mA anti-surge
Nickel metal hydride rechargeable
battery (continuously
trickle
back up of point file data stored in RAM and for real time clock
Confuuration
data is stored permanently
in EEPROM.
Up to 32 hardware
points and 50 software
points
Operating:
0 to 5OC
Storage & Transit: -10 to 55C
Temperature
Relathre Humidity
(non-condensing)
Microprocessor:
EPROM:
RAM:
Outstation,
Outstation,
Outstation,
Outstation.
Optional
Extras:
EEPROM
Point file 579-I-490
Keyboard
579-l-489
Optional trunking
mounting
kit - Spec. no. 579-l-479
(sufficient
for two knock-outs)
UNC Keyboard
Guide - Spec. no. 868-1-703
230V ilO%
Switch selectable
to 115V flO%. 50Hr (-10%) to 60Hz (+I 0%)
24 VA max. (Triac outputs require a separate
24Vac supply)
Power Supply:
Consumption:
Points:
Ambient
Umits:
532
532
532
532
1 - RS232/RS485
specification.
I- RS232
(a span
of at least
(BAS
1 kQ should
LAN)
configurable
- RS485
be used
for adequate
resolution).
Kii Model No.

833-l-601
833-l -602
be used as digital inputs as follows:
contacts
(Open/Closed)
capable of switching
Digital
10 off, Voltage Free SPST Contacts
<IOk Ohms closed 1 M Ohms open
Max 15V dc
(BAS
LAN)
is non-isolated
Configurable
for Voltage
15Vdc
(open/closed)
Pulse Totaiisation
All IO Digital inputs may be used for pulse
Maximum
pulse frequency
1 OHL
totalisation.
OUTPUTS
Analogue
6 off - 0 to IOV dc signals (ImA per channel max. at 1 OV output).
Analogue outputs can be used as Digital outputs by using the Digital
Triac
8 Off - Triac Outputs.
24Vac, 0.6A max.
Minimum switching
current 20mA Q 24Vac
External plant should be switched
via externally
APPLICATION
AND ENERGY
MANAGEMENT
mounted
contactors.
FEATURES
-Provides
Distributed
Direct Digital Control (3DC)
-Multi
Password
Access (from the central terminal)
-Energy
Management
Programmes
-Time
Schedules
-Holiday
Schedules
-Optimum
start/stop
of plant
-Automatic
Power up of plant
-System
and Plant Alarms
-Real Time System Logs
-Calculation
Points
-Rotation
Points
-Programmable
points for user-defined
control
- Degme Day Calculations
-Maximum
Demand
ControWLoad
Shedding
strategies
Output
Module
- see DS 13.355.
or opto-isolated
or current
according
to
by use of the following
06199
DS 13.310
3-6
EQUIPMENT
EEPROM:
Retrofit
Keyboard
Display:
Trunking
Mounting
User Guide:
Terminal:
NIU:
and
AutodiallAutoanswer
Modem:
External
InpuffOutput
Modules:
Kit:
512k bytes EEPROM

pointfrle (site specific
579-l-489
- 579-l-490
data).
- Point file EEPROM
Allows easy installation

to trunking
Keyboard
Guide - 888-1-703
BAS 2800+ See DS 13.001
system
required
externally
DS 13.355.
mounted
to permanently
back-up
the complete
outstation
- 579-l-479
To allow convenient
connection
to local area networks
(see DS 13.410).
See DS 13.401 (for autodial modem operation
outside
When
-see
- used
input/output
modules
and remote
modems
the UK contact
are available
your
local Satchwell
to enhance
outstation
agent)
operation
CONSTRUCTION
Case:
f--j
Protection
Class:
Terminals:
Cable Entry:
Metal chassis with plastic side panels.

IP40 by use of the trunking
kit.
Hard wired to pluggable
screw terminal blocks.
Accept 0.5 to 1 .3mm2 conductor.
Chassis
knockouts
in top, back, sides and bottom.
Trunking
kit is intended for use with the knockouts
in the chassis
bottom
Indication:
Two
gives
an indication
that the outstation
is operational.
KEYBOARD AND DISPLAY

Operation:
Display:
Keyboard:
LEDs
The 8 keys give access to all functions

of the outstation
allowing it (after initial programming)
to be fully standalone. The keyboard
is password
protected
for security.
It is not possible
to access other outstations
on the
Local Area Network
from the keyboard.
Liquid Crystal Display (LCD), 2 lines, 40 characters
per line. Default display on keyboard
provides
continuous
indication
of value or status of connected
points.
8 key membrane
keyboard.
DS 13.310
4 -6
06199
ji
INSTALLATION
WIRING PRECAUTIONS
LOCATION
Select a position which is reasonably
clean and free from damp and
condensation.
Wiring entry points are in the top, bottom, sides and
back of the case. If the case is mounted outside of an enclosure
it is
recommended
that the bunking installation
kit is used. The wall should
be capable of supporting
the weight of the outstation.
If it is to be
housed in an enclosure,
ensure that the heat generated
can be
dissipated
without raising the ambient temperature
of the space above
the maximum
temperature
limit.
All wiring to the outstation

input/output
terminals
m&t be twisted pair
screened wiring (not required for Triac outputs) with ihe screen earthed
at the outstation
earth terminals
only. The outstation
must have a
verified good earth.
A full wiring specification

is available from Satchwell
Ltd. or your local Satchwell
agent on request.
MOUNTING
COMMISSIONING
1.
This unit should be commissioned

as part of a BAS System by a
competent
Satchwell
engineer
or an approved
Satchwell
agent.
Drill fixing holes into the wall to the dimensions

given below. If the
trunking kit is used then a template is supplied showing
trunking
entry positions.
2. Remove
both plastic side panels to expose wiring terminals
and
fixing holes.
3. Mount the outstation
securely
to the wall using the fixing holes
provided.
4. Connect wiring to the outstation
in accordance
system diagram.
WARNING
- DO NOT SWITCH
ON POWER
SUPPLY
UNTIL
COMMISSIONING
HAS BEEN CARRIED
OUT BY A COMPETENT
SATCHWELL
ENGINEER
OR AN APPROVED
SATCHWELL
AGENT.
LCD and k
It is recommended
that the internal wiring in the outstation
is loomed
and identified to aid servicing
and extensions
to the system.
Control
eytKm-d
RS232
and
RS465
Terminals
InpuVOutput
Terminals
Analogue
Outputs
279
r
-v---+FIXING
HOLE
Dimensions
DIMENSIONS
in mm
Fig.1
Systems
DS 13.310
5-6
08199
iI 4
I
TYPICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

BASIC
HARDWIRED
.-
SYSTEM
UNC 532 - DS 13.310

OUTSTATION
UNC 496 - DS 13.320
UNC 596 - DS 13.321
Fig.2
OUTSTATION
CONNECTED
TO A REMOTE
MODEM
RS 2321
Fig.3
DS 13.310
08199
DIMENSION DRAWING
346
I-
20mm knock-out
Dimensions
in mm
Satchwell#
Satchwell
Control
Systems
Farnham
Road
Slough
Berkshire
SLI 4UH
United Kingdom
,-
Telephone
+44 (0)1753
Facsimile
+44 (0)1753
www.satchwell.com
An lnvensys
company
550550
824078
Limited
Panel knock-out
WARNINGS
THE UNC OUTSTATION
IS A MAINS OPERATED
DEVICE. LOCAL
WIRING REGULATIONS
AND USUAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
MUST BE
OBSERVED.
NOTE EARTHING REQUIREMENTS-SEE
Page 4.
DO NOT SWITCH ON POWER SUPPLY UNTIL COMMISSIONING
HAS
BEEN CARRIED OUT BY A COMPETENT
SATCHWELL
ENGINEER OR
AN APPROVED SATCHWELL
AGENT.
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS
A NICKEL METAL HYDRIDE BATTERY
WHICH IS COMPLETELY
SAFE WHILST IN NORMAL OPERATION.
BATTERIES MUST BE DISPOSED OF IN AN AUTHORISED
LANDFILL
SITE.
Cautions
l
The UNC should be installed, commissioned
and serviced by a
competent
Satchwall onglneer or an approved
Satchwell agent.
l
Observe wiring precautions
on Page 4.
l
Obeelve maximum ambient temperature.
l
Interfamnce
wfth those parts under sealed coven renders the
guarantee vold.
l
It is possible that this publication
may contsln reference to, or
informatlon
about, Satchwell products
(hardware and software),
pro mmming or servkes
that are not announced
in your country.
Sue Yl references
or information
must not be construed
to mean that
Satchwall intend to announce
such products,
programming
or
services
In your country.
l
of Satchwell equipment is subject to
continual improvement
and therefore
liable to altamtion without
notice.
l
Information
Is iven for guidance only and Satchwell do not accept
responslbillty
8, r the selection
or lnstsllatlon
of its producta unless
information
has been given by the company
In writing mlatlng to a
specifk
application.
l
A periodic system check of the management
system Is
recommended.
Please contact your local SaJchwell sawke
office for
details.
DS 13.380
BAS 2800+
cl Satchwell#
BUILDING
AUTOMATION
ll/QQ
KEYPAD
SYSTEM
Specification
no. 579-l-455
The SAS Keypad is designed
for use with the UNC 496/596/532
range
of Outstations.
The keypad may be mounted
locally to an outstation
where it can be left permanently
connected,
or it can be used as a
portable unit and plugged in as and when required.
The keypad also permits display/override
of points within other
outstations
on the same LAN.
Network integrity is maintained
by the use of a password
access
system.
-I
Information
is displayed
on a two line Liquid Crystal Display (LCD),
each line made up of 40 characters.
Parameters
are accessed
by
easy-to-use
keys.
Alarms routed to a keypad are annunciated
on the LCD and by the
built-in buzzer. These alarms may also be reviewed
from the keypad.
Information
on points within an outstation
may be accessed
showing
alarm limits on these points.
The keypad can also be used to provide local overrides
of plant
condition for analogue
and digital output points. Parameters
such as
set-points,
time schedules,
holiday schedules,
etc may be amended
via the keypad.
FEATURES
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Password
Access
Large clear Liquid Crystal
Display
(LCD)
Membrane
keyboard
with audible feedback
on the keys
LCD viewing
angle may be changed
from the keyboard
Provldes
direct access
for interrogation
of points
Alarm annunciation
via LCD and buzzer
Review alarms
l
l
l
l
l
l
Review of all Point Types

Manual on/off or auto overrides
for Output Points
Set to value/auto
overrides
for Analogue
Output and Software
Points
Portable
or permanent
panegdoor
mounting
Easy lnstallatlon
Information
can be displayed
Cf
An lnvensys
company
from
other
outstations
on the LAN
DS 13.380
2-4
SPECIFICATION
Type:
i
c
Power
Ambient
Relative
Supply:
Temperature
Limits:
Humidity
Limits:
BAS 28OO+
BAS 1455 - BAS Keypad Unit
Specification
No. 579-l -455
Derived internally
from the UNC 496/5Q6 outstation
when fitted with a CommslKeypad
Expansion
Card (579-1-369)
or by use of a plug-in external
power supply when used
with an NIU.
Operating:
0 to 35C. Storage & Transit: -10 to +35C
Operating:
10 to 90% rh non-condensing
Storage 8 Transit:
5 to 95% rh non-condensing
Approximately
1 metre long cable with 25 way D type connector
for RS 232
communication
and power supply from the outstation.
ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT
Network
Interface
Outstations:
Unit:
See DS 13.410
Sea DS 13.320,
DS 13.321
and DS 13.310
ACCESSORIES
579-1-369
- Comms/Keypad
Expansion
Card (always required on UNC 496/596
Can be used on UNC 496 and 596 if additional
communications
are required.
579-l-759
- UNC 596 Wiring Loom (always required on UNC 596).
External power supply adaptor (to be purchased
locally).
Regulated QVdc, 100mA. 0 2.lmm dc power plug (inner connector
GND).
838-l-701
UNC 4Q6 door only, pre-drilled
for Keypad mounting.
where
CONSTRUCTION
Casec
Mounting:
Keyboard:
Display:
Moulded plastic
Panel or door mounted
UNC 496 (see Accessories).
UNC 596 panel mounting
only.
UNC 532 panel mounting only.
Membrane
keyboard
giving audible feedback
Liquid Crystal Display. 2 lines, 40 characters
per line.
LCD viewing angle may be changed
from the keyboard
BAS Keypad
Unit is used.
DS 13.360
CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
BASIC
tEMOTE
DIAGRAM
OR DOOM
MOUNTING
TO UNC 496
IX3485
Communication
cable to
outstatlon and NIU (also
power cable from
outstation)
RS 232 COP=+
Optional external power

supply ff keypad Is used
with an NIU or 532 of ff
the RS 232 is extended
to reach the outstation
9
1
KEYPAD
(Door mounting)
e'
@n
I-
lmcable
OUTSTATION
UNC 496 - (DS 13.320)
(Optional
remote
mounting)
OUTSTATlOtiS
UNC 496 - (DS 13.320)
UNC 596 - (OS 13.320)
UNC 532 - (OS 13.310)
UNC 496 requires Comms/Keypad

Expansion Card 579-l-369
Fig.2
Fig.1
REMOTE
MOUNTING
TO A UNC
IEMOTE
590
MOUNTING
TO A UNC
532 OR NIU
RS 465
OUTSTATION
UNC 596 - (DS 13.320)
OUTSTATION
UNC 532 - (DS 13.310)
OUTSTATIONS
UNC 496 - (DS 13.320)
UNC 596 - (DS 13.320)
UNC 532 - (DS 13.310)
OUTSTATIONS
UNC 496 - (DS 13.320)
UNC 596 - (DS 13.320)
UNC 532 - (DS 13.310)
(Remote
mounting
UNC 596 requires CommsKeypad

Expansion Card 579-l-369 and Wiring Loom -579-l-759
(The Keypad cannot be door mounted on a UNC 596)
COMMISSIONING
This
d
.4
unit should
be commissioned
as part of a BAS system.
only)
(Remote
mounting
Fig.3
only)
Fig.4
11199
DS 13.380
DIMENSION DRAWINGS
Dllenslons
in mm
Weight: net 0.45 Kg
SatchwelI#
Satchwell
Control
Systems
Famham
Road
Slough
Berkshire
SLl 4UH
United Kingdom
Telephone
+44 (0)1753
Facsimile
+44 (0)1753
www.satchwell.com
An lnvensys
company
Limited
550550
824078
Cautions
l This is an extra low voltage
devlcr. Local wiring regulations
and usual
safety precautions
must be observed.
and serviced by s
l The keypad
should be Installed, commlsslonln
8x4tchwell agent.
comoetent
9atchwell
enalneer or an approved
l
Co not exceed the ma&turn
amblent temperature.
l
Interference
wlth those parts under sealed covers renders the
guarantee
void.
l
Ceslgn and performance
of Satchwell e ulpment are subject to
continual
Imomvement
and therefom
II 33 le to atteratlon wlthout
notice.
l
lnformatlon
Is given for guidance only and Satchwell do not accept
msponslblllty
for the SekMJOn
or lnstallatlon
of Its mducts unless
lnformatlon
has been given by the Company
to a
.
_ In wrl t ng mlatlng
~peciflc
appllcatlon.
l A perlodlc
system and tUnlng check of the control system Is
recommended.
Pl%are Contact your local Satchwell servlca office for
deWIS.
Satchwell#
AIR DIFFERENTIAL
SWITCH
February 1997
PRESSURE
Type SPA
Specification
No.
131 -X-XXX
Differential
Pressure
Switch! monitoring
non-inflammable
and
non-aggressive
gases. Typical applications
are filter dirty and fan
run/stop detection.
i._B
Dimensions
In mm
For the full specification

the appropriate figures
table below.
number r-s la03 the 4xS with

the l-4 PE column in the
from
Weight 1gOg
Ftfflng
Klt 122-3601
(Optional)
PVC Tubing
Allow sufficient dearance

for access to the cable entry.
SPECIFICATION
Ad ustnmnt Range for
Tr 1p Pressure @bar)
TYW
Maxlmum
Operating
Pressure
SPA 1401
from
0.2 mbar
to
3.0 mbar
50 mbar
SPA 1402
1.O mbar
10.0 mbar
50 mbar
Electrical
Rating:
Ambient
Temperature
Differential:
Limits:
1A 25OVac (Resistive)
0.5A 25OVac (Inductive)
Storage: -25 +85C
Operation:
-20 +85C
Adjustable
SPA 1401 < f 0.025 mbar
SPA 1402 < r 0.05 mbar
Repeatablllty:
CONSTRUCTION
Plastic.
hazard
Housing:
Cable
Entry:
Electrical
Connections:
Accessories:
Protectlon
Class:
Pressure
Connection:
flamability
exists since
rating tJL94-HS.
the plastic used
This product is not suitable for use in environments

does not have seff-extinguishing
properties.
PG-11 for cables of 8-10mm outside diameter

3 off Screw terminals
122-3-601
Fitting kit (containing
2 meters of PVC tubing
2 duct mounting
pitot tubes)
IP54
2 elastic tubes with inside diameter
of 6mm.
and
where
a fire
INSTALLATION
MOUNTING
The SPA1401/SPA1402
exposed to corrosive
-
DS 21 .Ol
02l97
Observe
Ambient
Mountlng
. *
ORIENTATION
must be positioned
where it will not be
or flammable
atmospheres
or vibration.
Temperature
Limit of -20
to &5C
Considerations
The preferred orientation

of the switch is VERTICAL.
(See Fig. 1)
The ressure ports must WI
point up as there is a risk of
con 8 ensation entering the SPA pressure switch.
if it is mounted
horfzontaily,
the trip and reset pressure
will be about 11 pascais away
from that shown on the adjustment
scale.
To enable
vertical
Pressure
positioning
a bracket
Bracket Supplied
is supplied.
Connection
The optional fitting kit 122-3-601

contains
2 meters of PVC tubing and
2 duct mounting pitot tubes. The pitot tubes are fitted to the duct with
3mm0 self tapping screws.
(See Fig. 2)
it is recommended
that pressure
lines should be of 6mm inside
diameter plastic tubing, being thick enough to avoid kinking.
To
monitor dtfferentiai
pressure,
connect the iow pressure
supply to port
marked P2, and the high pressure
supply to port Pl .
The switch can also monitor absolute pressure
or high pressure
port open to the atmosphere.
Electrlcai
Rotating
,
by leaving
either
Fig.1
~213NG,KlT
(OPTIONAL)
the low
Connections
the gland
The standard
nut seals
switch
Switch Pressure
the cable
connections
entry.
are screw
terminals.
Setting
After removing
the cover, rotate the pressure
selection
desired trip pressure
is in line with the pointer.
SWITCHING
knob
until the
.
Piiot
Tube
DIAGRAM
SPA 14011
SPA 1451
Fig.2
Fig.3
CAUTION
0 This is a malns operated
device.
Local wiring regulations
and usual safety precautions
must
requirements.
0 preferred
mounting
position
is VERTICAL.
if mounted
horizontally,
the trip and reset pressure
ftOm that shown
on the adjustment
scale.
l The pressure
ports must m
point up as there is a risk of condensation
entering the SPA pressure
l Observe
maximum
ambient temperature.
l tnterference
with those parts under sealed covers renders the guarantee
void.
be observed.
Note
will be about
11 pascais

of Satchweli
equipment
are subject to continual
improvement
and therefore
liable to alteration
information
is given for guidance
only and Satchweii
do not accept responsibility
for the selection
of its products
unless
been given by the Company
in writing relating to a specific application.
A periodic
and tuning
check
of the control
system
is recommended.
Please
contact
your
away
switch.
l
l
system
earthing
local Satchweii
service
without notice.
information
has
office for details.
OSetchwell Cantrd Syslem Limiled - 1995 (revised February 1997)
3 ) S&&W
Control Systems Lttited, Famham Road, Slough. Berkshire,
Tel: +.I4 (0)1753 550550, Fax: +44 (0)1753 824078
United Kingdom SLl 4UH
REOIONM -I):
srimd (0117,u?77708
rgg$$iE
Y-z
H.y-m*Hmlh
01u4uteca
HMtlmDw(0151)5,
LWdS(OlWLO~W(o171)~8320
Lo* North (01753,E-x653

Londonsorlh (01753)550550
MancMr(0151)4405545
Nwede(018,
ms375
Nommjnm(olc 19255555
simwmd
(01279
583127
wales(01633)
8t 7123
.i
Ds21.02
( 1 Satchwell#
January
1997
UNIVERSAL DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE SWITCH
Type SPU
Spec
No.
131 -X-XXX
Applications
Can be used to signal when the pressure
difference
is too high due
a blocked filter; too low due to flow failure, or for level control in a
pressurised
vessel.
Not suitable for use on a vacuum.
to
Weight:
1.4 Kg (SW 1201
1.8 Kg (SPU 1202
Lo
TYW
SPU 1201
92
17.0
F
53.2
38
E
18.6
loo
MBSP
77
21.4
14.5
SPU 1202
92.4
42.9
100
17.0
18.6
52.6
HBSP
90
16.2
12.5
Dimensions
in mm
High
SPECIFICATION
SPU 1201 Universal
SPU 1202 Universal
Type:
Maximum
Line
Pressure:
Reset
I)
Overload:
16 Bar
12 to 250 mbar
Reset
7 mbar
Differential:
Differential
ELECTRICAL
Single pole,
Ambient
Pressure
RATING
double throw
Temperature
No. 131-l-201
No. 131-l -202
0.1 bar approx.

Pressure
SPU 1202
Pressure
Range:
Maximum
- Specification
- Specification
0.2 to 4 bar
Differential:
Differential
Switch
Switch
34 bar
SPU 1201
Pressure
Range:
Maxlmum
Pressure
Pressure
Overtoad:
mlcroswltch:
Limits:
approx.
1 Bar
5 A at 250Vac (Resistive)
2 A at 440Vac (Resistive)
Earth Connection
Provided
-10C
to +6OC
CONSTRUCTION
Dlaphragm:
Beryllium
Seals:
Nitrile
Copper
Rubber
Pressure
Chambers:
Brass
Pressure
Connections:
SPU 1201 l/4 BSP

SPU 1202 & BSP
Mkroswltch
Housing:
Mounting
Bracket:
Degree
Zinc
Diecast
Steel with Neoprene
Top Cover.
of Protection:
IP65
Terminals:
Accept
1 mm* wire.
Cable
20mm
conduit
Pressure
Entry:
Medium:
Gasket
Steel zinc plated
Air, Nitrogen,
thread
Larger
sizes
adaptor
Inert Gases,
are not recommended.
supplied.
Water,
Steam
SPU thread
Or Mineral
also suitable
oils
for a cable
gland nut.
01197
DS 21.02
INSTALLATION
MOUNTING
Connect the high pressure

appropriate
tapping points.
0
and low pressure

connections
(HIGH or HP, LOW or LP).
ln applications
involving flow where differences
between the two connections
are always within
there is no need to fit valves.
Not sultable
Mounting
The mounting
Wiring
BRACKET
:;
DETAILS
to the
in line pressure
the range of the switch
for use on a vacuum.
Considerations
bracket
is fitted as standard.
Instructions
1.
Ensure
2.
Remove
the switch
is isolated.
3.
User terminals
1 and 2 (or C and NC) for closedcircuit
operating pressure.
below
4.
Use terminals
1 and 3 (or C and NO) for closed
operating pressure.
above
5.
Ensure
the lid and terminal
Earth connection
cover.
circuit
76.2
xmensions
is used.
Fig.1
in mm
WIRING
Adjustment
Normally Open Contact
A quarter turn of the adusting nut will give a change in setting of

approximately
10% oft h e range of the SPU. (400 mbar on the
SPU 1201,25
mbar on SPU 1202). Fig. 3.
IF
2. )
00
00
@J
2
00
zmiil
Common Contact
Normally Closed Contact
L
220l240Vac
1-A
T
2 (NC)
Pig.2
ADJUSTMENT
INCREASE
n
Operating
Pressure
Adjustment
w
DECREASE
Pig.3
CAUTION
0
This is a mains
requirements.
l
l
l
l
l
Not suitable
for use on a vacuum.
Observe maximum
ambient temperature.
Interference
void.
of Satchwell equipment
are subject to continual
improvement
and therefore
liable to alteration without notice.
lnfomration is given for guidance
only and Satchwell
do not accept responsibility
for the selection
of its products
unless information
has
been given by the Company
in writing relating to a specific application.
A periodic system and tuning check of the control system is recommended.
Please contact your local Satchwell
Service Office fcr details.
operated
device.
Local
wlrlng
regulations
and usual
safety
precautions
must
be observed.
Note
earthing
DS 25.040
01199
I Satchwell#
VSD6000
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVES

VSD 6000 HVAC RANGE
The Satchwell
VSD 6000 range of variable speed drives are designed
to reduce energy and maintenance
costs in HVAC systems.
Speed drives control the flow of water or air through the system by
directly varying the pump or fans speed in proportion
to demand.
The
VSD 6000 range is designed
to run under worst case conditions
unique to HVAC installations,
such as mains phase loss, over heating
:
or fluctuations
on the mains.
Every VSD 6000 speed drive incorporates
a detachable
Local Control
Panel (LCP) with an LCD screen. This panel can be used to copy
programming
instructions
from one drive and transfer to another.
FEATURES
l
l
l
l
l
l
Energy
savings
of over 50% are made possible
Extends
the life of plant equipment
Easy Installation
and set-up
reduces
Installation
Choice of IP20 or IP54 models
Suitable
for retro-ftt
as well as new Installations
Works
with standard
motors
A Slebe
Croup
Product
costs
2-4
DS 25.040
01199
GENERAL INFORMATION
CI
Power Inputs
Supply voltage: 3 x 200-24QV
~10%
3x360.46QV*lO%
Supply frequency:
50/60 Hz
Power factor/cos.
(0:0.90/l .O at rated load
Switching
on
input: approx.
1 tlme/min.
Power Outputs
Output voltage: O-100% of supply voltage
Output frequency:
O-120 Hz or Q-1000 Hz selectable
Switching on output: Unlimited
Ramp times: 1 .OO-3600 sec.
Power range: 1,l kW to 45 kW at 200-240
V
1,l kWto200kWat380-415V
1,l kWto25OkWat440460V
Torque
Characteristics
Starting torque: 110% for 1 min.
High starting torque: for 0.5 sec.
Acceleration
torque: 100%
Overload
torque: 110%
Digits1 Signal Inputs
Number of programmable
inputs: 8
Voltage level: (O-24 Vdc (PNP positive logics)
Voltage level, logical yl: <5Vdc
Voltage level, logical 1: >lOVdc
Maximum
voltage on input 28 Vdc
Input resistance,
Ri: approx. 2W
sup&y
c-
No. of programmable
voltage inputs: 2
Voltage level: 0-1OVdc (scaleable)
Input resistance,
Ri: approx.
1OkD
No. of programmable
current inputs: 1
Current range: O/4-20mA
(scaleable)
Input resistance.
Ri: approx. 200R
Resolution:
10 bit + sign
Scanning time per input: 3 msec.
Pulse Inputs
No. of programmable
pulse inputs: 3
Voltage level: O-24 Vdc (PNP positive logics)
Maximum voltage on inpub 28Vdc
Input resistance,
Ri: approx. 2kC
Scanning time per input: 3 msec.
Resolution:
10 bit + sign
Control
Card, DlgitaYPulse
and Analogue
Outputs
No. of programmable
digital and analogue
outputs:
2
Frequency
ranges (digital output used as pulse output): O-32 kHz
Current range at analogue
output: O/4-20mA
Accuracy
of analogue
output: Max. error: 1.5% of full scale
Resolutlbn
on analogue
output: 8 bit
Control card, 24Vdc supply: Max. load 200 mA
Relay Outputs
No. of programmable
relay outputs:
2
1 pcs. max. terminal load on control card:
50 Vat, 1 A, 60VA 75 Vdc, 1 A, 30W
1 pcs. max. terminal load on power card:
240Vac, 24 60 VA, 24Vdc, lOmA, 24Vac, lOOmA
Externals
Enclosure
types: IP 20. IP 54
Vibration test: 0.7 g
Max. relative humidity:
93% +2%, -3% (IEC 68-2-3)
for StorageAransport
Ambient temperature:
Max. 45X(IP
20), 4OC, IP 54
Min. ambient temperature
in full operation:
0C
Min. ambient temperature
at redu&d
performance:
-1OC
Temperature
during storage/transport:
-25 - +6517OC
IMax. altitude above sea level: 1OOOm
IEMC Standards
Applied
Emission:
EN 50081.lM,
EN 61800-3,
EN 55011, EN 55014
Immunity:
EN 50082-2,
EN 61000-4-2.
IEC 1000-4-3,
EN 61000-4-4
EN 61000-4-5,
ENV 50204, EN 61000-4-6,
VDE 0160/1990.12
VSD 6000 HVAC Protection
Electronic
motor thermal protection
against overload.
Temperature
monitoring
of heat-sink
ensures that the VSD frequency
converter
cuts out if the temperature
reaches
90C for IP 20. For IP
54, the cut-out temperature
is 80C. An over temperature
can only be
reset when the temperature
of the heat-sink
has fallen below 60C.
The VSD frequency
converter
is protected
against earth fault and
short-circuiting
on motor terminals
U, V, W.
Monitoring
of the intermediate
circuit voltage ensures that the VSD
frequency
converter
cuts out if the intermediate
circuit voltage gets too
high or too low.
If a motor phase is missing,
the VSD frequency
converter
cuts out. If
a mains phase is missing,
the VSD frequency
convener
will cut out or
automatically
derate the output.
Accessories
Remote Mounting
Kit for LCP Keypad - Spec. No. 272-6-301
01199
3-4
PRODUCT SELECTION AND ELECTRICAL
Type
Spec.
No.
Case
Style
BOOKCASE
SP/LE - IP 20
VSDN 6002
272-6-002
VSDN 6003
272-6-003
VSDN 6004
272-6-004
VSDN 6005
272-6-005
VSDN 6006
272-6-006
VSDN 6008
272-6-008
VSDN 6011
272-6-011
CABINET
SNLE
- IP 20
VSDN 6016
2726016
VSDN 6022
272-6-022
VSDN 6027
272-6-027
VSDN 6032
272-6-032
VSDN 6042
272-6-042
VSDN 6052
272-a-052
VSDN 6062
272-6-062
CABINET
STYLE
VSDE 6002
VSDE 6003
VSDE 6004
VSDE 6005
VSDE 6008
VSDE 6008
VSDE 6011
VSDE 6016
VSDE 6022
VSDE 6027
JSDE 6032
JSDE 6042
JSDE 6052
JSDE 6062
- IP 54
273-6-002
273-a-003
273-a-004
273-6-005
273-6-006
273-8-008
273-a-01 1
273-6-016
273-a-022
273-6-027
273-a-032
273-6-042
273-6-052
273-a-062
: ,i
DATA
Nominal
Motor
kW
38046OV
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
1.1
1.5
2.2
3.0
Z:ki
Electrical
Power
output
kVA
440-46ov
380-415V
Continuous
Output
Current
Amps
380415V
440-46OV
7.5
2.2
2.7
4.0
5.2
7.2
9.3
11.5
2.4
2.9
3.8
5.0
6.5
8.8
11.2
3.0
4.1
5.6
7.2
10.0
13.0
18.0
3.3
3.7
5.3
6.9
9.0
12.1
15.4
B
B
B
B
B
B
0
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
30.0
37.0
- 45.0
17.3
23.0
27.0
31.8
43.8
52.5
84.7
16.7
21.5
27.1
31.9
41.4
51.8
61.3
24.0
32.0
37.5
44.0
61.0
73.0
90.0
21.0
27.0
34.0
40.0
52.0
65.0
77.0
C
C
C
:
.. 1.1
1.5
2.2
3.0
4.0
5.5
7.5
11.0
15.0
18.5
22.0
30.0
37.0
45.0
2.2
2.7
4.0
5.2
7.2
9.3
11.5
17.3
23.0
27.0
31.8
43.8
52.5
64.7
2.4
2.9
3.8
5.0
8.5
8.8
11.2
16.7
21.5
27.1
31.9
41.4
51.8
81.3
3.0
4.1
5.6
7.2
10.0
13.0
16.0
24.0
32.0
37.5
44.0
81 .O
73.0
90.0
3.3
3.7
5.3
6.9
9.0
12.1
15.4
21 .o
27.0
34.0
40.0
52.0
65.0
i7.0
:
C
C
cc
C
DS 25.040
PHYSICAL
Order
01199
4-4
DS 25.040
INFORMATION
Type
.VSDN
,,.-.a
DYIY
6002
CML
PWJ
VSDN
VSDN
6006
6011
Dimension
Case
Style
395
90
260
395
130
260
ah
364
--10
100
384
70
100
VSDE
VSDE
6016
6032
810
355
280 _
70
560
330
200
VSDE
VSDE
6042
6062
940
400
280.
70
690
375
200
Enclosure
Descri&on
IP 20 - Slim design for installation

in switch
gear panels.
Can be
mounted
side by side without the
need for addftional
cooling
devices.
IP 54 selected,
needed
directly
a plant
Where
this cabinet is
no additional
housing is
since the drive can be
mounted
on a wall within
room.
aA
.
Type
Type
A, IP20
8, IP20
CAtJTtON
Satchwell#
This Is a 3-phaaa device.

Do not excaed tba ratad Voltaga. Local
wlrlncl - ragulationr
and usual safety preuutlonr
must be observed.
Obsenm nuxlmum
amblent temperatures
and humldltlas ahown on
page 2.
. ~~~rference
.
Satchwell
Control
Systems
Famham
Road
Slough
Berkshire
SLl 4UH
United Kingdom
Telephone
Facsimile
A Siebe
+44 (0)1753
550550
+44 (0) 1753 824078
Group
Company
Llmlted
Information is given for guidance only and SaWwell do not accept

responsibility
for tha selection 01 installation of its products unless
information has bean riven
- by. the company. in writing. relating to a specific
application.
Design and perfonnanca
of Satchweil equipment Is subject to continual
improvement
and therefore liable to alteration without notice.
D A periodic system and tuning check of the control system is recommended.
Please contact your local Satchwell Service Dffii for details.
SECTION 3.
TECHNICAL
DATA OF PLANT.
3.1.
MAIN EXHIBITION
3.2.
FUNCTION
3.3.
WC EXTRACT
3.4.
KITCHEN
EXTRACT
3.5.
COOLING
WATER
3.6.
ELECTRIC
3.7.
GRILLE
AREA AIR HANDLING
ROOM & OFFICE EXTRACT
UNIT.
FAN.
FAN.
FAN.
CIRCULATING
WATER HEATER.
SCHEDULE
PUMPS.
3.1.
Main Exhibition
Area Air Handling Unit.
Manufacturer:
Euro Air Systems Ltd.
Address:
Unit 17 Elliott Road

Selly Oak
Birmingham
B29 6LS
Telephone
Fax
0121-414-1844.
0121-414-1624.
Model Ref.
MC 300-S.
Euro
Air
Systems
Ltd.
Unit
17,
Elliott
Road,
Selly
Oak.
BIrmllnghaln
B29
6LS
EURO AIR
I
Tel:+44(0)121
414
1844
Fax:+44(0)121
471
1624
euroatr@euroair.cablenet.co.uk
EURO AIR HANDLING UNITS

SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
FAN SECTION
Before carrying out any work in the fan section, ensure the fan motor is properly isolated
from the electrical supply and remove fuses. Access doors are provided on the fan section.
Check for worn or slack vee belts, replace when necessary with a complete set, do not mix
with new. Recommended tensions are given in the installation instructions, also check that
the fan and motor pulleys are correctly aligned in all planes. Vee belts will bed in after a few
days and thus will require retensioning. We recommend that the belts are inspected at
frequent intervals during the early period of operation to obtain an indication of belt life, so
that their replacement can be predicted. No accurate guide can be given, as belt life will
depend upon site conditions, maintenance, number and type of starts etc.
Check bearings for wear and need of lubrication. Worn bearings will be noisy and exhibit
excessive play and should be replaced. Old grease will have hardened and show signs of
separation. In this case all old grease must be thoroughly cleaned out of the race and
housing and replaced with long life, high temperature, lithium based grease. Check that the
repacked bearing does not overheat during initial run-up.
Some fans fitted with in line couplings, which must be checked for wear and if showing
excessive clearance must be replaced. Both fan shafts must be accurately aligned in
accordance with the fitting instructions supplied with the coupling.
COILS
Dirt can build up on the coil block even if filters are fitted. Fins should be periodically
cleaned to avoid loss of machine output. Should any leaks occur on the return bends,
element tubes or headers, these should be reported to Euro Air Systems Limited before any
repairs are undertaken.
ELIMINATORS
Some cooling coils are fitted with an eliminator and this should be regularly examined for
lasting prevention of water carry-over.
Service & Maintenance Instructions
File Location: Master D:\forms\0073,doc
Page
Reg,srercd
Numbet-
189438
1 FILTERS
Dirty filters are indicated when there is a noticeable drop in air volume. Where filter gauges
are fitted or where a pressure drop check can be taken, the filters should be changed when
the pressure drop value of 0.5 inches above the initial setting.
No guidelines can be given on filter life, but operating experience over a period will indicate
when replacements are needed. New buildings are dusty and will soil the first set of filters
fairly quickly. Inspect each filter visually as a breakdown in the media due to dirt overload
may result in a low pressure reading as air passes through holes in the filter. When
replacing filters ensure the edges are adequately sealed to prevent ingress dirty air. Spare
filters should not be unpacked until required.
THROWAWAY
FILTERS
2 thick panel filters come in a range of sizes and care should be taken that the correct size
is used and that they butt together correctly in the sides. Filters are usually of the throwaway
type, however some extension of filter life can be obtained by vacuuming the dirty face of the
filter.
CARTRIDGE
BAG FILTERS
Face sizes differ. In addition five lengths of bas and several grades of media are available.
For this reason it is important to replace only with filters of an identical type. In addition the
customer should be aware of certain bag filters which provide substantially less filter pockets
per frame and correspondingly less filtering surface. We recommend that you carry a spare
set of filters so that they are ready when the occasion arises. When re-ordering give
reference number and quantities of each size.
WASHABLE
FILTERS
Remove from main support frame and rinse in warm water with a mild detergent, then dry
and replace. Do not try and wash throwaway cardboard frames filters.
ABSOLUTE
FILTERS
These filters should always be replaced from the dirty side and manufactures and the
operating authorities standard fitting instructions should be strictly adhered to. Ensure that
filters with the gasketed face to the frame are centralised and clamped tightly into position.
FILTER
NOTE
Ensure that access covers are refitted the correct way round. They usually carry foam seal,
which if located in the wrong position will allow air to by-pass the filter. Also ensure that filter
access doors are correctly sealed shut, to elevate any air noise or air by-pass during
operation. During the warranty period any/all replacement filters should be supplied by the
A. H. U manufacturer to achieve continuity of supply.
Page 2
1 PRE-COMMISSIONING
CHECKS AND STARTING
Examine the shell of the unit for damage to panelling, which may have occurred whilst the
equipment was lying on site during the building construction period. Damaged panelling can
lead to excessive air leakage and minor damage can usually be easily rectified on site.
If the panels have been badly damaged it is preferable to have them replaced. Proper
protection of the equipment during construction stage will minimise these problems.
Check that all ductwork connections are properly made and are acceptable and air tight. In
addition, study the fan discharge ducting to make sure that no excessive pressure drops will
occur. Site dimensional problems often mean that there is little room for properly designed
duct connections at this point. Also in some cases, silencers are located too close to the fan
outlet causing considerable turbulence on the front end of the pods. It is a point, which is
outside the manufacturers control but one which we would gladly liase with the customer to
minimise the detrimental effects and problems which can potentially occur. Fan sets are
checked, tested and balanced at the factory.
Before running the fan remove the motor/fan transit straps, check that the inside of the scroll
is clear of debris and that the impeller runs free. Check for damage including mis-alignment
of the impeller, shaft and drive. Check all fastenings are secure and anti-vibration mounting
are undamaged. Check the fan and motor drive belt alignment and tension of the belts. Use
a straight edge across pulley faces to check drive alignment. Re-tension as necessary in
accordance with attached sheet. A note of the belt sizes and drive details are given at the
end of these instructions.
If site damage of the fan is suspected, remove the belts and spin the impeller. Mark the spot
on the shaft, and several repeated spins should show there is no pre- disposition for the
impeller to stop in one particular place. If the impeller does continually stop in the same
spot, then this is an indication that is may be out of balance. Shut down the equipment and
inform the factory.
Check anti-vibration mountings and ensure that they are flexible and free to move. Check
coil drain outlets to ensure that they are free and check that each outlet has its own
individual trapping arrangement,
Common trapping of drain outlets at different locations in the unit i.e upstream and
downstream of the coil will result in pressure differentials and air tending to bottle up the low
pressure drain outlet. In some instances this can give rise to flooding of the downstream tray
and leakage form the unit. Where there are unit frames between two drain panels, these are
covered with a bitumen/aluminium material to prevent water leaking between. Check that
these seals are intact and repair as necessary.
A supply of sealing material, which is self-adhesive, is provided with the assembly kit. This
material is for applying to adjoining frames between drain trays, which have been the subject
of site assembly work. We recommend that the bottom frame and lower poriion of the side
frames are covered with this material.
File Location: Master D:\forms\0073.doc
Page
Check that coil fins are undamaged and comb out any excessive areas of bruising. Check
that seals are intact above and beneath the coils and filter frames etc. Check that the
flexible fan outlet connection is also undamaged. Fit filters. Pad filters are simply slid into
the tracks provided and butt together. Bag filters should be removed from their cardboard
boxes and with the band still intact should be replaced into the frames. Normally the bag
filters slide in and care should be taken to lift the lower portion of the bags clear of the lower
track so that they are not torn or damaged as the filter frame is entered into the track. When
bags are the tracts, remove paper bank and open out.
Note
For high efficiency bag filters, fit the foam strip provided around the edges of each filter
before fitting. This will ensure air by-pass is kept to a minimum.
DAMPERS
Check that damper drives are free and that damper blades rest evenly. Check that damper
linkage is fitted or if commissioning is carried out prior to the control system being in
operation, then preset the dampers at a suitable position and clamp into place. Set electrical
overload on motor starter to coincide with motor full load current given on motor label. Kick
up fan and check direction of rotation.
NOTE:-
WARNING
Too high an air quantity with forward curved fans will overload and burn out fan motors. DO
NOT RUN FAN before the ductwork installation is complete, nor without motor overload
protection. Do not set overloads above maximum current rating of motor.
After initial run-in period, check belt tension and re-adjust if necessary using straight edge
and spring balance.
STARTING
UP
After carrying out the aforementioned checks and any remedial work necessary, set the
supply duct system dampers to the anticipated setting points. If anything, close the dampers
more than necessary. This particularly important with forward curved fans to avoid
overloading the motors.
Star-t up the unit and check the motor current.
indicated on the motor.
This must be below the current rating
Fan and motor bearings are pre-packed with the correct grade and quantity of grease
suitable for temperatures up to 1150~. Do not add further grease. Some grease may be
excluded from bearings during initial running in. This is not serious unless the bearing
shows signs of excessive overheating. If this happens, remove bearing caps and check that
the bearing is not tightly packed with grease, only the actual race should be covered with
grease. Remove excess grease. If the baring overheats, report to the factory.
Page 4
CHECKS
TO BE CARRIED
OUT DURING THE INITIAL
RUNNING tN PERIOD.
After 15 minutes of continuous running, bearing temperature should be only barely warm
with the motor slightly warmer. This point the drive belt tension should be checked and readjusted, if necessary.
Check for normal voltage fed whenmotor
is under load.
An insufficient feed cable size may lead to dangerous voltage drops, which will affect winding
lift.
Ensure that phases are balanced in 3 phase current, any imbalance may lead to service
faults in motor, leading to deterioration.
Measure current drawn at motor terminals, this should not be greater that the figure indicated
on the motor plate.
DRIVE DETAILS
Misalignment will result in excessive belt wear and short life. Examples I,2 and 3 or
combination must be avoided.
End
view
of
(Off-Set)
Correct by moving either pulley along the shaft until aligned.
2)
(Angled)
Shafts are not parallel. Correct by resetting shafts until parallel. Ensure
no deflection is taking place in supporting framework or shafts.
3)
(Angled)
Shafts are not in same plane. Correct by re-setting until shafts are in
same place.
(Correct)
4)
Notes
Always use a matched set of new belts (of the dame type and manufacture). Clean any oil
and grease from the pulleys and remove traces of rust or other foreign matter which may be
present in the pulley grooves.
Mount the pulleys on the shafts as near to the shaft support as possibie.
After 34-48 hours of operation drive belt tension should be checked again and re-adjusted if
necessary.
Page 5
After checking that the driving and driven shafts are parallel, the pulleys should be aligned by
the use of a straight edge, the two pulleys will be in correct alignment when the near and far
points on the face of each pulley touch the straight edge (this is correct for non adjustable
pulleys).
The belts may now be fitted after ensuring that sufficient adjustment is present for installation
and take-up allowances. On no account should the belts be forced over the pulley rims as
this will damage the belt cover and tension members resulting in early failure.
+,,,.
INSTRUCTIONS
FOR INSTALLATION
4,t
BELT TENSION
INDICATOR
APPLIED
TO MID5ENTRE
DISTANCE
OF SPRING ISOLATORS
This sheet applies to the following types:

Type
ES
ECS
Leaflet No.
:. -.
BS 491 ES
BS 491 ES
Each type of isolator is made in a range of sizes which are identified by colour coded labels
Although these isolators have excellent finishes they are not usually suitable for prolonged
use in adverse outdoor locations or corrosive atmospheres without further protection.
(Please consult our application engineers about problem installation areas).
The isolators should be installed generally in accordance with the following procedures:
1.
The structure beneath the machine should be constructed to a form a rigid and
reasonably level seating for each group of isolators.
2.
The isolators should be examined to ensure they are of the correct size, and if
appropriate, the positions for different sizes should be located in accordance with our
recommendations or drawings.
3.
After the isolators are in position the machine base should be levelled and supported
just clear of the isolator tops using jacks or blocks, ensuring alignment between
isolator and machine base fixing holes.
Page 6
At this stage, HD bolts can be loosely fitted to maintain isolator positions during final
lowering of machine base, but it is important these do not strain the isolator in any
direction (HD bolts supplied by others).
4.
After removal of blocks the machine base can be carefully lowered evenly across
supported area transferring full weight to the isolators. Adjusting screws should then
be located through machine base into isolator tops, ensuring sufficient length for
adjustment.
5.
Isolator adjustments after initial deflection should be done by winding adjustment

screw down, thus raising upper spring cover until desired height of isolator is achieved
or machine is level see Figure 1.
6.
Isolator HD bolts and top locknuts should now be fully tightened.
7.
Ribbed rubber seating pads should always be used when the mounting is seated on
concrete or other rough surfaces.
8.
Note isolators are not designed to accommodate angular misalignment, excessive

horizontal or tensile forces, and must note be used for tensile or shear loading
applications.
9.
The efficiency of an isolator system can be seriously impaired if the system is

connected to rigid pipes electrical conduits, ducts or shafts. It is essential that such
external connections be as flexible as possible, not only to prevent transmission of
vibration through the connections and allow the system freedom of movement, but
also to avoid possible failure of the connections.
DO NOT adjust by more than the original deflection obtained when the load was applied to
the mounting.
IF NO adjustment is required, adjusting screw must be wound down sufficiently so that the
spring pressure is felt before tightening the locknut.
Where upward movement of equipment
adjusting screw must be used to set the
ES range
:
ES25 range :
ECS range :
FIGURE 1
must be restrained during drawing down etc., the

mounting to a max height of:
60mm
85mm
125mm
h.Iax he Shl
see C!!? 5
Page 7
1 RECUPERATOR
SECTION
These components have no moving parts hence mechanical is unnecessary. When dealing
with dusty or polluted air, adequate filters should be provided. Is I possible to clean the unit
with compressed air in the case of dusty deposits, or by spraying it with a detergent solution
in the case of greasy deposits.
In order to rem&e greasy deposits a water detergent solution such as DECADE ND-l 50
CHEM 2YME, PRIMASEPT, POLYDET, OAKITE 86M or similar to be used, following the
manufacturers instructions.
Strongly alkaline or any product that may be aggressive to aluminium should be avoided.
If during this cleaning process the recuperator module is removed from the unit housing, this
would require complete resealing after final location.
Drain trays beneath cooling coils should be cleaned periodically and outlets checked to
ensure they are not blocked.
Page 8
TECHNICAL
Issue B
SPECIFICATION
Date : X3/07/99
, ,,,,J-
SHEET
CONSTRUCTK)N,~~;,.;,;.,..
;.:,,~,;;,1; ,,;ic;:,, 1 ,.:,.;;I
.: .:,;::~I ,.-, :.;::;I
,;\.; ;:..:; .;.;.-.;:.
;:..; :r ,..:~:,:~-.i;~.:,;,,-:I:,~:-..
Aluminium frame work

Base frame (R.S.C)
Panel insulation
60mm Pentapost
102 x 51
RW3
AHU
location
Panel depth
Panel construction
external
Frame coating
Anodised
Panel construction
internal
Location
External
Control
Control panel position
RHS
No. of steps
f#,~ir!iLEqiq~JEl$qx
Air on Db I VVb (%RH)
Air off W I Wb (%RH)
mY
Connection type
Inlet connection
Outlet connection
Connection side
Coil code
File:3044-OlA.AHU
AhUl
1 Please Note The foOowing:a)

The fan performance
is based
accotdance
with good practice
C
C
kW
Water inlet
Water outlet
Water flow rate
Water pressure drop
Fin material
Tube material
Header material
GWtype
on the external
static pressure
given by yomsetves
and on approach
such that the fan is able to achieve
its test performance
Euro Air Systems Limited Selection
..,;.
Step, each suitable

control
6
i:.;.~,:i,..~;~~:~i-~.::l;.-.:.
L.1.1.
:- y::
... f.,.:;.:$,;,
.,_
_......,
~._.1:... ...i.
..- ;f, ,;;,.;:;.:,.l;~..;,~~r;;;i
31 .O 122.69 (49)
23.33 120.3 (75)
100.0
BSP
1 x 3ins
1 x 3ins
Right
JR24031 l-2855(36]
:.
:.;,--
Internal
5Omm
0.9mm Plastisolgo--+9
grey
09mrn Galvanised
y?;
Steet
for thyristor
...-y, :_,
15.0
18.27
7.31
10.68
Aluminium
cu
cu
None
and diiafge
::;;::;::;:::,
C
C
VS
kPa
ducts
designed
in
Page1
of2
Issue
Date
TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATION
: 2WO7199
FiIe:30444lA.AHU
Ahul
Centrifugal (DIDW)
Badward
curved
RZR 150500 (2 off)
Single speed (run & standby)
4
40
A
74.6
A
-f-W
Blade type
Reference
Motor type
Motor pole
Full load current
Lock rotor current
FAN ACOUSTIC
[Hz
,,, .. . i.... .. :ii,.:

400
External static pressure
Total pressure
1050
1780
Speed
Orientation
Bottom horizontal
Motor power
18.50
1440
Motor speed
Frame size
18OM4B
Supply voltage
415/3.50
Starting method
Star-Detta
Pa
Pa
rpm
kW
rpm
DATA
163
192
[S.w.l
lsuppty
SHEET
1125
187
1250
185
lw
186
12000
180
~1000
184
I(75
w@fJ
I66
DRIVES
NOTES.
..
: ,. ..
., . .
.:
:.
,.
._..
1.
i2.
3.
4.
A.H.U. TO BE SUPPLIED
IN ONE SECTION FOR 0FF;OADlNG
AND~POSITIONIN;,
f& OTHERS.
4Omm MEZ FLANGE ON tNLET AND OUTLET SPIGOTS.
ACCESS DOORS TO BE FITTED WITH PAWL iYPE SECURITY LOCKS.
BULKHEAD
LIGHT TO BE FITTED IN FILTER & FAN SECTIONS AND WIRED TO AN ECTERNALLY
MOUNTED,
IP65
LIGHT SWlTCH, WITH A PORTHOLE
IN THE ADJACENT
DOOR.
5. FAN MOTOR AND THERMISTORS
ARE TO BE WIRED BACK TO SEPARATE,
EXTERNALLY
MOUNTED,
IF%
TERMINAL BOXES.
6. EKM-IOOOs, COMPLETE
WITH VOLT FREE CONTACTS,
TO BE FITTED ACROSS FILTERS, FOR INTEGRA~ON
INTO THE BMS. BY OTHERS.
7. E.A.S.L TO SUPPLY AND FIT AIRFLOW FAILURE SWITCHES AND AIR INLET & OUTLET TEMP. SENSORS
AND
WIRE THEM BACK TO EXTERNALLY
MOUNTED TERMINAL BOXES.
8. DRIVE AND NONE DRIVE SIDE INLET GUARDS REQUIRED.
9. DRAIN POINT REQUIRED
ON FANS.
10. TRAFFOLYTE
lABELS TO BE FITTED TO INDICATE ALL MAJOR COMPONENTS.
11. COOLING COIL DRAIN TRAY TO BE INSULATED.
12. GOAL POST SUPPORTS
TO BE INSTALLED WlTH FAN SECTION.
UNIT HEtGHT
.,- : :.-.
UNIT +l[3Tl-j
::; :, -I. j.
-fJJ
.: ,. :.:I, ..:,
The above
Please
a)
Note
dimensions
The
1500
3200
,()2.g2
do not include
mm
mm
hrs
for the baseframe
UNIT LENGTH
qN!T VElGlfT~
.::
i
_
,:
,,:
3916
!, :.T:,:,. 2705.5
kd
height.
following:-
The fan performance

is based
accordance
with good practice
Euro Air Systems timded
on the external
static pressure
given by yoursetves
and
such that the fan is able to achwe
its test performance
Selection
on approach
and
discharge
&cts
designed
in
Page 2 of 2
3 PHASE SINGLE SPEED INDUCTION MOTOR

41
D.O.L. START UP TO 3KW
D.O.L. 4KltV & ABOVE

INTERNAL DELTA-(A)
INTERNAL STAR-( Y )
TERMINAL LINKAGES
0
No3Y DIRECT ON STAR( Y )

LINK W2 TO U2 TO V2
SUPPLY TO Ul ,Vl ,Wi
No.3D DIRECT ON DELTA(A)
LINK W2 TO Ul
LINK U2 TO Vl
LINK V2 TO Wl
SUPPLY TO Ul, Vi, Wl
u2
v2
0 w2
NO.3 STAR-DELTA(Yd)STAR
CONNECT ALL 6 LEADS TO
STAR-DELTA STARTER
Ul
VI
WI
6 LEADS FOR STAR(y) OR DELTA ca)
TO REVERSE DIRECTION OF ROTATION CHANGE OVER ANY TWO SUPPLY LEADS

.A
AUXILLARIES (WHEN FITTED) ARE MARKED AS SHOWN BELOW
CONNECT TO
SINGLE PHASE
VOLTAGE SUPPLY
CONNECT TO
THERMISTOR
CONTROL UNIT
HEATER
TP
OVERLOAD
TB
CONNECT TO
THERMOSTATS
PROTECTlON
CIRCUIT
TR
OR LER
THERMISTORS
LOOSE IN TERMINAL
TPlTPz
BOX.
NOTES : REFER TO NAMEPLATE FOR SUPPLY VOLTAGE AND CONNECTION

LmR(S)
FOLLOWING MAlN DlAGRAM No. DENOTE WOUND ROTOR OR
AUXILIARIES e.g. 3 Y H
I
/
AIR HANDLING
PRODUCTS
Te(: +44(0)121414
1844
TP
CONNECTTO
THERMISTOR
CONTROL UNIT
MAGNETIC BRAKES ARE EITHER CONNECTED INTERNALLY OR EXl-ERNALLY.

WHEN CONNECTED EXTERNALLY THE BRAKE LEADS ARE MARKED WITH THE
LElTERS BR. TWO LEADS FOR A SINGLE PHASE BRAKE AND THREE LEADS
FOR A THREE PHASE BRAKE. LEADS ARE EITHER CONNECTED ONTO MOTOR
TERMINALS
Fax +44(0)1214711624
euroal~-co.lk
TPZTPl
3.2.
Function Room & Office Extract Fan.
Manufacturer:
Woods of Colchester Ltd.
Address:
Tufnell Way
Colchester
CO4 5AR
Telephone
Fax
01206-441122.
01206-574434.
Model Ref.
63 JM (L Type).
ADJUSTABLEPITCH
AEROFOIL
FAN
JM AEROFOL
SIZES:
31JM - 315
45JM - 450
63JM - 630
90JM - 900
Volume flow up to 20 m3/s

(42000 ft3/min)
Static pressures up to
700 Pa (2.8 iti. wg)
High energy
efficiency
Low installed
Motor protection
315 mm - 1000 mm
diameter
noise levels
IP55
Overheat protection fitted

as standard on 1 III motors
100% X-ray of impeller
Casing hot dipped
galvanised
Full range of ancillary
equipment
mm, 35JM - 355 mm, 40JM - 400 mm,

mm, 50JM - 500 mm. 56JM - 560 mm,
mm, 71JM - 710 mm, 80JM - 800 mm.
mm, 1OOJM - 1000 mm
FAN PERFORMANCE:
All fans are tested to the latest internationally
recognised standard IS05801 Part 1, installation category D for aerodynamic
performance
and 68848 Part 2 (1985) for acoustic performance.
Coupled with the above fan diameters,
the
adjustable pitch Aerofoil impeller gives the exact performance
required, with a non overloading fan characteristic.
IMPELLERS:
A unique high efficiency aerofoll sec?ion biade
with a purposely smoothed hub and clamplate
for adjustable pitch angle availability.
The Woods impellers are all high pressure ,iie
cast to offer thin aerofoil sectlons for low gel-eration of noise levels. Every component :s Xrayed using Real Time Radiography
inspection
prior to assembly.
MOTORS:
All motors are totally enclosed air stream rated
class F insulation. Constructed from aluminiL,m
as standard with special Tslot and pad mourt&
fixings.
Suitable for horizontal through to vertical shaft
operation.
Supplied IP55,with removable drain
plugs. Bearings lubricated with wide temperature range grease relubricatable
or sealed for
life depending on size. Flameproof motors are
certified to BS5501 Parts 1 and 5 suitable for
use in gas groups 2A and 2B. Temperature
class T4.
l
l
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
ELECTRICAL
SUPPLY:
220-240 V I 50 Hz / 1 QI
380-420 V I 50 Hz I 3 a,
TEMPERATURE
RANGE:
-40C to 50C as standard.
Fans can be
operated up to 70C with appropriate deration
of motors (please enquire).
CASINGS:
JM Aerofoil fans are available in either a long
cased form complete with externally mounted
pre-wired electrical terminal box or short cased
for duct or plate installation.
Casings are spun from sheet steel ,v~ti; ::+?,;r: /
T:-,z
pre-drilled
and radiused
inlet flanges
galvanised
finish gives a high resls:zrcs
:c
corrosion and makes it ideal for exterrat use
ANCILLARY
EQUIPMENT:
Silencers, Mounting feet, Vibration isolators,
Matching flanges, Flexible connectors. Air operated non return dampers, Guards. Bell mouth
inlets.
13
6.
l
Manufacturer.
Woods
of klcI?es:er
Fan Type: Adjustabie
pitch aerofoli
fan
with 100% X-rayed
alumlrium
.i-~z @.
Fan code: eg. 63 denotes
the fan
impeller diameter
In cm .Jk.: ti?ro:+:
fan type
20 denotes
impeller hot\ d;x~~:r~
,6 denotes
a nominal
6 pole sc%x
6 denotes
the number
of blades
20 denotes
the pitch angle or P?
required
duty.
Electrical
Supply: eg.
240 V I 50 Hz I 1 o
Ancillary
items required:
eg. Feet.
Vibration
isolators
etc.
:i
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION. PLEASE

CONTACTYOURLOCALSALESCENTRE
AIR MOVEMENT
ADJUSTABLEPITCH
AEROFOIL
FAN
AEROFOIL
FAN 31 JM - 50JM (See page 16 for details)
r
1000
800
600
200
;;i
a
2
100
80
60
.4
.6
.8
8 IO
9" W/S)
Single
stage,
preferred
AEROFOIL
range
only.
For full performance
curves
see pubhcatlon
C22a.
FAN 50JM - 63JM (See page 18 for details)
1000
1iIoo
800
600
400
200.
w
\,
100
80
60 -
40
.2
ngle stage,
.4
preferred
range
.6
only.
14
.8
curves
see publication
C22a.
a IO
15
AEROFOIL
lOO---zq
-+Y
80
--
60
40
.4
Sing1 e stage,
.6
preferred
.8
range
only.
curves
see oublica:;w
10
AEI ROFOIL FAN 9OJM - IOOJM (See Date 22 for deiaiis;

-
IOC
8C
3
a
%
Q
60
40
.6
Single
stage,
.8
preferred
range
only.
FLAMEPROOF AEROFOIL
(See page 24 for details)
curves
see
publication
FAN 40JM-80JM
15
C22a.
12
ADJUSTABLE PITCH
AEROFOIL
FAN 31JM
- 50JM
SELECTION
TABLE
31 JM - 50JM
ELECTRICAL
DATA 31 JM - 50JM
Sound
pressure
levels quoted
are calculated
in dB(A) at 3
metres
distance
over a sphere,
based
on form B running
underfreefield
conditionsand
are presentedforcomparative purposes
only.
Cylindrical
silencers
are available
as standard.
See page
65 for details.
Preferred
2.00
2.50
32"
22"
35JM
35JM
300
10"
16"
40JM
31JM
16"
35JM
26"
30"
22"
28"
20"
26"
12:
5OJM/l6
1420
50JMl16
1420
40JM
2840
28'
40JM
2840
30'
50JMf20
2910
12"
50JMt20
2910
16'
50JM/20
2910
14"
50JMi20
2910
14"
50JM/20
2910
16^
50JMi20
2910
20,-
26"
28'
IOJMIZO
1420
30'
50JM/20
2910
12"
50JM/20
2910
12"
50JM/20
2910
14'
Range
Code
Speed
Motor
(revlmin)
Pitch
Angle
(9
IZ!
L
IVlotor
I3atinc
F;;rL;e"td
,at230 V)
Starting
Current
(at 230 V )(4
Speed Controller
flotor
lahng
i5i Vi50
Hz
Full Loac
Current
(at400 V
Starting
Current
:at 400 V)
Speed Controller
Electronlo
Transformer
(")
WV
(A)
(4
Electronic
Transfarmer
31JM,16/6i5...
900
BT5
Z-40
W')
0.04
0.5
0.7
ME1.l
MT1.l
38-40
0.06
0.3
0.8
ME3.2D
dT3.0.5
35
31dh1,'16/4/5...
1420
BTS
24-38
0.07
0.6
1.8
ME1.l
MT1.l
30-40
0.13
0.5
1.8
ME3.2D
dT3 0.5
44
31JM!l6/2/5...
2840
BT9
26-32
0.5
3.3
9.0
N/A
N/A
24-34
0.58
1.4
6.0
N/A
N/A
62
CT5
36-40
0.75
4.9
8.5
N/A
N/A
36-40
0.95
2.0
9.5
N/A
N/A
64
(4
380-i
Pitch
Angle
35JM/l6/6/5...
900
BT5
12-40
0.04
0.5
0.7
ME1.l
MTI.1
26-40
0.06
0.3
0.8
ME320
dT3.0.5
38
35JM.16/4/5...
1420
BT5
16-24
0.07
0.6
1.8
MEI.
MTI.1
20-34
0.13
0.5
1.8
ME3.20
dT3.05
47
BT4
28-40
0.13
1.0
2.0
ME1 1
MT1.5
36-40
0.20
0.7
2.4
ME3.20
MT3 1
48
CT5
24-28
0.75
4.9
8.5
N/A
N/A
24-32
0.95
2.0
9.5
N/A
N/A
64
CT9
36-40
8.3
27.0
N/A
N/A
34-40
1.7
3.5
200
N/A
N/A
66
06
1.0
MEI.
MT1.l
36-40
0.09
0.4
12
ME3.2D
dT3.0.5
40
35JM/l6/2/5...
2840
40JMI16/6i5...
900
BT4
28-38
- 1.4
0.06
4OJM/161415...
1420
BT5
26-28
0.16
1.2
2.7
ME1.3
MT1.5
24-30
0.20
0.7
2.4
ME3.2D
MT3.1
51
BT9
34-40
0.25
1.7
3.8
ME1.3
MT1.5
32-40
0.30
0.9
4.6
ME3.2D
MT3.1
52
CT9
24-28
1.40
8.3
27.0
N:A
N/A
22-32
1.70
3.5
20.0
N/A
N,A
67
ulT3 0.5
43
4OJM/l6/2/5...
45JM/16/6/5...
45JM/16/4/5...
2840
900
1420
BT5
22-34
0.09
0.8
1.6
ME1.l
MT1.l
24-30
0.09
0.4
1.2
ME3.2D
BT9
36-40
0.12
1.1
2.2
ME1.3
MT1.5
32-40
0.14
0.6
1.8
ME3.2D
MT3.1
44
BT9
24-30
0.3
2.1
5.3
ME1 3
MT15
22-26
0.3
0.9
4.6
ME3.20
MT31
56
CT5
36-40
0.45
2.9
7.0
ME1.3
MT1.5
36-40
0.58
1.7
6.5
ME320
MT3.2
58
16-18
1.4
8.3
27.0
N/A
N/A
14-20
1.7
3.5
20 0
N/A
N/A
69
20-34
5.8
7.1
44.0
NiA
N/A
70
22-28
0.14
0.6
1.8
ME3.20
MT3.1
47
45JMi1612!5.
2840
CT9
45JM/'20/2/6.
2910
F2225
SOJMll6/6/5...
915
ET9
30-32
0.14
1.2
2.8
ME1 3
MT15
CT5
36-40
0.19
1.8
30
ME1.3
MT1.5
40
0.3
1.1
3.3
ME3.2D
MT3.2
47
50JMil6/4/5...
1420
CT5
26-28
0.45
2.9
7.0
ME1.3
MT1.5
26-30
0.58
1.7
6.5
ME3.23
MT32
60
CT9
38-40
0.68
4.2
11.0
ME1.6
MT1.8
32-40
0.9
2.3
90
ME3.2D
MT3.2
61
CT5
30-32
0.55
3.7
9.5
ME1.6
MT1.5
24-30
0.58
1.7
6.5
ME3.20
MT3.2
61
CT9
40
0.9
5.8
19.0
ME1.6
MT1 8
32-40
0.9
2.3
9.0
ME3.2D
MT3.2
62
F2225
N/A
12-24
3.8
2.1
44.0
N/A
N/A
73
F222S
N/A
26-34
6.2
11.0
90.0
N/A
N:A
75
50JMi2014i6
50JM/2012/6...
1420
2910
N/A
16
-I-
DIMEN SIONS 31 JM - 50JM
(L Type)
BT.CT,FZZ FRAMES
1 HOLE 20 DIA. (END OF BOX) TO
SUlTCMlBOR
PGll GLAND FOR
AUXILIARY CABLES
&
\c
BT,CT.F22 FRAMES
11 VI,.
n,n un,
cc cno
PT
LI
IVLLO
11 dNDUIT.
2 EACH SIDE SUITABLE FOR CM20 OR PG16
AIRFLOW
FORM A
AIRFLOW
FORM B
I
Code
315
355
400
450
500
GUARDSOPTIONAL
DIMENSIONREFERENCE
Motor
Frame
rx
BTU519
315
395
375
235
2.5
25
CT5
315
395
375
235
2.5
25
BT315/9
355
435
375
256
2.5
25
CT519
355
435
375
256
2.5
25
8141519
400
380
375
279
2.5
25
CT9
400
480
375
279
2.5
25
BTU9
450
544
375
306
2.5
25
CT519
450
544
375
306
2.5
25
F2225
450
544
520
306
25
BT9
500
594
375
338
2.5
25
CT519
500
594
375
338
25
25
F2225
500
594
520 , 338
25
J,YjL
Dimensions
17
(mm)
ADJUSTABLE
PITCH
AEROFOIL
FAN 50JM
m%
20
50JM/16
915
1.00
SELECTION
TABLE
50JM - 63JM
- 63JM
20"
50JM/l6
1.50
14200
16"
5OJM/l6
2.00
1420
26"
56JM/16
2.50
1420
20"
56JM/16
3.00
1420
26"
56JM/20
3.50
1420
320
63JM
4.00
1420
24"
63JM/20
4.50
1420
28'
Preffered
ELECTRICAL
DATA
T
Speed
Range
50JM -63JM
220-240 V/50
Hzilp
Pitch Motor Full Load Starting

MOtOr / Angle 1 Ratmg j(~;r3eOn;~($r;y;~
I
Speed Contro'ier
/ :$"I!
/ !?a?$ I
I
(9
W)
(4
BT9
30-32
0.14
1.2
CT5
36-40
0.19
1.8
CT5
26-28
0.45
2.9
CT9
38-40
0 68
4.2
CT5
30-32
0.55
3.7
CT9
40
0.9
5.8
F2225
i
N/A
revimin)
50JM/16/6/5...
915
50JM/16/415..
1420
50JM!20/J/6...
1420
50JM/20/2/6...
2910
56JM/l6/6/5...
900
56JMil614K
1420
56JM/20/4/6...
1420
W')
l----(4
Electronic
ME3.2D
Transformer
MT31
0.6
1.8
1.1
33
47
ME3.2D
MT3.2
1.7
49
6.5
ME3.20
MT3.2
60
2.3
9.0
ME3.2D
MT3.2
61
1.7
6.5
ME3.20
MT3.2
61
2.3
9.0
ME3.20
MT3.2
62
2.1
44.0
N/A
N/A
73
N/A
75
(A)
22
0.55
3.7
1.7
ME3.20
MT3.2
60
28-32
0.9
5.8
2.3
ME3.20
MT3.2
61
CT5
20
055
3.7
1.7
ME3.20
MT3.2
61
CT9
32-36
1.1
7.2
N/A
62
MT3.2
47
N/A
63JM/20/6/6...
900
CT5
22
0.3
2.4
CT9
34
052
4.0
CT9
16-18
0.9
5.8
CT9
20-22
1.1
7.2
F2245
N/A
conditions,
Cylindrical
V)
CT9
CT9
Sound
(")
Sound
Level
WA)
CT5
680
1420
Speed Controller
(at400 V) (at400
Transformer
Hz/30
/
MT3.2
63JM/2018/6...
63JM/20/4,'6...
380-420 VI50
1
levels quoted
are calculated
in dB(A) at 3 metres distance
and are presented
for comparative
purposes
only.
silencers
are available
as standard.
See page 65 for details.
pressure
18
over
a sphere,
-l-L
based
1.1
3.3
ME3.20
MT3.2
50
1.7
7.5
ME3.2D
MT3.2
55
2.3
9.0
ME3.2D
MT32
63
3.0
11.4
ME3.20
N/A
64
4.7
30.0
NiA
N/A
67
on form
B running
under
free field
DIMENSIONS
I
50JM - 63JM (L Type)

BT.CT.FZ2 FRAMES
SUIT CM16 OR PGll GLAND FOR
AUXILIARY CABLES
BT.CT.F22 FRA MES
23 DIA. HOLES FOR CONDUIT.
2 EACH SIDE EiUlTABLE FOR CM20 OR PG16
S No. OF HOLES QT
EQUISPACED ON H PC0
SIGHT PORT
GUARDS OPl -IONAL

/EITHER END
HOLE IN
FOOT 0 N
2HOLESQ8
-IA
Dimensions
~
.
JCRS
B.
KCRS
DIMENSION REFERENCE (mm)
F/G
25
I 290
M'NI
500
594
375
338
2.5
560
66
500
594
375
338
2.5
560
66
1 289 / 150
500
594
520
338
560
66
500
594
620
560 1 IO
( 355
630
724
iii
403
32.5
3
560
654
520
375
375
338
560
25
375
690
6301
'JO0
i630
724
520
-
403
-
25
375
690
630 ( 10
289
4.50
1 134 ! 450
in mm
19
10
-100
AEROFOIL
FAN 63JM - 80JM
at Pa (Static)
SELECTION
TABLE
63JM - 80JM
m3/s
30
50
1.50
63JMi20
900
14"
63JM/20
900
14"
63JM/20
900
63JM/20
900
20"
2.00
20"
63JM/20
3.00
63JMI20
1420
1420
16"
16"
63JMl20
4.00
1420
24"
26"
71 JMIZO
1440
5.00
18"
6.00
7.00
71JMi20
1440
71JMl20
1440
71JMl20
1440
32"
30"
8.00
1440
24"
10.00
Preferred
71 JMi20
1440
20"
71JMl20
1440
24"
80JMi25
ELECTRICAL
63JM/20
1420
26"
8051125
1440
24"
80JMl25
1440
80JM/25
1440
32"
32"
Range
DATA 63JM - 80JM
220-240V;50Hzilo
Pitch
4ngie
WW
-
('1
N/A
63JMd01616..
900
CT5
22
1420
CT9
CT9
,7lJMi20/8/6..
680
CT9
F2245
F2265
34
16-18
20-22
7lJMi201616
900
63JM:20/4/6...
1440
NIA
N/A
N/A
80JM/ZO/U6...
695
F2249
F2265
NiA
N/A
80JM/20/6/6...
935
F2269
F2265
N/A
N/A
N/A
60JMi25/4/3...
1440
80JM/25/4/9...
1440
F2269
F2245
F2249
0132118
D132124
Sound pressure
form B running
Cylindrical
Full Load
Current
i at 230 V;
Starong
Current
at230 V:
(4
(A)
0.3
0.52
0.9
2.4
4.0
4.0
5.8
9.2
19.0
1.1
7.2
23.0
Speed Controller
Electronx
are
available
Starhng
Current
at400V
(A)
(4
Electronic
2.6
33
7.5
ME3.2D
Transformer
MT3.2
ME3.2D
ME3.2D
ME32D
MT32
MT3.2
MT3 2
ME3.2D
N/A
ME3.K
N/A
N/A
l---r
28-32
0.25
1.2
1.1
1.7
2.3
MT1 5
MT1.8
16-20
26-30
0.3
0.52
ME1 6
ME1.12
MT1 8
vlT1.12
!2-14
18-20
0.9
1.15
N/A
N/A
N'A
- N,A
levels quoted
are calculated
in dB(A) at 3 metres
distance
under free field conditions,
and are presented
for comparative
silencers
Full Lear
Current
at400V
Transformer
MEl.3
ME1 6
- N/A
N/A
CT9
F2265
F2245
/ 7lJM/2014/6...
vlotor
lating I
380. .420 V'50Hz/3o
as standard.
See
page
65 for detarls.
20
over
a sphere.
based
purposes
only.
3.0
4.7
90
11.4
30.0
2.4
17
8.0
75
3.6
58
15.0
30.0
9.3
2.4
3.0
52.0
8.0
11.0
3.6
5.5
4.7
15.0
26.0
30.0
9.3
13.2
18.0
52.0
85.0
100.00
on
Speed Controller
)-
ME3.2D
N/A
N/A
N/A
ME3.2D
ME32D
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
MT3 2
N/A
NiA
N/A
N/A
NIA
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Sounc I
Le\le!
dW)
47
50
5.5
63
64
67
52
55
56
67
- 69
56
58
62
64
70
72
73
- 75
DIMENSIONS
BT.CT.F22 FRAMES
SUlTCM16 OR PGll GLAND FOR
AUXILIARY CABLES
D132. D160 FRAMES

40 DIA HOLES FOR CONDUIT
2 EACH SIDE SUITABLE FOR PG29 OR I 5
BT.CT.FZ2 FRAMES
23 DIA HOLES FOR CONDUIT
S No OF HOLES (?T
EGUISPACED C?I r: P,D
SIGHT PORT,
AIRFLOW
FORM A
AIRFLOW
FORM 8
GUARDS OPTIONAL
EITHER END
HOLE
Y
,FOOTQN
IN
ZHOLESOE
~
I
Motor
Frame
710
DimensIonsin
KCRS
A
-
DIMEWON
REFfRENCElmr
H
BT5i9
630
724
375
375
690
CT519
630
724
375
375
690
F2245
630
520
375
nl
T
t
1
L
580
:.1 ~ N
6X
10
580
630 1 10
580
660
630 I 10
660
i10
IO
660
750
7'0
I 10
CT9
710
724
804
375
315
690
770
F2245165
710
804
520
415
770
F2249
710
-804
-520
315
770
-
F2245:65
800
894
520
185
860
F2249/69
800
894
520
-185
860
750
800 ! 10
0132
800
894
520
485
360
750
300 I 12
cl160
800
-894
-625
385
860
-
mm
21
750
710 / 10
900 / 10
SELECTION
TABLE
90JM - 1OOJM
28
16"
18
18
22"
20"
90JM/25/4/3
9OJM/25/4/3
9OJM/25/4/6
9OJM/25/4/6
9OJM/25/4/6
9OJM/25/4/9
9LlJM/25/4/9
1440
1440
1440
1440
1440
1440
1470
26'
28
24"
26'
30"
24"
26'
100125/4/9
lOOJM/25/419
1470
1470
10.0
12.0
90JM/25/4,6
1440
9OJMi251416
1440
90JMiP51419
1440
lOOJM/25/4/6
1450
28'
30"
24"
20"
22
24"
24"
lOOJM/25/4/6
1450
lOOJM/25/4/9
1470
lOOJMi2514i9
1470
lOOJMi25i419
1470
15.0
90JM/25/4,9
1440
17.5
lOOJMi2514 6
1450
lOOJMi251416 lOOJM/25/4/6
1450
1450
32"
20.0
26'
Motor
Pitch
Angle
Uoror
qatinc I
revimlnj
lOOJM,'244,9
1470
lOOJMt25.1~9
1470
30'
30-
30.
30'
Range
Speed Controller
W4
(4
(A)
Electronlc
Sound
Level
WA)
Transformer
695
F2269
24-28
__
0.85
3.0
11.0
ME3.29
N/A
57
90JMi25/8/9.
695
F2269
22-32
1-l
47
14.0
N,A
N/A
58
90JM/25/6i6...
935
F2269
26-28
2.1
5.5
26.0
N#'A
N/A
65
D132!19
34-36
3.0
40.0
NcA
N/A
59
F2269
26-32
3.5
8.6
8.0
340
N/A
N/A
66
C1132/MSA
34-36
4.5
10.5
63.0
N.A
N/A
69
0132124
20-24
9.0
18.0
100.0
N!A
N/A
76
D150/20
26-32
13.0
26.0
1400
N.A
N/A
79
90JMi2514&..
935
1440
lOOJM/25/8/6..
695
F2269
18-20
0.85
11.0
ME3.2D
N/A
57
lOOJMi2513.9..
695
F2269
14-22
1.4
14.0
N/A
N/A
67
lOOJM/25/6i6..
950
F2269
8-18
2.1
26.0
NiA
N/A
58
D132/19
24-32
4.5
63.0
NI'A
N/A
59
D132/19
22-26
4.5
63.0
N/A
N/A
68
0132126
28-34
6.3
90.0
NA
NIA
70
D160120
18-22
13.0
140.0
NA
N/A
79
D160/26
24-26
170
185.0
N.A
N/A
80
CjlGO/LBK
28-36
25.0
-
3300
J'A
N/A
83
lOOJM/25/6!9..
lOOJM/25/4/9.
960
1470
32'
lOOJM/25/4/9
1470
90JM/25/8/6...
9OJM/256.9...
.. .
280
1OOJM,'25,49
1470
(7
-
30"
30;
Starting
Current
at 400 V
28"
lOOJMi251419
1470
30:
DATA
Speed
26'
iOOJM/25/4/9
1470
26'
Code
28.
lOOJM/25i4,6
1450
30'
Preferred
ELECTRICAL
30JM - 1
26"
lOOJMi251419 lOOJM/2514/6
1470
1450
Sound pressure levels quoted are calculated in dB(A) at 31 metres distance

a sphere, based on form B running under free field conditions. and are
presented for comparative
purposes only.
Cylindrical silencers are available as standard.
See page 65 for details
22
over
lOOJMi251416
1450
lOOJMl2514~9
1470
32'
. ..
..
DIMENS 1016 90 JM --1 OOJM
(L
Type)
BT,CT.F22 FRAMES
1 HOLE 20 DIA. iEND OF BOX) TO
AUXILIARY CABLES \_
&
\c
D132. D160 FRAMES

40 DIA. HOLE3 FOR CONDUIT
2 EACH SIDE SUITABL.E FOR PG29 OR 1 5
BT,CT,F22 FR[AMES
23 DIA HOLE :S FOR C ONDUIT.
2 EACH SIDE SUITABL .E FOR CM20 OR PG16
AIRFLOW
tc
FORM A
AIRFLOW
FORM B
I
KE% 3PTIONA
VD
Y
HOLE IN
/
FOOTBN
2 HOI -ES08
(
J CRS _/
KCRS
DIMENSION REFEZENCE!RIT,
C
520
520
625
575
520
588
a50
950
* oco
520
625
950
1000
625
950
-
:a00
625
Dlmenslons
?Vl
538
350
900
575
350
900
EiF/G/H/J/K
in mm
23
900
ADJUSTABLE
PITCH
AEROFOIL
FAN 40JM
FLAMEPROOF
ftVmin
500
,
I I I
1000
m3lhr
- 80JM
JM AEROFOIL
81000
I I
, I
FLAMEPROOF
FAN 40JM - 80JM

I
II
5000
10000
5000
IIll,
mm
w
10000
in
w
50 -2
40 30 -
-1
20 -- 0.8
- 0.6
- 0.5
;oo
IO -- 0.4
a0
6 I- 0.3
60
50
65 -- 0.2
40
4-
30
3- 0.1
2 T 0.08
0.06
0.05
10
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5 0.6
0.8
L
S ingle
stage,
full solidity
fan performance
SELECTION TABLE
Flameproof JM Aerofoil
40JM - 80JM
details
678
mVs
0.5
1.0
DATA Flameproof
are shown.
25
50
100
150
200
40JM
40JM
40JM
50JM
63JM
1420
IO"
1420
IO"
1420
14"
1420
10"
1420
4"
40JM
40JM
1420
1420
40JM
1420
50JM
1420
63JM
1420
16"
18
40JM
1420
24"
12"
4"
40JM
SOJM
1420
63JM
40JM
1420
1420
36"
400
___
___
___
---
180
1420
6"
50JM
1420
26'
63JM
1420
12"
63JM
1420
14"
63JM
a0JM
aOJM
1420
16'
1440
80
1440
80
63JM
1420
63JM
aOJM
80JM
1120
20"
1440
10"
1440
16"
63JM
1420
22'
63JM
1420
a0JM
1440
---
26'
lo"
63JM
1420
63JM
1420
EOJM
1440
221:
3O'd
12'
63JM
a0JM
1440
14"
26"
28"
50JM
1.5
1420
1420
16"
ia
20"
2.0
50JM
1420
50JM
1420
50JM
1420
24"
26"
30"
50JM
50JM
63JM
1420
32'
1420
34"
1420
16'
63JM
63JM
1420
1420
63JM
1420
180
180
20"
63JM
1420
22"
63JM
1420
22"
63JM
63JM
63JM
63JM
1420
63JM
1420
28
32"
1420
36'
a0JM
1440
12'
80JM
80JM
80JM
1440
12"
1440
14'
1440
16"
---
80JM
1440
60JM
8OJM
1440
1440
a0JM
1440
24.
2.5
3.0
3.5
50JM
1420
4.0
5.5
6.0
(All Flameproof
182
1420
24"
5.0
24
300
50JM
40JM - 80JM
Sound pressure
levels quoted are calculated
over a sphere,
based on form B running
and are
presented
for comparative
purposes
only.
Cylindrical
silencers
are available
as standard.
Flameproof
Fans are not suitable
for speed
regulation.
only
at Pa
0.7
ELECTRICAL
2
q, Cm%
---
---
12"
14'
14'
a0JM
1440
18"
a0JM
1440
14'
EOJM
1440
80JM
1440
80JM
1440
aOJfv1
1440
16'
,180
20"
26"
JM Aerofoils
- suffix
JM/...FLP)
DIMENSIONS (L Type)
Flameproof JM Aerofoil4OJM
- 80JM
S No. OF HOLES QT
EQUISPACED ON ii PCD.
2 -4 HOLES 24
FOR CONDUlTE
AIRFLOW
FbRM A
AIRFLOW
FORM B
HOLE IN
FOOT 0 N
2 HOLES 0 8
Code
Motor Frame
JCRS-
KCRS
520 j
I
1 25 1 225 I 150
JOJM/G.FLP/
ENV89MP
/ -100
-180
SOJM,ZQ.FLP
ENV89MP
500
594
520
1 25 290
560
ENV89MP
630 / 724 520
/ 25 1 375
590
63JM 2!l FLP,
80JM :!I FLP

Dimensions
ENVBBLP
/ 630
72-l / 520
1 25 1 375 j 630
ENV89LP
1 800 I 894 1 520
) 25 ) 485 1 a60
in mm
Flameproof
fans
Connect
directly
have no duct terminal

to motor termmal
box,
Flameproof
have
fans
spark
minimislng
boxes.
feature
as standard.
25
CUSTOMER WIRING INSTRUCTIONS

A duct mounted terminal box is provided with two 26mm diameter
)quired, the rig1d p Ias 1E plug and locknut must be left in situ to seal
The terminal box lid is sealed with a moulded neoprene gasket and
heads. To connect the supply to the motor, remove the lid to expose
earth pillar located in the side of the box.
holes for customers supply entry. If only one entry is

the unused hole. Glands are not supplied as standard.
the two fixing screws have sealing washers under the
the terminal block. The fan must be earthed using the
Depending upon the requirements of fan operation and control, i.e. speed control, 2 speed etc. it may be necessary to select
an alternative connection diagram for wiring up to the fan to that supplied in the fan terminal box. These will be indicated in
the panel marked connection on the motor nameplate (See below).
Single Phase
Nearly all fans are fitted with pre-wired capacitor fixed to the motor for the correct rotation. Overheat protection providing
automatic cut-out is included in most cases, and is internally connected as supplied. These fans are liable to automatically
re-start, therefore, the fan must be isolated before attempting any maintenance work. If required, the protector leads can be
brought out, e.g. to an external contactor for remote control. In this case, remove the link between K and UZ and connect
supply to UZ and U.
Where the fan is suitable for speed control, this is indicated in the catalogue. Where speed control is used it is essential that
the link between terminals U and P is removed as indicated on the relevant diagrams (page 4).
,e appropriate connection diagram letters are shown on the motor nameplate located on the periphery of the terminal box
: lousing, which will indicate up totwo possibilities. For F22 and D132frame motors the motordiagram is the only one applicable.
The first letter indicates constant speed.
Second letter indicates variable speed.
e.g.
(1
CONNECTION
A = 1 Phase. Integral Capacitor with O/heat Protector.

G = 1 Phase. Integral Capacitor with O/heat Protector
used with Auto-Transformer or Electronic Controllers.
Three Phase
A trial connection should be made to check the fan rotation is correct. If incorrect, interchange, any two phases of the three
phase supply. Overheat protection is not provided as standard.
Where a fan is suitable for speed control, this is indicated in the catalogue. The appropriate connection diagram letters are
shown on the motor nameplate located on the periphery of the terminal box housing, which will indicate up to four possibilities.
1
The remaining letters indicate other possibilities suited to that particular fan. These diagrams should be referred to and the
correct alternative chosen for the application.
e.g.
I]
CONNECTION
E = 3 Phase. Constant Speed (Dual Voltage Single Speed).

P = 3 Phase. with Electronic Controller.
S = 3 Phase. with Auto Transformer
Controller.
Certain selected sizes aresupplied suitablefortwo speed as standard bythe Delta/Star re-connection method, the lower speed
being approximately 80% of full speed. This can be done by changing links on a permanent basis as diagram F or using a
special changeover switch as shown in diagram X. The switch selected should have an inductive rating not less than the rated
full load current for the fan.
BT 8 CT MOTOR
SINGLE PHASE
SINGLE SPEED FANS
1 PHASE
INTEGRAL
WITH
1 PHASE
CAPACITOR
OVERHEAT
OIAGRAM
EXTERNAL
WITH
HTEGRAL
WITHOUT
PROTECTOR
N SO2331
1 PHASE
DIAGRAM
PROTECTOR
DIAGRAM
OlAGRAM
I!
EXTERNAL
CAPACITOR
WITHOUT
OVERHEAT
PROTECTOR
PROTECTOR
:D 1651
BOX
CAPACITOR
OVERHEAT
N M2332
1 PHASE
CAPACITOR
OVERHEAT
FRAMES.
FOR FZZ MOTOR FRAME

SEE DIAGRAM IN MOTOR TERMINAL
3 1652
SPEED CONTROLLED FANS

INTEGRAL
CAPACITOR
USED
W
1 PHASE
WlTH
WITH
OVERHEAT
PROTECl
ION
MTEGRAL
CAPACITOR
AUTO-TRANSFORMER
ELECTRONIC
USED
CONTROLLERS
0P
0Z
0u
UZ
0
0K
0K
0,
10
ZorP
UZ
,0
0,
CAPACITOR
WlTH
SUTAEi-
AEl-
01
Kl-
EXTERNAL
DIAGRAM
CAPACITOR
UZ
ZorP
UZ
(0
Q,
WITH
OVERHEAT
PROTECTION
000000
SHOYH
DOTTED
l-0Q0 00
P for
uz
FAN
CONTRXLER
CONTROLLERS
IL
si.nTNi:
MTl-
DIAGRAM
WITHDUT
AUTO-TRANSFORMER
OR ELECTRONIC
1 PHASE
I
IN
AEl-
USED
CONTROLLERS
WZl.-
:o l6Y
PROTECTKJN
OVERHEAT
CONTROLLERS
000000
P z u
QQQ
ETUEEN P
IJ
SHOWN DOTTED ) 0
D 1655
WITH
AUTO-TRANSFORMER
OR ELECTRONIC
P7
MTl-
HTlDIAGRAM
1 PHASE
CONTROLLER
:o 1653
USED
CONTROLLERS
IL
SUITliz
CONTROLLERS
HTlMEIAEl-
EXTERNAL
PROTECTOIJ
FAN
SHOWN WTTEO
OVERHEAT
AUTO-TRANSFORMER
OR ELECTROM:
1 PHASE
Q
WITHOUT
WITH
D 1656
CONTROLLERS
Kl-
AEl-
CONTROLLER
N
DIAGRAH
THREE PHASE
BT 8 CT MOTOR
FOR F22 AND D132 MOTOR FRAMES

SEE DIAGRAM IN MOTOR TERMINAL BOX
I SINGLE SPEED FANS

3 PHASE
( DUAL
CONSTANT
VOLTAGE
SPEED
SNGLE
FRAMES.
SPEED
3pHASE
( Two
CONSTANT
SFEED
YEED
1 WGUATED
3 PHASE
SIPPLY
SUPPLY
v 502333
DIAGRAM
cl3
HIGH
3 PHASE
SUPPLY
I
N 502334
DIAGRAM

STAR CWCTED
FAN WITH
ELECTRONC
SPEED CONTRCLLER
3 PHASE
DELTA COMCTED
ELECTRONK
SPEED
3 PHASE
FAN WITH
CONTROLLER
DELTA
CONNECTED
FAN.
I DIAGRAH
F WITH
LItKS
OMITTED 1
SUITABLE
0 MS7
CONTROCLER
b!E3.-
STAR CONNECTED
AUTO-TRANSFORMR
3 PHASE
FAN
OIAGRAH
WITH
SPEED CONTROLLER
1&%1
SUTABLE
n v&1
DELTA CONMCTED
AUTO-TRANSFORER
3 PHASE
FAN
CONTROLLER
tIE3.4
FAN
TRANSFORMR
CONTROLLER
P
Y
D 1659
3 PHASE
SUPPLY
SUITABLE
3 PHASE
P
=r
CONTROLLER
MT3.-
DELTA CONNECTED
WITH DELTA-STAR
DIAGRAM
FAN FOR FULL

!5PEED CHAMIE
SPEED
SWITCH
DELTA CONNECTED
FAN
( UAGRAM
F WITH
LINUS OWTTED
1
L3
r
=
I PHASE
UPPLY
1661
FAN WITH
SPEED CONTROLLER
P
7
3 PHASE
SLPPLY
DIAGRAM
ul
vi
Wl
-u2
CHANGEOVER
SUITABLE
CHANGEOVER
SWITCH
M)S3.-
w2
v2
SWITCH
MAWUn
Is60
SUTABLE
CONTROLLER
flT3.-
OIAGRAM
MAINTENANCE
Routine Maintenance
ie only maintenance required is lubrication of the motor
impeller and motor, and checking of the security fastenings.
and motor should be inspected to ensure that there is no
motor, obstruction of the airpath or cause out of balance
bearings where this facility is provided, occasional cleaning of tht

After 3 months, and thereafter as experience dictates, the impeller
build up of dirt or other matter that could cause overheating of the
of the impeller.
The tightening torques of all fastenings should be checked to the table below. If the fan is dismantled, do not re-use any locking
devices. Replace with new components.
SIZE
NFLATS
TORQUE Nm
M6
M8
10
13
6
11
Ml0
17
28
Ml2
Ml6
19
24
49
122
Ensure that guards are correctly replaced after maintenance
EARING
work.
LUBRICATION
dT and CT f tames
Bearings are supplied sealed for life and should not normally require attention. Lubrication of bearings by customer is not
recommended. In the event of a bearing failure, exchange motors can be supplied.
F22 81 D132 frames
The motor should be relubricated after 16,000 hours running, in ambients of up to 50C. For each 15C above 50C the
relubrication period should be halved. Regardless of the period calculated, the relubrication period should not exceed 2 years.
The following quantities of lubricant should be used.
MOTOR
DE
FRAME
F22
D132
ml
5
7
BEARING
In3
0.3
0.45
TE
ml
5
7
BEARING
GREASE TYPE
In3
0.25
0.45
Shell Dolium R.
Esso Unirex N3
When carrying out relubrication it is essential that every trace of water and dirt is removed from around the grease nipple and
that a clean grease gun is used. Grease nipples are located on the duct. Only a low pressure should be required to inject the
orease. If a high pressure is required the cause should be investigated.
FLAMEPROOF
MOTORS
Additional Information for Flameproof Motors

Motors are certified to BS 5501 Parts 1 & 5. Capacitors and control gear, etc., supplied with these fans are not normally
flameproof and should be installed outside the hazardous area.
Conduit
Joints should be made through special flameproof junction boxes or unions throughout the hazardous area. At a point outside
the hazardous area, the flameproof conduit system must be sealed off by a special junction box having a flameproof barrier.
Beyond this point any standard method of wiring with non-flameproof control gear may be used.
Operating Conditions
Providing the motor is not allowed to become coated with dirt, dust or other solid matter that would restrict SurfaCe COOling.
the carcase temperature will never exceed 80C when operating in the maximum ambient temperature of 40C. It is incumbent
on users to satisfy themselves that this carcase temperature is safe underthe conditions of use and with respect to the particular
inflammable media in the vicinity.
COMMUNICATIONS
ly queries regarding operational problems, accompanied by details shown on the motor nameplates, should be referred tc
your local Woods Office or Agent.
In the unlikely event of failure during the guarantee period the Woods of Colchester Ltd Service Centre Telephone (0206)
44122 should be contacted before any repairs are undertaken.
For further details and discussion,

Head Office in Colchester.
please contact
your local Sales Centre
Birmingham
B6 7JH
P.O. Box 220
Tel: 0121 327 1262
Telefax:
0121 327 6991
Colchester
CO4 5AR
Tufnell Way
Tel: 01206 44122
Telefax:
01206 574434
Woods Companies
and Divisions
Manchester
M60 1AQ
P.O. Box 142
Tel: 0161 848 0341
Telefax:
0161 872 9847
with The General Electric
Company
Woods Puhallin OY
Ruosilantie
2, P.O. Box 38
00391 Helsinki
Finland
Tel: +350 0 546 455
Telefax:
+358 0 546 552
Woods
Ventilatoren
GmbH
Siemensstr.
16
4030 Ratingen
Germany
Tel: 02102 3 10 68
Telefax:
02102 3 91 13
Woods
ltaliana
Via Monte Nero
20092 Cinisello
Italy
Tel: 02 617 25
Telefax:
02 618
American
Fan Company
3235 Homeward
Way
Fairfield
Ohio
45014 USA
Tel: 513 870 6240
Telefax:
513 870 6249
GEC Distributors
(Ireland)
Ltd
Republic
of Ireland
Tel: 01 775413
Telefax:
01 775601
Cie Francaise
Woods
France
Tel: 01 4080 5400
Telefax:
01 4080 5571
GEC Woods
Fans
A division
of GEC Australia
Telefax:
02 643 2298
Ltd
Mechanical
Products
Department
GEC Alsthom
International
Canada
Canada
Telefax:
0416 622 1291
The General
Electric
Of Hong Kong Ltd
Hong Kong
Telefax:
08 345773
Inc.
details
Company
Ltd.,
Of
GEC Zimbabwe
Private
Zimbabwe
Telefax:
04 737979
Of
Distribution
and service
available
in all countries.
Contact
Woods Head Office.
Ltd. England 1995.
please contact
Worldwide
us below.
Due to a policy of continuous

development
and improvement
the right is reserved
to
supplyproductswhichmaydifferfromthose
illustratedanddescribedin
thispublication.
Certified
dimensions
will be supplied
on
request
on receipt of order.
ti
a sd?e
Tel: 01206 44122, Int + 4.4 1206 44122

Telefax: 01206 574434, Int + 44 1206 574434
0 Copyrighl Woods Of Cokhester
91
59 92
Woods
Fans Company
(South Africa)
A Division
of GEC Alsthom
South Africa
South Africa
Telefax:
011 825 2511
in over 70 countries
of the representatives,
LEADERSHIP IN
AIR MOVEMENT
TECHNOLOGY
Woods Of Colchester
Tufnell Way,
Colchester.
Essex,
CO4 5AR, England
The General
Electric
Malaysia
Sdn.Bhd.
Malaysia
Telefax:
603 7921350
The General
Electric Company
Singapore
Private Ltd
Singapore
Telefax:
04 698258
represented
For any further
Company
plc.
SpA
55157
B. Milan0
Ltd
Woods
Satchwell
Division
GEC (New Zealand)
Ltd
New Zealand
Telefax:
04 374 110
Company
GEC Zambia
Ltd
Zambia
Telefax:
02 612 449
Woods
The General
Electric
Of India Ltd
India
Telex: 021 7460
Publication
Part
August
1995
co"-JPa"Y
No: 502429
or
3.3.
WC Extract Fan.
Manufacturer:
Fans Direct Ltd.
Address:
Admail 12 1
Cardiff
Wales
CFl 1YU
Telephone
Fax
0990-121-400.
0990-121-444.
Model Ref.
QTE CA3-3C (twin fa.I
InsWlldon
und Muhknunte
NUAIRE
Microsave
M
Twin Fan Control
MT-A (auto duty share)
MT-M (manual duty share)
MT-ATC (auto duty sharing +
MT-MTC (manual duty sharing
NUAlRE
NuAm Lmnted
Western Indusmal Estate
Caerphilly, Mid Glamorgan CF83 IXH
United Kmgdom
Telephone 01222 885911
Facsimile No. 01222 887033
Em.& Info @ nuare. ca.ok
timeclock)
+ timeclock)
No.
DECEMBER
Leaflet
670915
1998
Page
Contents
1
2
2
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
Introduction
Control applications
& wiring
Control ancillaries
The User Control Panel
Connecting
cable to the User Control
Sensitivity
adjustment
User control / Fan connection
Adjusting
the Run on timer
Using Switch Live
Certification
Controls
F&. 1 Dimensions of Microsave M Twinfan Control.

Note unit is shownjtted into surface mounted conduit box
(supplied).
CONTROL
MT-A
Microsave
Control,
Automatic
Duty
Manual
button.
Twinfan
system on/off
Status LEDs
MT-ATC
Microsave Twinfan
Duty Sharing
Control,
Manual
Duty
Sharing
and duty fan changeover

via the touch
indicate
fan/system
failures.
Timeclock
Control,
Automatic
Telephone:
01222
Facsimile:
01222 858586
Twinfan
Timeclock
to provide
Control,
Manual
858585
The Microsave
M Ttinfan
control
system features
the compact Microsave
User Control
panel (see fig. 1 for dimensions).
This panel can be installed
in the chosen
position
in a recessed
or surface mounted
configuration.
The unit is the same size as a
double gang power socket.
The system is suitable for single or three phase operation.
Manual
system on/off via the touch button
with automatic
duty fan changeover
every 12 hours.
Timed
system
on/off
via
7-day timeclock
with 21 adjustable
times.
Status LEDs
indicate fan/system
failures.
MT-MTC
Microsave
Sharing
is available
Sharing
Manual
system on/off via the touch button
with automatic
duty fan changeover
every 12 hours.
Status LEDs
indicate
fan/system
failures.
MT-M
Microsave
(CAS)
Service
and technicians
support.
We are on hand to provide

help and advice from
the most
basic use of any NuAire
equipment
to the more complex
applications,
maximising
on the versatility
of our SMART
and NetLink
control
products.
OPTIONS
Twinfan
Application
A team of Engineers
pre and post order
module rns,de
Duty
Manual
system on/off
and duty fan changeover
via the touch
button.
Timed
system
on/off via 7-day timeclock
with 21
adjustable
times. Status LEDs
indicate
fan/system
failures.
User conacd
Introduction
The NuAire
Microsave
M Twinfan
Control
system brings
a
totally new concept
to twinfan
control
technology.
Low voltage
circuitry
and wiring
is employed
between
the fan and the user
control
panel to monitor
and control
the fan unit.
The low voltage 4 -core connecting
cables can be installed
without
the use of expensive
and unsightly
housing
conduits.
The twinfan
is fitted with an internally
mounted
control
module
which
is connected
via a single low voltage
cable to the
User Control.
All the mains supply
and switching
is housed
in
the contra!
module
located inside the associated
Quietwin
twinfan
unit.
Fig. 2 A typical Microsave Quietwin
Control layout
Note:
1.
2.
Only
one Microsave
User Control
can be connected
each Microsave
M Quietwin.
Terminals
are provided
inside the Quietwin
Control
module
for the following:
l
BMS (Building
management
system)
override
control
(on / off and system
status).
l
Fan speed adjustment
which
requirers
the
connection
of an additional
speed control
(contact
us for further
details).
to
!
I
Microsave
Control
NuAire
TWINFANCONTROL
lnsfu//u~~on md Mainfemnce
Applications
(Single Phase) and wiring
NuAire
QTI Twinfans
QTE & QTR Twinfans
Phase 230~
SUPPlY
Low voltage
communications
cable
Mains
I
Fig. 3 QTI
Single Phase application.
SUPPlY
Fig. 4 QTE
Single phase QUIETWIN
EY QTR Single Phase application.
with MICROSAVE control
* MT-AVI -Audible/Visual lnd~cator

MT-AVI
CONTROL MODULE
IN FAN
cc-j
NET
Cable
230~ 1 phase
SUPPY
MICROSAVE
Fig. 5 Single Phase wiring.
USER CONTROL
Microsave
Control
TWINFAN
CONTROL
l~sfu//ufion and Mainfeuunce
Applications
(Three
Phase) and wiring
BELT
DRIVE
Three Phase
400v Mains
supply to fan
Three phase QUIETWIN
Fig, 6 Quietwin
with MICROSAVE
Three Phase application
control
* MT-AVI - AudibleI V,sualIndmtor

MT-AVI
CONTROL
MODULE IN FAN
conneCtmn*
=zEP
Lmvltage
Cmmnlcatlons
Cable
Fig. 7 Single Phase wiring.

MICROSAVE
Control
USER CONTROL
ancillaries
SCBLlO, 20 or 30:
Smart Low voltage Extension or Replacement
Communication
Cables
Low
voltage
communications
10, 20 or 30m
connectors
MT-Am
Indicates
Microsave
system
status
Audio/Visual
via a large
LED
Fail Indicator
(OFF=OK,
The
RED=FAN
FAILURE).
Incorporates
a user selectable
audible
warning.
to the Twinfan
Control
Module,
10m length
tions
cables).
cable
with
plugs
provided
(see
opposite
Unit
plugs
of communicafor
extension
in
lengths.
pre-fitted
communication
SCBL 10 =
SCBL 20 =
SCBL 30 =
NB:
Control
Maximum
Device
10m
20m
30m
cable
Supplied
extensions
with
and a female
cables
come
are available
in
male
by female,
in a variety
adaptor.
of lengths:
length
length
length
cable length
between
Fan
Control
and
is 50m.
NuAire Limited,
Western Industrial Estate,
Caerphilly, Mid Glamorgan,
CF83 1XH. United Kingdom.
Telephone: 01222 885911
Fax: 01222 887033
Email: info @ nuaire. co. uk
OCTOBER
1998
VI%declarethat the equipment named below

conformsto the requirementsof EC Council Directive
relating to ElectromagneticCompatibility
Designation
Equipment
of equipment
:-
TWINFAN
Types :-
MICROSAVE
Relevant EC Council
Directives
Applied
Standards :-
Harmonised
Basis of Self Attestation
Signature of manufacture
:-
(M)
89/336/EEC, 92/31/EEC (EMC)
E50081-1, EN50082-1
:-
Quality Assurance to BS EN IS0 9001

BSI Registered Firm Certificate No. FM 149
representatives
:-
Name:
Position:
Date:
C. Biggs
Technical Director
2. 10. 98
M. Fussell
CONTROL
Manufacturing Director
2. 10. 98
3.4.
Kitchen Extract Fan.
Manufacturer:
Woods of Colchester Ltd.
Address:
Tufnell Way
Colchester
CO4 5AR
Telephone
Fax
01206-441122.
01206-574434.
Model Ref.
40 JM (L Type).
ADJUSTABLEPITCH
AEROFOIL
FAN
JM AEROFOIL
SIZES:
31 JM - 315 mm, 35JM - 355 mm, 40JM
315mm-1000mm
diameter
Volume flow up to 20 m%
(42000 fWmin)
Static pressures up to
Pa (2.8 in. wg)
700
l
Motor protection
efficiency
Low installed
High energy
noise levels
IP55
Overheat protection fitted

as standard on 1 e motors
100% X-ray of impeller
Casing hot dipped
galvanised
Full range of ancillary
equipment
45JM
- 450 mm,
50JM
- 500 mm,
56JM
63JM
90JM
- 630 mm,
- 900 mm,
71 JM - 710 mm, 80JM

1 OOJM - 1000 mm
- 400 mm,
- 560 mm,
- 800 mm,
FAN PERFORMANCE:
All fans are tested to the latest internationally
recognised standard IS05801 Part 1, installation category D for aerodynamic
performance
and BS848 Part 2 (1985) for acoustic performance.
Coupled with the above fan diameters,
the
adjustable pitch Aerofoil impeller gives the exact performance
required, with a non overloading fan characteristic.
IMPELLERS:
A unique high efficiency aeroforl section blade
with a purposely smoothed hub and clamplate
for adjustable
The Woods
pitch
angle
availability.
impellers are all high pressure die

cast to offer thin aerofoil sectrons for low generation of noise levels. Every component IS Xrayed using Real Time Radiography
:nspx:!cr
prior
to assembly.
MOTORS:
All motors
are totally
enclosed
class F insulation.
Constructed
air stream
ratec
from alumrnrum
as standard with special Tslot and pad mounted

fixings.
Suitable for horizontal through to vertical shaft
operation. Supplied IP55,with removable drain
plugs. Bearings lubricated with wide temperature range grease relubricatable
or sealed for
life depending on size. Flameproof motors are
certified to BS5501 Parts 1 and 5 suitable for
use in gas groups 2A and 2B. Temperature
class T4.
1.
2.
3.
4
5.
ELECTRICAL
SUPPLY:
V / 50 Hz I 1 o
V I 50 Hz I 3 m
220-240
380-420
TEMPERATURE
RANGE:
-40C to 50C as standard.
Fans can be
operated up to 70C with appropriate deration
of motors (please enquire).
CASINGS:
JM Aerofoil fans are available in either a long
cased form complete with externally mounted
pre-wired electrical terminal box or short cased
for duct or plate installation.
Casings are spun from sheet steel with integral
pre-drilled
and
radiused
inlet
flanges.
The
galvanised
finish gives a high resistance
to
corrosion and makes it ideal for external use
ANCILLARY
EQUIPMENT:
Silencers,
Mounting feet, Vibration isolators,
Matching flanges, Flexible connectors, Air operated non return dampers. Guards, Bell mouth
inlets.
13
Manufacturer:
Woods ef ~olches!ei
Fan Type: Adjustable
pitch ~erzic,l
-2
with lGOoa X-rayed
aluml::Izm
~;:e:eFan code: eg. 63 denotes
the ar.
impeller diameter
in :m JM :::-~!BS
fan type
20 denotes
;mpeller hub dlarreter .6 denotes
a nolninai 6 pcie speed.
6 denotes
the number
of blades.
20 denotes
the oitch angle for the
requrred
duty
Electrical
Supply:
eg.
240 V : 50 Hz / 1 0
Ancrllary
Items required:
eg Fee:
Vibration
isolators
etc.
6.
.
:23
1
63 ~JM 20
_ _ _ I ~
~:5
- - -
_ - - - - _
6 SO ; ZK
-~__~~~--~-.
!
5
3,J
50
FOR FURTHER INFORMATION, PLEASE

CONTACT YOUR LOCAL SALES CENTRE
ADJUSTABLEPITCH
AEROFOIL
FAN
AEROFOIL
FAN 31 JM - 50JM (See page 16 for details)
1000
800
600
.04
.08
Y
.I
200
-2
a
2
400
\
I \
II
.4
.6
.8
III
I
4
II
100
80
60
20
,Ol
S ,ingle
stage,
preferred
AEROFOIL
.2
range
only.
curves
see publication
II
6
C22a.
60 -
.2
Single
stage,
.4
.6
.8
q, W/s)
preferred
range
only.
14
curves
see publication
C22a
I I
810
AEROFOIL
FAN 63JM - 80JM ([See )age 210 for details )
.4
Single
stage,
.6
preferred
AEROFOIL
I
.8
range
only.
For full perfc ,rman
FAN 9OJM - 1OOJM (Se1e we
We
22 fc r detail
3oc
200
100
80
3
a
%
a
60
40
20
10
Single
stage,
preferred
range
only.
For full perfor mane
FLAMEPROOF AEROFOIL
(See page 24 for details)
:e curves
see c ublicatlcr
FAN 40JM-80JM
15
,_. -,,
si
10
ADJUSTABLE PITCH
AEROFOIL
FAN 31JM
- 50JM
SELECTION
TABLE
31 JM - 50JM
ELECTRICAL
DATA 31 JM - 50JM
Sound pressure
in dB(A) at 3
metres
distance
over a sphere,
based on form B running
and are presented
for comparative purposes
only.
Cylindrical
silencers
are available
as standard.
See page
6.5 for details.
Preferred
Range
220-i
Code
Speed
Motor
(rev/mm
t 31JM/16/6/5...
31JM/16/4/5...
31JM/16i2/5...
1v,5ot
12I
380-42OV150
Startmg
Current
at230V I-
Pitch
Angle
Wotor
3atlng
Full Load
Current
(at 230 V)
(")
NW
(4
(A)
Transformer
(")
900
BT5
22-40
0.04
0.5
0.7
ME1.1
MTl.l
38-40
1420
BT5
24-38
0.07
0.6
1.8
ME1.1
MT1.l
30-40
24-34
2840
Hz/30
BT9
26-32
0.5
3.3
9.0
N/A
N/A
CT5
36-40
075
4.9
8.5
N/A
N/A
36-40
0.95 /
2.0
9.5
N/A
N/A
64
12-40
0.04
0.5
0.7
ME1.1
MT1.l
26-40
0.06
0.3
0.8
ME3.2D
MT3.0.5 /
38
35JM,'16/6i5...
900
BT5
35JM/l6i4/5...
1420
BT5
16-24
0.07
0.6
18
ME1.l
MT1 1
20-34
0.13
0.5
1.8
ME3.2D
MT3.0,5
47
BT4
28-40
0.13
1.0
2.0
ME1.l
MT1.5
36-40
0.20
0.7
2.4
ME3.2D
MT3.1
48
CT5
24-28
0.75
4.9
a.5
N/A
N/A
24-32
0.95
2.0
9.5
N/A
CT9
36-40
14
8.3
270
N/A
N/A
34-40
BT4
20-38
0.06
0.6
1.0
ME1.l
MT1.l
36-40
0.09
0.4
1.2
ME3.2D
MT3.0.5
40
BT5
26-28
0.16
1.2
2.7
ME13
MT1.5
24-30
0.20
0.7
2.4
ME3.2D
MT3.1
51
BT9
34-40
0.25
1.7
3.8
ME1.3
MT1 5
32-40
0.30
0.9
4.6
ME3.2D
MT3.1
52
N/A
22-32
1.70
3.5
20.0
N/A
N,'A
67
35JM/l6/2/5...
2840
40JM/l6/6/5...
900
40JM/16/4/5...
1420
1.7 1
3.5
20.0
N/A
I
1
N/A
NiA
I
1
64
66
40JW6,'2/5...
2840
CT9
24-28
1.40
a.3
27.0
N/A
45JMil6/6i5...
900
BT5
22-34
0.09
0.8
1.6
ME1.1
MTl.l
24-30
0.09
0.4
1.2
ME3.2D
MT3 0.5
43
BT9
36-40
0.12
1.1
2.2
ME1.3
MT1.5
32-40
0.14
0.6
1.8
ME3.2D
MT3.1
14
BT9
24-30
0.3
2.1
5.3
ME1.3
MT1.5
22-26
0.3
0.9
4.6
ME3.2D
MT3.1
56
0.45
2.9
7.0
MEi.
MT1.5
36-40
0.58
1.7
6.5
ME3.2D
MT3.2
58
1.4
a.3
27.0
N/A
N/A
14-20
1.7
3.5
20.0
N/A
NiA
69
58
71
0.14
1.2
2.8
ME1.3
MT1.5
22-28
MT1.5
40
0.3
45JM/16/4/5...
1420
CT5
36-40
45JM/l6/2!5...
2840
CT9
16-1s
45JM/20/2/6...
2910
I-2225
50JM/l6/6/5...
915
-iE-
SOJM/16/4/5...
50JM/20;4/6
5QJM/20/2.'6...
1420
1420
2910
N/A
30-32
20-34
0.14 1
0.6
1.1
44.0
[
1.8
3.3
N:A
/
N/A
70
ME32D
1 MT3.1
ME3.2D
MT3.2
47
47
CT5
36-40
0.19
1.8
30
ME1.3
CT5
26-28
0.45
2.9
70
ME1.3
MT1.5
26-30
0.58
1.7
6.5
ME3.2D
MT3.2
60
CT9
38-40
0.68
4.2
11 0
ME1.6
MT1.8
32-40
0.9
23
9.0
ME3.2D
MT3.2
61
CT5
30-32
0.55
3.7
9.5
ME1.6
MT1.5
24-30
0.58
1.7
6.5
ME3.2D
MT3.2
61
CT9
40
0.9
5.8
190
ME1.6
MT1 8
32-40
0.9
2.3
9.0
ME3.2D
MT3.2
62
I:2225
:2229
I
NIA
12-24
3.8
2.1
44.0
N/A
N/A
N/A
26-34
6.2
11.0
90.0
N/A
N/A
16
73
1
75
IMEN ISIONS 31 JM - 50JM
(L Tyl )e)
BT.CT.FZ2 FRAMES
AUXILIARY CABLES
BT.CT.F22 FRAMES
23 DIA. HOLES FOR C ONDUIT.
2 EACH SIDE SUITABL.E FOR CM20 OR PG16
S No. OF HOLES OT
EOUISPACEO ON H PC@
AIRFLOW
c-;z:
FORM A
AIRFLOW
E3
FORM B
GUARDS OPTIONAL
/EITHER END
HOLE IN
FOOT 0 N
ZHOLESQE
i
.
J CRS >I I ,I
KCRS
DiMENSlONREFE8ENCE
315
355
400
450
500
Dmensions
(mm1
BT415i9
315
395
375
235
2.5
25
175
355
66
289
265
315 I IO
X0
CT5
315
395
375
235
2.5
25
175
355
66
289
265
315,
200
BT4/5/9
355
435
375
256
2.5
25
CT5i9
355
435
375
256
2.5
25
8T415i9
400
480
375
279
2.5
25
CT9
400
480
375
279
2.5
25
BT519
450
544
375
306
2.5
25
CT5i9
450
544
375
306
2.5
25
F2225
450
544
520
306
25
BT9
500
594
375
338
2.5
25
CT519
500
594
375
338
2.5
25
F2225
500
594
520
338
25
F2229
500
594
520
338
25
1 J
in mm
17
10
P--
ADJUSTABLE PITCH
AEROFOIL
FAN 50JM
- 63JM
at Pa (Static)
m%
20
50JM/16
915
1 .oo
SELECTION
TABLE
50JM - 63JM
600
20"
1.50
2.00
2.50
3.00
3.50
50JMM6
50JM120
14200
16"
2910
12"
50JMll6
50JM20
1420
2910
26"
16"
56JM/l6
5OJMf20
1420
2910
20"
20"
56JMl16
SOJMRO
1420
26"
2910
24"
56JM/20
50JM/20
1420
2910
30,'
56JMi20
2910
20"
56JMi20
2910
240
Preffered
ELECTRICAL
DATA
50JM
I
Code
Speed
Motor
rev/min: I
5OJMI161615..
Pitch
Angie
(7
- 63JM
220-240 V / 50 Hz / lo
Aotol Fill
latint I
l-
380-420 V i 50 Hz / 30
I
dotor
qating
Loar
Current
(i3I230b
Full Load Starting

Current
Current
(at 400 V) (at 400 V )
Sound
Level
WA)
Speed Controller
W-W
(4
(4
Electronic
Transformer
()
WJ)
(4
(4
Electronrc
Transformer
BT9
30-32
ix
1.2
2.6
ME1.3
MTI.5
22-26
0.14
0.6
1.6
ME3.2D
MT3.1
47
CT5
36-40
0.19
1.8
3.0
ME1.3
MT1.5
40
0.3
1.1
3.3
ME3.2D
MT3.2
49
CT5
26-28
0.45
2.9
7.0
ME1.3
MTI.5
26-30
0.56
1.7
6.5
ME3.2D
MT3.2
60
CT9
38-40
0.68
4.2
11.0
ME1.6
MT1 6
32-40
0.9
2.3
9.0
ME3.20
MT3.2
61
CT5
30-32
0.55
3.7
9.5
MEI .6
MTI.5
24-30
0.56
1.7
6.5
ME3.2D
MT3.2
61
CT9
40
0.9
5.8
19.0
MEi .6
MT1 6
32-40
0.9
2.3
9.0
ME3.2D
MT3.2
62
2910
F2225
N/A
12-24
3.8
2.1
44.0
N/A
N/A
73
900
N/A
36-40
0.3
2.4
N/A
ME3.2D
N/A
MT3.2
75
56JM:l6i6/5...
F2229
CT5
56JM/16/4/5...
1420
50JM/16/4/5...
50JM/201416...
50JM!20/2/6...
56JM/20/4/6...
915
Range
1420
1420
1420
4.0
MEt.3
MTI.5
26-34
30-36
CT5
22
0.55
3.7
9.5
ME1 6
MT1.5
16-20
ME3.20
MT3.2
60
CT9
28-32
0.9
5.6
19.0
ME1 6
MT1 6
22-30
ME3.2D
MT3 2
61
CT5
20
0.55
9.5
ME1.6
MT1.5
16-20
ME3.2D
MT3.2
61
CT9
32-36
-1.1
3.7
7.2
23.0
ME1.12
MT1 .I 2
30-32
ME3.2D
N/A
62
26-32
ME3.20
MT3.2
47
50
63JM/20/8/6...
680
CT9
N/A
63JM/20/6/6...
900
CT5
22
0.3
2.4
4.0
ME1.3
MTI.5
16-20
ME3.2D
MT3.2
CT9
34
052
4.0
9.2
ME1.6
MT1 6
26-30
ME3.20
MT3.2
55
CT9
16-18
0.9
5.8
19.0
ME1.6
MT1.8
12-14
ME3.2D
MT3.2
63
CT9
20-22
1.1
7.2
23.0
ME1.12
MT1.12
16-20
ME3.20
N/A
64
F2245
N/A
26-30
N/A
N/A
67
63JM/20/4/6...
1420
Sound pressure
levels quoted
are calculated
conditions,
and are presented
for comparative
purposes
only.
Cylindrical
silencers
are available
as standard.
18
over
a sphere,
based
on form
B running
under
free
field
DIMENSIONS

BT.CT.FZZ FRAMES
AUXILIARY CABLES
&
I
\
,
BT,CT.F22 FRAMES
23 DIA. HOLES FOR CONDUIT
2 EACH SIDE SUlTABl .E FOR CM20 OR PG16
S ::o CF HCiE3 3EGUlSP4CE3 ON r:t:

/
SIGHTPORT
AIRFLOW
tc
FORM A
AIRFLOW
FORM B
GUARDS OPTIONAL
,,
FOOT 5 N
L
2 HOLES Cl B
:
L
r--i--Code
Dimensions
Motor
J CRS
DIMENSIONREFERENCE
-
Frame
KCRS
ti
(mm1
_ki
M / N 1 p
500
338
290
560
66
289
450
338
290
560
66
239
450
joo / 10
i
500
IO
~ 315
500
500
338
290
560
66
434
150
500
10
i 315
-500
560
630
338
560
66
-134
I 3i5
620
66
-450
510
500 ! 10
368
403
-290
330
375
690
66
289
580
630
-
403
-
375
-
690
66
133
580
I
i
in mm
19
j 315
FOOT POSITI
FOR VERTiCl
AEROFOIL
FAN 63JM
- 80JM
at Pa (Static)
100
SELECTION
TABLE
63JM - 80JM
Preferred
ELECTRICAL
Cooe
Speed
71JM!20/4:6
60JM/20/6/6...
80JM/25/4/3...
60JMi25/4/9...
1440
935
1440
1440
Motor
Motor
Ratmg
Rating
Full Load
Current
(at 230 V)
Starting
Current
(at 230 V)
(1
WW
(A!
(A)
CT9
CT5
N/A
22
0.3
2.4
4.0
CT9
CT9
CT9
34
16-18
Ito-22
0.52
09
1.1
4.0
58
7.2
9.2
19.0
23.0
F2245
F2265
CT9
N/A
N,A
N/A
F2265
F2245
F2249
N/A
N/A
N/A
F2265
F22.69
F2265
N/A
NIA
F2269
F2245
F2249
1132/18
)I32124 I
220-240 V: 50 Hz i lo
Pitch
\ngie
/Angie
200
63JMRO
900
20
63JMl20
1420
IO"
63JM/20
63JM/20
900
63JMl20
1420
14"
71JMl25
1440
14
---
26
63JMEO
1420
12
63JMl20
1420
63JM120
1420
6351120
1420
71JMl20
1440
aOJMi25
1440
1420
12"
___
___
180
20
24
16
12
63JM/20
i420
63JM/20
1420
71JM120
1440
71JMl20
1440
aOJMi25
1440
280
30
ia0
20
16"
71JM/20
1440
71JM/ZO
1440
71JM/20
1440
24
71JMl20
1440.
28
aOJM/25
1440
20
71JM120
1440
aOJMl25
1440
aOJMj25
1440
20
22
71JM/20
71JM/20
1440
26
1440
28
30
20
24
71JMl20
1440
aOJMI25
aOJM/25
1440
aOJM/25
1440
34
aOJM/25
1440
22
26
28"
aOJMl25
1440
80JMl25
1440
aOJM125
1440
80JMi25
1440
---
24
26
26
32
aOJMl25
1440
34
---
1440
24
___
Range
DATA 63JM - 80JM

T
150
Speed Controller
Transformer
Electromc
ME1.3
ME1.6
MT1 5
MT13
ME1 6
ME1.12
MT1.6
IUIT1.12
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Prtch
Angle
(7
28-32
16-20
26-30
12-14
la-20
28-30
20
over
Starting
Jlotor
fqatrng
Full Load
Current
at -100 V:
Current
at 400 V)
IkWj
(4
(A)
Electromc
Trans-
0.25
1.2
1.1
2.6
ME3.20
ME3.20
former
MT3.2
MT32
47
ME3.20
ME3.20
ME3.2D
MT3.2
MT3.2
N/A
55
63
64
N/A
N/A
6i
52
3j
0.3
0.52
0.9
1.15
2.1
1.7
2.3
3.0
4.7
2.4
3.3
1.5
90
11.4
N/A
ME3.2D
ME320
15.0
N/A
N/A
NIA
0.65
0.52
1.35
14-24
26-36
20-28
30-36
22-26
2.7
4.4
__
0.65
0.85
1.35
2.4
3.0
3.6
11.0
15.0
32-36
20-24
16-22
2.1
2.1
4.4
55
47
9.3
26 0
30.0
52.0
13.2
180
85.0
100.00
6.3
- 90
a sphere,
based
purposes
only.
1.7
3.6
58
9.3
on
Speed Controller
30.0
a.0
7.5
34-36
16-18
36-36
24-28
30-36
Sound pressure
levels quoted
are calculated
form B running
and are presented
for comparative
Cylindrical
silencers
are available
as standard.
F
1
380-420 V / 50 Hz / 30
30.0
52.0
8.0
i
-r
MT3.2
N/A
NiA
50
56
67
ME3 20
ME3 2D
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N,A
N/A
N/A
58
62
64
N/A
N/A
N:A
N,A
N/A
N/A
70
72
73
N/A
75
N/A
69
56
DIMENSI ONS 63JM - 80JM
(L -Ijw)
BT.CT.F22 FRAMES
1 HOLE 20 DIA (END OF BOX) TO
AUXILIARY CABLES
~
/
D132. D160 FRAMES

40 DIA. HOLES FOR CO NDUIT
2 EACH SIDE SUITABLE FOR PG29 OR 1 5~
BT.CT.F22 FRAMES
23 DIA. HOLES FOR CO NDUIT.
a0
$:
.T$
2
AIRFLOW
,F~RMA
Ei
2;
AIRFLOW
m
FORMS
ml
0,
GUARDS OPTIONAL
, EITHER END
J
HOLE IN
IFOOTON
HOLES 0 8 I
JCRS-!
I
-
~1
KCRS
--
! 1
Code
Motor
l---r
630
Dimensions
Frame
-
DiMENSlONREiE4ENCE
BT5i9
630
72-l
375
375
CT519
630
72-l
375
375
F2245
630
710
721
520
804
375
443
710
804
520
-710
804
800
894
800
800
in mm
K
_I
269
289
375
- i
415
259
443
415
404
520
443
415
-
404
520
488
485
404
894
520
488
485
104
894
520
525
485
404
-800 L 894
625
525
i
1
485
434
499
1i
21
-I
(mmj
?,I
N
117
580
630
580
630
580
630
I
L
710
71 0
710
800
I
i
10
10
10
-..10
430
110
440
10
510
10
800
10
5?0
800
12
510
17
510
P--e
gJ
SELECTION
TABLE
90JM - 1OOJM
Preferred
ELECTRICAL DATA
!30JM - 1 OJlvl
Cade
Speed
Motor
revlmrn)
90JMl25/816...
9OJM1251819
90JM/25/6i6..
695
695
935
F2269
F2269
F2269
0132/19
90JM/25/6/9...
90JM/25/419...
935
1440
380-42ov/50
Pitch
Angle
vlotor
qatingI
FC"l'rkZd
I,at JO0 V)
Range
HZ/~@
Starting
Current
at400 V)
Speed Controller
Sound
Level
WA)
Transformer
i-)
WV
(A)
(4
Electronic
24-28
0.85
3.0
11.0
ME320
N/A
57
1.1
4.7
14.0
N/A
N/A
58
N/A
N/A
65
N/A
N/A
59
66
22-32
26-28
34-36
2.1
3.0
5.5
86
26.0
40 c
F2269
26-32
35
8.0
44.0
N/A
N/A
D132lMSA
34-36
4.5
10.5
63.0
N/A
N,A
69
D132.'24
20-24
9.0
18.0
100.0
N/A
NIA
76
0160120
26-32
13.0
260
140.0
N/A
N/A
79
l!lOJMi25,8/6.
695
F2269
18-20
0.85
3.0
11.0
ME3.20
N/A
57
lOOJM/25/8i9...
695
F2269
14-22
14
4.7
140
N/A
N/A
67
lOOJM/25/6/6...
950
F2269
8-18
2.1
5.5
26.0
N/A
N/A
58
0132/19
24-32
4.5
105
630
N/A
N/A
59
D132/19
22-26
4.5
105
63.0
N/A
N/A
68
0132126
28-34
6.3
150
90.0
N/A
N/A
70
D160/20
la-22
130
260
1400
NIA
N/A
79
0160126
24-26
17.0
33 0
185.0
N/A
N/A
a0
DlGO/LaK
28-36
25.0
-
44.0
330.0
N/A
N/A
a3
lOOJM/25:6.9...
lOOJM/25/419...
960
1470
Sound pressure levels quoted are calculated in dB(A) at 31 netres distance

a sphere, based on form B running under free field conditions, and are
presented for comparative
purposes only.
Cylindrical silencers are available as standard.
22
over
DIMENSIONS
90JM - 100JM
(L
Type)
D132. D160 FRAMES

2 EACH SIDE SUlTABl .E FOR PC
ET.CT.F22 FRAMES
2 EACH SIDE SUITAEL.E FOR Ci
AIRFLOW
FORM A
AIRFLOW
FORM B
2HOLESO8
J CRS _/
KCRS
____~~
c
1
DIMENSION HEFEREXE(mm)
E
/ i
ii
44
I
Dimensions
) 950 / lCO0
144
950
539
950 11000
1000
in mm
AIR MOVEMENT
23
AEROFOIL
FAN 40JM
LAMEPROOF
Wmin
500
I I I I
1000
m3/hr
- 80JM
FLAMEPROOF
JM AEROFOIL
FAN 40JM - 8OJM
1000
I I I I
I
I
5000
,I
10000
5000
Ill,,
mm
w
10000
in
w
30 -
-1
20 -- 0.8
- 0.6
- 0.5
IO -- 0.4
a I- 0.3
60
50
40
65 -- 0.2
4-
30
3- 0.1
2 -- 0.08
- 0.06
- 0.05
101
0.2
Single
stage,
0.3
0.4
full solidity
II
0.5 0.6
fan performance
III
0.8
1
details
only
III]
678
are shown.
SELECTION TABLE
40JM - 80JM
ELECTRICAL
DATA Flameproof
40JM - 8OJM
3.0
Sound pressure
in dB(A) at 3 metres
distance
over a sphere,
based on form B running under free field conditions,
and are
presented
for comparative
purposes
only.
Cylindrical
silencers
are available
as standard.
Flameproof
Fans are not suitable for speed regulation.
4.0
5.0
1420
lEc
1420
la'
1420
1420
22"
1420
26
1440 '
20"
63JM
63JM
63JM
63JM
63JM
80JM
22"
22"
24'
28'
30-
12"
63JM
63JM
80JM
26"
1420
26"
63JM
1420
63JM
1420
63JM
1420
28'
32"
1420
36,
1440
143
63JM
63JM
80JM
80JM
8OJM
80JM
1420
1420
1440
1440
1440
1440
(All Flameproof
24
JM Aerofoils
- suffix
JM/...FLP)
---
i0'
---
---
DIMENSIONS (L Type)
40JM - 80JM
S No OF HOLES QT
EQUISPACED ON Ii PC0
SIGHT PORT
Code
Motor
Frama
1 A ( 8
1 C
i <
[-L~[M
ENV89MP
ENV89MP
400 1 480
480 // 520
52
;; 400
/ jOJM2O.FLl
jOJM2O.FLP
ENV89MP
/ 500
63JMiZO.FLP
ENV89MP
)) 630 // 724 / 520
25 / 375
ENV89LP
ENV89
1 630 I 724
520
25 ! 375 1 690
66 ; 134
180JMl:0
80JM/:OFLP(
ENVi39LP
j 800 1/ 894
520
25 jJ8Sf8E0,
66 ic751;;3ci!
520
Dimensionsin
25 j 225
( J
IOJMIWLPj
IOJMIlG.FLP
594
F ; G 1 H
690 / 66 I X24
X3.4 S80;63:
sao;m;
boxes.
feature
66 ~G,JS51jOOi
360
I
mm
Flameproof
fans have no duct terminal
Connect
directly to motor terminal
box.
Flameproof
fans have spark minimising
i PJ
-150 I 66 1 13~ , 353 ~ JCC ~ : I
25 ! 290
I
as standard
2.5
jgg i 6CO
C ~
-;T
/
Z ~
CUSTOMER WIRING INSTRUCTIONS

A duct mounted terminal box is provided with two 26mm diameter
&quired, the rtgi d p Ias 1IC plug and locknut must be left in situ to seal
The terminal box lid is sealed with a moulded neoprene gasket and
heads. To connect the supply to the motor, remove the lid to expose
earth pillar located in the side of the box.
holes for customers supply entry. If only one entry is

the unused hole. Glands are not supplied as standard.
the two fixing screws have sealing washers under the
the terminal block. The fan must be earthed using the
Depending upon the requirements of fan operation and control, i.e. speed control, 2 speed etc. it may be necessary to select
an alternative connection diagram for wiring up to the fan to that supplied in the fan terminal box. These will be indicated in
the panel marked connection on the motor nameplate (See below).
Single Phase
Nearly all fans are fitted with pre-wired capacitor fixed to the motor for the correct rotation. Overheat protection providing
automatic cut-out is included in most cases, and is internally connected as supplied. These fans are liable to automatically
restart, therefore, the fan must be isolated before attempting any maintenance work. If required, the protector leads can be
brought out, e.g. to an external contactor for remote control. In this case, remove the link between K and UZ and connect
supply to UZ and U.
Where the fan is suitable for speed control, this is indicated in the catalogue. Where speed control is used it is essential that
the link between terminals U and P is removed as indicated on the relevant diagrams (page 4).
-3e appropriate connection diagram letters are shown on the motor nameplate located on the periphery of the terminal box
.&sing, whichwill indicateuptotwopossibilities.
For F22 and D132frame rnotorsthe motordiagram is theonlyone applicable.
Second letter indicates variable speed.
e.g.
CONNECTION
[AG]
A = 1 Phase. Integral Capacitor with O/heat Protector.

G = 1 Phase. Integral Capacitor with O/heat Protector
used with Auto-Transformer or Electronic Controllers.
Three Phase
A trial connection should be made to check the fan rotation is correct. If incorrect, interchange, any two phases of the three
phase supply. Overheat protection is not provided as standard.
Where a fan is suitable for speed control, this is indicated in the catalogue. The appropriate connection diagram letters are
shown on the motor nameplate located on the periphery of the terminal box housing, which will indicate up to four possibilities.
The remaining letters indicate other possibilities suited to that particular fan. These diagrams should be referred to and the
correct alternative chosen for the application.
e.g.
E P S
CONNECTION
E = 3 Phase. Constant Speed (Dual Voltage Single Speed).

P = 3 Phase. with Electronic Controller.
S = 3 Phase. with Auto Transformer Controller.
Certain selected sizes are supplied suitable fortwo speed as standard by the Delta/Star re-connection method, the lower speed
being approximately 80% of full speed. This can be done by changing links on a permanent basis as diagram F or using a
special changeover switch as shown in diagram X. The switch selected should have an inductive rating not less than the rated
full load current for the fan.
BT 8 CT MOTOR
SINGLE PHASE
SINGLE SPEED FANS
1 PHASE
INTEGRAL
WITH
1 PHASE
CAPACITW
OVERHEAT
FRAMES.
FOR F22 MOTOR FRAME

SEE DIAGRAM IN MOTOR TERMINAL
MEGRU
WlTHOUT
PROTECTOR
BOX
CAPAClTOR
OVERHEAT
PROTECTM
000000
?
UZ
-N
DIAGRAM
1 PHASE
EXTERNAL
WITH
1 PHASE
CAPACITOR
OVERHEAT
OIAGRAM
>N 502332
EXTERNAL
WITHOUT
PROTECTOR
CAPACITOR
OVERHEAT
PROTECTOR
P ig;
DIAGRAM
CD ti65f
,
DIAGRAM
:D 1652

INTEGRAL
CAPACITOR
USE0
WITH
WITH
OR ELECTRONIC
1 PHASE
OVERHEAT
PROTECl
ION
INTEGRAL
CAPACITOR
USED WITH
AUTO-TRANSFORMER
CONTROLLERS
OR ELECTROMC
1 PHASE
000000
ETWEEN
u
Q
uz
0
K
0
UZ
FAN
Q
ETWEEN
1 6
ZorP
CONTROLLERS
UZ
0,
10
c>
0
L
CONTROCLER
CONTRCLLER
L
MEI-
AEl-
MT1 - HE1 - AEl.DIAGRAM
0 1653
EXTERNAL
CAPACITOR
USED
WITH
WITH
PROTECTX)N
EXTERNAL
CONTROLLERS
ETWEEN
SUTAli..
D u5s
UZ
UZ
0
N
Q
lo
PROTECTION
CONTROLLERS
01
FAN
P & II
ZorP
0
UTl-
0
z
CAPACITOR
WITHOUT
OVERHEAT
USED WITH AUTO-TRANSFORMER
OR ELECTRONIC
1 PHASE
000000
P
OIA~~?AM
0 *by
AUTO-TRANSFORMER
OR ELECTRONIC
1 PHASE
OVERHEAT
FAN
P & U
SHOWN DOTTED
L
MTl-
PROTECTOIJ
000000
P 6 U
SHOWN WTTEO
WITHOUT
OVERHEAT
AUTO-TRANSFORMER
AEl-
CONTRXLER
LL
CONTROLLERS
Ml.-
SUTAi:
N
MTlDIAGRAM
m56
-~;LER
CONTROLLERS
HEl-
AEl-
-N
DIAGRAH
THREE PHASE
BT 8 CT MOTOR
FOR F22 AND D132 MOTOR FRAMES

SEE DIAGRAM IN MOTOR TERMINAL BOX
) SINGLE SPEED FANS

( DUAL
CONSTANT
VOLTAGE
SPEED
SNGLE
FRAMES.
SPEED
3wK5E
CONSTANT
SJEED
SPEED 1 LMEGUATED
( TWO
000000
ul
v>340
3 PHASE
DIAGRAM
wl
K?
w2
v2
LOW
3 PHASE
SWPLY
502333
Vl
1
I
HIGH
3 PHASE
SWPLY
OIAGRAM

STAR COfMXTED
FAN WITH
ELECTRON
SPEED CONTROLLER
3 PHASE
lo
01
IP
FAN WITH
CONTROLLER
DELTA
CONMXTED
FAN.
I DlAGRAn
F WITH
LMS
OMITTED
)
.
-7
DELTA
CObMXTED
ELECTRON
SPEED
3 PHASE
Vl
Wl
u2
w2
v2
COWTKLLER
3 PHASE
NEUTRAL
PLUS
SUPPLY
1
SUTABLE
CONTROLLER
ME3.-
DIAGRAM
0 1657
3 PHASE
STAR CONNECTED
AUTO-TRANSFORER
FAN
WITH
SPEED CONTROLLER
SUTABLE
CD wia
CONTROLLER
DELTA COMJECTED
AUTO-TRANSFORER
3 PHASE
I 1659
w2
v2
FAN
3 PHASE
SLRPLY
SUITABLE
I PHASE
CONTROLLER
MT3.-
OELTA CONNECTED
WITH OELTA-STAR
DELTA CONNECTED
FAN
F WITH
? f UAGRAH
?
LINKS OtlTTED
1
I ml?+1
TRANSFORMF
CONTROLLER
P
Y
3 PHASE
MAGRAM
FAN WITH
SPEED CONTROLLER
u2
P
r
sw,f
ME3.-0
SUITABLE
CHANCEOVER
DIAGRAM
FAN FOR FUL

SPEED CHANGE
0
Vl
SWITCH
0
Wl
0
u2
M>S3.-
SPEED
SWITCH
0
w2
UAGw
0
v2
IOU60
SUITABLE
CONTROLLER
IlT3.-
MAGRAM
MAINTENANCE
Routine Maintenance
ie only maintenance required is lubrication of the motor bearings where this facility is provided, occasional cleaning of tht
impellerand motor, andcheckingof the security fastenings. After3 months, and thereafter as experience dictates, the impeller
and motor should be inspected to ensure that there is no build up of dirt or other matter that could cause overheating of the
motor, obstruction of the airpath or cause out of balance of the impeller.
The tightening torques of all fastenings should be checked to the table below. If the fan is dismantled, do not re-use any locking
devices. Replace with new components.
SIZE
M6
M8
Ml0
Ml2
Ml6
A/FLATS
10
13
TORQUE Nm
6
11
17
19
24
28
49
122
Ensure that guards are correctly replaced after maintenance
EARING
work.
LUBRICATION
dT and CT frames
Bearings are supplied sealed for life and should not normally require attention. Lubrication of bearings by customer is not
recommended. In the event of a bearing failure, exchange motors can be supplied.
F22 81 D132 frames
The motor should be relubricated after 16,000 hours running, in ambients of up to 50C. For each 15C above 50C the
relubrication period should be halved. Regardless of the period calculated, the relubrication period should not exceed 2 years.
The following quantities of lubricant should be used.
MOTOR
FRAME
DE
ml
F22
D132
5
7
BEARING
In3
0.3
0.45
TE
ml
5
7
BEARING
In3
GREASE TYPE
0.25
0.45
Shell Dolium R.
Esso Unirex N3
When carrying out relubrication it is essential that every trace of water and dirt is removed from around the grease nipple and
that a clean grease gun is used. Grease nipples are located on the duct. Only a low pressure should be required to inject the
nrease. If a high pressure is required the cause should be investigated.
FLAMEPROOF
MOTORS
Additional Information
for Flameproof Motors
Motors are certified to BS 5501 Parts 1 & 5. Capacitors and control gear, etc., supplied with these fans are not normally
flameproof and should be installed outside the hazardous area.
Conduit
Joints should be made through special flameproof junction boxes or unions throughout the hazardous area. At a point outside
the hazardous area, the flameproof conduit system must be sealed off by a special junction box having a flameproof barrier.
Beyond this point any standard method of wiring with non-flameproof control gear may be used.
Operating Conditions
Providing the motor is not allowed to become coated with dirt, dust or other solid matter that would restrict surface cooling
the carcase temperature will neverexceed80C
when operating in the maximum ambient temperature of 40C. It is incumbent
onuserstosatisfythemselvesthat
thiscarcasetemperatureissafeundertheconditionsof
useandwithrespecttotheparticular
inflammable media in the vicinity.
COMMUNICATIONS
ly queries regarding operational problems, accompanied by details shown on the motor nameplates, should be referred
your local Woods Office or Agent.
In the unlikely event of failure during the guarantee period the Woods of Colchester Ltd Service Centre Telephone (0206)
44122 should be contacted before any repairs are undertaken.
For further details and discussion,

Head Office in Colchester.
please contact your local Sales Centre
Birmingham
B6 7JH
P.O. Box 220
Tel: 0121 327 1262
Telefax:
0121 327 6991
Colchester
CO4 5AR
Tufnell Way
Tel: 01206 44122
Telefax:
01206 574434
Woods Companies
and Divisions
Manchester
M60 1AQ
P.O. Box 142
Tel: 0161 848 0341
Telefax:
0161 872 9847
with The General Electric
Company
Woods
Puhallin OY
Ruosilantie
2, P.O. Box 38
00391 Helsinki
Finland
Tel: +358 0 546 455
Telefax:
+358 0 546 552
Woods Ventilatoren
GmbH
Siemensstr.
16
4030 Ratingen
Germany
Tel: 02102 3 10 68
Telefax:
02102 3 91 13
Woods
ltaliana
Via Monte Nero
20092 Cinisello
Italy
Tel: 02 617 25
Telefax:
02 618
American
Fan Company
3235 Homeward
Way
Fairfield
Ohio
45014 USA
Tel: 513 870 6240
Telefax:
513 870 6249
GEC Distributors
(Ireland)
Ltd
Republic
of Ireland
Tel: 01 775413
Telefax:
01 775601
Cie Francaise
Woods
France
Tel: 01 4080 5400
Telefax:
01 4080 5571
GEC Woods
Fans
A division
of GEC Australia
Telefax:
02 643 2298
The General
Electric
Of India Ltd
India
Telex: 021 7460
Ltd
Mechanical
Products
Department
GEC Alsthom
International
Canada
Canada
Telefax:
0416 622 1291
The General
Electric
Of Hong Kong Ltd
Hong Kong
Telefax:
08 345773
Inc.
Company
The General
Electric
Company
Singapore
Private
Ltd
Singapore
Telefax:
04 698258
Woods represented
details
SpA
55/57
8. Milan0
91
59 92
Woods
Fans Company
(South Africa)
A Division
of GEC Alsthom
South Africa
South Africa
Telefax:
011 825 2511
Of
GEC Zimbabwe
Private
Zimbabwe
Telefax:
04 737979
Of
Distribution
and service
available
in all countries.
Contact
Woods Head Office.
in over 70 countries
of the representatives,
LEADERSHIP IN
AIR MOVEMENT
TECHNOLOGY
Woods Of Colchester
Ltd.,
Tufnell Way,
Colchester.
Essex.
CO4 5AR, England
Tel: 0120601206
44122. Int + 44 1206 44122
Telefax:
574434, Int + 44 1206 574434
Q Copyright Woods 01 Cokhester
plc.
Ltd
Woods Satchwell
Division
GEC (New Zealand)
Ltd
New Zealand
Telefax:
04 374 110
GEC Zambia
Ltd
Zambia
Telefax:
02 612 449
For any further
Company
The General
Electric
Company
Malaysia
Sdn.Bhd.
Malaysia
Telefax:
603 792 1350
Ltd. England 1995.
please contact
Worldwide
us below.
Due to a policy of continuous

development
and improvement
the right is reserved
to
supplyproductswhichmaydifferfrom
those
illustrated
and described
in this publication.
Certified
dimensions
will be supplied
on
request
on receipt of order.
Publication
Part
August
1995
No: 502429
or
3.5.
Cooling Water Circulating
Pumps.
Manufacturer:
Pullen Pumps Limited.
Address:
158 Beddington Lane

Croydon
Surrey
CR9 4PT
Telephone
Fax
0181-684-9521.
0181-689-8892.
Model Ref.
2 No. SKK1081/2 7.5kW 2P CII 156D.
Operation
Maintenance
The system
must be flushed
thoroughly
before the
pump is installed to remove all dirt and pipe scale which
would cause damage to the bearings
and could cause
the pump to seize. When the installation
is complete
and the pump has been installed,
the pipework
must be
filled and fully vented. The pump must then be vented
as follows:
Pullen PGC and PCR pumps require minimal

routine
maintenance
since the bearings
are water lubricated
and being of the canned rotor construction,
there is no
shaft seal to replace.
Duty and standby
pumps should
be alternated
on a
regular basis, say once a week. In any event the standby
unit must be operated
at least once a month. Unusually
long periods
of inactivity
are detrimental
to the pump
(because
of sedimentation
and clogging).
Should the pump be inoperative
for any considerable
period it should
be switched
on for a short period at
monthly
intervals.
For automatic
cyclihg
of duty and
standby pumps please refer to Pullen Cyclic Controller.
Venting
Close the isolating
valves on either side of the pump;
slacken and remove the vent plug taking care that water
does not enter the terminal box or electrical
installation.
Insert a screwdriver
into the slot in the shaft-end
and
rotate the pump shaft several times to ensure that it is
free.
Remove the screwdriver
and switch on the electrical
supply to check the direction
of shaft rotation.
CORRECT
ROTATION
IS ANTI-CLOCKWISE
WHEN
VIEWED TH-ROUGH
THE VENT PLUG.
Replace the vent plug but do not tighten.
Open the isolating valves on each side of the pump and
when any remaining
air has escaped,
tighten
the vent
plug.
Do not over-tighten
as this could cause damage to the
seal and distort the rotor can.
SERIOUS
DAMAGE
CAN BE CAUSED
BY RUNNING
THE PUMP DRY.
Speed Change
The performance
of multi-speed
pumps can be altered
when
necessary
to suit the system
requirement
by
changing
the speed of the motor. Multi-speed
pumps
are equipped
with a three-position
switch
on the
terminal box cover. To change the speed first switch the
pump off, then turn the switch to the required speed as
given on the Data Label and switch the pump back on.
Pump
Seized
Should the pump not start, close the

each side of the pump, remove the vent
the shaft with a screwdriver
until it spins
and tighten the vent plug. If the pump
turn freely, the pump must be dismantled
isolating
valves
plug and rotate
freely. Replace
shaft does not
for cleaning.
Dismantling
Isolate the pump and remove the motor head complete
with impeller
by undoing
the four socket
head cap
screws. Gently ease the rotor/impeller
assembly out of
the can by inserting
screwdrivers
between
the bearing
plate and the rotor can, taking care not to impose any
undue
stress
or knocks
which
could
damage
the
ceramic shaft and bearings.
Examine
the shaft and bearings
for any damage
and
clean off any scale deposited
on the inside of the can
and the outside of the rotor.
Rebuilding
Rebuild the rotor/impeller
assembly
into the rotor can
and check that the pump shaft rotates freely. Make sure
that the gasket between the motor and the pump is not
damaged.
Replace with new gasket if necessary.
Fit the
motor
head into the casing
and cross tighten
the
screws. Open the isolating
valves and vent the pump
through
the vent plug in the end of the motor. Check
that the shaft is still free to rotate and then replace and
tighten the vent plug.
Replacement
Motor
Head
Should a new motor head be fitted to
an existing casing it must be vented as
described
under Operation
before it is
run.
-
Moto
Removing
Rotor/Impeller
assembly
from
motor
can
Rotor
assembly
removed
Bearing plate
Rotor
from
motor
Twin
pump
flap valve
The twin pump flap valve can be replaced by removing

the two pins which hold the keeper ring in position. The
keeper ring , gasket and flap valve assembly can now
be withdrawn from the delivery port of the casing.
When fitting a new flap valve it is essential that it is
fitted in the correct position.
Slide the flap valve assembly into the delivery port of
the casing such that the two lugs on the bottom of the
flap valve body locate each side of the port dividing rib.
The valve is in the correct position when it will not
rotate in the delivery port. Replace the gasket, keeper
ring and the two pins which hold the assembly in
position.
Tweway
flap valve
with locking
pegs
Port
dividing
rib
Fault Finding
Fault
Pump
runs
noisily
Cause
Insufficient
pumping
positive
temperature
Air
Faulty
will
not
start
Pump
does not
required
flow
deliver
head
Check
against
for
in pump
Damaged
Pump
Remedy
Possible
shaft
electrical
or bearings
Strip
new
pump
and examine
shaft
and
head if damaged
and investigate
connections
Check
Rotor
build
jammed
due
up of scale
due
to
Motor
burned
out
Pump
running
reverse
Pump
speed
not
resistance
by removing
inlet
pump
shaft
stuck
up of scale
System
calculated
head at pump
capability
chart.
Vent
Pump
build
running
positive
pump
electrical
the
plug
and
pumping
in the
end
bearings.
cause
temperature
of the
Fit complete
of damage.
connections.
to small
Remove
plug in end of motor.
the slot in the end of the shaft
spins
freely.
heavy
Strip pump
Check
that
and clean
the rotor and the internal
of the can.
pump
is not positioned
at lowest
point
in system.
Investigate
cause
Check
motor.
of the
rotation
at full
higher
rotation
Correct
motor.
than
out
Insert
a screwdriver
and rotate
the shaft
and
replace
by removing
the vent
rotation
is anti-clockwise
and
For
motor
plug
of motor
and
a screwdriver
Check
for obstructions
in the pump
Measure
the head generated
across
the system
resistance
at the particular
Service
The Spares Department

offers quick service
delivery of spare parts.
When ordering spares please quote the pump
and number given on the Nameplate.
of burn
Remove
vent plug in end
rotates
freely
by inserting
the end of the shaft.
Check
electrical
supply.
Spares Supplies
in the
looking
check
down
on-site and emergency
Lo-call
Head
Office
158 Beddington
Lane,
Surrey CR9 4PT
Tel:
0181-6849521
Fax: 0181- 689 8892
Croydon
Telex:
946597
and specification
into
it
end of the
on the end
that
into
shaft
the slot
or system.
the pump
which
will
flow rate achieved.
in
give
Division
type
the right to alter design
down
until
head.
calls phone:
0345626083
Service Centres at Croydon, Manchester,

and Glasgow.
We reserve
motor.
without
prior
Birmingham
notice
Northern Office
Pullen Pumps Ltd
Unit 2 Mercury
Park, Mercury
Way
off Barton Dock Road, Urmston
Manchester
M41 7LR
Tel: 0161 - 866 8900
Fax: 0161 - 866 8901
Registered
Address
158 Beddington
Lane
Croydon,
Surrey CR9 4PT
Reg. in England
No. 480911
3.6.
Electric Water Heater.
Manufacturer:
Heatrae Sadia Limited.
Address:
Hurricane Way
Norwich
NR6 6EA
Telephone:
Facsimile:
01603-424144.
01603-417805.
Model:
Series 2000/45.
Capacity:
450 litres.
InstallationManual
Fitting and using the Megaflo unvented mains
pressure water heater
0
-
C
-
HEATRAE SADIA
Megaflb
QB
HEATRAE SADIA
Megafld
Q!
--
HEATRAE SADIA
Megajlb
HEATRAE SADIA
Megaflb
e
megaflo
INSTALLATION
ANDUSERINTRUCTIONS
PLEASE
LEAVETHISMANUALWITHTHEUNITFORFUTURE
REFERENCE
CONTENTS
PAGE
SECTION
1.0
2.0
3.0
INTRODUCTION ........................
GENERALREQUIREMENTS
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
3
3
3
3
INSTALLATION- GENERAL
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
4.0
5.3
5.4
5.5
10.0
: ;
7
BOILERSELECTION .....................
INDIRECTTHERMAL CUT-OUT AND
2-PORTMOTORISEDVALVE ...................
..................
WIRING
HEATlNG&ST~MCO;TR~L~
: .................
....................
lMMERSlONHEATER(S)
7
9
9
9
9
FILLINGTHEMEGAFLOWITHWATER ................
CHECKTHEOPERATIONOFTHESAFETYVALVES .............
DIRECTUNITS. .......................
INDIRECTUNITS ......................
9
9
9
9
...................
WARNINGS
...................
TEMPERATURhNTkO;
...................
FLOWPERFORMANCE
OPERATIONALFAULT. ...................
9
9
.ll
.11
MAINTENANCE
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
9.0
FITTlNGTHElMMERSlONHEATER(S)
...................................
WIRING
.................
OPERATION : :
USER INSTRUCTIONS
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
8.0
5
5
5
5
7
7
COMMISSIONING
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
7.0
INSTALLATION- INDIRECT (dL) UNIiS

5.1
5.2
6.0
PIPEFITTINGS. .....................................
COLOWATERSUPPLY
c~LDWATERCOMBINATI~NVALVE : : ................
DRAINTAP. .......................
OUTLETPIPEWORK .....................
.................
TUNDISHANDDISCHARGEPIPE.
...................
SECONDARYCIRCULATION
WARNINGS. .......................
INSTALLATION- DIRECT (D, DD i? DDD) UNITS

4.1
4.2
4.3
5.0
COMPONENTCHECKLIST ...................
SITINGTHEMEGAFLO ....................
WATERSUPPLY ......................
OUTLET/TERMlNALFITTINGS. ..................
MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS.
..............................
CHECKOPERATIONOFSAFETYVALVES.
...................
CLEANTHESTRAINER
DRAININGTHEMEGAFLOUNIT
................................
DESCALlNGlMMERSlONHEATER(S).
....................
REFILLINGSYSTEM
:;;
.13
:;;
.13
FAULT FINDING AND SERVICING

IMPORTANTNOTES
9.1
:;;
9.2
9.3
.14
SPAREPARTS. .........................................
FAULTFINDINGCHART ...................
GUARANTEE
10.1
10.2
WARNING ...............
GUARANTEET;R& :
..............
BackCover
BackCover
1.O Introduction
The Megaflois an unventedtype water heater.
This meansthat it can be supplieddirectlyfrom
the mains supplyto the propertywithoutthe
needfor separatefeed cisterns or vent pipes. It is
suppliedcompletewith all its necessaryinlet and
safety controls,electricimmersion heater(s)and,
for indirectunits, a cylinderthermostat,thermal
cut-outand 2-Port motorisedvalve.
Generallyits pressureand flowrate performance
will far exceedthat from a comparablevented
system, thermal store, multipoint instantaneous
gas heateror combinationboiler.
The Megaflorequiresno separateexpansion
vesselas any expandedwater is accommodated
within an internalair volume.
2.0 Geneial Requirements

IMPORTANT:PLEASEREADAND UNDERSTANDTHESEINSTRUCTIONS BEFORE
INSTALLINGTHE MEGAFLOWATER HEATER.
INCORRECTINSTALLATIONMAY INVALIDATE
GUARANTEE.
THE MEGAFLOMUSTBEINSTALLED BYA
GOMPETENTINSTALLERIN ACCORDANCE
WITH BUILDINGREGULATION63.
ever,a wall mountingbracketis availablefor

the 70, 125, and 145 litre models (refer
Diagram10). Ensurethat the floor or wall is
of sufficientstrengthto supportthe full
weight of the unit (referto charts on page
15 for unit weights).Piperuns shouldbe
kept as short as possiblefor maximum
economy.Access to associatedcontrols,
immersion heatersand indirect controls
should be possiblefor servicingand maintenance of the system.
2.3 WATERSUPPLY
Bearin mind that the mains water supplyto
the propertywill be supplyingboth the hot
and cold water requirementssimultaneously.It is recommendedthat the maximum water demandbe assessedand the
water supply be checkedto ensurethis
demandcan be satisfactorilymet.
NOTEA high mains waterpressurewill not
always guaranteehigh flow rates.
Whereverpossiblethe main supply pipe
should be in 22mm. We suggestthat the
minimum supply requirementsshould be 1.5
bar pressureand 20 litres per minute
flowrate. At these valuesoutlet flowrates
may be poor if severaloutletsare used
simultaneously,the higherthe available
pressureand flowrate the betterthe system
performancewill be.
The Megaflohas an operatingpressureof 3
bar which is controlledby the ColdWater
CombinationValve.The Cold WaterCombinationValvecan be connectedto a maximum mains supply pressureof 16 bar.
2.1 COMPONENTCHECKLIST
Beforecommencinginstallationcheck that all
the componentsfor your Megaflounit are
containedin the package.The following
componentsare suppliedas standardwith
your Megaflounit :
Immersionheater(s)
Cold WaterCombinationValve (comprises
FITTINGS(TAPS,ETC.)
PressureReducingValve, BalancedPressure 2.4 OUTLET/TERMINAL
The Megaflocan be used in conjunction
ColdWaterConnection,CheckValveand
with most types of terminalfittings. It is
ExpansionReliefValve).
Factoryfitted Temperature/Pressure
Relief
advantageousin many mixer showersto
have balancedhot and cold water supplies,
Valve(set at 90%/10bar)
in these instancesthe BalancedPressure
. Tundish(includedin Cold WaterCombination Valvepack)
Cold Waterconnectionon the Cold Water
CombinationValve shouldbe used. Outlets
Factoryfitted IndirectThermostatand
situatedhigherthan the Megaflo unit will
ThermalCut-out(CL units only)
give outlet pressureslower than that at the
. 2-PortMotorisedValve (CL units only)
heater,a 10m heightdifferencewill result in
a 1 bar pressurereductionat the outlet
2.2 SITINGTHE MEGAFLO(see Diagram 1)
fitting.
The Megaflounit must be installedvertically.
It can be placedanywhereconvenient
providedthe dischargepipe(s) from its safety
valvescan be correctlyinstalled.Areasthat
are subjectto freezingmust be avoided.The
unit is designedto be floor standing,howl
l
Diagram 1: Typical Megaflo Installation

1
HOT WATER OUTLET
TEMPERATUREAND
PRESSURERELIEF V
CYLINDERTHERMOSTAT
AND THERMAL CUT-OUT
HEATINGELEMENT
-Y
2 PORT MOTORISED
VALVE
COLD WATER INLET

(SHOWN ON OPPOSITE
SIDE FOR CLARITY)
CL Indirect
Model
Illustrated
3.0 INSTALLATION GENERAL(seeDiagram 2)
tion is suppliedwith a blankingplug shouldit

not be required.
3.4 DRAINTAP
3.1 PIPE FITTINGS
A suitabledrainingtap shouldbe installedin
the cold water supplyto the Megaflounit
As all the pipeson the Megafloare in
betweenthe Cold WaterCombinationValve
StainlessSteelbrazingor solderingis
and the heaterat as low a level as possible
difficult, thereforeuse 22mm COMPRESSION
(see Diagram2). It is recommendedthat the
FITTINGSwhen connectingto the Megaflo
outletpoint of the drain pipe work be at least
pipes.
I metre below the levelof the heater(this
PUSHFIT TYPEFITTINGSMUST NOTBE
can
be achievedby attachinga hose pipeto
USEDFORCONNECTION
TO THE MEGAFLO
the
drain
tap outletspigot).
PIPES.However,thereis no reasonwhy, if
technicallysuitable,these cannot be em3.5 OUTLETPIPEWORK
ployed elsewherein the system.
Ideallythe pipeworkfrom the Megafloto the
If soldertype fittings are used in the supply
outletfittings shouldbe in 22mm pipe with
to the MegafloCold WaterCombinationValve
short runs of 15mm pipeto showersand
the use of self-cleaningfluxes should be
basintaps. Small bore pipe can also be used
avoidedas they can impair the operationof
to suit some taps, but runs shouldbe of
the valve.
minimum length.
3.2 COLDWATERSUPPLY
A 22mm cold watersupply is recommended, 3.6 TUNDISHAND DISCHARGEPIPE
It is a requirementof Building Regulation
however,if a 15mm (l/2) supply exists
G3that any dischargefrom an unvented
which providessufficientflow (see2.3
system is safely conveyedto where it is
above)this may be used.More flow noise
visible but will not cause dangerto persons
may be experiencedfrom small bore pipes
in or aboutthe building.
due to the increasedwater velocitythrough
them.
SeeDiagram2 for fitting details.
A stopcockor servicingvalveshouldbe
The Tundishsuppliedand the discharge
incorporatedin the cold water supplyto
pipesshould be fitted in accordancewith the
enablethe Megaflounit and its associated
Requirementsand GuidanceNotes of
controlsto be isolatedand serviced.
BuildingRegulationG3. Theseare essentially as follows :
3.3 COLDWATERCOMBINATION
VALVE
G3 Requirement
(see Diagram 3)
i) Dischargepipe MUST terminatein a
The ColdWaterCombinationValvecan be
SAFE,VISIBLEposition.
connectedanywhereon the cold water
G3 Guidance
mains supplyprior to the Megaflounit. There
ii) Tundishshouldbe within 500mm of the
is no requirementto site it closeto the unit,
Temperature/Pressure
ReliefValve and,
it can be locatedat a point wherethe mains
wherever
possible,
be
in
a visible posisupply entersthe premisesif this is more
tion.
convenient.However,ensurethe discharge
from the ExpansionReliefValvecan be
iii) Dischargepipe shouldhave a vertical fall
of at least 300mm from the Tundish.
correctly installed(see section 3.6 and
Diagram2).
iv) Minimum dischargepipe size shouldbe
one pipe size larger(28mm) than the
The Cold WaterCombinationValveis deTemperature/Pressure
Relief Valve
signedto be installedas a completeonedischargeport (22mm - 3/4 BSP).
pieceunit, however,if requiredit can be
installedas two separatevalves, i.e. a
v) Maximum total equivalenthydraulic
PressureReducer/Strainer
and an Expansion
resistanceof the dischargepipe should
ReliefValve/CheckValve.Ensurethat the
not exceedthat of 9m of straightpipe.
Valveis installedwith the directionof flow
NOTEa 28mm bendis equivalentto lm
arrows pointingtowardsthe heater.
of straightpipe.
The BalancedPressureCold WaterConnec-
Diagram 2: Typical Pipework Installation for Megaflo 6
ZZmm COLD WATER

MAINS SUPPLY
HOT WATER SUPPLY
TO TAPS (22mmI
FLOW L RETURN
SHOWN ON
OPPOSITE SIDE
BOTTOM OF TUNDISH TO
FIRST BEND MUST BE A
t4NltlUM OF 300mm
FOR CLARITY.
-El-L
1 1
RETURN
28mm O/D
d
..rERHlNATlON
TO BE
IAXIMUM OF 1OOmm
4BOVE GROUND LEVEL
-4
KEY
1.
2.
3.
STOPCOCK.
COLD WATER
DRAIN.
I.
5.
COHPRESSION FITTING.
HEATING ELEMENT.
COMBINATION
SECONDARY RETURN
POSITION (SEE DIAGRAM
4)
TO FITTINGS
VALVE.
6.
7.
0.
9.
INDIRECT THERMAL CONTROLS.

T 8 P RELIEF VALVE.
TUNDISH.
DISCHARGE
PIPE (SEE SECTION
3.6)
boss or 2 x immersionheatersand blanking

vi) Dischargepipe should havea continuous
fall (minimum 1:200).
plug in lower bosses,1 x immersionheater
in top boss. If an additionalimmersionheater
InformationSheetNo. 33 availablefrom the
is requiredorderPart No.95 606 920.
British Boardof Agrementgivesfurther
adviceon dischargepipe installation(contact01923662900).
4.2 WIRING(see Diagram 5)
All electricalwiring shouldbe carriedout by
3.7 SECONDARYCIRCULATION
a competentelectricianand be in accordance
with the latest I.E.E.Wiring RegulaIf a secondarycirculationsystem is required
tions.
it is recommendedthat it be connectedto
the Megafloas shownin Diagram4 via a
The immersion heater(s)should be wired in
SweptTeejoint (not supplied- availableas
accordancewith Diagram5 and the instructions suppliedwithin the cap of the heater.
an accessoryorderCodeNo. 95 605 812).
The secondaryreturnpipe shouldbe in
The immersion heatersMUST be earthed.
15mm pipeand incorporatea checkvalveto
DO NOToperatethe immersion heatersuntil
preventbackflow.A suitableWBS approved
the Megaflohas beenfilled with water.
bronzecirculationpump will be required.
3.8 WARNINGS
i) Underno circumstancesshould the
factory fitted Temperature/Pressure
Relief Valve be removed other than by
AuthorisedHeatraeSadia personnel.To
do so will invalidate any guaranteeor
claim.
ii) The ColdWater CombinationValvemust
be fitted to the mains water supply to
the Megaflo unit.
iii) No control or safety valves shouldbe
tamperedwith.
iv) The dischargepipe should not be
blockedor usedfor any other purpose.
4.0 Installation - Direct (D,

DD and DDD units)
4.1 FITTINGTHE IMMERSIONHEATER(S)
The immersionheatersshould be screwed
into the 1 3/4 BSP bosseson the side of
the Megaflounit. Ensurethe 0-ring seals
are in place,DO NOTuse any othertype of
seal or sealanton the threads.
The 1 3/4 BSPthreadis non-standardto
preventthe use of immersion heaters
withoutthe necessarythermal cut-out fitted.
The immersionheatersshould only be
replacedwith authorisedHeatraeSadia
Megaflospareparts.
The DDD modelsare suppliedwith three
immersionheatersand a 1 3/4 BSP blanking plug.This allows for flexibility of heat
input arrangements,eg. 3 x immersion
heatersin lowerthree bosses, blankedtop
4.3 OPERATION
It is recommendedthat the immersionheater
thermostatsare set to 60 - 65OC,however
they can be set between10 and 70C The
thermostatincorporatesa thermal cut-out
that will switch off the immersion heaterin
the eventof a thermostatfailure.DO NOT
bypassthe thermal cut-out in any circumstances.
5.0 Installation - Indirect (CL)

units
5.1 BOILERSELECTION
The MegafloIndirect(CL) models are suitable
for use with most gas or oil fired boilers
compatiblewith unventedsystems i.e. fitted
with a temperaturecontrolthermostat.
If in doubt consult the boiler manufacturer.
DONOTuse a coal or wood burningboileras
these do not have adequatethermal control
for unventedsystems.
The boilerused can eitherbe a sealed
system or open ventedtype, maximum
primary circuit pressure3 bar.
The primaryflow from the boilershould be
pumped.Gravitycirculationis not recommendeddue to poor heatingperformance.
The boilerflow temperatureshould be set at
a maximum of 90%.
The boiler cannotbe ventedthroughthe
Megaflounit.
Diagram 3: Cold Water Combination Valve
3/L
PRESSURE
REDUCING
VALVE
AND STRAINER
CARTRIDGE
EXPANSION
3/L
22mm
RELIEF
EXPANSION
VALVE
PORT
CARTRIDGE
(BLANKED)
COMPRESSION
CHECK
COLD MAINS IN -
BALANCED
COLD
W
WITH CHECK
VALVE
(22mm
MAINS IN
VIA COLD
WATER
~0l$ATlON
COMPRESSION
Diagram 6:
Indirect Thermal Controls
\
FEED
EARTH SCREW
(REMOVE LABEL
BEFO-RE USE
THERMAL CUTOUT
RESET BUTTON
I
22 x 22 x 15mm
SWEPT TEE
(NOT SUPPLIED)
-INLET
HOUSING)
15mm EXPANSION
RELIEF
OUTLET
COMPRESSION1
Diagram 4:
Secondary circulation
II
RETURN
(WITHIN
TO MEGAFLO
22mm
15mm NON
RETURN VALVE
(NOT SUPPLIED)
VALVE
TO MEGAFLO
PIPE
Diagram 5:
Immersion heater wiring
THERMOSTAT
L CABLE
FUSED
(13A) MAINS SUPPLY
GRIP
II
TERMINAL
BLOCK
6.0 Commissioning
5.2 INDIRECTTHERMALCUT-OUTAND P-PORT

MOTORISEDVALVE
6.1 FILLINGTHE MEGAFLOWITH WATER
To comply with BBA regulationsandto
preventthe Megaflofrom overheatingthe 2Ensurethat all fittings and immersionheaters
Port motorisedvalve suppliedMUST be fitted
are correctlyfitted and tightened.
to the primaryflow to the indirectcoil (see
i) Opena hot tap furthest from the
Diagram1).
Megaflo.
5.3 WIRING
ii) Openthe mains stop cock to fill the unit.
All electricalwiring shouldbe carriedout by a
Whenwater issues from the tap, allow to
competentelectricianand being accordance
run for a few minutesto flush through
with the latestI.E.E.Wiring Regulations.
any dirt or swarf, then close tap.
The MegafloIndirectThermostatand Thermal
iii) Opensuccessivehot taps to purgeany
Cut-outarefactory pre-wired.The 2-Port
air from the system.
motorisedvalvesuppliedMUST be wired in
iv) Checkall connectionsfor leaks and
serieswith the Indirectcontrolssuch that the
rectify as necessary.
powersupplyto the valve is interrupted
6.2 CHECKTHE OPERATIONOFTHE SAFETY
shouldeitherthe Thermostator ThermalCutVALVES
out operate.TheWiring Diagrams7a or 7b
i) Manuallyopen, for a few seconds,the
detailthe wiring requiredbetweenthese
Temperatureand PressureRelief Valve
controlsand the motorisedvalve.Wiring to
situated
on the Megaflounit (see Dia
externalcontrolsis made via the terminal
gram
2).
Checkwater dischargedruns
block fitted. The cable shouldbe routed
freely away throughthe tundish and
throughthe aperturein the terminal coverand
discharge
pipework.Closevalve, ensure
securedusingthe cable grip provided.The
water
flow
stops and valve reseats
IndirectThermalCut-outMUST NOTbe
correctly.
bypassed.
ii) Repeatfor the ExpansionValvesituated
5.4 HEATINGSYSTEMCONTROLS
on the Cold WaterCombinationValve
The controlsprovidedwith the Megaflowill
(see Diagram3).
ensurethe safe operationof the Megaflo
6.3 DIRECTUNITS
within a centralheatingsystem. Other
Switch on the electricalsupplyto the immercontrolswill be necessaryto controlthe
sion heater(s)and allow the unit to heat up.
space heatingrequirementsand times that
Checkthat the thermostatoperatescorrectly.
the system is requiredto function,for
Checkthat no water is dischargedfrom either
examplesee Diagrams8 and 9. The Megaflo
the ExpansionValveor Temperatureand
is compatiblewith most heatingcontrols,
PressureReliefValve duringthe heating
examplesof circuits are givenin Diagrams7a
cycle.
and 7b. However,other systems may be
suitable,refer to the controls manufactur6.4 INDIRECTUNITS
ers instructions,supplied with the controls
Fill the indirect (primary)circuit followingthe
selected, for alternative system wiring
boiler manufacturerscommissioninginstrucschemes.
tions. To ensurethe primary heatingcoil in
5.5 IMMERSIONHEATER(S)
the Megaflois filled the 2-Port motorised
valve (supplied)should be manuallyopened
The Megafloindirectunits are suppliedwith
by movingthelever on the motor housingto
eitherone or hrvoimmersion heaters,these
the FLUSHINGONLYsetting.Whenthe
can be used as an alternativeheat source
primary circuit is full returntheleverto the
shouldthe boilersupply needto be isolated
NORMALUSE position.Switch on the boiler,
from the Megaflounit.
ensurethe programmeris set to Domestic
The Megafloimmersionheater(s)should be
Hot Water.Allow the Megaflounit to heat up
connectedand wired in accordancewith
and check that the indirectthermostatand 2Section4.0 above.
Port motorisedvalve operatecorrectly.Check
that no water is dischargedfrom eitherthe
ExpansionValveor Temperatureand Pressure
ReliefValve duringthe heatingcycle.
Diagram 7a: 2 x 2 port valve system

CONTROL TERMINAL NUWBERING tlAY DIFFER
FROH THOSE SHOWN. REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLIED WITH CONTROLS SELECTED.
N.B. SOHE VALVES HAY HAVE
A GREEN I YELLOW EARTH !4RE
I ii,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
N.B. FOR CLARITY THE EARTHS

HAVE BEEN OMITTEDFROM THS
DRAWING.ALL EARTH TEFmNAllONS
MUST BE LIMED 8ACK TO THE
,,AHS EARTH SVPPLY IA TERMIIAL
3 OF THE WRING CENTRE.
N.B. A DOUBLE POLE ISOLATP(G

SWITCHMUST BE WSTA~LED IN
THE MARa SUPPLY
Diagram 7b: Megaflo 2 port valve in conjuncton with a 3 port

mid-position valve
mxARo,w~
I
CONTROL TERMINAL NUttSERlNG flAY DIFFER
FROM THOSE SHOWN. REFER TO INSTRUCTIONS
SUPPLIED WITH CONTROLS SELECTED.
PRoewroI
L
%
MRECTCONTROLS
!SWFLEORTTED
TO HEa#Lo,
111
4.8. SOME VALVES MAY HAVE

4 GREEN I YELLOW EARTH WRE
f
w
Nmoua
WolacT
QQQQQ
N.B. FOR CLARITYTE EARTHS

HAVE BEEN OMITTEDFROn TWS
C,RAW,NG.ALL EARTH TERI?INATIONS
MUST BE LWKEDSACK TO THE
MAINS EARTH SUPPLYIA TERIt4NAL
3 OF THE WlFziNGCENTRE.
N.B. A DOUBLE POLE ISOLATlNG

SW,TCH HUST BE NSTALLED W
THE MAWS SUPPLY
amM sl.T
10
EUTNGIMGI
,PORTtS?POSlTW
VALVE
7.0 User Instructions
7.4 OPERATIONAL
FAULTS
Operationalfaults and their possible causes
are detailedin Section9.3. It is recommendedthat faults shouldbe checkedby a
competent installer.
The air volume within the Megaflo unit will
periodicallyrequirerechargingto ensureany
expandedwater is accommodatedwithin the
unit. A dischargeof water INTERMITTENTLY
from the ExpansionReliefValve will indicate
the air volume has reducedto a point whereit
can no longeraccommodatethe expansion.
To rechargethe air volume :0 Turn off the watersupply to the Megaflo
unit.
ii) Opennearesthot tap below the outlet
level of the Megaflo.
iii) Hold open the Temperature/Pressure
ReliefValve until water ceasesto run
from the tap and gurglingnoise at the
valve stops.
iv) Close Temperature/Pressure
Relief Valve.
v) Turn on water supplyto the Megaflounit,
when water flows from the hot tap, close
tap.
vi) The air volume will be automatically
rechargedas the unit refills.
If after following the aboveactions waterstill
dischargesfrom the ExpansionReliefValve
furtheradviceshouldbe soughtfrom a
competentinstaller.
7.1 WARNINGS
IF WATERISSUESFROMTHETEMPERATURE/PRESSURE
RELIEFVALVEONTHE
MEGAFLOUNITSWITCHOFFELECTRICAL
SUPPLYTO THEIMMERSIONHEATER(S)
(DIRECTUNITS)OR SHUT DOWNTHE
BOILER(INDIRECTUNITS). DONOTTURN
OFFTHEWATERSUPPLY.CONTACTA
COMPETENT
INSTALLERFORUNVENTED
WATERHEATERS
TO CHECKTHESYSTEM.
DO NOTTAMPERWITH ANY OFTHESAFETY
VALVESFITTEDTOTHE MEGAFLOSYSTEM,
IF A FAULTIS SUSPECTEDCONTACT
A
COMPETENT
INSTALLER.
7.2 TEMPERATURE
CONTROL
IMMERSIONHEATERS
Thethermostaton the immersion heater(s)
can be set to controlbetween10Cand
70C.This will usuallyhave beendone during
installation.Adjustmentscan only be made
by removingthe immersion heatercover,DO
NOTremovethe cover without first switching
off the electricalsupply.The temperature
adjustmentis made by insertinga flat bladed
screwdriverin the slot in the disc on top of
the thermostatand rotating.
If in any doubtconsult a competentelectrician.
INDIRECTUNITS
Indirectunits arefitted with an Indirect
Thermostatwhich controls a 2 Port motorised
valveand hencethe temperatureof the water
8.1 MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS
in the Megaflounit. The thermostatcan be
set to controlbetween1OoCand 7OoC,this
To ensurethe continuedoptimum perforwill usuallyhavebeendone duringinstallamanceof the Megafloit should be regularly
tion. Adjustmentscan only be made by
maintained.This is of particularimportance
removingthe IndirectThermal Controlhousing
in hardwater areasor wherethe water
cover.DO NOTremovethe coverwithoutfirst
supply contains particulatematter.Mainteswitchingoff the electricalsupply.Temperananceshould be carriedout by a competent
ture adjustmentis made by rotatingthe
personand any replacementparts used
graduatedknob until the selectedtemperature
should be authorisedHeatraeSadia Megaflo
alignswith the indicatormark.
spareparts. It is recommendedthat maintenanceis carried out every12 months and
7.3 FLOWPERFORMANCE
includesthe checks detailedin 8.2 and 8.3
Wheninitially openinghot outletsa small
below.
flow may be noticedas pressuresstabilise.
In hardwater areasconsiderationshouldbe
This is quite normalwith unventedsystems
givento periodicallydescalingthe immersion
and does not indicatea fault.
heaterelements.To do this the Megaflounit
In some areasa cloudinessmay be noticed
will needto be drained,8.4 and 8.5 below
in the hot water.This is due to aerationof the
detailhow to drainthe unit and removethe
water,is quite normaland will quicklyclear.
immersion heater(s).
8.0 Maintenance
Diagram 8: Z-port zone valve system (schematic)
NOTE .- OBSERVE FLOW DRECTIW ARROWS ON ALL VALVES
Diagram 9: S-port mid-position valve system (schematic)

1
PROGFtAtWER
AOON THERMOSTAT
NOT SUPWED )
NOTE .- M1SERVE FLOW OHECllON ARROWS ON ALL VALVES
12
seal grooveare clean and replaceimmersion

8.2 CHECKOPERATION
OF SAFETYVALVES
heater(s).
DO NOT use any othertype of seal
Manuallyoperatethe Temperatureand
or sealanton the threads.
PressureReliefValvefor a few seconds.
Checkwater is dischargedand that it flows
Rewirethe immersion heater(s)in accordancewith Diagram5. Replacecover(s).
freely throughthe tundish and discharge
pipework.Checkvalvereseatscorrectlywhen 8.6 REFILLINGSYSTEM
released.
DONOT switch on the immersionheater(s)
NOTE: The water dischargedmay be very
or boiler until the system has beencomhot.
pletely refilled.
Repeatthe procedurefor the ExpansionRelief
Closethe draintap. With hot tap open,turn
Valve.
on mains water supply.Whenwaterflows
from the hot tap allow to flow for a short
8.3 CLEANTHE STRAINER
whileto purgeair andto flush throughany
The straineris incorporatedwithin the
disturbedparticles. Closehot tap andthen
PressureReducingValvepart of the Cold
open
successivehot taps in system to purge
WaterCombinationValve (seeDiagram3). To
any
air.
The electricalsupply can now be
inspect and cleanturn off the mains water
switched
on.
supplyto the Megaflounit and open the
lowest hottap in the system to relievethe
system pressure.Unscrewthe black cap
from the PressureReducingValveand
remove.The strainerwill be removedwith the
cap, wash any particulatematterfrom the
9.1 IMPORTANTNOTES
strainerunderclean runningwater. Replace
i) Servicingshould only be carriedout by a
the cap assemblyensuringthat the sealing
competentinstalleror by authorised
ring is correctlyfitted. Do not use any other
HeatraeSadia ServiceEngineersor
type of sealant.Closehot tap, open mains
Agents.
stop cock and checkfor leaks.
ii) Any SpareParts used MUSTbe
8.4 DRAININGTHE MEGAFLOUNIT
authorisedHeatraeSadia Megafloparts.
Switch off the electrical supply to the
iii) Disconnectelectricalsupply before
immersion heater(s)and shut down the
removingany electricalequipment
boiler on indirect units. Turn off the mains
covers.
water supplyto the Megaflounit. Attach a
iv) NEVERbypass any thermal cut-outs.
hosepipeto the draincock having sufficient
lengthto take waterto a suitabledischarge
v) Hot water can scald, care shouldbe
point belowthe level of the unit, at leastone
taken when drawingwaterfrom the units.
metre below the unit is recommended.Open 9.2 SPAREPARTS
hot watertap nearestto the Megafloto relive
A rangeof spare parts are availablefor the
the system pressure.Opendrain cock. If
Megaflounits. When orderingspareparts the
waterfails to drainfrom the Megaflovent the
serialnumberon the unit should be quoted.
unit by manuallyopeningthe Temperature/
CODENo.
PART
PressureReliefValve.
95 606 920
ImmersionHeater
8.5 DESCALINGIMMERSIONHEATER(S)
Removethe coverfrom the immersion
ReliefValve
95605810
heater(s)and disconnectwiring from the
Cold WaterCombination
thermostatand EarthPost (see Diagram5).
95605817
Valve (complete)
Removesupply cablefrom the cable grip.
PressureReducingCartridge
Usingeitheran immersionheaterbox or
(for Cold WaterCombination
C spannerunscrewand removethe immer95605824
Valve)
sion heater(s).Carefullyremovethe scale
ExpansionValve Cartridge
from the elementand thermostatpocket
(for ColdWater Combination
surfaces.DO NOTuse a sharp implementas
Valve)
95605825
damageto the elementsurfacecould be
ExpansionValve/CheckValve
caused.Ensureboss threadsand O-ring
Coreunit (complete)
95605828
9.0 Fault Finding and

Servicing
SPAREPARTS(Continued)
CODENo.
PART
Immersion HeaterBlanking
95 605 829
Plug
95 605 811
Tundish
D/DD/DDDunits
CombinedThermostat/
ThermalCut-out
(rectangularblue cap) 95 612209
95 612599
(roundblack cap)
CL units
IndirectThermalCut-out95 612598
95 612597
IndirectThermostat
2-Port MotorisedValve 95 605819
9.3 FAULTFINDINGCHART
Note: Disconnectelectrical supplybeforeremovingany electrical equipmentcovers
FAULT
POSSIBLECAUSE
REMEDY
f!Jo hot water flow
1, Mains supply off

2. Strainer blocked
1. Check and open stop,cock

2. Turn off water supply. Remove
strainer and clean (see section
8.3)
3. Check and refit as required
3. Cold Water Combination

incorrectly fitted
Water from hot taps
is cold
Valve
1. DIRECT immersion heater not

switched on
2. DIRECT immersion heater
thermal cut-out has operated
3. INDIRECT programmer set to
central heating only
4. INDIRECT boiler not working
5. INDIRECT thermal cut-out has

operated
6. INDIRECT motorised valve not
connected properly
Water discharges
Water discharges
from Temp/Pressure
Relief Valve
14
1. INTERMITTENTLY
Expansion volume reduced
within unit
2. CONTINUALLY
(a) Cold Water Combination
Valve Pressure Reducer not
working correctly.
(b) Expansion Valve seat
damaged.
1. Thermal control failure

NOTE Water will be very hot
1. Check and switch on

2. Check. Reset by pushing button.
Check thermostat operation.
(See Diagram 5)
3. Check. Set to a domestic hot
water programme
4. Check boiler operation. If fault
suspected consult boiler
manufacturers instructions
5. Check. Reset by pushing button
on cut-out. Check operation of
cylinder stat.
6. Check wiring and/or plumbing
connections to motorised valve.
(See Diagram 7)
1. Refer to Section 7.4
2. (a) Check pressure from Cold

Water Combination Valve. If
greater than 3.5 bar replace
Pressure Reducing Cartridge.
(b) Remove Expansion Valve
cartridge. Check condition of
seat. If necessary fit new
Expansion Valve Cartridge.
1. Switch off power to immersion
heater(s) and shut down boiler.
DO NOT turn off water supply.
When discharge stops check all
thermal controls, replace if
faulty.
General Dimensions
INDIRECT UNITS (CL)
DIRECT UNITS (0)
ovneT--lt
532
OIA
314 T h P
HEAT!NG ELMENT-
4E
I I
-HEATNG
ATING ELMNT
sp
i?:1
-"4
@z
5222
86
145
145
170
D
CL
D
31
34
36
200
203
230
1191 880
1191 880
1348 1005
505
637
450
-
2.91 0.506 12.5

-
21
-
ELEMENT
OFF PEAK
BOOST
DD MODELS
144 1
I
160
110 mins to heat 104 litres
263 1 92 mins to heat 00 litres

3001 0 [
1 58
300 1
/ CL 1 64
j 358
1 364
12015 1559 13201 12015 1559 13201600[
/
I
I
3.85 10.782) 18.9 1 41
10.0 Guarantee
Diagram10: Wall mountingbracket

Models 70,125 & 145
7
10.1 WARNING
Shouldthe factory fitted Temperatureand
PressureReliefValvebe tamperedwith or
removedyour guaranteewill be invalidated.
Neitherthe Distributoror Manufacturershall
be responsiblefor any consequentialdamage
howsoevercaused.
10.2 GUARANTEETERMS
WALL TO SUT Mm x 75 wr*uN

VL BOLTS INOT SUPPLEDI
HeatraeSadia guaranteethe electricalparts,

thermalcontrolsandvalvesfor a periodof
two yearsfrom the date of purchase,with the
exceptionof damagedue to scaling.
The stainlesssteel vessel is guaranteedfor a
period of five years againstfaulty manufacture or materialsprovidedthat :i) It has beeninstalledby a competent
installerand as per the instructions
containedin this manual.
ii) It has not beenmodifiedin any way other
than by HeatraeSadia HeatingLtd.
iii) It has only beenusedfor the storageof
potablewater.
iv) It has not beeninstalledin a location
liableto be subjectedto frost, nor has it
beentamperedwith or beensubjectedto
misuse or neglect.
v) No factory fitted parts havebeenre
movedfor unauthorisedrepairor replace
ment.
Evidenceof purchaseand date of supply
must be submitted.
This guaranteedoes not affect your statutory
rights.
ENVIRONMENTAL
INFORMATION
This productis madefrom many recyclable
materials,thereforeat the end of its useful
life it shouldbe disposedof at a local authority waste disposalsite to ensurethe environmental benefitsare realised.
HEATRAE SADIA HEATING LTD.

HURRICANE WAY
NORWICH
NR66EA
Telephone: (01603) 420220
Fax: (01603) 420229
36 00 5690 Issue 2
16
3.7.
GRILLE
SCHEDULE
GREENWICH PAVILION
SCHEDULE OF GRILLES
MANUFACTURER
- WATERLOO
LOCATION
Exhibition Area
AIR MANAGEMENT
PLC
TYPE
NOM SIZE
2RV0/825/125/900
PPM 9006
HxW
825 x 125
Waterloo Air Management

Mills Road
Aylesford
Kent
ME20 7NB
Telephone No. 01622 717861
MANUFACTURER
- TROX (UK) LTD
NOM SIZE
LOCATION
Male & Female Toilets
LVS 160
Gl Extract Valves
Trox (UK) Ltd

Caxton Way
Thetford
Norfolk
IP24 3SQ
200mm dia
Telephone No. 01842 754545
BB/0095.JD
SECTION 4
OPERATING PROCEDURES
&I
INTRODUCTION
4.2
PREPARATION
43
OPERATION
44
SHUT DOWN
#il.
INTROINJCTION
It is intended that the operating instructions should (when used in

conjunction with manufacturers instruction for individual units of plant and
equipment) provide for all procedures necessary to bring the installed
systems and services into operation following commissioning, plant
overhaul, or long-term shut down.
42
4.2.1.
General Checks
1.
Ensure that plant areas are clean and free from obstruction.
2.
Ensure that all control and electrical services cubicles and

plant access panels and doors are closed.
3.
Check that all machine guards are correctly fitted and

secured.
4.
Check that electrical motors are clean and that motor

ventilation is unobstructed.
5.
Ensure that mains services are available to the plant and

equipment at which they are required.
4.2.2.
Electrical Services and Controls
1.
Check that individual plant control switches are in the OFF

position.
2.
Check that electrical supply and control circuit fuses are in

place.
3.
Check that electrical motor isolating switches are in the ON

position.
4.
Check plant and system temperature control settings.
5.
Close all control panel isolating switches.
6.
Set time clock controls to enable plant to be started under
manualcontrol.
&pply
4.2.3,
& Extract Ventilation Systems,
1.
Check that all inlet and outlet louvres and grilles are free from
obstruction.
2.
Check that supply plant filters are clean and serviceable.
3.
Check that all system balance dampers are in their correct

system balanced positions.
4.
Manually rotate fans, where possible, to check that they are

running freely.
TION
43
.
Heatmg Systems, (where applicable).
4.3.1.
1.
Switch all main electrical plant isolators to the ON position.
2.
Turn Gas supplies on. (where applicable).
3.
Select room temperature to activate heating.
4.
Switch heating to auto on the main controller.
et Exlnd
1.
Switch all main electrical plant isolators to the ON position.
2.
Switch to AUTO on main control panel in the plant room.
CIRCULATING
4.3.3.
PUMPS.
1.
Switch all main electrical plant isolators to the ON position on main

control panel within the plant room.
2.
Switch to AUTO on main control panel within the plant room.
4.4.
SHUT DOWN.
4.4.1.
INTRODUCTION.
The following instructions are for shutting down the plant for inspection and
overhauling. During normal operation, the plant will shut down under the indicate
of the control system time switches &/or sensors.
PLANT SHUT DOWN.
4.4.2.
1.
Switch all plant to the OFF position on main control panel within the
plant room.
2.
Open main electrical supply isolator and remove all allocated fuses.
3.
Where applicable isolate gas supplies.
4.4.3.
PLANT START UP.

1.
Open all valves.
2.
Open main electrical supply isolator and replace all allocated fuses.
3.
Switch plant to ON/AUTO position on main control panel within

plant room.
The above instructions generally relate to each individual system.
SJWTION 5
NCE PROCEDURES
5v-l
INTRODUCTION
52
GENERAL MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
53
DAILY ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
54
WEEKLY ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
5.5
THREE MONTHLY ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
ui
SIX MONTHLY ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
The maintenance instructions comprises, generally recommendations

relating to the schedules of maintenance tasks, designed to ensure that the
various maintenance procedures required for each of the individual
services and systems are carried out at the correct intervals in order to
maintain all plant at the best level of efficiency and to prevent, in so far as
possible, any breakdown which would result in interruptions to services.
The maintenance instructions within section 5.2 make certain
recommendations with regard to the general maintenance procedures to be
adopted in respect of non-specialised plant, the maintenance of specialised
plant being in the separate instructions manuals provided by the equipment
suppliers. The necessity for including routine maintenance of individual
unit of plant and equipment within an overall maintenance schedule is
brought to the readers attention by reference to the separate instruction
manuals under the various maintenance period headings.
All required manufacturers literature is supplied with this manual. A list of
all relevant publications is provided in Section 3.
5.2
1, MmTFmNCE
PROCEDUREf$
On all types of bearings, temperatures should be checked regularly to

ensure that any tendency towards overheating is observed and remedial
action is taken in order to prevent damage to the motor. Manufacturers
instructions relating to temperature should be carefully noted.
Where the mantiacturer does however, recommend the addition of
lubricant after a given period in operation, care should be taken to follow
the manufacturers instructions.
Motor casings to be kept
to ensure that ventilation
motors having ventilated
means of a portable fan
lines).
3
clean and motor installations regularly inspected

is unobstructed. Any build-up of dust within
enclosures should be removed occasionally by
powered blower. (Do not use compressed air
Motor windings should be regularly tested for insulation resistance.
5.2.2.
Motor
Startersshould be inspectedat regular intervals to ensurethat contactors

are making and breaking correctly and that there is no evidenceof pitting
or build-up on the contacts which would seriously affect the followthroughmovement. Contactsother that thosewith plated surfacesmay be
dressedsmooth.
Where contactsor contactfacings are noticeablyreducedin thickness,the
contactsshouldbe removed.
During routine daily or weekly plan inspections,careful attention should
be given to noting any electrical dischargenoise which could be indicative
of looseor poorly mating components.
Vee- Wrlves
Vee-belt drives shouldbe regularly inspectedto ensurethat belt tensions

are correct andthat no sign of misalignmentor belt fraying are apparent.
where it is necessaryto renew a belt on a multidrive, all belts on a
multidrive, all belts on the drive shouldbe renewedwith belts suppliedas
a matchedset andmanufacturersinstructionsregardingadjustmentfor the
purposeof taking up initial stretch,shouldbe carefully observed.
A suitablestock of vee-beltsshouldbe held availableparticularly with
regardto matchedsetsas thesearenot alwaysimmediatelyavailablefrom
a supplier.
NOTE:
BELTS SHOULD BE STORED HUNG LOOSELY

IN COILS AND AWAY FROM DIRECT
SUNLIGHT AND HOT SURFACES.
Protectiveguards,fitted over the drive or rotating machinery,must be

subjectto regularinspectionto ensurethat they are correctly positioned,
firmly mountedand securedand not in dangerof fouling pulleys,
couplings,or any moving parts.
UUTINIEMAINTENANCE
5.2
5.3.1.
5.3.3.
e Systems, (where applicable)
1.
Visually checkoperationof plant.
1.
Visually checkoperationof units.

Controls
The control panel should be kept clean and indicating and alarm lamps
testeddaily. Control switchesshouldbe regularly checkedfor damageor
malfunction.
Defective switchesand lampsshouldbe renewedat the time of inspections
or as soon as possiblefollowing inspection.
$.4&
J-Ieati&Q&ms
(where applicable).
1.
2.
Repeat daily check.

Check radiators operate correctly, bleed if necessary.
1.
Repeat daily maintenance.
54.3,
controls
1.
Repeat daily maintenance.
THREEE
5s
(where applicable).
5.5.r.
1.
Repeat weekly checks.
2.
Check gas supply
3.
Check electrical operation.
4.
Lubricate fan motors and fan bearings.
5.
Lubricate pumps.
6.
Check pump motors.
7.
Inspect valves, flanges and fittings and repair as necessary.
Vent&&cm
1.
Repeatweekly maintenance.
2.
Adjust fan belts andreplaceif necessary.
3.
Lubricatefan motors and bearings.
4.
Check electrical operation.
5.5.3,
controls
1.
Repeatweekly checks.
2.
Serviceall temperatureand all automaticcontrol equipment

in accordancewith manufacturersinstructions.
ONTHLY
s6
s
5.6.1,
ROUTI-ANCE
(where applicable).
1.
Repeatthreemonthly routine maintenance.
2.
CleanBoiler burners.
3.
Samplewater, changeif necessary.
4.
Cleancasingandrub down corrodedregionsand touch up

wherenecessary.
1.
Repeatthreemonthly maintenanceroutine.
2.
Check condition of casingandtouch up where necessary.
3.
Clean extract grilles.
Controls
5.6.3.
1.
Repeatthree monthly maintenance.
ANY FAILURE OF PLANT OPERATION OR EQUIPMENT

WHICH CANNOT BE RECTIFIED BY FOLLOWING THE
MANUFACTURERS INSTRUCTIONS CONTAINED UNDER
SECTION 3 OF THIS MANUAL
CONTACT:ATALAN MECHANICAL SERVICES
RINGWAY HOUSE EAST
KELVIN ROAD
NEWBURY
BERKSHIRE
RG14 2DB
TEL: (01635~582323.
AFTER 12 MONTHS CONTACT YOUR APPOINTED SERVICE

CONTRACTOR.
6.1.
EMERGENCY
TELEPHONE
NUMBERS.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY:-
CALL 999 AND ASK FOR POLICE, FIRE SERVICE, AMBULANCE

OR COASTGUARD.
MAIN SERVICES:
LONDON ELECTRICITY
THAMES WATER:
BOARD:
0181-298-9898
0645-200-800
SECTION 7.
AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS.
C/3203 - l/3.
Main Exhibition Area Supply Air Ductwork Arrangement.
C/3203 - 213.
Plantroom & Core Area Ductwork Arrangement.
4240 10499/3-3
Plantroom & Core Area Pipework Arrangement.
C/3203 -.SCH.
System Schematic & Details.
SECTION 8.
TEST CERTIFICATES.
HUGHES ENVIRONMENTAL
WATER TREATMENT
SERVICES LTD
SPECIALISTS
PRE-COMMISSION
CHEMICAL
CERTIFICATE
CLEAN
SITE ADDRESS
MILLENNIUM
DOME
PAVILLION
DRAW DOCK ROAD
GREENWICH
SYSTEMS CLEANED
CHILLED
SYSTEM. (GREY / RE-CLAIMED
FEEDING
AHU)
THE ABOVE SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN FLUSHED AND SUBSEQUENTLY PRE-COMMISSION

CHEMICAL
CLEANED TO THE BSRIA CODE OF REQUIREMENTS
8/91. FINALLY, ALL
SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN FLUSHED BEFORE BEING REFILLED.
SIGNED
DATED g-17/12/99 ... .................---......._...____.

P.P. fII.GIIES
EN\IRONMEST.~L
SERl-ICES
LTD.
WATER TREATMENT
STERILISATION
SERVICES
LTD
SPECIALISTS
CERTIFICATE
SITE ADDRESS
MILLENNIUM
DOME
PAVILLION
DRAW DOCK ROAD
GREENWICH
SYSTEMS STERILISED
MAINS PIPE WORK FEEDING THREE WCS & THREE KITCHENETTES
& ALL ASSOCIATED HOT & COLD SERVICES
THE ABOVE SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN FLUSHED AND SUBSEQUENTLY STERILISED

TO THE HEALTH AND SAFETY EXECUTIVE RECOMMENDATIONS
BS6700.
FINALLY, ALL SYSTEMS HAVE BEEN F-LUSHED BEFORE BEING REFILLED.
.
SIGNED
DATED 17/12/99.........-_-...........__-..-...-.
__...___.
P.P. HIICHES
EX-lROSMENT.iI,
SERVICES
LTD.
WATER TREATMENT
SERVICES
LTD
SPECIALISTS
JOB SHEET / ENGINEERS REPORT

Date: 8/l 2 - 17/l 2199
File: Atalan Mechanical
Contract: N/A
Contact:
Plant: Chilled / Domestic
Treatment:
Pre Commission Chem Clean

BS6700 & Samples
g7-J
Millennium Dome
Pavillion
Draw Dock Road
Greenwich
ENGINEER: J Pollard & K. Pollard
JOB NO: 01705
REPORT
,
i WATER
I
1.
/
TESTS
iiS
P.H
T.D.S
8.5
320
APPE.AR;LVCE
H.kRDh4ZSS
Clear
SOLUBLE
ORIGIN.AL
COPPER
SETTING
Omg/L
SOLIDS
SOLUBLE
IRON
None
Omg/L
! CcX)OLING
-J
j HOT
CLOSED
t CHILLED
/ SOFTEAXR
/ POI.mLE
8.7
CLOSED
310
ClGX
None
Omg/L
Omgld
[X-I-LET
S-t-STELI
POND TE\lP.
!
; SPEC1.U.
I~STRICTIONS
+
/
1. On arrival located chilled system to be pre commission chemical cleaned.

2.
Fresh water flushed chilled system to remove all general contaminants. (Witnessed).
3.
Set up 110~ chemical cleaning unit & entered Bekleen flushing aid until Iron levels reached a plateau.(witnessed).
4.
Let-l circulating until satisfactory results were obtained.
5.
yesh water flushed until satisfactory results were obtained.(Witnessed)
6. dack flushed AHUs & cleaned strainers.

7. This system was not dosed on completion as it is a re-claimed system.
8. Located domestic system for sterilisation feeding three sets of WCs & three kitchen areas.
9.
Injected SOmg/L Chlorine Dioxide solution via dot & pulled through to associated services ( 3 Toilets & 3 Kitchenettes).
10. Checked reading = SOmg/L. (witnessed).

11. Left system standing to the BS6700 1997 Section 3 standard.
12. Neutralised & freshwater flushed until satisfactory results were obtained.
13. Took two samples on completion for bacteriological analysis.
14. Left site as found.
-7
PI-RCll.\SE
ORDER
JOH CO~III.I:TIoN
SO:
SIGS.AT~
Mike Sherar
XE
S.R Cootsworth
-8 ~~II.lON
G.\RDENS
HlRST
CO\IP.\N>REGISTRATIOS
R0.U)
KSFST SIOI,F.SF.~
SIRRE\Ie
SO 3369623
KT8 9QP TEL
020 8979 7352 F.\S
07.0 8979 9400
SECTION 9.
COMMISSIONING
DATA.
Commissioning carried out by:

HEAT & VENT BALANCING
28 HILLWOOD AVENUE
SHIRLEY
SOLIHULL
B90 4XR
SERVICES
Contract:
The Greenwich Pavilion

Millennium Dome Site
Drawdock Road
Blackwall
London SE 10
Systems:
Pavilion Ventilation Systems
Hood correction factor.

Hoods have been used for the air distribution of ventilation systems where the vane
sensor head is positioned at the centre of the hood outlet. Recorded velocity is
measured by the rotating vane anemometer.
Hoods were suitable for accurate balancing of air flows, however to obtain
calculated air volumes for grilles and diffusers, the hood correction factor has been
used.
Method used to calculate hood correction factor.

1.
Record total air flow from relevant terminals by means of the hood.
2.
Record total air volume of relevant duct by means of pitot duct traverse.
3.
Divide pitot duct traverse volume by total hood measured volume of relevant
terminals.
COMPLETION
CON-l-TUCT
CERTIFICATE
~ch?M.
OF AIR DISTRIBUTION
. .
. .
......__......._........................
.._..._.
-...
TEST SHEETS
..... ..!. .. .r. 13.....................................................................................................
...........
I
ENGINEER: AL\
CHA&4z
\Ati
Air Handling Unit & Fan Test Record

Contract
Millennium
Sytem
Pavillion
Dome.
Date
supply
R.f=! M.
1630
Motor Speed
R.p M. I
1410
3MM/s
9.665
Air Volume
10 .oo
Total Pressure
400
Motor Full Load Current
20 .2
external
AIR
Pa I
A 1
285
Motor Manufacture
TURK
External.
260
Pa
Motor Power
6.90
Static Discharge
External
25
Pa
Motor Voltage
415
Pressure Drop
Acroos Filter
175
Pa I Frame Size
Centrifugal
Fan Serial No.
MC 300s
Fan Pully
3SPB
Fan Shaft
28
SPB
No. Belts
Shaft Centre
844
% of Design
97
Comments:
125
mm Bush,
Belt Type
DlDW
2012
313190
Motor Pully
3SPB
Motor Shaft
mm
Overload
Setting
Overload
Range
2120
180
Motor Serial No.
mm
48
R.P. M. I
external
Pa I
A I
22,50
Static Suction
FanType&Size
.2000
ACTUAL
Fan Speed
EURO
24 .I
system.
DESIGN
~ fan Manufacture
1 of
Sheet No.
ELEKTRIK
Kw
V
M4E3
mm Bush
sx
mm
150
2517
mm
Overload Type
mm
Start Current
Fuse Rating
RECORD OF PITOT DUCT TRAVERSE
contract Millennium
Dome.
Pavillion
System
supply
Sheet
system.
TH1
Date
DESIGN
Duct Size
30.
1 of 3
23.12.1999
RECORDED
900 dia
mm
Measured Volume
4.845
i-lb
0.6359
?
m
Average Velocity
7.62
m/s
Design Volume
5.00
ii/s
S t2tic Pressure
35
P3
Average Velocity
7.86
m/S
% Design
97
Duct Arca
DUCT TRAVERSE
READING
7.00
6.90
7.40
8.90
7.60
8.90
7.60
8.90
7.50
8.30
7.60
7.00
7.70
7.00
7.70
7.00
7.70
7.30
7.10
7.30
152.4
7409
77.5
20
COMMENTS:
Total
Total
Total
volume
volume
volume
of this
of this
of this
plant
plant
plant
= THl + TH2
= 4.845 + 4.820
= 9.665'm/s
~7.62
m/s
RECORD
OF PITOT
DUCT
Contrnct
Millennium
System
Pavillion
TRAVERSE
Dome.
Sheet No.
supply
sys tern ., TH2
Date
DESIGN
Duct Size
900
Duct .kx
Design Volume
I
I
I Average
Velocity
COiLIMENTS:
23 .I2
.I999
mm
Messured Volume
0.6359
:
m
Average Velocity
5 .oo
Al/sI Static Pressure
28
7.86
mfs
96
j 5.80
RECORDED
dia
DUCT
/
2 of
mis
7.58
% Design
TRAVERSE
READING
7.10
7.20
8 .lO
8.X
8.20
8.50
8.20
8.70
8.20
7.50
7.90
7.50
7.30
7.30
7.20
7.40
6.80
7.40
6.80
151.6
75.8
75.8
20
= 7.58
m/s
ms
SYSTEM SCHEMATIC SHEET

Contract
Millennium
Dome.
Sheet No. 3 Of 3
System
Pavillion
supply
Date 23 .12.1999
system.
TH2
TH.1
RECORD OF PITOT DUCT TRAVERSE

Millennium
Contract
Syste:ll
Dome.
Pavillion
toilet
extract
Sheet No.
system
serving
DESIGN
Duct Size
Duct Area
150
.
E1.Date
21.2.2000
RECORDED
mm
dia
0 .0177
Measured Volume
0.039
2.24
I Average Velocity
Design Volume
AlsI Static Pressure
60
Average Velocity
m/s
111
% Design
DUCT TRAVERSE
COi\ll$lENTS:
Total
volume
Total
volume
kotal
volume
1 of
m/s I
READING
2.20
2.20
2.20
2.20
2.20
2.30
2.40
2.30
2 l 30
2.20
2.20
2.20
26ag
13.5
13.4
12
:: 2.24
m/s
Same
hood
correction
factor
has been
used
to balance
of
this
plant
= Duct
traverse
+ E2+E3+E4+E5+EGtE7
of
this
plant
= 0.039+0.039+0.039+0.037+0.037+0.039+0.037
of
this
plant
= 0.267
m/s
E2-E7
I
I
RECORD OF TESTS ON GRILLES

Contract
Millennium
System
Pavillion
Reference
/ DIFFUSERS
Dome.
toilet
Size
mm
Sheet No.
extract
Free
Area
system.
Correction
Factor
Date
2 of
21.2.2000
Recorded
Velocity
Calculated
Volume
Design
Volume
%
Design
El
iood
used
0.037
0.8108
1.30
0.039
0.035
111
E2
I,
0.037
0.8108
1.30
0.039
0.035
111
E3
0.037
0.8108
1.30
0.039
0.035
111
E4
rt
0.037
0.8108
1.25
0.037
0.035
106
E5
I.
0.037
0.0108
1.25
0.037
0.035
106
E6
n9
0.037
0.8108
1.30
0.039
0.035
111
E7
w.
0.037
0.8108
1.25
0.037
0.035
106
SYSTEM SCHEMATIC SHEET

Contract
Millennium
Dome.
SheetNo.
1
System
Pavillion
toilet
extract
system.
Date
FAN
El
-
E5
E6
E7
E4
I-
E3
I--
E2
I--
3 of
21.2.2000
SECTION 10.
EQUIPMENT
SCHEDULES.
SECTION 10.
EQUIPMENT
1 Descrintion
Main Area Air Handling Unit
Function Room/Offke Extract Fan
WC Areas Extract Fan
Kitchen Area Extract Fan
Cooling Water Circulating Pumps
1 Electric Water Heater
SCHEDULES.
I Location
1 Above Function Room
/ High level in Plantroom
High level in Plantroom
High level in Plantroom
Low level in Plantroom
1 Floor standing in Plantroom
1 Manufacturer
1 Euro Air Systems
1 Woods of Colchester
Fans Direct Ltd
Woods of Colchester
Pullen Pumps Ltd
I Heatrae Sadia Ltd
1 Model No.
1 MC 300-S
1 63 JM (L Tvne)
QTE CA3-3C
40 JM (L Type)
SKK 1081/2
1 2000/45
For technical details of the above, please refer to section 3 of this manual.
NEW MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH PAVILION
SUPPLY AIR HANDLING
UNIT
Manufacturer
Euro Air Systems Ltd

Unit 17
Elliott Road
Selly Oaks
Birmingham B29 6LS
Telephone No.: 0121 414 1844
Unit Ref.
TOILET
MC300S
EXTRACT
UNIT
Nu-Aire Ltd
Western Industrial Estate
Caerphilly
Mid Glamorgan CF83 1XH
Manufacturer
Telephone No.: 0 1222 8859 11

Unit Ref.
KITCHEN
QTEC 4C
EXTRACT
FAN
Woods Air Movement Ltd
Tufhell Way
Colchester
Essex CO4 5AR
Manufacturer
Telephone No.: 0 1206 544 122

Unit Ref.
FUNCTION
Manufacturer
40JM Bifurcated 20/2/6/16

ROOM EXTRACT
FAN
Woods Air Movement Ltd
Tufnell Way
Colchester
Essex CO4 5AR
Telephone No.: 0 1206 544 122
Unit Ref.
63JM 18-30
WATER HEATER
Manufacturer
Heatrae Sadia Heating Ltd

Hurricane Way
Norwich
NR6 6BA
Telephone No.: 01603 424144
Unit Ref.
2000/45/27
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH
HEALTH
& SAFETY FILE

SECTION 3
FILE REFERENCE
- EP - 3 - 51
GREENWICH
PAVILLION
(INCLUDING FIT-OUT)
The Greenwich Pavilion

at the Millennium Dome
Operation and Maintenance Manual

for Electrical Services
Architect:
Richard Rogers Partnership
Engineering
Consultant:
Electrical
Contractors:
Buro Happold
Robert Ebdon Limited

Unit 154 Cannon Workshops
5 Cannon Drive
London
El4 4AS
Telephone:
Fax:
Web:
Project completion:
End of defects period:
020 7515 5154

02075155710
www.rel-electical.com
December 1999
December 2000
February 2000
Index
Section
Detail
1 .o.
Building User guide
2.0.
Building Manager guide
3.0.
Building Maintenance guide
4.0.
Testing and Maintenance
5.0.
Equipment Schedule
6.0.
Manufacturer details
7.0.
Schedule of Spares
8.0.
Commissioning
9.0.
Manufacturers Literature
10.0.
Drawings & Distribution board charts
11.o.
Residual Risks
Data
Page 2
1 .o.
Building
User guide
Lighting
Generally operation of the Lighting is controlled by local switches
Exceptions are the Exhibition area, and Public toilets which are controlled by switches
(dimmers for Exhibition area uplighters) located in the managers office.
The Audio-Visual room has local dimmer switches.
In the event of a lamp failure, please refer it to the Manager. Do not attempt to
replace the faulty item.
Socket Outlets
Floor outlets boxes are located in the Exhibition area, and Audio/Visual room, these
contain socket outlets.
Safety Note: It is imperative that flexible cords are routed through the flap in the
floor box lid, this will prevent damaging the cable.
Additionally various wall mounted socket outlets are provided.
Hand-dryers
These units are provided in the Public toilets, operation is started by placing hands
under the unit; the unit will continue to run for a short period after hands are removed.
Fire Alarm
Please refer to the Protec Fire Protecion manual.
Page 3
2.0.
Building
Managers
guide
Lighting
The Exhibition area is illuminated by uplighters, which reflect from the main roof, these
luminaires have a Master switch control, located outside the changing room/staff toilet
area, for use on final exit of the building. The level of illumination is controlled by
dimmers switches in the managers office.
The Public toilet lighting is controlled by switches in the managers office.
The Audio-Visual room has local dimmer switches.
Other areas have local switches.
Safety Note: When a Lamp fails, do not attempt to replace the lamp. You must
contact a suitably qualified operative, who will ensure the electrical supply is isolated
before the lamp is replaced.
Emergency Lighting
In the Exhibition area self-contained beam light units are provided, these units are
supplemented by fluorescent units located on the roof of the core area.
All other areas have combined general and emergency luminaires (these units can
be identified by the presence of a red indicator light on the body).
Emergency lighting test key switches are located, within plant room. These switches
interrupt the electrical supply so that the lamp is illuminated from the battery, proving
the operation of the unit.
The emergency light, should be tested as follows:
Monthly
Check charge light is On.

Interrupt supply for a short period, to check that lamp works.
6 Monthly

Interrupt supply for 1 Hour. Lamp should still be operational.
Annually

Interrupt supply for 3 Hours, Lamp should still be operational.
The person carrying out the test; must ensure that the test switches are returned to
Normal at the end of the test period.
Safety Note: A qualified operative should be contacted to rectify Any faults
immediately.
The monthly, and 3 monthly test can normally be carried out in house; however we
recommend that a specialist contractor be employed to carry out the Annual test, and
rectify any failures that are apparent.
Page 4
Socket Outlets
Floor outlets boxes are located in the Exhibition area, and Audio/Visual room (see
drawing 1096/200 for locations), these each contain a twin socket outlet, with a
maximum loading of 13 Amperes.
Safety Note: It is imperafive that flexible cords are roufed through the flap in fhe
floor box lid, this will prevenf damaging the cable.
Additionally various wall mounted socket outlets are provided (see drawing 1096/200
for locations).
Hand-dryers
These units are provided in the Public toilets, operation is started by placing hands
under the unit; the unit will continue to run for a short period after hands are removed.
Main Electrical Supplies (Distribution)
Distribution equipment is located in the plant room. This equipment provides automatic
Circuit breaker disconnection of separate electrical supplies in the event of a fault.
Safety Note: In the evenf of a Circuit breaker operating, do Nof affempf to re-set the
device. You must contact a suitably qualified operative, who will investigate fhe
reason the faulf, and correct any problem, before re-setting the device.
Fire Alarm
Please refer to the Protec Fire Protecion Standard Site manual.
Page 5
3.0.
Building Maintenance
guide
Main and Sub Distribution

The electrical intake into the building is supplied from London Electricity; this consists
of two 400amp cut-outs. One of these supplies the MCCP panel and the other
supplies the general lighting and power.
The general lighting and power supply is then taken away to a local MCCB panel
and from there, MCCBs supply the main MCB distribution and kitchen distribution
boards.
Lighting
Radial circuits are installed from distribution boards using LSF insulated 6491B,
single cables run in steel trunking/conduits. A separate protective conductor is
installed for each circuit.
All luminaires are connected using plug-in ceiling roses. Flush mounted Plastic plate
grid type and surface mounted Metalclad plates lighting switches are used generally.
The uplighters to the main area are controlled via a remote dimmer panel which is
located within the main plant room.
The lighting to the Audio-Visual room is controlled via locally mounted rotary dimmers.
Power
Radial and ring circuits are installed from distribution boards using LSF insulated
6491 B; single cables run in steel trunking/conduits. A separate protective conductor
will be installed for each circuit.
Various supplies are run in XLPE/SWNLSF
cables.
Surface Metalclad accessories, and Rotary isolators are used generally, with the
exception of the Audio-Visual room where satin nickel finish plates have been installed
Earthing & Bonding
Main earth bonding was installed to the incoming water supplies and to the building
structure; equipotential bonding was carried out to all sinks and toilets etc.
The main building structure was also supplied with a lightning protection system, which
consists of 6 earth rods located around the perimeter of the building and taped to the
metal framework.
Page 6
4.0.
Testing and Maintenance
4.1.
The electrical installation should be tested every 5 Years, however routine

maintenance should include: regular checks on the tightness of all connections;
particularly within distribution boards.
4.2.
All portable equipment should be regularly tested. The period between test, is
dependant on the usage of the equipment but, should not exceed 1 Year.
4.3.
Each emergency light, should be tested as follows:

Monthly

interrupt supply for a short period, to check that lamp works.
6 Monthly

Interrupt supply for 1 Hour. Lamp should still be operational.
Annually

Interrupt supply for 3 Hours, Lamp should still be operational.
Any faults, must be immediately rectified.

The monthly, and 3 monthly test can normally be carried out in house; however we
recommend that a specialist contractor be employed to carry out the Annual test, and
rectify any failures which are apparent,
The emergency lighting test key switches are located, within the local switch plate.
The person carrying out the test, must ensure that the test switches are returned to
Normal at the end of the test period.
Page 7
earthing
OPERATION
MAINTENANCE
systems
& MAINTENANCE
AND UP KEEP OF A LIGHTNING
PROTECTION
SYSTEM
A lightning protection system is designed to divert to itself a lightning discharge which

might otherwise strike a part of the structure to be protected and to convey the current
safely to earth.
BS6651: 1999: Code of Practice for the Protection of Structures Against Lightning,
indicates what maintenance is required to keep the system in satisfactory order.
Failure to carry our these requirements may result in vital components of the system, which
may have suffered from corrosion, not being checked. This would have a detrimental
effect of the whole lightning conductor system which would prevent it functioning in its
designed manner
BS665 1: 1999 states that all lightning protection systems should be visually inspected by a
trained and competent person at periods not exceeding 12 months.
In addition, as a part of this inspection process, then the following measurements and
checks should be taken and the results logged :
a.
The resistance to earth of the earth termination network and of each earth
electrode.
b.
The recorded results of all conductors, bonds and joints mechanical integrity
The recommended method of testing is given in B7430: Earthing. If the resistance to earth
reading of the system exceeds 10 ohms or has significantly increased over the previous
reading then remedial action to the system may be necessary.
Attention should also be given to any bonding of recently added services, or alterations to
the structure itself This is to ensure the system is still in compliance with BS665 1.
OMEGA EARTHING
Omega
Telephone
020
Earthing
8771
7325
Systems
Facslmlle
Omega
Altitude
020
Earthing
8771
Systems
Works
Prince
1336
VA.T.
is a
SYSTEMS
Road
No
496
South
Norwood
4033
Tradtng DIVISIONof Omega
Red
28
Group
London
Registered
Ltd
SE25 6NW
In England
No 2197902
5.0.
Equipment
Luminaires
Schedule
(by drawing references):
Bl & BIE
Thorn
PP136 & E3 PP136
B2 & B2E
Thorn
PP236 & E3 PP236
Cl & C2E
Reggiani
650510
C2 & C2E
Reggiani
6515-10
Reggiani
TE3789-10
Emergency pack for D
Menvier
CP/50T
EB
JSB
Gemilux GMSE
SIL
454.6.030.13
Newey & Eyre
NL228
Public Areas
Forbes & Lomax
Satin Stainless Steel
Staff Areas
MK
Logic Plus
Plant & Bin rooms
MK
Metalclad
Marshall Tufflex
8454613 (frame & lid)
Accessories:
Floor boxes
8452260 (back box)

8452521 (socket plate)
8452520 (blank plate)
Dimmer units
Mode Lighting
DP1004 + RDSI R/Grid/MK K
MCCB Panelboard
MEM
34MF
MCB distribution board
MEM
BM162 + BMS2003
Fire Alarm system
Protec Fire Detection
Lightning Protection
Omega Furse
Page 8
6.0
Manufacturer
Details
Forbes & Lomax Ltd

JSB Electrical
MEM Limited
(Caradon) MK Electric Ltd
Marshall Tufflex Ltd
Menvier Electronic Ltd
Mode lighting UK
Newey & Eyre Distributors
Omega Earthing systems
Reggiani Ltd
SIL Lighting UK
Thorn Lighting Ltd
205b Saint Johns Hill

London, SW1 1 ITH
telephone:
Manor Lane, Holmes Chapel,

Cheshire, CW4 8AF
telephone:
Reddington Lane,
Birmingham, Bll 3EZ
telephone:
The Arnold Centre, Paycocke Road,

Basildon, Essex, SS14 3EA
telephone:
55-65 Castelham Road, St. Leonard on Sea

East Sussex, TN38 9NU
telephone:
Southam Road, Banbury,

Oxen, OX16 7RX
telephone:
The Maltings, 63 High Street,

Ware, Hertfordshire, SG12 9AD
telephone:
Yardley Court, 11-12 Frederick Road,

Edgbaston, Birmingham, B15 1JD
telephone:
Prince Road, South Nor-wood

London, SE25 6NW
telephone:
Protec House, Churchill Way,

Nelson, Lancashire, BB9 6RT
telephone:
12 Chester Road, Borehamwood,

Herts, WD6 1LT
telephone:
3 Thame Park Business Centre, Wenham

Road, Thame, Oxfordshire, OX9 3XA
telephone:
3 King George Close, Eastern Avenue West,

Romford, Essex, RM7 7PP
telephone:
Page 9
02077380202
01477537773
01216852100
01268563000
01424427691
01295256363
01920 462121
01214559727
020 8771 7325
01282 717171
02089530855
01844260006
01708766033
_ --
7.0.
Schedule of Spares
Lamps
for Luminaire
Cl,ClE&C2
TC-DE-18 watt fluorescent
Bl, Bl E, B2 & B2E
36 watt T8 fluorescent
D&DE
50 watt 12v M56 diacroic Tungsten Halogen
300 watt KQ Tungsten Halogen
28 watt 20 fluorescent
General
MCBs
MBHpaa
(where p = number of poles &

aa = amperage)
Page 10
Lynx-DE
Compact
fluorescent
incandescent
lamps
lamp, whrch can replace

when an adaptor
IS used
Applications
Features
Quad
shaped
compact
fluorescent
* Can replace
standard
incandescent
lamps,
wrth the use of an adaptor,
or In downlrghters
and over-table
fixtures
lamp
Drmensronally
and photometrically
to the equrvalent
rating of D-types
similar
4-pin G24q base, to be used with an external

starting
device or wrth an electronic
ballast
Very
good
colour
rendenng
Directions
(Ra 85)
l
Uses consrderably
than incandescent
less power
lamps
and lasts
Emergency
May
hghtrng
for
use
be operated
on electronic
ballasts
longer
Available In Incandescent-like
Homelight
Deluxe 827, Warmwhrte
Deluxe 830,
White Deluxe 835, Coolwhite
Deluxe 840
Universal
burnmg
positron
Dimmable
Item
description
Watt
CF-DE
F-DE
CF-DE
CF-DE
CF-DE
CF-DE
CF-DE
&DE
CF-DE
CF-DE
CF-DE
CF-DE
CF-DE
CF-DE
CF-DE
CF-DE
10
10
10
IO ~~~~
13
13
13
13
18
18
18
18
26
26~6
lOW1827
1 OWi840
low/830
1 OWi835
13Wl827
13W1840
13Wi830
13W/835
lBW/827
lBW/840
18W/830
lBW/835
26W/827
26W/840
26W/830
26W1835
26~~
26
Colour
Homelight Deluxe
Coolwhite Deluxe
Warmwhite
Deluxe
~~
White Deluxe
Homelight Deluxe ~~
Coolwhite Deluxe
Warmwhite
Deluxe
Warmwhite
Deluxe
~~
Homelight Deluxe
Coolwhite Deluxe ~
Warmwhite
Deluxe
White Deluxe
Homefight Deluxe
Coolwhite DeluxeWarmwhite
Deluxe
White Deluxe
Base
G24q-1
G24q-1
G24q-1
G24q-1
G24q-1
G24q-1
G24q-1
G24q-1
G24q-2
G24q-2
G24q-2
G24q-2
(324q2
G24q-3
~~
G24q-3
G24q-3
Dimensions
Ll
L2
mm
10%~
103
103
103
131~
131
131
131
145
145
-145~5
45
163
163
163
163
67
67
67~
67-~
4;
95
95-1 og
109
1 ii
127
127
Pi;:
Light
output
lm
28
28
28
28
28
2828
28
28
28
2828
28
28
28
28
600
600
600
600
900
900
900
900
1200
1200
1200
1200
1800
i800
1800
1800
Average
life
h
10000
~10000
10000
10000~
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000~
10000
10000
loo00
10000
10000
10000
10000
Packing
auantity
10
76
-10
10
10
10
10
JCJ
10
10
IO10
JO
10
10
10
Ordering
code
25159
25161
28022
28018
25160
25162
28023
28019
25140
25141
28024
28020
25143
~25144
28025
28021
LYNX
Lynx-D
Compact
fluorescent
incandescent
lamps
lamp, which can replace

when an adaptor
is used.
Features
Applications
Quad
shaped
2-pin
G24d
compact
base,
with
fluorescenr
Integral
lamp
* Can replace standard

incandescent
lamps,
with the use of an adaptor,
or in downlighters
and over-table
fixtures
starter
Uses considerably
less power and lasts
longer than incandescent
lamps
Very
good
colour
rendering
Directions
(Ra 85)
* Available
in incandescent-like
Homelight
Deluxe 827, Warmwhite
Deluxe 830,
White Deluxe 835, Coolwhite
Deluxe 840
or Daylight
Deluxe 860.
Item
description
CF-II
CF-D
CF-D
CF-D
CF-D
CF-D
CF-D
CF-D
CF-D
CF-D
CF-D
?F-D
jZ!-D
CF-D
CF-0
CF-0
CF-D
CF-D
CF-D
F-D
1 OWi827
1 OWi830
1 OWi840
lOWi
1 OWi835
13W1827
13Wi830
13W1840
13W/860
13W1835
18W1827
18W1830
18Wl840
18W/860
18W1835
26Wl827
26Wi830
26Wi840
26Wi860
26W1835
Watt
10
10
10
10
10
13
13
13
13
13
1818
18
18
18
26
26
26
26
26
Colour
for
use
* Lynx-D lamps are not suitable

on dimmer circuits
Base
Homelig~)eluxe
G24d-1
Warmwhite
Deluxe -G24d-1
Coolwhite Deluxe
G24d-1
Dayhght Deluxe
G24d-1
White Deluxe
G24d-I
tjomehght Deluxe
G24d-1
Warmwhite
Deluxe
G24d-1
Coolwhite Deluxe
G24d-1
Daylight Deluxe
G24d-1
White Deluxe
G24d-1
Homelight
Deluxe
G24d-2
~
Warmwhite
Deluxe
G24d-2
Coolwhite Deluxe
G24d-2
DayI@
Deluxe
G24d-2
White Deluxe
G24d-2
HomelIght Deluxe
G24d-3
Warmwhtte
Deluxe
624d-3
Coolwhite
Deluxe
G24d-3
~
~ Dayligh_t Deluxe
G24d-3
White Deluxe
G24d-3
Dimensions
Ll
L2
mm
110
110
110
110
110
138
138
138
138
138
152
152
152
152
152
170
170
170
170
170
67
67
67
67
67
9595
95
95
95
109
109
109
109
109
127
127
127
127
127
D
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
-28
28
2828
28
28
28
for operation
Light
output
Im
600
600
600
600
600
900
900
900
900
900
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1800
1800
1800
1800
1800
Average
life
h
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
70000
10000
10000
10000
10000
~~~ 10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
Packing
quantity
10
10
10
IO
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
IO
10
10
JJ
10
10
l!~
~10
Ordering
code
25210
*
25382
25455
28304
25211
25396
25383
25456
28305
25150
25151
25152
25153
28306
25154
25155
25156
25157
28307
FLUORESCENT
T8 - Fluorescent
Standard
&
LAMPS
Special
Lamps
Lengths
Standard
fluorescent
lamps, which can also replace
38 mm diameter
tubes, offering the same photometrlc
performance
with 10 % energy
saving
Features
* Retrofit
Applications
for conventlonal
T12
fluorescent
* Photometric
performance
of T12 tubes, therefore
comparable
offering.
* Lower operating
consumption
; 10%
* Reduced
storage
and transoortatlon
Item
description
costs
volume
costs
Watt
lamps
to those
For replacement
of industrial
and commercial
lighting in supermarkets,
offices,
warehouses.
street lighting
* For new installations.
less energy
use Luxline
(40%)
(25% less weight)
Colour
Light
Packing
Ordering
output
Im
quantity
code
1150
-1100
1150
1150
1050
2300
2300
2850
2600
28%
2850
2500
4600
4100
4600
4600
4600
5700
30
5800
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
01406
01407
01408
01409
01410
b.08
01784
01416
01417
01418~
01419
Cap
L
mm
c
3
2
:
2
;:
72
F18W/l33-ST
Flaw/l EST
F18W/135-ST
F18W/l29-ST
Flaw/l 54.ST
F36Wil2511 M
F38W/T8/125-ST
F36W/l33-ST
F36!/125-ST
F36W/135-ST
F36W/i 29-ST
F36W/154-ST
F58W/133-ST
F58W/125-ST
F58W/l35-ST
F58W/l29-ST
F58W/l54-ST
F7OWIi 33.ST
F70W/135-ST
F7OW/l29-ST
Special
s
P
4
18
18
18
18
18
36
38
36
36
36
36
36
58
58
58
58
58
70
70
70
Plus
Cool White
Universal White
White
Warmwhite
Daylight
Universal White
Coolwhite Deluxe
Cool White
Universal White
White
Warmwhite
Daylight
Cool White
Universal White
White
Warmwhite
Daylight
Cool White
White
Warmwhite
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
590
590
590
590
590
970
1047
1200
1200
1200
1200
1200
1500
1500
1500
1500
1500
1764
1764
1764
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
G13
360
360
438
438
438
-438
720
720
720
590
641
691
691
742
742
742
895
895
895
895
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
~26
26
26
26
26
38
26
26
26
26
26
26
26
YG!C
01436
01437
01438
01439
01440
010~
01091
01092
lengths
F14WIDI154
F14WICWI133
F15WIDIl54
F15W/T8/W/l35
F15WICWI133
F15Wi78iWWil29
Fl 6W/V/CWI133
Fl 6W/TB/W/l35
Fl 6W/TS/WW/l29
F18W/CW/24/133
F18WiCWi261133
F18W/CW/28/133
F25WiCW 28/133
F18W/CW/30/133
F25W/CW/30/133
F25W/WW/30/129
FBOWIDIl54
F3OWITBIWI135
FSOWICWII 33
FBOWIT8IWWI129
14
14
15
15
15
15
16
16
16
18
18
18
25
18
25
25
30
30
30
30
Daylight
Cool WhitE
Daylight
White
Cool White
Warmwhite
Cool White
White
Warmwhite
Cool White
Cool White
Cool White
Cool-White
Cool White
Cool White
Warmwhite
Daylight
White
Cool White
Warmwhite
650
700
750
900
900
900
1100
1100
1100
1175
1275
1350
1700
1400
1800
1800
1900
2200
2200
2200
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
20
20
20
30~
20
25
25
25
25
25
25
00037
~~~ 00039
00062
00063
00064
00065
00860
00868
00861
00093
00093
00097
00133
00099
01085
01086
00142
00143
00144
00145
FLUORESCENT
T8 - LUXLINE
Plus
Generation
Triphosphor
Fluorescent
Lamps
Special
lengths
LAMPS
New
-
New generaf/on
of fluorescent
lamps
superior
colormetnc
and photometric
In non-standard
lengths
offering
performance
Features
* Nearly constant
lumen maintenance
throughout
the entire lamp life
l
High colour rendering

index (Ra 85, Class 1 B)
brightens
and emphasises
colour characteristics
* Consumes
fluorescent
l
Applications
10 % less energy than comparable

tubes with a diameter
of 38 mm
Excellent
performance
(ImAV)
fixture efficiency
(5 to 10 %)
* Wherever
excellent
colour rendering
performance
(Lm/W)
are demanded
and increased
* In fixtures
l
* Ideal
for new
installations
and replacements
of non-standard
In displays,
furniture
bathroom
fixtures
hghtmg,
nsions
description
L
mm
F15Wi840
Fi5Wi860
Fi<W/830
F15tii827
F3OW/860
-F3OW/8it
F3OWi830
F3OWl827
F38Wi830
F38ti/840
15
1515
I<
30
30
30
30
38
38
Coolwhite Deluxe
Daylight Deluxe
Warmwhite Deluxe
Homelight Deluxe
Daylight Deluxe
Coolwhite Deluxe
Warmwhite Deluxe
HomelIght Deluxe
Warmwhite Deluxe
Coolwhite Deluxe
G13
Gi3
G13G13
G13
G13
613
i13Gi3
G13
438
438
438
438
895
895
895
895
1047
1047
dlmenslons
shops,
t
oulput
Ligh
D
and
Packing
Ordering
quantity
code
Im
26
26
26
26
26
26
-26
26
26
26
950
900
950
950
2300
2400
2400
2400
3200
3200
2525
25 ~
25
25
_-
00567
00947
018~53~
01850
01078
01080
01079
01680
01521
01520
HALOGEN
Standard
LAMPS
Floodlight
Lamps
Double-ended
halogen lamps
Instant light after swatch-on
guaranteerng
26
Applications
Features
* Long
l
service
Excellent
* Clear
l
life:2000
lumen
tubular
Horizontal
hrs
maintenance
envelope
burning
Universal
burning
lamps (*)
position
position
+/- 15
for all 78,3
mm
* Floodlighting
of monuments,
parks
car parks, building sites, etc.
and gardens,
* Indoor:rn
upkghters,
etc.
Directions
for
* Do not touch
l
Colour
temperature
:2900K
wallwashers,
use
the quartz
Use quick-actron
* Use in lumrnalres
envelope
H.RC.fuses
wrth bare
fingers
In the external
circuit
with toughened
* Do not overtrghteniapply
during insertion
front
excessive
glass
force
II
Walt
Item
description
Volt
Cap
Dimensions
L
II
mm
12OV3OOW
12OV5OOW
12OVlOOOW
24OV6OW(*)
246VlOOW
24OV15OW
24OV2OOW
24OV25OW
24OV3OOW
24OV5OOW
246V75OW
24OVlOOOW
24OV15OOW
24OV2OOOW
K9
Kl
K4
K14(*)
K12(*)
Kll
K32
KS
Kl
K3
K4
K5
K6
300
500
1000
60
100
150
200
250
300
500
750
1000
1500
2000
120
120
120
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
240
R7s
R7s
R7s
R7s
R7s
R7s
R7s
R7s
k7s
R7s
R7s
R7s
R7s
Fa4
117.60
117.60
189.10
78.30
78.30
78.30
117.60
117.60
11760
11760
18910
189.10
254.10
331.00
9
9
12
12
12
12
9
9
9
9
12
12
12
12
::
:.
::
::-::
Light
Average
Packing
Ordering
output
life
quantity
code
Im
5400
10000
22000
840
1600
2600
3000
4000
4800
9250
15000
22000
33000
44000
2000
2000~~
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
2000
10
IO
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
21685
21619
21651
22781
21402
21403
21551
21743
21653
21621
21623
21625
21628
21652
IW
LOW
VOLTAGE
Superia
35
&
HALOGEN
LAMPS
50
Low voltage halogen lamp with dlchrolc

reflector
and clear front lens, offering superior
light dlstnbutlon
higher light output and longer average
life.
Features
Applications
* Constant
colour
throughout
lamp
life
* Accent
Flat front lens protects

capsule
and reflector
from dust, and offers extra safety
Two thirds of the heat produced

through the back of the lamp
Excellent
colour
IS evacuated
reduced
UV emission.
harmful
irradiation
20%
life ; now 5000
Directions
hrs (Supena
50 only)
Universal
cap and burning
in shops,
of objects,
to heat
for
food,
museums
textiles,
and homes
etc
use
* Do not use the lamp

with this label
* Constant
light output throughout
the entire
lamp life (Supena
35 = 4000 hrs)
l
lighting
Lighting
sensitive
* COOL BEAM lamps must be used in open or well

ventilated
fittings, suitably
designed
to dissipate
the heat which is radiated to the back of the lamp.
Check the fitting for maximum
power rating (... Watt)
rendering
Substantially
Ellmlnates
more
In fittings
marked
position
* Dlmmable
Watt
Item
description
Volt
Cap
Dimensions
Beam
Colour
Luminous
Average
Packing
Ordering
angle
temp.
intensity
life
quantity
code
cd
mm
Diameter
35 mm
FTB lZVi2OW
FTD 12Vi2OW
FTE 12Vi35W
FTH 12Vi35W
Diameter
20
20
35
35
12
12
12
12
GZ4iGU4
GZ4iGU4
GZ4lGU4
GZ4iGU4
41
41
41
41
35
35
35
35
1 O/SP
3OIFL
1 O/SP
3OIFL
4000
700
6600
1300
4000
4000
4000
4000
10
10
10
10
22336
22338
22339
22341
20
20
35
35
50
50
50
50
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
GXIGU5.3
GXiGU5.3
GXiGU5.3
GXiGU5.3
GXiGU5.3
GXiGU5.3
GXiGU5.3
GXiGU5.3
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
49
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
1 O/SP
38iWFL
1 O/SP
38lWFL
1O/SP
24iFL
38iWFL
EiO/vWFL
4000
790
7700
1450
11500
3600
2250
1000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
5000
10
10
10
IO
10
10
10
10
22301
22302
22305
22306
22311
22312
2231422315
50 mm
ESX 12Vi2OW
BAB 12Vi2OW
FMT 12Vi35W
FMW 12Vi35W
EXT 12Vi5OW
EXZ 12Vi5OW
EXN 12Vi5OW
FNV 12Vi5OW
LOW
Capsules
with
axial
Applications
compact
design
size for optimum
* High-performance,
ruggedly
filament for long life : 3000
built lamp
hrs
Interror drsplays,
shop windows,
restaurants,
discotheques
Precision
task
Directions
* Dimmable
* Constant
the lamp
light output
life
* Platinum
coated
* Substantially
due to burner
throughout
reduced
UV emission
in UV-stop
quartz
Watt
lighting
for use
Must be used
with toughened
in lumrnarres
front glass
* Do not touch the quartz

with bare fingers
pins
Volt
Dimensions
Cap
description
Li
L2
mm
12Vll ow
12v/2ow
12Vl35W
12Vl35W
lZV/5OW
12Vl75W
12v/100w
LAMPS
Ii
Features
Item
HALOGEN
filame
Low voltage halogen

capsules
offering extreme
compactness,
high-performance
and versatilrty,
with three times the lrfe of traditional
rncandescen
lamps and constant
light output throughout
their
* Extremely
luminaire
VOLTAGE
10
2!35
12
-12
12
G4
___
;4
G4
33
33
33
envelope
Light
Average
Packing
Ordering
output
tile
quantity
code
50
50
21990
21991
Im
~~
7.50
750
7.50
9
9
9
140
350
650
h
3000
3ooo~~~
~~~
.*_,_:_-.__-_-
-.. ~...
BiaxTM0
See Spectrum Catalogue Page72

CRI Ra
2 Pin-Internal
Rated
Pack
Producf
@Y
Wholesale
Spilt Box
PMX
Net
Average
Life Hours
Trade
Price
Group
Starter
10
109
13
134
G24d-1
154
10
10
10
10
11.04
11 04
11 04
1104
8.83
8.83
8.83
8.83
45
45
45
45
82
a2
02
HZ
10000
10000
10000
10000
900
900
900
900
10
10
10
lil
1260
12GO
1260
10.08
10.08
10.08
10.08
45
45
45
45
2700
3000
3500
4000
.~~
82
a2
82
a2
10000
10000
10000
10000
1200
1200
1200
1200
10
10
10
lil
13 66
1366
13 66
10.93
10.93
10.93
10.93
45
45
45
45
2700
3000
3500
4000
82
82
82
a2
10000
10000
10000
10000
1800
1800
1600
10
1489
10
10
14 89
1409
lRO0
IO
14 63
11.91
11.91
11.91
11.91
45
45
45
45
F13DBX/827
F13DBX/830
F13DBX/835
F13DBW840
18557
12956
18559
2700
3000
20532
__.
4000
F18DBW827
F18DBX/830
12860
12861
F18DBXJ835
12883
12864
~~~ __~
G24d-1
G24d-2
-.
182
600
600
600
600
2700
3000
3500
4000
F18DBX/840
26
10000
lOODO
10000
10000
12872
12874
12875
12876
.__18
82
82
82
a2
FlODw827
FlODBX/830
FlODBX/835
FlODBX/840
~__._
~
GZ4d-3
F26DBXI827
F26DBX/83O
18566
10578
F26DEX/835
18587
20534
F26DBX/840
3500
BiaxTMD/E
Watts
4 pin-External
inserted
iengtl1
mm)
Cap
OrderCode
Product
Code
CCT r
30031
12877
2700
3000
3500
4000
a2
R?
a2
HZ
600
600
600
600
1316
1316
13 I6
13 16
10.53
10.53
10.53
10.53
45
45
45
45
2700
3000
3500
4000
82
'32
82
82
900
900
900
900
1374
1374
13 74
13 74
10.99
10.99
10.99
10.99
45
45
45
45
2700
3000
3500
4000
82
a2
HZ
R2
1200
1200
1200
1200
1504
1504
1504
1504
12.03
12.03
12.03
12.03
45
45
45
45
2700
3000
3500
4000
82
82
82
a2
1800
1800
1800
1600
1628
1628
1628
1628
13.03
13.03
13.03
13.03
45
45
45
45
Starter
101
G24q-1
FlOD&V827/4P
FlOOBX/830/4P
FlODBX/835/4P
FlODBX/840/4P
13
126
G24q 1
F13DBW827/4P
Ft,3OBX/830/4P
F13DBW835/4P
F13DBX/840/4P
18
146
26
174
G24q~2
G24q-3
30037
38038
F18DBX/827/4P
F18DBXf830/4P
F18DBX/835/4P
F18DBX/840/4P
12865
12866
F26DBX/827/4P
F26DBX!830/4P
F26DBW835/4P
F26DBX/840/4P
30042
12869
12870
10610
30043
BiaxTMT
See Spectrum Catalogue Page 75
Watts
13
OrderCode
__I_
26
Product
Code
CCTh
CRI Ra
Rated
Averaye
Life Hours
llllrlal
tumelv,
Pdck
Qty
Wl~olesnle
Net
Prodwt
Trade
Price
Group
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
890
890
890
890
10
10
10
10
6500
82
82
82
82
a2
1386
1386
1386
1386
1386
11.09
11.09
11.09
11.09
11.0s
45
45
45
45
45
890
10
35945
35944
35937
35939
35938
~~_.
2700
3000
3500
4000
6500
82
82
82
82
82
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
1150
1150
1150
1150
1150
10
10
10
10
10
1503
1503
1503
1503
1503
12.02
12.02
12.02
12.02
12.02
45
45
45
45
45
35959
35952
2700
3000
3500
4000
82
82
02
a2
82
10000
10000
10000
10000
10000
1710
1710
1710
1710
1710
10
10
10
10
10
1638
163R
1638
1638
1638
13.10
13.10
13.10
13.10
13.10
45
45
45
45
45
Amalgam
116
F13TBW827/A
F13TBX/830/A
F13TBX/835/A
F13TBXiE40/A
F13TBXJ865/A
~~ __
~-~~ ~-.
GX24d-1
--18
1366
See Spectrum Catalogue Page 72
10
2 pin-With
12 66
126
~. ---~
139
GX24d-2
~~
GX24d~3
~_-
F18TBW827/A
F18TBx/83O/A
F18TBX/835/A
FlBTBW84OIA
F18TBXiE65/A
.~~.~_
F26TBXI827
F26TBW830
F26TBXiB35
F26TBX/840
F26TBX/865
35940
35888
35843
35941
35949
35983
35964
35985
3000
3500
4000
25
8.0.
Commissioning
Data
8.1.
Completion and Inspection Certificates
Page 11
NMEC - Millennium Dome

Greenwich Pavilion-Package 8980
Emergency Lighting
The architect/design team were aware that due to the installation of the exhibition within the
open area of the building the emergency lighting system that they had designed would not be
adequate to achieve the required average lux level.
1
I
Therefore we have not been able to provide a test certificate to cover the emergency lighting, as
the lux level was not satisfactory.
EICI 0157217
Tftk certlticate
is not valid If the serial
number has been defaced or altered
CElMl
I
I
I
TIFKATE
zz
i:
,
QJ
5
Issued by an Approved Contractor or Conforming Body enrolled with the National Inspection Council
for Electrical Installation Contracting, Vintage House, 37 Albert Embankment, London SE1 7UJ.
Seereverseof thn pagefor explanatorynotesrelatingto NICEICsoftwareendorsement
Client /
Address:
The installation
Extent of the
installation
Careredbydlii
certificate:
is:
New
&tiu\s\QG
<viU&d
N&C
&GA
addibonPn
&Afl&
I/we, being the person(s) responsible

for the design of the electrical
installation
(as indicated by my/our signature(s)
below), particulars
of which are
described above, having exercised reasonable
skill and care when carrying out the design, hereby CERTIFY that the design work for which I/we have been
(date)
responsible
is, to the best of my/our knowledge
and belief, in accordance
with BS 7671 amended
to
\q7;$
except for the departures, if any, detailed as follows:
Details
of departures
from
BS 7671,
as amended
(Regulations
The extent of liability

of the signatory/signatories
For the DESIGN of the installation:
is limited
120-02,
120-05):
to the work
ldw
described
above
as the subject
of this
certificate.
**( Where there is divided responsibility
for the design)
Signature
l/we, being the person(s)

responsible
for the construction
of the electrical
installation
(as indicated
by my/our signature
below), particulars
of which
are described
above, having exercised reasonable
skill and care when carrying out the construction,
hereby CERTIFY that the construction
work for which
(date)
I/we have been responsible is, to the best of my/our knowledge and belief, in accordance
with BS 7671 amended to
\ctw
except for the the departures, if any, detailed as follows:
Details
For the CONSTRUCTION
of departures
of the signatory
is limited
of the installation:
from
BS 7671,
to the work
as amended:
described
as the subjectof
above
this
and testing of the electrical

installation
(as indicated
I/We, being the person(s) responsible
fo%he inspection
of which are described
above, having exercised
reasonable
skill and care when carrying
out the inspection
best of my/our knowledge
and belief, the electrical
installation
is in accordance
except for the departures detailed es follows:
Details
of departures
The extent of liability of the signatory/signatories

For the lNSPECTlD&AND
TESTING
from
below), particulars
CERTIFY that, to the
(date)
1@fz
BS 7671, as amended:
is limited to the work described
certificate.
by my/our signatures
and testing, hereby
above as the subject

i
Reviewed
of this certificate.
bv:
clualifving
Manager 1
t Where
the inspection and tesdhg has been carried out by an Approved Coniractoc the inspection and te&g
registered Uoa/#ying Manager.
results are to be reviewed by tie
This form is based on the model shown in Appendix 6 of BS 7671: 1992, as amended 1997
Published by the National Inspection Council for Electrical Installation Contracting 0 Copyright
NICEIC (March
96)
Page
1 of
EW0157217
This certificate
is not valid if the serial
Organisation
&qyytLs
Address:
NIcElcmNo
(wht#eappmpriate)
Branch number:
(if applicable)
Postcode
Address:
Address:
NlCElCEnrdmantNo
bJkeapproplia$l
Branch number:
(if applicable)
Postcode
Nature
:
;
Nominal Ho,
voltage(s):
4w
2 pole
fraquz;$
sfi
B-pale
: Prospective fault
i
current, IaflZllJ
other
: External earth fault

; hapfmpadance,Z,r
System Tvpe(s)
N-s
:
w
\//
l-phase
13wire)
; l;hf;
wl
NC
: Z-phase
; Bwirel
: 5phase
; l3hre)
3phase
(4wire)
Please
state
Other
of Supply
Details
IJo
QC%
Number of
supplies
Parameters
Overcurrenl Protective
v ;
Hz
;ycVw
/ BG(EN)
kA
121byem@ywby
maasumment
131u4r.sremer8th8n
onesu~ mco~
lhehigherwhigh88t
;
: Twe
2
;
i Nominal current
j
rating 100
vakb98
Earth Electrode
(where
@mg
Short-circuit
capacity
of Installation
of Primary Sup ly
Device Ps)
! + Characteristics
z&J
*
w-
kA
applicable)
Location:
iataflation
arth elecbode:
Method of
measurement:
r----------------------~-------------------------------------------.
+ Main Switch
1
E@N,
mx
JOOf
roles
r%i
$#&a
e8
ci<
$ac)
Earthing conductor
rConductor
material
I
$f&
lMaximum
A per ; &ihd ofPmtection
phase , against Indirect Contact
i,------------------__J_________________---------------------------Main Protective
Conductors
or Circuit-Breaker
RCDope$g/
mm
R~~~emr$g
mA jcond;~;
/ms~Continuitycheck
i Main equipotential bonding conductors ;
Bonding of extraneous-conductive-pans
&@&
,pffl
$0
mmz /
$(/)
~~~
W&Q
Conduy;;
<I
Continuitycheck
i
<
mmz :
/
(J)
Gasservice
(J)
/
servi@t
i~o~f$$j
Gther;x;Jsj
,/
i-
Note: Enter NONE06 where appropriate, the page number(s)

of additional page(s) of comments on the existing installation.
e
9 Enteri+tefvd in termsof years.mm338or w&s, as appropriate
C\r..Ai
-reve
i Where an Approved Contractor has been responsible for elements of the work in addition to construction, repetition of the Part;co/ars of the Organisation
Responsible for the Electrical Installationis unnecessary. In such a case, the words Details as given for Construcdonmay be inserted, where appropriate,
I/We, the designer(s), RECOMMEND that this installation is further inspected and tested after an interval of not more than
+ Where a number of sources are available to supply the installation, and where tie data given for the primary source may differ from other sources, a separate
sheet most be provided which identifies the relevant information relating to each additional source.
Published by the National Inspection
Council for Electrical Installation
Contracting
0 Copyright
NICEIC (March
98)
Page
2 of
This certificate
Is not valid if the serial
number
has been defaced
or altered
CEIIC
I
SCHEDULE OF CIRCUIT DETAILS

FOR THE INSTALLATION
TO BE COMPlFtED IN EVERYCASE
ONLYTO BE COMPU3ED IF THE DlSTfGBUTl0N BOARD IS NOT CONNECTEDDIRECTU TO THE ORIGIN OF TNE INSTAUATlON
Location of
distribution board:
Supply to distribution
board is from:
Overcurrent
Distribution
board designation:
See Tab/e 4A of Append/x

A
PVC/PVC
cables
0157217
EW
Type:
BS(EN)
flbl
4 of BS 7671:
PVC cables
in non-metallic
conduit
device forthe
distribution
Associated
RcD(ifruvlBIEN)
circut
c;-
6w
1992
PVC cables
in metallic
conduit
protective
PVC cables
in metallic
trunking
PVC cables
in non-metallic
trunking
PVWSWA
cables
XLPUSWA
cables
Mineralinsulated
cables
Council for Electrical
Installation
Contracting
0 Copyright
0 (Other - please state)
Page
NICEIC (March
98)
4 of
This certificate
EEllc
0157217
EW
I
Methods
of protection
a. Protection
against
against both direct
(i) SELV
(ii) Limitation
b. Protection
bf
$
electric
against direct
(i) Insulation
(ii) Barriers
shock
Preventi
and indirect
of discharge
contact:
of energy
d
/
c. Segregation
of live parts
(iv) Placing out of reach
Presence of diagrams,
similar information
,J
Presence
against indirect
of RCD for supplementary
protection
contact:
If
Presence
of main equipotential
Presence of supplementary
equipotential bonding
conductors
for combined
Presence of earthin arrangements
protectrve and func B onal purposes
Presence of adequate arrangements
for alternative
source(s), where applicable
Presence
protective
of residual
current
(ii) Use of Class II equipment
(v) Electrical
Connection
conductors
bonding conductors
charts and
and other warning
devices,
switches
notices
and terminals
device(s)
or equivalent
insulation
J
L/r
J
conductors
separation
Installation earth electrode

of protective
Continuity
of ring final circuit
Insulation
resistance
between
live conductors
Insulation
resistance
between
live conductors
methods
Selection of conductors for current carrying capacity and

voltage drop
Presence of fire barriers, suitable seals and protection against
thermal effects
Presence and correct location

isolation and switching
Adequacy
of access
Particular protective
of appropriate
to switchgear
measures
devices for
and other equipment
for special installations and locations
Correct
Presence
connection
of accessories
of undervoltage
or
and equipment
protective
devices
Choice and setting of protective and monitoring devices

(for protection against indirect contact and/or overcurrent)
Selection of equipment and protective measures
appropriate to external influences
Selection
of appropriate
functional
on by separation
of circuits
Protection against direct contact

provided during erection
R,
Continuity
of conductors
Connection of single-pole devices for protection

switching in phase conductors
only
resistance,
zones or within mechanical
$
bonding
Erection
in prescribed
General
circuit
of conductors
Routing of cables
protection
conductor
(iii) Non-conducting
location:
Absence of protective
conductors
(iv) Earth-free equipotential bonding:
Presence of earth-free equipotentfal
7
notices
Labelling of protective
of circuit
instructions,
Cables and Conductors
Presence
t/
of danger
Identification
of earthing
or Band II
of safety circuits
t/
Presence
J
and other influences
(i) EEBAD including:

J
services
b. Segregation of Band I and Band II circuits

insulabon used
or enclosures
(vi) Presence
c. Protection
influence
of non-electrical
Identification
contact:
fv) PELV
-
a. Proximity
-A/-
(iii) Obstacles
of mutual detrimental
conductors
Insulation
of non-conducting
switching
by barrier
devices
or enclosure
floors or walls
conductors
Earth fault loop impedance,
and earth
Site applied insulation
Operation
of residual
Functional
testing
Zs
current
devices
of assemblies
I
Page No(s)
Nota: Additionalpagalsl.
must be idantifiad by the Electrical Installation Certificate serial number and pega number(s).
i All data-entry boxes must be completed. To provide a positive indication that an inspection or a test has bean carried out, insert either a Yes or a 7:
Where an inspection or a test is not relevant to the installation, insert N/Ameaning Not App/icab/a:
Council for Electrical Installation
Contracting
0 Copyright
NICEIC (March
96)
Page
3 of
II
I
N
Thls certificate
CeElHR
0157217
EW
1 SCHEDULE OF TEST RESULTS

FOR THE INSTALLATION vg-~;~;=-;;~
::
;
See reverseof pageI for explanatorynotesrelatmgto NICEICsoftwareendorsement
*I
ONLYTO BE COMPUXD IFTHE DlBTBlBUTiON BOABD IS NOT CONNECTED

DIRECTLVTO TM ORlGlN OF THE INGTALLATION
Q ssenorebslow Characteristics
2, *
t
kA
Pf
b
.a*
EZ
z ==
4 0
.g s
u
at this distribution
Operating times
of associated
RCO (if any)
board
Test instruments
(Ph:sel
numbers)
RCD
/---/
At iA,/
ms
insulation
resistance
Other
At 15gmA
ItappEca!J!e) /
ms
Continuity
Other
Insulation resistance
t f7econl klwer or klwest value
All circuits
PhaWPhaset IlewNe&lt
Phases/Eartht
Polarity
Neutral/Earth
IAtlaastonecolumn
to becamplsted)
6 + Rz 1
k
aa
used:
Earth fault loop

impedance
Circuit impedances
ia
Ring final circuits onl
(measured end to en J I
(serial
i
/
Maximum
measured earth
fault loop
@dance. Za
RCO operating
times
at150mA
at A
lidapplicable)
* SeenoteL&w
(MQl
W4
(MQJ
(MQ)
(4
hs)
ml
fmsf
ia
Note: Where the installation can be supplied by more than one source, such as a primary source leg public supply) end a secondary source (eg standby generator), the higher or highest
values most be recorded.
TESTED BY
Position:
Date
testing:
Published
by the National
Inspection
-J&#-Q
Page
of
qlvq
ppendix 6 of BS 7671: 1992, as amended 1997

Installation
Contracting
0 Copyright
Li
NICEIC
(March
98)
5 of
ri
Our ref : SJ52280

23 December 1999
PROJECT :
Greenwich Pavilion
SYSTEM :
Lightning Protection
TEST CERTIFICATE
Position
El
E2
E3
E4
E5
E6
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
6.8
9.9
40.6
9.5
49.7
Overall Reading : 2.25 Ohms
The above values comply with BS6651: 1992 The Protection of %uctures Against
Lightning.
TEST ENGINEER
P. Stephen
DATE OF TEST :
23 December 1999
INSTRUMENT
L122
DATE OF NEXT TEST :
December 2000
OMEGA EARTHING
SYSTEMS
8.0.
Commissioning
Data
8.2.
Calibration Certificates
Page 12
NEWEY&EYRE
LTD
TEST INSTRUMENTS
REPAIR & CALIBRATION
Calibration
by Industrial
Calibration
Limited
Certijkate of
Calibration
The instrument under test was calibrated against standards which are either
traceable to National Standards or are derived by approved ratio techniques.
The results refer to measurements made at the time of test and not to the
instruments ability to maintain calibration.
CUSTOMER:
R E L ELECTRICAL
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTION:
INSTALLATION
MANUFACTURER:
AVO INTERNATIONAL
MODEL:
CM500
SERIAL No:
98079611810798
OUR REF:
120120
TESTER
ASSET NO:046169
This instrument complies/does not comply with the specification

at the measured points.
Nominai ambient temperature: 20C
Manufacturer's
Electrical
Specification.
NO PART NO., UNDATED.
BIC 1451 NAMAS 02820, BIC 1438 NAMAS 07300,
BIC 1312 NAMAS 02782, BIC 1443 NAMAS 02892.
Signed
Calibration
Dept.,
Bedford
Date: 25th September
1999
Calibration Reference:
Traceability:
Remarks:
Courrprd
(@ in(CAlL
House
Surrey Place
Mill. Lme
Godulrning
Surrey
cm LEY
Setting Standards
Pus: 01483~425737
1 Certificate of Calibration
-.-
Certificare Number:
Date of Issus:
05-Nov-99
--
T
I
CUSTOMER;
REFEWNCE:
DESCRZPTION:
hQUWFACTURER:
MODEL NUMBER.
SERIAL NO
CUSTOMER KIENT.
DATE RJXEWED
31417
Page I of 1
_-._
OmegaFuse Contracting Ltd

LPO4946
EARTH TESTER
FvlEGGER
DET54D
9809852lSlijY38
L122
OZ-NW-iiv
2u :c = 1 (-;
Tdmpr?rzrture:
HLUUdil-)48 b = i I)%,
The instrument was caiibrated and found to be m compliance with the manufaacrurers
pubtished electrical specification at the measured points.
LABORATQRY EWi~ONME,NT
Adjustments
were not performed.
+4./ltest equipment and srankrds used are of known accuracy and traceable to karimai
or fntemationai Standards in accordance with BS578 1.
The measurement uncert~untiesquoted in this certticate are fat 3 cunfdencr probabtlity
ofnot less than 95%.
mC2b.L test eyutpment:
ICO57. ICOSS. 1CD83
Finat mw.urcmm?nrwas cnmed out after a mfn~mumof 24 hours szabllisauonUI the l&orat~)v.
Mwwed by;
R. D. PATEL
Date. 05-Nov-99
RecummendedRecalibration Dnw
05-NW-00
ApprovedSignatory:
--.
X0-d
9PBITLL
80Z0
8 14 3 I s A s
n 3 3 w il
t-0:
9'1
00-blnr-90
CALIBRATION
IssLed
by
procedure:
CERTIFICATE
:-
inCAL
(SURREY)
PAGE 2 OF 2
Limited
XLEGCIETS~ : AWGDETS~
my.-.
--,m.,
.a..mm-description
: EARTH TESTER
manufacturer:
r"LE;GGER
model number: DET 5/4D
serial
-.-L~+------___.
.__.__-,
APFLXED VALUES
__I.-.~----C~mI.~."-". ."C.
/
- 31417,
--.
___,,
I....
"^-.-.-l-"-",-l.l--ll-L
measured
---__
cy:
RDP
number:
21520998
ciate : 05 ?av 99
- -.- -.-_ --..-mm,,-,-_.,C~.""."U,,"-----__-___.INDICATED VALUES
---.. _,.-......-_
--________.-,
"__,,,--, "-IYYIL--4
II
m'",,.--.u--------.+
9.0.
Manufacturers
Literature
Page 13
L
p Forbes & Lomax Ltdn:mmOr
The Stainlet
Ref: 1GTW/SS
I gang 2-way switch
1 gang 400W dimmer
Ref: 1GRD41SS
The Stainless Steel Rocker Switch
I
I
.
-
ng
Ref: Rl GTW/SS
1 gang 2-wab
2-way ~VVIL~II
The Invisible/Black Rocker Switch
1 gang 2-way switch
205b St. John's Hill, London SW11 1TH

Fax:0171-738
9224
Telephone: 0171-738 0202
Forbes & Loma
Lhi
Electric Light Switches and Sockets
205b
Telephone:
St. Johns
0171-738
Hill London SW11 1TH

0262
Fax- . 0171-738
9224
Popular
- Angled/Rack
Range
Reflector
Asymmetrical
metal
games dlrectlonal
b,
bane
.
llghtlng with unpierced

reflector to avold bright spots
offers alternatIve
lumen dlstrlbutlon
with adjustable
reflector
end cap
Specification
To specify state
Single side angled
reflector
and twin tube battens.

As Thor Popular Range
Asymmetric
reflector
in white
Angled
stove enamelled
Metal
Reflector
steel for single
IPPA/PTAl.
Single
inr .
Shallow
beep
trunklng
Rack
gives
.
.
lighting
glare
Batten
trunking
reflector
free hghtlng
for vertxal
rocking
controlled
dlstrlbutlon
avoids waste light
choice of single lamp vers~o for arrow aIsle racking
work areas or storage with medwm/low
racking
continuous
end to end mounting possible
or tw
for
Specification
To specify state
Special formed rack llghtlng
ilcrn
Popular
reflector
I high reflectlvlty
Pock Range Llghtlng
Reflector
pollshed
ak-
(PPRL/PTRL)
Rack reflector
Twin
Single
:;
,.
Twin
Single
:_
Shallow
Batten
Ordering
Twin
Single
.
trunklng
Deep trunklng
Guide
Angled reflector for

Rack reflector for 1
Rock reflector for 2
1and 2 x 36W fitting

1 and 2 x 58W fitting
1 and 2 x 7OW fitting
1 x 1 OOW fitting
x 58W fitting
x 70W fitting
x 58W fitting
x 70W fitting
PPA
PPA
PPA
PPA
4
5
6
8
PPRL 5
PPRL 6
PPRL 25
PPRL 26
PTA 4
PTA 5
PTA 6
PTRL 5
PTRL 6
PTRL 25
PTRL 26
81
Popular
Range
- Architectural
Architectural
uplight
attachment
.
con be used in VDT areas
f
50
I
L--300---.
Shallow
trunkmg
Architectural
.
central
.
.
.
trunkmg
up/downlight
buvre
VISUCIImterest
Architectural
Deep
Attachments
gives
given
wing
attachment
LG3 category 2 compliance

wtth perforated
baffles
attachment
for use with architectural

up or up/downlight
attachment
gives indirect reflection of upward component
of light
especially useful in suspended installations with high ceilings
Batten cover
.
requred
to edose
batten when
wing ottochment
is not used
Materials/Finish
Architectural
attachments:
staved enamel
foroted sheet steel with ABS end cops.
Architectural
attachments
batten cover:
with low iridescent Texturebrite finish.
white
low gloss RAL 9010
high purity
aluminium
louvre
per.
coil
Popular
Ordering
- Battens
Range
Guide
SuppIled
complete
wth
lamps,
and Trunking
unless otherwse
stated
Super pack
1200mm
1200mm
1500mm
1500mm
1800mm
1800mm
1 x 36W
2 x36W
1 x 58W
2 x58W
1 x 70W
2 x 70W
1 90
3 A0
1 92
407
2 32
A 74
PPZXL236
PPZXLl5@
PPZXL258
PPZXLl70
PPZXL270
PTZXL158
PTZXL258
PTZXLl70
PTZXL270
HF Electronic
1200mm
1200mm
1500mm
1500mm
1800mm
1800mm
ballast
1 x 36W
2 x 36W
1 x58W
2 x58W
1 x 7OW
2 x7ow
1.90
3.40
1.92
4.07
2.32
4.74
PPZl36*
PPZ236*
PPZl58*
PPZ258*
ppz170*
PPZ270*
PTZl36*
PTZ236*
PTZl;n*
PTZ2;u8*
PTZl70
PTZ270*
Vivatronic
1200mm
1200mm
1500mm
1500mm
1800mm
1800mm
start
1 x 36W
2x36W
1 x58W
2 x58W
1 x 7ow
2x7OW
2.60
A.10
3.40
5.45
3.70
6.12
PPV136
PPV236
PPV158
PPV258
PPVl70
PPV270
Switchstart
600mm
600mm
1200mm
lx18W
2xl8W
1 x36W
180
216
2 60
EF15c
1800mm
1800mm
2AOOmm
2400mm
2x36W
1 x 58W
410
3 40
2 x 58W
5 A5
1 x 7ow
3 70
2x7OW
612
1 x lOOW523
2x lOOW795
PPl18*
PP218*
PPl36*
PP236*
PP158*
PP258*
PP170*
PP270*
PPlloo*
PP2 1 oo*
Controlite
1200mm
1200mm
1500mm
1500mm
-# SuppLed
l
Less lamp
tamps to be ordered separately

1 x36W
3 05
PPl36CL
2 x36W
500
PP236CL
1 x58W
395
PP158CL
2 x 58W
6 35
PP258CL
-with plug I battery box Those not marked have Integral
versnns are avolloble
To order add LL to the Cot NO
--- -
PTl36*
PT236*
PTl58*
PT258*
PT170*
PT270
2
4
2
5
40
60
80
20
2.60
4.10
3.90
5.45
A.20
6.62
Accessories
IP40 kit for lampholders
ES)
Export voltages
5 10 for details
80
[pack of
_--_-available, refer
Spines
PP/PT LS
E3
E3
E3
E3
PPZXLl58
PPZXL258
PPZXtl70
PPZXL270
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
battery
PPl36
PP236
PP158
PP258
PP170
PP270
E3
E3
E3
E3
PTZXL158
PTZXL258
PTZXL170
PTZXL270
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
E3
PT136#
PT236#
PT158
PT258#
PT170
PT270#
Popular
Range
- Battens
and Trunking
Spines
lamps
Complete with high efficiency white 26mm 18W
1OOW
IOOWJ diameter tubes (less lamp versions available)
Super versions 26mm 36.70W
Polylux XL 835
(38mm
Materials/Finish
Battens/spine/trunking:
white point.
Lampholder
assemblies:
rolled steel section

Tough white
in precoated
high reflectivity
polycarbonate.
Installation/Mounting
Batten: Has four-way terminal block with copocity
for
2 x 4mm or 3 x 2.5mm cables. Spare terminal for switch line connection. Terminal angled for easy wiring
Trunking system: 3 or 5 pole terminal system with push wire connections
for up to 2.5mm2 cable.
Ambient temperature:
Operating
temperature
up to +25C
nominal ambient. Also suitable for use in air conditioned
environments
where ambient temperature
may occasionally
rise ro
+4OC for short periods.
Battens: Fixings via three BESA piercings,
one central and two at
fixing centres: 600mm .500mm;
1200/l
500/l
800mm
600mm;
2400mm
1200mm.
(HF electronic
versions hove no central fixing.)
Bore battens can be mounted end-to-end.
Spines: Fixings via steel toggles hold spines onto Popular Trunking
Electrical connection
is made when spine engages into trunking.
Standards
Designed
@!p
and manufactured
to comply
with BS4533/EN
60 598
cc
IP20 (IP40 conversion

sleeve available)
Class I electrical
BS/EN 60 598 2.22. Battens, spines, reflector and louvre attachments
ore suitable for defined escape routes, as well as open areas,
whereas, ~111other attachments
are only suitable for emergency
lighting
in open areas
Specification
To specify state:
Batten: Fluorescent
batten fitting of slim cross-section
plate and adjustable end cap system.
As Thorn Popular Range Batten (PP).
Spine:
with clip-on
cover
Fluorescent
spine for attachment onto Popular Trunking with
buckles and adjustable end cop system. As Thorn Popular
E (PT).
79
SUPERTECHNE
.
-
P- 0150
-*
6500
6600
6401
aso
650
6601
1
1.63
47.00
90.00
45.00
45.00
154.00
97.00
63.00
106.00
61.00
61.00
*
.
.
++
L
*
*
113.00
HPF
HF
Swltth Stort
HPF
EMHPF
HF
2.7
.
l
l
~
+lIL
.
159
6505
6505.63
6605
6406
6506
6506.63
6606
49.00
154.00
-1
97.00
51.00
49.00
154.
97.
;,.OO
65 --
113.00
G 23
2 67
G24d-1
G24d-1
G24q-1
G24q I
3rEs
TCD
9w
9w
13w
13w
13w
13w
44
44
44
44
44
44
,,
,.a=
m5
II
II
II
II
II
II
IN
IEW
18W
18W
2bW
2bW
26W
26W
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
I-
6510
6510.63
6610
64li
6511
6511.63
6611
6412
6512
6512.C
6612
~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
~~ +I
156
106.
57
60
76 - --
19A
23b
C-
TCD
**
t.
ad
..
I_
__
_I
HPF
EMHPF
HF
Swltrh Stort
HPF
EMHPF
HF
Swltth Stort
HPF
HPF
HF
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
MINIMAL
Molloblok
Molloblok
Mollablok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
OUTPUT
CUT-OUT
SHALLOW
RECESSED
Avc
150
150
150
IS0
150
150
150
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
2 x 55
2 x 55
2 x 55
2 x 59
2 x 59
2 x 55
2 x 59
DEPTH.
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
IP44
,s
i
:
ZLT
I
I
LVS
TtDE
TC-D
TC-DE
Tt-DE
1(-D
TC.D
TC DE
T(-DE
TC-D
T( D
TC-DE
T(-DE
50
50
55
55
55
55
LUMEN
AND
FIXED RECESSED CFL COMPACT DOWNLIGHT

MINIMUM DEPTH 1 OOmm DETACHED GEARBOX
DIE -CAST ALUMINIUM BODY
METALLIZED POLYCARBONATE REFLECTOR
MOLLABLOK ADJUSTABLE CEILING FIXING SYSTEM l-35mm
ANTI GLARE SAFETY GLASS
AVS - OPTIMAL HEAT DISSIPATION
*
--
E
K
G24d-2
G24q-2
G24q-2
G24d-3
G24d 3
G24q-3
GZ4q-3
,.a
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
HIGH
AI
SUPERTECHNE
100/l 40
100
lDO/l40
100/140
100
100
IP44
Tk?
TCDE
TC D
TC-DE
TC-DE
TC-D
T(-D
TC DE
TC-D
150
150
150
150
150
150
2:
18
p-
1
4
1.
i i/f
o5
MB

DIE CAST ALUMINIUM BODY
METALLIZED POWCARBONATE REFLECTOR
MOLtABLOK -ADJUSTABLE CEILING FIXING SYSTEM l-35mm
ANTI -GLARE SAFETY GLASS
AVS OPTIMAL HEAT DISSIPATION
-~~~~!?~+~!!!!%!!i?
..
HPF
EMHPF
.
HF
._
Swltth Start
-**
HPF
._
EMHPF
I
HF
113
61
65
TC
TC E
Tt-D
TC-D
TC-DE
Tt-DE
SUPERTECHNE
P-3..
7
. 2.20x4,
IP44

DIE -CAST ALUMINIUM BODY
MOLlABLOK ADJUSTABLE CEILING FIXING SYSTEM l-35mm
ANTI - GLARE SAFETY GLASS
AVS OPTIMAL HEAT DISSIPATION
G24d 1
G24q-I
G24q-I
G24d-2
G24d-2
G24q-1
G24q-2
G24d-3
6248-3
G24q-1
G24q-3
13w
13w
13w
18W
18W
18W
18W
2bW
26W
26W
26W
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
44
I
II
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
II
I
220
150
220
220
220
150
220
220
220
150
220
I SUPERTECHNE IMAGE - LEAF
100/l 40
100
100
100/l 40
100/l 40
100
100
100/140
100/140
100
100
2
2
2
2
x
x
x
x
54
55
54
56
2 x 56
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
2x
55
56
59
59
55
59
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
SUPERTECHNE
IP44
\
- FIXED RECESSED CFL COMPACT DOWNLIGHT

l
+-V
,, \
- METALLIZED POLYCARBONATE REFLECTOR

MOLLABLOK - ADJUSTABLE CEILING FIXING SYSTEM l-35mm
l
ANTI - GLARE SAFETY GLASS
- AVS - OPTIMAL HEAT DISSIPATION
l
~:~~oo~~~~~,~~,~~~~
.
-~6513
59.00
:
115.00
~37.00
~~~~~~
WJ-3
6414
6514
6514.63
6614
:
77.00**
i
132.00
\*-8-Y
---.,-
Switch Start
HPF
TC
HF
TC-E
- Switch Start
Tt-0
~
HPF
I TC-0
HPF
j Tt-DE/D
:
HF
I K-DE
**
***
**
17i
**
G 23
2x 9w
44
167
2x 9w j 44
G24d-1
2xl3W
44
G24d-1 ~~- 2x 13w i 44
G24q-l/d-l ~---B--!!x 13W
44
I
I
I
I
I
210
210
120
110
110
100/140
100
1~0/140
100/l 40
100
: 44
220
100
G24q-1
SUPERTECHNE
- 0220
74.00
imm~- 129.00
a2.g
W!-
_
-
OPUY
---%l!Gx!
196.00
144.00
P.O.A.
P.O.A.
109.00
.129.00
1
[
R
146.00
100.00
104.00p-
Gl4d-1
EMHPF
TC-DE/D : Gl4q-Z/d-l
**
HF
TC-DE
Gl4d-1
**
$jtch Start
TC-D
Gl4d-3
*** ~ ________~~.
HPF
TC-D
Gl4dl3
**
EMHPF
TC-DE
Gl4q3/d-3
**
HF
-~%DE
Gl4q-3
CR
DHF
Tt-DE
Gl4q-1
CR
DHF
TC-DE
Gl4q-3
CR
HF
TC-TE
GXl4q-3
CR
H-F
TC-TE
(31149-4
***
HP F
**
-*
t
1
Mollablok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Molloblok
Mollublok
HF vermn
only detorhedgearbox
~~_~~
i
~
92.p,o
JaLOO [
6516.63
6516
*r
--~--L_~-
45
45
49
49
49
49
IP44
- FIXED RECESSED CFL COMPACT DOWNLIGHT

- MINIMUM DEPTH 1 OOmm DETACHED GEARBOX
l
l
0 MOLLABLOK - ADJUSTABLE CEILING FIXING SYSTEM l-35mm
- ANTI GLARE SAFETY GLASS
,
3
4-e >
l
AVS -OPTIMAL HEAT DISSIPATION
63
.~6515
6515.63s
6615
64 119
2xl3W
1x
2x
1x
1x
1x
1x
140
TC-D
ixiaw~'
44
lx 18 W .~~44~~7
ixiaw
lxl6W
lxl6W
lxl6W
lxl6W
lx18W
lxl6W
3lW
4lW
44
44
I
I
44
44
I
I
I
I
44
44
44
I
I
I
44
44
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
I 00/l 40
100
100
100
110 ~
110
110
120
110
100/140
100
100
100
100
100
140
140
lx 49
1 x 47"
2 x 49"
1x
1x
___~~~~1 x
1x
1x
1x
1x
1x
SO
50"
48"
50"
49"
50"
4b"
51"
Mollablok
Mollablok
Molloblok
Mollablok
Mollablok
Mollablok
Mollablok
Mollablok
Molloblok
Mollablok
Molloblok
S U P E RTE C H N E I P4 3
FIXED RECESSED CFL COMFORT DOWNLIGHT
DIE - CAST ALUMINIUM BODY
MOLtABLOK ADJUSTABLE CEILING FIXING SYSTEM l-35mm
l
ANTI - GLARE LOUVRE
- AVS -OPTIMAL HEAT DISSIPATION
l
:SZi
*
140
IO0
74.00
93.00
1.A. ;
go
P.O.A.
148.00
P.O.A.
96.00
105.00
P.O.A.
163.00
-p.(
236
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
CR
_________~
CR
CR
CR
CR
Switch Start
TC-D
HPF
TC-D
EMHPF
TC-DE/D
HPF
TC-DE
DHF
TC-DE
Switch Start _ TC-D
HPF
TC-D
EMHPF
TC-DE/O
HF
TC-DE
DHF
Tt-DE
Gl4d-1
G24d-2Gl4q-l/d-Z
Gl4q-2
Gl4q-1
Gl4d-3
61s3
Gl4q-3d-3Gl4q-3
6148.3
lxl8W
lxl8w
ZXIBW
lx18W
lxl8W
lxl6W
mlx16W
1 x 16 W
lxl6W
lxl6W
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
43
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
210
110
110
110
110
100/140
100/140
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
lx 51
Anti-glarelouvre
1 x 51
Anti-glarelouvre
1 x 51
Anti-glarelouvre
1 x 52
Anti-glarelauvre
lx 51
Anti-&e louvre
1 x 51
Anti-glarelouvre
1 x 51
Anti-glare louvre
1 x 52 -Anti-glare louvre
1 x 51 -Anti-glarelouvre
1x52&i&e
louvre-
3411
PAR
3413
20
& PAR
30
IP20
- RECESSEQ ADJUSTABLE DOWNLIGHT

* DIE - CAST ALUMINIUM BODY
COOL-BEAM
LIGHTEFFECTS
OBTAINED
WITHOUTTHE
USE
1
3311
OFTRANSFORMERS.
fp!pyi!mmnlfmnpp~
17.70
3313
14.40
18.80
***
Fixed
PAR30 1
PAR 20
PAR30
21.00
E27
E27
E27
7sw
20
sow_20
7sw
20
I
I
I
134
129
176
171
171
187
105
115
86
115
(aelbeameffed
hlheom elfed
(001hornefed
hlheom effed
HMPOT
COOLBEAM
LUMINAIRE
W/OTRANSFORMER
.
-
RECESSED ADJUSTABLE DOWNLIGHT

DIE - CAST ALUMINIUM BODY
POLYBLOK
AVS - OPTIMAL HEAT DISSIPATION
HI-SPOT
27.50
***
***
35LHoriz./QOveriHI-SPOT
32 vertitol HI-SPOT
BAN0 DE1GOTTARDO lugono
GZlO
GZlO
5ow
43
50W
43
II
II
Polyblok
Polyblok
QSP MM0
-
lP40/43
RECESSED DOWNLIGHT
SUPPLIED W/O TRANSFORMER
POLYBLOK SAFETY GLASS
DUOBLOK tAMPHOLDER
g=FF=p--!!ly!Y!~~y~~~~=
3789
3790
5.80
4.95
8.80
8.30
8.80
8.30
***
***
QSP MM0
-
supplied w/o
supplied w/o
QR-(6
QR-(6
GU 513
GU 5,3
5ow
sow
43
43
Ill
Ill
65
60
60
60
lP40/43
RECESSED DOWNLIGHT
SUPPLIED W/O TRANSFORMER
WITH ALUMINIUM REFLECTOR
POLYBLOK SAFETY GtASS^
~~~~~-~~~~~~~~~
4875
3960.
3921
3990'"
*O
4.95
6.90
6.90
**
supplied w/o
QT
64
2ow
20
Ill
58
18:s
Gold Reflert.
12.80
9.80
8.95
12.80
12.80
12.30
12.80
12.80
12.30
**
**
**
supplied w/o
supplied w/o
supplied w/o
QT
QT
QT
GY 6,35
GY 6,35
GY 6,35
5ow
5ow
5ow
40
43
43
Ill
Ill
III
86
65
60
60
60
60
Alum.Reflect.
Alum.Reflect.
Alum.Reflect.
LOW
VOLTAGE
TKACK
IN GOLD OR CHROME FINISH
03.2820
LENGHT 1000 mm
@j
((
!.8 90/3, 6.
f
..
03.2828
CENTER FEED
8i
x--d
LSE.-
--
34,60
FINISHES: 1 O/21
03.2822
LENGHT 3000 mm
55<60.,
02.95
10 .._.............._............._......._......_..__
200 VA/l 2 HF TRANSFORMER
PLUG-IN LIVE END
*(01/05
,43: ;I
Fi--;
Only for 03 2820)
03.2823
80
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4..!......
75 -7FINISHES. 1 O/21
FINISHES: 1O/21
1,60
,-__
80
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .3.........
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 1230
. . ........
,
20
. . . . . . . . . . . . . .6........
1
FINISHES: lo/21
FINISHES: lo/21
03.2827
90 ELBOW
^/
6
FINISHES: lo/21
03.2833
WIRE SUSPENSION KIT
WIRE LENGTH mm 2000
5
cl2
t
/d
~~~~$~~~~~-
FINISHES. 1 O/21
03.2826
,,,,,,,...
FLEXIBLE COUPLER
_ -%
, -Y >-*,
;? *+
090
03.2831
END CAP DEAD END
2fl50..
%&gg2z&
90
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6........
03.2830..
ADAPTOR
12.5A
_=~
03.2824
, STRAIGHT COUPLER ELiiRICAI
03.2825
STRAIGHT COUPLER MECHAilCAL
6%.!.!!..
FINISHES: 1 O/21
i@;ql
54
03.282
1
LENGHT 2000 mm
FINISHES. lo/21
I
25A
v
03.2834
CEILING/WALL
MOUNTING BRACKET PAIR
$10
FINISHES: 1 O/21
---
03.2650
050
WITH 12V ADAPTORFOR 12V SUPERTRACK
03.26
15 0 50
WITH 12V ADAPTORFOR12V SUPERTRACK
03.2621
0 50
2615
050
WITH 18 ADAPTORFOR LOW PROFILETRACK
FINISHES10/21/22/03/05
2621
050
WITH 12V ADAPTORFORLOW PROFILETRACK
FINISHES 10/21/22/24/03
2650
0 50
WITH 12V ADAPTORFOR LOW PROFILETRACK
FINISHES10/21/22
03.26
16 0 50
03.2626
0 50
WITH 12V ADAPTORFOR12V SUPERTRA
03.2665
0 50
MTH 12V ADAPTORFOR 12V SUPERTRACK
2616
050
WITH 12V ADAPTORFOR LOW PROFIlETRACK
FINISHES:10/21/22/03/05
2626
0 50
WITH 12V ADAPTORFOR LOW PROFILET
FINISHES:lo/21
2665
0 50
WITH 18 ADAPTORFOR LOW PROFILETRACK
FINITURE:10/21/22/29
03.26
17 0 35
03.2628
0 35
WITH 18 ADAPTORFOR 12V SUPERTRACK
2617035
WITH 12V ADAPTORFORLOW PROFIlETRACK
FINISHES:10/21/22/03/05
WITH 12V ADAPTORFOR LOW PROFIlETRACK
03.26
18 0 50
WITH I 2V ADAPTORFOR 12V SUPERTRACK
03.2629
0 50
2618
050
WITH 12V ADAPTORFOR LOW PROFILETRACK
FINISHES:lo/21
2629
0 50
WITH 12V ADAPTORFORLOW PROFIlETRACK
FINISHES:10/21/22/03
IP40 MBS GEARBOX C/W BALtAST AND

CAPACITOR W/O IGNITOR.
FOR LUMINAIRES C/W BUILT-IN IGNITOR
C/W PREWIRED PRIMARY AND tAMP LEADS 500 mm
SUPPLY VOLTAGE 24OV - 50 Hz
06.8800
35 Watt- 11 6x95x75mm
.._._......
06.8801.
70 (75*) Watt- 1 l6x95x75mm
..,_,.
06.8809
100 Watt - ll6x95x75mm
06.8802
150 Watt ll6x95x75mm
..,,......_..
06.8806
250 Watt 140x1 O8x92mm
.._..
06.8807
400 Watt - 140x1 O8x92mm
06.8808
400 Watt 195x1 O8x92mm
.._.._..
PREWIRED TOROIDAL TRANSFORMERS

02.9282
IP 42 20-50 Watt - 064 x h68 mm... ..!.!#
02.9353
IP 42 20-60 Watt- 064 x h68 mm .._.. !.!c?!
02.9401
IP42-20.105Wott-082xh92mm
.._.. ??c!!!
^-
ENCAPSULATED TOROIDAL TRANSFORMERS

INTEGRAL FIXING SYSTEM
02.9500
IP 40 - 20-50 Watt- 060 x h86 mm.
!?&?O...
02.9501
IP40-20-60
Watt-060x
h86mm
. . ..!?#.
02.9508
IP 40 - 20-105 Watt- 082 x h92 mm
..?!t?O
~ a
! IP40!
!!!?A
!!!?A _.____
!??I!
!!?A
??!!
!!?F!
!?F!
IP40 MBS GEARBOX C/W BAttAST,

CAPACITOR AND IGNITOR.
*C/W PREWIRED PRIMARY AND LAMP LEADS 500 mm
ji
<
i
,_
1,
,-,%z
((
_5
4Q33
. L
I. <<,.
-9
s
:; j!,cc
SUPPLY VOLTAGE 240V - 50 Hz

06.88
10
35 Watt ll6x95x75mm
06.881
1 70 (75*) Warn- 1 l6x95x75mm
06.8812
150 Watt- 1 l6x95x75mm
MODUtAR TOROIDAL TRANSFORMERS

INTEGRATED ASSEMBLY SYSTEM
02.9701
IP 40 - 200 Watt- 230xl80x95mm....6%?!!....
02.9704
IP 40 250 Watt- 230xl80x95mm....??&!!....
02.9702
IP 40 - 300 Watr- 230xl80x95mm....?.6~?!!....
ACCESSORIES
06.8877
.
IP 55 WEATHER PROOF ENCLOSURE FOR FOLLOWING
MBS MINI BALtAST SYSTEMS: 06.8800/06.8801
06.8809 /06.8802/06.881
l/06.881
2
IP 55 TOROIDAL BOXED TRANSFORMER

02.9530
IP 55 150 3xZO/5OW- 190xl40x70mm....%??....
02.9531
IP 55 - 200 4x20/50W~190x140x70mm....?%!%!....
02.9532
IP 55 300 6x20/50W-240x190x90mm....8?~?!!.,,,
02.9533
IP 55 400 8x20/50W-240x190x90mm..!?!r?!?....
02.9534
IP 55 500 10x20/50W-240x190x90mm..!.?%%!.,.,
06.8878
WALL-MOUNTING FIXING PLATE FOR FOLLOWING
MBS MINI BAtlAST SYSTEMS:06.8800/06.8801
06.8809 /06.8802/06.881
l/06.881
2
ENCASED ELECTRONIC TRANSFORMERS

02.9509
IP 42 - 20-105 Watt- 170x46~17
mm SUPERSLIM . . ..???....
02.9503
IP 42 20-60 Watt- 15Ox42x33,4mm
????!
02.9504
IP 42 - 20-105 Watt- 15Ox42x33,4mm
???!! .._.
02.9505
IP 40 50-l 50 Watt- 238x50x43mm
!%%!
02.9506
IP 40 - 75-200 Watt- 238x50x43mm
!?%
- Dimmable via inductive load or hard fired dimming systems.
~~~~~~02.9510
- Dimmable
load or hard fired dimming
!!!?A
!.?<?.o
!%?.o
HIT SOVA and HIT 105VA prewired electronic transformer

- Self regulating SELV Class II
- Soft Start
l
Enclosure self extinguishing
polycarbonate
*Suitable
for direct mounting on to normally flammable surfaces
- Dimmable via inductive load or hard fired dimming systems.
systems.
Arctic Hall a 1200 sqm complex,entirely Iglooarchitect Aimo Riisinen from

constructe m ice is locatedin Jukkastirvi, Gothenberg, Designerof Arctic Hall since
150 km north of the Arctic Circ e in
1994 has specified Re giani IF%
Swedishlapland. It consistsof a hotelwith ! luminaires for the seconB consecutive
rooms for 60 people a church,restaurant, year. Durin the extremely hard
cinema and an art galler Blocksof ice conditions in t i e north, we have tested
are cut from the frozen suri ace of the river several products. The temperarture has
Torne, which are of crystalline
been between-30C and -40C for many
transparency. The hotel rooms are weeks, reaching -47C. We tested
furnished in ice including ice beds,which amon st other roducts,Reggiani IP55
are coveredwith reindeer skins.At the end and I ii ave foun8,It to be the bestspotlight
of April the thaw begins and Arctic Hall in all categories(indoorsand outdoors).It
dissolvesinto the watersof the river,to rise is a perfect combination of function,
again in November.
flexibility an Design.
d,
50% of architecture is a question of how to use the light. Especiallyin the orctir area,
where we hove just a couple of hours o/daylight between December ondlonuary,
much run be done with the right lighting. "Almo Riiisiinen
o*/-
!?!
IP40-75-200Watt-258x50x43mm.........69.5(!
via inductive
IP40 HIT 105 AND HIT 50 PREWIRED

HF TRANSFORMERS
Ii 02.9521
I
IP 40 -Watt on Secondary 20-50 Watt 15Ox42x33,4mm
02.9529
.._..............................................
CE IP 40. Watt on Secondary 20-l 05 Watt - 15Ox42x33,4mm
!?A
.Fii
58
Performance
ConversionKits 23
CONVERTAPACK
I,
0 Converts
12Vlow
voltage Ii@ ting
The increasing
use of
Tungsten
Halogen
Dichroic
downlighters
has created
a
need for a power
supply
to
convert
them to emergency
use. Based on the proven
Beamlite
unit, the
Convertapack
uses a constant
voltage
charger
with sealed
lead acid batteries
to provide
emergency
power
when the
normal
supply
fails. The unit
has a changeover
relay which
automatically
isolates
a
transformer
supply
to the
lamps and connects
the two
outputs
to the battery
for
their rated load and duration.
The system
is protected
by a
low voltage
disconnection
circuit
to prevent
over
discharge
damaging
the
batteries.
Two outputs
are provided
and individually
fused to
prevent
a load circuit
short on
one lamp interrupting
the
supply
to the other lamp.
The Convertapack
may be
wall-mounted
either above
or
below
false ceilings
if required
as the use of sealed batteries
makes the unit virtually
maintenance
free.
The unit is available
either
with just a changeover
relay
which
provides
a nonmaintained
output,
or it can
be used in conjunction
with a
remote
transformer
to
provide
a maintained
operation
with full output
in
the emergency
condition.
GEMINILUX
A self contained,
high intensity, emergency lighting
twin lamp unit suitable for high bay industrial

long corridors,
This
powerf~rl,
knuckle
into
joint
operation
mounted
of two
by an automatic
mains
failure
beam
houses
the battery
and
and includes
a mounting
bracket
case which
fitted
acid type
and the charger
The
to the wall for simple
with
unit
tar light
deep
is fully
is fully
case. The
floodlights
floodlight
is rated
Each
charger
first
is constructed
each
on a uni\-usal
are brought
at 12~ 20~ and
of white
at the back which

fix
constant
stove
enamelled
can be separated
installation.The
by a low voltage
fLlly
protected
shows
battery
relay.
automatic
discharge
the battery
which
floodlights
OP 20 to 28 metres.
case and
from
etc.
adjustable
on the top of the charger
has an effective
supplied
remote
consists
The
protected
I2-ZOIPC)
warehouses, supermarkets,
rystem
mounted
sheet-steel
Weatherproof
lamp (GMR
robust
use,
battery
\-oltage.Scaled
disconnect
system.
from
the
is a 12~ sealed
Icad
lead acid batteries
are
Geminilux
units
al-c
chat-ged.
hy fLes
battery
and is equipped
and charger
with
a test witch
and a chxge
indicil-
continuity.
OPTIONS
The Gemnnlux
is avaIlable
m three baalc option\:
tlon) and Gh15E (5 hour durauon).

A range of additional options ful the1 enhance?
GhllE
(1 bout
the performance
duration),
GiV3E
and application
(?J hour
durd-
of the C;emmilnw.
Weatherproofing
A pol!cdtbonate
weatherproof
can he supplied
to house
1155 enclosure,
Geminilux
unit,
parncularh
up to GM
to the Catalogue
Number
- e.g. Geminilux 3EIPC.
Polycarbonate
mounting
boxes for remote lamps
Office
Food
Remote
(GMR
mounted
12-20)
for further
Factory
Plastic
lamp
Delay
are available
factories
where
Number
separately
broken
Please consult
PC
our Sales
for
the lamp
heads
to suit certain
applications
glass can he a hazml
PLIKIT:
Timer
Geminilux
range can he equipped
with a delay timer.
delay timer is usually required
when the Geminilux
unit
lighting,
which
1s set to thn-tv
Remote
has a relatively
slow warm-up
time
is used
to back-up
of say ten minutes.
The
timing
discharge
intelxil
mmutes
mounted
lamps
For interior
use, a white
IP.55 plastic
enclosure
Note:
are alw available.
en\ Irwm~ents,
add the suffix
Applications
such as food
The
The
fol harsh
please
informarion.
lens covers
Catalogue
\uitdble
3E. lb order,
The Geminilux
an extra remote
lamb.
stove enamelled
sheet-steel
box is available
and for exterior
use an
is recommended.
SE will achieve
a 5 hour duration
with the two lamps normally
fitted or 3 hours with
10.0. Drawings & Distribution
Board Charts
1096/2000
Electrical Layout
Charts:
MCPI, and DBI
I:50 and I:100
Page 14
RobertEbdon Limited
Unit 154, Cannon
5 Cannon Drive
telephone:
facsimile:
Workshops
London, El4 4AS

boerdtwm: Gp1
type:
200A MCB:AII MCBs
type B
site:
Greenwich
020 7515 5154

020 7515 5710
supplyfrom: MCCB Panel

wily dh: 4 x 95mm2 LSX +
50mrr? LSX (G/Y)
Pavilion
.__. - __.. --. - . -.-_.. -.- a, row3
4Yc
B
R
5Y
B
R
I 6Y
-
,
32A
4.0mrr?
B
R
7 Y
B
R
8 Y
B
2.5mr-V
LSF
LSF
Sockets. Plant room

Sockets. Conference room store
Automatic toilet flushing
Sockets. office, store and corridor
Sockets. Conference room (wall) and corridor
Hand dryer. Womens toilet
Hand dryer. Mens and disabled toilets
20A
32A
20A
32A
32A
20A
32A
Radial
Ring
Radial
Ring
Ring
Radial
Ring
2.5mm2
2.5mti
2.5mm2
2.5mrtV
2.5mti
2.5mti
2.5mm2
2.5mti
2.5mmz
2.5mti
2.5mti
2.5mti
2.5mrr?
2.5mm*
LSF
LSF
LSF
LSF
LSF
LSF
LSF
Comms cabinet
FireAlarm
1
calorifier
1
Lighting. Plant room
Emergency Lighting. Exhibitionarea
Lighting. Conference room
Lighting. Office and store
Lighting. Office and toilets
Lighting. Exhibitionarea
1
Exhibiion lighting Distributionboard
t
IOA
16A
Radial
Radial
2.5mrr?
2.5mm2
2.5mm2
2.5mm2
LSF
Fire-tug
40A
Radial
16.0mrr?
6A
6A
IOA
6A
IOA
32A
Radial
Radial
Radial
Radial
Radial
Radial
1.5mti
1.5mti
1 .Smrr?
1 .5mm2
1.5mm2
6.0mm2
1.5mti
l.5mm2
1.5mti
15mrr?
l.SmmZ
4.0mti
LSF
LSF
LSF
LSF
LSF
LSF
40A
Radial
4.0mti
2.5mrtV
LSF
R
10 Y
B
R
11 Y
R
R
12 Y
B
R
13 Y
B
R
14 Y
B
R
15 Y
B
R
16 Y
P
SWA(cpc = armour)
Robert Ebdon Limited
telephone:
facsimile:
Unit 154. Cannon Workshops

5 Cannon Drive
020 7515 5154

020 7515 5710
London, El4 4AS

boerdneme: MP1
type:
Site:
Greenwich
Pavilion
suppCfrm: Service head

supplyC&C 4c95mm2 SWA
MCCB Panel
device ciralit
reting type
R
1
1 Y Distributionboard GPl, adjacent
B
1
R 1
2 Y Main Disconnector
B
1
R
3Y
B
R I
4 Y KitchenPower
B I
conductm
ciraiit
comment
125A
Radial
70.0mm2
SWA(cpc = armour)
200A
Radial
95.0mm2
SWA(cpc = armour)
100A
Radial
25.0mm2
SWA(cpc = armour)
n
NNearp
I
APPROVED
11 .O. Residual Risks
11.1
Assessment
7
Risk factor
/ Action
Electricity
. ... . . .. ... ... .. .. .... .. .. .. Medium
HazardousSubstances
Medium
. ..i.
. ..j.
Noise and Vibration

Falls from Heights
Falling Objects
Manual Handling
Tripping
11.2
-i.
_../.
j Isolate when working

/ .. . ... ... . ... ... .. ... .. . ...........................................
/ Ensure fluorescent lamp disposal

waste site
...................................../..is
. through
... ... . ..an
... ...authorised
.. .. ... .. ..........................................
I
..Low
..................................!
.......................................
Low
/
_..f
_../.
Contacts
Emergency
Millennium Dome Maintenance
Call Out
Robert Ebdon Limited, Phone: 020 7515 5154
Breakdown
Robert Ebdon Limited, Phone: 020 7515 5154
Page 1.5
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH
HEALTH
& SAFETY FILE

SECTION 3
FILE REFERENCE
- EP - 3 - 51
GREENWICH
PAVILLION
(INCLUDING FIT-OUT)
GREENWICH
)
MILLENIUM
EXHIBITION
PAVILION
DOME
LIGHTING
OPERATION
AND
MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
51 ELECTRICAL
LTD
2 JAMAICA
ROAD
LONDON
SEI 26X
TEL: 020 7787 6313
FAX : 020 7787 6315
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
AND SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
EMERGENCY
MAINTENANCE
DRAWING
MANUFACTURERS
CONDITIONS,
HEALTH
& SAFETY
PROCEDURES
SCHEDULE AND PLANT DATA/TEST
DIRECTORY
& TECHNICAL
CERTIFICATES
LITERATURE
I
/
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Li,ghtina
SECTION ONE
INTRODUCTION
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Lighting
SECTION ONE
INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS
1.1
GENERAL
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
1.2
1.2.1
1.2.2
1.2.3
1.2.4
1.2.5
INTRODUCTION
AND SCOPE OF MANUAL
Scope of Manual
Contents of Manual
Design/Construction
Team Members
Definition of Terms
List of standard Electrical and Mechanical
ELECTRICAL
SYSTEMS
Units
DESCRIPTIONS
Introduction
Incoming Mains and Distribution
General Lighting Installation
Emergency Lighting
Small Power
ODeration and Maintenance Manual
1.1.
GENERAL
INTRODUCTION
AND SCOPE OF MANUAL
1.1.1 Scope of Manual

This manual contains the information, design and engineering data for the operation
and maintenance equipment forming the electrical service installation at:
Greenwich Pavilion, Millenium Dome, Greenwich Peninsular, London SElO.
It is intended that this manual will be used to assist a qualified electrical engineer or
electrician experienced in the operation and maintenance of eIectrica1 installations,
and to provide him with a comprehensive working knowledge of the various systems
installed within this building.
The information, procedures and maintenance instructions contained are those valid
at the time of preparation and the date of issue. Changes arising in building function,
operating hours, legislation, etc will necessitate revisions to be made in order to
retain the manuals validity and usefulness.
The information within this manual will allow maintenance to be carried out safely
and reliably as well as providing important data upon which calculations may be
made for design of alterations and/or additions, should the requirement arise.
It should be noted that this manual is not intended to supersede or conflict with any
standard maintenance/inspection
routines already in use by the building owner.
This manual is not intended to provide a detailed planned maintenance programme of
activities. Since such a document pre-supposes resources in terms of personnel,
equipment, spares and in-house technical expertise. It is the building owners
responsibility to formulate a planned maintenance programme using this manual as a
base.
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Linhtinp
1.1.2
Contents of Manual
This manual has been sub-divided into sections, each dealing with a specific aspect
of the electrical service installation. It is intended to provide the user with an
understanding and working knowledge of electrical systems that have been provided.
Its main use will therefore be as a reference, including a section for all test and
commissioning documentation.
Since the user will require identifying certain
different aspects, i.e. general reference, technical information, operating details,
safety measures etc, the sub-division has been arranged to provide for this degree of
application.
SECTION
INTRODUCTION
AND SYSTEM
DESCRIPTIONS
This section outlines the purpose of the manual with information on its contents,
design/construction team members and definition of terms. This section also
contains descriptions of each system installed as listed in the section contents.
SECTION
EMERGENCY
CONDITIONS,
HEALTH
AND SAFETY
This section sets out the most likely items that require immediate action as a result of
emergency conditions due to explosion, flood, power failure, etc. It also provides a
guide as to good practical safety measures to be adopted in order to reduce the
possibility of accidents to maintenance personnel and other persons using the
building.
SECTION
MAINTENANCE
PROCEDURES
This section describes the recommended periodic maintenance functions for each
items of equipment as listing in the indexes. This is divided into daily, weekly,
monthly, 3 monthly, 6 monthly, annual and 2 yearly sections, but it is left to the
user to develop a system for keeping records arising from the numerous
inspections. These functions should be read in conjunction with the manufacturers
literature in Sections.
SECTION
DRAWING
S AND PLANT
DATA/TEST
CERTIFICATES
This section contains information in scheduled format in regard to as installed

drawings, recommended spares and other items of a general nature.
This section also contains records of all test carried out during the course of
construction and prior to handing over.
SECTION
MANUFACTURERS
DIRECTORY
This section contains a list of all main equipment manufacturers/suppliers

names,
addresses and telephone numbers. A separate sub-section giving other useful
company names, trading associates etc, with addresses and telephone number is also
included. This is intended to extend the building owners reference to other
organisations, should further specific or general information on certain matters, be
required.
This section also contains the manufacturers
literature, which must be read in conjunction
technical and operating/maintenance

with details in Section 3.
1.1.3 Design/Construction Team Members

Companies and organisations that were responsible for the design and construction of
this building are listed below for reference purposes. The client would be at liberty
to contact any of these companies, but during the first year following practical
completion/acceptance
it would be advisable that any communications be made via
the Contractor.
Client:
New Milleniun Experience
Drawdock Road
Greenwich
London SE10 OBB
Main Contractor
& Planning
Company
Supervisor:
C-Beck Limited
Victory House
Cox Lane
Chessington
Surrey
KT9 1SG
Tel:
(020) 8974 0500
Fax:
(020) 8974 0555
Designer:
Bentheim
Rossetti Studios
72 Flood Street
London
SW3 5TF
Tel:
(020) 7376 3427
Fax:
(020) 7376 3428
Exhibition
Lighting
Installation
Contractor
SI Electrical Ltd
2Jamaica Road
London
SE1 2BX
Tel:
(020) 7787 6313
Fax:
(020) 7787 6315
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Liahting
1.1.4 Definition of Terms

Maintenance
Maintenance is the process of sustaining the overall Engineering Equipment installed
in any particular Building or Department, with all men and material needed to do so,
and is broadly divisible into the following:
4
b)
c>
4
Provision of Material
Holding of Material
Distribution of Material
Servicing of Equipment
Servicing
The term Servicing is the standard generic term to describe activities necessary to
keep all equipment in serviceable and operable condition. It embraces such
activities as inspection, repair, reconditioning, replacement, modification and
lubrication as defined below.
1.
2.
Inspection
a>
The examination, and if necessary, the test of equipment, to include

associated equipment and component parts, to ascertain its condition.
b)
Review by a Supervisor, of the work done by a tradesman to ensure

that it has been done properly.
Repair
Repair is the process of rectifying damage wear, it restores equipment to a
serviceable condition and may be done by: -
3.
Replacing damaged or deteriorated
parts by serviceable parts.
b)
Making part good by the use of suitable tools and materials or by
c>
Adjustment
Final Inspection and testing
Reconditioning
Reconditioning is the process under which equipment is either completely
stripped or dismantled sufficiently to permit parts to be adequately inspected,
and includes: -
a>
b)
c>
4
Cleaning, inspection and (where necessary) testing components

Repair
Incorporation of modification as required.
Re assembly and final test.
4.
Servicing
Schedule
A servicing schedule is a document listing a number of servicing operations

or activities which are grouped together and required to be done in respect of
items of equipment as prescribed intervals of use or time. To amplify the
extent and type of servicing required the following accepted meanings are
used t describe the inspection and servicing schedules.
a>
Inspect
b)
Check - Make a comparison of a measurement of times, pressures,

temperature, dimension, resistance, or other quantity with a known
figure for that measurement.
c>
Test - Ascertain by using the appropriate test equipment

component functions correctly.
Examine - Make a visual survey of the condition of an item
Fit - Correctly attach one item, which has previously been removed.
f)
Refit - Replace correctly an item which has previously been

removed.
Et>
Disconnect
- Uncouple or detach cables, pipe lines or controls
h)
Reconnect
- The reverse of operation (g)
- (see Aspects of Servicing Inspection
above)
whether a
Commissioning
Commissioning is the advancement of an installation from the stage of static
completion to full working order to meet specified requirements and includes
the setting of an installation to work.
Testing
Testing is the evaluation of the performance of a commissioned installation
and recording the results in a form that can be used for future reference.
1.1.5
List of SI Electrical
and Mechanical
Units
Measurement
Unit
Unit Abbreviation
Temperature
Degrees Celsius
Speed
Revolutions
Revolutions
vm
Per Minute
Per Second
rps
Capacity
Litre
Heatflow
Kilowatt
kW
Area
Square Metre
m2
Length
Metre or Millimetre
mormm
Mass/ Weight
Kilogram
kg
Force
Newton
Power
Kilowatt
kW
Time
Minutes/Seconds
min or s
Volt
Kilovolt
B
kV
Energy
Watt-hour
Kilowatt-hour
Wh
kWh
Capacitance
Farad
Reactive volt-ampere
Volt-ampere
(reactive)
Illumination
Lux
Lux
Frequency
Hertz
Hz
Noise
Decibel
dB
Difference
potential
of
(reactive)
Var
kVAr
BS 7671:1992
Common
Electrical
symbols
including
their first
Unit Abbreviation
Measurement
Unit
Current (general term)
In
Nominal current of protective device
Ib
Design current of Circuit
Resistance of supplementary
Bonding conductor
Ohm
Ze
That part of the earth fault loop

Impedance which is external to
The installation
Ohm
zs
Earth fault loop impedance
Ohm
reference
1.2.
ELECTRICAL
1.2.1
Introduction
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTIONS
This document cover the electrical installations at:

Greenwich Pavilion
Millenium Dome
Drawdock Road
Greenwich Peninsular
London SE10 OBB.
In brief the installations
1.2.2
are as follows: -
Exhibition
Lighting
Exhibition
lighting;
Incoming
Mains
distribution
board
and Distribution
The incoming mains distribution boards were supplied and installed by others and do
not form part of the works carried out under this contract.
A 32a TPN connection was made available by others within the main distribution
equipment.
The exhibition lighting distribution board and control contactors are located within
the service cupboard adjacent to the plant room but accessible from the main
exhibition area, and manufactured by MEM Ltd as listed in the equipment schedule.
1.2.3
General
Lighting
Installation
No works were carried out to the general lighting as this did not form any part of this
contract.
1.2.4
Emergency
Lighting
No works were carried out to the emergency lighting as this did not form any part of
this contract.
1.2.5
Small
Power
No works were carried out to the small power as this did not form any part of this
contract.
1.2.6
Fire Alarm
and Smoke
Detection
No works were carried out to the tire alarm system as this did not form any part of
this contract.
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Linhtinn
SECTION TWO
EMERGENCY CONDITIONS,
HEALTH & SAFETY
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Lightinn
SECTION TWO
EMERGENCY
CONDITIONS
- HEALTH
& SAFETY
CONTENTS
2.1
HEALTH
& SAFETY GENERAL
2.2
EMERGENCY
2.3
SAFETY CHECK LIST
PRECAUTIONS
CONDITIONS
2.1
HEALTH
& SAFETY GENERAL
PRECAUTIONS
CONTENTS
2.1.1
Introduction
2.1.2
CDM Regulations
2.1.3
COSHH
2.1.4
Working Conditions
2.1.5
Live Electrical Parts
2.1.6
Moving Parts
2.1.7
Electric Tools/Equipment
2.1.8
Hand Tools
2.1.9
Lifting
2.1.10
Working Area
2.1.11
Protective Clothing
2.1.12
Dangerous Chemicals
2.1.13
Permit to Work
2.1.14
General Items
2.1.15
Replacement
2.1.16
Fire Precautions
2.1.17
Warning and Safety Notices
and Access
Parts
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Liahtina
2.1.1
Introduction
It is the prudent and legal duty of the maintenance authority and/or building owner to
ensure as far as is reasonably practical the health and safety of all maintenance staff and
other people using the premises. This section of the manual is a guide to some of the
precautions to be taken by both management and staff to achieve this.
The equipment and materials referred to in the section should be used, operated and
maintained strictly in accordance with these operating instructions or manufacturers
literature as appropriate.
It is the duty of every member of the maintenance team to take reasonable care for his
own health and safety and that of other people, who may be affected by his/her acts or
omissions whilst at work. It is strongly recommended that at least one copy of the Health
and Safety at Work Act (1974) is available on the premises and has been read and
understood by all maintenance personnel.
Maintenance staff should ensure they are aware of and understand IN HOUSE rules
and regulations which will have been formulated by the maintenance authority and will
incorporate additional safety precautions found to be necessary for local conditions.
It is also incumbent on all persons including building owners, end users, maintenance
authorities and maintenance staff whether resident or visiting, to ensure that they are
kept informed about the current and pending legislation in respect to health and safety.
Management
plays an important role in this matter by ensuring that appropriate
training/induction
courses are given to employees and visiting personnel.
Risk assessment
2.1.2
CDM
is a continuous
procedure
and responsibility
Regulations
To improve the management of the health and safety aspect of a construction project the
Construction (Design and Management)
Regulations 1994, or CDM Regulations for
short, have been introduced to establish new duties and build on those imposed by the
Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations 1992.
The Management of Health and Safety at Work Regulations 1992 made more explicit
the requirement of Sections 2 and 3 of the Health and Safety at Work Act 1974.
The CDM Regulations affect most construction projects and impose duties throughout
all stages on clients, designers, professionals, contractors and site workers including the
self employed.
The CDM Regulations also introduced a new level of management to be carried out by
the project Planning Supervisor. If known the Planning Supervisor for this project is
listed with the Design / Constructions Team Members in Section 1.
The Planning Supervisor is responsible for notification to the Health and Safety
Executive and for co-ordinating the health and safety aspects of the design and planning
phase. The Planning Supervisor also has to ensure that a health and safety plan is
prepared, monitor the health and safety aspects of the design, advise the client on the
satisfactory allocation of resources for health and safety and prepare a health and safety
file.
The health and safety plan is primarily concerned with the construction phase and is
implemented by the Principal Contractor. However, aspects that arise from the plan
and/or that are encountered during the construction
phases that have possible
implications on the future aspects of the project, i.e. maintenance, demolition, must be
recorded in the Health and Safety File.
The Health and Safety File is a document that has been progressively enhanced and
added to, commencing from the concept/design stage, through construction phase, to
final handover. The file is a record of information for the client/end user, which tells
those who might be responsible for the structure in the future of the risks that have to be
managed during maintenance, repairs or renovation.
It is the responsibility of the Planning Supervisor to ensure that the completed Health
and Safety File is made available to the client/end user at the time of handover. The
client/end user has to make the file available to those who will work on any future
design, building maintenance or demolition of the structure.
This document is not the Project
appendix to such a file.
2.1.3
Health
and Safety File but may well be an
COSHH
The Control of Substances Hazardous to Health Regulation 1988 (COSHH) requires that
no work which is liable to expose anyone to substances hazardous to health shall be
carried on unless an assessment has been made. This means:evaluating the risks to health arising from work involving
to health and then
substances hazardous
establishing what has to be done to meet the requirements

COSHH Regulations.
of the whole of the
The assessments have to be suitable and sufficient

elements.
Greenwich Puvilion Exhibition Lightinn
in relation to both of these
Operation and hriaintenance Manual
It is an essential requirement and duty for employers to make an assessment of the

health risks created in the work place and of the measures to be taken.
COSHH also requires employers to introduce health surveillance to an appropriate
level where substances are present that may damage peoples health. As part of the
CDM Regulations COSHH assessments will have already been carried out for the
construction phase and these are likely to remain relevant for maintenance procedures
and future modifications carried out to the installations.
However, assessments must be continually reviewed and, if necessary, updated should
work procedures alter or if it becomes apparent that the original assessment is no longer
valid.
Further advice on COSHH can be found in the following
publications:-
COSHH - Construction
A step-by-step Guide to COSHH Assessment
Health Surveillance under COSHH - Guidance for Employers
The above publications
Industry Advisory Committee
are available for HSE Books.
The HVCA and ECA both publish COSHH data sheets covering a range of substances
commonly used in the industry and which can be obtained for use as a guide.
2.1.4
Working
Conditions
The requirements of the Health & Safety at Work Act also include and are relevant to
maintaining the installation in a safe working condition and also to the safety of
maintenance personnel themselves.
There is, for example very little need for maintaining equipment or carrying out repairs
whilst equipment is live. Only fault finding procedures and machinery adjustments are
likely to be carried out under this condition.
When measurements are needed to be taken with covers etc. removed, then proper
approved and fused test probes should be used and adequate warning notices displayed.
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Lizhtinp
Exposed live conductors
should never be left unattended.
Good working practices also mean that the work place should be kept clean and tidy am
that proper procedures are followed and dangerous short cuts avoided.
Remember:-
Do NOT work on live equipment.

Remove supply first by local isolators and/or removal of fuses.
Check that circuit is dead before starting work.
2.1.5
Live Electrical
Parts
All guards, screens, shields, covers and lids must be secured with all screws and nuts before
machinery is operated. Do not leave unattended live exposed parts. Ensure that all test
equipment has proper insulated test probes. All live terminals must be marked accordingly.
2.1.6
Moving
Parts
Make sure that all moving parts are properly guarded so that inadvertent contact is avoided.
Particular attention must be given to items that can catch clothing.
Avoid working on machinery with guards removed.
2.1.7
Electric
Tools/Equipment
The IEE Code of Practice gives specific guidance on procedures for maintaining the safety
of portable and transportable electrical equipment. The table on the following page details
the frequency of inspection and testing.
Operating
Environment
Construction
Industrial/Commercial
Equipment
Public
used by
Hand-held (11 OV)

Stationary
Info. Technology
Moveable
Portable
Hand - held
Stationary
Info. Technology
Moveable
Portable
Hand - held
>
>
12 months
12 months
12 months
6 months
6 months
12 months
12 months
6 months
6 months
6 months
12 months
12 months
12 months
6 months
6 months
12 months
12 months
12 months
12 months
12 months
In addition to the above recommendations all portable tools should be regularly checked for
frayed or damaged leads, and the condition of plugs.
When using drills and other cutting equipment, ensure that the correct safety equipment is
used, i.e. gloves, safety glasses.
Do not cut or drill walls immediately above or below accessories, or other electrical
equipment without carrying out prior checks.
2.1.8
Hand Tools
Always use the correct tools.
Incorrect tools can cause injury and can result in damage to equipment.
If chisels and punches are mushroom-headed,
defective tools should be replaced.
they should be ground smooth. Worn or
2.1.9 Lifting and Access

To gain access to equipment installed in difficult
and scaffolding will often be required.
locations or at high level, ladders steps
Make sure that such equipment is kept in good condition. It should be examined
regularly and any defective parts repaired or replaced.
It must always be used in the approved manner.
Ladders should be secured at the top, or if this is not possible, firmly fixed at the bottom
or footed by a second person.
Check chains, ropes, slings, hooks, eye-bolts, shackles, etc., regularly, and also before
use, to ensure their suitability and condition and that the safe working load is clearly
marked. This should be on an Insurance schedule.
Do not exceed the safe working load.
2.1.10 Working Area

Make sure that access-ways, corridors and stairs are clear and free of materials likely to
cause a person to slip.
Ensure that tools and equipment,
spare parts etc. are put away after use.
Check that the guard rails and hand rails are secure and make sure that they are provided
where required.
Guard rails must be provided wherever a person could fall. For maintenance purposes,
footholds and handholds should be provided wherever the maintenance staff are liable to
fall more than two meters.
Access to equipment should always be by approved means.
2.1.11 Protective Clothing

Ensure that adequate protective clothing is available for use during normal maintenance
tasks and for possible emergencies. It should be of the correct size and readily available for
new staff and visitors. Items required will include:-
Overalls with sufficient quantity to allow for laundering.
b)
Hard hats.
c>
Adequate protective boots or shoes.
Heavy duty industrial gloves.
Plastic or PVC gloves.
f)
Face masks with spare filters.
g>
Eye protection.
2.1.12 Dangerous Chemicals

Where dangerous chemicals are used on an electrical installation, battery acid for example,
make sure you know how to deal with spillage and emergencies.
Petrol, paraffin and white spirit are often used for cleaning in electrical installations. Make
sure that spillages are dealt with promptly and do not allow any chemicals to run into the
waste water systems and drains.
Where batteries are stored or maintained personnel should be made aware of the risk of an
H2 explosion and signs similar to below should be displayed:CAUTION
CAUTION
- No exposed lights or smoking
- Exposed battery connections and busbars.
Protective clothing and eye protection should be worn when dealing with other stronger
cleaning chemicals.
Protective gloves, plastic aprons and eye protection should be worn when dealing with
battery acid and clean water should be available for emergency use in the event of accidental
contact.
Where smoking is prohibited and when chemicals are in use, make sure all safety
instructions are adhered to.
2.1.13 Permit to Work

One of the most important aspects of safety, but often neglected, is to let others know
what work is proceeding and where the staff are located. This is all the more important
when dealing with electrical circuits that may effect plant and equipment being operated
by others. Additionally,
circuits being worked on must be made safe and remain safe
throughout the maintenance task.
The best method to ensure that everyone using, operating or maintaining a system is
aware of work that is being carried out, is to operate a permit to work system. Not
only will this improve safety, but it will also enhance the efficiency of the maintenance
function by encouraging better planning.
Before any work on a system or piece of equipment is carried out, the operative is
required to complete a permit to work form which is agreed and signed by the
supervisor in charge. He will ensure that other persons who need to know of the work
are informed.
One copy of the form should be put on display whilst the work is proceeding
filed for future reference.
An example of a Permit to Work is given on the following
safe methods of working with electrical power supplies
BS6626 and BS6867.
and then
page and further advice on

can be found in BS6423,
Example of Permit
to Work - Electrical
Services
Permit to Work on Electrical Equipment ... ... .. ... ... . .. .. .. ... .... .. ... . No
Part I Authorisation for Work.
A.
This permit is issued for the following work ... ... ... ... .... .. .... .. .... .. .... .. .. .. .... ... .... ... ... ... ... .... .. ... ... .... ..
By .. ... .... .... ... .. ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. ... .... ... .. .... ... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... .. ... ... To
being an authorised person in charge of switching and earthing operations.
B. Switching and Isolating. The apparatus to be disconnected from all live conductors by the following
operation ..,.........................................................................................................................
C. Potential Tests and Earthing. Potential indicator test to be applied before fixing earths at the following
points . ... .... ... ... .. .... ... ... .. .... ... ... ... .... .. .. .. ... .... .... .. .... ... ... .... ... ... ... ... ... ... .... .. .... .... ... .... .. ..........
D.
Danger Notices are to be posted at: ,...,.....,...................................................................................
E.
Caution Notices are to be posted at: .

Time .....................................
Rank . .... . ...
.. ... ... .
Date ......................... Signed ...........................................................

... ... . ... .. ., .. ,. .. .. ... .. ... .. .._ ...
.. ... . .. ,. .. _,
.. ..
_.
Part 2 Declaration
I hereby declare that the operations detailed in Parts 1, B, C & D have been completed and the apparatus
detailed in Part 1, A, is safe to work on and any adjacent live equipment is securely padlocked. It will not
again be made live until the Clearance certificate in Part 4 is completed.
ALL OTHER APPARATUS IS DANGEROUS
Part 3 Receipt
I hereby declare that I accept responsibility for doing the work on the apparatus detailed in Part 1, A, of
this permit and that no attempt will be made by me or by men under my control to work on any other
apparatus.
Part 4 Clearance of Work This is to certify that the work detailed in Part 1, A above has been
(stopped/completed)* men, ge and tools have been withdrawn and local earths removed.
Time . .... .,....................... Date . ... .. ... .... ... .. ... .... Signed ... ... ... .. .... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .... .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... Rank
(*Delete the word that does not applv.)
Part 5 Cancellation I hereby declare this Permit to Work cancelled, and the earth connections applied at
points indicated in Part 1, C. The apparatus is now ready for switching into service.
Time .. ... ... .... ... ... .. ... ... .. ... ... ... .Date ,................,,.,...... Signed ...._........ ,.................., ... ... .. ... .... .. ... ... ... .. . 1-k
.. .. .. .. ... ... ... .... ... .. .. ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... .... .... .. ... ... .... ... ... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .............................................
Time.. .., .... ..... .. ... .. .. ... .. ,.. ... .._.Date., . .. .. .. .... ... .... .. ..Signed ... .. ... .... .. ... ... .. .. ... ... .. .... ... ... .. ... ... ... ... .. .... kaxuc
.. .. .... ... ... .... .... ... .. ... .. ... .. ... .. .. ... .. .. ... .. .. . ... .... .... ... .. ... .... ... ... .... .. ... .. ... ... ... ... ... ... .............................................
I
NOTES ON PERMIT
TO WORK
Part 1 should be completed by the person authorising the work before issuing to the
person for the switching isolation, testing and earthing operations. Where the person
authorising the work is responsible for the switching etc., he should issue this to himself
as a check on procedure.
Part 2 should be completed by the person responsible for the switching,
and earthing operations after their completion.
isolating, testing
Part 3 both the original and the duplicate should be signed by the person actually in
charge of the work on the apparatus. The original should be retained by the person
actually in charge of the work until the work is stopped or completed. The duplicate
should be retained by the person authorising the work.
Part 4 should be signed by the person actually in charge of the work when the work has
been stopped or completed and then handed back to the person who authorised the work.
Part 5 should be signed by the person responsible
unavoidable absence, by a person of equivalent status.
for signing
Part 2, or in his
2.1.14 General Items

a)
Keys :
Access to all plant rooms, electrical cupboards and equipment therein which
requires a key to open for access, should be controlled and restricted to
authorised personnel only.
b)
First Aid:
First aid boxes should be provided in accessible positions. These should be kept
clean and in good repair. Contents of the boxes should be regularly checked and
any missing items replaced.
c)
Protective Clothing :
Where appropriate, wear protective clothing and equipment, i.e. goggles,
respirators, safety harnesses. Protective screens should be provided when arc
welding is in progress.
d) Drive Guards and Housings :

Never work on moving parts of machinery. Exercise caution if working on the
stationary parts. Ensure that moving parts are protected by suitable guards. Be
aware of warning notices such as-REMOTELY
CONTROLLED
PLANT
Do not put hands or objects on any item of stationary rotating machinery as this
may start automatically at any time.
2.1.15 Replacement Parts

An adequate stock of spare parts must be maintained in order to ensure that all routine
maintenance and repairs can be carried out. Make sure that the correct spare parts are
stocked and checked again upon issue to maintenance staff.
If temporary repairs are necessary using incorrect materials, make sure that the proper
materials are installed as soon as practicable.
This is most important where fuses and circuit breakers are concerned. Incorrect fuses
can lead to failures, increased danger and tires.
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Lightina
2.1.16 Fire Precautions

a) All extinguishers must be periodically examined and contents renewed as required.
A separate log listing all types of extinguisher, their location and dates when
examined should be kept with the maintenance authority.
b) Each fire alarm associated with the building should be tested weekly.
c) Care must be taken, and adequate protection provided, to prevent tire when welding
or carrying out operations involving the application of heat.
A table is given below showing the various extinguishers
European Standard EN2 and EN3)
) Fire
class
Class
Class
V3
Class
and their uses (Fire Class as
@Dr
Class
Fires
Flammable
Wood,
Water RED
cloth,
liquids,
petrol,
paper or similar
oils, grease and
combustible
materials
fats
Most
Fires involving
Fires involving
purpose
all
hazards
metals,
gases
magnesium
Sodium, Titanium,
Zirconium
suitable
Do not use
Do not use
Do not use
DANGEROUS
DANGEROUS
Suitable
Do not use
Suitable
DANGEROUS
conductor)
DANGEROUS
A.B.C
involving
electrical
Most suitable
Most
suitable
powder
Do not use
(non
1BLUE
Monnex
&
Not suitable
BC,dty
powder
except
BLUE
surface
1metal powder
Most
suitable
Suitable
for small
Do not use
Suitable
DANGEROUS
conductor)
(non
Most suitable
Not suitable
tires
Not suitable
Not suitable
Not suitable
(BLUE
Carbon
I
Dioxide
BLACK
Foam CREAM
Not suitable
Most
except
for
leaves no
surface
tires
deposits
Suitable
suitable
Suitable
Most suitable
Not suitable
I
/ FC
Do not use
Most Suitable
DANGEROUS
(non-conductor)
Do not use
Not suitable
DANGEROUS
F. GREEN
Suitable
Suitable
Suitable
Do not use
I
Most
suitable
In accordance with the latest standards all extinguishers

identified by coloured text, etc. as indicated.
DANGEROUS
(non-conductor)
should be red with the type being
2.1.17 Warning
and Safety Notices
Whenever hazards cannot be avoided or adequately reduced employers are obliged to

ensure that safety and/or health signs are prominently displayed. The signs should
conform to BS 5378 / BS 5499 Part I : 1990 and the Safety Signs at Work Regulations.
The principal of the regulations is that signs should be of a distinctive colour and shape
with the use of a pictogram to provide the essential details and these fall into the
categories shown on the following page:-
Emergency
Aid
Fire Fighting
Escape and First
Equipment
Rectangular in shape with a white pictogram

and/or words on a red background. At least
50% of the sign must be red.
These signs should be round in shape with a
white pictogram on a blue background. The
blue area must account for at least 50% of the
sign. Additional words can be given using
white characters on a blue background.
Mandatory
These signs should be triangular in shape with a

black pictogram on a yellow background with
black edging. The yellow area must account for
50% of the sign. Additional wording can be
given using black characters on a yellow
background.
Warning
The following
Rectangular or square in shape with a white

pictogram and/or words on a green background.
The green area should account for at least 50%
of the sign.
recommendations
should also be observed:-
1. At all times warning and safety notices must be maintained

worded to give clear instructions.
2. Notices covering First Aid and Resuscitation
all plant rooms.
and properly displayed and
from Electric Shock must be displayed in
3. Proper tire precautions must be observed within the plant rooms and building.
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Linhtina
Oueration and Maintenance Manual
4. Notices must be displayed stating :

NO SMOKING
or SMOKING
PROHIBITED
IN THIS AREA
5. All fire fighting equipment must be clearly marked and available for use.
A warning notice stating the maximum voltage present should be fixed to every item of
equipment (or enclosure) which contains circuits operating at voltage in excess of 250 volts
(usually 3 phase circuits) where such voltage would not normally be expected.
Where accessories, control gear or switchgear are wired on different phases of a three
phase supply, but can be reached simultaneously, a notice must be placed in a position
where anyone removing an accessory, or gaining access to the terminals of control gear,
switchgear etc. is warned of the maximum voltage.
In addition, all live terminal blocks that are not rendered safe by switching
equipment isolator should be labeled accordingly.
off an
Particular attention should be paid to control circuits, which are fed from a separate
source that remains live even after operation of the main switch. In these circumstances
a separate label should be fitted and marked:
DANGER
- CONTROL
CIRCUIT
ALIVE
ISOLATE
ELSEWHERE
All rooms containing switchgear above 240 volts should carry a warning
switchgear or similar.
It is also useful to have a stock of temporary
Typical labels required would be: DANGER
- 415 VOLTS
DANGER
DANGER
- CIRCUIT
labels with suitable means of attachment.
- EQUHMENT
- OUT OF ORDER
UNDER
REPAIR
label 415 volt
UNDER
REPAIR
- DO NOT USE
- DO NOT SWITCH
ON
2.2
EMERGENCY
CONDITIONS
CONTENTS
2.2.1
Introduction
2.2.2
Electrical Power Failure
2.2.3
Procedure for Dealing with Faults
2.2.4
Restoration of Supply
2.2.5
Electric Shock
2.2.6
Electrical Fires
2.2.7
Fire (Non-electrical)
2.2.1
Introduction
This section is in no way related to or to interfere with Standing Orders that exist for
the evacuation of the buildings in respect of an emergency situation such as fire, gas
leaks etc., but to give an indication to the buildings services engineers as to genera1
safety measures to follow.
By general agreement an Emergency Condition is defined as one which places at risk the
safety of personnel, or creates a hazard to the Building or Plant.
The Building and the Plant have been designed and constructed in accordance with
statutory regulations, local by-laws and British Standard Codes of Practice. Provided the
plant is operated and maintained in accordance with the recommendations issued by the
various manufacturers, the likelihood of an Emergency Condition arising is minimal.
It is strongly recommended that personnel operating or involved with running this
installation make themselves aware of the location of all shut off points and emergency
knock off buttons, as speed of action will minimize property destruction and could
save lives.
The most important single precaution against a serious hazard is, therefore, adherence to
approved operating and maintenance procedures.
If an Emergency Condition
following categories:-
2.2.2
should appear, it is most likely to be within
a>
Fire or explosion caused by a gas leak.
b)
Electrical fire caused by severe short circuit or insulation breakdown.
c>
Flooding of an area caused by rupture of a pipe or joint.
one of the
Electrical Power Failure

Caution must be exercised where equipment is likely to automatically
re-start after
a power failure, and any personnel working on or near the machinery must be
warned accordingly. Such equipment should be isolated on loss of power.
When a power failure occurs, first check to establish whether it is an Electricity Board
failure or a circuit breaker tripped or a main fuse blown on the main switchgear side of
the installation. If it is established that it is an Electricity Board failure, notify the board
but only if failure is unique to the particular consumer or unplanned.
Checks should also be made that emergency lighting has come into operation and any
power failure devices such as on tire alarms are activated. Immediate steps should be
taken to establish the cause of the power failure.
)
2.2.3
Procedure for Dealing with Faults

First of all, the area of the problem must be established to locate the probable cause.
Particular attention must be paid to circuits which could be easily be effected by
adjacent circuits in different ways. Examination of the as installed drawings and
circuit charts will enable the origin and location of all circuits to be identified.
Using an appropriate tester, the offending
the cause of the fault is determined.
circuit should be tested at strategic points until
Fuses should be tested with a continuity

size fuse is selected.
tester to establish their state. Ensure the correct
Once the location of the fault has been established, no work should be carried out until
all circuits feeding into the area in question have been isolated.
The circuit should not be reinstated until the cause of the fault has been rectified.
2.2.4
Restoration of Supply
Upon restoration of supply, some equipment will need to be manually re- started.
If the failure was due to an Electricity Board fault, very little attention will be required,
apart from starting manually operated plant. However, if an electrical fault was the cause
of the failure, it may be necessary to check up-stream of the fault to ensure that no
further circuits have tripped.
2.2.5
Electric Shock
Everyone should be familiar with the procedure and treatment for electric shock,
particularly those directly involved with operating and maintaining electrical systems.
By law maintenance workshops and switchrooms must display a notice giving the
emergency action required. All staff must become familiar with this procedure and be
aware of the names and normal locations of the nominated First Aides.
Make sure the notices are clearly displayed with the telephone numbers of emergency
services.
!
2.2.6
Electrical Fires
Cleanliness of equipment, adequate ventilation protection from water and dampness, and
gas or petrol fumes, correct adjustment of overload protection from devices and the
fitting of fuses of the correct rating are generally accepted as good practice and the most
satisfactory methods of avoiding electrical fires.
Another obvious precaution is to not overload an electrical circuit in the first instance.
If an electrical fire occurs, proceed as follows:-
Isolate the supply (or supplies) at the nearest distribution
ii)
Use CO2 (carbon dioxide) hand fire extinguishers
board or switchgear.
to fight the fire.
NOTE:- If CO2 extinguishers fail to extinguish the fire, use dry powder extinguishers
as a back-up.
2.2.7
Fire (Non-electrical)
Follow procedures laid down by internal house rules in the event of fire breaking out:I.
To be certain the manual break glass fire alarms should be activated. However
under most conditions an occurrence of a fire will be sensed by the automatic
fire detection equipment and the alarm raised.
2.
Having ascertained the fire location, check out its severity and if it is local and
contained use fire fighting equipment provided e.g. hand extinguishers, hose
reels etc.
3.
If the fire cannot be checked within a few minutes the general alarm should be
initiated and the FIRE BRIGADE contacted.
4.
Put the standard fire drill into operation.
5.
All plant should be shut down and isolated if time permits.
2.3
SAFETY CHECK LIST
CONTENTS
2.3.1
Introduction
2.3.2
After Servicing
2.3.3
Twice Weekly
2.3.4
Fire Precautions
2.3.5
Tools and Equipment
2.3.1 Introduction
The periods given between checks in the following schedules should be regarded as a
maximum.
Wherever necessary more frequent checks should be carried out depending on the specific
equipment requirements in service and their service duty.
It is also recognized that much of the basic safety checking can be carried out as a matter of
routine by alert maintenance staff during the course of their regular duties,
2.3.2 After Servicing

a) Fixed guards. Check they are all in position and securely fastened.
b) Warning labels. Check they are all in position and securely fastened.
c) Cleanliness. Check area has been cleaned up after completion of work.
d) Cleaners and chemicals. Ensure that they have been put in their proper places.
e) Fire precautions, Check that all rubbish has been removed and properly disposed of
f) Check all tools are removed from the job location and all are accounted for.
g) Spare parts. Make sure unused spare parts have been returned to the stores.
h) Warning notices. Return temporary warning notices to the store.
i) Guard Rails. Make sure any that were removed for access are replaced.
j)
Protective clothing. Return special items to the stores and/or arrange cleaning.
k) Permit to work. Sign the form to indicate work is complete and return to supervisor.
2.3.3
Twice Weekly
a) Check that all fixed guards are securely fixed on all equipment.
b) Check that all areas are clean and tidy.
c) Make sure that guard rails are secure.
d) Check exit routes to make sure they are clear of rubbish and stored materials.
e) Check that any safety equipment (i.e. goggles for grinding etc.) are available and in good
order.
f) Check that safety notices are in good order, legible and not obscured.
,
2.3.4 Fire Precautions

The client is required to nominate a person for each building to act as a fire steward.
As part of his duties, this person is responsible for liaison with the central control room in the event
of an emergency and should also ensure that the fire alarm system functions correctly in his building.
Weekly
Test the fire alarm system by operating one manual break glass or one smoke detector each week at
a pre-determined time.
Warning notices should be displayed to this effect so as not to alarm occupiers of the building
unnecessarily. Personnel must also be aware of the interfaces with other systems as explained in
Section 1, Clause 1.2.8.
A different test point should be selected each week so that, over a period of time, the whole of the
fire alarm system receives a check.
Following each weekly test, the fire steward for each building must report to the maintenance staff
that all the bells or sounders functioned correctly. Any failures should be reported without delay.
Another member of staff stationed at the indicator pane1 must report that the zone warning light was
correctly indicated.
Annually
A full fire drill should be carried out at a pre-determined time to ensure the proper evacuation of the
building. Staff should report to their allocated evacuation marshal and a roll call completed.
2.3.5 Tools and Equipment

Weekly
a) Check electric tools, clean and, if necessary, replace worn flexible cables.
b) Clean and check condition of hand tools:Secure handles if loose. Grind smooth ends of chisels and punches. Replace damaged spanners and
other tools.
c) Check that all tools, equipment and chemicals are stored away correctly.
d) Check protective clothing and arrange cleaning or replacement if necessary.
e) Check portable safety equipment.
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Liahting
Monthly
As above, plus the following items: a) Examine all steps, ladders and scaffolding and replace or repair as necessary.
b) Check test equipment, clean and arrange for repair/calibration
as required.
Three monthly
All the above, plus the following item:Check all lifting apparatus, ropes, blocks, etc. for damage, repair and replace as necessary.
Annually
Insurance inspections to lifts, lifting beams and all lifting equipment and fittings.
I
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Liphting
Monthly
As above, plus the following items: a) Examine all steps, ladders and scaffolding and replace or repair as necessary.
b) Check test equipment, clean and arrange for repair/calibration
as required.
Three monthly
All the above, plus the following item:Check all lifting apparatus, ropes, blocks, etc. for damage, repair and replace as necessary.
Annually
Insurance inspections to lifts, lifting beams and all lifting equipment and fittings.
i
SECTION
MAINTENANCE
THREE
PROCEDURES
CONTENTS
3.1
INTRODUCTION
3.2
MAINTENANCE
3.3
ROUTINE
3.4
MAINTENANCE
NOTES
TESTING
SCHEDULES
3.1
INTRODUCTION
CONTENTS
3.1.1
General
3.1.2
Operation of Switchgear during Maintenance
3.1.3
Pre-maintenance Checks
3.1.4
Operation of Live Equipment
3.1.5
Maintenance of Earthing Connections
3.1.6
Precautions regarding Auxiliary
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Liahtina
Circuits
I
3.1
INTRODUCTION
3.1.1
General
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition
LinhtinE - Millenium
Dome
Only a regular and organized scheme of maintenance work, planned to cover all details of the
installation, within given maintenance periods, can ensure continued satisfactory operation with
a minimum liability to interruptions to supply due to equipment faults.
Careful attention must be given to securing the safety of personnel and equipment while
maintenance or repair work is in progress. A code of safety rules based on a 1 lpermit to work
system is recommended, as detailed in Section 2 of this manual.
A planned maintenance scheme should include a system of logging so that records are kept for
inspection, maintenance and repair on all items of plant and equipment.
Switch rooms should be kept clean and the practice of using switch room space for storage must
not be permitted.
Tools and instruments for maintenance work should be properly housed in racks or cupboards
and, if of a special character, their purpose and method of use should be clearly indicated. The
tools and instruments should be regularly checked against an inventory.
Manufacturers
provide instruction books, which set out clearly the manner in which the
apparatus functions, the methods of adjustment and how maintenance should be given. Such
books should be made available to the maintenance staff in every switchroom, and a place
should be provided for their safekeeping, together with the inventory of tools and instruments.
For details of the various literature provided by the manufacturers refer to Section 5.
work is in progress, a DANGER notice must always be attached to any
LIVE equipment. A CAUTION notice must always be attached to plant and its
associated control equipment.
Where maintenance
Before any work is commenced

isolated and locked off.
on any item of equipment,
the supply ancillary circuits must be
When working on electrical switchgear, it is recommended that caution notices and adequate
screens are used and voltage indicators are used to prove that the apparatus is dead before any
work is commenced.
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Light&
Where it is necessary to work on live electrical switchgear, reference must be made to the
Electricity at Work Act 1989 to ensure the necessary precautions are taken to guard against
shock and short circuit. A minimum of two people must be in attendance to carry out any work
and any tool kit must be fully insulated and have current test certificates before use. Only
authorized personnel must attempt any live work and a permit to work must be obtained before
proceeding with any maintenance work.
Only fully insulated handlamps with non-metallic guards should be used. Danger and caution
notices in the vicinity of five conductors
should be non-metallic.
Any plates fitted to equipment giving operating instructions should be maintained in a legible
condition.
3.1.2 Operation
of Switchgear
during
Maintenance
It is important that maintenance personnel should be fully familiar with the operation of the
various devices that they are called upon to handle. Incorrect or unauthorized operation of
switchgear during maintenance is when most accidents and problems occur.
Make sure that all staff are aware of what work is being carried out and that the switching
operations are in accordance with the manufacturers recommended instructions and that voltage
is not applied to incomplete or uncommissioned systems.
All voltage indicators should be tested on a known live source immediately
use. The use of improvised voltage indicators should be discouraged.
before and after
On low and medium voltage circuits where filament lamps in series are employed as portable
voltage indicators, they should be adequately guarded by insulation material and should be
provided with high breaking capacity fuses in both leads. The leads should terminate in
well-guarded test prods.
3.1.3 Pre-maintenance
Checks
Before any work is carried out on or near components that are normally live, or where danger
would arise to men working, it is essential that the apparatus be proved dead.
The operation of an external handle or lever of an isolator or circuit breaker should not be
assumed to have opened all or any of the contacts, as cases of mechanical failure have been
known to occur. In particular, this may happen where a handle is operated against a mechanical
interlock.
Tests should therefore be carried out to ensure that equipment is dead, that all the contacts of the
device are open and all the correct fuse carriers removed. These should include tests between
each phase and earth to cover the possibility of wrong connection.
3.1.4
Operation
of Live Equipment
If it is necessary for live equipment to be observed with the covers removed while operating,
only authorized persons should be permitted to do this and no one should do this work alone.
The companion to the authorized person should be made aware beforehand of exactly what
work has to be done and what he should do if an accident occurs.
3.1.5 Maintenance
of Earthing
Connections
All equipment other than those of the all insulated type should be adequately earthed. It is very
important to ensure that earthing connections are mechanically sound, free from corrosion, and
that all contact screws are tight making good contact.
After maintenance, all bolts and screws should be replaced, together with any locking devices.
3.1.6 Precautions
regarding
Auxiliary
Circuits
Precautions should be taken to ensure that circuits controlling

disconnected from the supply before work is commenced.
automatic
equipment
are
It should not be assumed that the isolation of the main supply to the equipment isolates
auxiliary circuits. For example a voltage transformer may be made Hve from an alternative
source.
In isolating auxiliary
not affected.
circuits care should be taken that the tripping supplies to other units are
All safety precautions and general recommended procedures relating to the maintenance of
switchgear are contained in BS6423, 6626 and 6867 and these should be read in conjunction
with the instructions for routine periodic maintenance given in the following pages.
3.2
MAINTENANCE
NOTES
CONTENTS
3.2.1
Frequency of Maintenance
3.2.2
Switchgear
3.2.3
Electrical Checks
3.2.4
Marking of Covers and Connections
3.2.5
Switches and Fuses
3.2.6
Lighting Fittings
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Linhtinp
3.2.1 Frequency of Maintenance

The frequency of maintenance will depend on a number of factors, the most important
being the conditions under which the equipment operates and the severity of duty.
For the purposes of this manual, the normal anticipated periods have been assumed but
this does not preclude more frequent checks and/or maintenance should it be found
necessaryform experience.
For continually operating equipment, it may be necessaryto co-ordinate routine
maintenance with the demands on building usage, but where there are regular periods
during which the system is shut down, maintenance schedules may be arranged to
coincide with these periods,
3.2.2
Switchgear
For equipment to operate satisfactory, it is essential that it be kept clean. Before

removing covers and opening doors, loose dirt and dust residing on the top of enclosures
should be removed with a brush.
When air is used for cleaning, a suction type device with a dust receptacle should
preferably be employed.
Cleaning down by air blowing is not preferred as it spreadscontamination. If it is
necessaryto use compressed air, it is preferable to employ a portable type blower.
If rags are used they should be chemically clean and free from loose fibres. Cotton waste
should not be used.
When solvents are used for cleaning or degreasing they should be of a non-flammable
and non-toxic nature whenever possible, and at all times precautions against fire should
be observed.
After maintenance work, all covers and doors including those of instruments and relays
should be securely replaced so as to exclude dust.
3.2.3
Electrical Checks
Regular checks of the tightness of all terminations and connections are required in the
switchgear including those on the main bus bar systems.
Check the instrumentation and controls including voltmeter switches for correct operation
and replace fuses and switches as necessary.
In addition, vacuum cleaning of the interior of the switchgear whenever possible is
desirable.
3.2.4
Marking of Covers and Connections
All covers, cables and shields, etc. should be marked carefully before removal to ensure
correct replacement. If connections are disturbed or temporary connections made for
testing purposes,they should be clearly marked to facilitate reconnection and the
permanent connection must be restored and the temporary connections removed before
the unit is returned to service.
After maintenance work, bolts, screws and locking devices of all current carrying/earth
connections should be securely replaced.
Connections, which have been disturbed, should be checked for soundness. It is not
sufficient for nuts and bolts to be assumed to be tight.
3.2.5
Switches and Fuses
Circuit wiring and terminal connections must be checked for signs of overheating,
replace parts where there is the slightest doubt that this has occurred.
Where cartridge fuses are used, replacements should be of the same type and pattern as
the original and in no circumstances should attempts be made to use, permanently or
temporarily, any other fuse device.
Where a locking device holds the fuse in position, it should be remembered that fuse
links incorrectly chosen or badly fitted might contribute to overheating.
Switchblade contacts should be lightly smeared with petroleum jelly or other suitable
lubricant but should be lubricated with either greaseor oil.
Control Circuit Fuses
The reliability of equipment can be seriously impaired by control faults and it is therefore
most important to locate and correct immediately any which causesthe operation of any
control circuit fuse and to report the occurrence.
Every fuse link should be tested for continuity each time a routine inspection is carried
out, where this is not an inevitable part of the final running test,
Clear labelling of fuses in agreement with connection diagrams is also desirable. Such
labelling should also indicate the fuse ratings.
3.2.6 Lighting Fittings
Lighting fittings need to be relamped and cleaned on a regular basis to maintain the
efficiency of the installation. Not only do light fittings deteriorate rapidly if left dirty, but
also the loss of light output results in a considerable waste of energy.
When relamping, care should be taken to avoid fingerprints on polished aluminium
reflectors and other polished metal work. Also ensure that the correct size and type of
lamp is used.
Periodic cleaning is recommended on all lighting fittings regardless of whether they are
in office areas,plant rooms or car park.
Polished surfaces are usually lacquered and so on no account should abrasive cleaners be
used. A soft cloth is sufficient to remove dust and fingerprints from this type of surface.
Plastic diffusers should be removed and washed in warm soapy water and thoroughly
dried before refitting. Metal reflectors should be wiped clean with a dry cloth.
Lighting fittings installed in external or humid areasmay exhibit signs of corrosion.
These should be cleaned and the affected areastreated and painted as soon as possible to
prevent further corrosion.
3.3
ROUTINE
TESTING
CONTENTS
3.3.1
Introduction
3.3.2
Continuity of Protective Conductors
3.3.3
Continuity of Ring Final Circuit Conductors
3.3.4
Insulation Resistance Tests
3.3.5
Electrical Separation of Circuits
3.3.6
Protection by Barrier Enclosures
3.3.7
Polarity
3.3.8
Earth Fault Loop Impedance Test
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition LinhtinE
3.3.1 Introduction
One of the most important aspectsof inspection and testing is that proper records are kept
of all inspections as and when they are carried out, with accurate recording of the results
of all tests. These must be kept in a file so that they can be referred to whenever tests are
carried out in order to ascertain whether the installation is stable or whether there is any
deterioration of the system.
Inspection and testing advises referred to in this section is provided for general
information, for further details reference should be made BS 7671 : 1992, IEE Writing
Regulations Sixteenth Edition.
Any routine inspection and testing should be carried out by a skilled person, a person
with technical knowledge or sufficient experience to enable him/her to avoid dangers
which electricity may create.
The Electricity at Work Act requires test instruments to be regularly checked and recalibrated and the serial numbers recorded along with the test results. (Test instruments
without serial numbers should be marked with a company plant number for identification
purposes.)
Routine inspection and testing of the installation, where required, shall be carried out in
accordance with the requirements of Section 73 1, Periodic Inspection and Testing of
BS 7671 : 1992 (IEE Wiring Regulations Sixteenth Edition).
The inspection comprising careful scrutiny of the installation shall be carried out without
dismantling or with partial dismantling as required, supplemented by testing to verify
compliance with sections 73 1 and 732 and as far as possible provide for: the safety of persons against the effects of electric shock and burns, and
protection against damage to property by fire and heat arising from an installation defect,
and
the deification that the installation id not damaged or deteriorated so as to impair safety,
and
the identification of installation defects or non-compliance with the requirements that
may give rise to danger.
The frequency period for routine inspection and testing of the installation should be
determined by the type of installation, its use and operation, the frequency of
maintenance and the external influences to which it is subjected
Any routine inspection and testing shall not cause danger to persons and shall not cause
damage to property and equipment even if the circuit is defective. The results of the
inspection and testing should be recorded and signed by the person carrying out the
inspection.
The following items (where relevant to the installation being tested) must be tested in the
following sequence:Continuity of protective conductors including main and supplementary bonding.
Continuity of final rind circuit conductors.
Insulation resistance.
Protection in electrical separation,
Protection in barriers or enclosures.
Polarity
Earth fault loop impedance.
Earth electrode resistance.
Functional testing.
Standard methods of testing are described in this section. However, the use of other
methods of testing is not precluded, provided they give the results that are equally
effective.
If a test indicates failure to comply, then the test and the preceding tests (whose results
may be been affected by the fault) must be repeated after rectification of the fault.
3.3.2 Continuity of Protective Conductors
The initial tests applied to protective conductors are intended to verify that the conductors
are both correctly connected and electrically sound, and also that the resistance to such
that the overall earth fault loop impedance of the circuit is of suitable value to allow the
circuit to be disconnected from the supply in the event of an earth fault, within the
disconnection items selected to meet the requirement of Section 4 13 of the IEE Wiring
Regulations Sixteenth Edition.
Tests may be made using an AC or DC source of supply not exceeding 24V and a short
circuit current of not less than 200m A.
When DC testing is used, the protective conductor should be inspected throughout its
length to verify that no conductor has been incorporated in the circuit (e.g. operating coils
and transformer windings). For instance, if an earth-monitoring unit has been incorrectly
wired this could occur.
When the protective conductor is not steel conduit or a steel enclosure, the requirements
for the test current do not apply, and an ohmmeter can be used for the tests.
Testing of protective conductors comprising steel enclosures
When the protective conductor is steel conduit or a steel enclosure such as trunking, the
following method can be used which required a mains supply source at supply frequency.
A transformer will be needed to provide the 50V high current source. A number of
commercial instruments are available which are suitable for carrying out this test.
Method I
Step 1 Connect one terminal of the high current CPC tester to the consumers earth
terminal.
Step 2 Connect the other terminal of the tester to a long lead (2.5mm2 cable is suggested
due to the high test current). This lead is used to make contact with the protective
conductor at various points on the installation.
Step 3 Using the tester; the voltage is increased on each test until the desired current
passing through the circuit is indicated. Using Phms Law calculate the total resistance.
Step 4 To obtain the truce resistance of CPC under test, the resistance of the long test
lead should then be deducted from the result obtained in Step 3 above.
Step 5 Record the results.
Method 2
If the distance between the fuse board and circuit under test involves the use of a
long test lead, an alternative method may be adopted using the phase conductor of
the circuit under test as one of the test leads as set out below.
Step 1 Strap the phase conductor to the protective conductor at a distant point of the
circuit to be tested and back at the fuse board using the high current CPC tester between
phase and fuse board earth.
Step 2 Using the tester; the voltage is increased on each test until the desired current
passing through the circuit is indicated. Using Ohms Law calculate the total resistance.
The Resistance measured by the above test includes the resistance of the phase conductor
from the fuse board to the point under test.

Step 3 The approximate resistance of the phase conductor is obtained by joining the
phase conductor and neutral conductor at the outlet (the point under test) and measuring
the resistance at the fuse board. The value of the phase conductor is half the value
obtained by this test.
Step 4 To obtain the true resistance of the CPC under test, the value obtained in Step 3
(resistance of phase conductor) should be subtracted form the result obtained in Step 2
(total resistance).
Testing continuity of protective conductors not part of an enclosure
When measurement of resistance of the protective conductor is required, and no
part of it consists of steel conduit or other steel enclosures this may be carried out
by a DC ohmmeter, by one of the following methods: Method 1
Step 1 Isolate the supply. Connect one terminal of the continuity tester to a long test lead
and connect this to the consumers earth terminal.
Step 2 Connect the other terminal of the continuity tester to a short lead and use this to
make contact with the protective conductor at various points on the installation, testing
such items as switch boxes and socket outlets.
Step 3 The resistance reading obtained by the above method actually includes the
resistance of the test leads and therefore the resistance values of the test leads should be
measured and this value deducted from any resistance reading obtained for the
installation under test.
Method 2
If the distance between the fuse board and the circuit under test involves the use of very
long test leads, an alternative method using the phase conductor as a test lead may be
used.
Step 1 Isolate the supply and strap the phase conductor to the protective conductor at a
distance from the socket outlet, isolator or other equipment so as to include all of the
circuit, and test between the phase and earth terminals at the fuse board.
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Linhtina
Step 2 Since this measurement includes the resistance of the phase conductor, this must
be deducted from the result. This can be obtained by joining together the phase and
neutral conductors or two-phase conductors at the point under test, and measuring the
resistance again.
Step 3 The value of the conductor resistance will be half the value obtained by this test.
The value of earth continuity conductor resistance is calculated as the initial
3.3.3
Continuity of Ring Final Circuit Conductors
A test must be made to verify the continuity of all line and protective conductors to every
final ring circuit.
Two methods of testing are available and both methods assumethat an outlet is installed
near the mid pint of the circuit. Where this is the case,these tests effectively establish
that the ring has not been interconnected to create an apparently continuous ring circuit
where an actual break exists.
It is unlikely that the socket outlet nearest the midpoint of a rind circuit is labelled, it
must be located by a visual inspection and it must be remembered that the socket outlet
that appearsnearest the midpoint may well be the final socket outlet.
Method 1
Step 1 After isolating the supply and disconnecting the circuit from the protective device,
the continuity of the phase conductor, neutral conductor and protective conductor is
measured at the distribution beards between the ends of each of the conductors. Using a
continuity tester, the resistance readings for each conductor are recorded.
Step 2 Measure the resistance of the long test leads required for step 3 and note the value
or resistance.
Step 3 After reconnection of the circuits to the protective device, the resistance is
measured between the phase conductor terminal on the distribution board and the
appropriate terminal or contact at the socket outlet or point nearest to the midpoint of the
ring. The resistance value of the phase conductor is recorded.
The resistance values of the test lead measured in Step 2 is deducted from the
results and the resulting value should be approximately one quarter of the
corresponding value obtained for the test between the ends of the phase conductor
taken at the distribution board (step 1). The same test is carried out on the neutral
conductors and protective conductors.
Method 2
Step 1 After isolation of the circuit, the ends of the ring are separatedand the continuity
of the phase, neutral and protective conductors is measured between the ends of each
conductor using a continuity tester. Resistance readings for each of the conductors is
recorded.
Step 2 The ends of each conductor are connected to the distribution board. The phase,
neutral and protective conductors are all bridged together at the point nearest to the
midpoint of the ring circuit. A resistance measurement is made using a continuity tester,
with short leads between the phase and neutral conductors at the distribution board. The
value of resistance obtained should be half the resistance values obtained for either the
phase or neutral conductors before they were terminated to complete the ring at the
distribution board.
The resistance values should be approximately one quarter of the resistance value
Obtained for the phase conductor, and one quarter of the resistance value obtained
for the protective conductor on the initial tests.
3.3.4 Insulation Resistance Tests

These test are to verify that the insulation of conductors and electrical accessories and
equipment is satisfactory and that electrical conductors or protective conductors are not
short-circuited, or show a low resistance, which would indicate the deterioration of the
insulation in the conductors.
An insulation resistance test should be used which is capable of providing a DC voltage
not less than twice the nominal voltage of the circuit to be tested. However, the test
voltage need not exceed 500 volts: Isolate mains supply covering area to be tested and check that the area
is dead.
Ensure that all neon lights and capacitors are disconnected from the
Circuit under test, to avoid inaccurate test values being obtained.
Disconnect control equipment, electronic apparatus and other sensitive
Equipment which would be liable to be damaged if exposed to high test voltages.
As far as is practical, all lamps should be removed and appliances and
Fixed equipment should be disconnected.
Insulation Resistance Test to Earth
All fuses should be in and switches and circuit breakers closed. The phased neutral
conductors should be connected together at the distribution beard and a test made using
an insulation resistance tester with test leads being connected between joint phase, neutral
conductors and earth.
The reading obtained should not be less than 0.5 meoghm.
Insulation Resistance test Between Poles
All fuses should be in and switches and circuit breakers closed.
For single-phase circuits, the test leads are connected between the phase and neutral
conductors in the distribution board.
For three phase and neutral systems, four tests are required between each phase conductor
in turn and between all phases in neutral.
The insulation resistance value should not be less than 0.5 megohm.
Equipment
When fixed equipment such as cookers have been disconnected to allow insulation
resistance test to be carried out, the equipment itself must be insulation resistance tested
between live points and exposed conductive parts.
Large Installations
In a large installation it is preferable to break the insulation resistance tests into sections,
for example, one distribution board at a time, otherwise, it may be found that the
insulation resistance of such a large number or circuits in parallel may be extremely low.
The regulations allow for large installations to be divided into sections of not less than 50
outlets for insulation testing purposes, the term outlet including every switch, socket
outlet and luminaries.
3.3.5 Electrical Separation of Circuits

Where safety and extra low voltage circuits are installed, an inspection of the installation
should be made to verify the separation of the circuits and/or continuity tests made to
ensure that the electrical separation has been maintained.
3.3.6 Protection by Barriers or Enclosures
Where barriers and enclosures have been installed to prevent contact with conducting
parts they must comply with BS EN 60529 : 1992.
3.3.7 Polarity
This test must be carried out to verify that: -All fuses, circuit breakers and single pole control devices such as switches
Are connected in the phase conductor only.
Centre contact of Edison screw type lamp holders are connected to the phase conductor
and the outer metal threaded parts are connected to the neutral or earth conductor.
Socket outlets have been correctly installed i.e. phase pin of 13A socket outlets on the
right when viewed from the front.
If the installation has been tested by the contractor on completion of the installation work,
this test should not be necessary. However, if any work or alterations or maintenance is
carried out, such test will be needed in order to prove the safety of the installation.
A test of polarity can be carried out using a continuity tester.
Step 1 Isolate the mains system to be tested.
Step 2 In the distribution board link the earth bar with the phase conductors
under test.
Step 3 Using the continuity tester, check each socket outlet in turn to ensure that
the phase pin of each 13A socket records a low resistance and that all the
neutral pins of socket outlets have a high resistance.
Step 4 Check all lighting switches and the centre contact of all Edison screw
lamp holders to ensure that all the switches show a low resistance and the
centre contact of the lamp holders record a low resistance when it is open. The neutral
contact should record a high resistance at all times.
3.3.8 Earth Fault Loop Impedance Test
The earth fault loop impedance test is used to verify the values of Zs of the installation,
which includes the actual value of Ze. This will enable confirmation of the disconnecting
times of circuits when the values are compared with those in tables 4 1A, 4 1B 1, 4 1B2,
41C, 41D.
The earth fault loop impedance value is obtained by using an appropriate test instrument
connecting to the phase and earth terminals at a given point of the installation and
recording the value of Zs.
Function Testing
Where protection against electric shock is provided by a residual current device, its
effectiveness shall be verified by a test stimulating an appropriate fault condition,
independent of any test facility incorporated in the device. Manually depressing the test
button does not verify the effectiveness of the device.
Switchgear and control gear assemblies, drives, controls and interlocks shall be tested to
show that they are properly mounted, adjusted and installed in accordance with the
relevant requirements of the Wiring Regulation.
Greenwich Pavilion Exhibition Linhtinz
3.4
MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULES
Maintenance Period Summary
Maintenance Sheet No. 1

LV SWITCHGEAR AND DISTRIBUTION
Caution:
As with any mains switching operation it is assumed that the personnel

Carrying out the procedures are appropriately trained and qualified and
That they are fully aware of the limitation of the installation and the
Consequencesof the switching operation. It is further assumed that the
Appropriate Permit to Work is in place and that all safety procedures are
Observed and adhered to.
Annually
Make general inspection of the electrical switch room and main switchboards to ensure
that the equipment is clean and the area is free from obstruction/
Examine the main switchboards for any signs of overheating.
Check for any electrical discharge noises including loose components.
Check the ensure that special tools and isolating equipment are serviceable and in their
proper
Check operation of circuit breakers.
Clean and inspect insulation of security and damage.
Carry out an insulation test and log their results, compare with previous tests and renew
defective insulation if required.
Carry out insulating and continuity tests on the switchboard.
Carry out maintenance inspections and routines in accordance with the current BSS730.
In addition supplementary information for recommendations for inspection periods are
listed within the 1EE Inspection and Guidance Notes.
Maintenance Sheet No.2.

LIGHTING
Caution: It is possible that emergency fittings have alternative supplies or are on
Separatecircuits from the normal luminaries. Therefore, care should be taken
To ensure no live feeds are present when carrying out maintenance works.
General Lighting
The whole lighting installation should be checked on a regular basis for burnt out lamps,
which should be replaced immediately. As required, but at least annually all light fittings
and diffusers should be cleaned (see Clause 3.2.6). Tests should be carried out on the
complete installation as Maintenance Sheet No. 1.
Note: - it is strongly recommended that a planned programme of re-lamping be put into
operation. The life expectancy of different types of lamps is as follows:
Incandescent
Compact fluorescent
Linear fluorescent
Sodium
1000 hours
8000 hours
7500 hours
5000 hours
Emergency Lighting
To comply with BS 5266 emergency lighting installation should be checked daily to
verify that the charge indicators show. In addition the following tests should be made by
isolating the mains supply (normally by key operates switches) and checking the
emergency lamps operation.
Once a month functional test of approximately 5 minutes but not exceeding % of battery
duration time.
Twice a year functional test for a least l-hour.
Once every three years a functional test for the full duration (at the discretion of the
enforced authority). This may not be practical due to building occupation etc. In this
case one-hour duration may be acceptable.
A suitable written record should be kept of the test results and any corrective action
required to be carried out immediately. An example of a test record is given in Part of
this document.
Maintenance Sheet No. 3.

FIRE ALARM INSTALLATION
The occupier of the building is required to nominate a person on each area to act as a fire
steward. As part of his/her duties, this person is responsible for liaison with the security
staff in the event of an emergency and should also ensure that the fire alarm system
functions correctly on his/her floor.
Weekly
Test the fire alarm system by operating one manual break glass or one smoke detector
each week at a pre-determined time.
Warning notices should be displayed to this effect so as not to alarm occupiers of the
building unnecessarily. Personnel must also be aware of the interfaces with other
systems as explained in Section 1, Clause 1.2.8
A different test point should be selected each week so that, over a period of time, the
whole of the fire alarm system received a check.
Following each weekly test, the tire toward must report that all the sounders functioned
correctly. Any failure should be attended to without delay.
Another member of staff stationed at the main indicator panel must report that the zone
warning light is correctly indicated.
Annually
A full fire drill should be carried out. If part of a multi-occupied building or complex the
drill should be carried out in conjunction with other occupiers at the pre-determined time
to ensurethe proper evacuation of the building.
SECTION 4
DRAWING
SCHEDULE AND TEST CERTIFICATES
Overation and Maintenance Manual
DRAWINGS
S. I. 035 As Installed
Distribution Board Schedule
DISPLAY
GREENWICH PAVILION
Millenium Dome
LIGHTING DISTRIBUTION
Cable size
We
2.5mm2
Firesure
Lighting Track #I
B-16
2.5mm2
Firesure
Lighting Track #2
1.5mm2
Firesure
1.5mm2
C -wit
Vo
B-10
Lighting Track #I 0
Firesure
1.5mm2
B-16
B-IO
Lighting Track #I 1
cu-pvc
1.5mm2
Lighting Track #3
B-10
B-IO
cu-pvc
1.5mm2
Firesure
Lighting Track ##4
B-10
Spare
1.5mm2
Firesure
Lighting Track #5
B-10
-2
2
Spare
1.5mm2
Firesure
Lighting Track #6
B-IO
Spare
1.5mm2
cu-pvc
-2 -B
-3 -R
Spare
1.5mm2
Firesure
Lighting Track #8
B-IO
Spare
1.5mm2
Firesure
Liahtina Track #9
B-IO
Installation
Description
Cold Cathode
B-10
-3
3
mcb /type
BOARD
Description
Control Circuits
We
by
S.I.Electrical
Ltd 2 Jamaica Road London SE1 2BX Tel:020 7787 6313 Fax:020 7787 6315
on behalf of
C-Beck Limited Victory House Cox Lane Chessington Surrey KT9 ISG
Tel:020 8974 0500 Fax:020 8974 0555
Cable
size
TEST CERTIFICATES
Electrical Installation Certificate S.I. 035
ELECTRICALINSTALLATIONCERTIFICATE
BS 7671 REQUlREMElh FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS
(IEE WIRING REGULATIONS)
1
Name/Title
(Block
Letters):
INSTALLATION
e G iD%Fww
g
&%?!!%!~...
DETAILS OF THE CLIENT

..?.muQh) . .
ADDRESS
.&Ms..
; G.kmCt4
Description:
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . ~Gm~~
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6. . .._...............__ . . . . . . . ..__.__.._..
AND EXTENT OF INSTALLATION
.E
. . ..xt\.!6r~~~n-cl....~JG-uTr~
cw&a..
e??eGuLA
Extent of installation
Type (Tick box):
. . . . . . . . . . .lti~~~~~lQ~
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..__..._.._.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._._._...._._.__..._...._..._
. Lo433rs
. . . .. . .. .. .. . .. .bE\3
. .. . .. ... . .. ..._........................
Installation
6!9k!rtn?~
DESCRIPTION
Q&!u0?+
M!L!a?!Q5
New
dwac
..
-uPPi
.
covered
rv&
by this Certificate:
. ..~!.!%.!~~..~Q.....
. .lcxx24d
. . . . . . . . . . . ...+..!:i:d
@I
Addition
to an exrsting
rnstallation
,, cl
Alteration
to an existinq
installation
Use continuation sheet if necessan/)
CERTIFICATION
FOR DESIGN
I/We* berng the person(s) responsible for the design of the electrical installation [as indicated by my/our* signature(s)
below],
flrculars of which are described above, having exercised reasonable skills and care when carrying out the design hereby
LERTIFY
that the design work for which l/We* have been responsible
is to the best of my/our* knowledge and belief in
accordance
with BS 7671, amended to (date) ,..,,,,,,,,
.(3, ,,.,,,,.,,,, except for the departures, if any, detailed as follows:
Details
of departures
from
BS 7671 as amended
(Regulations
120-02,
120-05):
.........I.............................................._.......__....
The extent of Ilability of the signatory
or the signatones
Date: !.!\ .!?.:??
Name:
Date:
Name:
Signature:
FOR CONSTRUCTION
I being the person responsible
particulars
CERTIFY
above,
I have
amended
Details
of which
are described
that the work for which
to (date)
of departures
have
exercised
been responsible
,....., .1L\(p\.2_...
from
BS 7671
as amended
is limited to the work described above as the subject of this Certificate.

*(Where there is mutual responsibility for the design)
of the electrical
No. 1
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designer
No. 2
Installation
z..&%&G
[as indicated
reasonable
skills and care when carrying
is to the best of my knowledge
and belief
except for the departures,

(Regulations
.._......_. Designer
(z.t..
120-02,
by my signature
out the construction
in accordance
with
below],
hereby
BS 7671,
if any, detailed as follows:
120-05):
The extent of liability of the slgnatofy is limited to the work described above as the subject
of this Certificate
....... .....
.................
Siqnature. .....................................
Date: ..\%...\.~..% 3 N ame: ......... A ..F.. ... !+!?+?A.+
Constructor
FOR INSPECTION
AND TESTING
I being the person responsible for the inspection and testing of the electrical installation [as indicated by my signature below],
particulars of which are described above, have exercised reasonable skills and care when carrying out the inspection and testing
hereby CERTIFY that the work for which I have been responsible is to the best of my knowledge and belief in accordance with
BS 7671, amended to (date) ,....,,,.... l.y.\..L
.._.. except for the departures, if any, detailed as follows:
1 Details
of departures
from
BS 7671 as amended
.,.,.,...
(Regulations
120-02,
120-05):
................................I...............................I................................................

For the INSPECIJON
of the signatory is limited to the work described above as the subject of this Certificate.
AND TESTING of the installation:
?
/
&j&c&L
Signature.
Date:.!.:..!.%.:?.?
Name:
K! ..r 3 &2&B
.._........... Inspector
NEXT INSPECTION
.
INVd the designer(s) recommend that this installation is further inspected and tested after an interval of not more than . . ..&..~s/y
rs
YHEDULES
k attached Inspection and Test Result Schedules are part of this document and this Certificate is valid only when the Schedules
are attached to it. The quantity of schedules attached to this Certificate is: . . ..~.&
Schedule
serial
no(s):
035
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .........................................
1
Acknowledgement:
This
ln Appendlx 6 of BS 7671
Certificate
is based on the model
1992 as amended December 1997
* Delete as appropriate
@ Copyright
UNEEDA
Publications
1998
Form No. UNWRl-3
Company:
s
\
ftzussac&
Lsb
_..,, :..: ___._.,_.,.........,._.,_..._.......___.............................
Address:
Nominal
YsM-wuca
QsPc-0
. . . .a. . .._...................................................................
u3m
voltage,
U/U,
Material
,.__.__........................
Current
CSA
Structural
steelwork
Services
a Water0
Gas0
Oil0
Other0
ON EXISTING
INSTALLATION
You should have received an original Certificate

and the contractor should have retained a duplicate.
If you were the person ordering the work, but not
the user of the installation, you should pass this
Certificate, or a copy of it, immediately to the owner.
Tha original Certificate should be retained in a safe
place and ba shown to any person inspecting
or
(In the case of an alteration
undertaking
the future.
or additions
see Regulation
743-01-04)
FOR RECIPIENTS
work on the electrical
installation
in the
If you later vacate the property, thus Certificate

will
demonstrate
to the new owner that the electrical
installation
complied
with the requirements
of
British Standard 7671 at the time the Certificate was
issued.
The statutory Construction
Regulations require that
those Regulations,
a copy
schedules
are included
safety documentation.
Acknowledgement:
This Certificate
is based on the model
in Appendix 6 of B.S 7671 : 1992 as amended December
1997
rating: ..!+9.Q.V
GUIDANCE
This safety Certificate
has been issued to confirm
that the electrical
installation
work to which it
relates
has been designed,
constructed
and
inspected and tested in accordance
with BS 7671:
1992 (asamended)(the
IEE Wiring Regulations).
Voltage
(state details):
. . ..
COMMENTS
rating: . . . . . .._.. A
(Design and Management)

for a project covered by
of this certificate and any
in the project health and
Delete as appropriate
For safety reasons, the electrical installation

will
need to be re-inspected
at appropriate
intervals
by a competent
person.
The maximum
time
interval recommended
before the next inspection
is stated in the Report under Next Inspection.
This Certificate
is intended
to be issued only
for a new electrical
installation
or for new work
associated
with an alteration
or addition to an
existrng
installation.
It should not have be
issued for the inspection of an existing installat,
A Periodic Inspection Report should be issued for
such periodic inspection.
@ Copyright
UNEEDA
Publications
996
Form No. UNWRl-3
LID
SLLELECTRICAL
Distribution
Board/ Section:
3R
3Y
B
B
38
4R
4Y
B
B
B
4B
5R
4JamakaRoad,~n,RE12RX
Tel:02077876313
Fax:02077876315
Greenwich Pavilion - Exihibition Lighting Distribution Board
10
10
10
10,OOOA
10,OOOA
10,OOOA
2.5
1.5
1.5
2.5
1.5
1.5
IO
10
10
10,OOOA
10,OOOA
10,OOOA
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
0.12
0.38
0.38
0.36
200+
200+
200+
200+
200+
200+
200+
200+
200+
200+
200+
200+
0.36
0.44
0.44
0.42
0.39
0.24
200+
200+
200+
200+
200+
200+
0.45
0.37
5Y
5B
6R
6Y
6B
035-Test Sheet.xls
Page 1
n/a
n/a
n/a
nta
OK
OK
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
n/a
OK
OK
OK
n/a
n/a
OK
SECTION 5
MANUFACTURERS
DIRECTORY
& TECHNICAL LITERATURE
Greenwrch Pavrllon Exhlbltlon Liphtmg
Operation and Maintenance Manuul
UltimatE
P HRC
fuse
to any
carriers
bution
board
be
2
and
incorporate
HRC
fuse
facility
for a spare
fuse
ained
in the carrier.
EM BS13Gl
Incorporates many unique features of

benefit to all of our customers
Satisfies the diverse requirements of
the user, contractor, specifier, OEM
and distributor.
Incorporates the revolutionary RCBO
Distribution boards accept both MCBs
can
Memshield
shield
2 MCBs
are
rated
Icn to BSENG0898.
RCCBs
tact
have
fitted
at
MCBs
positive
indication.
devices can be D
connected with c
3evolutionary...
tie unrque
RCBO
an be fitted
r SPSN
early
MCB
two
pod
to any
thousand
ossible
combinations
f crrcurt
and earth
xlt
SP
offering
protectron.
i wade chotce
of
xoming
devices
are
IvarIable
rncludrng
direct
:onnectron,
swrtch-
trsconnector,
JICCB,
MCB,
RCCB
:ombrnation
or fused
swatch
Fop or bottom
:able
entry.
vlemshreld
2 type
and type
B drstnbutron
ooards
of equal
wrd I
:an be vertically
stacked
to provide
outgoing
and interlin
addition
ways
)
Ka
Memshreld
2 devrces
are surtable
for
mounting
and
with
comb
DIN-r-all
inter-connected
can
be
busbar
KLB Distribution
@
Any
SP or SPSN
Magnetic
Type
Foolproof
positive
3reaking
capacities
possible
System
MCB
can
combinations
be factory
allowlng
fitted
you
characteristics
even
with
more
Indication
gives
(SP, SPSN,
trip free
Optional
High
padlock
Optional
a3
All new
allow
DP, TP, TPSN,
and terminal
and
wire-in,
busbar
Mounting
Finger
rear
opportunities
ratings
(1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10,
ON
installations
of MCBs
state-of-the-art
CAD
terminals
for cables
for OEM
installations
cable
and fork
on standard
Optional
for safer
box type
protected
Installation
14 current
held
on line and load side
clamp
functron
or OFF
for full shrouding
using
thousand
equipment
gives
you
the assurance
performance
wire-out
facilities
Terminals
shields
design
increased
being
ON
design
two
of applications
of Isolation
FP) and
from
locking
limiting
nearly
flexiblllty
MCBs
for positive
fit British
safety
Generous,
prevents
current
screw
easy
of quality,
dolly
performance
mechanism
choice
you the assurance
13, 16, 20, 25, 32, 40, 50, 63A) for increased
Duality
provrding
B, C, D for wide
of up to 1 OkA (BSEN60898)
<ix pole configurations
pod
flexibility
to BSEN60898
contact
an RCBO
35mm
type
DIN-rail
combination
connectors
comb
head
to allow
busbar
cables
and fork type
comb
simultaneously
to BS5584/EN50
screws
up to 25mmL,
022 for lndtvldual
to increase
safety
up to 50mmz
and OEM
and allow
easier
to be terminated
where
installations
installation
space
is limited
n be achieved
se of the standard
CBO
combinatrons
andard
OEM
10
2 RCBOs
Ime delay
11
an Incredible
that
there
are nearly
two
thousand
possible
choice
are retalned
are suttable
of sensitivity
versions
he Memshield
sn RCBO
en adding
of the MCB
means
but with the added
for use In any Memshleld
flexiblllty
of earth
2 dlstnbutlon
fault
board
protectton
or ideally
suited
applications
our choices
2 MCB
providing
features
emshield
Memshield
he all new
can
available
2 RCBO
complies
simply
the appropriate
Bntlsh
of quality,
Earth
protection
with
developed
safety
of any lnstallatlon
function
BSENGI
by selecting
sensitlvlty
design
IS
the requirements
to allow correct
be ordered
assurance
fault
to meet
of any downstream
residual
devices
009
the most
sultable
MCB
for an application
and
suffix
using
state-of-the-art
CAD
equlprnent
and performance
maIntaIned
current
even
if the neutral
connectron
IS lost
gives
you the
In assembles
are fully
removable
to
se installation
xrtral
links
can be removed
for testing
irposes
1 optlonal
clean
earth
Installed
for computer
standard
on TPN
kit can
be site
installations
distribution
boards
(not shown)
@The
door,
when
locked,
devices
and front
cover
prevent
unwanted
access
@Doors
barrel
can
be site fitted
kits or padlocking
on all padlocking
(except
positive
boards
Unique
blanking
outgoing
so that
@
It shrouds
cable
assembly,
on type
Optional
blanking
space
flush
where
the mountrng
type
A (not
shown)
Optional
installer
assembly
flexlbilrty
busbar
to blank
is the
profile
Space
behind
bottom
mounting
surface
is uneven;
have dished
connectrng
provrdrng
economy
keyhole
the pan
types
so the user
can
the status
of the fitted
control
devices
(not
shown)
styling
blend
blocks
mounted
protection
allows
the range
in with
both
distribution
to
industrial
premises
and neutral
bars
boards
the solutron
for type
control
and
and compact
surface
onto
for easy
allow
the pan
for additional
size (not shown)
TPN
switch
Split
options
load,
on
for ease
to give
a compact
at high
allow
options
current
the fitting
include
solution
a 125A
fuse
to
levels
of MCCBs
from
l6A
dual
Double
pole
RCBOs
)
cable
tariff
and
double
can
be fitted
pole
distribution
boards
as standard
SPSN
op
the
device
problems
incomer
available
on
is uneven
A boards
devices
control
slots
incoming
boards
Distribujion
entry.
boards
with
are suitable
SPSN
for top
MCBS
and
or bottom
easily
up to 200A
of cables
mountrng
the mounting
and TPSN
discrimination
safety
non-adjustable
TPN
combination
of an MCB,
entry/exit
kits provide
off unused
as well for Increased
allows
even when
to fit DIN-rarl
with
or
including
door
TPN
boards
installation
stab
is provided.
even
All distribution
module
A boards,
adjustable
ON
with
boxes
of installation
can be used
the busbar
Generous
surface
@
The
are padlocked
be fitted
identify
Dual earth
(not shown)
modules
ways.
MCBs
can
glazed
and commercial
when
connection)
indication
of extension
discreetly
safety
direct
contact
range
@Modern
be closed
the user to
for an installation
incomers
wide
can
door
shown)
aDistribution
to increase
either
kits.
kits allow
have
OFF
with
Padlocking
@All
The door
to
(not shown)
standardise
(not
all
screws
lock
arrangements
covers
are
II - Oeleaf Igg/i2$A imorning dwice:

incoming
Standard
125A
available
with
range
and 2OOA TPN

a choice
of incomers
modern
type
B dlstrlbutlon
boards
of 4, 6 8. 12, or 16 outgolng
can
installations
be fitted
They
to allow
comply
885486
supplied
separately
to distributton
board.
are
ways
A wide
for the flexibility
fully with
device
needed
in
: Pt 12 and
BSEN60439-3
1 OOA lugs;
1 OOA SPSN,
switch-disconnectors,
consult
our Technical
incomirn
device
200A
lugs;
frame
MCCB
incomers
TP or TPSN
IOOA
TPSN
Services
RCCBs;
125A
63A TP MCB
department
for details
TP
Please
of other
types.
200A
SPSN,
or TP switch-disconnectors;
up to 200A.
can also
All standard
100A
and any TP F
distribution
board
be fitted.
*TPh
to SPN
t Available
l-63A
Memshield
BSEN60898;
18mm
2 SP, DP and TP MCBs
545A
fuse
carriers,
16kA
Types
conversion
July
kit included.
1997.
B, C, D, 1 OkA to
to BSI 361;
l -63A
SP
RCBOs.
b!&%
+ BMW03
= 6 way TPN
distribution
board
with
100A
switch-disconnector.
Use pages
Distribution
boards
any other
accessories.
or horizontaHy
of equal
to give
They
more
width
outgoing
(see page 57). Memshleld

modular
using an etiension
box (see page
boardclean ~
can be stacked
can be etectrically
ways
vertically
connected
by using
control
devices
55). Many SPN
?n be mounted
on top of any type
.h facility is standard
for computer
without
vertically
a connector
kit
can be fitted by
type A distribution
B distribution
installations.
board.
58 - 61 to select
outgoing
devices
& accessones.
t$?!&&W~9~
Distribution
Boards
Split Load Boards, Extension Boxes and

Modular Enclosures
100A split load distribution boards with fitted 1OOAmain switchdisconnector. and 80A. 30mA RCCB.
12 way;
8 ways
RCCB
protected
12 way;
6 ways
RCCB
protected
12 way;
4 ways
RCCB
protected
BMSU8
BMSl.66
mm
BMsL84
Memshield 2 Enclosures- For Modular Devices
Moulded enclosures
No
No
Yes
Yes
SPLIT
LOAD
BOARDS
Split load TPN type B distribution

boards
are factory fitted with a
main 1OOA switch-disconnector
and a 30mA RCCB. Please consu
our TechnIcal
Services
department
for details of other incoming
devtce options.
MODULAR
Metal enclosures
-L
Yes
yes -TYes
Yes
yes
-T
ENCLOSURES
Memshield
2 modular
enclosures
can be used to house Memshielr
2 protective
and command
devices.
Enclosures
are available
to
house from 2 to 45 x 18mm modules
in moulded
or metal
constructlon
up to IP55.
Up to three
an enclosure.
To select
calculate
enclosure
Memshield
2 type
a suitable enclosure,
the amount of 18mm
that can accommodate
A pan
assemblies
can
be fitted
IP4X
into
select the devices

required
and
modules
required,
then select the
at least that many 18mm modules.
15 module enclosures
can be mounted
onto AM1 3 or any
fv~.-. ,ishield 2 TPN distribution
board. Distribution
board accessories
door lock kit are suitable
for use with BMX type enclosures.
BMXDC enclosures
are fitted with earth and neutral bars as
standard.
Additional
earth and neutral bars for 30 and 45 way
enclosures
are available
for specific
applications.
Metal enclosures
RCCBs,
RCBOs,
Moulded
RCCBs.
4EME
CABLE
enclosures
will accept
EXTENSION
will accommodate
fuse modules
and
4/6 QEL,
command
4EME
devices
all modular
devices,
command
devices.
and AMlSL
and TPSN
e.g.
Yes-gtazed
Yes-glazed
~-4azetj
i
Yes-glazed
_1- ,,
-15 moaule enclosures
45 module
New!
enclosures
Contact
N.B. AMlSL,
IP4X ?=it:
tormerly
formerly
BMXDCI,
BMXDCS,
-3
*
I
BMXDCGl
BMXDCGI
us for avallability.
4QEL,
6QEL,
can be wire sealed.
ie; MCBs
will not accept

RCCBs
only.
BOXES
Cable extension
boxes are for use with larger cables or for special
applications
e.g. metering,
etc. They can be fitted top and/or
bottom.
All 200A type incomers
include
a cable extension
box
where necessary.
All enclosures and extension boxes can be fitted top and/or
distribution
boards in any quantrty.
command
Optional
devices
glazed
door
bottom
of
Extensionboxes for TPNand AM13 distribution boards.

Cable
spmader
&tent&
Cable
spn~+
extension
box,
l&&n
high
&mm
high
k$WPd;??Z3BA@Outgoing
Devices
Miniature Circuit Breakers; Type B & C 1OkA
APPLICATIONS
SP MCBs
can
be used
in type
A distribution
SF, DP and TP MCBs
SPSN
and DP MCBs
can be used
TPSN
and
are for specialist
Memshield
FP MCBs
can be used
in type
boards,
B distribution
in DP distribution
OEM
applications.
2 MCBs - Type B to BSEN60898 IIEC8981. 3 to 5 x In
-1
The Memshield
2 MCB is an all new high performance
current
limiting
device with the ability to disconnect
short circuits of up to 1OkA.
The feature
manufactured,
packed
device is both British
using the latest technology.
designed
MBHlOtN
MBHPOl
MBH301
MBHBOIN
MBHIOP
MBHIOPN
MBH104
MBHlO4N
MBHlO6
MBH202
MBH302
MBH302N
MBH402
YBH204
MBH304
MBH304N
MBlUO4
MBHlOIN
MBH205
MBH306
MBH3OBN
MEtUO6
MBHIOB
MBHlOSN
MBH208
MBH308
MBH3OBN
MBH408
10
MBHllO
MBHIION
MBH210
MBH310
MBH3lON
MBIUIO
la
MBHIIB
MBH113N
MBH213
MBH313
MBH313N
MBH413
MBH116
MBHllBN
MBH216
MBH316
MBHBIBN
MEW16
MBHl20
MBHIZON
MBH220
MBH320
MBH32ON
MBH420
25
hlBHl25
MBH125N
MBH225
MBH325
MBH325N
MBH425
32
MBH132
MBH132N
MBH232
MBH332
YBH332N
MBM432
40
MBH140
MBHl40N
MBH240
MBH340
MBH34ON
MBH440
50
MBHISO
MBHIWN
MBH250
MBH350
MBH35ON
hlBH450
\,p.<:
MBH163
MBH153N
MBH263
MBH363
MBH353N
MBH463
Current
ratings are available
in 1, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 13, 16, 20, 2.5, 32,
40, 50, and 63A. The range is available
with types B, C, and D, in
single pole (SP), single pole and switched
neutral (SPSN), double
pole (DP), triple pole (TP), triple pole and switched
neutral (TPSN)
ar
Jr pole (FP) configurations.
On SPSN and TPSN the switched
FP all poles are protected.
SPSN and TPSN MCBs
first and break last.
are fitted
neutral
is unprotected,
to BSEN60898 (IEC898), 5 to 10 x In
neutral
contacts
which
make
are available
with
a breaking
They are suitable for use on DC systems

level at 24V = 6kA; 12OV = 4kA.
from
capacity
NOTE: When a residual current

pod is added to the MCB (see P60)
to form an RCBO, the combination
cannot
be used on DC systems.
The MCBs
MCBs
insert
are calibrated
to 40C.
can be supplied
with 50C ambient
calibration.
To order
X at the end of the MCB list number
eg:- MCH 116X.
Please contact
our Technical
Memshield
2 MCBs suitable
ter.
zrtures.
Services
for other
MCHBOI
MCH3OlN
MCH401
MCHlOPN
MCH202
MCH302
MCH302N
#CH402
MCH104
MCHl04N
MCH204
MCH304
MCH304N
MCH404
department
for details
reference
calibration
of
.fj
MCH106
MCH106N
MCHPOB
MCH306
MCH306N
MCH406
MCHlO8
MCHlOBN
MCH208
MCH308
MCH308N
MCH408
MCHllON
MCHPIO
MCH310
MCHBlON
MCH410
.x10,
MCHiiO
,iii.,
:I*, .: MCH113
of 1OkA
24V to 12OV; fault
I..
;:lf,;:
FEATURES
Memshield
2 MCBs
to BSEN60898.
MCHPOl
MCHIOP
on DP and
]+?
with
MBH401
16
of
The MCBs are suitable

for use with Memshield
2 distribution
boards.
In addition
MCBs are suitable
for a wide range of OEM
applications.
MBHlOl
20
and
Memshield
2 miniature
circuit
breakers
are available
in one
the widest
ranges
available
in the world;
over 600 different
types are available.
boards,
boards.
MCHl13N
MCHi13
MCH313
MCHi13N
MCH413
16
MCHli6
MCHllGN
MCH216
MCH316
MCH316N
MCH416
20
^ MCHlPO
MCHIPON
MCH220
MCH320
MCH320N
MCH4ijO
25
MCH125
MCH125N
MCH225
MCH325
MCH325N
MCH4&
32
MCH132
MCHij32N
MCH232
MCH332
MCH332N
MCH4&
40
MCH140
, (I; -;-*.$0 +&50
MCHt40N
MCH24d
MCH340
MCH340N
MCH44$
MCHISON
MCH250
MCH350
MCH350N
MCH45i0
5i
MCHl53N
MCH253
MCH363
MCH363N
M&i&Id
ii&W
Memshield 2 - Switch-disconnectors
SWITCH-DISCONNECTORS
Memshield
profile
2 18mm
to Memshield
BSEN60947-3,
is also
modular
switch-disconnectors
2 MCBs
and conform
1OOA 240/415v
provided.
Terminals
AC226.
are box
have
to the requirements
Positive
contact
For use in modular
a similar
enclosures
or on symetrical
DIN-rail.
of
indication
type
allowing
cable
capacity
neutral
contacts
which
make
up to 50mm2.
SPSN switch-disconnectors
- br, * last.
TERMINAL
Memshield
variety
Terminals
Suitable
first
BLOCKS
2 18mm
of uses.
Memshield
have
modular
They
2 MCI3
can
or RCBO
are box type

for type
A and
terminal
be used
allowing
blocks
in outgoing
to tap off to other

cable
B distribution
capacity
boards.
are suitable
circuits
devices
for a wide
in place
of a
or boards.
up to 50mm2.
w
*For switch-disconnectors
refer
to pages
for use as distribution
PD2
board
incomers
50, 52 and 53.
Memshield 2 - Terminal Blocks

For use
in modular
enclosures
or on symetrical
iooA~
For
pages
terminal
DIN-rail.
3
blocks
for use as distribution
50, 52 and 53.
board
MBTl@td.
incomers
refer
to
PRODUCT
GROUP 1
MULTILINI<
When specifying Standard Davis Multilink
state the following:
CABLE
Trunking
Trunking to be manufactured in accordance with BS4678 from

pre-galvanised steel with a minimum coating of 275g/m*.
Connectors to be bushless tapped type to suit M5 fixings.
Accessories to be of gussetted one piece format where possible.
All covers to be secured by quarter turn buckle beneath
return flange with cover recessed to accept turning
button, thus ensuring flush finish.
DA IIS
I
Tubetrack
Track
al
x
310
2011849
,6&t?
2011862
2019809
l?lack 12G0nlnl tracl~

~+er
1200mm iI xk
iT00mm
trade
2012014
~vlllte adaptol
LOVeI SW
2011892
black
cOel
Strip X r
cover
stw
2019805
Tul,etrxk
Couplers
adziptor
SIIW adaptor
1 d\ar~eter
and
x 2
x 2
30117m
Corners
2011303
white plug in
2011835
black
plug I COilPie
2011839
~hte
~-
flexible coupler
iii11840
black flexible
201;838--
white
eleLtrILal coupler
2011837
black electrical
2011871
wh,te mitred &%I
(n<chanical
2011873
black
(,nechanlcal~eleLtricai)
Live
Feed
&&
Components
Coupler
Coupler
coupler
corner
electrlcali
I- 34
0 0
El0 0
,,.,
..
Qa
I
lu
u
2
Product
Specification
Matettal
Pie coated
yalvat~~~d
(approx
15 2 mrcronsj
Note
The pertod
of ptoiectton
steel
afforded
lheer
to BS EN IO I42 wttli
IS deperlded
t~potl
a ioattng
weqhl
the atmosphertc
General
Units comprtse
of body
cover and connecttng
slee\,e
Covers ate held III posttton
by the Davis ~IICIC hx method
Connectors
are tapped
and supplied
wtth all necessary
plated
ftxtng
of 275g/tn
hotl?
sides
condtttotli
screws
and
wAleri
external
dttnenstons
and ate
Note
Dtmenstons
of trunktng
relattny
to part numbers
ate gtven as approxrmate
governed
by the tolerances
defined
on workrng
drawrngs
Please apply for avarlabtltty
sttuatton
and
Non Standards
(Spectals]
Thehe can be manufactured
upon reqlrest
pi ices
Full techntcal
Davis
back
up IS avatlable
manufacture
IS controlled
by the Qualtty
System
BS EN 1809002
PART
Tl OOLJ..lA
3 Otn Trirnl<trq
COVPI
Or1c il>Jl(~llitl ,I/ / Irrr,Jl,
T103/...
Coupler
Tl OOL I/I~ICJ~co or&r

2.0m Trunktng
cover
O!xf SllppllPrl ,lel lenqttl
Tl OO/...
-
L.Orn
Strarght
Length
r/iatie i0 rit0it
No
SECTION
,ECTION
WlDTH
HEIGHT
I
T
i
3m
TiOORFi22
5Omn1
5Omrn
TlOORFi32
75mm
5Omm
TIOORF/33
75mm
75mm
TIOORFI42
IOOmm
50mm
3m
TlOORFi-13
75lrlm
3m
TlOORF/44
IOOmm
i00111m
IOOmm
3m
TIOORF162
150mm
TlOORFi63
150mrn
somrn
75mm
3m
3m
TiOORF64
I somln
IOOmm
3m
TlOORFl66
l5Omm
l5Omm
3m
TlOORF/84
2OOmm
I OOmm
3m
TIOORFl96
225mm
twmm
TIOORFIILL
3OOmm
l5Omm
TlOOi22
somrn
Tl00132
ismrn
TlOOf33
75mm
Tl00/42
IOOmrn
5Omm
?m
TiOOl43
5mm
2m
7100144
I OOmm
100mm
IOOmm
--+
~____
2m
Tl00162
l5Omm
1100163
l5Omm
Ti 00164
150mm
I-
50mrr
5Omm
75mm
COVER
LENGTH
3m
PART
t- 7 15Kgs
t 896Kgs
3111
No
TItlOt/Z/A
TIOOt/3/A
TlOOL'3/A
105lKgs
t 1026Kgs
t II 79Kgi
-t l36lKgs
TIOOU4iA
TIOOt/4/A
TIOOt/4/A
cr
1458Kgs
TIOOU6/A
1941Kgs
2085Kgs
TlOOU6iA
__-TiOOU6iA
___-
21 oslcgs
TlOOt/'6/A
TlOOUE/A
3rn
t 249lkgs
t 30 6llcgs
3rn
37 24kgs
TiOOUI2A
4 72Kgs
TlOOU2
591Kgs
TIOOU3
692Kgi
TiOOU3
669Kgi
TIOOW
782Kgi
TlOOU4
896Kgs
TlOOU4
1004Kgs
TlOOU6
2m
2m
-I
WEIGHT
2m
-i
I-
TlOOU9/4
5Omin
Lm
75mm
Lm
l293Kgs
TlOOU6
IOOmm
---I=
2m
1389Kgs
TiOOU6
TlOObh
TlOOU6
T100/84
T1OOt.E
TlOOf96
TlOOU9
TlOO/l26
TlOOU12
For tnstrlucttons
on comp;lrttnented
trunktng
and fttttngs
see page 13
4214/K
1 gang
SP
4216/BG
2 gang
SP
42141386
1 gang
SP with
neon
indicator
4216/3BG
2 gang
SP with
neon
indicator
Dimensions
1 gmg
82mm
2 gang
142mm
x 82m$
x 44mm
x 82mm
For sockets
wth plan mxes

Add suff/x P to L~si No
eg 421 b/EG with~/sin box = 4216IPBG
Daub/e poie avaiabie ro order

Add sufi5x D to 1st NO
eg Double poie 42 16lBG = 42 i 6IDBG
x 44mm
I
.
lubetrack 1
Tubetrack 1 the slimmest single CIICUI~ tubular track system

avallable. All electncal components
completely recess inside the
track, while decorative snap on strips provide total cover to malntaln
the tubular appearance.
Preclslon engineered corners and curves
allow combination into a variety of lighting dIrectIons. Tubetrack 1
can be wall or celling mounted or suspended and accepts any
single-circuit Concord spotllght.
Profile
i
t
Tubetrack
//
Tubetrack
Mounting&Suspension
2011841
2011999
2012059
2011996
~~ --
Components
SINGLE DELUXE
LIGHTPACK
~@e!%
An attractively designed single lamp batten
luminalre specifically for the 26mm energy
saving lamp. Supplied complete with lamp in
an attractive point-of-sale carton.
AIWCAIIONSSchools, offices,
SITU ICATIONS All luminaires
colours. tow Power Factor can be supplied on some products.
kitchens, workshops etc.
are manufactured from steel

and coated with a heat cured high gloss white epoxy powder,
giving a smooth resilient finish. The lampholders are moulded
from polycarbonate material and are virtually unbreakable. Thus
product range is Kite marked and - marked to BS4533. Standard
lamp colour supplied is whrte.
VARlAlhIN~
All lumrnarres can be supplred wrth a variety of
special requrrements rncludmg Electronrc Drmmrng, Emergency,
Hugh Frequency Ballasts, various voltages, frequencres and lamp
ORDERING
Available with a full range of lightpack attachments, including

diffusers, reflectors and a VDT quality LG3 cat 2 attachment.
For further details please see pages 14, 15. 16. 17 and 20.
LPF versions available packed with single opal diffuser,
Ref DEP18, DEP36, DEP58 or EURO LIGHTPACK. see page 19.
EWW For some export markets thus product can be packed

two preces per carton wrthout lamps
$!/\:;I
riil:
\ Please see oage 137 for ordermg references
DATA
-
High Frequency .,...,,....,,,,..,,,,. -suffix IHF
.,
Electronic Analogue Dimming -suffix /ED (TUXmm iampsonly)
.,(
Electronic Digital Dimming...... -suffix /DTD iT8126mm

tampsonl~i
.,
Fuse Terminal Block ..,,.......... -suffix /FTB

Excluding Lamp
-suffix B
Rocker Switch
suffix IRS
9:
110 Volt
-suffix .llOV
220 Volt
-suffix .22ov
Pull Switch
-suffix IPS
Export
-suffix X, p~eas?
ipcclkvo~iage
a ileq~tnO
Electronic Starter
-suffix E
M
.
k:
:-:
_I
.
.\ ,.,, 1/ ,,,
:.I ,,., i,!, ::,,,i
I,
,,,
:L !
,I. ,:
Pleasecheck with AreaSalesOffice to enwe rewed varratlon avarIable
;,,,
,:
,:,
/ / :
LPfl8
LPf30,26
LPf36
LPf58
,c:oc
:x s,b
r ,,,:,
/ 4:.
LP30126
LP36
LP58
LP70
I A 3ow
lX36W
1 X 58W
IX7OW
..
.
Yli
1221
1521
1784
2
2
3
3
iii
4:;
, i
.t
:
:
435
600
600
600
A
c
c
c
J ii.:,
,; ,, i
I
/
0 0057
0 0076
0 0095
00112
::
1,
2 03
2 36
3 23
3 39
:,
!.
,.m
81,
:
Uli
0 22
0 34
0 38
~__
97
0 90
0 90
0 93
j
,.I
FSlO
FSlO
FSIO
FS6
l&411
1x40
1X60
1x60
39
47
70
83
GREENWICH
PAVILION
JOINERY WORKS
Materials
Used:
9 mm Russian Birch Ply
Finish:
Fire Retardant
Matt A/C Clear Laquer
Cleaning and Maintenance:
All surfaces are to be cleaned with a dry

cloth and with a typical household polish,
ie Pledge/Mr
Sheen.
DO NOT USE ABRASIVE MATERIALS

OR SATURATE WITH WATER
RECORD AS BUILT DRAWINGS

Drawing No.
01
Time Wall Zone
Drawing No.
02
Time Wall Zone Desk Tops
Drawing No.
03
London/Greenwich
Zone Plinths
Drawing No.
04
London/Greenwich
Zone Plinths Framing Details
Drawing No.
05
London Zone L/H Plinth
Drawing No.
06
London Zone L/H Plinth Frame Details
Drawing No.
07
Time Wall Zone Suspended Frame for Lighting Track
Drawing No.
08
Dome Zone Plinth
Drawing No.
09
Dome Zone Plinth
Drawing No.
10
VDU Housing to Plinth Dome Zone
Drawing No.
11
Plinth Dome Zone
Drawing No.
12
2 No. Plinths Greenwich Zone
Drawing No.
13
Peninsula Zone Plinth
Drawing No.
14
17 No. Plinths Dome Zone
Drawing No.
15
3 No. Function Room Benches
Drawing No.
16
Peninsula Zone Plinth
Drawing No.
17
Cafe Zone Learning Bar
05iol
00 RED lo:00
., _.,.
FAX 0181 871 1693
L3.w tirapnlcs
Lra
BAI: GraphicsLimited 25-27 Lydden Road London SW18 +LT

T&phone 0208473 8100
Fmbtu& 0208471
1693
ISDh 0208-877 3250
v.ww.bdca.uk
TOUI Graphic and Display

Production Scrviccr to rhc
Exhibition Indusrry,
Interior and Architectural
lksign Yraclices and the
Advertising
and Promotion
Burine~~ in &~~cr;rl
18* November 1999

Mark Banham Esq
C-Beck Limited
Midlelon I-Iouse
Midleton Estate
Guildford
SurreY
GU2 5XW
Re: GREENWICH
PAVILLION
MILLENNJUM
DOME - MAINTENANCE
PROCJr,DmE
If any prints are damaged you will have to have reprintf produced.
Life expectancy of prints, tranies, mounting. scaling 3 years wananry.
A dusting wirh soft clorh is normal, for more stubborn marks, use a mild soap solution and dry off
with a soft cloth.
Colour fastness of prints and banies, 3 years
lf there arc to be any modi.tYcationsto the graphics or changes we suggest you use skilled graphic
people to undertake any changes.
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH
HEALTH
& SAFETY FILE

SECTION 3
FILE REFERENCE
- EP - 3 - 51
GREENWICH
PAVILLION
(INCLUDING FIT-OUT)
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
- GREENWICH
HEALTH & SAFETY FILE GREENWICH PAVILION

(INCLUDING FIT-OUT)
VOLUME
INDEX
Volume 1
ArchitecturalStructural
Ltd)
Volume 2
Volume 3

drawings)
Volume 4

drawings)
Volume 5
Volume 7
(including as built
(including as built
This File has been produced in accordance with the Construction (Design &
Management) Regulations 1994 - the CDM Regulations.
Prior to commencing any construction, cleaning, maintenance or demolition
operations, the person carrying out the work must be made aware of and
understand the implications of this information in relation to the work activity.
CLIENT GUIDANCE
1.
To comply with CDM Regulations this Health and Safety File must be retained
by the owner of the building to which it relates.
2.
The File must be kept available for referral to in case of maintenance or future
building or improvement works.
3.
The File must be made available to the Planning Supervisor and Designers in
the event of any building or improvement works, and the File amended and
updated accordingly.
4.
It is a legal requirement for the file to be passed to the new owner should the
building be sold.
5.
Should the whole or part of the building be leased out then the owner must
make available to the leaseholder the Health and Safety File.
LIST OF PARTIES
INVOLVED
1. Client (Employer):
New Millennium Experience Company Ltd

Gate 1
Drawdock Road
Greenwich
London
SE10 OBB
Tel:
0181 293 8164
Fax: 0181 293 8746
Contact: Mr A James
2. Quantity Surveyor:
KMB Associates
Thornton House
Thornton Road
Wimbledon
London
SW19 4NG
Tel:
0181 946 7717
Fax: 0181 946 2919
Contact: Mr P Brazewell
3. Architect:
Glen Howells Architects

The Custard Factory
Gibb Street
Birmingham
B9 4AA
Tel:
0121 753 2488
Fax: 0121 753 2401
Contact: Mr G Howells
4. Project Manager:
Wakemans
1l/l 2 Highfield Road
Edgbaston
Birmingham
B15 3EB
Tel:
0121 454 4581
Fax: 01214545206
Contact: Mr R Walton
9. Shell & Core Principal Contractor:
McAlpine/Laing Joint Venture (MLJV)

Gate 1
Drawdock Road
Greenwich
London
SE1 0 OBB
Tel:
0181 293 8671
Fax: 01812938704
Contact: Mr R Kristiansen
(Construction Director)
10. Site Co-ordination Group:
New Millennium Experience Company Ltd

Gate 1
Drawdock Road
Greenwich
London
SE1 0 OBB
Tel:
0181 293 8600
Fax: 0181 293 8704
Contact: Mr S Healey (Manager)
HENRY BOOT MANAGEMENT

PRINCIPLE
GENERAL
PACKAGE
LIMITED
CONTRACTORS
BUILDER
Bell Projects Ltd

Little Burrow
Welwyn Garden City
Herts, AL7 2SP
Tel: 01707 367067

Fax: 01707 328213
Contact : Mr Graham Butler
ELECTRICAL
& PIPEWORK SERVICES
(Mechanical Works carried out by Hilton Building Services Ltd)
G T Ranby (Nottingham) Ltd
Gotham Lane
East Leake
Parkside Works
Loughborough LE 12 6JG
Tel: 01509 853434

Fax: 01509 856377
Contact : Mr Terry Guildford

VENTILATION
DUCTWORK
Croydon Ductwork
3 12 Lower Addiscombe Road
Surrey
CR0 7AF
Tel: 0181 654 7813

Fax: 0181 654 9527
Contact : Mr Richard Wood
DUMB WAITER
LIFTS
SKG Ltd (Southern Regional Office)

Southern Regional Office
St JosephsCourt
Lichfield Street
Tel: 01889 575688
Rugeley
Fax: 01889 583581
Staffordshire WS 15 2EH
Contact : Mr John Elbro
2.
BUILDING FINISHES
(Cores 1 & 5 -t Meridian Point Cafe only)
Swift Southern Ltd
No. 2 Epson Downs
Metro Centre
Waterfield
Tadworth
Surrey KT20 5LR
Tel: 01737 362571

Fax: 01737 370089
Contact : Mr Simon Hearle
BUILDING FINISHES
(All remaining areas)
H S Dev & Co Ltd
The Business Village
Unit 27
Wexham Road
Berks
SL2 5HF
Tel: 01753 524650

Fax: 01753 693108
Contact : Mr Tony Bird
JOINERY
& SHOPFITTING
M J M Marine Ltd
Newry Road
Rathfriland
County Down
N Ireland BT34 5AL
Tel: 01820 638396

Fax: 01820 638973
Contact : Mr Stephen McNulty
CATERING INSTALLATION
(Harry Ramsdens only)
M & B Catering Equipment Ltd
16 South Leigh
Tanfield Lea
Stanley
County Durham DH9 9PB
Contact : Mr Mark Robson
Tel: 01207 230768

Fax: 0 1207 230768
3.
(Cores 1 & 5, Coach Drivers, Typhoo Tea)
PKL Group (UK) Ltd

Stella Way
Bishops Cleeve
Cheltenham
GL52 4DU
Tel: 01242 663077

Fax: 01242 677819
Contact: Mr David McIntosh
(All Other Units)
Catering Connections
Four Lanes Ends
Chesterfield Road
Alfieton
Oakerthorpe
Derbyshire DE55 7LN
Contract : Mr Kevin Waterson
Tel: 01773 836300

Fax: 01773 836333
SECTION 01
7.1
External Works
NOT APPLICABLE
TO THIS FILE
SECTION 02
The structural
1 and 2)
7.2
Structure
works were carried out by Ellmer Construction (see Volumes
SECTION 03
7.3
Architectural finishes
7.3.1
Design criteria and basis for design
7.3.2
Record as-built drawings
7.3.3
0 & M manuals
7.3.4
Method statement on repairs/replacement
7.3.5
Residual risks list
SECTION 03
7.3
Architectural finishes
SECTION 03
7.3.1
Glenn Howells
Architects
GENERAL STATEMENT
ON THE BASIS FOR THE DESIGN AND DESIGN CRITERIA
Project
Project Ref.
CATERING
1078
Planning Supervisor
KMB ASSOCIATES,
1.0
Design Criteria
1.1
Design Background
FACILITIES,
MILLENIUM
DOME, GREENWICH
LINCOLNSHIRE
Glenn Howells Architects were appointed as Architects by Project Managers,

on behalf of NMEC in1999.
1.3
Wakemans,
Design Responsibilities
Glenn Howells Architects responsibilities include:
to work closely with Wakemans and the design team to implement the brief
to design the works to meet the requirements of the Building, the Health and Safety at
Work Acts and other statutory instruments.
co-ordination of the design team and specialist suppliers.
. to assess materials for suitability and use: selection of materials has been supplied by
the project manager, the quantity surveyor and specialist suppliers.
l
l
l
l
2.0
Construction
2.1
General
Criteria
Glenn Howells Architects endeavour to produce buildings of quality and of lasting value.
We endeavour to design buildings in which we consider at the earliest stage their means
of erection and fabrication.
2.2
Sequence of work
The design involves the insertion of kitchen and catering facilities into works already
designed and constructed by others. The as-built construction of these preceding works
has been visually inspected. Further works continue to be erected around the area of
works within the design teams brief. As such the sequence of work follows all preceding
works and is a fit-out operation.
SECTION 03
7.3.2
Architects as built drawings

1Architect:
1Glen Howells
1Job No: 2596
Description of project:
1Millennium Dome - Catering Offers - Meridian Point Cafe
Drawing Number
Drawing Title
500 A
Plans, Elevations
SECTION 03
7.3.3
0 & M manuals
THE CLEANING OF
CERAMIC TILES
It is now widely appreciated that in determining

the total cost involved in providing any type of
wall or floor surface it is necessary to take into
account not just the initial capital outlay but also
the additional expense likely to be incurred in
the subsequent
cleaning,
maintenance
and
renewal
of all such surfaces.
From
this
standpoint
ceramic tiles and quarry tiles are
ideal because they can be readily maintained in
a clean, hygienic condition and they do not have
to be renewed at intervals.
The present leaflet acts out the recommended
procedures
for general
maintenance
and
cleaning of ceramic wall and floor tiles, and
quarries, and has been drawn up jointly by the
British Ceramic Tile Council and the British
-. Institute of Cleaning Solence.
1.
UNGLAZED
CERAMIC
AND QUARRIES
FLOOR
TILES
The paragraphs shown in bold type are based

on recommendations
made in British Standard
Code of Practice CP 202: 1972 Tile Flooring
now revised, to be
and Slab Flooring,
published in due course as BS 5385: Part 3
Code
of Practice for the Design
and
Installation
of Ceramic
Floor Tiles and
Mosaics (formerly Part of CP202).
1.1 Normal Cleaning
In normal circumstances unglazed floor tiles
and quarries require little maintenance
and
are easily kept clean by sweeping and then
washing with warm water to which a neutral or
nearly-neutral,
low sulphate detergent
has
been added, for example:-
Bloacan
Bri-Liquid
DLD
Fairy Liquid
Gunk
HG Superfloor
Nonidet LE
Nu-Kleen
Stargene
Sunlight Washing-up Liquid
Synparonic NP8
Taski Low Foam Cleaner
Teapol GD53
Truclean
Hankel Chemicals, 292-308 Southbury Rd. Endfield. EN1 1TS

Brloham Group Ltd, The Hyde, Edgware Rd, London NW9 6AE
Diversy Ltd, Weston Favell Centre, Northampton NN3 4PD
Proctor & Gamble Ltd, Whitley Rd, Longbenton, Newcastle-upon-Tyne NE12 9TY
English Abrasives Ltd, PO BOX 85, Marsh Lane, Tottenham N7 OXA
Worldpoint Ltd. Unit 2C. Bantalls Complex. Colchester Rd. Heybridge, Maldon, Essex
CM9 7NW
Shell Chemicals UK Ltd, Heronbridge House, Chester Business Park, Chester,
CH4 8Q
Jeyes Ltd. Brunei Way, Thetford, Norfolk lP24 1HA
Lever Brothers Ltd, Lever House, 3 St. Jamess Rd, Kingston-upon-Thames KT1 2BA
Lever Brothers Ltd, Lever House, 3 St. Jamess Rd, Kingston-upon-Thames
KTI 2BA
ICI plc, PO BOX 14, The Heath, Runcom, Cheshire WA& 4QF
Lever Industrial, Lever House, 3 StJamess Rd. Kingston-upon-Thames
KTI 288
Shell Chemicals UK Ltd. Heronbridge House, Chester Business Park, Chester,
CH4 8Q
The Floor Maintenance Advice Centre, St Lukes Hall, William St. off Whitehouse St,
Bedminster, Bristol BS3 4BW
A detergent used on a regular basis should be

selected from those listed above.
Whichever cleaning aid is employed it should be
used in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions. Usually, it will be left for 5 to 15
minutes on the tiles, but it is essential to ensure
that it is completely removed by final rinsing with
clean water. IT IS THE RINSING PROCESS
WHICH REMOVES THE DIRT.
When selecting a cleaning aid care must be
taken to avoid the possibility of the risk of
damage to the adjacent fixtures and wall
finishes.
Household soaps are not recommended
they tend to leave a slippery scum,
particularly in hard water areas.
The application of linseed oil, permanent

sealing compositions
or polishes is not
recommended
for unglazed floor tiles or
quarry tiles since theyre not absorbed into
the surface and tend to make the tiles
slippery and difficult to clean.
1.2 Degreasers
As a general rule oil and greasy materials
should be removed as promptly as possible from
tiled floors.
as
Greasy deposits can be removed by

detergents incorporating
an organic solvent
or a highly-alkaline
detergent (pH>9), but
these should be used for only occasional
must not be of a type to cause possible

damage to the tiles or joints.
cleaning. The occasional use of abrasive

cleaners can be beneficial but should be
restricted to unglazed floor finishes.
For heavily contaminated
areas it may
necessary to use a degreaser, for example:-
be
Two different types of brushes are
recommended:(a) Union mix brushes for washing the
tiles with a light scrubbing action.
(b) Polypropylene
brushes where the
deposits of dirt are especially heavy.
TASKI OIL AND GREASE REMOVER

Manufactured
by Lever Industrial, Lever House,
3 St.Jamess
Road, Kingston-upon-Thames,
KT12BB.
QUARRYCLEAN
Manufactured by Dennis Ruabon Limited, Hafod
Tileries, Ruabon, Wrexham, Clwyd, LL14 6ET.
These products should be used strictly in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
1.3 Use of Scrubbing
Machines
The normal
cleaning
recommendations
in
Section 1 .l above will suffice to keep a ceramic
floor in a satisfactory
clean condition
but,
occasionally, perhaps through neglect, dirt may
build up to the extent that more vigorous
cleansing techniques are necessary to restore
the tiled floor to its pristine condition.
A
scrubbing machine fitted with a detergent tank or
a combined
scrubbing
and drying machine
would normally be used for this purpose and,
broadly, these would fall into two main groups:1.3.1
Rotary
machine
operated
r.p.m.
Action.
Whichever
is selected it should
at speeds in excess
rotary
not be
of 450
1.3.2
Contra-rotating (which is a twin or

multiple brush machine). A contrarotating machine is very easy to handle
and is sometimes preferred by female
operators. However, its scrubbing action
is of a lesser degree than rotary action
machines.
After applying the detergent solution the floor

must be thoroughly rinsed, after 5 to 15 minutes,
to remove any residual detergent since IT IS
THE RINSING PROCESS WHICH REMOVES
THE DIRT.
1.3.3
Having selected the most suitable type

of machine the choice of brushes to
carry out this work is all important. The
brushes have to be flexible enough to
grip the floor and at the same time they
Note:
Some machines are now available which are
capable of reaching speeds of 2,000 r.p.m., and
these could damage a filed floor. If is important
to ensure that whichever machine is used if is
not employed at a speed exceeding 450 r.p.m.
in order to avoid possible melting of bristles, for
example
on polypropylenes,
and potential
damage to the floor surface. Damage can also
be caused if the machine is not kept moving
whilst in use.
The regular use of scrub and rinse cleaning
machines fitted with abrasive pads, other than
the finest grades, is likely to damage the surface
and may result in gradual loss of thickness in the
wear
layer.
Cleaning
pads
are
not
recommended.
2.
GLAZED
CERAMIC
FLOOR
TILES
Any loose dirt or grit should be removed by

gentle cleaning with a dry brush. The normal
cleaning procedures mentioned in Section 1.1
above should
then be adopted.
Abrasive
powders, that may scratch the glaze, must not
be used.
3.
GLAZED
CERAMIC
WALL
TILES
Any loose dirt or grit should be removed first by

gentle wiping off with a dry cloth. (Abrasive
powders, that may scratch the glaze, must not
be used for this purpose). This should then be
followed by washing with warm water to which a
neutral, low sulphate detergent has been added
(see Section 1 .l). After a further rinse with clean
water to ensure thorough removal of detergent
solution the installation should be given a final
wipe down and polish with a clean, dry, soft
cloth.
4.
SPECIALISED
TREATMENTS
4.1 Efflorescence
Efflorescence
is a white deposit which may
develop on the floor surface as drying out
proceeds. It is due to the crystallization on the

tile or slab surface of soluble salts caused by
moisture from the bedding or sub-floor. It is
aggravated
by excessively damp conditions
following installation or prolonged delay in drying
The deposit
disappears
with washing
with
clean water but may reappear after drying.
Efflorescence
diminishes
with progressive
washing and the most effective treatment
is
to increase the frequency
of washing
until
the deposit ceases.
Ceramic Tile Council for specific methods of

treatment.
(c) By bleaching to remove the colour from the
stain. For example, some stains may be
removed
by treatment
with household
bleach (certain inks, blood, coffee, etc,).
Persistent
efflorescence
may arise from
rising moisture
where
inadequate
dampresisting construction
has been carried out.
Whichever method is adopted to remove a

particular stain the operation should be followed
by copious rinsing with fresh water.
4.2 Residual
Particularly
removed with
Occasionally,
used, but not
Cement Film on Floor Tiles
A film of cement may be left on some floor

surfaces. This can be removed by treatment with
appropriate
proprietary
acid cleaners,
for
example:BAL CERAMIC FLOOR CLEANER
Manufactured
by Building
Adhesives
Longton
Rd, Trentham,
Stoke-on-Trent,
8JB
Ltd,
ST4
QUARRY CEMENT REMOVER

Manufactured
by Dennis Ruabon Ltd, Hafod
Tiliries, Ruabon, Wrexham. Clwyd, LL14 6ET
These products
should be used strictly in
accordance with the manufacturers instructions.
4.3 Various Types of Stains
Floor Tiles and Quarries
Surface stains may be removed
ways, either
on
Unglazed
in one of three
(a) By physical
means,
for example
by
scrubbing with an abrasive soap such as
Gumption, Vim, Jif or Ajax, with or without a
floor machine. Do not use steel wool; small
particles of wire wool may be deposited in
the grouting and result in rust marks.
(b) By chemical means, for example by reaction
with an appropriate
reagent or solvent.
There are many different materials in use in
factories and industrial premises that may
cause occasional
staining,
and further
advice should be obtained from the British
stubborn
blemishes
may
be
scouring powder.
pumice block or bleach may be
on a regular basis.
4.4 High Pressure
Cleaning
High velocity cold or hot water jetting equipment

is in use in many industries, particularly for the
removal of obstinate deposits which defy normal
cleansing techniques
such as dirt or grime
present in heavy concentrations or in relatively
inaccessible areas.
Because of the ease with which ceramic tile
surfaces, both unglazed and glazed, can be
maintained in a clean condition, high-pressure
equipment is not often used on such surfaces,
but where it is employed the following points
should be noted:(a) Whilst tiles will not be affected by high water
pressure excessive pressures may abrade
the grouting material in the joints between.
For this reason care must be taken when
using high-pressure water jetting equipment
to ensure that the water is not concentrated
on one point for too long but sprayed evenly
across the entire surface being cleaned.
detergents
and
abrasives,
(b) Sometimes
disinfectants are added to the high velocity
water. Whilst correctly proportioned mixes of
suitable detergents or disinfectants in water
should not harm tiles or grouting material,
abrasives added to the water may produce
damage.
Therefore
water
incorporating
abrasive materials should not be sprayed
over tile surfaces.
CLEANING
AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULE
WALL TILE
Wall tiles require little maintenance and are easily cleaned. Any loose dirt or grit should
be removed first by gentle wiping off with a dry cloth. (Abrasive powders, that may
scratch the glaze, must not be used for this purpose). The wall tile surface should then
be washed with warm water to which a neutral, low sulphate detergent has been added.
After a further rinse with clean water to ensure thorough removal of detergent solution,
the installation should be given a final wipe down and polish with a clean, dry, soft cloth.
FLOOR TILES
Damage can occur to a floor finish by misuse or incorrect maintenance because of
inadequate instructions initially. Personnel responsible for maintenance should be given
full information concerning any particular risks of misuse likely to occur, including
recommendations for cleaning. Ceramic floor finishes require little maintenance and are
easily kept clean by regular sweeping, then washing with warm water to which a
soapless detergent has been added and, finally, rinsing with clean water. Unglazed
finishes will not be damaged by the occasional use of sourcing powder, pumice blocks or
bleach to remove particularly stubborn blemishes. However, it should be noted the
regular use of scrub and rinse cleaning machines fitted with abrasive pads, other than
the finest grades, is likely to damage the surface and may result in gradual loss of
thickness in the wear layer.
Care is necessary to ensure that cleaning agents are not allowed to come into contact
with adjacent fixtures and wall surfaces.
Care is necessary to ensure that cleaning agents are not allowed to come into contact
with adjacent fixtures and wall surfaces.
Apart from normal usage or obvious misuse, surface contamination can arise from:
w
(d)
efflorescence
residual cement film
surface sealing materials
the reaction of cleaning agents with hard water
unsuitable cleaning agents
frequent use of unsuitable cleaning agents, including highly alkaline detergents
and chemicals.
Effective cleaning can usually be achieved by normal washing or scrubbing with warm
water and a neutral sulphate-free detergent. Greasy deposits can be removed by
detergent incorporating an organic solvent or a highly alkaline detergent (ph > 9) but
these should be used for only occasional cleaning. It is essential that a detergent used
on a regular basis is of a type recommended for cleaning ceramic floors. The occasional
use of abrasive cleaners can be beneficial but should be restricted to unglazed floor
tiles.
It is important to ensure that the cleaning agent is completely removed by a final rinsing
with clean water.
Household soaps are not recommended as they tend to leave a slippery scum,
particularly in hard water areas.
Efflorescence is aggravated by excessively damp conditions following installation or
prolonged delay in drying out and may be persistent if it is due to rising moisture where
damp-resisting construction is inadequate. The deposit should disappear with washing
but may reappear after drying; it should diminish with progressive washing and the most
effective treatment is to increase the frequency of washing until the deposit ceases.
Persistent deposits may be treated with appropriate proprietary acidic cleaners, but in
such cases the floor should be wetted and the free water removed before the application
of the cleaning agent. It is important that this treatment is followed immediately by
thorough rinsing with clean water.
The application of linseed oil, permanent sealing compositions or polishes is not
recommended since these materials are not absorbed into the surface and tend to make
the surface slippery and difficult to clean.
Temporary tile sealers may be used to facilitate cleaning-off after laying and grouting;
these proprietary compositions can be readily removed after completion of the grouting
operation by using normally alkaline detergents and rinsing. Where temporary sealers
are employed they should be used strictly in accordance with the manufacturers
instructions.
Some floor surfaces may have a film of cement which is insoluble in water. This can be
removed only by treatment with appropriate proprietary acid cleaners. The floor should
be wetted and free water removed before the application of the cleaning agent. It is
important that this treatment is followed immediately by a thorough rinsing with clean
water.
H & R Johnson wall and floor tiles are quality assured products manufactured to
BS6431: Part 6 (floor) and should be fixed in accordance with the appropriate Codes of
Practice.
.i .!
,.I;
; +. : .
.
.y*..
,,
.:__
? .i. Y.C,:,,:s ,*.
....-.,
.:.._,_.
;.
.I
:I:
,jL
I
June
GyprexMG
PVC faced ceiling
tiles
British
G$psum
I
1997
8.
EXPOSURE
Occupational
CONTROLS/PERSONNEL
Exposure
11. TOXICOLOGIC=
Limits
Total Inhal,&lr
Substance
.
PROTFAZMON
Ioral Respmble
Gypsum/plaster IOmg/m8hrlWA OES Smglm8hrTWA

0 Imq/m AhrTWAMEI,MMMT
Quar17.(s1hca)
- n/a ~mq/ml(hl TV/I\ MEI, 01 %fihtrs/ml-. 8h1 IWA MEL
Refer to current edition of HSE EH40 - Occupational
exposure limits
INFO-=ON,
_,
Inhalation
Dust may irritate respiratory

known long term effects.
Skin Contact
Prolonged or repeated
leading to irritation.
Eye Contact
Dust or particles
Ingestion
Not applicable.
_,
_.
system, no
contact may dry skin,
may irritate lempor~lrily.
12. ECOLOGICALINFO-TION
Note
the man made mmeral fibres (MMMF) used m

rlreline boa)-ds are non-resplmblc
with fibre
diameters m excess of 1Opm
13. DISPOSAL
Personal
protection
IJIS~)OSC~
Respiratory
SkII
<II XI
local or national controls.
To avord skin cont<\ct WAII protctcl~ve ylovcs,

overalls and footwear
To reduce the effect of skin contact apply a
barrier cream to the hands
15. REGULATORY
PHYSICAL
Appearance
Weight/m
AND
CHEMICAL
wear safety goggles
to
PROPERTIES
Flat boards m dlffernt widths and thicknesses

9.5mm 7.0kgs approx.
12 5mm
9.Okgs approx
15Omm11.5kgs approx.
19.Omm
11 5kgs approx
(SoundBloc)
10. STABILITY
12.5mm 15,Omm -
AND
REACTIVITY
14. TRANSPORT
INFORMATION
Not classified
as hazardous
. .. . . .. . .. . . ..
Stable and unreactive
Safety Data Sheet prepared in accordance

of CHIP 2 and Directive 9 I/ 15YEEC.
16. OTHER
Technical
.,,,
WrItten enqulnes
addressed to:-
should be
British Gypsum Limited

Techmcal Service Dept.
East Leake
Loughborough
LE12 6JT
with Regulation
INFORMATION
This information
specification.
Note to User
enquiries
INFORMATION
Products are not classified as hazardous under :The Chemicals (Hazard Information and Packagmg)
Regulations 1994 (CHIP 2).
Occupational
Exposure Limits EH40, (revlewed and
reprmted annually).
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSHH)
Regulations 1994.
No warranty
Written
,..,,,.........
for transport.
:.
Recommended
uses : Gyproc plasterboal-ds are used as
internal linings in buildings. Moisture resistant grades may
also be used in protected external situations or in
temporary exposure condltlons.
10.5kgs approx.
12.5kgs approx
..,.,,.. ,,.. . . . .. . . . .
Idndf~ll s te LIP,~cco~d,~nce with
;luthorlsed
Control dust formation and ventilate the area

of work.
If dust can not be controlled weal- a half fact
mask to FFPl.
If dust is produced
BS 2092.
Eye
9.
CONSIDERATIONS
reflects typical values and is not a product
is hereby
expressed
sr implied.
This Safety Data Sheet does not constitute

users own workplace
risk assessment
service
British Gypsum technical staff are available for discussion and

to render techmcal advice when the Companys products are
being speclfled or used. These services are avaIlable nationally
through the numbers listed below.
Telephone
Fax0115
0115 945 6123

945 6356
tnF$,
,,,.:,I
(;y,,sm
ApIIII?S
..,
....,.,, ,, .._.
Gypsum
Company
Routine Maintenance
Recommendations
for
Altro@ safety
Altro Floors, Works Road,
e-mail: info@altro.co.uk
Letchwor-th,
floor&g
Herts SG6 1NW. Tel: 0990 480480

JANUARY
www.aftro.co.uk
Where Altro safety flooring is required to provide its maximum

be polished or sealed and should be maintained
slip resistance,
1999
i.e. kitchen and shower areas, it should not
as follows:
[HOWTOCj
MACHINE
MANUAL
1. Vacuum up dust and other debris.
1. Sweep up dust and other debris.
2. Apply Altroclean 44TM or equivalent

and leave for several minutes.
alkaline
3. Machine scrub using medium synthetic

brushes for Altro MarineTM 20).
cleaner
3. Scrub with deck scrubber
pad (or
alkaline
cleaner
or edge cleaner.
4. Mop up residue. Always usz a twin compartment

bucket to avoid redistribution
of dirt.
4. Wet vacuum residue.

5. Rinse with warn7 clean water and vacuum
2. Apply Aftroclean 441M or equivalent

and leave for several minutes.
dry.
5. Mop rinse with warm clean water and allow to dry.
Where Altro safety flooring is not required to provide its maximum slip resistance, it may be maintained as described below
in a manner similar to smooth vinyl floor coverings. However, this will reduce slip resistance in the areas concerned and
it is the responsibility of the building owner to assess the appropriate level of slip resistance in all cases.
MACHINE
MANUAL
1. Vacuum up dust and other debris,
1. Sweep up dust and other debris.
2. For the initial clean, machine scrub using medium

synthetic pad and Altroclean 44TM.
2. For initial clean scrub using a deck scrubber

edge cleaner and Altroclean 44TM.
3. Vacuum any residue and rinse with clean warm

water.
3. Before applying a metallised emulsion seal polish,

always mop any residue and rinse with clean
warm water.
4. Apply two coats of AltroglossTM 211 metallised

emulsion polish or equivalent.
5. For routine maintenance, spray buff using Attroclean
48W cleaner/maintainer, or equivalent1
4. Apply 2 coats of AltroglossTM

emulsion polish or equivalent.
5. For routine maintenance,
48wTM cleaner/maintainer,
211 metallised
mop clean using Aftruclean

or equivalent.
If the Altro safety flooring shows signs of a build up of polish, it should be re-treated by stripping with Aftroclean
an equivalent dressing remover and then seal& with Altrogloss lU 21 1 metallised emulsion polish or equivalent.
ailure
lo maintain
~~mmendedprocedum
-wther
Sxmatim
Mro
ten
Is available
safety
flooring
in accordance
affect (hew0ffhepfcxbc-t.
frvm your Altro fegio0a.l
ofice.
with
P/ease
cleaner
Services
ensure
you
you intend
~p.qmnent
or
have
the Health
and Safety
Data
to use. In the event of any queries
will be pleased
to advise
You.
44+ or
Sheet
for
our T&d
My
.
Develop a regular cleaning programme suited to the usage
and traffic of the area. Heavily trafficked or highly visible
areas need to be deanecf more often than areas which are
seldom used, or where appearance is less important.
The best and most cost effective method of cleaning sealed
and unsealed Akro safety flooring is by machine.
Care should be taken to select the correct machine pad,
medium pads for unsealed Altro safety flooring and soft
pads where Altro safety flooring has been sealed. For Altro
Marine 20, use nylon or polypropylene brushes.
Afways check the suitabiliiof cleaners foruseonvinyl6oors.

Do not use cleaner containing pine oil.
To remove any rubber heel marks by abrasion, use the
correct machine pad, orscrubby
hand, using scouring
powder if necessary or Spontex Black Mark Remover.
Do not use polishes or seals on Altro Walkway
where its static dissipative properties are needed.
2OSD
For cleaning Altro PrismaticTM Multi-Purpose flooring, please

refer to the cleaning instructions on the Altro PrismaticTM
maintenance card.
Do remember that dirty equipment, particularly mops, does

not clean, it merely redistributes the dirt.
Use only recommended cleaning liquids or their equivalent
in the correct concentration. Do not mix cleaning liquids
together, and always follow the manufacturers instructions.
Some materials are known to cause staining on vinyl floors.

rypicaf examples include:
Asphalt and bitumen materials
Cardboard/Hardboard
(wet)
.
Transfer of some fibre treatments

rlaterials used on carpets
and maintenance
)Yes from printed literature or packaging

iubber-backed
carpets and rubber mats
{ubber furniture rests and trolley wheels

;hoe soles not made from non-staining
materials
Some chemicals
used in cleaners e.g. pine oil
Poster paints and powder
paints.
tn many cases the stains caused cannot be removed. As these

materials are known to cause problems with vinyl and many
thermoplastic
floors, Altro cannot accept responsibility for
such staining. Always select the most suitable floor colour
for the expected traffic conditions. Darker colours will always
tend to give improved
performance
in areas of heavy
staining. Always use non-staining
varieties of rubber
where contact with the vinyl floor cannot be avoided. The
Altro Warranty does not cover problems associated with
staining where the installation and use recommendations
have not been followed.
{cat degradation
CLEANING AGENTS AND POLISHES)

Nro Umtted
,I 0990 480480
Diversay Lever Llmlted

Northampton. Tel: 01604 405311
S.C. Johnson
Cambedey, Surrey. Tel: 01276 63456
Iplied ChemicalsUmited
vcntfy,WestMidlands.Tel: 01203 363575
Hako Clean Midlands

Crick,Northants. Tel: 01788 823535
Spontax Umited
Swansea, SouUfWales.Tel: 01792 475544
lish Nova WorksLlmlted

~lt1.4,Middlesex.Tel:018 1 574 653 1
Premier Products
Cheltenham. Glas. Tel: 01242 243421
3M PLC
Manchester. Tel: 0161 236 8500
A
!cnham, &mbs. Tel:01954 251573
Pmchfzm Umlted
Chessinglor~,Surrey. Tel: 018 1 974 1515
IACHINES
AND EQUIPMENT)
cx Urntied
Nitfisk Umtted
Xhurch, Corsel.Tel:01202 499699
BurySt Edmunds, Suffolk. Tel: 01284 763 163
ney CeverUmited
lampton. Tel:01604 405311
Prochem UmftfXf
Chessington.Surrey. Tel: 018 1 974 1515
ex UKLimited
JaMe.Kent. Tel:01227 771276
RGKUmited
Linlithgow, Scotland. Tel: 01506 847999
DECK SCRUBBERS
EDGE CLEANERS
Clean Midlands
NathanIs. Tel:0 1788 823535
Rotowash (UK) Umlted

Isleworth, Middlesex. Tel: 0181 847 4545
These can be obtained from Pro&em

Limited or your local janitorial supplier.
Wetrock LImIted
Warrington, Cheshire.Tel: 01925 711222
&
SECTION 03
7.3.4
Method statement on repairs/replacement
NOT APPLICABLE
SECTION 03
7.3.5
Residual risks list
Glenn Howells
STATEMENT
Architects
ON RESIDUAL
RISKS
Project
Project Ref.
CATERING
1078
Planning Supervisor
KMB ASSOCIATES,
1.0
FACILITIES,
MILLENIUM
DOME, GREENWICH
LINCOLNSHIRE
Residual Risks
Durability, availability and application of materials have been tested. The Health and
Safety aspects of materials have been checked and assessed. All known hazards have
been eliminated or are controlled.
We have identified no residual risks.
SECTION 04
7.4
Electrical services and equipment
7.4.1
7.4.2
7.4.3
0 & M Manuals
7.4.4
Selected method statements
7.4.5
Residual risks to health and safety
SECTION 04
7.4
Electrical services and equipment
SECTION 04
7.41
(#
regory
RWG
30-32 Thames Street

Tel: +44 (0)20 8941
Hampton
4421
Fax:
THE MILLENNIUM
Middlesex
+44 (0)20
and Partners
TW12 2DX
8941 0047
Email:
/ Consulting
infoman@rwgregon/.co.uk
Web:
Engineers
www.rwgregory.co.uk
DOME
DESIGN CRITERIA
ELECTRICAL SERVlCES
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The electrical installation at the Millennium Dome has been designed and installed in accordance with
the relevant British Standards as listed below.
2.0
GENERAL LIGHTING AND POWER

Generally in accordance with the 16h Edition Wiring Regulations BS 7671 incorporating
amendments and CIBSE Lighting Guide L3.
3.0
EMERGENCY LIGHTING
Generally in accordance with BS 5266.
4.0
FIRE ALARMS
Generally in accordance with BS 5839 - L3 coverage.
A firm Quality Assured to BS EN IS0 9001
the latest
SECTION 04
7.4.2
Friday, 7 April 2000

KMB
The Old Baker House
Kit-ton
Lincolnshire
PE20 IEH
For the Attention
of : Colin Clarke
Dear Sirs,
Re: Millennium
Dome
Further to our issue of the as built drawings for the above project, we would confirm that all drawings listed
below have been checked by the project engineer and are a true representation of the full mechanical
services installation.
World Bites, Trade Winds, Juspiration,
Fruits Of The Earth, Pasta Pizza, Street Bites, Square Bites,
Main Square Cafe, Meridian Cafe, Coach Drivers, Hot Bites, Orange Terrace, Red Terrace, Yellow
Terrace, Typhoo Tea and Harry Ramsdens.
We trust this meets with your approval.
Yours faithfully
HILTON BUILDING
SERVICES LIMITED
Mark Harvey
Senior Quantity Surveyor
%uildford
S:\1999\299221
Fri 7 April 2000
Page 1 of 1
- G T Ranby
Millennium
Dome\Letters\KMB.wpd
Electrical as built drawings

Electrical
Contractor
G T Ranby
Description of project:
Job No: 2596
1Millennium Dome - Catering Offers - Meridian Cafe
Drawing Number
Drawing Title
RE560/50/MGOl
Lighting and Power Layouts
RE560/50/COS
Electrical Services - Code of Symbols
SECTION 04
7.4.3
0 & M Manuals
(NOJ~-~~IG~~AM)
OPERATION
LTD.
AND MAINTENANCE
MANUAL
CONTRACT
MILLENNIUM
DOME
LONDON
MERIDIAN
CAFE
MILLENNIUM
MERIDIAN
ELECTRICAL
DOME
CAFE
INSTALLATION
INDEX
SECTION
SCOPE OF WORKS
SECTION
DISTRIBUTION
SECTION
TEST CERTIFICATES
SECTION
TEST RESULTS
SECTION
SCHEDULES
SECTION
MAINTENANCE
SECTION
AS INSTALLED
BOARD
SCIIEDULES
OF EQUIPMENT
REQUIREMENTS
DRAWINGS
& MATERIALS
SECTION 1
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.1
SCOPE
1.2
SUB DISTRIBUTION
1.3
POWER
1.4
LIGHTING
1.5
EMERGENCY LIGffTING
1.6
FIRE ALARMS
1.7
MECHANICAL
SERVICES WIRING
SECTION 1
PROJECT DESCRIPTION
1.1) SCOPE
The works encompassesthe complete electrical installation to the Servery and
Kitchen Areas as shown in the enclosed drawings and listed on the circuit
schedules.
1.2) SUB DISTRIBUTION
The supply originates at the Main Isolator, positioned locally and feeds the
distribution boards within the Kitchen via a Sub Main circuit. Adjacent Sub
Distribution Boards are fitted for counter supplies and lighting via 240VoIt and
12VoIt Dimmer Racks for I Iouse Lighting.
1.3) POWER
Local small power requirements are served by 13amp switched socket outlets as
shown on the relevant drawings. Fixed appliances are supplied as shown on the
relevant drawings, installed by others to outlets provided. Counters are connected
by others to the Counter circuits provided.
1.4) LIGHTING
All lighting is as shown on the relevant drawings controlled by local switching in
the Kitchen. The Seating Area lighting is wired directly from the Dimmer Racks,
to be controlled remotely. All lighting is connected via plug-in ceiling roses
situated above the false ceiling, except for Signage, connected via fused spurs as
required.
1S) EMERGENCY LIGHTING
The location of the self contained emergency lighting is shown on the relevant
drawings.
Emergency lighting test key switches are situated on the multi-gang switch unit
adjacent to the Distribution Board to allow routine testing to be carried out.
1.6) FIRE ALARMS
The Fire Alarm System is an extension of the Main Dome Fire Alarm system and
supplied, installed and maintained by Protec Ltd.
1.7) MECHANICAL
SERVICES WIRING
Wiring to Mechanical Services such as I Ieater Batteries, 1loists. Gas shut-off

valves and drainage pumps etc. are all direct from the Distribution Boards on
dedicated circuits with local isolation where required. These are as listed on the
drawings and circuit schedules.
SECTION 2
DISTKIBUTION
BOARD SCHEDULES
SECTION 2
DISTRIBUTION
BOARD SCHEDULES
Distribution Board Schedules are included within the Test Results (Section 4).
SECTION
TEST CfXTWICATES
3.1
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION
3.2
FIRE ALARM
CERTII~ICAIE
3.3
EMERGENCY
LIGHTING
COMPLETION
CERTIFICATE
CERIII~ICATE
This certificate
is not valid If the serial
1380091
EIC/
fiLEc-~!R,c~61.
IWXi\i_l~/arroN CERTIFICATE
/Iii
~lllll~l
I.11
!1I
/OII
I I I I
/lilll\l
II
;;I;:I
I i\ii11li5
I!!; /II/I
111L WIRING
HEGULAlIONS]I
Issued by an Approved Contractor or Conforming Body enrolled with the National Inspection Council
for Electrical Installation Contracting, Vintage House, 37 Albert Embankment, London SE1 7UJ.
Client /
Address:
HENRYBOOTMANAGEMENT
LTD
The installation
Address:
is:
MERIDIAN POINT CAFE CATERING UNIT
Extent of the
installation
covered by this
ce rtificate:
CIRCUITS AS LISTED IN ATTACHEDSCHEDULES
addi&
ltnr.,t;nn An

for the design of the electrical
installation
(as indicated
by my/our signature(s)
below), particulars
of which are
described above, having exercised reasonable
skill and care when carrying out the design, hereby CERTIFY that the design work for which I/we have been
responsible
is, to the best of my/our
knowledge
and belief, in accordance
with BS 7671 amended
to
(date)
exckpt for the departures, if any, detailed as follows:
Details
of departures
from
ES 7671,
as amended

of the signatory/signatories
(Regulations
is limited
120-02,
120-05):
to the work
described
above
as the subject
(Where
Signature
Date
Signature
Date
of this
certificate.
there is divided
responsibility
for the design)
Name
Designer 1
(CAPITALS)
Name
(CAPITALS)

of the electrical
installation
(as indicated
by my/our signature
below), particulars
of which
are described
above, having exercised reasonable
skill and care when carrying out the construction,
hereby CERTIFY that the construction
work for which
I/we have been responsible is, to the best of my/our knowledge and belief, in accordance
(date)
except for the the departures,
if any, detailed as follows:
1998
Details
of departures
from
BS 7671, as amended:
The extent of liability of the signatory is limited to the work described

Signature
above
of this certificate.
Name
---ih--

for
are described
above, having exercised
I/we have been responsible is to the best
except for the departures,
if any, detailed
as the subject
(CAP'TALS)
T J GUILDFORD
the inspection and testing of the electrical installation (as indicated by my/our sign, atures below), particulars
of which
reasonable
skill and care when carrying out the inspection
and testing, hereby CERTIFY that the 1Nork for which
of my/our knowledge and belief in accordance
with BS 7671, amended to
(date)
r41cts
as follows:
partures
from
BS 7671,
as amended:

For the INSPEC
QualiZying
Manager t
I, being the person responsible for the design, construction,

inspection and testing of the electrical installation (as indicated by my signature below), particulars of which
are described above, having exercised reasonable skill and care when carrying outthe design, construction,
inspection and testing, hereby CERTlFYthatthe
said work
for which I have been responsible is to the best of my knowledge and belief in accordance with BS 7671, amended to
(date)
except for the departures, if any, detailed as follows:
Details
of departures
from BS 7671, as amended
(Regulations
120-02, 120-05):
The extent of liability of the signatory is limited m the work described above as the subject of this celtificate.
For the DESIGN, the CONSTRUCTION and the INSPECTION AND TESTING of the installation.
Signature
Name
(CAPITALS)
Date
Reviewed
by
Date
1 Signature
i Name
I (CAPITALS)
Dualiing
Manager
t where tie inspecpbnand bAng have ken carded wt by an Appmvad fZonlmclw;the &ecOon and tastiogresoks am to ba rekwd by the registemd Cloalraklymg
Manager
tt Where the des@,,the constnxdon, and tire inspecbon and fer;anshave been tie responsibility of one person, the inspecbon and testing resulls are to be reviewed by tie
registered Oua/+ng Managas
Published by the National Inspection Council for Electrical Installation Contracting
0 Copyright
NICEIC (Nov 98)
Page
1 of
t t
This certificate
1380091
EW
Organisation
NICEIC Enmlmant No
(whereappmphatel
Address:
Postcode
:
/
!
I
/
I
Branchnumber:
(if applicable)
NlCElCEmlmentNo
(wbereappmpdam)
/
,
Branchnumber:
(if applicable)
I
/
j
1
Organisation
DESIGN (2)
Address:
Postcode
Organisation
G T RANBY (NOTTINGHAM)LTD
NICEICEnmmentNc
PARKSIDE WORKS,GOTHAMROAD, EAST LEAKE,

LOUGHBOROUGH,
LEICS, LE12 6JG
+ u
qOr,,nisation
Address:
G T RANBY (NOTTINGHAM)LTD
NlCElCE&mantNo
PARKSIDE WORKS,GOTHAMROAD, EAST LEAKE,

LOUGHBOROUGH,
LEICS, LE12 6JG
+ Number and Type of live Conductors
TypeIs
B.C.
l-phase
(2MeI
TNC-S
l-phase
13til
l-phase
l3wirel
l-phase
13hirel
TNC
l-r
Nature
Nominal U/V
voltage(s):
d.c.
bhe~~a~pmpriste~
of Supply
Parameters
y/c
%I
* Characteristics
Overcurrent
of Primary Sup ly
Protective
Device P0)
3S(EN)
1 pole
&phase
II tieI
Branch number:
(if applicable)
Postcode
Wstem
TN-S
i 1
Branch number:
fif aDDliCabkd
Postcode
BS
3-pole
Prospective fault
current lJn
OthOf
Externalearth fault
wp impsdana,Zafw9/
Nominal current
rating
Number of
supplies
Short-circuit
capacity
G!her
Tvpe
7ick boxas and antar details,

on Earth Electrode
(where
zao
as appropriate
applicable)
Location:
Method of
measurement:
.
Earthing conductor
No of
Poles
$$&& &@~fl
2~7~
RCP,;z;$
A jConduc!or
j matonal
ZZ
i
j
COPPER
m~~cOndu~~~
39
. .
of axtraneous-conductive-parts
Conductor
material
Water
service
COPPER
mm*
( Condu'$i /6
mm*
Gas setvice
servi!:
Other incornin
SLWiCOlS
1
Eeterhtatvalin termsofyearp,moatbsor weeks,as approprieta
installation is further inspected and tested after an interval of not more than
r%AR
Page
4. where a number of sources am available to sup&tJw insk/fation, and where the data given for the primary source may d&r from other sxwces,
a separate sheet must be provided which tdermfies the relevant information relating to each addittonal source.
This form is based on the model shown in Appendix 6 of BS 7671: 1992. as amended 1997
Published by the National Inspection Council for Electrical Installation Contracting
0 Copyright
NICEIC (Nov 981
2 of
(J)
/
rpsr
WI ~EUC
I
certificate
This
1380091
EW
t See note
Methods
of protection
a. Protection
against
of mutual detrimental
a. Proximity
contact:
AA/
(ii) Limitation
against direct
services
of discharge
of energy
c. Segregation
and other influences
Identification
contact:
Presence of diagrams,
similar information
Presence
of danger notices
(iii) Obstacles
Labelling
of protective
(iv) Placing out of reach
Identification
(i) insulation
(ii) Barriers
n L
of live parts
or enclosures
(v) PELV
(vi) P resence
or Band II
of safety circuits
instructions,
circuit
charts and
and other warning
devices,
switches
notices
and terminals
of conductors
Cables and Conductors

of RCO for supplementary
Routing of cables
protection
protection
Connection
c. Protection
influence
of non-electrical
b. Segregation of Band I and Band II circuits

insulatron used
(i) SELV
Prevention
shock
against both direct and indirect
4 k
b. Protection
electric
below
against indirect
in prescribed
zones or within mechanical
of conductors
contact:
Erection
methods
(i) EEBAO including:

/
Presence
of earthing
Presence
of circuit
Presence
of main equipotential
Presence of supplementary
conductors
protective
conductors
bonding conductors
equipotential
Presence
protective
Presence
source(s),
of earthing arrangements
and functional purposes
of adequate, arrangements
where apphcable
Presence
of residual
41
J
44
current
(ii) Use of Cl ass II equipment
bonding
Presence and correct location

isolation and switching
for combined
Adequacy
for alternative
or equivalent
of access
measures
insulation
Correct
Presence
bonding
connection
of undervoltage
/? A
Installation earth electrode
resistance,
Z,
R,
n-4/
Continuity
of protective
Continuity
of ring final circuit
Insulation
resistance
between
live conductors
Insulation
resistance
between
live conductors
-4 /
Site applied insulation
for special installations and locations
conductors
conductors
and earth
or
and equipment
protective
devices
Choice and setting of protective and monitoring devices

(for protection against indirect contact and/or overcurrent)
Selection of equipment and protective measures
appropriate to external influences
conductors
separation
earth fault loop impedance,
for
and other equipment
of accessories
of appropriate
functional
t See note
External
devices
Connection of single-pole devices for protection

switching in phase conductors
only
Selection
of appropriate
to switchgear
Particular protective
device(s)
(iii) Non-conducting
location:
Absence of protective
conductors
(iv) Earth-free equipotential bonding:
Presence of earth-free equipotential
(v) Electrical
Selection of conductors for current carrying capacity and

voltage drop
Presence of fire barriers, suitable seals and protection against
thermal effects
conductor
Protection
by separation
of circuits
Protection against direct contact

provided during erection
Insulation
Polarity
Earth fault loop impedance,
Operation
of residual
Functional
testing
of non-conducting
by barrier
NICEIC
(Nov 981
or enclosure
floors or walk
Z,
current
devices
of assemblies
t A// data-entry boxes must be completed. To provide a positive indication that an inspection or a test has been carried out, insert either a Yes or a /:
Where an inspection or a test is not relevant to the installation, insert N/Ameaning Not Applicable.
Installation
Contracting
0 Copyright
devices
below
DA/
switching
Page
3 of
EMC
Issued by an Approved
Contractor
or Public Electricity
Company
enrolled
with the National
Inspection
Installation
Contracting
Vintage
House,
37 Albert Embankment,
London
SE1 7UJ.
This certificate
is not valid if the
number
has been defaced/altered
EC 503333
ORIGINAL
Occupier/Owner
Address
ofpremises
MERIDIAN POINT CAFE CATERING UNIT

MlLLENNIUM DOME, CREENblICH
Tel No:
Work carried out and covered by this certificate

shown on drawing
nos. (see 3.3. of BS 5266 Part I)
or part thereof, at the above premises

has been
j&Ve hereby certify that the emergency
lighting
installation,
designed
by me/us and to the best of w/our
knowledge
and belief, the system complies
Part I:1988 Code of practice for the emergency
recommendations
given in BS 5266 Emergency
lighting
lighting
of premises
other than cinemas
and certain
other specified
premises
used for entertainment,
*installation,
except
as
stated
below.
Photometric
design data is
published
by BSI, for a category
appended
to this certificate.
Signature
for design
of person
of the
Qualification
for and on behalf
of
responsible
..G.T.RANB.Y..(.N.@T.TINGHAM)..L.TD.............................
InstallersName
Installers
PARKSIRE. .WQPKS.,. GQTHAM. .R,@,A,. .EA$.T. I,E.AK.E.,.
address.
j&'!.&X~,Qfj~~~~.L.........,..............
LEICS LE12 6JG
Work carried out covered by
.._....._....................._.......__...._.._.._._._.._..___...,_.............
this certificate
shown on
.MANUAL
drawing
nos. (see 3.3 of BS 5266 Part 1) AS.LISTED..IN.ICME.QP.ER.AT.4O.N..AN.D..MA.INTENANCE
,.................__............
l/We hereby certify that the emergency
lighting installation,
or part thereof, at the above premises has been installed by me/us ir
accordance
with the system designers
specification
and to the best of my/our
knowledge
and belief, the installation
complier
recommendations
given in BS 5266 EmeFgency
lighting
Part 1: 1988 Code of Practice for the emergenq
lighting of premises other than cinemas and certain ,dtt$r specified
premises used for entertainment,
published
by BSI, for :
category.
. . . .NM3. . . . . , + installation,
except a&~iffgted, below.

/1
%
ir
Signature
of the person responsible
,<:
for the installation
of the system
c-.
Ic: EBC
Enrolment
verifiers
.2.?3.3..
_.
.Date..
.l.+/.l2/9.9..
_. _.
_.
..G..T..RANBY..(NaTTINGHAM)..L,TD
.._._...............
Forandonbehalfof
System
No:.
name
Systemverifiersaddress
..G.T..RANBY..(.NC)TTINGHAM)..LTD........................
..P.ARKSID.E..WORKS.,
.GOTMAM..R@AD,..EAST.LEAKE:,...
LOUGHBOR~UGM.,..LEIG~,..LE~~.
~JG......................
,.
.._....
,.....,..
..,
I/We hereby certify that the emergency

lighting installation,
or part thereof, at the above premises has been inspected and tested
by me/us and to the best of my/our
knowledge
and belief, the installation
complies
at the time of my/our inspection
with the
recommendations
given in BS 5266 Emergency
lighting
Part 1: 1966 Code of Practice for the emergency
lighting of premises
other than cinemas
and certain
other specified
premises
used for entertainment,
published
by BSI, for a category
. NM3.
* installation,
except as stated below. Photometric
verification
data is appended,
including light loss factors on
photometric
design, or the test data obtained
from the measurements
carried out in accordance
with appendix
A of BS 5266:
*.
Part 1: 1988:
I
-.
, L
I ) . 2
Signature
of person responsible
for system verification
! .,!.?
Dualification
ior and on behalf
TEST..ENGINf%R..
of.
..
Date..
.lh./1 O2/.99..
G T. RANBY. .CN.OTTI.NG.HAM)..C.TD..
L............
..,....
........,.....
,,...
...,...,...
Details of variation
from the code of practice:
( BS 5266:
Part 1: 1988)
NOTES:
1. Where this certificate
relates to a major alteration
or addition
it should be accompanied
Emergency
LightingPeriodic Inspection
and Test Certificate
for the entire emergency
installation
(see 11.2 of BS 5266: Part 1: 1988)
2. *Enter M/l, 2 or 3 or NM/l,
2 or 3 as appropriate
(see 6.12 of BS 5266: Part 1 1988)
by an
lighting
SECTION4
4.1
TESTRI:SULTS
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION IEST RESULTS
TEST SCHEDULE
CLIENT
HENRY
NAME
MANAGEMENT
DOME
- MERIDIAN
LTD
CAFC
TEST
/EARTH
LOOP
IMP
INSTRUMENTS
MAKElSERlAl
[ ROBIN
3105101
.- P.dO.
G T RANBY
(NOTTINGHAM)
LTD
PARKSIDE
WORKS
DIST EO
-.-- LOCATION
-_-
KITCHEN
INSULATION
IROBIN
3280333
GOTHAM
LANE
DIST
DE Ml
CONTINUITY
ROBIN
3280333
EAST
LEAKE
BD
ZeiZs
IO.I SR
RCD
MEGGER
VOLTAGE
24%
TESTED
PSCC
1.5KA
NIC CERT
FED
BOOT
MILLENNIUM
ADDRESS
FROM
ISOLATOR
ADJACENT
WAY
CIRCUIT
NO.
TYPE
1RYS
RADIAL
COMB itNATION
2RYB
RADIAL
OLSHWAStiER
SWITCHROOM
CIRCUIT
IDENTITY
OVEN
BY
10020894
J AFFLICK
NO.
LOUGHBOROUGH
/ C CHARLTON
EIC 1380091
DATE
DECEMBER
LE12
JOB NO.
1999
PROTECTION
COND
CPC
CABLE
mm
mm
TYPE
2.5
1.5
SWA
25 B
0.13
2.5
1.5
SWA
25 8
0.14
1 .o
Ta.5
16 B
0.63
RATING
7s67
Rl+R2
RlNGMAlNCONTlNUlTf
ArrYPE
LIVE
LOOP
\)EUTRAI
EARTH
INSULATION
Ma
POLARITY
N-E
Y/N
0.31
a20
=20
ato
0.28
20
a20
20
0.58
20
,20
>2a
0.55
.20
>2O
220
RADIAL
DOWNLIGHTS
RADlAL
LIGHTS
1.5
1.0
T&E
16 B
0.34
3B
RADIAL
LIGHTS
1.5
1.0
TLC
16 B
0.3
0.53
a20
720
20
4R
RADL4L
REFRIDGERATION
CABINETS
2.5
1.5
, TLC
16 B
0.13
0.25
20
720
>20
4Y
48
RADIAL
REFRIOGERATION
COUNTER
2.5
1.5
TaE
20 B
0.31
0.28
.20
220
a20
SR
RADIAL
BEVERAGE
5Y
RADIAL
HOT PL4TE
MACHINE
2.5
1.5
TaE
20 B
0.26
0.38
20
r20
,20
2.5
1.5
Tat
16 8
0.3
0.37
>20
=-to
.20
0.29
.20
a20
220
INSECTECUTORS
B563i.7
L-N
3Y
SPARE
FAX: 01509
L-E
3R
853434
IMPED
1.5
RADIAL
FREEZER
2.5
1.5
TaE
16 B
0.44
0.27
.20
220
a20
6Y
RADIAL
MICROWAVE
2.5
1.5
TaE
16 B
0.22
0.26
a20
ato
a20
68
RAOIAL
SORBIT
2.5
1.5
T&E
16 B
0.21
0.31
ato
a20
a20
2.5
1.5
TaE
20 B
0.16
0.25
=20
,2O
220
2.5
1.5
TaE
32 C
0.15
0.44
ato
=-to
.20
2.5
1.5
TaE
16 5
0.13
0.26
a20
220
a20
?R
RADIAL
PI
RING
78
RADIAL
MACHINE
PRE RINSE WATER
SOFTENER
TILLS
SOCKETS
NEAR MICROWAVE
0.18
0.19
0.39
WG
TEL: 01509
RCD
Ms
at In
SECTION5
SCIIEDULE OF EQUIPMENT & MA'I'IXIALS
5.1
SCHEDULEOFMANUFACTURERS
5.2
MANUFACTURERS LITERATURE
Low
vollage
tlowr~lic_lI~terc
I LDR
LDR200
LDRlOO
MICRO
MINI
DOWNLIGHTER
LDR2003
LDR1002
Classic simplicity
of design is tire keynote
new Micro Downliglrter.
Manufactured
pressure
die cast aluminium
with simple
LDR1003
AND
LDA1033
Mini Downliglrters
incorporate
Calclr system.
Wlren acce55
accessory
filling,
tlre central
prrsl~~l upwar&
to tlisengagr
of the
from
to install
lamp rnerltanisrn
lor easy maintenance.
Incorporating
lerrnrrral
cover lo nieet crrrrrnt
wiring
DOWNLIGHTER
Imninaire
al50
incorfrorater
a lrr~rr~rrnl
current
IEE wiring regrrlalions.
ItE
regulations.
ORDtR
CODES
Wllite
Blatk
Gokl
LDR2002
LDRZOOi
LDR2004
Mini Downliylrter
Wlrite
Mrni Downliglrter
Mini Downl~ylrter
Black
Gold
LDRlOOS
Macro Downliglrter
Clrrome
LDRZOOS
Mini Downliglrler
Mini Downligllter
Chrome
Wnite will1 LEf)
OPTlONS
LDA1033
Anli gbre hallle - LDRZOO onfy
L6A1044
Glass
leatrtre tube - LDRZOO only
LDR1004
Twist and lock ndd rnflrx:/TAL-Twisl
and lock option
See page I39 for o/lrorlr
LDRlOOS
Quick release
removal
to nieet
Macro Downliglrter
Micro Downliglrter
Micro Downlrgltter
mountrng
Lamp
cover
ORDER COts
LDRIOOZ
LDR1003
LDR1004
LDRZOEZ
10
our unique Clickis rectrrired

for lanip or
body section is simply
autornatitally.
This
Transformers
reepoge I58
24OV/lZV remote Wlritetrofl
Emergency
Emergency
Iransformcr
Irv ,qe 166

Powerpark EfLl6f.3.
lor use wttlr EPL16E3
Low
voltage
downlighters
LDR
LDRZSO
MINI
DOWNLICtiTER
DECORATIVE
WITH
LDR270
SUSPENDED
MINI
TRIM
WALLWASHER
95
LDR2705
LDRZS04
Variations
a decorative
of the low voltaye

trim.
Without
Downligl~lers,
aflcctiuq
fealuriny
lhe Mini Wallwasher

IlIe orierilatiori
lever
beam
uhlin~j
LDR2504
LDR2SOZ
LDRiSOS
-bRZSEZ
-____
Mini Downlqhlrr
Mrni Downhyltlcr
simple
hip
ClickI~ocly
rrt~lacrn,ent.
and Irim While

and Irim Black
ORDER coots
LDR2702
Mini Wallwasher
and trim Gold

and trim Chrome
LDR2703
LDR2704
LDR2705
Miui Wallwarl~~ Black and a&rtmcrlt

lever
Mhi Wallwasher Gold and adjustment lever
Mini Wallwasher &ome
and adjuslmenl lever
LDR2742
LDR2743
Mire Wallwasher
Mini Wallwasher
White
Black-
LDR2744
Milli Wallwasher
Cold
LDR2745
Mini Wallwarllcr
Chrome
Mrni Downltghler and lrrm While wilh LFD

mounting lor use with EPL16E3
Twirl and Lock Add ru//ix.lDR2203
Ihroqll
355 wilh
lull tilt corilrol
through
45, lronr below. lhe Whitecrolt
(-,lltli
cy~lrtn
is utrtl to ret,rill 111~ inns
performance,
the liyhtirq
effect produced
by the
Irim offers a further
tlirnrnclo~~
to ltlr Interior Ilc+tll.
OIDCI
00~s
LDR2502
Mini Dowuiiyhter
-iDRiSO3
Mini Downhyhler
rotates
enabling
White and adjustment
lever
LDR2742
LDR2743
/TAL Twist and lotk lamp option

---.
SCEpyc I3 9 /or opfiorts
LDR2704
Lamps
12V SOmm dichroic
.GX/CU5.3 base
lamp 20, 35 or SOW
Transformers
rer pqc 158
24&/l 2V remole Whitecroil
Emergency
Emergency
Iranrlormer .~~
see ,~ry~ 166

Powerpack CPL16E3
---
Low
voltage
downlighters
LDR
LDR370
LDR360
AR1 11
DOWNLIGI-ITER
MODULAR
WALLWASlIER
LDR3743
LDR3602
This lixed
posiliun
Dowrllic$ller
accq)Is
diameler
relleclor
lar111), wlricll
output
of any l2V lamp source
llle 1 I 1111rn
lms Ihe hiyhesl

liylll
currenlly
availalrle
Due to the inclusion

of a glare c.rp Ihere is nrinirnal
glare. The illuminance
level Itrdl llris source
produces
enables even greater dramatic
accent
lighting
to be achicvcrl
vollage
Downlryhlers,
Ilran
will1 conVer~linrlirl
low
1 Ire rom~~lr~~rly
Iluslr
suilctl wlrere discreel,
White
below.
The Whitecroll
incorporalrrl
I Downli~hler~Rlack
I Downlrghler
Gold
I Downlighler
Chrome
RDER
LDR3702
Click-Calclr
lor ease of lam0

wall wasliirry
lhc lillirry
syslem
is
mainlenrrnce.
ellecl is achieved
by
300 -- 60Omrn
lrom Ihe wall.
Modular
Wallwasher
While +
lever
DR3703
tvlodular Wallwasher
Black I adlrrrbrretrl
lever
DR3704
DR3705
Modular
Modular
Gold + adTushnenl
Chrorrre +
lever
Wallwasher
Wallwasher
LDR374j
ad~uslrrierit lever
Modular Wallwasher
Modular Wallwasher
Wlrilc
Black
LDR3744
LDR3745
Modular
Modular
Cold
Clrromc
LDR3742
LDR3702
CODts
atljrrrlrirrnl
LDR3604
is itleally
is reguiretl.
Corilrollal~le
Ihrougli
355, Ihis Iuminaire
also
rnr orf16rAes
a buill-in adjuslnrenl
lever for anyle
conlrol
llirougli
45. 1his is easily achieved
from
Opliniunr
posiliorrincJ
I Downlruhler
Motlrrl,rr
WAvArrr
low ylare liyliliny
Wallwasher
Wallwasher
LDR3704
Twirl and lock odd srr/lrx./lAL Twist and lock lamp oplion
See pmy
I39 ior 0T~lrorrr
LDR3705
DR3605
Installalion
Cerlrrry llricknesses
Lamps LDR360
I I I riini I2V relleclor lkrqr
35, 50 or 75w
of 0.7 - 25111111accorrrmodated
Trarnlorrners
sctT~r9~ UR
24OV/lZV rem&e Wlrilccroll
Iransforriier
Lamps LDR370
12V SOrrrrrr dichroic
lamp
20, 3s or sow
Gx/d5.3
t)dW
Low
voltage
downlighlers
LDR
LDR350
LDR300
MODULAR
MODULAR
SUSPENDED
DOWNLIGHTER
DOWNLIGI-l.lER
DECORATIVE
WITH
TRIM
130
cut OUl
146
LDR3004
Ideally
LDR3505
suiletl
lor irllrgralcd
ligliling
used wit11 Wllilecroll

tlirec(ional
Dowllliylllers.
I I+, I~xrtJ lmsitioll
circor
wllcm
MotluLu
Iuf~nmGrr
<I( crt)tc
an anti-glare
ballle and ylass lealule tube
accessories.
Tlie Whitecroft
Click-Catch
sysle111 is
incorporalecl
lo provide
easy access for lan1t) or
accessory
littiny.
ORDER CODES
LDR3002
.- .~~~~~~~
LDR3003
LDR3004
LDR3005
Modular
Modular
Downligbler
Downliglile~
Wlnle
Hlack
-CDR3005
Modular
Modular
~ownliglller
Dowtrliybter
Gold
Clrrom
LDti30Ei
Modular
Dowrlliybter
While w~tll LED
lllounting
Click-Cat&
ryrlenr
ORER CODES
LDR3502
LDR3503
LDRjSO4
LDR3505
LDR35E2
AN-glare ballle LUH300 only

Class lealure tnl)e
LDR300 only
iTAL Twist and lock option

1~19for rJ/~/iorrr
Inrlallalion
&liny tbickmsser
of 0.7 - 25111111
accommodaled
Tranrlormerr
scepq
118
24OV/l LV remole Wtiilecroll
Emergency
Emergelicy
Modular
Modular
and Irim Cbroole

and Irinl Wlllle
El'L16C3
Twist and lock m/d x~/lrx:h?pop?
and Irim Wlille

and trim Black
and Itin, Gold
I)ownli@er
Downliylller
wilt1 LFD rnounliny
lor use willi IPLl6E3
LDAl033
LDA1044
Morlul,~r IIownllybler
Modular Downliclbler
Modular Dowuliybler
Iranslormr
PP ~I~YE I66
I~owerpack
EILI 6E3
lor use,wiltl
LDR3502
Memshield
MCCBs
16 - ZOOA, F-Frame
Adjustment:
..-... _ ,_- .._._-_
Thermal
Fixed
Fixed
___.. -Ma&&
Fixed at 1Oln
Fixed at IOln
-. . _
Breaking capacity IEC947-2/BSEN60947-2
(240/415v)
Icu (kA)
-.- _-. .- ._
Its (kA)
16
-..
20
.-..
32
.-
25
25
19
25
0.sl.Oln
OB-l.Oln
6.0-I 2.0ln
6.0-12.0ln
25
-
13
Fixed
Fixed
at IOln
0.8-l .Oln
0.6-l.Oln
6.0-12.0ln
6.0-12.0ln
25
45
65
65
13
25
33
33
MFLIGI
MFL163
MFH163
MFLPOI
MFL203
MFH203
MFL323
MFL321
40
MFL401
MFL403
50 - . _... ..-.
63
MFL501
MFL503
MFLA503
MFLA504
MFH503
MFHA503
MFHA504
MFL631
MFL633
MFLA633
MFLA634
MFH633
MFHA633
MFHA634
MFLBOI
MFL803
MFLA603
MFLA804
MFH803
MFHA803
MFHA604
MFLlOOl
MFL1003
MFLA1003
MFLA1004
MFH1003
MFHAIOOB
MFHA1004
MFL1251
MFL1253
MFLA1253
MFLA1254
MFH1253
MFHA1253
MFHA1254
MFLIGOI
MFL1603
MFLA1603
MFLAI
MFHl603
MFHA1603
MFHAI
ao-
_,
--
...
100
: 125
160.
..
.-.._
.-
..
_
.
200
Capacities
Dimensions
.
.
(Max)
_,-___
__ __ .-.- __
_, -___
_
__-. _. .__.
welamFe)app.
NOTE:
604
on 16A and
Fixed
eg. MFLX2003.
MFH403
MFH2003
120mm
120mm
120mm
120mm
120mm*
120mm
120mm
35
105
105
140
105
105
140
166
166
166
168
168
168
166
86
66
66
86
66
66
66
106
2.6
A
A
B
C
19kA
(mm)
-.
,
-.
MFL2003
Terminal
-.
MFH323
trip
106
106
106
106
106
106
0.8
2.1
2.1
2.6
2.1
2.1
20A.
F-Frame
MCCBs
can
be supplied
with
50C
ambienl
calibration.
To order,
insert
X befote
the tirst
digit
of Ihe
list number
604
A - Selecl 125A dislribuliun
board:
TPN
type
BM41
6 way
TPN
type
BM61
8 way
TPN
type
BM81
4 way
12 way TPN type f3
BM121
16 way
BM161
TPN
type
Et
B - Select iUU/125A irlcoluiny
device:
Incoming
ately
device
supplied
sepal
IOOA TP switch-disconnector
Standard
125A
available
with
range
and 200A
a choice
of incorners
modern
TPN
type
B dislribulion
boards
of 4, 6, 8, 12. or 16 oulgoing
can
be fitted
installations.
They
to allow
cornply
fully with
BS.5486
BMS1253t
are
ways.
for the flexibility
BMSlOOlN4*
(isolator)
125A TP switch-disconnector
(isolator)
board.
EMS1003
(isolator)
IOOA SPSN switch-disconnector

: ,)
to distribution
A wide
needed
1OOA TPSN swilch-disconnector
(isolator)
BMS1004
in
: PI 12 and
BSENG0439-3.
ICNIA TP iugs (direct
INCOMING
DEVICES,
1OOA lugs;
100A
SPSN,
TP, or TPSN
device
INCOMING
OUTGOING
1-63A
63A TP MCB.
for details
TP
Please
of other
also
Memshield
or TP switch-disconnec\ors;
BMRBO
IOOA TPSN lOOmA RCCB
BMAlOO
BMRBOO
IOOA TPSN 3OOrnA RCCB with time delay
BMRBOOT
63A TP Type C MCB
BMCH363
All standard
IOOA
and any 1 P F
distribution
board
be fitted.
TPN
lo SPN
t Available
2 SP, DP and
5-45A
IOOA TPSN 30mA RCCB
IOOA TPSN 3fJJmA RCCB
DEVICES
3SEN60898;
18mm
RCCBs;
department
125A
200A
SPSN,
up to 200A.
can
types.
200A
MCCB
incomers
TPSN
Services
DEVICES,
ZOOA lugs;
frame
IOOA
our Technical
incoming
BMBT1003
100A
consult
connection)
fuse
TP MCBs
Types
16kA
to BS1361;
carriers,
B, C, D, 1OkA
I-63A
conversion
July
kit included
1997.
to
C - EXAMPLE:
SP
BM61
RCBOs.
+ BMS1003
= 6 way TPN
distribution
boatd
with
switcll-disconnector.
EATURES
Use
Gstribution
boards
ny other
accessories.
r horizontally
of equal
They
to give
more
widlh
can
can
be stacked
be electrically
outgoing
ways
vertically
connected
by using
without
vertically
a connector
kit
.ee page 57). Memshield

modular
control
devices
can be fitted by
sing an extension
box (see page 55). Many SPN type A distribulion
Jards can be mounted
on top of any type B distribution
board.
A
ean earth
facility
is standard
for computer
inslallations.
pages
58 - 61 to select
oulyoing
devices
& accessories.
IOOA
C - EXAMPLE:
BM62 + BMS2003
switcll-disconnector.
= 6 way TPN distribution

board with 200A
Use pages 50 61 to select outgoing
devices
& accessories.
mm
CABLE
CAPACITIES
LUGS (1 OOA)
50
(100/I)
SWITCH-DISCONNEClOl7
RCCB
--
LUGS
(2&A)
50
120
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR
(125A
SWITCH-DISCONNECTOR
(200A)
M&B
(Y-Frame
NEUTRAL
A - Select 200A distribution
board:
4 way
TPN
type
BM42
6 way
TPN
type
BM62
6 way
TPN
type
BM62
12 way
TPN
type
BM122
16 way
TPN
type
BM162
B - Selecl incoming
Incoming
device
device up lo 200A:
supplied
switch-disconnector
cable
entry
separately
and MCCB
boxes.
(100A
incomers
200A TP switch-disconnector
from
200A SPSN switch-disconnector

TP kit for F frame
TP lugs (direct
TPN
to SPN
Select
F frame
TAvailable
July
page
(isolalor)
(isolator)
MCCB
200A
are supplied
52 can
also
with
be used).
BMS2003
BMS1603t
BMS2001
N*
BMIK2003
MCCB
BMBT2003
connection)
conversion
board.
devices
(isolator)
160 A TP switch-disconnector
t!jpt
to distribution
incoming
kit included
for use with
BMIK2003
from
following
1997.
F frame MCCBs
TP 1OOA
25kA
100%
MFL1003
TP 125A
25kA
100%
MFL1253
TP 16OA
25kA
100%
MFL1603
TP 200A
25kA
100%
MFL2003
table.
R 160A)
70
120
120
type)
25
MCBs
EARTH
50
25
BARS
BARS
25
APPLICATIONS
l
SP MCBs
car) be used
SP, DP and I P MCBs
irl lypc
A disltibutiotl
boards
car? be used
in type
in DP dislribution
SPSN
and DP MCBs
car, be used
TPSN
and FP MCBs
are for specialist
OEM
B distribution
boat-ds.
boards.
applicalions.
Memsl~ieltl2 MCBs- Type B lo BSENG0898(IEC89B),3 lo 5 x In
The Memshield
2 MCB is an all new high petfotmance
current
lirnitirrg
device wilh the ability lo disconnect
short cir-cuils of up to IOkA.
The feature
manufactured.
Memshield
the widest
types are
packed
device is both British
using the lalest technology.
designed
and
2 miniature
circuit
breakers
ate available
itr one
ranges
available
in the world;
over GO0 different
available.
of
The MCBs are suitable

for use with Memshield
2 distribution
boards.
In addition
MCBs are suitable
for a wide range of OEM
applications.
Current
ratings are available
40. 50, and G3A. The range
in 1, 2. 4. 6. 8. 10, 13, 16. 20, 25. 32,

is available
with lypes B. C, atrd D, in
single pole (SP), single pole and switched

pole (DP). triple pole (TP), triple pole and
and four pole (FP) configurations.
neutral
swilched
On SPSN and TPSN the switched

FP all poles are protected.
is unprolecled,
SPSN and TPSN MCI%

first and break last.
are fllted
neulral
with
neutral
(SPSN),
neutral
double
(TPSN)
on DP and
contacts
wlrich
make
FEATURES
Memshield
2 MCBs
to BSEN60898.
are available
with
They are suitable

for use on DC syslems
level at 24V = GkA; 12OV = 4kA.
a breaking
from
capacily
24V to 12OV;
of IOkA
fault
NOTE: When a residual

current
pod is added
to Ihe MCB (see PGO)
to forrn an RCBO, the combination
cannot
be used on DC syslerns.
The MCBs
MCBs
insert
are calibrated
to 40C
can be supplied
with 50C ambient
calibration.
X at the end of the MCB list number
eg:- MCH
Please contact
our Technical
Memshield
2 MCBs suitable
temperatures.
Services
for otlrer
department
reference
To order
1 IGX.
for delails
calibration
of
MBHIOI
MBHIOIN
MBHPOl
MBH301
MBHBOlN
MBH401
MBHIOP
MBHIOPN
MBH202
MBH302
MBH302N
MBH402
MBH104
MBHl04N
MBH204
MBH304
MBH304N
MBH404
MBHIOG
MBHIOGN
MBH206
MBH306
MBH306N
MBH406
MBHIOB
MBH108N
MBH208
MBH308
MBH308N
MBH408
IO
MBHIIO
MBHIION
MBH210
MBH310
MBH3lON
MBH410
MBH313
MBH313N
MBH413
13
MBH113
MBHll3N
MBH213
16
MBHIIG
MBHIIGN
MBH216
MBH316
MBH316N
MBH416
20
MBHIPO
MBHIPON
MBH220
MBH320
MBH320N
MBH420
25
MBH125
MBHl25N
MBH225
MBH325
MBH325N
MBH425
32
MBHl32
MBH132N
MBH232
MBH332
MBH332N
MBH432
40
MBH140
MBH140N
MBH240
MBH340
MBH340N
MBH440
50
MBHl50
MBHl50N
MBH250
MBH350
MBH350N
MBH450
63
MBHl63
MBH163N
MBH263
MBH363
MBH363N
MBH463
Meadield
c ,!$
J
2 MCBs - lime C lo BSENGOB98

llECU98). 5 lo 10 x III
MCHIOI
MCHIOIN
MCHPOI
MCH301
MCH301N
MCH401
MCHIOP
MCHIOPN
MCH202
MCH302
MCH302N
MCH402
MCHlO4
MCHl04N
MCH204
MCH304
MCH304N
MCH404
MCHIOG
MCHIOGN
MCH206
MCH306
MCH306N
MCH406
MCH108
MCHlOBN
MCH208
MCH308
MCH308N
MCH408
10
MCHIIO
MCHIlON
MCHPIO
MCH310
MCHJlON
MCH410
13
MCHIIO
MCHll3N
MCH213
MCH313
MCH313N
MCH413
16
MCHIIG
MCHll6N
MCH216
MCH316
MCH316N
MCH416
20
MCHIPO
MCHIPON
MCH220
MCH320
MCH320N
MCH420
25
MCH125
MCHl25N
MCH225
MCH325
MCH325N
MCH425
32
MCH132
MCH132N
MCH232
MCH332
MCH332N
MCH432
40
MCHl40
MCHl40N
MCH240
MCH340
MCH340N
MCH440
50
MCHISO
MCHIBON
MCH250
MCH350
MCH350N
MCH450
63
MCH163
MCH163N
MCH263
MCH363
MCH363N
MCH463
Ir
,I!
6-
P
7<
. ; AN95
4ffiP
ANALOGUE
ADDRESSABLE
FIRE CONTROL
SYSTEM
0
3
h
-.
Protec
Fire
Detection
AN95
plc
ANALOGUE
ADDRESSABL-E
CONTROL
FIRE
PANEL

plc, a major
independent
British
company,
is
amongst
the leaders
in the design
of Fire Detection
and Emergency
Lighting
systems.
The companys
success
is built
upon
a total
commitment
to
quality
and customer
service with
an unrivalled
range
of quality
products.
Addressable,
Analogue
Addressable
and Conventional
Fire Detection
Systems.
Hugh Sensitivrty Air Sampling
Systems
Fully Monrtored
Acldressablc
Emergency
Lighting Systems
Emergency
Lighting Luminaires,
Central Battery Auxiliary Power and
UPS Systems.
Voice Evacuation
& Public Address,
Security and CCTV Systems.
Fire Suppression
DEDICATED
Systems
AN95 Control
Specification:-
Panel Complies
Power Supply
Working Voltage
Standby Load (Mains Fall Condrtron]
Alarm Load (Mains Fall Condttion)
Temperature Range
Maximum Humidity
Programmable Alarm Outputs
TO OUALITY
Protec
as an IS0 9000
(685750)
registered
company,
IS committed
to
providing
a high level of technrcal
excellence
and customer
care
Protec
AN95
Analogue
The
Addressable
Frre Detection
and Alarm
System
provides
a highly
cost
effective system for a wrdc range of
applications
Modular
In concept,
the
system can be scaled to suit Iargc
sites
with
rnultrple
zones
and
complex
layouts.
Display
Analogue
Addressable
t oops
Total Loop Load

Zones
Integral Charqer
Integral Battery
Fire Statton Output
Alarm
Fault
Fault
Serial
Load
Monitortng
Output
Communtcattons
Interface
with
855839
Part 4: 1988
Matns 230V AC nominal +- 10%

)I 5-3OVDC
295mA Including 2 loop module
Addtttonal 2 loop module, add 80 mA
655mA tncludrng 2 loop module
Addrtional 2 loop module. add 80 mA
0 40 Degrees Centrgrade
85% Non-Condensing
IO Monitored
Internal (5A rated 0 24V)
IO NonMonttored
Changeover Contacts
(IA rated 0 24V)
Up to I27 programmable Alarm outputs per
loop with the use of additional loop O/P devrces
Vacuum Fluorescent Display, 2 Lines of
40 Characters
2 to 8 ILoops, each wtth I27 address
capactty per loop
Total Control Panel capacity IO 16 addresses
6OOmA per 2 Loop module including all
Loop connected devtces.
Up to 96 Zone Ftre indtcators. plus common
FIRE indtcator
5Amp DC.
I5 Ampere-Hour 24V Sealed Lead Actd
Dedtcated Changeover Contact (IA rated Q 24V)
Maximum 5A with integral Power Supply tJntt.
Fully Fault Monitored to 85.5839 Pt 4 1988
Single Pole Changeover Contacts (IA rated 0 24VJ
4 Wire (2 Power, 2 Data] RS485 for up to
64 Control Panels, Full Repeat Panels. ILCD
Repeat Panels, lllumtnated Mrmrc Panels or I6
way output Interfaces
Aux~l~aty Output Supply

RS232 Communtcattons
Interface
24V DC Fused at 250mA

Opttonal RS232 Cornmuntcattons
Interface for
connectton to Ptotec Colour Graphrcs or Payer
sysren1s
Opttonal Integral Prtnter

Dtmenstons
Standard Ftntsh
14 tolutnn dot ma7trtx prtnter

505 X 505 X 133mm
Storm Grey Textured Enclosure and smooth
tnnet plate, htnged lockable door wtth
touqhenrd
glats vtewtnq wtndow
Altetnattve ftntshes dvcltlable on request
2 I x 70mnt rear knockouts
Cable Entry
AN95
Full Repeat Panel
Power Supply
Standby Load
Alarm Load
Sertal Communtcattons
Ltnk
Dtmenstons
Slim Repeat
RS905 for Up to 64
LCD
Power Supply
Sr,~ndby/Alarm
4 Wtre (2 Power, 7 D&l)

panels/repeat panels
505 X 505 X 133mmD
Load
Srt~al Cotnmuntcattons
Lank
Dtmenstons
24V DC Der~vcti from AN95 Conltol panel VIM

RS485 Settal Communttattons
interface
4irrrA
4 Wtre (2 Power, I Data) RJ485 for up 10 64
panels/reprat
P8nelc
360W x 2 I5H x 47mmD
Repeat LCD/Printer
Power Supply
Standby/Alarm Load
Sertal Communtcattons
Dtrnensions
Link
24V DC Dertved from AN95 Control panel Vta

RS485 Sertal Communtcattons
Interfare
07mA
4 Wtre (2 Power 7 Data) RS4t35 for ~tp to (14
panels/repeat Panel<
505w x 255ti x 133mmr1
Protec
Fire
Detection
plc
A N 9 5 A N A I_C>(pi I I I:
ADDRESSAf3l.f:
CONTfiOl
FIR!7
PANEI
AN95
Full
Repeat
Panel
AN95
LCD
Repeater
Colour
Graphics
Colour
Graphics
Protec
Fire
AN95
Detection
AN/II
ADDRESSAOLE
CONTROI-
plc
OC;IJE
tlRIPANEI-
Table detailing
Sales Code
the Loop Standby
Drrtriptiovl
and Alarm
Load for typical
Analogue
devices.
EOL
Guide
to Loop Cable Conductor
Sizing for the Protec
95 System
Loop Length (Metres,

500 I 550 1 600 I 650 I 700 I 750 I 800 i 850
Total
LOOP
Load
In
Alarm
IW
--
600
etreq
1000
1050
1100
,300
50
too
150
Total
ioo
LOOP
250
Load
300
350
9larm
400
IW
450
500
550
600
-
-i
,350
I400
1450
,500
How
to order
AN95
Control
Dimensions
(mm)
Panel
Protec
Fire
Head Office
London
Office
Detection
plc
Leeds Office
Coplry I 1111
Iradlng Etr,m~. WMrMl
Leedr LS 12 I I 1F Englmd
Tel: 10113) 220 4400
Fax:~0113)2204401
Roai.
Company
policy is one of continuous
change
specifications
without
prior
Protec Camerfield
Ltd
Ctmthlll Way, Nelson, Larlcartwe
RF396Rr England
Tel: (01282)
7 17474
Fax: (01282) 717475
improvement,
notice.
we reserve
the right
to
Protec
Fire
ANALOGUE
FIRE
Detection
ADDRESSABLE
CONl-ROL
SYSTEM
plc
>
w
t9
VT
ml
0
TV
t7
0
U
W
TV
_____. -_.
Protec
Fire
ANALOGUE
FIRE
Detection
plc
ADDRCSSAULE
CONTROL
PANEL
Protec
Fire Detection
plc, a major
independent
British
company,
is
amongst
the leaders
in the design
of Fire Detection
and Emergency
Lighting
systems.
The companys
success is built upon
a total commitment
to quality
and
customer
service
with an unrivalled
range
of quality
products.
- Addressable,
Amloyue
Addressable
and Conventional
Fire Dttect;on
Systems
High
Sensitivity
Air Sampling
Systems
c Fully Monitored
Addressable
Emergency
Lighting
systems
-Emergency
Lighting
Lumlnaires,
Central Battery Auxiliary
Power
UPS
and
systetns
-Voice Evacuation
& Public Addrcss,
Security and CClV Systems
- Fire Suppression
DEDICATED
Systems
TO QUALITY
Although
we would
never
mlnlmisc
the value of our externally
awarded
approvals
(ISO9000,
L PCN.
ICEIL
NACOSS & BSI), the IP;II IIIC;~XCIIC ol
abilities
rest
Ill
out
I1ighly
our
Illtcl
fl,ll
sl~lrltl,lrcls,
sophisticated
carried
out by wc>ll tr,~~r~tl rt<iff who
share
our sww
of cotnn~itmet~l
I;,
you
would
be
Ildld
enthusiasm.
pressed
to fitid ,I tiiytier
~t,~ficl~~rcl of
dedicated
professionalism
,inywhcrc
The Protec 5400 Analogue
Atldrcss,lblc
Fire Detection
.intl Alrlt-r~~ systcrii 15 tl,c
culmrriatiori
of our cornrn~tfilcrlt
tc~
quality
and
design
cre,ltlvity
ifi
providing
cl system
to excc~l
our
client5 highest
expect&ions.
The 5400 combines
c<lse of use with
a systern flexible cno~rqh
to t(T,llisc th(T
ncccls of ,itiy nlc~tlicitn
<i/(x to I~lrcjc
building.
Each panel uses a power iul
micro-controller
eti,~bli~icj
tli,iriy
new
user accessible
fc~~rt~irc\.
I tw
stylIst
contemporary
c~iic-lo<uf(~ will (oni~k~~~~c~f~l
,Iny (f1viro11111(t11.
FE/II URES ANU
k3tNEII
1.S
vl
0
lx
I7
0
LJ
L.L
zTV
acl
Q:
Drives field wlrmc]

No control of the rwtwork
3WORI<
Designed
MS
LVITH
INTEI
I IGFNCF
to
ENS4
parts
2 & 4
1998
Protec
Fire
Detection
plc
5400
ANALOGUE
FIRE
ADDRESSABLE
CONTROL
SYSTEM
5400/DCN
5400/LPN
54OO/BC6/17
5400/LPN
The 5400/CPN
nocles
process
the loop datrl from
the field devices,
communicate
with other network
nodes, and implement
the cause and
ma
program
for local and network
fire sqnals.
Sounder
circuits
arid
auxiliary
change-over
contacts
are also controlled
from the 5400/LPN.
54OO/DCN/LPN
The 5400/DCN
and 5400/LPN
are tomhtned
The appearance
is the same as the 5400/DCN
box to arcornrnodate
the cabling.
withln a common
enclosure.
and uses the 5400/LPN
back
5400/MIMIC
The Protec 5400
network
rn the
activated
by the
and the mimic
application
The
Node
Options
5400IDCN
5400/LPN
5400/MIMIC
5400ILCD
illuminated
mimic can be connected
to the
as other nodes.
The LED Indicators
can be
zone or specific devrce activation
as defined
in a range of styles and finishes to suit the
is a node on the network.
5400/BC6/17
- Display
and
- Loop
5400/DCN/LPN
5400IRDN
customised
same way
approprrate
is available
5400/MIMIC
Processing
- Combined
(2 nodes]
- Repeat
Display
- Illuminated
- LCD
Control
Display
Node
Node
DCN
and
Node
Mimic
(Listen
Node
Only)
LPN
The 54OO/BC6/17
power supply is housed in a matching
enclosure
to the
5400/LPN
and is finished
in storm grey. The unit incorporates
a 6 amp
charger and 17A/hr sealed lead acid cells. The charger
provides
a dual path
L4VDC output
for parallel supplies
to the 5400/LPN
or 5400/DCN
nodes.
A short circuit Fault on one path is isolated and the load is provided
via the
second supply path. Power on and charger
fault indications
are displayed
on the power
supply
secret
until Irt display and are also relayed to the
5400 network
via the node being powered.
A range of Protec 54UO/EC
power
supplies
are available
with an extensive
range
of battery
and
charger
sizes.
0
z
Z
U
OO/RDN
W
CL
6, 5400/LCD
The 5400ACD
IS a listen only device which
IS connected
to the 5100
network.
There are three function
push buttons
on the front of the LCD
enclosure:
menu. select and mute. Pressing the menu button displays
the
LCD menu functions:
view current
fire events, view current
fault events, and
view current disablements
The mute button WIII mute the fault buzzer on
the LCD but will not mute the fire buzzer. There are no system
control
functrons
from the 54OO/LCD and the device IS not classed as a node on the
5400 network.
Up to eight 5400ACDi
can be connected
between
each
node on the network.
W
TV
a
cl
<
W
3
w
5400lRDN
LOO/MIMIC
Colour
Graphics
5400lLCD
The 5400IRDN
node has all the functions
detailed for the 5400ILCD
and
additionally
has silence & reset
push buttons
to silence and reset active
system fire events
All controls
are housed
behind a hinged lockable
door.
moulded
from polycarbonate
finished in storm grey. The 5400/RDN
has an
optional
printer
to print current
fire events, fault events or disablements
The 5400/RDN
is a node on the network.
Protec
Colour
Graphics
System
The Protec
Colour
Graphics
System
is a Windows
based
PC package
providing
a graphical
representation
of large sites enabling
the precise
location of an incident to be readfly identtfied
enabling
a prompt
response.
Using a touch screen or mouse,
the operator
can track an incident
and
zoom from a site plan to intermediate
plan listing floor levels, then zoom to
a specific floor plan and if necessary
then zoom to a specific detailed area
wlthin the floor plan showing
the device rn question.
Colour prints of the
maps can also be printed automatlcally
or on demand.
<
z
<
0
0
dm
Protec
Fire
Detection
plc
5400
ANALOGUE
FIRE
ADDRESSABLE
CONTROL
PANEL
Table
detailing
the
analogue
devices.
Sales
Code
loop
standby
and
alarm
load
for
typical
Description
,$:
c.
5400
ANALOGUE
ADDRESSABLE
FIRE CONTROL
z-
- = :
SYSTEM
>
Technical
5400
Specification
Series
Common
Specifications
Power
Total
Node
Year 2000
compliant
0 40 Drgrees
Crntigradc
85% Non-Condensing
2 1.5 - 3ov DC.
Dual channel
RS485 fault tolerant
conm~unications
network
for up to 100 nodes
3 wire loop (2 Data 6 OV], maximum
1km bctwcrn
Nodes.
Fault monitored
dual path 74V DC from 5400/RC
ralrge PSU 4 wile pluc 2 wire
(2 Primary
Power,
2 signalsj(2
Sec. Power].
Maximum
load to a 5400/LPN
or 5400/UCN/LPN
is 6 Amp.
Temperaturr
Range
Maximum
Humrdrtv
Working
Voltage
_
Secure Network
Node
Supply
Load
5400/DCN
Standby
load (Mains Fail Conditio)
Alarm Load (Mans
Fall Condrtion)
Display
zoner
Printer
Nodes
RS232 Ports
Auxiliary
Output
Supply
Common
Fire Output
(frrc st.ltiori)
Common
Fault Output
/fire rtation)
Dimensions
[mm)
300mA
390mA
Ouarter
VGA Backlit Graphics
LCD
100 Zone Fire indicators.
plus common
FIRE indicator.
Expandable
to 800.
40 column
low noise thermal
printer.
The 5400/DCN
cots
as one node on the network.
Two full duplex
RS232 ports for site programming.
EJMS, Colour Graphics
or pager
Two sets of 24V DC outputs
terminals.
Total load 1A
24V DC fully monitored
output
rated at 20rnA.
1 K EOL.
output
rated at 2OrnA. 1 K EOL.
440Wx385Hx104D
system
interfacing
5400lLPN
Standby
Load (Mains Fail CondrtionJ
Alarm Load (Mains Fail Condition)
Analogue
Addressable
Loops
Total Loop Load
NOdCS
Auxiliary
Corrlrl o
Output
Supply
r1w Output
(flrr
Common
Fault
Output
rt.ltlcm~
(fire
stationj
Software
Input Switches
Dimensions
(mm)
230mA
12 loop)
29OmA (4 loop)
46OmA (2 loop)
520mA
(4 loopj
2 to 4 loops, each with 127 address capacity
per loop.
Total 5400/LPN
capacity
4 loops, 508 addresses.
600mA
per loop including
all loop connected
devices.
The 5400/LPN
counts
as one node on the network.
8 monitored
24V DC sounder
circuits
1A rated. 47K EOL.
6 no monitored
- clean changeover
corltacts
(1A rated @24VJ.
Expansion
modules
available
to increase
alarm output
capability.
Up to 127 programmable
alarm outputs
per loop using loop output
devices.
Four sets of 24V DC output
terminals.
Total load 1A
output
rated at 2OmA. I K EOI
Drdic;rtrd
Clean Chnrrqrovrr
cotilctT
(1A rated FOZSV).
output
rated at 2OmA. 1K EOL.
Dedicated
Clean Changeover
contacts
(1A rated @24V).
Class change.
day/night
mode, bomb alert. Plus four additional
non-dedicated
inputs.
440Wx385Hx
144D
5400/DCN/LPN
Overview
Standby
load [Mains Fail Conditio)
Alarm Load (Mains Fail CondrtronJ
Nodes
Dimensions
(mm)
5400/RDN
Combined
5400/DCN
and 5400/LPN
applies plus DCN controls.
450mA
(2 loopj
510mA
(4 loop)
750mA
(2 loop)
8 1 OmA (4 loop)
The 5400/DCN/LPN
counts as TWO
440Wx385Hx144D
nodes
nodes
within
on the
a common
enclosure.
The full specification
for a 5400ILPN
network.
or 5400/MIMIC
Standby
Load (Mains Fail CondItionI
Alarm Load (Mains Fail Condition)
Working
Voltage
Nodes
outputs
Dimensions
[mrnj
150mA
22omA
2 1.5 - 30V DC from LPN.DCN
The 5400/RDN
or 5400/MIMIC
Local fault clean changeover
440Wx385Hx104D
or local PSU.
each counts as one
contacts
(I Amp rated
ode
on the
at 24VJ
network.
5400lLCD
Standby
Load (Mains Fail Conditio)
Alarm Load (Mains Fail Condition]
Working
Voltage
Nodes
Secure Network
Dimensions
/mm)
1 OOmA
17OmA
21.5 - 30V DC from LPN,DCN
or local PSU.
Does not count as a system node. Listen only device.
Can be spurred
off from the network
loop. Maximum
36OWxZlSHx47D
5400/
Complies
with EN54 part 4 1998
120mA
Mains 230V AC nominal
+/- 10%
4A/GA.
17 Ampere-Hour
24V Sealed Lead Acid.
O/P1 - 24V DC Primary
supply.
O/P2 - 24V DC Secondary
supply.
Output
path is automatically
switched
if a S/C fault is detected.
Communicated
to nearest
connected
5400 node.
From 5400 node during
fire conditions
to increase
output
to 6A.
4 wire plus 2 wire (2 Primary
Power,
2 signals)
(2 Sec. Power].
440Wx385Hx144D
BC6/17
Standby
Load (Mains
rower
supply
Integral
Charger
Integral
Battery
Dual path output
Supply fault signal
Charger
inhibit input
Wiring
to 5400 Node
Dimensions
[mm1
fail
Condition)
Eight
5400/LCDs
betieen
each
node
(396
per sy.
BFP
-4
-....-~
- --*,...-.
.,,v,.
vs..
,..#.#..
.*
...In,..
ICEL
ES EN IS0 9002
Company
policy is one of continuou
improvement.
prior rlotice
Rele;lsc Dar? J.lr111.1ry 1999
INTRUDER ALARMS
we reserve
the right
to change
IS0 9001 Certificate

No s 201. 188 R 76R
specifications
without
. g 5200
ffEP
ANALOGUE
ADDRESSABLE
FIRE CONTROL
SYSTEM
>
i/
?;
-
Protec
Fire
Detection
plc
5L?oo
ANALOGUE
FIRE
At~DRESSAf~I
CONTROI-
I.
PANCI-

plc, a major
independent
British
company,
is
amongst
the leaders
in the design
of Fire Detection
and Emergency
Lighting
systems.
The companys
success
is built
upon
a total
commitment
to
quality
and customer
service
with
an unrivalled
range
of quality
products.
Addressable,
An;llogue
Addr cii~ll )Ic
and Conventlon;il
f3rc Dc~ct~on
systems
5200 Control
Emergency
Lqhtq
L um1nr1tt-(-5,
CentrJ B,itt~ry Ac 1x111,lryIOW(Y c II 1~1
UPS Systems
with
ES5839
M,IIII< I3OVAI
Working
i I 5
Voltqe
Current
Alarm Current
~bl,llrlc
Fdll
Cur IdliIorlJ
rioniln~1l +
IO%
iov IX
A~lIlllA
/M,litis Fall Co~nt11110~~/ 37OmA

0
40
83
Fire Suppression
Part 4: 1988
Power Supply
imdby
Voice Evacuation
b Put~l~c Acklr (Y\.
Security and CCTV Systc~~is
Panel Complies
Specification:-
Systems.
il~JIW
( cwJi<ltJe
Norw
or-itlens~ncj
4 Mor~~torcd
rntern,~l j IA rated 0 24V)
I Set of fio11~17101ilti)red double pole
DEDICATED
TO QUALITY
Protec
as an IS0 9000
jB5~750)
registered
company,
IS comm~ttctl
to
provldlng
a high level of tectilllr,rl
excellence
and customer
cclrc
szoo
Allcrloc~clt?
The
Protec
Addressable
Firc> Detection
,rnti Ali~rm
systern
IS a mayor advance
Irl flrc
detection
system technology
The 5200 combines

erase of CIK with
a system flexible
enough
I(, rc~~ilI\(~
the needs
of any mcdlum
517~~1
building
Each panel uses ;1 powerful
micro-controller
en;lblinq
nklny I~(:w
user accessible
fe,arres
The stylIst
cnclf)~~Irc~
W/Ill
contemporary
complement
any c~nvirc)nmrW
Changeover
cnntacts
(IA rated Q 24Vj
Up to 5 IO alilfm outputs
on the loop wtth the
ute of ddd~t~onal loop O/P devices

BAcklit liquid
DlSPldY
Analogue
Addressable
Loopi
q&ill display 2 lines of 40 characters
2 Loops. each with 255 address capactty

Total ryQem capacrty
5 IO addresres
!)OOmA per loop Including
lutal Loop LCMd
all loop connected
dt?Vlf?S
I6 Zone LCDs or 32 Zone LEDs-options
Zones
twin red common
3Amp DC switch-mode
Integral Charger
Integral Battery
IO Ampere-hour
Fore StXton Output
Dedicated chqeover
Alarm Load
Maximum
24V sealed lead acid

rontact
Fully fault moriltored
Fault output
Single pole changeover
Serial Communications
iupply
Interface
/IA rated 0 74V/
3A w~lh IrNegral power supply LION
fault Monltorlng
Auxiliary Output
plus
flrc indicatorr
to 88 5839 Pt 4 I988
contacts (IA rated 0 24VJ
4 Wire (2 power.
2 data) for up to
4 Repeater/rnlmic
panels
14V IX fiitcd ~lt 25OmA
IEAI
Ul?LS
Simplified
All
(otlIr(Il
rJool>
<IIf
,l(lr,l(((~
(I I( I( Id II (
RS232 Computer
Optional
Interface
9 way U type r onnector

40 ch,irxtcr
Integral Printer
/nldlCJ
low noise thermA
prfnter
Programmability:32 Input Groups

32 Output
Groups
32 Zonal Output
Groups
Exh
IS xtwttd
by d separate zone input for
LOWS I to 32
Progmrnmabie
Selettdblr
5200
Repeat
Panel/5200
Illuminated
m;!stel tlrne out
tolriclderitc
non-latching
addresses
8 programmable
non IMchlng
~IIC ,~tldrcsres
Zonal
Mimic
24V UC Dewed
Power Supply
from 5200 control
5erial romrnuntcat~ons
Standby Current
I oonvl
Alarm Current
LOOmA
\er~al Communrcatlons
Link
4 Wire (2 power,
Repeater/mlmlc
Dlmenslons
clrtcctlon
8 progrxnmabte
440X385X
interfxe
L data) for up to 4
panels
I4Omm
panel VM
ANI)
IJLNC l-11-S
1 st Fix lrlstallation
j~,iOl/
I~,Y,il)~
~llIIlt/~/
(I((
ll~~fll(
If.I11Iw(c/
II1~.l,IIl.lIr(,rl
5 <lll(l
lot
$<lf(>
01
Protec
FIRE
Fire
Detection
CON
I I:01
PANI
plc
Protec
Fire
Detection
plc
Table
detailing
the
Loop
Standby
and Alarm
Load
for typical
Analogue
devices.
Loop Powered Devlcer

Iby !
mA 1
I
I
I
(I
0
I
I
I
I
I
,I
I
I
I
__-
Guide to Loop Cable Conductor
Siring
For the Protcc
5200
System.
Loop Length
150
50
( 100
I50
TomI / 200
Loop
250
Load ; 300
I
350
4iarm
400
WI
450
; 500
~ 550
600
Loop LEN
ngt,,
12010
,250
50
100
1 150
lord
200
LOOP
250
..oad
300
350
,hrnl 1 400
mAI
450
/
1
500
550
600
(MC1IP5
13C
,000
How
to order
5200
Control
Dimensions
(mm)
Pdnd
ES EN IS0 9002
CM No FM 10567
Leeds
Coply
Office
I lrfl Tr<rdmq F%w.
WI ml mil Ro,ltl.
Lrrd< I 5 I I I I IF Enqlrmtl
Tel: (0113)
220 4400
Fax: (0113)
220 4401
Company
policy is one of continuous
change
specifications
without
prior
/, I ) I ) I\ I
\ i, I N ( I
: A I I
INTRUDERAI.AAMS
CM NO 100.116
IS0 9002Cefl No 701

IS0 9W1 Ceti No 1868 268
Protec Camerfield
Ltd
(hclrctll/l w<?y, Nefson. lmcastllre
BR:, (IRT Frqknd
Tel: (0 128217 17474
Fax: (01282)
717475
improvement,
notice.
we reserve
the
right
to
_..___.-.._- -_.._ .
Protec
Fire
THE
VOICE
Detection
ULTIMA.TE
plc
IN
EVACUATION
SYSTEMS
I<
3
U
<
>
W
W
-.------- .
Fire
Protec
VOICE
6
Detection
plc
EVACUATION
PUL3LlC
ADDRESS
SYSTEMS
Protec
Fire
Detection
independent
British
amongst
the leaders
Fire safety
systems.
pk.
a major
company,
is
the
design
of
in
The companyi
success
is built
upon
a
total
commitment
to
quality
and
customer
service
with
an
unrivalled
range
of quality
products.
- Addressable,
Ancllogue
and Conventloncll
Fire
Systems
- Voice
Evacuation
Systems
- High
Addtess,~l~l~!
DetectIon
fu Public
Sensltrvlty
Air
Address
Sampling
Systcmr
- Fully Monitored
Adclress~~l~lc
Emergency
Llghtlng
Systcmr
- Emergency
Lighting
Luminaires,
Central
Batfcry
Auxil~,rr y Powc,r
UPS Systems
I Security
and
CC-RI
,lrlcl
Systems
Protec
as an IS0 9000
(OS5750)
registered
company,
is committed
to providinq
a
high
level
of technical
excellence
and
customer
care
ProvoiceTM
Protecj
in-house
audio
division
Provoice
have
developed
a
new
range
lnnovatlve
products
to meet
appropriate
standards
and customer
requirrrner>ts.
These
products
- Loop
Include:-
Drive
System
- Addres<able
A~e<l/Speclker
- End
System
of Line
- 2 Part
- Surfarc,
- Tilt Drive
of
Flush
CabinN
Plqln
SyQem
Speaker
Spc,,ikc>r
Flush/Surface
Speaker
Where
there
are so many
variablfr
I.e.
acoustics,
building
materials.
furnlshlngs.
fire resistance
etc. advice
frorn
Provoices
qualified
personnel
is
invaluable
111
achieving
cost effective
design,
installation
and
correct
implementation
of VE/PA
systems
to the
rlpproprlatr
f3ritirh
and
InternatIonal
standards
WV
,lIf
cll~lf
olrtifl
IO
Will
Itqlll<ltlolls
(~k1r
llfq)
<lIlfI
fYI
c
[I.)
proviflirifj
ill
C~I,IWII
(olrlpletc
~cc~crire~rierits,
5~ Iifmatic
if15
tf~
efficrerir
I <II If I f ~~l~lllll~~iol,lllf~
c-olll~plc~lc
\yctflrl
II 11fVl
fif-If I
Ikrsf~l
I<11 ( rr<lr 111l(l

I)ic)jff
teciflis
I~iorlitoi
IIf
of
(I(,1
clcllvf-,I
y,
,111~
cltlvic
P,
Ii
f oillract
I!)
)I 1.
WlP\
SI
f>
i<lll~i
f WllfIf
IirlcJ
Plovldinq
iil~tdllatiori
<II IfI
X5i5l<lllf
from
fY~Lllpl~lf-rl~
f I lIrlI11IS~IC~r
5fl \/If
tc~lli~lKr~l
al(l
~r~~i~inyc~ne~l~
II IloIlqIl
II 111<lll,l1lf
;lriO
tile
of
vlvices
(,I(
Olflfl
and
f~imirc
ill~lclll<llif~l
0111
Lllf?
tlc3iqt1
IlOLl~f
)if111l
fl~~ldihl
Ic~yoc~l
flOll1
<lp~pli,t!
fIf~~lfJI1
(<Ill
systcVr,s
f )I 1
tr9c llllf~loyy
PX[)fr;fYlf
CllqII1ffl
fll~lll~
<If IVif
fi ~qrneer
iny
lff~llllfl.
u
3
m
3
n
I IlP
~Kl-f~lllll~1llf
?yYlflll
I\
coir~pi~rl~lity
ill~ISll
\<llIlf
lll<ll
tt1ca
IS
I <I<
C.CI~IIKJ
~~,ll~i~iet/Col~~~ti~i
rrojcclioll
D-
IIiif~
INTEl.l.lGFNClY
on
MCOI
II
spealter
Wd
wItI
~t~icl.
tif~ii~~l,
tt1t
cr5erl.
of
to meet
reg<lrcl
to
U
<
>
Plllcl/or
rl~~l,~ilf~I
and
dre
II 1~11
lypr.
lypc-,
\I If
IZf- I iili~~iil
Skrrfarp
fnc c.
I101
II,
f<.l( (.
~~l~()fllfIffI
fcll1llf~l
WITH
<is
l?Cf(!l
cm1plctrcl
fIIVIICIIlIl1Crlt
( ClIff
If
I 7!l((
lffJrllltlllclIl~
appllc;lllol
\I II
VS
owl
lllst;lll<lllf,ll
Jf.11 I<ff
~~mktlr5
I <lllf
11,-l\
cl
It if
IIf f
,ltecl
of
flt~~,c~l,fl,lllt
of
llO\/f
Thr
cjrV,llly
I hlff
I 01
to
lOI lcI5f~~ll<c~r
tlf~l,llls
IZf~flccted
5fC Ilol-I
for
ISI
,0
_
.
0
3
_.____-._---Protec
Fire
VOICE
&,
Detection
Sccurit
Office
(all c,,IK
plc
EVACUATION
PUULIC
ADDRESS
Reception
Microphone
(5 zone selection
/ all call)
SYSTEMS
Public
Address
SC
Background
Music
Systems
_______
fG-yry
Spot Announcement
im Tailor
exact
Microphone
==--lzl-x
----f--r
Multi-play
made to customers
rcqulrements
1 System designs
applications
Machine
4
CD
-piFiq
for different
Twin
Cassette
Deck
I
- Operates
with a range of
microphones
- all call, 5
zone, 10 zone, 20 zone
consoles
AM/FM
Digital
Tuner
3 A choice
optional
standing
of music sources,
rack or desktop
- Supported
by in house
system design
Mixer
Frame
Spare
- Compatible
with the full
range of Protec public
address speakers
p Amplifier
circuits are
configured
to be 6OW,
12OW 240W and 480W
units
PUBLIC
p Volume control
range:
6W, 1 OOW, 300W all with
24V override
relay
Amp
Zone
Amp
Zorle
Amp
Zone
Amp
Zone
ADDRESS
RACK
ZONE
1
Sales Floor
Mirs, spot
announcerricnt
backgr-ound
b
music
inputs
ZONE
2
Restaurant
Mic b l.m~kqt ound
lllu~ic
inpuic
ZONE
3
Loading Uay
Mic tnputs only
ZONE
4
- Staff Areas
Mic inputs only
/ i
i!
n
if
/!!
SYSTEM
CONFIGlJR4
M.S
WITH
INTEI
TION
l.IGFNCF
MANAGERS
Pro
tee
Fire
VOICE
&
Detection
plc
EVACUATION
PUBLIC
ADDRESS
SYSTEMS
Provoice End of
Line Systems
- Fully compliant
with the
requirements
of
El.5 5839 Part 8 1998
- Conventional
line system
end of
mot iitoring
- Series coupling/hot
standby
amplifier
configurations
- Single; dual; dual
interlaced
circuit
configurations
- Ideal where many
zones are required
small
- A choice
optional
standing
of music sources,
rack or desktop
- Integral
/battery
standby
supplies
charger
- Fully integrates
with
Protec range of fire
alarm panels
the
VOICE
ALARM
RACK
MIC
MULTI-PLAY
I-lCI<ET DESK MIC
CD
5(ml<el
(II f I Ill5
nioiiitoic~tl
CEILING SPEAKER
Iii
tlw
cilcllll
CABINET SPEAKER
CII f?
rrririq
fw~i
11
(.J I
er1t
tletec-t
f( I <II I(1
V0iC.C~
~1l~lllll
f CJI Itif lcro~lsly
<I
of
siynal.
IOU12
,411
II I
open/shol
tllis
is
rlt tl-1c
f,llllt
tlis~,l,ly~Yl
I<lf. k.
r-----.--i
I-JB I
/IF?-I
JUNCTION
BOX
Illf
5yIl(VlI
llllr5ll~llf~tl
tl I( rollowil
END OF LINE UNIT
I tie
fire
phased
If J l~l;lf
&3t III
I EoLI
AUDITORIUM
KS
i EOL 1 AUDITORIUM
AUDITORIUM
AUDITORIUM
Ill
controls
ol
xltlress
~-lo<ll~lfwrrl5
the
the
cinema.
the
foyer
or,ly.
I3;1( Itqrc~~lf~fl
(Io,ll<loor,l\
AUDITORIUM
/ EOL /
~Illtl
systcr,i
evacu;Wm
Microplio~
1
Ol,fV<llf~~
II If1 :
lliusif-
15 olayed
in
tlie
ollly.
I tie 1~10vcJ1~ f I uop Urive call also

be iriteqr~itc~cl
wit11 tIlta end of line
to
fmvicJC
f~ comprehensive
hyl~icl
sy~tf~11,
IAloled
to
5~ClliC
I~rrllcIIl,!~
<ll!~llf
,-ltic>llr.
meet
FOYER
-1
M S
EOL /
W IT H
CLOAKROOMS
I N T E I. I. I G rf N C I-
-l-ME SAFES-l- VOICE ALAR

_____-_.- .----Pro tee Fire
Detection
p/c
VOICE
EVACUATION
& PUBLIC
ADDRESS
SYSTEMS
ProvoiceM Loop
Drive System
- Fully compliant
with the
requirements
of BS 5839
part 8 1998
- Fully monltorecl
loops
loudspeakerI O( )I IN
I c 1c )I t )I II
1--r-
-----
- Loop isolators offer higticr

loudspeaker
circuit integrity
100% loudspeaker
coverage
during open circuit
conditions
I* As little as 10% loudspeaker

loss during short circuit
conditions
- Up to 40%
Installation
savings
-3
in cable
-I
- Speaker Loops can serve
much larger area than
conventional
dual circuit
systems
a
MICROPHONE
CD PLAYER
Fully integrates
with the
Protec range of fire alarm
panels.
Al--a,
,-,
,--
r-
h I
T--
,-
I,
r--
I--
-r-
\ I
c-
\ I
I-
YSTEM IN THE WORLD!

Sales Area - Ground
Loop miiwc
Systcrll
Floor
Sales Area - First Floor
PUBLIC
ADDRESS
BACKGROUND
MUSIC
Back of House - StaffAreas

i+rll)--i
51-1
t--c--+r
t--+--d
:1
VOICE
EVACUATION
PUBLIC
ADDIZESS
u.Sill<j
II IiS
rccluccc
WI
costs
Itvth
(~llll(
I()k
Sl~JtllfiC~llt~y
II l~t<lll,ltiol~
of
,ilst
lll~lilll<llr
cymYll
YtC(II
,ll>d
lil lC]
lty.
cable
a
high
.-
Food Court
j+$-j
SL!t-+d];-im1,3
VOICE
EVACUATION
PUBLIC
/
1
ADDRESS
1 51 I 1
W
Ainplifki
loop
cKmficjcrrecJ
lo
240~
IS
WITH
INTELI~IGENCE
or
180~
(ii-c&s
rli ivf
1.,(
in
GOW,
Cd~kl(
ate
I /?ow,
ity.
FLEXIBLE VOICE ALARM

Fro
tee
Fire
VOICE
6
De tee tion
The advent of 11 w Ir.ovoiceM Addressable

Area
and
Addressable
Sf~~~l<cr Systems br-ings to an
end
the restrictions
placed
upon
you by
having
to install
conventional
voice
alarm
systerns.
Both Prmvoice systems offer secure
phased
evacuation
options
as standard.
p/c
EVACUATION
P u B L Ic
AD
r3 R ES 5
SYSTEMS
ProvoiceTM Addressable
- Fully compliant
part 8 1998
Area
- Up to IO addressable
at-ea kiter-faces
can be supported
by each loop
to B.S. 5839
- The flexibility
of ;I Multi-.zoned
VA System fr-otn two amfplifiet
System
n With local power supply units

the quantity
of addressable
area
interfaces
can be increased
up
to the capacity
of spare
addresses
on the Fire Alarm System
.s
- Addressable
area interface
units driven from the same
4-core loop (maximum
480
watt loading
per loop)
n Fully integrates
with the Protec
range of Fire Alarrn Panels
- Addressable
interfaces
supporn
Provoice loop drive circuits
LEVEL 4
LEVEL 3
~,,ji
;(
LEVEL 2
!\(
I(, I
LEVEL 1
Gnd
FLOOR
Voice
Alartn
(4 ccre
fire rated
--.----a.
rn
Loop
cable)
Microphorle
Evac
Ale1 8.t Ckttinels
Add to this the ability to use

for your
public
address
music requirements
and you
in safety and flexibility
in one
the same system

and background
have the ultimate
compact
systern.
ProvoiceTM
Addressable
- Fully compliant
part 8 1998
Speaker
Systcn~
to B.S. 5839
w The flexibility
of individually
addressable
speakers
m All speaker interfaces
driven
from the same 4-core loop
(maximum
480 watt loading
per loop)
General
r-anye
--
0- I
Office
Management
Suite
Reception
Z-c01 e fire
rated cable
Productiorl
4-core
rated
fire
Cilhle
----es3
M S
W I T f-i
of Fit CTAlar 111 Irlrlels
Microphone
I N T I I I I G I-- N C I-:
Accounts
1
1 j :,I,
l /
SECTION
MAINTENANCE
KEQUIREMENTS
INTRODUCTION
General
Only a regular and organised scheme of maintenance work, planned to cover all details of
the installation given maintenance periods, can ensure contained satisfactory operation
with a minimum liability to interruptions to supply due to equipment faults.
Careful attention must be given to the safety of personnel and equipment while
maintenance or repair work is in progress. A code of safety rules based on system of
Permits to Work similar to that which is detailed in British Standards Code of Practice
CP.2008 (2958) Section 12, is recommended.
A planned maintenance scheme should include a system of logging, wherein records are
kept of inspection, maintenance and repair on all items of plant and equipment.
Switchrooms should be kept clean and the practice of using switchrooms space for
storage must not be permitted.
Where maintenance work is in progress a Danger notice must always be attached to
any live apparatus calling attention to the danger of approach.
A Caution notice must always be attached to plant or its associated control equipment
warning of possible damage to equipment which may be occasioned by interference.
Before any work is commenced on any item of equipment, the supply and ancillary
circuits must be made Dead and locked off.
All safety precautions and generally recommended procedures relating to the
maintenance of switchgear are contained on British Standards Code of Practice BP 2008
and this should be read in conjunction with the instructions for routine periodic
maintenance given in the following pages.
Swi tchaear
It should be understood that the maintenance recommendations made in the following are
supplementary to any specific instructions contained in publications issued by the
Manufacturers of equipment.
A general inspection of switchrooms and switchboards should be made at regular
intervals, careful attention being given to ensuring that the areas and equipment are clean
and that there is not evidence of overheating of any audible discharge which may be
indicative of loose switchgear components.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
AND FAULT FINDING
The whole of the installation should be tested periodically in accordance with the 16
Edition of the I.E.E. Wiring Kegulations and any additional requirements of the Client or
the Local Authority.
The whole of the installation should be tested as required under the 1lealth & Safety At
Work Act.
Maintenance of the installation shall consist of the routine replacement of lamps and
starters as required.
The connections to switchgear and equipment should be checked for tightness and any
moving parts lubricated annually.
In the event of a circuit failing to work the status of the protecting device should be
checked and replaced if necessaryby a competent Electrical Installation Company.
The battery units within the self contained emergency lighting luminaires should be
changed at four yearly intervals.
All the equipment used can be sourced from any of the National Electrical Wholesalers.
In the event of a circuit failing to work the status of the protecting MCB or MCBRCD
should be checked and reset, if necessary. If the device fails to reset the fault should be
reported to the Maintenance Department.
ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
AND FAULT FINDING
The whole of the installation should be tested periodically in accordance with the l(jth
Edition of the I.E.E. Wiring Regulations and any additional requirements of the Client or
the Local Authority.
The whole of the installation should be tested as required under the Health & Safety At
Work Act.
Maintenance of the installation shall consist of the routine replacement of lamps and
starters as required.
The connections to switchgear and equipment should be checked for tightness and any
moving parts lubricated annually.
In the event of a circuit failing to work the status of the protecting deviceshould be
checked and replaced if necessary by a competent Electrical Installation Company.
The battery units within the self contained emergency lighting luminaires should be
changed at four yearly intervals.
All the equipment used can be sourced from any of the National Electrical Wholesalers.
In the event of a circuit failing to work the status of the protecting MCB or MCB/RCD
should be checked and reset, if necessary. If the device fails to reset the fault should be
reported to the Maintenance Department.
SECTION 7
AS INSTALLED
DRAWINGS
RE560/50/MGO 1
Meridian Gardens Lighting and Power Layouts
SECTION 04
7.4.4
NOT APPLICABLE
SECTION 04
7.4.5
R W Gregory
and Partners
Consulting Engineers
30 - 32 Thames Street, Hampton, Middlesex TW12 2DX

Tel: 0181 941 4421 Fax: 0181 941 0047
KMB
The Old Bake House
Kit-ton
Lincolnshire
PE20 1EH
For the attention
1 December
c *c
1999
MFH/gk/LO1693
of Mr C Clark
Dear Sirs
MILLENNIUM
DOME - NMEClGRANADA
CATERING
I reconfirm your enquiry concerning a risk assessment

affect persons carrying out future construction work.
of residual
I have reviewed
require recording
are no abnormal
Yours faithfully
R W GREGORY
this matter and conclude

under this category.
AND PARTNERS
Malcolm F Hardacre
Associate
CC
Mr M Kassapian
Mr R Walton
R3llrmm
Eur I* J T Srnllh BSC CE
FEE FCIESE FConsE
J Gascell s-4 BEng (HGm) t sc(Arch) CEQ FlMechE
FCIESE FCcmE
M Roberts FClBSE FConsE
Eut 1 G P sherran mng FCIESE FOXISE
A co 7 leton FCIS FCwb
S J Leheup CEng FCIBSE FConsE
A firm Quality Assured
to BS EN IS0 9001
Granada
Wakemans
CO*bt*
CP dervz.2
BSC PhD CEng MCESE
V J Guwet BSC CEng FEE F,S,ruc,E FBAE
D Mq+mv
BSC (Hms) CEng MIStrunE
~ConsE
that there
hazards
that may
risks that
english
PARTNERSHIPS
THE MILLENNIUM
EXPERIENCE
GREENWICH
HEALTH & SAFETY FILE

SECTION 3
FILE REFERENCE - EP - 3 - 51
GREENWICH
PAVILLION
(INCLUDING FIT-OUT)
* english
THE MILLENNIUM
PARTNERSHIPS
EXPERIENCE
- GREENWICH

PAVILION
(INCLUDING
FIT-OUT)
VOLUME
INDEX
Volume 1
Ltd)
Volume 2
Volume 3

drawings)
Volume 4

drawings)
Volume 5
Volume 6
(including as built
(including as built
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ("aft,
SECTION 1
INTRODUCTION
)
,Vovember 1999
Page 5 0/49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian I'oint ('aJe
INTRODUCTION
I:I-GENERAL
This Manual describes the Mechanical Services installed by G.T.Ranby l,imited to
Meridian Point Cafe, The Millennium Dome.
The manual has been prepared in a format to give easy reference to all plant and
equipment. Every effort has been made to deal with each system in a concise manner,
however, to obtain a full and detailed picture of any particular system or plant item this must
be read in conjunction with the as-fitted drawings and relative manulhcturer's literature.
To assist in the day to day running of the various plants a description of each is given,
together with routine attention necessary to the main components.
Regular inspection, monitoring and checking are necessary if the efficiency and
control of plants are to be maintained at the effective level required.
Regular maintenance and inspections are essential if inconvenient and costly
breakdowns are to be avoided. Although there is no way of guaranteeing against chance of
breakdown, with regular and detailed inspections together with a preventive maintenance
programme, the possibility of such an occurrence can be greatly reduced.
A correct maintenance programme will also ensure that the individual plants and
equipment are running at maximum efficiency at all times. Continual monitoring of wear and
changes that the systems undergo during their operating period and life will extend plant life;
as anticipated and continuous corrective action will avert and minimise deterioration.
It is outside the scope of this Manual to lay down firm rules as to how the
maintenance of the Mechanical Services is to be organised. This will depend entirely on the
policies to be adopted by the Building Management. The prime function of this Manual is to
give guidance and recommendations to assist in the tbrmulation of such policies in order that
effective work schedules and maintenance routines can be established. Accordingly the
Manual can, and should, be used as a reference in the day to day use of the Building.
It is assumed that the maintenance activities will be undertaken by properly trained,
fully qualified and competent personnel able to implement the instructions contained within
this manual. Should the operator not have such expertise it is strongly recommended that
specialist assistance be employed bearing in mind the following.
Cont/---
1
)
:\"ovember
1999
Page 6 0./49
Mechanical Services
lhe Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ('aJe
Cont/--1:2 - H E A L T H A N D S A F E T Y A T W O R K A C T 1974
There are legal requirements in connection with Health and Safety at work and in
addition there are many official recommendations. For details of these reference should be
made to the appropriate official publications. The following paragraphs refer briefly to the
more common requirements.
The person/persons undertaking maintenance work associated with the mechanical
services described in this manual must carry out all operations in accordance with the
following :Health and Safety at Work Act 1974
Electricity at Work Regulations 1989
Control of Substances Hazardous to Health (COSI IH) Regulations 1988
Control of Asbestos at Work Regulations 1987
Noise at Work Regulations 1989
The Gas Sat~ty (Installations & Use) Regulations 1994
In particular, but not to the exclusion of any of the above acts. the following precautions
should be taken.
Person to be C o m p e t e n t
No person shall be engaged in any work activity where technical knowledge or

experience is necessary to obviate danger or, where appropriate, injury unless he/she
possesses such knowledge or experience, or is under such a degree of supervision as may be
appropriate having regard to the nature of the work.
It is the duty of every employer to ensure, so far as is reasonably practicable, the

health, safety and welfare at work not only of all employees but also of other people who use
the premises.
It is the duty of every employee while at work to take reasonable care for their health
and safety also that of other people who may be affected by their acts or omissions at work.
To co-operate with their employer or any other person so far as is necessary for the provisions
of the various relevant Acts to be complied with.
Cont/---
2
J
November 1999
Page 7 of 49
Mechanical Services
"lhe Millennium Dome
Meridian Point Ca[e
Cont/---
All places of work must be kept as clean as possible consistent with their use. Dirt
and refuse must not be allowed to accumulate.
Work must never be carried out under conditions where there is any element of danger
if it is reasonably practicable to eliminate the risk.
Safe working conditions must be provided, to give adequate protection and also safe
access and egress where necessary. Access doors and panels to all areas containing
mechanical or electrical plant (e.g. Plant or Switch Rooms, Electrical Panels, Fan Chambers)
must carry appropriate warning notices. Proper scaffolds, guard rails, toe boards etc., and
ladders, must be provided and used. Refer to the Regulations.
Where appropriate to the work, protective equipment (eg. Goggles, Screens,

Respirators, Protective Clothing, Safety Belts) must be used.
Never work on moving parts of machinery. Exercise care if working on the stationary
parts of machinery which is operating; before doing so ensure that the moving parts are
adequately protected by suitable guards.
Never lift, move, or carry loads which are liable to cause personal injury. Suitable
lifting - or other tackle must always be used.
Adequate lighting (permanent or temporary) must be provided.
Before working on electrical equipment, a "permit to work" signed by a responsible

person must be obtained. The equipment must be disconnected from the supply by operating
the switch or starter, and also the isolator (if fitted); as a further precaution, withdraw the
fuses. Only competent persons must undertake any work requiring technical knowledge or
experience.
Hand and other small power tools should be suitable fbr, and operated from, a I l0
volt electric supply.
Cont/---
3
November 1999
Page 8 o['49
MechanciaMillenniumServiceSDome
Tlhe
Meridian Point C"aJe
Cont/--Fire precautions must be observed. "'No Smoking" notices must be displayed where
necessary, and rigidly obeyed.
The means of escape from the building (as specified on the certificate issued by the
Fire Authority) must be maintained, and at all times kept free of obstruction. Fire fighting
equipment must be provided, maintained, and kept readily available.
Fire alarm systems must be regularly checked, and kept in working order.
First Aid boxes or cupboards of the prescribed standard, and containing only First Aid
requisites, must be provided in accessible positions, and kept clean and in good repair.
All safety precautions arc to be observed when using replacement products or dealing
with routine maintenance, repairs to plant and ancillary equipment.
All labelling of packages, detailed instruction sheets, connection diagrams and labels
on the equipment must be checked and used for determining the correct equipment for the
specific application.
Any equipment used or test carried out must be in compliance with the current Code
of Practice relating to such equipment, manufacturers" technical literature and specific
installation instructions.
Where it is felt that specific tests are required over that described in the
manufacturers' literature this information must be obtained from, or clearance given by the
manufacturer before the equipment is installed, tested and put into use.
WARNING AND SAFETY NOTICES

All warning and safety notices must be properly displayed and worded to give clear
instructions.
All notices are to be the correct type and size and in the interest of personnel safety,
warning and caution notices are to bc strictly adhered to.
Cont/---
4
November 1999
Page 9 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ( "aJe
Cont/--1:3 - LEGIONNAIRES' D I S E A S E - CAUSES AND CONTROl,

1:3.1 - Background
The bacterium, Legionella Pneumophila, which causes I,egionnaires' Disease is
widely distributed in nature and commonly found in surlhce water and soil. It is not normally
found in mains water but, given the right conditions, can establish itself in water systems in
buildings. Conditions which favour the colonisation of water systems include stagnation and
temperatures between 20~ and 45~ Below 10-15~ Pneumophila survives but seems not
to flourish. Between, perhaps, 20~ and 45~ it can multiply and above 55~ it is killed,
albeit only in proportion to temperature and time exposed.
1:3.2 - C a u s e s o f L e g i o n e l l o s i s
Although not yet proven conclusively there is strong evidence that the principle route
for infection in humans is by inhalation deep into the lungs, of small (less that 5 micron
diameter) water droplets containing Legioneila Pneumophila.
Attention, therefore, focuses not only on the aerosol mists from air-conditioning
system cooling towers, but also on showers, spray taps and W.C.'s. However, the visible
"mists" that can be produced by all these appliances are composed largely of particles above 5
micron diameter and with the exception of showers, there is at the present time little reason to
suppose that spray taps are any less safe than other types.
The reason is simply that all may produce the invisible aerosols that may be
potentially dangerous. Such aerosols can, in certain circumstances, travel several kilometres
before evaporation.
1:3.3 -
Control
Cold Water Storage and Distribution Systems

Ideally, cold water must be kept and distributed at a temperature below 20~ which is
the temperature below which bacterial growth is restricted. Since this is not generally
practicable it is recommended that all reasonable means should be used to keep the
temperature down as near to 20~ as possible and to eliminate any local abnormal
temperature rises in the cold water system. This will not be relevant to separate drinking
water systems where these are supplied directly from the Water Company's mains.
Cont/--A'ovember 1999
Page I0 of 49
MechanciaMillenniumServiceSDome
IThe
Cont/---
Hot Water Systems

The temperature controllers serving the hot water system must be set such that the hot
water is stored at a temperature of 60~ and distributed at a temperature of not less that
50~ in order to avoid infection through bacterial growth
Where a tap, shower head, or similar fitting is not in use for over 24 hours, it is
recommended that the hot water valve be fully opened for a few minutes daily in order to
reduce the risk of bacterial growth.
November 1999
Page I 1 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point Care
1:4 - ENGINEERING DESIGN & INSTALLATION TEAM
Management Contractor
Henry Boot Management Ltd.
Bell Lane
London Colney
Hertfordshire AL2 IDU
Contact- T. R. Moss
Tel. 01727-826766
Fax. 01727-821626
E-mail hbml@henryboot.cg~uk
Mechanical Services Designer

R. W. Gregory & Partners
30-32 Thames Street
Hampton
Middlesex TWI2 2DX
Tel. 0208-941 442 l
Fax. 0208-941 0047
Electrical Services Contractor

G. T. Ranby (Nottingham) Ltd.
Parkside Works
Gotham Lane
East Leake
Loughborough LEI2 6JG
Tel. 01509-853434
Fax. 01509-856377
Mechanical Services Contractor

Hilton Building Services Ltd.
Waterway Street
Nottingham NG2 3AD
Tel. 0115-986 1221
Fax. 0115-986 6870
November 1999
7
Page 12 of 49
Mechanical Services
7he Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ('aft,
1:5 - ABBREVIATIONS
Abbreviations used in the manual and those in current practice are as follows:Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene
Air Handling Unit
Alternating Current
Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging
British Standard
Carbon Dioxide
Changeover
Copper
Complete With
Decibel
Degrees Celsius
Diameter
Direct Currenl
Direct On Line
Dry Bulb
Full Load Current
Gauge
Glass Reinforced Polyester
Hertz
Kilograms
Kilograms/Hour
Kilograms/Second
Kilograms/Metres Cubed
Kilo Newtons Per Metre Squared
Kilopascal
Kilowatts
Litres Per Second
Metres
Metres Cubed
Metres Cubed Per Hour
Metres Cubed Per Second
Metres Per Second
Mild Steel
Millimetres
Newtons Per Metre Squared
Noise Rating/Criteria
Number
Pascal
Phase
Polyvinylchloride
Relative Humidity
Revs Per Minute
Revs Per Second
Star Delta
Totally Enclosed Fan Cooled
Volts
Watts
Weatherproof
Wet Bulb
ABS
AtlU
AC
AGS
BS
COt
C/O
Cu
c/w
db
~
Dia
DC
DOL
DB
FLC
(g)
GRP
ttz
Kg
Kg/hr
Kg/s
Kg/m ~
kN/m 2
kPa
kW
I/s
m
m3
mVhr
m3/s
m/s
MS
mm
N/m 2
NR/NC
No.
Pa
Ph
PVC
Rtl
r.p.m.
r.p.s.
SD
TEFC
V
w
WP
wb
8
)
.Vovember 1999
Page 13 of 49
Mechanical Services
'the Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ('afe
1:6 - M O D I F I C A T I O N S
TO EQUIPMENT
To be completed in the event of any technical or engineering modifications.

REF.
EQUIPMENT
[ DATE
MODIFICATION
BY
9
)
.Vovember 1999
Page 14 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point Care
1:7 - M O D I F I C A T I O N S
TO THE MANUAL
To be completed in the event of any modification applicable to the technical or engineering

content of this manual.
REF.
EQUIPMENT
DATE
MODIFICATION
BY
10
November 1999
Page 15 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point Care
SECTION 2
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTIONS
November 1999
Page 16 o[+49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
SYSTEMS DESCRIPTION
2:1 - C O L D W A T E R S E R V I C E
A mains cold water supply is brought into the Unit by connecting to the Site
distribution Main in the area at the rear of the l.ocker Room.
The mains cold water copper distribution is run at low level to serve the washbasins,
sinks and hot water heater.
The distribution is shown on As Fitted drawing R560/29922 l/M/018.
2:2 - H O T W A T E R S E R V I C E
The hot water supply is generated by an electric immersion heater storage unit which
is located in the area at the rear of the I~ocker Room.
The hot water service supply and circulation return distribution is run at low level to
serve the washbasins and sinks. A circulation return is fitted with a circulation pump to
minimise wastage and maintain hot water at the outlets.
]'he distribution is shown on As Fitted drawing R560/299221/M/018.
2:3 - W A S T E S Y S T E M S
Waste is run from each sink and basin in uPVC pipcs which discharge into drain
points at in the floor.
The systems are shown on As Fittcd drawing R560/299221/M/017.
2:4 - M A I N T E N A N C E
The systems described above have been designed, installed and commissioned to give
optimum performance and efficiency in providing Hot & Cold Water Service and Waste
Disposal to the Unit. In order to ensure that the designed level of performance is maintained it
is essential that the plant is maintained and serviced in accordance with the schedules laid
down in Section 4 of this manual.
11
)
Aovember 1999
Page 17 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point Cafe
SECTION 3
&
FAULT FINDING
November 1999
Page 18 o.[49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point Care
3:1 - GENERAL INTRODUCTION
This Section of the manual contains instructions for the preparation, start up, shut down and
emergency shut down operating procedures for the individual items of plant and equipment
under system headings.
It is essential that the design and operating intent for the system is thoroughly understood.
Study of the project record drawings will assist this process.
The plant is designed to operate normally under automatic control, when correctly set to
work.
The Instructions in this section of the manual are intended to provide for all operational
procedures necessary for the preparation and start up of the plant, following commissioning,
overhaul or a long period of shut down. They are however only intended as a guide for
experienced personnel who are familiar with this type of plant and have read and understood
the Manufacturers Literature relevant to the plant which they are operating.
When satisfactory operation of the plant has been established it may then be switched over to
operate under the supervision of the automatic controls and time switches where applicable.
Most of the checks may not be necessarily be repeated fbllowing commissioning (provided
that the plant has not been left isolated or unattended since commissioning) except as
maintenance routines. See Section 4.
There are however certain conditions under which unscheduled pre-start up checks will be
necessary, i.e. :If fuses have to be replaced.
If plant has been operated under manual control.
lfa drive motor overload relay has operated.
In the event of electrical mains failure.
Ifa pipeline filter has been removed for cleaning or renewal.
Ifa manually operated valve adjustment has been altered temporarily (e.g. to allow a
strainer to be cleaned)
If plant has been shut down or isolated for any reason.
Instructions for shutting down the plant for a prolonged period or for the purpose of
inspection or overhaul are also provided. It is left for the operating personnel to determine at
which point in the routines given that they commence.
Cont/---
12
)
November 1999
Page I9 of 49
Mechanical Services
YTwMillennium Dome
Meridian Point Carl,
Cont/--Trouble free running of the plant therefore depends on :9 Operating the plant within the design limits
9 Maintaining the plant in good running order in accordance with recommendations given
in this manual.
9 Observing the pre-start and running checks listed in the following sub sections :Instructions for each system are divided into the following categories :3:2 - A s s o c i a t e d S y s t e m s
This lists associated systems and/or main plant that requires to be in operation before the
particular system being described can be put into operation.
3:3 - Pre-operation
Checks
These basic checks describe check items necessary to bring a system ti'om idle status to that
ready tbr actual operation, prior to commencing start up procedures.
3:4 - Start-up
Describes steps necessary to put a static system into operation mode.

3:5 - Shut Down
Describes steps necessary to close down operation of a system other than by automatic
control for general maintenance work and/or fault inspection.
3:6 - Emergency
Shut Down
Describes action to be taken in an emergency to quickly close down plant operation due to an
emergency condition arising.
3:2 - ASSOCIATED SYSTEMS

Mains Water Supply
Hot Water Service
Cont/---
13
)
A'ovember 1999
Page 20 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Cont/--3:3- P R E - O P E R A T I O N C H E C K S
3:3.1 - Cold Water Sstem Fill
Ensure that all areas are clean and there is unimpeded access to all items of equipment.
Carry out a general inspection of the plant to ensure it is sat~ and serviceable to operate.
Check that all system drain valvcs are closed.
Check that the towns cold water is available at the entry to the Unit.
If the system, or part of it, has been shut down and drained fill it by opening the inlet
valves to the Unit. Ensurc that the system is full of water check that all air release points
on the distribution system arc vented.
3:3.2- Hot Water Service Fill

A 'Megaflo' electric storage heater provides the domestic hot water requirement.
Refer to the manufacturers Literature in Section 7 tbr full details.
Ensure that all areas are clean and there is unimpeded access to all items of
equipment.
2
Carry out a general inspection of the plant to ensure it is safe and serviceable to
operate.
Check that all system drain valves and uncontrolled outlets are closed.
Check that the Cold Water supply is available at the vessel.

If the system, or part of it, has been shut down and drained fill it by opening the inlet
valves to the Unit. Ensure that the system is full of water check that all air release
points on the distribution system are vented and draw off water at all outlets to ensure
the system is full.
Manually open, for a few seconds, the temperature & pressure relief valve on the
Megaflo Unit. Check that the water discharged runs fi'eely away through the tundish
and discharge pipework. Close the valve and ensure that the valve reseats properly and
water flow stops.
Cont/---
14
)
November 1999
Page 21 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point
('aJe
Cont/---
Repeat the operation with the expansion valve on the cold water combination valve.
Check that electrical power is available to the heater.
3:4 - START UP
3:4.1 - Hot Water Service Heater
Enable the circulation pump by switching power ON at the local switched spur.
Switch on the electrical supply to the immersion heaters and allow the unit to heat up.
Check that water is NOT discharged fi'om either the expansion or the Temperature &
Pressure relief valves.
Check that the thermostats operate correctly and that the water supply temperature is
satisfactory by drawing off at the outlets.
3:5 - S H U T D O W N
3:5.1 - Hot Water Service
Isolate the electrical supply to the unit.
Close the isolating valves on the Cold Water supply to the water heater.
If an extended shut down is required, or the system is to be taken out of service,

withdraw all appropriate fuses and drain the system of water.
Cont/---
15
November 1999
Page 22 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ("aJ~,
Cont/---
3:6 - EMERGENCY SHUT DOWN

In an e m e r g e n c y c o n s i d e r i n g the safety o f all p e r s o n n e l is a first priority.
If a leak occurs n e a r an electrical a p p l i a n c e or panel isolate at the main

before a p p r o a c h i n ~
These emergency procedures are intended as a general guide only.
The operator should acquaint himself with the main isolation valves and switches so
that in the event of an emergency there is no doubt as to the location of each operator and its
effect.
Never take risks in an emergency - T i l e SAFETY OF PERSONNEl, MUST
ALWAYS COME FIRST.
Any temporary repairs effected, or arrangements made during or after an emergency
must be corrected as soon as possible.
3:6.1 - W A T E R L E A K S
In all cases establish the severity of the leak. Take precautions to avoid water damage to the
premises and of water entering electrical equipment.
1
Ira leak is on a single plant item - Close the isolating valves on that particular item.
If the leak is on the distribution within a building isolate the service at the entry to the
building
Effect a repair if possible and only switch the plant back on once the system has been
fully recharged.
16
November 1999
Cont/--Page 23 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Cont/---
3:6.2 - H O T W A T E R
SYSTEM
OVERPRESSURE
In the event of the hot water service system pressure rising above a safe level carry out
the following.
1 - Switch the cylinder heating elements OFF
2 - Check that the safety valve discharge is clear and no personnel are near
3 - Prevent personnel from using the system
4 - Do NOT tamper with the expansion vessel
5 - Check the following
Operation of control and high limit thermostats on the calorifier
Expansion tank cushion pressure
System water content
6 - Do not bring the plant back into operation again until the cause of the
pressure/temperature rise has been tbund, understood & remedied.
17
November 1999
Cont/--Page 24 o f 49
Mechanical .Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point
("ale
Cont/---
3:7 - FAULT FINDING

3:7.1 - INTRODUCTION
This section is intended to provide the plant operator with a recommended checklist to
analyse faults that could arise with the main plant operation and various allied systems.
Experience of maintaining the systems and the level of expertise of the personnel with this
building will ultimately take precedence over these guidance notes.
Reference should also be made to the Manufacturers Literature in Section 7 of this
Manual. Attention is drawn to this, where relevant.
The following notes should be borne in mind when consulting these charts and help
sheets.
The charts assume that the mechanical and associated electrical services to which they
refer have been commissioned properly and run without significant faults for a reasonable
period since the commissioning stage, i.e. the design settings were initially correct and the
plant is the correct size for its application.
Any repeated faults during the Warranty period should be referred to G.T. Ranby Ltd.
for attention and rectification.
Plant settings should not be altered as the balance of the complete systems(s) can be
affected, resulting in a costly re-balancing operation. Only competent engineers should carry
out re-balancing/commissioning.
The fault finding tables have been prepared in a logical sequence, with the most likely
faults first, progressing to the least likely problems. It should be noted that most faults are
electrical or control based and these should be thoroughly investigated first (unless there is an
apparent total failure of a piece of plant).
Always approach a problem with an open mind and be as logical as possible in your
procedure.
All problems, and materials used, should be entered in a log book. This will assist
with future planning and cost budgeting exercises.
The following sequence of checks should be followed for tracing faults on plant which
fails to function normally.
18
November 1999
Meridian Point ("aJe
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Cont/--.WARNING - Electrical checks should only be attempted by qualified or competent

personnel.
3 : 7 . 2 - H o t W a t e r Heater
Refer to the Fault Finding Chart, Section 9.3. on page 14 of the Manuthcturers
Literature in Section 7 of this Manual.
3:7.3 - H. W.S. Circulation P u m p
3:7.4.1 - Local isolator switched ON

3:7.4.2 - Check the valves on the inlet and outlet of the pump are open.
3:7.4.3 - Supply fuse blown - test the motor and external wiring and replace fuses when
the fault is repaired.
Also refer to the Generic fault Finding Charts in Section 3:7.6 & 3:7.7 and the Fault
Finding Chart on the last page (20) of the Manufacturers l.iterature in Section 7 of this Manual.
19
November 1999
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Cont/--3:7.4 - G E N E R I C P U M P F A U L T S
Ref.
1
~ymptom
Will not start
Possible Cause
Lock stop closed
Recommended Action
Reset
Motor Isolated
Check panel switches & local isolators
Pump not selected
Check selection on the control panel and

at the BMS
Motor not switched on, interlc

holding the pump out
Low Duty
Timer programmed Off
Reset timer to the required operation
Overload tripped
Reset the overload and check setting

Check running current
Fuse/Circuit brcaker open
Replace with a fuse of the correct size or

make the circuit breaker after checking
terminals in the panel, motor and wiring
continuity
Contactor fault
Coil burnt o u t - check and replace if

necessary
High resistance contact on contactor
causing repeated overload/fuse failure.
Check and replace if necessary
Strainer blocked
Isolate strainer, check and clean
System regulating/isolating vah

partly closed
Low pump speed
High Duty
High Pump Speed

System out of balance
20
)
.Vovember 1999
Check interlocks in control circuit
Check system isolation/regulating valves

in conjunction with commissioning data
in Section 8
Check the belt drive for wear and
slippage
Check speed controller (if fitted)
Check speed controller (if fitted)
Check system isolation/regulating valves
in coniunction with commissioning data
in Section 8
Cont/--Page 27 ~(49
Mechanical Services
Meridian Point ("aft,
ContJ--3:7.5 - G E N E R I C E L E C T R I C M O T O R F A U L T S
NOTE - All electrical checks and test must be carried out by, or under the supervision of.
experienced and qualified personnel. Operatives should always work safely and isolate electrical
supplies before exposing terminals.
Ref.
1
Fault
Motor lhils to start
Possible Cause
Blown or detective primary fuscs
Blown or defective secondary

thses
R e c o m m e n d e d Action
Check voltage across all phases above disconnect
switch.
('hock voltage below all fuses (all phases) with
disconnect switch closed.
()pen control circuit
Overload trips arc open. Press resct button
Defective holding coil in magnetic

switch (starter if fitted)
control circuits
Push start button and allwx sufficient time tbr

operation of time delay, if used. then check voltage
across magnetic holding coil. If correct voltage is
measured coil is dcfcctivc. If no voltage is measured
control circuit is open.
Make visual inspection of all connections in control
circuit.
Magnetic switch closes (starter if

fitted) or poor switch contact.
()pen manual disconnect switch by hand and examine

contactors and springs.
Open circuit in control panel
Check voltage at terminals.
Open circuit in leads to motor
Check voltage at leads in outlet box.
Leads improperly connected
Check lead numbers and connections
I.o,,~, or incorrect voltage
Check voltage at terminals in the control panel and at

motor leads in outlet box.
Incorrect voltage at motor
Check for proper lead connections at motor, compare

with connection diagram on motor.
Overload-Mechanical i.e. pump

motor
Chcck impeller setting. Check flow rate against pump

capacity and head.
Inadcquate ventilation
Ensure there is an adequate supply of fresh air. Check

air blast through the motor by l~eling air discharge at
the bottom of the motor
Overload
Check load with an ammeter.
Unbalanced supply ',oltage
Check supply voltage ~,ith a voltmeter.
Worn thrust bearing
Remove dust cover, rotate motor by hand and make

visual examination of balls and races.
I'lcctrical mfisc
Worn motors are electrically noisy during the start up

~criod. ]'his noise should diminish a_s the motor reaches
full speed.
Loose or poor connection in
Motor thils to run

up to speed
Motor runs hot
Motor noisy
21
)
November 1999
Page 28 of 49
Mechanical Services
7he Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ('afe
SECTION 4
MAINTENANCE ROUTINES
&
SPARES
November 1999
Page 29 o./49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ('aJi,
MAINTENANCE
ROUTINES
4:1 - INTRODUCTION
Listed on the following pages are the items of plant requiring maintenance at regular
intervals and an outline of the operation required. For details of the operations involved refer
to both the Schedules and the Manufacturers Literature.
HOT WAI"ER SERVICE HEATER
it is recommended that servicing contracts be taken out with specialists for the
following plant.
HOT WATER SERVICE HEATER - Manufacturer or equal
It is assumed that the Operator has the required level of Technical Staffing and
competence to carry out the Maintenance and Inspection procedures which are not
specifically covered in this Manual. A good maintenance programme will significantly reduce
trouble shooting problems.
Publications are readily available from HMSO Bookshops and the Health & Safety
Executive to cover the safe operation & maintenance of plant and equipment.
The following maintenance sheets are intended to be a guide only for the building
owner/operator to develop a maintenance programme utilising in house staff and/or external
maintenance companies. The periods are indicative only and should be developed, based on
experience, by the Operator depending on operating requirements, plant and equipment
running times and local conditions.
A standard chart is attached at the end of this section for the planning of preventative
maintenance. This should be filled in with the name of each item of plant and a week
identified when each maintenance function should be carried out. When the operation has
been carried out it should be marked off.
Cont/---
22
)
November 1999
Page 30 o f 49
:t4echanical Services
lhe Millennium Dome
Cont/--4:2 - MAINTENANCE F R E Q U E N C Y TABLE

The table below shows the frequency and the following sheets indicate the procedures to be
followed. As with the periods, experience will expand the operators knowledge of the work to
be carried out.
~1
Equipment Weekly!:i!::i~~;::: Three

Monthly :
Electric Motors
General Pipework
~ii~
:
Valves
~i~i:!~::l
Insulation
i/i;i~:~&:i::~ Mountings
Hot Water Heater
~::: :~i:.Xi~:::
: =:
::, ;:~'":'
:i/':
i?d:::
::::::~:::: '
:i:::::*,~:;:;
........... :::::::
X
:~!" : X:
26
)
A'ovember 1999
: ~ i ~.:
i!~/:i::i:::':~i
kC*:
~ 'if,:;:};:~
~:~~''
' ~'
Yearly
x
X
X
X
:
~,z:,:: ......
:
':
Cont/--Page 31 o f 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Cont/--4:3 - E L E C T R I C M O T O R S
Monthly
1
Check all motors for smooth running and listen for any signs of bearing wear.
Check for leaks. Replace seals if necessary

Inspect and turn standby motors either by hand or electrically. This ensures the weight
applied to the shaft is relocated on a regular basis.
Annually
l
Blow out all motors, except totally enclosed type, with compressed air to remove dust
and dirt.
W a r n i n g - D o not use pure oxygen as this may react with grease or oil and
cause spontaneous combustion.
Ensure that all flexible conduit connections are sound and all terminal lock nuts are
secure
Inspect motors in damp positions or have difficult access.
Carry out electrical insulation test on both motor and windings.
Check that slip rings or commutators are not unduly worn
Examine brushes for wear, see that they are true and free on their holders. Wipe off
any deposit or carbon dust and check for freedom from arcing.
Check the operation of centrifugally operated switches (where fitted) or resistance and
capacitor start motors. Check contacts for undue wear.
Check tbr signs of overheating of, and liquid leakage from, electrolyte capacitors
(where fitted), to capacitor start motors.
Examine starters and contactors for cleanliness.
NOTE Motors will operate satisfactorily in an ambient temperature range o f - I 0~ to 40~

and at altitudes up to 1,000 metres above sea level. However motor windings should not
exceed 40~ above ambient for 2 pole motors; 50~ for 4 pole motors and 60~ for 6 & 8
pole motors.
Conff---
24
)
November 1999
Page 32 0f49
Mechanical Services
lTw Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ('q/e
Cont/--4:4 - G E N E R A L
PIPEWORK
Six M o n t h l y
Inspect all pipework, valves, stopcocks, air vents, drain valves & check valves for leaks,
1
defects or malfunctions. Rectify if possible, or note for early attention.

Check all storage overflows for discharge, replace washer or adjust ball float valves to
rectify. Ensure that the float arm moves easily and that the valve opens and shuts off
correctly.
Inspect taps fbr leaks and replace washer as required.
Visually check all pipe hangers and supports.
Check insulation for signs of staining which may be evidence of system leakage.
Check condition of all flexible pipe connections.
Clean all strainers, replace damaged strainer elements and worn seals.
Check all air vent cocks, and manually release any air trapped in system.
Check operation of all flushing valves, ensure proper shut off is achieved.
YEARLY
1
Tighten all pipe supports.
2
Clean, de-rust and repaint all ferrous metalwork as required.
Operate all normally open valves and stopcocks. Valves should be fully closed, (carefully
note number of turns to close, so that valve can be reset to original position), then tully
opened. If stiff, repeat operation until clear, then return valve to original position.
Valves installed specifically |br regulating purposes only should not be adjusted unless
alterations or additions are made to the pipework, in which case the system should be recommissioned.
Rectify any leaking glands that may result from operation valves as in previous paragraph.
Lubricate valves if required.
Check all anchor points and guide assemblies for security of fixings.
Cont/---
25
November 1999
Page 33 of 49
Mechanical Services
7"he Millennium Dome
Cont/--4:5 - VALVES
All valves have been tested initially with cold water by the manufacturer and have been
subjected to further tests during the installation. For details on the hydraulic tests refer to
Section 6.
Valve gland packings tend to soften when subjected to heat. It is therefore recommended that
gland packing nuts should be tightened after a f~ewhours on temperature, as this will ensure a
much longer life from the packing and a more effective seal.
Wheel valves are intended to be operated by the wheel with which they are fitted and the use
of wheel spanners should always be avoided in case of emergency such as a valve having
seized. Excessive force in closing a valve often results in rupture of the seating surfaces,
particularly in the case of renewable disk valves.
Valves with gland packings should be periodically inspected to check that the pressure seal is
being maintained. At the first sign of leakage the gland should be adjusted to add further
compression to the packing.
It is always advisable to carry, in stock, replacement gland packings so that the stuffing box
can be either topped up or completely repacked as necessary.
All valves must be operated on a regular basis to ensure that they are free to operate and to
minimise any tendency towards sticking.
All ball float valves should be checked regularly to ensure that the float arm moves freely and
easily. Check to ensure that the valve body opens and closes correctly.
Cont/---
26
November 1999
Page 34 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
A,Ieridian Point ('aJb
Cont/--4:6 - I N S U L A T I O N
Annually
Inspect the insulation for the following defects:-
. Water absorption - this could be caused by leaks from adjacent pipework, or by

condensation, in conjunction with damage to vapour seal.
. Cracks - this could occur in rigid finishes if the ductwork or pipe supports have
become slack or misaligned, allowing the ductwork to sag.
. Crushing - this is a c o m m o n defect and is invariably caused by pipes being used as
walkways. Compression of the insulation should be avoided as far as possible since it
reduces the thermal efficiency. Repair as necessary.
Cont/---
27
)
:Vovember1999
Page 35 0[49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ( "ale
Cont/--4:7 - M O U N T I N G S
Monthly
1. Check for slackness in nuts, screws, and bolts. Retighten as necessary.
. Check all bolts tbr corrosion. Replace any bolts that show signs of corrosion, or where
corrosion of the threads has made the nut a loose fit.
. Lubricate exposed screw heads to prevent corrosion and facilitate the removal of plant Ibr
overhaul and repair.
4. Inspect anti-vibration mountings for permanent set. (In metal springs).
5.
Inspect rubber blocks and mat for shearing or cracking under load.
6. If any mountings are suspect, check plant alignment and the alignment of duct and/or
pipe connections.
. Renew anti-vibration mountings as a matched set and ensure that the correct type of
mounting is used.
Conff---
28
)
November 1999
Page 36 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Cont/--4:8 - H.W.S. C I R C U L A T I O N P U M P
WARNING
N E V E R RUN A P U M P W I T H O U T W A T E R IN IT
N E V E R RUN A P U M P W I T H T H E S U C T I O N V A L V E C L O S E D
DISCONNECT~ISOLATE THE ELECTRICAL SUPPLY BEFORE
C A R R Y I N G OUT M A I N T E N A N C E
Weekly
1 Inspect the pump pipe connections, isolating valves, flexible connections, strainers etc. to
ensure there are no water leaks.
2
Check that the motor and pump bearings are not running excessively hot. For details, refer
to the Maintenance Sheet 4:4 on electric motors.
Check that the motor and pump are not running unusually noisy.
If any abnormal condition is noted because of the above inspections stop the pump and
investigate.
Yearly
1
Inspect pump and motor casings and clean.
2
Inspect the motor electrical terminals and tighten as required.
Check the motor full load running current and the motor insulation.
Check the condition of the electrical flexible connections.
Cont/---
29
)
November 1999
Page 37 o['49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point (Tafe
Cont/--4:9 - HOT W A T E R SERVICE H E A T E R
Refer to the Maintenance Requirements, Section 8.0, on Page 1 i of the manufacturers

I,iterature in Section 7 of this Manual.
Weekly
1
Check that there is no discharge from the Temperature & Pressure and Expansion
Relief Valves.
Check that water temperature is correct (60~
Monthly
3
Check and recharge the air volume in the unit as necessary. Refer to Section 7.4,
Page l 1, of the Manufacturers I,iterature.
Yearly
Clean the strainer in the Cold Water Combination Valve.
Check and descale the Immersion Heaters and thermostat pocket as necessary.
Check the operation of the Temperature & Pressure and Expansion Relief Valves.
Check the operation of the thermostat and check all electrical connections tbr
tightness.
Cont/---
30
A'ovember 1999
Page 38 oj49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point Cain,
Cont/---
4:10 - SPARES P O L I C Y
4:10.1 - C a t e g o r i e s
Within the context of this manual spares are deemed to be the replacement components
required during the life of the installation due to wear or failure.
Spares can be divided two primary categories, those to be carried 'in house' at all times and
those to be bought as and when the need arises. These are termed 'held' and 'non-held' spares
respectively.
4:10.2 - Exact Requirements
The demarcation between 'held' and 'non-held" spares depends on a number of factors
including management and capital investment policy, budgetary constraints, availability,
service priorities etc. It is therefore, outside the scope of this manual to give a precise list of
spares.
Also as previously stated one of the main needs for spares will arise through component
failure which can not be forecast.
Due to these reasons this manual can only give advice and guidance to assist in the
lbrmulation of a spares policy.
4:10.3 - Spares Policy
The stock of spares should be based upon a policy decision. The stock of spares will be
dependant upon the degree of 'in-house' maintenance that is undertaken, the 'sub-letting' of
service contracts and the policy of the building owners purchasing department.
The following is offered for assistance in selecting the correct balance.
a)
Identit:y the consumables that will be necessary tbr day to day and week to week
maintenance. These include such items as lubricants, bulbs, fuses, relays, water
treatment chemicals etc. All of these are necessary and only time will give the rate of
consumption.
b)
Identify the equipment that will give the most trouble to most people or cause high
running costs during 'down time'. Then obtain from equipment manufacturers a list of
spares (if not contained within this manual), particularly the items which they consider
vulnerable and are not 'off the shelf" items. Add these to the list(s) within Section
4:11 of this manual.
Cont/---
31
,Vovember 1999
Page 39 oJ 49
Mechanical Services
Meridian Point Care
Cont/---
c)
Check, when buying spares of any kind, if there is a limited shell' life and/or limiting
storage temperature or ventilation requirement. Consider purchases accordingly.
d)
Initially purchase direct from the supplier or manufacturer if a proprietary item, but in
the long term investigate alternative sources of supply as cost savings can probably be
made.
e)
Once initial supplies have been selected allocate a suitable storage area. Always
ensure that :1) A stores procedure is adopted so that usage can be monitored for economic buying
and restocking.
2) High value and 'desirable' items are kept under lock and key.
3) An inventory is taken 3 or 4 times a year and the condition of the stock examined
on each occasion.
f)
Spares should be held of the fbllowing items that are considered as a minimum.
1)
2)
3)
4)
One size for each different set of pump drive belts.

Replacement pump for each pressurisation set.
Six Months supply of appropriate water treatment chemicals.
General cleaning materials, red oxide paint, black bitumastic paint, white spirit,
cleaning rags etc.
5) Vacuum cleaner
g)
Maintenance contracts should be arranged for specialist items of equipment.
Cont/---
32
J
November 1999
Page 40 of 49
Meridian Point (.'aJe
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Cont/--4: l I - R E C O M M E N D E D SPARES
NOTE - all prices are ex works, exclude V.A.T. and are current as noted on each
schedule.
4:11.1 - H o t W a t e r S e r v i c e H e a t e r
No.
Off
1
1
Item
Reference
Immersion Heater
Pressure Reducing Cartridgc
(for Cold water Combination valve)
Expansion Valve Cartridge
(for Cold water Combina_tion valve)
Combined Thermostat/Thermal Cut-out
(Rectangular Blue Cap)
OR
(Round Black Cap)
95 606 920
95 605 824
Cost s
95 605 825
95 612 209
95 612 599
33
)
.Vovember 1999
Page 41 oj49
Mechanical Services
7"he Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ("aje
SECTION 5
SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT
A"ovember 1999
Page 42 oj+49
'~
Mechanical Services
7he Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ('ale
5:1 - INTRODUCTION
]'his Section gives technical details for all major items of plant and equipment, name
and address of the Manulhcturer, and Supplier where applicable. Sundry items such as valves,
thermometers, pipelines, gauges etc. are not included as these can readily be identified and
replacements obtained from local wholesalers and trade distributors.
Manufacturers or Suppliers work Reference Numbers and/or Serial Numbers are also
given where known to assist in identification of equipment or plant.
It is not the intention of this Section to provide a full Technical Specification of the
items supplied. This can be obtained if required, by reference to Section 7 or direct from the
manufacturer.
The performance details given in this Section are based on the design or order
information. Commissioning results, contained in Section 6, should be referred to for actual
performance details.
34
November 1999
Cont/--Page 43 ~(49
Mechanical Services
lhe Millennium Dome
Meridian I'oint ('afe
Cont/--5:2 - H O T W A T E R S E R V I C E C I R C U L A T I N G
PUMP
MODEL - UPS 15-50B
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY - 240/I/50
M A N U F A C T U R E R :Grtmdfos Pumps I,td.,

Grovebury Road,
I~eighton Buzzard,
Bedfordshire LU7 8TL
Tel. 0525-850000
Fax. 0525-850011
SUPPLIER :B.S.S. I,td.

Cobden Street,
Leicester LEI 2LB
Tel. 0116-253 1271
Fax. 0116-253 2456
35
)
November 1999
Cont/--Page 44 0.['49
Mechanical Services
lhe Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ( "aJi,
Con~--5:3 - H.W.S.
HEATER
M O D E L - 'Megaflo' 300 DD
DUTY - 3 x 3.0 kW elements
ELECTRICAL SUPPLY - 240/1/50
MANUFACTURER :t Ieatrae Sadia I Ieating Ltd.

Hurricane way
Norwich NR6 6EA
Tel. 01603-420220
Fax. 01603-420229
36
)
November 1999
Page 45 of 49
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
Meridian Point ("ale
SECTION 6
TEST CERTIFICATES
COMMISSIONING REPORTS
November 1999
Page 46 of 49
~oos
This]isto certify that the Pumps/Stations he! been fully commissioned, In complia
p Technology Ltd company policy, and left in 8ood working ordel,
~e
3 Reke~t;Road
.
~Iel~n Mobrsy
LEI4, 3DU
~lg." ]
Millennium Dome
Mini Ou,zz]ers x 1l
-on
'TECHNOLOGY LTD
S~rvh Englnetr Gordon l-~scock
ACCEI~'ED ON BEHALF OF THE ~ 0 ~
Title
.............................................
The ~ ,artsn[yi~riod atL,'tSfrom thc datc of commissioning for a period of one year and
C~Vel! ptttSand labour only.

1
rr take this opportunity to thank you for your c~zstom Rod hope that we c . ~ be of
[L~815trace in the futurc,
For trouble free operation we strongly recommend that a maintenance

schedule be devised. If you have not already dLscussed riffs with u~ we
would bo happj, tO advise and quote #]'orthe work.
12 Youngl Industrial Ee~te, AldlrmMton, BerkL FIG)" 4PW

Toh 01189 6;i166g
FIBs 01189 821686
Re0~llrsd In En011ndNo. 2728095
Ft~6~eTe
o4.12.2eee
~4a26
P.
***ENO***
p.#tton l~'.xii~i~.g +qcr~,ic=+ Lt,mtcd
B u i l d i n g 5era'ices
t~['
9: : $ T . ~ b i . J ~ , l
Emgh~cex'~
["~0
:.:,3ttu~?..h;+m .NGI 37;I3

-r+-L 0115 956 ~211
~a.x
9 t : 6 ~s6 O~.'O
E-,'-'-.~:: s:"Ic'~:~:"~n;'~ u~ u'.
-'
4
We hereby ce~ify :hat the fotlowing systems:-
Po**.
H~ ~4 ~ ! ~ ....L b!+~ + t z ~
....
. .....
J~ ~~s
............................................
. ......
,,
..........
.+,..,,+..
.'+...........................................
....
9 ............
9 .........
,.,+-
.....
at
...............
.,,..+.
17"+++ ~
,- ....
+..
9 ......
. ....
. ....
- ............
.........
......................
......
. ......
,..
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
...+
........
,,.,
...............
- .....
. ....
. . . . . . . . .
. ....
....
. .....
b.a~'e "~e-+nc[=m~r add chlonnated in accordance -,v'~h HS(O)70
.
Signed
........9.............~ ;br
" ......................
..b .....
- ..............
Signed ...... .+ ,
D+,+
Nutr
~:.~
'q~-
...............
It i.~ m d~r 'n '.~,+~s" of the. cl},x~: to obv.~i.,'- samples o +. at[ s.vstc2J.S t+e: ~ndr
~t~al~~l.~
[.,tit.3.... +, ~ j .
:-~4."
+.=..=-.=
:.
:L", ' .",.',~
' l$09002 !1 ~'.,l

t,,.
:$G 11~1
I.
~.V
.~i~',l,sun
,.~[.,.,'t+,t,m++
P W
,-[,+~n
IP
rt+m~,!l
+','[
[..
~+t
t~
,+_-,.::.r.;~,~>'
" I+'1 e t ' l r N ~ t';'/~
~-~-'~l_l,.i-:-:~
:- .~ 2,;.,
l~"
"
ri-";;;:-';
" ;,!"
....L:'-.
",;~',JI
E'~,
~1! '~.
9 , 9 ,o
.~:~:~.-:-:
. _.~
,,.,
._
. i ..
.;.'.',
..
!i,i!
:
Ii
!'
....
~i~,
:i
"
"
!
_
.u
""i~"
-7.' ~
;
' - ' ~ ' ~
'
s
-
.__.A..~--
~.~.......~
"'~
I ~
....----.----
-..--
---
i
I
i,
I
I
,,
.I
'~
I
X
kJ
"
'-"
~
I
I
'
"i
lti
--~
i
4
...'.
IB
:
ll,'.-',,.,..,,.
~.r...._......~
~",
i
.s
.~
-~
i ',IIU
]
%'.
.-=
"~
'l
ANSUL R-1011R-102 FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEMS

INSTALLATION DESIGN SHEET
CUSTOMER
~,~,T~5
A U T H O R I Z E D ANSUL DISTRIBUTOR
...Ce~J~Ts
L - r O ..... NAME
STnEET
s,,E~,
AFPS L ~ . ' /
s'-'r&,_~='-r
c,rY.STATE, Z,P ~
t.i#1~.i~I~
l~.i.~"i~']"."Ti~'22> I L ~"
CITY. SI"ATE & ZIP
CNA'T~/,a, r~
i<~-~-1-
FILL IN ALL APPROPRIATE DATA BELOW AND C A R E F U L L Y SKETCH HAZARD LAYOUT ON INSIDE
SYSTEM
Model(s) and serialnumbers
-~
A'~SK_~ '(_. ~.,-L{~. -
~mber of nozzles and Part No.
J't~v/ t
Nu,n~er ot delecto,(s) a.~ deoree raling

Energy shut-off devices -- type and size
1 ~.~
~
"~,.
C~Oe.-L..L~-T~ ~:~/3"T'I,..%--'1~
~
I~J
~O
[~,~
~'~TI~
Fu
"~t~'-]-L--~0
Other accessory equipment provided (pullstalion,eleclricswitches, elc.) and location

_ 7- ,~ ~OL"I"FP-.e~'- ~ I ' V C
~ ~'-~
COOKING/VENTILATING
} "~
~y
IO'T'i-|L--~S
P ~ LL_ ..~"~r'i.~'TIc~
EQUIPMENT
Hood size and plenum size
~(:~'~
~-
i'~"~
I.| O ( ~
~ ~ L 3
.~, "-
I~t~j.
~'~_~
Maximum temperature determined at detector location(s)
Cooking
Appliances and size of cooking surface. (NOTE: List appliances from lelt to right and indicate those being
protected.)
3.
6.
COMMENTS
Ik
MechanicMillenniumServiceSDome
alThe
Meridian Point ("a/i'
SECTION 7
MANUFACTURERS LITERATURE
November 1999
Page 47 o.[49
Installation Manual
~0
Fitting and using the Megaflo unvented mains

pressure water heater
E
r~
HF.ATRA[ SADIA
Megaflo
t
Megaflo
)
9
9
C3
H[ATRA[ SADLA
Megaflo
Q
0
HEATRAE.r
IA
Megaflo
9
0
tD
HEATRAE SADIA
Megaflo
megafl6
INSTALLATIONAND USERINTRUCTIONS
PLEASELEAVETHIS MANUALWITH THE UNIT FOR FUTUREREFERENCE
CONTENTS
SECTION
1.0
INTRODUCTION
"PAGE
2.0
GENERALR E Q U I R E M E N T S
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
2.1
COMPONENTCHECK LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
2.2
SITINGTHE MEGAFLO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
2.3
WATERSUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4
OUTLET/TERMINALFITTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3
3.0
INSTALLATION- GENERAL
3.1
PIPE FITTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2
COLDWATER SUPPLY
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
3.3
COLDWATER COMBINATIONVALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
3.4
DRAINTAP. . . . . . . . . . .
5
3.5
OUTLETPIPEWORK . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
3.6
TUNDISHAND DISCHARGEPIPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5
3.7
SECONDARYCIRCULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
3.8
WARNINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.0
INSTALLATION- DIRECT (D, DD & DDD) UNITS
4.1
FITTINGTHE IMMERSION HEATER(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
4.2
WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.0
INSTALLATION- INDIRECT (CL) UNITS
5.1
BOILERSELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7
5.2
INDIRECTTHERMAL CUT-OUTAND
2-PORT MOTORISEDVALVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
5.3
WIRING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4
HEATINGSYSTEM CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
5.5
IMMERSIONHEATER(S) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
6.0
COMMISSIONING
6.1
FILLING THE MEGAFLOWITH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
6.2
CHECK THE OPERATIONOF THE SAFETYVALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
6.3
DIRECT UNITS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4
INDIRECT UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
7.0
USERINSTRUCTIONS
7.1
WARNINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
7.2
TEMPERATURE CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
7.3
FLOW PERFORMANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
7.4
OPERATIONAL FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11
8.0
MAINTENANCE
8.1
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
8.2
CHECK OPERATION OF SAFETYVALVES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
8.3
CLEAN THE STRAINER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
8.4
DRAINING THE MEGAFLO UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
8.5
DESCALING IMMERSION HEATER(S). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
8.6
REFILLING SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
9.0
~ U ~ FINDING AND SERVICING
9.1
IMPORTANT NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
9.2
SPARE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13
9.3
FAULT FINDING CHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
14
10.0 GUARANTEE
10.1 WARNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BackCover
10.2 GUARANTEETERMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Back Cover
1.0 Introduction
The Megaflo is an unvented type water heater.
This means that it can be supplied directly from
I the mains supply to the property without the
need for separate feed cisterns or vent pipes. It is
supplied complete with all its necessary inlet and
safety controls, electric immersion heater(s) and,
for indirect units, a cylinder thermostat, thermal
cut-out and 2-Port motorised valve.
Generally its pressure and flowrate performance
will far exceed that from a comparable vented
system, thermal store, multipoint instantaneous
gas heater or combination boiler.
The Megaflo requires no separate expansion
vessel as any expanded water is accommodated
within an internal air volume.
2.0 General Requirements

IMPORTANT : PLEASEREADAND UNDERSTAND THESE INSTRUCTIONS BEFORE
INSTALLING THE MEGAFLOWATER HEATER.
INCORRECT INSTALLATIONMAY INVALIDATE
GUARANTEE.
THE MEGAFLO MUST BE INSTALLED BY A
COMPETENT INSTALLER IN ACCORDANCE
WITH BUILDING REGULATIONG3.
2.1 COMPONENT CHECK LIST
Betore commencing installation check that all
the components for your Megaflo unit are
contained in the package. The following
components are supplied as standard with
your Megaflo unit :
9 Immersion heater (s)
9 Cold Water Combination Valve (comprises
Pressure Reducing Valve, Balanced Pressure
Cold Water Connection, Check Valve and
Expansion Relief Valve).
9 Factory fitted Temperature/Pressure Relief
Valve (set at 90~
9 Tundish (included in Cold Water Combination Valve pack)
9 Factory fitted Indirect Thermostat and
Thermal Cut-out (CL units only)
9 2-Port Motorised Valve (CL units only)
2.2 SITING THE MEGAFLO(see Diagram 1)

The Megaflo unit must be installed vertically.
It can be placed anywhere convenient
provided the discharge pipe(s) from its safety
valves can be correctly installed. Areas that
are subject to freezing must be avoided. The
unit is designed to be floor standing, how-
ever, a wall mounting bracket is available for

the 70, 125, and 145 litre models (refer
Diagram 10). Ensure that the floor or wall is
of sufficient strength to support the "full"
weight of the unit (refer to charts on page
15 for unit weights). Pipe runs should be
kept as short as possible for maximum
economy. Access to associated controls,
.immersion heaters and indirect controls
should be possible for servicing and maintenance of the system.
2.3 WATERSUPPLY
Bear in mind that the mains water supply to
the property wilt be supplying both the hot
and cold water requirements simultaneously. It is recommended that the maximum water demand be assessed and the
water supply be checked to ensure this
demand can be satisfactorily met.
NOTE A high mains water pressure will not
always guarantee high flow rates.
Wherever possible the main supply pipe
should be in 22ram. We suggest that the
minimum supply requirements should be 1.5
bar pressure and 20 litres per minute
flowrate. At these values outlet flowrates
may be poor if several outlets are used
simultaneously, the higher the available
pressure and flowrate the better the system
performance will be.
The Megaflo has an operating pressure of 3
bar which is controlled by the Cold Water
Combination Valve. The Cold Water Combination Valve can be connected to a maximum mains supply pressure of 16 bar.
2.4 OUTLET/TERMINALFITTINGS (TAPS,ETC.)

The Megaflo can be used in conjunction
with most types of terminal fittings. It is
advantageous in many mixer showers to
have balanced hot and cold water supplies,
in these instances the Balanced Pressure
Cold Water connection on the Cold Water
Combination Valve should be used. Outlets
situated higher than the Megaflo unit will
give outlet pressures lower than that at the
heater, a lOre height difference will result in
a 1 bar pressure reduction at the outlet
fitting.
Diagram 1: Typical Megaflo Installation

HOTWATEROUTLET
TEMPERATUREAND
PRESSURERELIEFVALVE
CYLINDERTHERMOSTAT
AND THERMALCUT-OUT
HEATING ELEMENT
--~
2 PORTMOTORISED
VALVE
Z
I-LU
I:E
5
0
._1
II
INLET
COLD WATEI~ppoSITE
(SHOWN ON
SIDE FOR CLARITY)
'CL' Indirect Model Illusiroted
3.0 INSTALLATION GENERAL(see Diagram 2)
tion is supplied with a blanking plug should it

not be required.
3.4 DRAIN TAP

) 3.1 PIPE FITTINGS
A suitable draining tap should be installed in
the cold water supply to the Megaflo unit
As all the pipes on the Megaflo are in
between the Cold Water Combination Valve
Stainless Steel brazing or soldering is
difficult, therefore use 22mm COMPRESSION
and the heater at as low a level as possible
FITTINGS when connecting to the Megaflo
(~e Diagram 2). It is recommended that the
pipes.
outlet point of the drain pipe work be at least
1 metre below the level of the heater (this
"PUSH FIT" TYPE FITTINGS MUST NOT BE
can
be achieved by attaching a hose pipe to
USED FOR CONNECTION TO THE MEGAFLO
the drain tap outlet spigot).
PIPES. However, there is no reason why, if
technically suitable, these cannot be em3.5 OUTLET PIPEWORK
ployed elsewhere in the system.
If solder type fittings are used in the supply
Ideally the pipework from the Megaflo to the
to the Megaflo Cold Water Combination Valve
outlet fittings should be in 22ram pipe with
the use of self-cleaning fluxes should be
short runs of 15mm pipe to showers and
avoided as they can impair the operation of
basin taps. Small bore pipe can also be used
the valve.
to suit some taps, but runs should be of
)
minimum length.
3.2 COLD WATER SUPPLY
A 22ram cold water supply is recommended, 3.6 TUNDISH AND DISCHARGE PIPE
however, if a 15ram (1/2") supply exists
It is a requirement of Building Regulation
which provides sufficient flow (see 2.3
G3 that any discharge from an unvented
above) this may be used. More flow noise
system is safely conveyed to where it is
may be experienced from small bore pipes
visible but will not cause danger to persons
due to the increased water velocity through
in or about the building.
them.
See Diagram 2 for fitting details.
A stopcock or servicing valve should be
The Tundish supplied and the discharge
incorporated in the cold water supply to
pipes should be fitted in accordance with the
enable the Megaflo unit and its associated
Requirements and Guidance Notes of
controls to be isolated and serviced.
Building Regulation G3. These are essentially as follows :
3.3 COLD WATER COMBINATION VALVE
G3 Requirement
(see Diagram 3)
i) Discharge pipe MUST terminate in a
The Cold Water Combination Valve can be
SAFE, VISIBLE position.
connected anywhere on the cold water
G3 Guidance
mains supply prior to the Megaflo unit. There
ii) Tundish should be within 500ram of the
is no requirement to site it close to the unit,
Temperature/Pressure Relief Valve and,
it can be located at a point where the mains
wherever possible, be in a visible posisupply enters the premises if this is more
tion.
convenient. However, ensure the discharge
from the Expansion Relief Valve can be
iii)Discharge pipe should have a vertical fall
correctly installed (see section 3.6 and
of at least 300mm from the Tundish.
Diagram 2).
iv) Minimum discharge pipe size should be
The Cold Water Combination Valve is deone pipe size larger (28ram) than the
signed to be installed as a complete oneTemperature/Pressure Relief Valve
piece unit, however, if required it can be
discharge port (22mm - 3/4" BSP).
installed as two separate valves, i.e. a
v) Maximum total equivalent hydraulic
Pressure Reducer/Strainer and an Expansion
resistance of the discharge pipe should
Relief Valve/Check Valve. Ensure that the
not exceed that of 9m of straight pipe.
Valve is installed with the direction of flow
NOTE a 28ram bend is equivalent to lm
arrows pointing towards the heater.
of straight pipe.
The Balanced Pressure Cold Water Connec-
Diagram 2: Typical Pipework Installation for Megaflo 6
22ram COLD WATER

PLAINS SUPPLY
HOT WATER SUPPLY
TO TAPS (22mmJ
22~
FLOW & RETURN

SHOWN ON
OPPOSITE SIDE
FOR CLARITY.
BOTTOM OF TUNDISH TO
FIRST BEND MUST BE A
MINIMUM OF 3OOmm
28n~t
TERP'JNATION TO BE
HAX]HUH OF 100ram
ABOVE GROUND LEVEL
.SECONDARY RETURN
POSITION (SEE DIAGRAM 4)
KEY TO FITTINGS
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
STOPCOCK.
COLD WATER COMBINATION VALVE.
DRAIN.
COHPRESSIONFITTING.
HEATINGELEMENT.
6.
7.
B.
9.
INDIRECTTHERMAL CONTROLS.
T & P RELIEF VALVE.
TUNDISH.
DISCHARGEPIPE (SEE SECTION &6).
vi) Discharge pipe should have a continuous

fall (minimum 1:200).
Information Sheet No. 33 available from the
British Board of Agrement gives further
advice on discharge pipe installation (contact 01923 662900).
3.7 SECONDARY CIRCULATION
If a secondary circulation system is required
it is recommended that it be connected to
the Megaflo as shown in Diagram 4 via a
Swept Tee joint (not supplied - available as
an accessory order Code No. 95 605 812).
The secondary return pipe should be in
15mm pipe and incorporate a check valve to
prevent backflow. A suitable WBS approved
bronze circulation pump will be required.
3.8 WARNINGS
i) Under no circumstances should the
factory fitted Temperature/Pressure
Relief Valve be removed other than by
Authorised Heatrae Sadia personnel. To
do so will invalidate any guarantee or
claim.
ii) The Cold Water Combination Valve must
be fitted to the mains water supply to
the Megaflo unit.
iii) No control or safety valves should be
tampered with.
iv) The discharge pipe should not be
blocked or used for any other purpose.
4.0 Installation - Direct (D,

DD and DDD units)
~4.1 FITTING THE IMMERSION HEATER(S)
The immersion heaters should be screwed
into the 1 3/4" BSP bosses on the side of
the Megaflo unit. Ensure the "O"-ring seals
are in place, DO NOT use any other type of
seal or sealant on the threads.
The 1 3/4" BSP thread is non-standard to
prevent the use of immersion heaters
without the necessary thermal cut-out fitted.
The immersion heaters should only be
replaced with authorised Heatrae Sadia
Megaflo spare parts.
The DDD models are supplied with three
immersion heaters and a 1 3/4" BSP blanking plug. This allows for flexibility of heat
input arrangements, eg. 3 x immersion
heaters in lower three bosses, blanked top
..
, . .
boss or 2 x immersion heaters and blanking

plug in lower bosses, 1 x immersion heater
in top boss. If an additional immersion heatel
is required order Part No. 95 606 920.
4.2 WIRING (see Diagram 5)
All electrical wiring should be carried out by

a competent electrician and be in accordance with the latest I.E.E. Wiring Regulations.
The immersion heater(s) should be wired in
accordance with Diagram 5 and the instructions supplied within the cap of the heater.
The immersion heaters MUST be earthed.
DO NOT operate the immersion heaters until
the Megaflo has been filled with water.
4.3 OPERATION
It is recommended that the immersion heater
thermostats are set to 60 - 65oC, however
they can be set between 10o and 70oC, The
thermostat incorporates a thermal cut-out
that will switch off the immersion heater in
the event of a thermostat failure. DO NOT
bypass the thermal cut-out in any circumstances.
5.0 Installation -Indirect (CL)

units
5.1 BOILER SELECTION
The Megaflo Indirect (CL) models are suitable
for use with most gas or oil fired boilers
compatible with unvented systems i.e. fitted
with a temperature control thermostat.
If in doubt consult the boiler manufacturer.
DO NOT use a coal or wood burning boiler as
these do not have adequate thermal control
for unrented systems.
The boiler used can either be a sealed
system or open vented type, maximum
primary circuit pressure 3 bar.
The primary flow from the boiler should be
pumped. Gravity circulation is not recommended due to poor heating performance.
The boiler flow temperature should be set at
a maximum of 90~
The boiler cannot be vented through the
Megaflo unit.
HEATRAE SADIA
Megaflo
" l
7 ,i~
~.:
Diagram 3: Cold Water Combination Valve
314" PRESSURE REDUCING

VALVE AND STRAINER
CARTRIDGE
~
~-
EXPANSION RELIEF VALVE CARTRIDGE
:314" EXPANSION PORT (BLANKED)
22mm COMPRESSION
CHECK VALVE (WITHIN HOUSING)
----4--
COLD MAINS ~
TO MEGAFL0
22mm COMPRESSION
BALANCED COLD WATER TAKE OFF
WITH CHECK VALVE (22mm COMPRESSION)
15mm EXPANSION
RELIEF OUTLET
Diagram 4:
Secondary circulation
Diagram 6:
Indirect Thermal Controls
~ EARTH SCREW
(REMOVE LABEL BEFORE USE)
RETURN FEED
15ramNON
RETURN VALVE
(NOT SUPPLIED)
~
,
MAINS IN
VIA COLD
WATER
COMBINATION
VALVE
~ l
~.~
THERMAL CUTOUT
22 x 22 x 15mm
SWEPT TEE
(NOT SUPPLIED)
RESET BUTTON
-~
/
~@
TO MEGAFLO
/~
~'I!.~T PIPE
Diagram 5:
Immersion heater wiring
THE~tIOSTAT- - - ~
THERMOSTAT---~
CABLE GRIP
FUSED (13A) MAINS SUPPLY
IJ
'~TERMINAL BLOCK
5.2 INDIRECT THERMAL CUT-OUT AND 2-PORT

MOTORISED VALVE
To comply with BBA regulations and to
prevent the Megaflo from overheating the 2Port motorised valve supplied MUST be fitted
to the primary flow to the indirect coil (see
Diagram 1).
5.3 WIRING
All electrical wiring should be carried out by a
competent electrician and being accordance
with the latest I.E.E. Wiring Regulations.
The Megaflo Indirect Thermostat and Thermal
Cut-out are factory pre-wired. The 2-Port
motorised valve supplied MUST be wired in
series with the Indirect controls such that the
power supply to the valve is interrupted
should either the Thermostat or Thermal Cutout operate. The Wiring Diagrams 7a or 7b
detail the wiring required between these
controls and the motorised valve. Wiring to
external controls is made via the terminal
block fitted. The cable should be routed
through the aperture in the terminal cover and
secured using the cable grip provided. The
Indirect Thermal Cut-out MUST NOT be
bypassed.
5.4 HEATINGSYSTEM CONTROLS
The controls provided with the Megaflo will
ensure the safe operation of the Megaflo
within a central heating system. Other
controls will be necessary to control the
space heating requirements and times that
the system is required to function, for
example see Diagrams 8 and 9. The Megaflo
is compatible with most heating controls,
examples of circuits are given in Diagrams 7a
and 7b. However, other systems may be
suitable, refer to the controls manufacturers' instructions, supplied with the controls
selected, for alternative system wiring
schemes.
5.5 IMMERSION HEATER(S)
The Megaflo indirect units are supplied with
either one or two immersion heaters, these
can be used as an alternative heat source
should the boiler supply need to be isolated
from the Megaflo unit.
The Megaflo immersion heater(s) should be
connected and wired in accordance with
Section 4.0 above.
6.0 Commissioning
6.1 FILLING THE MEGAFLOWITH WATER
Ensure that all fittings and immersion heaters
are correctly fitted and tightened.
i) Open a hot tap furthest from the
Megaflo.
ii) Open the mains stop cock to fill the unit.
. When water issues from the tap, allow to
run for a few minutes to flush through
any dirt or swarf, then close tap.
iii) Open successive hot taps to purge any
air from the system.
iv) Check all connections for leaks and
rectify as necessary.
6.2 CHECKTHE OPERATIONOF THE SAFETY
VALVES
i) Manually open, for a few seconds, the
Temperature and Pressure Relief Valve
situated on the Megaflo unit (see Dia
gram 2). Check water discharged runs
freely away through the tundish and
discharge pipework. Close valve, ensure
water flow stops and valve reseats
correctly.
ii) Repeat for the Expansion Valve situated
on the Cold Water Combination Valve
(see Diagram 3).
6.3 DIRECT UNITS
Switch on the electrical supply to the immersion heater(s) and allow the unit to heat up.
Check that the thermostat operates correctly.
Check that no water is discharged from either
the Expansion Valve or Temperature and
Pressure Relief Valve during the heating
cycle.
6.4 INDIRECT UNITS
Fill the indirect (primary) circuit following the
boiler manufacturer's commissioning instructions. To ensure the primary heating coil in
the Megaflo is filled the 2-Port motorised
valve (supplied) should be manually opened
by movingthe lever on the motor housing to
the FLUSHING ONLY setting. When the
primary circuit is full returnthe lever to the
NORMAL USE position. Switch on the boiler,
ensure the programmer is set to Domestic
Hot Water. Allow the Megaflo unit to heat up
and check that the indirect thermostat and 2Port motorised valve operate correctly. Check
that no water is discharged from either the
Expansion Valve or Temperature and Pressure
Relief Valve during the heating cycle.
Diagram 7a: 2 x 2 port valve system

IIECa,,~=~0 ( OHW ;
2 P(~T VkLV'E
t ~P'P'Ls I
CONTROL TERP~NAL NUHSER~G HAY Dff=FER

FROM THOSE SH0WN. R E F E R T 0
SUPPL~DWlTH
~STRUCTIONS
CONTROLS SELECTED,
> - - - - - t. ~
~ C T
COI~TR0(J
($UPPUEO RTTEO
2'd~E
~ .... .< --- ~,
9 F.~TH" ~ : - - "
UlRING q
FUSED
O ~'P)
HAI~S
SUPPLY
N
f
LF..r
htB. SOME VALVES MAY HAVE

A GREEN / YELLOW EARTH
N.B. FOR CLAR/TY THE EARTH5

HAVE BEEN OHITTED FROM THI~
DRAWING ALL EARTH TERYe~TIONS
MUST BE ~
BACX TO THE
MAINS EARTH SUPPLy VIA TERP~AL
) 0F THE ~ N G CENTRE.
'
2~RE
9 EARTH
3
2VlRE
9 EARTH
N.B. a 0OUEE POLE ~ 0 L A T I ~

~'CH
MUST BE INSTALLED IN
THE MAINS SUPPLy
-
STAT
HIEATINGI HTG ]
BOCJER
2 PORT ZONE
VALVE
Diagram 7b: Megaflo 2 port valve in conjuncton with a 3 port

mid-position valve
/1EI~AFI.0 ( 0HW )
2 PORT VALVE
[ + +
CONTROL T E R ~ N A L N U t ' I B E R 1 N G H A Y D f : F E R
F R O H T H O S E SHOWN. REFER TO ~ S T R U C ~ O N S
SUPPLIED ~ T H
IN~C"r
CONTItOIJ
CSUPPLJEOR T ' r ~
TO IIEC3,~0)
CONTROLS SELECTED.
PIt0~IC~I, IER
LN~
'J'l
liE. SOME VALVES HAy HAVE

A GREEN / YELLOW EARTH WIRE
'--,,-ISC~.AT1E
>--
2 v l ~ I.EA0
NB. F0R C L A R ~ THE EARTHS

HAVE BEEN 0P~TTEO FROM THIS
DRAWING. ALL EARTH TERMINATIONS
MUST BE UNKE0 BACK TO THE
HAIKS EARTH SUPPLy VIA TF-R~AL
OF THE ~
CENTR~
EARTH
NJ. A DOUBLE POLE ISOLATING
SWlTCH HUST BE INSTALLED IN
THE f'VUNS SUPPLY
HF..AI'N6 ( HTG )
3 PORT l i d P O ~ I O N
VALVE
10
PUMP
7.0 User Instructions
7.4 OPERATIONALFAULTS
Operational faults and their possible causes
are detailed in Section 9.3. It is recommended that faults should be checked by a
The air volume within the Megaflo unit will
periodically require recharging to ensure any
expanded water is accommodated within the
unit. A discharge of water INTERMITTENTLY
from the Expansion Relief Valve will indicate
the air volume has reduced to a point where it
can no longer accommodate the expansion.
To recharge the air volume :i) Turn off the water supply to the Megaflo
unit.
ii) Open nearest hot tap below the outlet
level of the Megaflo.
iii) Hold open the Temperature/Pressure
Relief Valve until water ceases to run
from the tap and gurgling noise at the
valve stops.
iv) Close Temperature/Pressure Relief Valve.
v) Turn on water supply to the Megaflo unit,
when water flows from the hot tap, close
tap.
vi) The air volume will be automatically
recharged as the unit refills.
If after following the above actions water still
discharges from the Expansion Relief Valve
further advice should be sought from a
7.1 WARNINGS
IF WATERISSUES FROM THE TEMPERAI
TURE/PRESSURE RELIEFVALVEON THE
MEGAFLOUNIT SWITCH OFF ELECTRICAL
SUPPLY TO THE IMMERSION HEATER(S)
(DIRECT UNITS) OR SHUT DOWN THE
BOILER (INDIRECT UNITS). DO NOT TURN
OFF THE WATERSUPPLY.CONTACTA
COMPETENT INSTALLERFOR UNVENTED
WATER HEATERSTO CHECKTHE SYSTEM.
DO NOT TAMPERWITH ANY OF THE SAFETY
VALVESFITTEDTO THE MEGAFLOSYSTEM,
IF A FAULTIS SUSPECTEDCONTACTA
COMPETENT INSTALLER.
7.2 TEMPERATURE CONTROL
IMMERSION HEATERS
The thermostat on the immersion heater(s)
can be set to control between 10~ and
70~ This will usually have been done during
installation. Adjustments can only be made
by removing the immersion heater cover, DO
NOT remove the cover without first switching
off the electrical supply. The temperature
adjustment is made by inserting a flat bladed
screwdriver in the slot in the disc on top of
the thermostat and rotating.
If in any doubt consult a competent electrician.
INDIRECT UNITS
Indirect units are fitted with an Indirect
Thermostat which controls a 2 Port motorised
8.0 Maintenance
valve and hence the temperature of the water
in the Megaflo unit. The thermostat can be
8.1 MAINTENANCEREQUIREMENTS
set to control between 10oC and 70oC, this
To ensure the continued optimum perforwill usually have been done during installamance of the Megaflo it should be regularly
tion. Adjustments can only be made by
maintained. This is of particular importance
removing the Indirect Thermal Control housing
in hard water areas or where the water
cover. DO NOT remove the cover without first
supply contains particulate matter. Mainteswitching off the electrical supply. Temperanance should be carried out by a competent
ture adjustment is made by rotating the
person and any replacement parts used
graduated knob until the selected temperature
should be authorised Heatrae Sadia Megaflo
aligns with the indicator mark.
spare parts. It is recommended that mainte7.3 FLOW PERFORMANCE
nance is carried out every 12 months and
includes the checks detailed in 8.2 and 8.3
When initially opening hot outlets a small
below.
flow may be noticed as pressures stabilise.
This is quite normal with unvented systems
In hard water areas consideration should be
and does not indicate a fault.
given to periodically descaling the immersion
heater elements. To do this the Megaflo unit
In some areas a cloudiness may be noticed
will need to be drained, 8.4 and 8.5 below
in the hot water. This is due to aeration of the
detail how to drain the unit and remove the
water, is quite normal and will quickly clear.
immersion heater(s).
Diagram 8: 2-port zone valve system (schematic)

ROOM THERttO$TAT
80I.ER
I ~ 1 tE c r
" ~~.~
.-ira,-
NOTE .- OBSERVE FLOW DI~CI'ION AJ~OW5 ON ALL VALVES
Diagram 9: 3-port mid-position valve system (schematic

PROGR~t~R
ROOe~ ~ S T A T
BOLER
'
IlIHfllllIJtlllll F*"
~0TE .- 01BSERVE FLOW DIRECI"tON ARROWS ~
12
ALL VALVES
8.2 CHECK OPERATIONOF SAFETY VALVES

Manually operate the Temperature and
Pressure Relief Valve for a few seconds.
Check water is discharged and that it flows
freely through the tundish and discharge
pipework. Check valve reseats correctly when
released.
NOTE The water discharged may be very
hot.
9
seal groove are clean and replace immersion

heater(s). DO NOT use any other type of se~
or sealant on the threads.
Rewire the immersion heater(s) in accordance with Diagram 5. Replace cover(s).
8.6 REFILLING SYSTEM
DO NOT switch on the immersion heater(s)
or boiler until the system has been compretely refilled.
Close the drain tap. With hot tap open, turn
on mains water supply. When water flows
from the hot tap allow to flow for a short
while to purge air and to flush through any
disturbed particles. Close hot tap and then
open successive hot taps in system to purge
any air. The electrical supply can now be
switched on.
Repeat the procedure for the Expansion Relief

Valve.
8.3 CLEAN THE STRAINER
The strainer is incorporated within the
Pressure Reducing Valve part of the Cold
Water Combination Valve (see Diagram 3). To
inspect and clean turn off the mains water
supply to the Megaflo unit and open the
lowest hot tap in the system to relieve the
system pressure. Unscrew the black cap
from the Pressure Reducing Valve and
'
remove.The strainer will be removed with the
cap, wash any particulate matter from the
9.1 IMPORTANT NOTES
strainer under clean running water. Replace
the cap assembly ensuring that the sealing
i) Servicing should only be carried out by a
ring is correctly fitted. Do not use any other
competent installer or by authorised
type of sealant. Close hot tap, open mains
Heatrae Sadia Service Engineers or
Agents.
stop cock and check for leaks.
8.4 DRAINING THE MEGAFLO UNIT
ii) Any Spare Parts used MUST be
authorised Heatrae Sadia Megaflo parts.
Switch off the electrical supply to the
immersion heater(s) and shut down the
iii) Disconnect electrical supply before
boiler on indirect units. Turn off the mains
removing any electrical equipment
covers.
water supply to the Megaflo unit. Attach a
hosepipe to the drain cock having sufficient
iv) NEVER bypass any thermal cut-outs.
length to take water to a suitable discharge
v) Hot water can scald, care should be
point below the level of the unit, at least one
taken when drawing water from the units.
metre below the unit is recommended. Open
9.2 SPARE PARTS
hot water tap nearest to the Megaflo to relive
A range of spare parts are available for the
the system pressure. Open drain cock. If
Megaflo units. When ordering spare parts the
water fails to drain from the Megaflo vent the
serial
number on the unit should be quoted.
unit by manually opening the Temperature/
Pressure Relief Valve.
PART
CODE No.
Immersion Heater
95 606 920
8.5 DESCALING IMMERSION HEATER(S)
Remove the cover from the immersion
Relief Valve
95 605 810
heater(s) and disconnect wiring from the
Cold
Water
Combination
thermostat and Earth Post (see Diagram 5).
Valve (complete)
95 605 817
Remove supply cable from the cable grip.
Pressure
Reducing
Cartridge
Using either an immersion heater "box" or
(for Cold Water Combination
"C" spanner unscrew and remove the immerValve)
95 605 824
sion heater(s). Carefully remove the scale
Expansion
Valve
Cartridge
from the element and thermostat pocket
(for Cold Water Combination
surfaces. DO NOT use a sharp implement as
Valve)
95 605 825
damage to the element surface could be
Expansion
Valve/Check
Valve
caused. Ensure boss threads and "O"-ring
Core unit (complete)
95 605 828
9.0 Fault Finding and

Servicing
HEATI~E ,~e~DIA
Megaflo
13
.-.
SPARE PARTS (Continued)

PART
CODE No.
Immersion Heater Blanking

Plug
95 605 829
Tundish
95 605 811
D/DD/DDD unit~
Combined Thermostat/
Thermal Cut-out
(rectangular blue cap) 95 612 209
(round black cap)
95 612 599
OL unit~
Indirect Thermal Cut-out 95 612 598
Indirect Thermostat
95 612 597
2-Port Motorised Valve 95 605 819
9.3 FAULTFINDING CHART

Note: Disconnect electrical supply before removing any electrical equipment covers
FAULT
POSSIBLE CAUSE
REMEDY
No hot water flow
1. Mains supply off

2. Strainer blocked
].. Check and open stop cock

2. Turn off water supply. Remove
strainer and clean (see section
3. Cold Water Combination Valve

incorrectly fitted
3. Check and refit as required
Water from hot taps

is cold
1. DIRECT immersion heater not

switched on
2. DIRECT immersion heater
thermal cut-out has operated
3. INDIRECT programmer set to
central heating only
4. INDIRECT boiler not working
5. INDIRECT thermal cut-out has

operated
6. INDIRECT motorised valve not
connected properly
Water discharges
Water discharges
from Temp/Pressure
Relief Valve
14
1. INTERMITTENTLY
Expansion volume reduced
within unit
2. CONTINUALLY
(a) Cold Water Combination
Valve Pressure Reducer not
working correctly.
(b) Expansion Valve seat
damaged.
1. Thermal control failure

NOTE Water will be very hot
8.3)
1. Check and switch on

2. Check. Reset by pushing button.
Check thermostat operation.
(See Diagram 5)
3. Check. Set to a domestic hot
water programme
4. Check boiler operation. If fault
suspected consult boiler
manufacturer's instructions
5. Check. Reset by pushing button
on cut-out. Check operation of
cylinder 'stat.
6. Check wiring and/or plumbing
connections to motorised valve.
(See Diagram 7)
1. Refer to Section 7.4
2. (a) Check pressure from Cold
Water Combination Valve. If
greater than 3.5 bar replace
Pressure Reducing Cartridge.
(b) Remove Expansion Valve
cartridge. Check condition of
seat. If necessary fit new
Expansion Valve Cartridge.
1. Switch off power to immersion
heater(s) and shut down boiler.
DO NOT turn off water supply.
When discharge stops check all
thermal controls, replace if
faulty.
General Dimensions
DIRECT UNITS (D)
INDIRECT UNITS (CL)
532 DIA
O U T L E T ~ 2
DIA
-I
o j,.
]14" T & P
RELIEF
VALWE--~
"~
HEATINGE~_MENT----~
INLET
SIZE
T
~-
(D)
70
70
125
125
145
145
170
170
210
210
250
250
300
300
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
PE
UJ
COIL
UNIT WEIGHT
KGS
(CL EMPTY FULL

24
124
CL
25
125
29
178
CL
31
180
31
200
CL
34
203
36
230
CL
39
233
42
252
CL
47
258
49
299
CL 54
305
58
358
CL 64
364 I
DIMENSIONS
(DIM)
A
B
759 J 5 0 5
C
.
)I-
!UJ
'u
O03 <
c,_'-='= ~-u-
P ~
8_
:~
p
"~'~
-~___.
I < ~: d T-
D
~ ' ~ v)E n . - _
. . . . . .
759 5 0 5
-13oo 2.18 o.391 s.2
1065 1 7 7 9 . . . . . . . .
1065 1779 -- 1400
z60
o.szl
11.8
1191 188o 5o51 . . . . .
1191 188o -- I~5o
2.~I
o.586 12.s
1348 11005 6 3 7 1 . . . . .
134811 1 0 0 5 1550' 3.54 0.716 14.5
1449J11081 849 I -- ' . . . .
1449111081 849 J600' 3.85 0.782 16.9
1701111308 10591 . . . . .
1701113o8 Io5916oo 3.85 0.782 17.4
.~01511559 13201 . . . . .
t01511559 13201600 3.85 0.782 18.9 :i
"r~
OFF PEAK
BOOST
DD MODELS
',,--r
86
30
144
25
16o
110 rains to heat 104 litres
191
108 rains to heal 103 likes
209
85 rains to heat 81 [ilres
263
92 mins to heat 88 litres
292
97 rains to heat 93 likes
27
27
29
34
41
HEATRAE .~U)IA
Megaflo
,q,
Diagram 10: Wall mountingbracket

Models 70,125 & 145
10.0 Guarantee
10.1 WARNING
Should the factory fitted Temperature and
Pressure Relief Valve be tampered with or
removed your guarantee will be invalidated.
Neither the Distributor or Manufacturer shall
be responsible for any consequential damage
howsoever caused.
10.2 GUARANTEETERMS
QRILL 5IaRT OF MEGAFt.0 ~ . . ~ m

TO TAKE ~ ~
~ 5CR~V5 AND MJT$
P.AI~. BOL.TS ~OT S~PPl,.F-DI
Heatrae Sadia guarantee the electrical parts,

thermal controls and valves for a period of
two years from the date of purchase, with the
exception of damage due to scaling.
The stainless steel vessel is guaranteed for a
period of five years against faulty manufacture or materials provided that :i) It has been installed by a competent
installer and as per the instructions
contained in this manual.
ii) It has not been modified in any way other
than by Heatrae Sadia Heating Ltd.
iii) It has only been used for the storage of
potable water.
iv) It has not been installed in a location
liable to be subjected to frost, nor has it
been tampered with or been subjected to
misuse or neglect.
v) No factory fitted parts have been re
moved for unauthorised repair or replace
ment.
Evidence of purchase and date of supply
must be submitted.
This guarantee does not affect your statutory
rights.
ENVIRONMENTALINFORMATION
This product is made from many recyclable
materials, therefore at the end of its useful
life it should be disposed of at a local authority waste disposal site to ensure the environmental benefits are realised.
HEATRAE SADIA HEATING LTD.

HURRICANE WAY
NORWICH
NR6 6EA
Telephone: (01603) 420220
Fax: (01603) 420229
36 O0 5690 Issue 2
UP/UPN
INSTALLATION
INSTRUCTIONS
( ~'
HWS and light commercial

heating circulators
GRUNDFOS
~~
D e c l a r a t i o n of Conformity
We GRUNDFOS declare under our sole responsibility that the UP/UPS circulars referenced in these
installation instructions to which this declaration relates are in conformity with the Council Directives on the
approximation of the laws of the EEC Member Stales relating to:
9 Machinery (89/392/EEC).
Standard used: EN 292.
9 Electromagnetic compatibility (89/336/EEC).
Standard used: EN 50 081-1 and EN 50 082-2.
9 Electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits (73/23/EEC).
Standard used: EN 60 335-1 and EN 60 335-2-51.
j "-)
If further details are required, please contact one of the Grundfos
offices listed on the back page of these i r ~ i o ' n ~ . tst February 1998
Grundfos Pumps Itd
Leighton Buzzard, Beds.
Mr D. S. Cooper, Managing Director
General Data
DELIVERY AND HANDLING
All pump units are supplied from the factory packaged in a cardboard carton suitable for
handling by individual persons. The weight and size of some units may require two
persons and the use of proprietary lifting equipment in order to be handled safely,
especially during installation in the system pipework.
INSPECTION
Each pump should be unpacked and inspected. Any damage must be reported to the supplier in
wnting within seven days.
It is important that these installation and operating instructions are studied carefully
before any installation takes place. The installation and operation should be in
accordance with local regulations and accepted cedes of practice.
Under no circumstances should pumps be operated until correctly installed in the
system pipework, and the terminal box, motor fan covers and coupling guards are
secured in their appropriate positions.
WARRANTY
1. The Grundfos warranty covers all defects in the pump originating from faulty workmanship and
materials for a period of one year from date of installation or 18 months from date of despatch
from the factory, whichever is the shorter. The warranty covers the replacement of any faulty
parts and our labour costs to replace the faulty parts. It does not cover the cost of removing,
returning and refitting the pump or any secondary losses arising from the failure.
2. The damaged pump should be returned to the original supplier for rectification or replacement.
Under no circumstances should the pump/motor be dismantled prior to return. Failure to
comply with this instruction could invalidate the warranty.
3. Defects arising from incorrect installation, water containing sand, salt or harmful chemicals,
system impurities such as magnetite, iron oxide, calcium build up, inadequate motor protection,
faulty ancillary equipment, lightning or other circumstances beyond our control, are not covered
by the warranty.
a) Magnetite is a ferrous sludge which becomes magnetically attracted to the rotor of the pumps
electric motor. This can usually be removed from the system by cleaning the system
thoroughly prior to use.
b) Solder debris, the system should be cleaned to remove solder and other debris which may
have inadvertently accumulated in the bodies of radiators, pipes, valves etc. prior to installation.
c) Iron oxide is created by air coming into contact with ferrous components in the system.
Effective air purging and venting should remove this problem.
d) Calcium carbonate build up takes place in hot water service systems where large quantities
of dissolved calcium are present in the water. Softening the water by proprietary methods of
water treatment will reduce this problem.
Hot Water Service
APPLICATIONS: HOT WATER

Models in this range:
SERVICE
CIRCULATORS
UP20-07N, UP20-15N, UP20-30N, UP20-45N

UPS15-50B, UPS25-55B, UPS32-55B, UP25-55B, UP32-55B
UPS40-50FB, UPS40-80FB, UP40-50FB, UP40-80FB.
These circulators have performances designed to cater for the majority of HWS systems in
domestic, commercial, industrial and public buildings. They are not designed to circulate chilled
water or act as general service, transfer or booster pumps. The UP20N models have stainless
steel pump housings and the UP/UPS B models have bronze pump housings, ensuring the supply
of contamination-free hot water. Ceramic bearings and shafts offer long life and quiet operation.
A
A
UPN/UP(S)B hot water service circulators must not be used in an environment which
has been classified as hazardous and could therefore cause an explosion if there is a
danger of ignition by a flame path.
Grundfos Pumps Ltd do not accept any responsibility for the use of UPN/UP(S)B hot
water service circulators to pump liquids which could be constituted as being hazardous
to health either by touch, ingestion or inhalation of fumes or-gases given off by the liquid.
MAXIMUM OPERATING CONDITIONS

Maximum system pressure:
UP20N, UPS15-50B, UP/UPS 25-55B,
UP/UPS 32-55B and UP/UPS40 FB models
10 Bar (145 psi)
Minimum inlet water pressure:

A]I models
0.5m at +65~
2.8m at +90~
In secondary hot water systems the bronze UP(S) pumps must only be used where the water
quality has a degree of hardness lower than approx. 14 dH (100ppm total of Ca** & Mg
For water with a higher degree of hardness a direct coupled bronze TP pump is recommended.
A
The minimum inlet water pressure must be available at the pump inlet during operation
to ensure satisfactory bearing life, quiet running and to avoid cavitation.
Maximum relative humidity:

Water temperature range:
95%
+2~ to +110~
(+65~ Practical limit for HWS)
Maximum permissible operating temperature:
I SystemWaterTemperature~ I 't0 I 'OS ] '00 I 90

AmbientTemperature~
35
60
70
80 I
80
To avoid condensation in the motor windings the pumped liquid temperature must
always be higher than the ambient temperature.
WATER BYELAW
SCHEME
The Fitting Assessment Panel of the Scheme finds that the use of fittings or units, when correctly
installed, will not contravene the requirements of the Water Byelaws or (Regulations NI) and that a
reference to the fittings will be included in the Scheme's Water Fittings and Materials Directory.
The pumps must be fitted by suitably qualified personnel who are aware of and will comply with
the respective water byelaws applicable to the installation.
The current certificate number covering UPN/UP(S)B models at the time of publication of these
installation instructions is 9311024.
NOISE LEVEL
A
The noise level of the circulators referenced in these installation instructions is lower
than the limiting values stated in the EEC machinery directive.
HWS System Layout

(a)
Cold
Feed
Open
Vent
For systems having

a high static head
Cold
Feed
OvPen
ent
For systems
having a low
stati~head
KEY TO SYMBOLS
~E>Circulatedflow
>" DrawOff flow
[~ Nonreturnvalve
AutomaticVent
FI~
.--J ~
~~<~
Flow
Return
Return
(b)
Cold
Feed
For systems having

a high static head
Co~d
Feed
~
Open
For systems having

low static head
FlOW
Return
Return
(c)
S Manual
Vent
CoJd
Fee~
Flow
Cold
Feed
Open
Low level flow and
Return
High level flow &
return pipework
---L__
Return
HWS SYSTEM RECOMMENDATIONS

Diagrams (a), (b) and (c) show typical system layouts for the circulation of secondary hot water
providing an instant supply of hot water at the tap thus avoiding water wastage and help prevent
Legionella growth. Where pipework is insulated a minimal circulating flow rate is sufficient to
compensate for pipeline heat losses with a flow return temperature drop of 5=C. In the interests of
energy efficiency both the storage cylinder & HWS pipes should be insulated to the sam'a, degree.
~i 84 '~
Diagram (a) Pump on flow pipework pumping from HWS cylinder.

The pump must be mounted in a bypass arrangement with a non return valve. The outlet of the
pump should be restricted to ensure that the non return valve opens under high flow conditions.
The pump should be sized correctly for the circulation necessary to compensate for pipework heat
losses and not for the full HWS flow. Oversized pumps fitted directly in the flow pipe may create
problems with valve or velocity noise and will re[~ult in premature pump failure.
If a high flow 'draw off' exists this should be connected into the circulation loop as far round as
possible to prevent the pump circulation flow being taken by the high flow draw off.
Return circulation to the bottom half of the cylinder or to the cold feed connection may result in
reduced hot water storage capacity of the vessel due to mixing of the hotter return water at 50~
with water at 10~C. Allowances should be made for this when sizing the calorifier.
For domestic applications only, the UPS15-50B circulator may be fitted directly in the flow pipe
without a NRV and with the flow pipe connection taken from the rising open vent pipe.
Diagram (b) Pump on return pipework pumping a~'ay from HWS cylinder.
Where the return connection in the cylinder is high, i.e. above the heating element or coil, then the
circulator pump may be installed in the return pipe but with its direction of flow towards the drawofrs. The return connection must be high enough in the cylinder to ensure that the circulated
water does not fall below 55=C. This method of pumping must not be used if the return connection
is made low down on the cylinder or on the cold feed, as cool or cold water will then be circulated.
When the draw-off's are closed the direction of circulation will be from the return connection
around the system pipework back towards the flow connection of the hot water cylinder/vessel.
When a draw-off point is opened the majority of the flow will be from the flow pipe.
Diagram (c) Pump on return pipework pumping towards HWS cylinder.
The pump may be mounted in the return pipework, but must be installed pumping vertically
upwards towards a high return connection Jn the cylinder, providing the system has a high static
head and the circulation pipework loop is short, in order to satisfy the inlet pressure requirement.
GENERAL RECOMMENDATIONS
1) To prevent air being drawn into the flow pipe, the flow pipe should be independently connected
to the hot water cylinder rather than being taken off the expansion pipe.
2) In order to avoid air locks the system pipework should have as few inverted 'U' bends as
possible, particularly between the cylinder and the pump. Where air traps are likely to occur
provision for venting must be incorporated. Automatic vents should only be fitted where the
pipework is always under positive pressure, otherwise air will be admitted into the system.
3) ideally the pump should be installed in vertical pipework pumping upwards to prevent air locking
of the pump.
4) When connecting the flow and return pipes to the hot water cylinder a short length of the ends
of these pipes (approximately 25mm) shourd protrude into the cylinder. Ensure that the pipe ends
do not interfere with the heating element.
5) Ensure that the minimum inlet pressure requirement of the pump is satisfied. On system with
low static heads, the pump may need to be mounted below the top of the hot water cylinder to
increase the inlet pressure at the pump inlet.
6) The return pipework should be sized for the circulation flow rate only and to provide adequate
pipework resistance to maintain the pump at the design flow rate. Where there is insufficient pipe
work resistance and flow is excessive, the outlet of the pump should be restricted.
For plate heat exchangers, the pump may be installed in a bypass with non return valve on the
flow pipe as in diagram a) the return to the heat exchanger is normally made to the cold feed.
Alternatively. the pump may be mounted in the return pipework pumping to the cold feed providing
the system has a high static head and the circulation pipework loop is short.
Dimensions & Weights

SINGLE HEAD PUMPS
UP20-OTN. UP20-15N.
UP20-30N. UP20-45N
UPS15-50B with I" BSPF Unions
UPS25-55(B). UPS25-80 with 1' BSPF

Unions
t 88
22ramVllves
" .......
l
~I
~~BSPUn~c~s
UP25-55B with 1" BSPF Unions
"L~on
UPS25-55. UPS25-80 w~th 1 88 BSPF

Unions
t3o
"=f"
75 -~- S~r.
~i
UPS32-55(B). UPS32-80 with 1 88 BSPF

Unions
130
t '~
t~., ,;
f@
UP32-55B with 1 88 BSPF Unions
=
~ o
"
Pump
Model
Prel=um
Ra~ng
(Bar)
Pump
Connection
Pipe Connection
Union
BSPF
Net
Weight
(kg)
Gross
Weight
(kg)
Shipping
Volume
(m=)
L1
B1
B2
H1
H2
UP20-07Nlph
UP2~lSN1ph
UP20-30Nlph
10
1 88 BSPM
~"
21
23
00040
150
75
43
28
100
~"
3A"
43
23
43
31
4.8
54
48
54
0.0080
00040
00080
00032
0.0080
0.0104
0.0080
0.0104
150 82
150 73
150 80
51
43
51
26
28
26
130
100
130
UP20-45N1ph
UP20-30N3ph
UP20-45N3ph
UPSIFSOB
UPS25-$SB
UPS32-55B
UP2~SSB
UP32-55B
UPS2~55
UPS25-80
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
1 88 BSPM
1 88 BSPM
1 88 BSPM
1 89 BSPM
1 89 BSPM
2"
BSPM
1~" BSPM
2 ~ BSPM
1"
1"
t 88
1"
1 88
40
21
40
26
4.5
5.1
4.5
51
10
1 89 BSPM
1"or1 88
4.2
4.5
0.0080
UPS32-55
UPS32~0
10
2"
1 88
47
51
0.0104
BSPM
~:~
Installation
GENERAL INFORMATION
Pumps should only be installed by a qualified heating installer.
Before installing the pump, the system should be flushed out thoroughly to clear all foreign matter
such as solder, steel wool and copper filings. We recommend that the system is cleaned out in
accordance with British Standard 5449 1990, The manufacturers guarantee may be affected if the
system has not been flushed of all impurities.
/k
/k
/k
When pumping hot liquids, care must be taken to ensure that persons cannot come into
contact with the metal surfaces of the pump body,
Electric motors will have hot external surfaces during operation and care must be taken
to ensure that persons cannot come into contact with the surface of the electric motor.
Do not remove motor terminal box covers, electrical cables or any other electrical
protective covering without first ensuring that the electrical supply is suitably isolated
Do not attempt to supply electricity to the pump without ensuring that all electrical
fittings, cables and enclosures are intact and suitably electrically isolated from human
touch during operation.
Fig.1
Fig2
POSITION OF TERMINAL BOX
To ensure easy access to electrical connections, the
terminal box can be turned to any of three positions
' "'~'~ . . . . ~:~:~'~-~ /
shown in Fig.l. Three drain holes are located in the
pump stator housing (cold water models), one of
RU~Y/fT"X"~m71
which will always be pointing downwards, provided
the terminal box is not mounted underneath.
II I ~ ~
//f Ii,
These holes allow condensation to drain away from
the stator when pumping cold water. Always try to
ensure that the terminal box is not next to hot
surfaces, nor where water from the vent plug can
enter the terminal box.
This operation is best carried out before installation otherwise the pump must be isolated and drained.
I FJ./.f
=j[
To change the position of the terminal box, remove the four screws holding the stator housing and
turn it to the required position, replace the four screws (Fig. 2) and tighten diagonally in stages to
avoid distortion, making sure that the gasket between stator housing and pump chamber is not
displaced or damaged.
If the circulator has already been installed then ensure that the electrical supply to the
pump motor has been isolated and cannot be switched on. Allow the pump to cool
before attempting to remove the pump head as hot water is dangerous.
Before unscrewing and removing the four screws the isolating valves either side of the
pump must be closed. Take care that any escaping water does not cause damage or
enter the terminal box of the pump motor.
PUMP LOCATION
1. Ensure that the pump is positioned to allow access for examination and service, and that there
are adequate drain facilities and protection from water damage in the immediate vicinity of the
pump.
2. Pump should be sited in a dry, well-ventilated but frost-free position, where it will not be
subjected to extremes of temperature.
3. The environment should be non-aggressive and the atmosphere non-explosive.
4. The maximum relative humidity can be up to 95%.
10
SITING OF CIRCULATORS
Always use proprietary lifting equipment when installing Light Commercial heating
circulators.
It is preferable to install Grundfos circulators in a vertical pipe pumping upwards (see Fig. 1). This
position ensures that the pump shaft is horizontal, which reduces the thrust bearing load and
ensures positive air purging from both the rotor chamber and impeller housing. Pumping
downwards in a vertical pipe is not recommended, as this may lead to air locking of the pump, with
resultant loss of performance. However, pumping downwards is acceptable in heating
applications (it is not acceptable on HWS applications) provided an effective air purger and air
vent are incorporated in the system before the pump. It is not recommended to use automatic air
vents in any part of the system where the system pressure will be negative (i.e. below
atmospheric pressure). Where pumps can only be installed in horizontal pipework, it is imperative
that the pump shaft is horizontal, or slightly higher at the vent plug end (see Fig. 2).
Arrows on the pump housing indicate the direction of water flow through the pump.
The shaft must not fall below the horizontal plane, even by a few degrees, as this
causes premature wear of the top bearing and shaft. Pumps must never be installed
with the shaft in a vertica! plane, as this may lead to dry running of the top bearing,
noise and possible pump failure.
HWS
HEATING
Fig
1.
2.
3.
4.
To avoid sediment, do not fit the pump in the lowest part of the system.
It is advisable to fit isolating valves either side of the pump.
To prevent noise avoid sharp bends either side of the pump.
Position the motor away from heat sources and allow access for removal of the pump head
from the pump base.
5. Always try to ensure the terminal box is not adjacent to hot surfaces. On UPS models the
speed switch should be readily available for adjustment of pump speed.
6. In open-vented systems position the pump so that it neither pumps over into the feed and
expansion tank, nor causes air to be drawn down the vent pipe. Generally this means fitting
the cold feed pipe on the return side of the boiler and the vent pipe on the flow side of the boiler
(preferably taken straight from the boiler). The pump should be mounted in the flow pipe after
the point where the vent pipe is connected. Alternatively, a close coupled cold feed and vent
may be fitted in the flow pipe, in a horizontal section of pipework, before the pump. On HWS
systems the pump would normally be fitted in the return pipe as previously indicated, page 7.
7. In pressurised systems the pumps can be fitted in either flow or return pipes as required.
However the pressurisation unit should be connected to the system on the inlet side of the
pump, to minimise the possibility of cavitation, since centrifugal pumps are designed for
'pushing' not 'pulling' water.
8. , t ~
In systems where all the flow can be stopped while the pump is running, e.g. in
/ u \ systems fitted with thermostatic radiator valves, a by-pass should be fitted between
i
'hflow and return pipes to ensure water flow through the boiler and pump at all times,
(approx. 7.5% of maximum pump capacity).
9. Ensure the pump is not stressed by the pipework and that the pipework is properly supported
either side of the pump. If necessary use proprietary mounting brackets.
10.When connecting the pump to the pipework or to valves the gasket and union nut or
gasket and flange should be assembled dry. It is not necessary to use proprietary
sealants.
11 .Ensure that the gasket is correctly positioned and tighten the union nut or flange bolts
firmly. Do not over tighten and take care not to displace or distort the gasket.
11
'
.--z.:~,.,.~..=,~,:~CLS,
L:. .
PRESSURE GAUGE TAPPINGS

889BSP pressure gauge tappings are provided
on each of the pump ports of twin head pumps
and can be used for general pressure
measurement by removing the 6mm Unbraco
plugs. However, these tappings should not be
used for accurate pressure measurement since
the turbulence in the outlet port will give false
readings.
'.~ BSP
If accurate measurements are required, suitable tappings must be provided in the pipework, 2 pipe
diameters upstream of the pump on the inlet side and 5 pipe diameters downstream on the outlet
side, with at least 0.5m of straight pipe either side of the pump i.e. 0.5m of straight pipe before
any fittings, valves and bends etc.
FLAP VALVE
A flap valve is fitted on twin pumps to prevent
reverse circulation through the stand-by pump
whilst the duty pump is in operation. It will
automatically change over when the duty pump is
changed. The flap valve should already be fitted
into the correct position when the pump is supplied
and held in place by two pins, but if it has been
removed for any reason it must be replaced
correctly. Check that the flap and pin are fitted
into the valve housing. Slide the housing into the
delivery port of the pump and make sure that the
locating pegs on the housing fit either side of the
port dividing rib. The valve is in the correct
position when it is not possible to rotate it within
the valve housing. Finally fit the keep-ring, gasket
and tap in the two retaining pins.
//
12
ASSEMBLY OF NON-RETURN
VALVE ON TWIN-PUMPS
m
m
~f~-~-=~- 1 KEEPRING
i
f m
~-
2. GASKET
VALVEWITH
LOCATINGPEGS
PORTDIVIDING
The non-return flap valve utilised in twin head pump models should not be considered
as a suitable non-retum valve for the pipework system.
E l e c t r i c a l Data
A
A
In the interests of electrical safety s local means of isolating the electrical supply
should be located as close as practically possible to the p u m p / m o t o r uniL This is
of particular importance where the contactor starter is mounted in a remote
control panel.
Before removing the terminal box cover from the electric m o t o r or before any
removal/dismantling of the pump/motor unit takes place, ensure that the
electricity supply has been suitably isolated and cannot be switched on.
Do not attempt to start the pump even to check the direction of rotation until the
system has been filled with water and'both the pump and the system have been
vented.
All electrical connections should be carried out by a qualified end authorised
electrician in accordance with local site regulations and also in accordance with
the latest issue of the I.E.E. regulations.
The metal body of the pump, motor and switch gear/control panel must all be
earthed. It is strongly recommended that an Earth Leakage Circuit Breaker with a
tripping current of 30mA or less is fitted on the incoming electrical supply.
GENERAL INFORMATION
Motors are designed to operate on voltages between +/6% of the spot voltage shown on
the rating plate, e.g. a 415V motor is designed to operate between 390V and 440V. If the
voltage deviates beyond these limits, there is a danger that the motor protection will
continually trip the motor, hence the pump will not meet the requirements of the system.
MOTOR DATA
Standard voltages available are 240V single phase 50Hz and 415V three phase 50Hz.
Motor enclosure class:
Winding insulation:
IP44 for the UPS15-50B

IP42 on all other models.
Class F on all models.
Cable connection:
P g l 1 compression gland (Single and three phase motors).
A Pg compression gland is fitted as standard on all terminal boxes to enable direct cable
connection without the need for additional fittings.
240V SINGLE PHASE 50Hz MODELS
":.J
Pump
Model
UP20-07N
UP20-15N
UP20-30N
UP20-45N
UPS15-SOB
UPS25-55(B)
UPS25-80
UPS32-55(B)
UPS32-80
Pump
Full LOad
LockedRotor
Speed Current Amps Current Amps
0.24
0 24
0.34
0.42
0 34
043
0.48
0 97
3
0 42
047
2
0.28
031
1
017
015
3
0.49
110
2
044
081
I
0.34
054
3
1,03
1.54
2
0.91
1 10
1
063
0 70
3
0.58
0 93
2
0.51
0 66
1
036
0 43
3
t.0
1.52
2
091
1 10
1
062
0 70
Input Power
Watts
55
80
90
115
105
70
30
120
105
85
245
210
140
145
125
90
250
215
145
Full LOad
R.P.M
1350
2350
1900
2700
1900
1200
800
2650
2300
1600
2450
1650
1050
2450
1850
1200
2450
1700
1100
Capacitor
Rating ~lF
4.0
2.0
2.0
3.0
2.0
3.0
5.0
3.0
5.0
13
240V SINGLE PHASE 50Hz MODELS

Pump
Model
UPS36-50F
UPS(D)40-50F& FB
UPS(D)40-80F& FB
Pump
Full Load
Locked Rotor
Speed Current Amp$ Current Ampt
3
0.62
0 93
2
0.57
0.66
1
0.39
0.43
3
062
0.93
2
057
0.66
1
0.39
043
3
1.0
1.52
0.91
2
1.10
1
0.62
0.70 "
Input Power
Watts
140
125
80
140
125
80
250
215
145
Full Load
R.P.M
2400
1650
1050
2400
1650
1050
2450
1700
1100
Capacitor
RaUng~F
3.0
30
50
415V THREE PHASE 50Hz MODELS

Pump
Model
UP20-30N
UP20-45N
UP25,-55B
UP32-55B
UP(D)40-50F& FB
UP(DpIO-80F& FB
Full Load
Current Amps
O18
027
0.27
030
0.29
0.50
LockedRotor
Current Amps
0.28
0.90
0.85
0.68
086
130
Input Power
Watts
105
120
135
165
160
280
Full Load
R.P.M
1950
2750
2850
2650
2700
2650
Electrical Connection
/ / ~
t / ~
Before removing the terminal box cover from the electric motor or before any
removal/dismantling of the pump/motor unit takes place, ensure that the
electricity supply has been suitably isolated and cannot be switched on.
Do not attempt to start the pump even to check the direction of rotation until the
system has been filled with water and both the pump and the system have been
vented.
All electrical connections should be carried out by a qualified and authorised
electrician in accordance with local site regulations and also in accordance with
the latest issue of the I.E.E. regulations.
The operating voltage and other electrical data are marked on the motor label. Please
make sure that the motor is suitable for the electricity supply on which it will be used.
The electric motor should be connected to the electrical supply as follows:
SINGLE PHASE MODELS: The LIVE wire (normally Brown insulation) must be connected
to the terminal marked L. The NEUTRAL wire (normally BLUE insulation) must be
connected to the terminal marked N. The EARTH wire (normally YELLOW/GREEN) must be
connected to the earth terminal marked _.~L.
THREE PHASE MODELS: The three live wires must be connected to the terminals L1, L2
and L3. The EARTH wire (normally YELLOW/GREEN insulation) must be connected to the
earth terminal marked _--L..
Only sufficient insulation must be removed from the end of the wires to allow the terminals
to grip the c o n d u c t o r wire, without leaving excess bared conductor exposed. Terminal
screws should not be over tightened. Sprung terminals clamps (single phase models only)
should be opened by pushing back the spring loaded arm, inserting the bared wire and
then release the arm. Check cable connections by pulling on the cables after having
released the sprung lever connections.
All cables must be of an adequate size to prevent an excessive drop in the supply voltage.
It is advisable to fit an isolating switch and fuses to each pump, and where duty and
standby p u m p s are installed, a changeover switch should be fitted to enable each pump to
be operated as the duty pump in order to even the wear.
14
Note: On Twin head pump models an independent supply should be connected to both
heads.
Ci
MOTOR PROTECTION
All single phase models have internal motor protection, and can be connected to a
switched/fused supply instead of a starter.
UPS25-80, UPS32-80, UPS40-80F, UPSD40-80F and UPS40-80FB are fitted with thermal
overload protection.
UP20-07N, UP20-15N, UP20-30N, UP20-45N, UPS15-50B, UPS25-55(B), UPS32-55(B),
UPS36-50F, UPS40-50F, UPSD40-50F and UPS40-50FB are impedance protected so that
they are short-circuit proof, (if the pump rotor jams, the pump will not be damaged by
motor burn-out).
//~
All three phase models require external motor protection, and must be connected
to a contactor starter incorporating no voltage release, overload protection and
phase failure protection (single phase prevention). The overload relay within the
starter should be set to the full load current as shown on the pump label relevant
to the speed of operation.
FREQUENCY CONVERTERS
r
UP/UPS circulators must not be used in conjunction with a frequency converter.
TERMINAL CONNECTIONS
'
240V SINGLE PHASE 50Hz
MODELS
UP20-07N. UP20-15N. UP20-30N. UP20-45N
Ca~ac=tor w,res f,t{e~ ~n*.erm,na~s4 & 8
MODELS
UPS25-80. UPS32-80. UPS40-80F. UPSD40-80F a n d
UPS40-80FB
Capac~lor wires fitted ,n terminals 2 & 4
i
415V THREE PHASE 50Hz
MODELS
UPS15-53B UPS25-55(B). UPS32-551B).
UPS3E-50F. UPS40-50F. UPSD40-50F an~ UPS40-50FB
Capac,tor w , r e s fitted ,n term,nals 4 & 8
MODELS
UP20-30N. UP20-45N. UP25-SSB. UP32-55B,
UP(D)40-5OF. UP40-50FB. UP(D.~40-80F. and UP40-80F8
15
Venting & Shaft

Rotational Check
Do not attempt to start the pump even to check the direction of rotation until the system
has been filled with water and both the pump and the system have been vented.
//~
Pay attention to the direction that the vented water will take and take care to ensure that
the escaping water does not cause injury to persons or enter and subsequently damage
the pump motor/motor terminal box. In hot water applications, special attention should
be paid to the risk of injury that could be caused by scalding hot water.
1. Once the system has been filled with water and vented place a small receptacle under the
pump and close the isolating valves on either side of the pump (Fig. 1).
2. Slacken the vent plug and remove carefully (Fig. 2). Normally the amount of water escaping will
be minimal but the amount and pressure of water will increase on systems with high inlet
pressure.
Take care that water does not enter the terminal box or electrical installation, nor that
it should cause personal injury or damage to household fittings etc.
3. Insert a small screwdriver 3ram into the slot in the shaft end (Fig. 3). Rotate the pump shaft
several times to ensure that it is free. (This is particularly important for pumps that have been in
stock or inoperative for some time). Remove the screwdriver.
4. Switch on the electricity supply and note the direction of the shaft rotation. The correct direction
is anti-clockwise when viewed through the vent plug, as indicated by arrows on the pump label
(Fig. 4).
5. The direction of rotation of three phase pumps can be corrected by inter-changing any two of
the incoming phases. Isolate the electrical power supply to the pump before carrying out this
operation.
6. Replace the vent plug but do not tighten (Fig. 5).
7. Open the isolating valves on either side of the pump (if fitted) (Fig. 6).
8. When any remaining air has escaped and water only is present, tighten the vent plug.
Do not over tighten the vent plug as this may cause damage to the seal, and in
extreme cases may distort the rotor can.
9. The pump may be noisy when first switched on, due to air remaining in the chamber, this should
cease after a few minutes running. If the noise persists switch off and re-vent.
Fig. 1 ~ . . ~ ,
Fig. 2
E" ,, ~ .
Fig. 3
.
16
"
" "; "t,
L. I
Fig. 4
! w
,
PROCEDURE FOR VENTING PUMPS IN PRESSURISED SYSTEMS
:(',,.7
In pressurised systems the rotor wilt be pressed towards the vent plug by the water pressure. If
the pressure is not equalised throughout the pump and motor, the pump may not start particularly
on low speed settings.
1. Carry out venting of the system to remove any trapped air prior to pressurising the system.
2. Pressurise the system and open the vents (or taps in HWS circuit) to remove any remaining air.
3. Remove the vent plug of the pump and press the shaft down to ensure that water enters into the
top bearing. Take care that escaping water does not enter the terminal box or electrical
installation nor that it can cause personnel injury or damage to household fittings etc. Replace
the vent plug and tighten.
/ ~
Do not over tighten the vent plug as this may cause damage to the seal, and in
extreme cases may distort the rotor can.
4. Isolate the pressurisation unit from the system by closing the isolating valve between the
system and the pressurisation set.
5. Open the highest placed vent to release the system pressure and then run the pump for 10
minutes. Close off any open vents.
6. Open the pressurisation unit isolating valve and allow the system to pressurise and leave the
pump running for approximately 30 minutes.
7. Stop the pump and restart the pump on all speed settings to ensure that the pump will stop and
start as required.
TWIN HEAD MODELS

Carry out venting, shaft rotation and shaft directional checks as
for the single head pump, but check both heads.
~~1~",,
TWIN PUMPS MOUNTED IN HORIZONTAL PIPEWORK
First slacken the 5mm Unbraco air vent plug on the main housing
of the uppermost pump, re-tighten after all the air has been
Top
'~
1.,t"Automatic
expelled. Then carry out the 'Venting and Shaft Rotational
Air Vent
:'--'- Air Vent
Plug
5ram
L..,
Checks' for both heads as described on pages 16 and 17.
It is recommended that an automatic air vent be fitted as
Vent
shown, in place of the top air vent plug (1/8" BSP) to prevent
a large build up of air when the uppermost head is inoperative. Plug
Vent
Plug
'
~.
17
Starting & Adjusting

//~
It is imperative ~.hatcorrect adjustments are made to the system in order to ensure that
a) A minimum flow rate of at least 7.5% of the maximum pump capacity is achieved as
indicated by the performance curve of the pump.
b) The maximum published flow rate through the pump is not exceeded, i.e. If the
differential pressure across the pump whilst operating is nearly zero kPa then the
pump is operating outside of it's published curve. This can result in premature wear of
the top bearing and shaft.
These operating conditions must be satisfied for the whole of the pumps operational time cycle.
FLOW ADJUSTMENT
The UP20-07N, UP20-15N, UP20-30N and UP20-45N single and three phase units are fixed flow
pumps in accordance with the relevant hydraulic curves, i.e. for a predetermined resistance only
one flow rate is available.
The UPS15-50B, UPS25-55(B), UPS25-80, UPS32-55(B), UPS32-80, UPS36-50F,
UPS(D)40-50F, UPS(D)40-80F, UPS40-50F8 and UPS40-80FB are all single phase three speed
pumps with a speed selector switch. Flow adjustment is made by selecting the appropriate speed
for the duty required.
The UP25-55B, UP32-55B UP(D)40-50F, UP(D)40-80F UP40-5OFBand UP40-80FB are three
phase fixed flow pumps in accordance with the relevant hydraulic curves i.e. for a predetermined
resistance only one flow is available.
HWS SYSTEM
In domestic hot water systems, the velocity of the water should be kept as low as possible to
avoid turbulence and corrosion in the pipes. The velocity of the water in systems with copper
pipes should not exceed 1 rn/sec.
HEATING SYSTEM
The heating system should be balance by adjusting the differential temperature between the flow
and return pipes of individual heat loads in accordance with design values. If the system design
flow rate is not achieved after having balanced the heat loads, the pump performance should be
increased from the initial setting by selecting a higher speed setting on the speed plug or by
adjusting the mechanical adjuster. However, too high a performance may result in valve or water
velocity noise in the system.
t//~
18
On modern high efficiency boilers it is imperative to achieve a minimum flow rate

through the boiler in accordance with the boiler makers specification. The pump speed
should be set to achieve the minimum required boiler flow rate through the system
bypass valve under minimum heat load conditions and also to achieve system design
flow rates at full load conditions.
C~ ~
Operation
Pumps installed in accordance with these instructions will operate quietly and should not require
any further attention.
The pump should not start more than sixty times per hour, and if it is found that it starts
more frequently adjustments must be made to the controls to reduce the number of
stops and starts.
t / ~
If it is possible for any valves to be completely closed on the discharge side of the pump
e.g. thermostatic radiator valves, a by pass must be fitted to the pipework to allow
sufficient water to circulate through the pump to provide adequate cooling and
lubrication of the pump bearings. Never operate the pump with the isolating valves closed.
Maintenance
/k
/k
/k
i
t
,
.f
Do not open electrical switch gear or panel enclosures or remove panel components,
pressure switch covers, motor terminal box covers, electrical cables or any other
electrical protective covering without first ensuring that the electrical supply is suitably
isolated and cannot be switched on.
Do not attempt to supply electricity to the control panel switch gear or isolator and run
the pump electric motors without ensuring that all electrical fittings, cables and
enclosures are intact and suitably electrically isolated from human touch during
operation.
If the pump is dismantled for any reason care should be exercised as some components
within the pump have sharp edges which may cut.
1. It is recommended that the pump be switched on for a few minutes each week whenever the
system is not in use to prevent sediment build up in the pump.
2. If the pump does not restart, check that the shaft is free to rotate, as described under the
section 'Venting and Shaft Rotational Checks', on pages 16 and 17. If the pump still does not
start recheck all electrical connections to ensure they have not become loose or disconnected.
If the pump still cannot be started contact an installer for assistance.
3. Check that the pump is giving the correct quantity of water and that it is operating smoothly and
quietly.
4. Check that there are no leaks.
5. Remove and clean any filters fitted to the installation.
6. Check the tripping time for the motor overloads in the auto changeover panel if fitted.
7. Check that all controls are operating satisfactorily and that the pump is not continually stopping
and starting.
8. Unusually long periods of inactivity before or after installation are considered more detrimental
than the same period of constant running. The unit should still be maintained in accordance
with the instructions and in addition the pump shaft should be turned by using a screwdriver
inserted in the slot of the rotor shaft (or the pump switched on for a short period) at monthly
intervals. Venting should be carried out in accordance with the section 'Venting and Shaft
Rotational Check' as applicable.
MAINTENANCE
OF DUTY AND STANDBY PUMPS
It is recommended that the duty and standby pumps are alternated on a regular basis i.e. once a
week. In any event the standby unit must be operated at least once a month.
Should any faults be found check the symptoms with the Fault Finding Chart.
19
FAULT FINDING CHART

FAULT
CAUSE
1)Motor does not start,
REMEDY
a)Suppfy failure
b)Main or sectional fuses blown. If new
fuses blow at once, either cable or
motor is then faulty.
c)Control circuit fuses, if fitted are
defective.
d)Main contacts in starter are not making
contact or the coil is faulty.
e)ElectrJcal connections are incorrect or
loose.
f) Rotor jammed
a)Contact the local electricity supply

company.
b)Replace fuses if blown.
c)Replace fuses if blown.
d)Replace contactor if faulty.
e)Connect or tighten wires con'ectly.
f)Free rotor as described under 'Venting
& Shaft Rotational Checks. see pages
16 & 17.
2)Starter overload unit trips out

immediately when power is
switched on.
a]One fuse is blown.

b)Contacts in overload are faulty.
c)Bad contact in fuse or fuse holder.
d)Supply Cable or connections are faulty,
or the pump motor is defechve
e)Pump stiff and is not free to turn.
a)Replace defective fuse.

b)Replace contactor if faulty.
c)Replace fuse or fuse holder, if faulty.
d)Replace defective Cable or pump
motor.
e)Replace pump motor.
3)Motor starter overload trips OUt

occasionally.
a)Overioad setting too low.

b)Periodlc supply failure.
c)Low voltage at peak times.
a)Adlust overload to correct setting.

See (1) d, (2) d and e.
c)Contact the local electricity supply
company
5)Water not circulating
a)Flow adlustmenl ncorrect.

b)System incorrectly balanced.
c)lncorrect sirling of the pump.
a)Adlust mechanical flow control valve

or pump speed setting as applicable
until flow is satisfactory.
b) Balance system.
c)The pump should be sited so it cannot
re-circulate water through the cold
water feed or expansion pipes.
6) Inadequate circulation.
a)Check direction of rotahon (three

phase pumps only).
b)Air in the system.
c)AJr in the pump.
d)lsolatmg valves closed.
e)Flap valve not positioned correctly
(twin pumps only)
a)lnterchange any two of the three

incoming phase wires.
b)Vent the system correctly.
o)Vent the pump correctly
d)Open ~solatingvalves fully, if fitted.
e)Remove pump from the system and
re-position valve.
7)Noise
a)Pump or system not vented correctly

b)Pump flOWsetting is too high
c)Flow rate too h=ghfor pump.
d)Pump sited incorrectly.
e)Pump mounted incorrectly.
f)Vapour pressure higher than inlet
pressure (pump cawtating).
a)vent the pump and system correctly.

b)See 4a.
c)lncrease pipework resistance.
d)See 4c.
e)The pump or pipework should be
supported.
f) lncrease inlet pressure.
GRUlNIDFOS'
GRUNDFOS
P U M P S LTD
It is the continuing policy of Grundfos to develop and

improve our products, and we reserve the right to
amend prices and specification without prior notice.
S o u t h e r n A r e a : G r o v e b u r y Road, Leighton Buzzard,

50.43.34
B e d f o r d s h i r e L U 7 8 T L Tel: 01525 850000. Fax: 01525 370625.
N o r t h e r n A r e a : G a w s w o r t h Court, Risley Road, Risley, Warrington,
C h e s h i r e W A 3 6NJ. Tel: 01925 813300. Fax: 01925 830014.
S c o t l a n d & N o r t h e r n I r e l a n d 9Fleming Road, Kirkton C a m p u s , Livingston,
W e s t Lothian, E H 5 4 7BN. Tel: 01506 461666. Fax: 01506 461555.
Wales & South West : Imperial Park, Celtic Lakes, N e w p o r t ,
I V7 12 54 36 02 98
I
Gwent. NP1 9 U H Tel: 01633 815006, Fax: 01633 8 1 1 5 0 0
repl V'7 12 54 36 10 97
Mechanical Services
The Millennium Dome
SECTION 8
AS FITTED DRAWINGS
November 1999
Page 48 0.[49
Please refer to section 7.5.2 for as fitted drawings.
SECTION 05
7.5.4
NOT APPLICABLE
SECTION 05
7.5.5
R W Gregory and Partners

Consulting Engineers
30 - 32 Thames Street, Hampton, Middlesex RN12 2DX
Tel: 0181 941 4421 Fax: 0181 941 0047
1 December 1999
KMB
The Old Bake House
Kirton
Lincolnshire
PE20 1EH
C.C
MFH/gk/L01693
For the attention of Mr C Clark
Dear Sirs
MILLENNIUM DOME - NMEC/GRANADA CATERING
I reconfirm your enquiry concerning a risk assessment of residual hazards that may
affect persons carrying out future construction work.
I have reviewed this matter and conclude that there are no abnormal risks that
require recording under this category.
Yours faithfully
R W G R E G O R Y AND PARTNERS
Malcolm F Hardacre
Associate
cc
Mr M Kassapian
Mr R Walton
plrt'ne~
Eur Ir~gJ T Smith BSc CEng FlEE FCIBSE FConsE
j ~
EtA BEng (Hons) MS~(Af ch] CFn9 FIMeCr~c
FCIBSE FConsE
M ~ r l S FCISSE FConsF
Eur In,{)O P ~ r a t t CFK~FCIBS.c FConsE
A Con~elon FClSFCIAfo
S J Leheup CEng FCIBSE F ~ [
L Dar~e~ CEr~ MIEE MCIBS[
R W1~elnsIICEng FCIBS[ FCo~sE
R C Lur,O BSc (HO~S}CEI~ MCIBSE
A Cash BSc GEl MIEF
M TudOn MIElecI'~MIMEME
Euf In~ A Cameron BEng (Hons) CEng f II I [ [ M
A firm O u a h t y A s s u r e d Io B S E N I S O 9 0 0 1
Granada
Wakemans
Conlgltlntl
CP Underwood 8Sc Ph[) C[- ng MCIBSE
V J Gutve~BSc CEixj FICE FlSltuclE FBAE FC~nsF
D Mayhew BSc (HOn~)CFn9 MISIrLx;IE
A~lltel
D A HO~k3,wa BS~.
J A St~ecnfC~n(J MIMecr~F MCIBS[
B Wllsorl BSc (HOns) CEn9 MCIBSE
M E Harda(:re BSc (HElls) CFn~j MIMeE~E MCISSE
P M~3nleyAMIs
(; Bancroft MCIBS[
J P Gosl,f~J BEng (Hon~) C~ r~ MCIBSE
M FloOr,son BSc Crn9 MCIBSE
K Arrnstror~J BFng (HOrn) CEng MCIBSF
C B~aGournBEF~(Ho,ns)CEF~MCIBSF
N R G Ofle(BEng(HOnS)CEr~ MCIBSE
I Tre).n',ason BEn9 (Hc','~s) CFn(:.lMCIBSI:
M Ca0(:lellCl-n9MIFF MCIBSF
E D Bo'e~ilCh
S Lon(J O.~.c(F~qS) MeA CE'~j MCli3SF MIOA
B MOrgan BFng (Hor~S)
G Hopkins Bl:ng (H~IS)
offices ill
LOndOn
Newcastle upO(' Tylve
MarEhestet
Bwrrnmgham
Cardiff
Hon9 KC~X~
Manda
Amsterdam
A~ndns
BzusSels
Copenhagen
OutW.i
Luxerr~Jrg
MadrK3
Mila~
k~r'~h
N ~ YO~k
Pans
V~nt~a
top~l~merrlbel
SECTION 06
7.6
Specialist installations
7.6.1
7.6.2
7.6.3
0 & M Manuals
7.6.4
7.6.5
SECTION 06
7.6
Specialist Installations
SECTION 06
7.6.1
MILLENNIUM DOME
DESIGN BRIEF
DRAFT ISSUE 4
PreparedbY
Grantham Winch Partnership Limited
2a Avenue Road, Grantham, Lines, NG3 16TH
Tel:01476590141
Fax:01476590142
Dot Ref: MNIMikmiumDesign
BriefZdoc
(19.4.99)
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The New Millennium Experiencehasbeendevelopedto celebratethe New Millennium.
The Millennium Dome complex is situatedin South East London in the Greenwich
region. It is to provide information and entertainmentfacilities for oneyear and a day
underthe control of the New Millennium ExperienceCompany.
Design responsibilitiesfor the numerouscatering facilities within the Millennium Dome
complex havebeendivided into various groups.The GranthamWinch Partnership(GWP) is
to be responsiblefor the developmentof the design of cateringfacilities in Group B and
Group C in associationwith WakemansConstructionManagement,on behalf of their clients
Granadaretail Catering. Contract work is to be completeby the 29 November 1999
The Design Brief documentis intendedto impart a definition of the servicesto be
provided in both group B and Group C andthe range of accommodationthat will be
required.On the basisof agreementto the operationalpolicies and estimatedlevels of
demandstatedin the Brief the designwill be progressed.
2.0
THE MILLENNIUM
DOME
The Millennium Dome is to provide educationaland entertainmentfacilities for the

durationof the Project - one year one day. Additionally, it will provide cateringand
refreshmentservicesfor the generalpublic.
2.1
Service User Profile

From the Project Managersand Clients briefs it is known that the catering facilities will
attracta high volume of turnover and is to include a completerange of diversefoodservice
stylesand types of cuisine. To include, Haute Cuisine, traditional regional British menusand
fast foods.
The typesof service will include full waiter service in a restaurantsetting,bar menu
serviceand take away options. It is recognisedthat this high profile prestigiousproject
which will requirea generalserviceof the highest quality.
I
Grantham Winch Partnership Ltd
3.0
GRANTHAM WINCH PARTNERSHIP - GROUP PROFILE

GWP are to be responsiblefor the developmentof the designof the catering facilities in
Group B and Group C of the Millennium Dome Project.
Individual Design Briefi are to be preparedfor eachof the cateringfacilities.
3.1
Grow B
The cateringfacilities In-Group B areto include:
*
Pizza/Pasta
- Arena 3 - B3 (no extract/gas)
All WrappedUp
- PiazzaB4
All Day Breakfast
- RemotePiazza-B5
The cateringfacilities in Group C areto include:
4.0
LicensedBar
- Arena 2 - C 1 (no extra&gas)
Food Street
- Arena 2 (oppositebar) - C2 (no extract/gas)
Tea andCoffee bar
- Inner Mezzanine- C3 (no extract/gas)
Meridian Point Cafe
- Meridian Point - C5
Kiosks
- Various Positions - C6
DEMAND
The demandfor cateringservicesfrom eachfacility will be detailedin individual Design
Briefs.
5.0
RANGE OF SERVICES
The rangeof servicesto be provided in eachfacility will be detailed in individual Design
Briefs.
i
6.0
USAGE AND OPERATING HOURS

There is to be two sessionsof openingfor the MDC as follows:
Single Session
0730 - 1800
Double Session
0730 - 2300
The double sessionwill operateduring the Summer monthsand at weekends,bank holidays

and schoolholiday periods.
7.0
CATERING FACILITIES WILL OPERATE DURING THE FOLLOWING
HOURS
Grow B
The cateringfacilities in Group B will operate:
Pizza/pastaOutlet
-Arena3-B3
0730 - 1800
Single Session
Double Session
All WrappedUp Outlet -Piazza B4

lOOO- 1730
Single Session
Double Session
0730 - 2300
1000- 2200
All Day Breakfast
- Remote Piazza-B5
1000- 1730
Single Session
Double Session
1
~rantham Winch Partnership Ltd
1000- 2200
G~OUD
The cateringfacilities in Group C will operate:

*
LicensedBar
-Arena2-Cl
Single Session
1000- 1730
Double Session
1000- 2300
Food Street
- Arena 2 (oppositebar) - C2
1000- 1730
Single Session
Double Session
*
Tea andCoffee bar
- Inner Mezzanine- C3
0730 - 1800
Single Session
Double Session
*
8.0
1000- 2200
Meridian Point Cafe
0730 - 2200
- Meridian Point - C5
Single Session
0730 - 1800
Double Session
0730 - 2200
- Various Positions- C6
Kiosks
Single Session
0730 - 1800
Double Session
0730 - 2200
SCHEDULE OF ACCOMMODATION
The following areasareto be provided, where spacepermits, in all of the cateringfacilities.
8.1
Goods in/Decant Area

All materialswill enterthe kitchen departmentby this point. Goodswill be checkedandthe
transferredto the appropriatestorageareas.As far as practical, food and non food items
shouldbe deliveredat separatetimes. This areashouldbe separatedfrom the main kitchen by
a lobby area.
The areawill provide, laying off tabling with handwash facilities in closeproximity.
Spaceshouldbe allowed so that certaingoodscan be decantedfrom supplierscontainersinto
cleancontainersand an areaidentified to storesupplierscontainersprior to their return. This
areamay also be usedas a quarantineareafor damagedgoodsawaiting return.
From this area accessis requiredto:
8.2
a.
Dry goodsstore
b.
Cold storagefacilities
C.
Refusearea
RefuseArea
This areawill provide facilities for disposingof non-food materialsand packaging. Particular
caremust be taken to preventn&station in this areaand fly screensareto be provided where
necessary.The areawill be sited internally. In some instancesthe refuseareawill consistof
an areaseparatedfrom the main kitchen areas,using wheelie bins for the refusestorage,
prior to collection Refusewill be collected on a regularbasis.All food wastewill be disposed
of usingwaste disposalmachinesin the kitchen wash up areas.
8.3
Dr-vGoods, EauiDment and Disoosabks Store

The Dry Goods Storewill houseall tinned, bottled andpackagedgoods.
Goodsareto be storedon mobile racking. Adequatecirculation spacewill be requiredto
facilitate loading racking.
The Equipment and DisposableStorewill houseall non-food items. Goodswill be storedon
mobile racking.
Storagespaceis calculatedon the basis of daily deliver for food items, equipmentand
disposableitems.
The Dry Goods Storeneedsto be well ventilated and the ambient, internal temperatureshould
not exceed15C and 60% relative humidity.
In someinstancesthe dry good storagewill consist of racking positionedin the main kitchen
area.
8.4
Cleaners Room
A cleanersroom should be provided for the storageof cleaningmaterials and equipment.
1
Equipment required:-
Bucket sink
Racking
0
8.5
Kitchen Office
An office shouldbe providedfor the Head Chef to enablehim to control administration.
Ideally this would be within the kitchen area,however,it may be situatedadjacentto or near
the area. The office for the Pizza/Pastaoutlet is to be combined with the office in the Food
Street.
The offices are to havelockable doors.
Equipment required:*
Desk and chair
Notice boards
Filing cabinet
Safefloor mounted
I
Grantham Winch Partnmhip
Ltd
PIZZA
1.0
AND PASTA
OUTLET
INTRODUCTION
The Pizza and PastaOutlet will offer a diverserangeof Pastas,to include novelty shapesand
colours,with a wide ranging variety of saucesandvarious Pizzas. It will be located in the
Arena No. 3 areaof the Millennium Dome Complex (MDC). It will consist of a Main
Kitchen and Restaurantin a 27Omarea.
2.0
DEMAND
The demandfor cateringserviceswill be:150
Covers
Turnover is estimatedat:
2.5 x per session
3.0
RANGE OF SERVICES
The following rangeof servicesis to be offered:
Family style restaurant
4.0
STYLE OF SERVICE
Table Service
Pizza oven on view to customers
It shouldbe notedthat the kitchen design is to be basedon the maximum numberof coversto
be served.
5.0
TYPICAL MENUS
The level of equipmentwill relatedirectly to the areaavailable and the product rangeto be
offered. Productsareto be bought in, frozen/chilled and cooked/finishedin bakeoff ovens.
5.1
The Pizza menu will include the following:8 standardpizzasto be changedon a regularbasis
5.2
The Pastamenu will include the following:4 Pastadishesto be changedon a regularbasis

4 saucesas above
bagne
Vegetarianchoice
6.0
The kitchen will be adjacentto the restaurantarea.
6.1
Scheduleof Accommodation - Main Kitchen

From the drawingsand schedulesof accommodationprovided by the client we can identify
the accommodationrequiredand describethe fknctional contentof eacharea.
7.1.4
Frozen Food Store

Frozenfood will be storedin cabinetsat a temperaturebetween-22C and-18OC. Sufficient
spaceshouldbe allowed for the maneuveringof, and easeof picking products.
Delivery of foods will be receivedon a daily basis.
7.1.5
Cold StoraPe - Vwetables

Vegetablewill be pre-preparedand deliveredon a daily basis
Saladandfruit items will be delivered daily and be storedin refrigeratedbenchesat a
temperatureof OC to 4OC.
The benchesareto be mobile.
7.1.6 General Cold Storwe - Dairv and Chilled Foods

Dairy products(butter,yogurts, eggs,cream,cheeseetc.) and high risk productssuch as
tinned meatsand preparedchilled productswill be delivereddaily and be storedin
cabinets/benches
at a temperatureof OC to 4OC.
7.1.7 General Cold Storaee - Protein Items

Proteinitems (fresh meat, poultry, game etc.) will be delivered on a daily basisand be stored
in the cabinets/benchesat the relevanttemperature.
7.1.8
Prewwation Area - General and Hivh Risk

The majority of productswill be purchasedin a preparedstate(i.e. vegetableswill be peeled
and cleanedand meat will be butchered).However, someproductswill haveto be prepared
(diced, sliced etc.) andassembledprior to cooking, either individually or aspart of a
compositedish.
The areashouldbe segregatedso that raw meat, fish and vegetableproductscan be handled
separatelyand colour codedappliancesshouldbe provided to assistwith this. A separate
sectionshould be providedfor the preparationof high risk products,suchascooked meats
etc.(i.e.productswhich will requireno further heattreatmentprior to consumption.
The areadoesnot needto be environmentally controlled, however, local refrigerated
preparationtabling will be required.
Facilities for washingproductsanddisposing of waste material is required.
RefrigeratedPizza preparationbenches
sink unit
Stainlesssteelbenches
1
Equipmentrequired:Utensil wash sink unit

Stainlesssteelbenchingwith cupboardunder
waste disposalunit
Pm-washsink
Dishwasher- passthrough type
stainlesssteelracking
Wash handbasin
Winged insectkiller
The areawill be ambient,however, it would benefit from air conditioning or spot cooling.
7.1.11 Server-vArea
The serveryareais to be adjacentto the main restaurantareaand will consist of a visual
display of preparationand cooking of Pizzasplus the display of Pastasand sauceson offer. A
Walls ice cream bar is to be positioned in the restaurantarea..
The areashould allow for equipmentandstaff and customercirculation.
Equipmentrequired:-
Serverycounterswith a hatch.
Impinger conveyoroven
HeatedPizza display counter
RefrigeratedPizza preparationbenches
Refrigeratedbenches
Racking
Mobile tray/cutlery racks
7.1.12 BeverapeArea
A preparationareawherebeveragescan be preparedand served.
11
Equipmentrequired:-
Speciality coffee/teamachine
Mobile tray racks
Heatedcup dispensers
7.1.13 Walls Ice Cream Area
Washhandbasin
1
&mtham
Winch Partnership Ltd
12
Refrigeratedbenches
Winged insect killer
Wash handbasin
7.1.9 Production/PreD/Cookin&&verv
Area
The cooking areawill receiveproductsfrom cold storageand preparationareasand shouldbe

equippedto provide for the demandrelatedto the menu.
Equipmentrequired:*
Boiling tables
e BainMarie
l
Pastacookers
Stainlesssteelbenching
Wash handbasin
Particularattentionmust be given to ventilation and drainage.Floor surfacesareto be able to

withstandhigh temperaturesand be anti-slip.
The areawill be ambient, however,it would benefit from air conditioning or spot cooling.
7.1.10 Crockerv /Utensil Wash Area
Sitedadjacentto the preparationand cooking areas,the pan washis to be combined with the
crockwashareaand shouldbe capableof cleansingand sterilizing all equipmentgenerated
from the preparationareasand main cooking area.The designmust provide for a safeflow of
cleanand dirty goodthroughthe area.
Crockerywill be receivedinto the crock wash areafrom the variousdining areasfrom the
waiting staff. The designand siting of the areamust take accountof flow patterns,customer
convenienceand the needto minimize noise levels. Adequatestoragespacewill be required
in the crock wash for crockery,cutlery, plate loweratorsand racking.
I
&antham
Winch Partnership Ltd
10
8.0
PRELIMINARY
AREA ALLOCATION
- KITCHEN
Goodsin/decant Area
RefuseArea
3
Dry Goods, Equipment, DisposableStore
Freezer/RefrigeratorArea
PreparationArea
Main Cooking Area
Utensil/PanWash
Crockery Wash Area

CleanersRoom
Office
.. .. :
::
:. :.
..
:.
9.0
PRELIMINARY
:jf
AREA ALLOCATION
1: . . .. am&$
RooEwt No.:- :;.
Server-y
10
Beveragearea
Grantham Winch PartnershipLtd
- SERVERY AREA
*&.f
..
13
BUDGET ESTIMATE COST

Project:
MILLENNIUM DOME - PIZZA AND PASTA OUTLET
Project
No. 1262
Area
ITEM
I 1.0
1.1
KITCHEN
1
DESCRIPTION
I REFUSE AREA EXTERNAL

Bag holders
1.2
Standardcooler OMIT
2.0
DRY GOODS STORE
2.1
SS Shelving(solid) OMITTED
2.2
Storagecupboards
3.014.0 1REFRIGERATION AND FREEZERS

3.1
5.0
I 5.1
1RefrigeratorCabinetsOCto 4C
11
II
1PREP/PROD/MAIN COOWSERV AREA

1HD Boiling table
5.6
12
Refrigeratedpizza prep benches1500mm OMIT 1
5.3
I 5.5
RefrigeratorCabinets-2C to OC
I
5.2
5.4
FreezerCabinets-22C to -18C 15OOmm
4.1
4.2
Pastacookers
1Pizza oven conveyor
11
I Bain Marie c/w tap 900mm
I1
1Heatedpizza display WS OMIT 1
I 2385
5.7
Serverycounterwith hatch 2OOOmm
5.8
SS Benching 1500mm
I 50544
TOTAL
Grantham Winch Partnership
2385
Ltd
14
1BUDGET ESTIMATE COST

Project:
Project
1No.1262 1
I Date
11.0
KITCHEN OFFICE
11.1
Desk and chair
400
400
11.2
Notice Boards
200
200
11.3
Filing Cabinet
150
150
11.4
Safefloor mounted BY OTHERS
12.0
EXTRACTION
12.1
Ecology system(NOT INCLUDING SUPPLY AIR)
27000
27000
12.2
Fire suppression.5.1,5.3,5.4.(3xsingle)
1680
5040
13.0
ICE CREAM AREA
13.1
Washhandbasin
375
375
TOTAL
117153
16

Project:
I
Project
No. 1262
Area
KlTCHEN
Date
2.6.99
17
Project:
Project
No. 1262
Area
KITCHEN
Date
1 2.6.99
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
QTY
EACH
BALANCE BOUGHT FORWARD

DESIGN CONTINGENCY
OMIT
f.TOT
126895
INSTALLATION
Installation,comprising delivery, off loading, erection,
12699
12690
final connectionto valved servicesand commissioning

EXCLUSIONS
Primary M and E services
VAT
Builders work
Extract vent ductwork fhns
Hygienic cleaning
Statutoryapprovals/charges
TOTAL
139585
18
ALL WRAPPED
1.0
UP
INTRODUCTION
The All WrappedUp outlet will offer a selectionof hot and cold wrapped dishesand a wide
variety of sandwiches. It will be locatedin the PiazzaNo. 2 areaof the MDC. It will consist
of a Kitchen area,wash up areaandrestaurant,with hot and cold displays in the restaurant
areain a 320m2area.
2.0
DEMAND
The demandfor cateringserviceswill be:234 coversin the restaurant
Take away service
Turnover is estimatedto be 3 x per hour (eachseatto be usedthreetimes per hour)
A take away servicewill also be offered, however,turnover is difficult to estimatebut it is
anticipatedthat this will be a popular service.It is estimatedthat 700 coverswill be provided
eachsession.
3.0
RANGE OF SERVICES
The following cateringservicesareto be offered:-
~rantham
Hot and cold savouryand sweetwrappedmeals
Selectionof sandwicheswith diversefillings
Bagels (sweetand savoury)
Pancakesand gallettes
Baguettes(freshly bakedwith diversefillings)
Salads
Winch PartneAip
Ltd
19
Cold desserts,to include a selectionof ice creams/yogurts
Hot andcold beverages,to include cappuccinoetc. andjuices
Canned,bottled and post mix beveragesareto be included.
20
4.0
STYLE OF SERVICE
4.1
The Restaurant
The restaurantwill offer an assistedwaiter/waitressandclearanceservice,to include
beverages.
Someof the hot fillings are to beproducedfresh from back bar equipment(i.e. Woks, Crepe
rings etc.).
Baguettesareto be cookedfresh on the premisesin the kitchen.
4.1.1 The full rangeof productsis to be available on a take away basis.

4.1.2 All mealstaken in the restaurantareto beplated using crockery,no disposableitems.
4.1.3
It shouldbe notedthat the kitchen designis to be basedon the maximum numberof covers to
be servedat perceivedpeak periods.
21
5.0
TYPICAL MENUS
The level of equipmentwill relatedirectly to the areaavailable andthe product rangeto be
offered.
The menuwill include the following:Wrapped Meals - hot andcold. Savouryand sweet
Sandwiches- assortedfillings, pre packed
Bagels - hot and cold fillings
Baguettes- hot and cold fillings
Salads- variousin easyto handlepackaging
sushi- various
The menusdetailedarenot restrictedto the choicesshown andare only indicative of the
menusto be offered.
6.0
The kitchen and washup areawill be adjacentto the restaumnt.
6.1

From the drawings and schedulesof accommodationprovided by the client we can identify
the accommodationrequiredand describethe functional contentof eacharea.
6.1.4
Frozen Food Store

Frozenfood will be storedin cabinetsat a temperaturebetween-22C and -18OC. Sufficient
spaceshould be allowed for the maneuveringof, and caseof picking productsinside the
storagecabinets.
Ltd
22

The cabinetsareto be mobile
61.5
Cold Storape - Veeetables
Vegetablewill be pre-preparedand deliveredon a daily basis.

Saladand fruit items will be delivereddaily and be storedin cabinetsat a temperatureof 0C
to 4Oc.
The cabinetsareto be mobile.
6.1.6
General Cold Storape - Dairv and Chilled
Foods
Dairy products(butter, yogurts,eggs,cream,cheeseetc.)and high risk productssuchas

tinnedmeats andpreparedchilled productswill be delivereddaily and be storedin cabinetsat
a temperatureof OCto 4OC.
The cabinetsare to be mobile.
6.1.7
General Cold Storwe
- Protein
Items
Proteinitems (fresh meat, poultry, game etc.) will be deliveredon a daily basisandbe stored
in cabinetsat a temperatureof -2C to OC.
6.1.8
Prerxwation
Area /Main
Cooking
area - General
and HiPh Risk

and cleanedand meat will be butchered).However, someproductswill have to be prepared
(diced sliced etc.) and assembledprior to cooking, either individually or aspart of a
compositedish.
23
The areashouldbe segregatedso that raw meat, fish and vegetableproductscan be handled
separatelyandcolour codedappliancesshouldbe provided to assistwith this. A separate
sectionshouldbe providedfor the preparationof high risk products,suchas cookedmeats
The areadoesnot needto be environmentallycontrolled, however, local refrigerated
Facilities for washingproductsanddisposingof wastematerial is required.
Equipmentrequired:Combination oven
Boiling table
Slicing machine
sink unit
Refrigeratedbenches
Waste disposalunit
Wash hand basin
Particularattentionmust be given to ventilation and drainage.Floor surfacesare to be able to
The areawill be ambient,however,it would benefit from air conditioning or spot cooling.
61.9
Utensil/Pan Wash Area

Sitedadjacentto the preparationand cooking areas,the pan wash shouldbe capableof
cleansingand sterilizing all equipmentgeneratedfrom the preparationareasand main cooking
area.The designmust provide for a safeflow of clean and dirty goodthroughthe area.
Gmntham Winch Partnership Ltd
24
Particularcarewill haveto be paid to the drainageand ventilation in this area.Floor surfaces

are to be anti-slip and drainagedesignedto cope with spillage.
Equipmentrequired:*
Utensil wash machine
Waste disposalunit
Perforatedstainlesssteelracking
Wash handbasin
This areawill be combined with the Crockery wash area

6.1.10 Crockerv Wash Area
Crockerywill be receivedinto the crock wash areafrom the various dining areasfrom the
waiting staff The designand siting of the areamust take accountof flow patterns,customer
convenienceand the needto minimize noise levels. Adequatestoragespacewill be required
in the crock wash for crockery, cutlery, plate loweratorsand racking.
Equipmentrequired:*
Waste disposalunit
Pre-washsink
Dishwasher- rack type
Stainlesssteelracking
This areawill be combined with the Utensil wash area.
Grantham Winch PaxtnershipLtd
25
6.1.11 ServervArea
The server-yareais to be within the main restaurantareaand will consist of 4 counters, 1 each
offering hot dishes,cold dishes,beveragesandcondimentsand a seriesof cold merchandisers
with refrigerationunder. Equipment,including an oven is to be positionedbehindthe hot
counters.
The areashouldallow for equipmentand staff and customercirculation.
Equipmentrequired:Heatedcounterswith heatedcupboardsunder,c/w raisedglasslip at front. To include
loweratorsandrefrigeratedfront with prep areato rear.2OOOmm
Refrigeratedcounterswith refrigerationunder,c/w raisedglasslip at front. To
include loweratorsandrefrigeratedfront with prep areato rear.2OOOmm
RefrigeratedMerchandisersc/w chill air curtain and security screenwith
lock(Sandwichdisplay) 15OOmm
Condiment counter.
Plate lowerators.
Back bar equipment,to include a Char grill, Induction Wok, Creperings and
refrigeratedbenches.
SS Benching (Mobile).
Beveragecountercompletewith automaticbeveragemachineto producecoffee and
hot water.
Mobile tray/cutlery racks.
6.1.12 BeverageArea
Combined automaticcoffee/teabrewing set
Beveragecounter
26
Ltd
27
7.0
PRELIMINARY
AREA ALLOCATION
- KITCHEN
:gQo&g:;
: :j;;
.;;::.
.::.I;
.:.
:..
:.I.. .. :
::..
Goodsin/decantArea
RefuseArea
Dry Goods,Equipment,DisposableStore
PreparationAreaMain Cooking Area
Utensil/PanWash + CrockeryWash Area
CleanersRoom
8
8.0
PRELIMINARY
Ofke
AREA ALLOCATION
- SERVERY AREA
Serve;
Beveragearea
28

Project:
MILLENNIUM DOME - ALL WRAPPED UP
Project
I No. 1262
Area
Date
KlTCHEN
2.6.99
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
1.0
REFUSE AREA INTERNAL
1.1
Bag holders
3
I
1.2
Standardcooler OMT
2.0
DRY GOODS STORE
2.1
SS Shelving (solid)
3.014.0
REFRIGERATION AND FREEZERS
3.1
4.1
4.2
5.0
90
I
270
I
1 1735
600
1800
FreezerCabinets-22C to - 18C
2487
2487
Refrigeratorcabinets-2C to OC
2460
2460
2265
2265
~RefrigeratorcabinetsOCto 4C
~
~
PREPARATION AREA/ MAIN COOKING AREA
5.1
Combination Oven 6 shelf AMENDED
6400
6400
5.2
HD Boiling tables
2400
2400
5.3
5.4
Slicing Machine 300mm
1530
1530
SS Sink Unit single bowl
975
975
5.5
5.6
5.7
RefrigeratedBenches 15OOmm
1745
3490
1Winged Insect Killer

SS Wash Hand Basin
11
1
1 125
225
1 125
225
5.8
5.9
SS Benches
825
1650
1Water softener
11
1600
1600
1TOTAL
1 26677
29
TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD
26677
6.0
UTENSIL WASH
6.1
Double sink unit C/W 6kw heaterandtemp gauge 1 sink
6.2
Utensil washmachine UX 60 OMllTED
6.3
WasteDisposal Unit
6.4
SS Wash Hand Basin
6.5
Winged Insect Killer
125
125
6.6
SS Rackingperforated
600
1200
6.7
SS Benching
825
825
7.0
CROCKWASH AREA
7.1
Inlet tabling
7.2
Double sink inset in 7.1 OMITTED
7.3
Pre rinse spray
7.4
Dishwasher- Hood type 90 Racksper hour OMllTED
7.5
Outlet tabling
OMITTED
7.6
SS Racking(Solid)
OMJTTED
7.7
SS Benchingc/w shelving underOMITTED
7.8
Wall Cupboard
OMITTED
7.9
Mobile cupboard
OMITTED
8.0
SERVERY AREA
8.1
HeatedCountersC/W raisedglasslip at front. 2000mrn
3150
OMITTED
225
2250
OMITTED
OMITTED
13800
to include loweratorsand refrigeratedfront with prep

areato rear.
8.2
6400
Refrigeratedcounterswith refrigerationunder C/W

raisedglass lip at front. 2OOOmmto include lowerators.
8.3
28800
RefrigeratedMerchandisers(Sandwichdisplay) c/w air

curtain and lockable front grill 15OOmm
8.4
Plate.Lowerators2 insert, adjustable.OMITTED
8.5
RefrigeratorbenchesOC to 4%
3486
8.6
Freezerbench-18C to -22C
1905
TOTAL
88843
I 850
30

8.7
Hot cupboard
8.8
Back bar equipment:
8.8a
InductionWoks
8.8b
CrepeRings
8.8c
1 char grill
8.9
Cutlery/tray rack (mobile)
8.10
Cutlery and condimentcounter BY OTHERS
9.0
I -BEVERAGE AREA
I
Automatic BeverageMachine
9.1
2 OMITTED
4
I
9.2
9.3
I Beveragecounter
Heatedcup dispensers OMITTED
10.0
1CLEANERS ROOM
6000
180
1 6000
10.1
Bucket sink
I
10.2
Racking
11.0
KITCHEN OFFICE
11.1
11.2
I Desk and chair

Notice Boards
11.3
Filing Cabinet
11.4
Safe floor mountedBY OTHERS
12.0
1EXTRACTION
12.1
Main Kitchen 3m x 1.5m
12.2
Crockwasharea3.5m x 1.5m
OMITTED
12.3
Utensil washarea2.5m x 1.5m
12.4
Back bar equipment7m x 1.5m
12.5
Fire suppression.12.ll2.4. (lxsingle, lxdouble)
TOTAL
31
I TOTAL
CARRIED FORWARD
1TOTAL
140994
32
MILLENNIUM DOME - ALL WRAPPED UP
Project:
Project
No.
KITCHEN
Area
Date
28.4.99
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
1 QTY
1EACH
&TOT
BALANCE BOUGHT FORWARD

I
140994
I
DESIGN CONTINGENCY OM71TED
INSTALLATION
14099
14099

EXCLUSIONS
VAT
Builders work
3
Extract vent ductwork fans

Hygienic cleaning
1Statutoryapprovals/charges
I
II
II
II
Fut.niturebinishes/dCcor
treatment
Cashregister/Controlequipment
Computers/a&in equipment
Main contractorsdiscount
Professionalfees
Light equipment
TOTAL
155093
33
ALL DAY BREAKFAST

1.0
INTRODUCTION
The All Day Breakfastoutlet will offer regional style British Breakfast (English, Welsh,
Scottishand Irish) from separateserveryareaswithin the restaurantarea. It will be locatedin
the Piazzaareaof the MDC. It will consist of a Kitchen area,dining room, serveryareas
within the dining room including fresh bakebreadproducts(i.e. rolls, croissantsetc.)in a
379d area.
2.0
DEMAND
The demandfor cateringserviceswill be:175coversin the restaurant
Turnover is estimatedto be 2 X per hour (eachseatto be usedtwice per hour)
3.0
RANGE OF SERVICES
The following cateringservicesare to be offered:-
Hot platedcompositebreakfastmeals
Traditional lunch-typemenu (pies, fish and chips etc.)
Selectionof cereals
Selectionof freshly baked products
Selectionof fruit juices, fruits and soft drinks
Hot beverages
4.0
STYLE OF SERVICE
4.1
The Restaurant
Gmntham Winch Partnership Ltd
34
The restaurantwill offer a full compositeplated breakfaston an assistedservicebasis,with

tablesbeing clearedby staff. This will be served,initially from 3 serverycounterswithin the
restaurant,until approximately 1100hrs.
A separatecereal/fruitjuice/ fresh fruit counterwill also be on offer on a self servebasis,with
items priced individually.
Thereis to be a dedicatedserveryareaoffering freshly bakedproducts(rolls, croissantsetc.)
within the restaurant.This will havean oven at the rear of the serveryto enhancethe display
and introducethe aromaof fresh bake into the restaurant.
A separatebeveragebar will offer a full rangeof hot beveragesfor all meals.
The menuswill be varied, offering English, Irish, Scottish,and Welsh breakfastdishesas
detailedat 6.0
4.1.1 At approximately 11OOhrs,2 of the 3 breakfastserverieswill convertto a traditional lunch
type menus,whilst the third will continueto offer an all day breakfast.
4.1.2
All of the serverieswill be replenishedfrom the kitchen areaof the outlet, however,the
accentis to be on a visual conceptof servicewith freshly cooked productsbeingavailable,
from back bar equipmentwherepracticable.
4.1.3
All mealsare to be plated using crockery,no disposableitems. There is to be no take away

service from this outlet.
5.0
TYPICAL
MENUS

offered.
5.1
Breakfast:English:-
RegionalEnglish Sausage
Bacon
Fried bread
Tomatoes
35
Kippers/haddocketc.
Eggs Various
Irish:-
As aboveplus the following:

Guinness
Sodabread
Ulster Fry
Scottish:-
Porridgewith Honey
Firman Haddock, Arbroath Smokies,Loch Fyne kippers
SquareSausage
Regional Sausage
Black Pudding
Sliced Haggis
Potato Scones
Fried Cloutie Dumpling
Fried Fruit Slice
Eggs Various
Deepfried Mars bars
Welsh:-
As English plus the following:

Lava Breadand bacon
5.2
The lunch offered will be traditional fare with a regional flavour:Various pies
Fish and Chips
Mix Grill
steaks
Chops(porkand lamb)
Gammon Steak
Etc:
5.3
Bakery Counter:-
36
Freshrolls
Croissants
FreshBreads
Toasts
5.4
Fruit/Juice/CerealCounter:Cerealselection
Fruit/vegetablejuice selection
Mango/orange/melon
Y ogurtkr~me fraiche
5.5
BeverageCounter:The beveragecounterwill offer the full rangeof hot beverages.

The menusdetailedare not restrictedto the choices shownand areonly indicative of the
menusto be offered.
37
6.0
6.1

the accommodationsrequiredand describethe functional contentof eacharea.
6.1.1 Frozen Food Store

Frozenfood will be storedin a Freezerroom at a temperaturebetween-22C and - 18OC.
Sufficient spaceshouldbe allowed for the maneuveringof, and easeof picking products
insidethe freezerroom.
6.1.5 Cold Storape - Vepetables
Vegetablewill be pre-preparedanddelivered on a daily basis.
Saladand fruit items will be delivered daily and be storedin refrigeratedbenchesat a
temperatureof 0C to 4OC.
The benchesare to be mobile.
6.1.6 General Cold Storape - Dairv and Chilled Foods
Dairy products(butter,yogurts, eggs,cream,cheeseetc.) and high risk productssuchas
tinned meatsand preparedchilled productswill be delivered daily and be storedin the cold
room at a temperatureof OC to 4C.
6.1.7
General Cold Storage - Protein Items

Proteinitems (fresh meat,poultry, game etc.) will be delivered on a daily basisand be stored
in the freezerandcold rooms at the relevanttemperature.
Grantham Winch Partnership LM
38
6.1.8 Premration Area - General and HiPh Risk

The majority of productswill be purchasesin a preparedstate(i.e. vegetableswill be peeled
andcleanedand meat will be butchered).However, someproductswill haveto be prepared
(diced, sliced etc.) and assembledprior to cooking, either individually or as part of a
compositedish.
The areashould be segregatedsothat raw meat, fish and vegetableproductscanbe handled
separatelyand colour codedappliancesshould be providedto assistwith this. A separate
sectionshouldbe providedfor the preparationof high risk products,suchascookedmeats
The areadoesnot needto be environmentally controlled, however,local refrigerated
Facilities for washingproductsanddisposingof wastematerial is required.
Mixer with mincer/dicer
Slicing machine
sink
Refrigeratedbenches
Wash hand basin
unit
6.1.9 Production - Cookinp Area

The cooking areawill receiveproductsfrom cold storageand preparationareasand shouldbe
equippedto provide for the demandrelatedto the menu.
Combination ovens
39
Roiling tables
Deep Fryers
Refrigeratedbenches
Particularattentionmust be given to ventilation and drainage.Floor sur!%ccsare to be able to

6.1.10 Utensil/Pan Wash Area
Sitedadjacentto the preparationandcooking areas,the pan wash should be capableof
cleansingand sterilizing all equipmentgeneratedfrom the preparationareasandmain cooking
area.The design must provide for a safeflow of clean and dirty goodthrough the area.
Particularcarewill haveto be paid to the drainageand ventilation in this area.Floor surfaces
areto be anti-slip and drainagedesignedto cope with spillage.
This areawill be combinedwith the Crockery wash area
Equipmentrequired:*
Utensil wash machine
Waste disposalunit
Perforatedstainlesssteelracking
Rotary pot scrubber
Wash handbasin
40

Crockery will be receivedinto the crock wash areafrom the various dining areasfrom the
convenienceandthe needto minimize noise levels. Adequatestoragespacewill be required
in the crock wash for crockery, cutlery, plate loweratorsand racking.
Equipmentrequired:*
Prewash sink
Dishwasher- rack type
The areawill be ambient, however, it would benefit from air conditioning or spot cooling.
6.1.12 Servers Area
The serveryareais to be within the main restaurantareaand will consistof 3 hot breakfast
countersand 1 hot bakery counter. Back bar equipmentis to be positionedbehindthe
breakfastcountersand an oven behind the bakery counter.
The areashouldallow for equipmentand staff and customercirculation.
Equipmentrequired:0
Heatedcounterswith heatedcupboardsunder,complete with overheadquartzheating

lamps and sneezescreen.To include griddle plateson the breakfastcounters
Refrigeratedwell counterswith refrigerationunder on the cereal/fruit/juicecounter
Plate lowerators
Back bar equipment,to include fryers, salamander,chargrills andundercounter

freezersand refrigerators.
41
Combination oven
Racking
S Benching(Mobile)
Beveragecountercomplete with automaticbeveragemachineto producecoffee and

hot water
Mobile tray/cutlery racks
Combinationoven extractionwill channelthe fresh baking aromaout throughexternalwalls.

6.1.13 BeverapeArea
Equipmentrequired:-
Combined automatic coffee/teabrewing set
Mobile tray racks
Beveragecounters
42
7.0
PRELIMINARY AREA ALLOCATION
- KITCHEN
RefuseArea
External
5.75
10.5
PreparationArea
23.3
Main Cooking Area
Utensil/PanWash
11.25
CrockeryWash Area
CleanersRoom
10
O&e
,i:
8.0
.2:.
..
PRELIMINARY
j .jj
:.:.:
:.
::: j. .::::; :.. ..1:

;. .jjj: :. :: . :...
S&t
Tq
:::
.:.
::::..
AREA ALLOCATION
: Rcw3A3
NO* I.
9
10
: ..:.:::
y..:(:;..:.:
:
.I: ..
Servery
Beveragearea
- SERVERY AREA
RQOM
..
AREA@
)
1
79
79
Grantham
Winch
Partnership
Ltd
43
I BUDGET ESTIMATE COST
I
No. 1262
Area
KlTCHEN
Date
2.6.99
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
1.0
1.1
Bag holders
1.2
Standardcooler OMZT
2.0
DRY GOODS STORE
2.1
SS Racking (solid)l5Omm
3.0
FREEZER ROOMS
3.1
1 QTY
1EACH
STOT
90
270
1735
600
2400
Freezerroom 2m x 1.5m
3500
3500
3.2
SS Racking(solid)
600
1800
4.0
CHILL ROOM
4.1
Chill room 2m x 1.5m
3500
3500
4.2
SS Racking(solid)
600
1800
5.0
PREPARATION AREA
5.1
Mixing Machine c/w mincer and dicer 20 ltr OMIT
5.2
3800
I
1 Slicing Machine 300 mm OA4IT
1 1530
5.3
SS Sink Unit single bowl
975
975
5.4
RefrigeratedBenches1500mm
1745
3490
5.5
125
125
5.6
SSWash Hand Basin
225
225
TOTAL
18085
44

Project:
MILLENNIUM DOME - ALL DAY BREAKFAST
Project
INo. 1262
1
KlTCHEN
Area
Date
I 2.6.99
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
QTY
EACH
&TOT

5.7
18085
SS Benches
5.8
SS Centrebenchwith over shelf
6.0
PRODUCTION - COOKING AREA
6.1
825
I
3300
I
2500
2500
CombinationOven 6 shelf REDUCED FROM 10
6400
6400
6.2
CombinationOven 6 shelf
6400
6400
6.3
I-ID Boiling tables4 ring
2400
2400
6.4
HD DeepFryers 50 kgs TRANSFER1 TO BACK BAR
8500
8500
6.5
Mobile filtration unit
2000
2000
6.6
RefrigeratedBenches1500mm
1745
3490
6.7
6.8
SS Benching
825
3300
1Water softener
11
1 1000
1 1000
7.0
7.1
UTENSIL WASH
I
1Double sink unit C/W 6kw heaterandtemp gauge 1 sink
3150
3150
7.2
Utensil wash machineGR66 OMIT
7.3
Rotary pot scrubber
1850
1850
7.4
WasteDisposal Unit
2100
2100
7.5
SS Wash Hand Basin
225
225
7.6
125
125
7.7
SS Racking perforated
525
1050
7.8
SS Benching omitted
65875
TOTAL
Grantham Winch P&m-ship
12000
Ltd
45
9.4
Merchandiseron 9.3
2300
2300
9.5
Plate Lowerators2 insert, adjustable.Inset in 9.119.3
850
3400
9.6
9.6a
Back bar equipment:

Salamander
850
1700
9.6b
deepfryers TRANSFERFROM 6.4
8500
8500
9.6~
Chargrills
1430
2860
9.6d
Refrigeratedbenches1500mm
1745
3490
9.7
Combination oven 10 shelf
8700
8700
9.8
Wall Bench
525
525
TOTAL
141965
46

Project:
Area
r--
Project
1No.1262 1
I 1
KI7-CHEN
Date
2.6.99
9.12
Gastronormtrolley 18rack
530
530
9.13
Chilled drinks dispenser
500
2000
9.14
SS Work tops
300
600
9.15
Wall Bench
525
525
9.16
Water softener
600
600
10.0
BEVERAGE AREA
10.1
Automatic BeverageMachine (Coffee/Hot Water)
2600
10400
10.2
Beveragecounter2000mm
2400
4800
11.0
CLEANERS ROOM
11.1
Bucket sink incl taps
375
375
11.2
Racking
525
525
12.0
KlTCHEN OFFICE
12.1
Deskand chair
400
400
12.2
Notice Boards
200
200
12.3
Filing Cabinet
150
150
12.4
Safefloor mountedBY OTHERS
TOTAL
177695
47

Project:
MILLENNIUM DQME - ALL DAY BREAKFAST
r-Area
No. 1262
IDate
KITCHEN
ITEM
13.0
Project
DESCRIPTION
QTY
EACH
STOT
177695
EXRACTION
0
0
13.1
Main kitchen 3.6m x 1.6m
4025
4025
13.2
Crockwash3.5m x 1.5m
1840
1840
13.3
Utensil wash 2.5m xl .5m
1265
1265
13.4
Back bar equipment8.5m x 1.5m
7705
7705
13.5
Serverycounter2m x 1.5m
7500
7500
13.6
Combi oven servery 1.2mxl .2m
1265
1265
13.7
Fire suppression.13.1,13.4,13.6(2xsingle,lxdouble)
6096
6096
TOTAL
207391
48
1BUDGET ESTIMATE COST

Project:
Project
1I No.
KITCHEN
Area
Date
2.6.99
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
QTY
EACH
TOTAL BOUGHT FORWARD
ZTOT
207391
0
DESIGN CONTINGENCY OMZi7ED
0
0
INSTALLATION
Instzdlation,comprising delivery, off loading, erection,
0
1
20739
20739

0
EXCLUSIONS
0
0
VAT
Builders work
Extract vent ductwork fans
Hygienic cleaning
Futniturelfinishes/dCcortreatment
Computers/adminequipment
Professionalfees
Light equipment
0
0
TOTAL
Ltd
228130
49
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The LicensedBar will be a traditional British bar offering a full bar service. It will be located
in the Arena 2 areaof the Millennium Dome Complex (MDC) oppositethe Food Streetand
will include a largeseatingarea,both looseand fixed. It will be in a 350m2area.
2.0
DEMAND
The demandsfor bar serviceswill be:Coversare to be conjirmed
Turnoveris to be conjrmed
3.0
RANGE OF SERVICES
Traditional full bar servicewill be available.
4.0
STYLE OF SERVICE
Looseand fixed seatingwill be available adjacentto the bar.
5.0
TBC by Granada
5.1
Scheduleof Accommodation
the accommodationsrequiredand describethe functional content of eacharea.
5.1.1 Cellar/Bar Storwe Area
so
All materialswill enterthe bar storageareaby this point. Goodswill be checkedand

transferredto the appropriatestorage/barareas.
From this areaaccessis requiredto:
a.
Bar areas
b.
Empty Barrel/ContainersReturn Store
C.
Refusearea
5.1.2 Emutv Barrels and Container Returns Store

A secureareais to be available,adjacentto the Cellar/Bar StorageArea.
5.1.4 Main Bar Area
The main bar will consistof :
Back Bar display to include optic standsand shelving
Main bar counter
Ice machine
Bar cooler display units
Glass wash facilities c/w basketracks
Glass storagef&cilities
SS Sink unit(doublewith drainer)
SS washhandbasin
Work tops with shelving/cupboardsunder
Grantham Winch P-hip
Ltd
51
6.0
PRELIMINARY
AREA ALLOCATION
:;: ::>:
y.:; .::.:.:.
:il.:iiiii:... :: .:
:. ..
:...
g@qfg
] ;I.. .:;.:: : ::.
.. :.
:.:::y
:..:.:::.::..
.: .,:..,::: ..:.:::
::.::.:..:.:...: .:.:..:::::: : j :;:jj: ..:::.
Cellar/Bar StorageArea
Empty Barrel and ContainerReturnsStore
RefuseArea
Main Bar Area
CleanersRoom
Ltd
52
1
Project
MILLENNIUM DOME - LICENSED BAR
Project
No. 1262
1.4
Wine Racks
1.5
Pallets
2.0
EMPTY BARREL/CONTAINER RETURNS STORE
2.1
Racking
2.2
Pallets
2.3
SackTrolley
3.0
REFUSE AREA
3.1
Bin Holders
4.0
MAINBARAREA
4.1
Main Bar Counter
4.2
Back Bar display counter
4.3
Optic stands
4.4
Ice machine
4.5
Bottle cooler display units
4.6
Glasswash machine
4.7
Basketracks
4.8
Glassstorageunits
Ltd
90
270
53
Till shelf
4.10
Beerstation
4.11
Blenderstation
4.12
SS Sink unit (doublewith drainer)
4.13
SS washhand basin
4.14
Work tops with shelving/cupboardsunder
CLEANERS ROOM
Bucket sink
Shelving
Ltd
54
FOOD STREET
1.0
INTRODUCTION
The Food Streetis to be a family areaandwill consist of 5/6 market type static carts, in a
modem contemporarystyle, offering various regional British menus. It will be located in the
Arena 2 areaof the Millennium Dome Complex (MDC) oppositethe LicensedBar. It will
consistof 180m2area
2.0
DEMAND
The demandfor cateringserviceswill be:170 Covers.
Turnover is estimatedat 1500coversper session
3.0
RANGE OF SERVICES
Commodities areto be cookedat a different location to the Food Streetand deliveredto the
cartsfor serving.
The following rangeof goodsis to be offered:
Hot Roastmeatsin baguettes,turkey legs
Corn&h Pasties
Melton Mowbray Pies
Potted Shrimps
Smoked Salmon
Speciality sausagesin crusty rolls (Cooked in-situ)
Cheeses
Toffee apples,roastednuts
55
4.0
STYLE OF SERVICE
Full Takeawayservice
Seatingavailableadjacentto stalls
5.0
TYPICAL MENUS
The level of equipmentwill relatedirectly to the areaavailableandthe product rangeto be
offered.Productsareto be boughtin, frozen/chilled and cooked/finishedin bakeoff ovens.
5.1
The Cart menuswill include the following:Seerangeof servicesat 3.0
6.0
The food arts areto be adjacentto the licensedbar and the childrens play area.
6.1

From the drawingsand schedulesof accommodationprovidedby the client we can identify
the accommodationsrequiredand describethe tImctiona1contentof eacharea.

Frozenfood will be storedin cabinetsat a temperaturebetween-22OCand -18OC. Sufficient
spaceshouldbe allowed for the maneuveringof, and easeof picking productsinside the
storagecabinets.
The cabinetsare to be mobile.
6.1.2 Cold Storave - Vegetables
Vegetablewill be pre-preparedand delivered on a daily basis.
Ltd
56
Saladand fruit items will be delivered daily and be storedin cabinetsat a temperatureof OC
to 4Oc.
6.1.3 General Cold StoraPe- Dairv and Chilled Foods
tinned meats andpreparedchilled productswill be delivereddaily and be storedin cabinetsat
a temperatureof OCto 4OC.
6.1.4 General Cold Storage - Protein Items
Protein items (fresh meat,poultry, game etc.) will be deliveredon a daily basisandbe stored
in cabinetsat a temperatureof -2C to 0C.
6.1.5 Prenaration/ Production/ Cookiw /Serverv Area

The majority of productswill be purchasedin frozen or chilled for final baking or reheatingin
the servicearea.
Facilities for washingproducts,equipmentand disposingof wastematerial arerequired.
Combinationovens 1 x 10 shelf & 1 x 6 sgelf
Refrigeratedpreparationbench
ContemporaryCartsc/w Heateddisplay counters
ContemporaryCartsc/w Refrigerateddisplay counters
sink
Stainlesssteel benchesc/w shelving under
unit
6.1.6
Winged insectkiller
Wash handbasin
BeverageArea
This areawill be an integral part of the bar area.The equipmentis to be includedin the bar
estimatecosts.
Equipmentrequired:Combinedcoffee/teabrewing set
Grantham Winch Partmship
Ltd
58
7.0
PRELIMINARY
AREA ALLOCATION
:.. ..j:
,:::.:j:jj:::..:
::.::::::
.: :.::
- KITCHEN
I.
:::.:j
..
:.
il:...:,:I,I::,;;ti:~~~~~~:~~~:
...:
.._
.. .
. . . ..~.:...
..::.j:
:. ::.:
.::;y;ils
,
.::.:jj:::I:l::~j;j.j~~.::
: .:..
,;j:::.jjx:j:
Goodsin/decantArea
RefuseArea
Preparation/Production/Cooking /Servery Area
Cleaners room
:.
:
..
. . :.
~
8.0
..:.
PRELIMINARY
AREA ALLOCATION
Ltd
- SERVERY AREA
59
Project
MILLENNIUM DOME - FOOD STREET
Project
No. 1262
Area
KlTCHEN
Date
2.6.99
ITEM
DESCRlPTION
1.0
1.1
Bag holders
1.2
Standardcooler OkfIT
2.0
DRY GOODS STORE
2.1
SS Shelving(solid)
3.014.0
REFRIGERATION AND FREEZERS
3.1
90
270
1735
I
1
2
600
1200
FreezerCabinets-22C to - 18C
2848
2848
4.1
Refrigeratorcabinets-2C to OC
2460
4920
4.2
RefrigeratorcabinetsOCto 4C
1496
1496
5.0
PREPARATION/ PRODUCTION/ COOKING/
I 8700
I 8700
6400
SERVERY AREA
~5.1
Combination 10 shelf
5.2
Combination 6 shelf
5.3
Refrigeratedpreparationbenches15OOmm
6400
2
I
1745
I
SS Sink Unit
975
975
5.5
125
125
5.6
SS Wash Hand Basin
225
225
5.7
SS Benchesc/w shelving under
825
1650
132299
Ltd
3490
I
5.4
TOTAL
60

Project
Project
No. 1262
Area
KlTCHEN
Date
2.6.99
ITEM
DESCRIPTION

5.8
I 6.0
6.1
Ice machine
T-jr/z-
I FOOD STREET SERVING AREA

I
1 Contemporarycartsc/w Heateddisplay counter2OOOmm 3
6.2
Contemporarycartsc/w Refrigerateddisplay counter2m
1 10000
~30000
10000
20000
6.1/6.2 EACH CART REDUCED BY f2000.00

7.0
BEVERAGE AREA
7.1
Automatic BeverageMachine (Coffee/Hot Water) Oh&T
7.2
Beveragecounter OMlT
I 7.3
I Heatedcup dispensersOMIT
1 8.0
I
1 CLEANERS ROOM
8.1
Bucket sink
300
300
8.2
Shelving
525
525
KITCHEN OFFICE 2
9.1
Desk and chair
400
400
9.2
Notice Boards
200
200
9.3
Filing Cabinet
150
150
9.4
1 Safefloor mountedBY OTHERS
I
TOTAL
1
89595
61

Project
Project
No. 1262
Area
KITCHEN
Date
I 2.6.99
DESCRIPTION
ITEM
BALANCE CARRIED FORWARD
89595
EXTRACTION
10.1
Condensehood
1100
1100
10.2
Fire suppression.5.1,5.2(lxsingle)
1680
1680
9.0
KITCHEN OFFICE 2
9.1
Deskand chair
400
800
9.2
] Notice Boards
12
] 200
1400
9.3
Filing Cabinet
150
300
9.4
Safefloor mountedBY OTHERS 1.2m x 1.2m

I
I
TOTAL
1 93875
62
Project
Project
No. 1262
Area
IUTCHEN
Date
2.6.99
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
BALANCE CARRIED FORWARD
93875
DESIGN CONTINGENCY OMIT

INSTALLATION
9388
9388

EXCLUSIONS
Primary M andE services
VAT
Builders work
Extract vent ductwork f&s
Hygienic cleaning
Fumiture/finishes/d~cortreatment
Computers/adminequipment
Professionalfees
Light equipment
TOTAL
103263
63
TEA AND COFFEE

1.0
BAR
INTRODUCTION
The Tea and Coffee Bar will offer a high quality beverageserviceand is to include a simple
lunch/snackservice. It will be located in the Inner Mezzanineareaof the Millennium Dome
Complex (MDC). It will consistof a Restaurantandpreparation kitchen in a 400m2area.
It shouldbe notedthat there is no gas or extmction availablein this areaof the MDC
2.0
DEMAND
The demandfor catering serviceswill be:200 Covers
Turnover is anticipated to be very high.
3.0
RANGE OF SERVICES
The following rangeof goodsis to be offered:
4.0
High Quality Coffee
Teas, including speciality flavours
Creamteas
Sandwich lunches
Pastries, savouryand sweet
STYLE OF SERVICE
Table servicewill be offered
t
64
5.0
TYPICAL MENUS
offered. Productsare to be bought in, frozen/chilled and cooked@ished in bakeoflovens.
5.1
The menuswill include the following:Menus TBC by Granada
6.0
The tea and cofleebar will consist of a Sk-veryArea in the Restaurantarea with a
preparation/small kitchen area adjacent to the servery area.
6.1
Schedule of Accommodation

Frozenfood will be storedin cabinetsat a temperaturebetween-22C and -18OC. Sufficient
spaceshouldbe allowed for the maneuveringof, and easeof picking productsinside the
storagecabinets.
Delivery offoods will be receivedon a daily basis, (TBC by Grana&)
The cabinetsare to be mobile andfitted with a safetyalarm and temperaturemonitoring
system.The kitchen should haveaccessto a 100% backupstoragesystemin the main storage
area.
6.1.2
Cold StoraPe- Vegetables

Vegetablewill bepre-preparedand deliveredon a akily basis.
Saladand fruit items will be delivered daily and be storedin cabinetsat a temperatureof OC
to 4Oc.
Grantham Winch P-hip
Ltd
65
The cabinets are to be mobile andjtted
with a safety alarm and temperature
monitoring
system. The kitchen should have access to a 100% backup storage system in the main storage
area.
6.1.3 General Cold Storape - Dairv and Chilled Foods

tinned meatsand preparedchilled productswill be delivered daily andbe storedin cabinetsat
a temperatureof 0C to 4OC.
with a safety alarm and temperahue
monitoring
area.
6.1.4
General Cold Storage - Protein Items

Proteinitems (freshmeat, poultry, game etc.) will be delivered on a daily basisandbe stored
in cabinetsat a temperatureof -2C to OC.
with a safety alarm and temperahue
monitoring
area.
6.1.5 Preuaration/ Production

The commodities for servingat the Food carts will be preparedandcookedin remote kitchens
anddeliveredto the food streetfor service. There will be minimal facilities to finish some of
the items to be served i.e. Bread androlls to be baked,sausagesetc. However, therewill be
no extractionin this area.
Facilities for washing products,equipmentand disposing of wastematerial are required.
Equipmentrequired:-
Combination (Impinger oven-less heat and minimal extraction required)
66
61.5
Refrigeratedpreparationcounter
ss
SS benchesc/w shelvingunder
Wash handbasin
sink
unit
BeverageArea
A preparation
area where beverages can be prepared prior to sewice.
This area will be an integral part of the Food Street area
Equipment
required:-
Combined cofee/tea
,
brewing set
67
7.0
PRELIMINARY
AREA ALLOCATION
- KITCHEN
1
-ji;ii-i:::::~~:~:~:~~~:~~~~:~:.:.:.~.~::::
j .:.. :.j:..li::;iilli::.:,$i;jjj
.....
j::jjjj:;:::y :. ::.:..::...
:. .,.:: y...j::. ~~:~:::i:ji::..:jj:
::..;;;j/
Goods in/decant Area
Refuse Area
Dry Goods, Equipment,
Preparation/
PRELIMINARY
Production
Cleanersroom
8.0
Disposable Store
AREA ALLOCATION
- SERVERY
AREA
Beverage area
/
Grantham Winch Partnexship Ltd
68
I--BUDGET ESTIMATE
Project
COST
MILLENNIUM DOME - TEA AND COFFEE BAR
Project
No.
Area
KITCHEN
Date
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
2.0
REFUSE AREA
2.1
Bag holders
90
270
2.2
Standardcooler
1735
1735
400
800
3.0
3.1
5.0
DRY GOODS STORE

SS Racking (solid)
PREPARATION/ PRODUCTION AREA
5.4
ss sink unit
650
650
5.5
125
125
5.6
SS Wash Hand Basin
150
150
5.7
SS Benchesc/w shelvingunder
550
1100
6.0
BEVERAGE AREA
6.1
BeverageMachine (Coffee/HotWater)
2600
15600
6.2
Beveragecounter 2OOOmm
4800
4800
Grantham Winch Paxtnenhip
Ltd
69

Project
MILLENNIUM DOME - TEA AND COFFEE BAR
Project
No.
Area
KITCHEN
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
7.0
7.2
Date
CLEANERS ROOM
1Bucket sink
1
I1
1Racking
11
KITCHEN OFFICE
8.0
8.1
Desk andchair
8.2
Notice Boards
8.3
Filing Cabinet
8.4
TOTAL
/
70
MERIDIAN
1.0
POINT
CAFE
INTRODUCTION
The Meridian Point Cafe will offer a high quality traditional British tea menu. It will be
locatedin the Meridian Point areaof the MDC. It will consistof a Kitchen areaand servery
areaswith a separatedining area.
2.0
DEMAND
The demandfor cateringserviceswill be:100 coversin the restaurant
Turnover is estimatedto be 2 X per hour (eachseatto be usedtwice per hour)
3.0
RANGE OF SERVICES
The following cateringservicesareto be offered:-
Sandwichesand filled baguettes
High quality cakesand gateaux
Home bake style of cakesand quiches
Selectionof fruit juices, fruits and soft drinks
Hot beverages
4.0
STYLE OF SERVICE
4.1
The Cafe will offer assistedcounter servicewith waiter/waitressclearanceservice.
5.0
TYPICAL MENUS
The level of equipmentwill relatedirectly to the areaavailableandthe product rangeto be
offered.
I
G~antham Winch Partnership Ltd
71
5.1
The menuwill include:

Fresh rolls
Croissants
Bagum=
Sandwiches
Quiches
Savourypies
Home bake cakes
Gateaux
Freshfruit
5.2
BeverageCounter:The beveragecounterwill offer the full rangeof hot beverages,including cappuccinoand

espressocoffee, a variety of fruit and herbteas and soft drinks.
The menusdetailedarenot restrictedto the choicesshownand are only indicative of the
menusto be offered.
6.0
6.1

6.1.1
Frozen Food Store

Frozenfood will be storedin a Freezerroom at a temperaturebetween-22C and -18C.
Sufficient spaceshould be allowed for the maneuveringof, and easeof picking products
insidethe freezerroom.
i
Ltd
72

61.2
Cold Storape - Veeetables

Vegetablewill be pre-preparedand deliveredon a daily basis.
Saladandfruit items will be delivereddaily and be storedin refrigeratedbenchesat a
temperatureof OCto 4C.
The benchesareto be mobile.
6.1.3
General Cold Storape - Dairv and Chilled Foods

Dairy products(butter,yogurts, eggs,cream,cheeseetc.) andhigh risk productssuch as
tinned meatsandpreparedchilled productswill be delivereddaily andbe storedin the cold
room at a temperatureof OCto 4OC.
61.4
General Cold Storape - Protein Items

Protein items (fresh meat,poultry, game etc.) will be delivered on a daily basis andbe stored
in the freezerand cold rooms at the relevanttemperature.
6.1.5 PreDarationl Production - Cooking Area

andcleaned).However, someproductswill haveto be prepared and bakedoff, either
individually or as part of a compositedish.
The areadoesnot needto be environmentally controlled,however, local refrigerated
Facilities for washingproductsand disposingof wastematerial is required.
I
73
Equipmentrequired:-
Combination oven 6 shelf
Refrigeratedpreparationbenches
sink
Wash hand basin
Microwave oven
unit
Particularattentionmust be given to drainage.Floor surfacesare to be able to withstand high

temperaturesand be anti-slip.
6.1.6 Utensil/Pan Wash Area
Sitedadjacentto the preparationand cooking areas,the panwash should be capableof
cleansingand sterilizing all equipmentgeneratedfrom the preparationareasandmain cooking
area.The design must provide for a safeflow of clean and dirty goodsthrough the area.
Particularcarewill haveto be paid to the drainageand ventilation in this area.Floor surt%ces
areto be anti-slip and drainagedesignedto copewith spillage.
This areawill be combinedwith the Crockery wash area
Equipmentrequired:-
Utensil wash sink(double)
Waste disposalunit
Wash hand basin
~rantham Winch Partnership Ltd
74
stainlesssteelracking(perforated)

Crockerywill be receivedinto the crock wash areafrom the various dining areasfrom the
convenienceandthe needto minimize noise levels, Adequatestoragespacewill be required
in the crock washfor crockery, cutlery, plate loweratorsandracking.
Pre-washsink c/w pre-rinsespray
Dishwasher- passthroughtype
Wall cupboard1OOOmm
Mobile cupboard
6.1.8
Servers Area
The serveryareawill consistof a refrigeratedcounterand merchandiserdisplay unit, with a
beveragecounterto one side. It will also include a refrigeratedpreparationbenchto the rear
of the serveryarea.
The areashouldallow for equipmentand staff circulation.
Equipmentrequired:*
Refrigeratedcounter
Refrigeratedpreparationbench
75
Cashpoint counter
Automatic beveragemachine
Seciality coffee machine
Pour and servecoffee units
Heatedcup carousels
Combinationoven extractionwill channelthe fresh baking aroma out throughexternalwalls.
Grantham Winch Partnmhip Ltd
76
7.0
PRELIMINARY
AREA ALLOCATION
- KITCHEN
Retise Area
Dry Goods, Equipment,DisposableStore
PreparationArea/Main Cooking Area
Utensil/PanWash/CrockeryWash Area
CleanersRoom
Office
.:
..:; 1.: ::
8.0
PRELIMINARY
AREA ALLOCATION
- SERVERY AREA
:..:.:. Rook
Servery
..
.:..:
I
I Beverage area
I
Grantham Winch Partmmhip
Ltd
77
[ BUDGET ESTIMATE COST

Project:
MILLENNIUM DOME - MERIDIAN POINT CAFE
Project
No. 1262
7.0
CROCKWASH AREA
7.1
Inlet tabling
TOTAL
Grantham Winch Partnenhip
Ltd
2250
2250
18809
78

Project:
Project
No. 1262
I I
KITCHEN
Date
26.99
7.3
Dishwasher- Passthroughtype 90 Racksper hour
8000
8000
7.4
Outlet tabling
750
750
7.5
Wall Cupboard1OOOmm
720
1440
7.6
Mobile cupboard
1038
1038
7.7
Wastedisposalunit Inset in item 7.2
725
725
7.8
Water softener
1000
1000
8.0
SERVERY AREA
8.1
Heatedpasscounter
3000
3000
8.2
Refrigerateddisplay merchandiser
3450
3450
8.3
Cashpoint counter
2400
2400
8.4
SorbetconservatorBY OTHERS
9.0
BEVERAGE AREA
9.1
Automatic BeverageMachine OMITTED
2600
9.2
Specialtycoffee machine Horizon TCS-F
6500
6500
9.3
Beverage/servicecounter
6000
6000
9.4
Pourand serveunits Duplex OMITTED
558
9.5
Heatedcup carouselOMITTED
180
TOTAL
53112
79

/
Project:
1Project
KITCHEN
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
1 Qm
153112
10.0
CLEANERS ROOM
10.1
Bucket sink incl taps
10.2
11.0
KITCHEN OFFICE
11.1
Desk and chair
11.2
Notice Boards
I1
11.3
Filing Cabinet
11.4
12.0
EXRACTION CANOPIES
12.1
Prepareacondensehood 1.5mx 1.5m
11
12.2
Dishwash areacondensehood 1.2m x 1.2m
11
12.3
Fire suppression
=I3
400
400
200
200
150
I 150
TOTAL
Ltd
80
final connectionto valved servicesand commissionin
81
KIOSKS
1.0
INTRODUCTION
? Kiosks areto be provided. They areto offer a diverseselectionof products,locatedin
variousareasof the MDC. They are to be 14m2in area.
2.0
DEMAND
The demandfor cateringserviceswill be:TBC by Granada
Turnover is estimatedto be TBC by Granada
3.0
RANGE OF SERVICES
The following cateringservicesareto be offered:TBC by Granada
4.0
STYLE OF SERVICE
4.1
The kiosks will offer a take away service.
5.0
TYPICAL MENUS
The level of equipmentwill relatedirectly to the areaavailable andthe productrangeto be
offered.
5.1
The offers will include:
Ltd
82
SECTION 06
7.6.2
Record as- built drawings
Catering as built drawings

Catering
Consultant: Catering Connections
Job No: 2596
Description of project: 1Millennium Dome - Catering Offers - Meridian Cafe

Drawing Number
CC1216
Drawing Title
( Meridian Point Cafe Layout Drawings with Service Details
I
SECTION 06
7.6.3
0 & M Manuals
THE
MILLENNIUM
DOME
MERIDIAN
POINT
CAF@
1 HANDOVER
WARRANTY
EXPIRY
MANUAL
DATE
... .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .. .. ... .. .
MILLENNIUM DOME
MERIDIAN POINT CAFE
Ref.
Qty
Supplier
Item
1.1
Refuse Sack Holders
5.1
CPCIOI Combination
Oven complete
Softener and Oven Stand
Please refer to the Manufacturers
with CTUIO Water
RATIONAL
instruction leaflet enclosed.
DIRECT SUPPLY EQUIPMENT - Please see Service

Information if a problem should occur.
5.2
I
PROllZH
Gastronorm
Supra Refrigerated
Counter
FOSTER/TRlCALL

5.2a
PR0114L 4 door Gastronorm
Supra Freezer Counter
FOSTER/TRICALL

5.4
Insect Terminator
WHOLESALE

i
5.6
Stainless Steel Work Bench complete with void under

and item 5.3 - inset Sink Bowl and taps, and item 5.5 Wash Hand Basin and taps.
Clean only using a non corrosive / abrasive material.
5.7
Panasonic
NE1880 Microwave
Oven

5.8
Stainless
Steel Work Bench
MERIDIAN
Ref.
5.9
Qty
POINT CAFi
Supplier
Item
PR0600HT
FOSTERPTRICALL
single door Refrigerator

7.1
Stainless Steel Dishwasher Inlet Tabling

item 7.1 - inset Sink Bowl and taps.
complete
with

7.2a
1
Pre-wash
Spray fitted into item 7.1
IMC

7.3
GS72-T-3 Pass-Through
Dishwasher
WINTERHALTER

7.4
Stainless
Steel Dishwasher
Outlet Tabling

7.5
)
Stainless
Steel Wall Mounted
Cupboard

7.8
Water Softener
for use with item 7.3

7.9
Stainless
Steel Dishwash
Sorting
Shelf
WINTERHALTER
MERIDIAN
I
Ref.
9.3
I
I
POINT CAFE
Item
Qty
Supplier
Stainless Steel L shaped Beverage/Service

Counter
complete with item 8.1- Ceran Plate with heated Quartz
Gantry over and item 8.2 - Multi Tier Display Unit with
blown air chilled well.
SPECIALIST SUPPLY - Please contact Manufacturer direct
on Tel: 01928 563532 - for any further details required.
10.1
Stainless
Steel Bucket
Sink complete
with taps

) 10.2
Stainless
Steel Shelf complete
with Wall Brackets
SISSONS
MILLENNIUM
GRANADA
DOME
- Meridian
Point Cafe
fh
#
SERVICE INFORMATION
Please ensure that you have the following information ready - Before calling !
MAKE / MODEL / SERIAL NUMBER / PRECISE LOCATION / PROBLEM
INSTALLATION
DATE for MERIDIAN
POINT CAFE
____________________--------------------
FOSTER
REFRIGERATION
- Contact - TRI-CALL
Tel: 01992 466 000
Fax: 01992 466 009
HOBART
EQUIPMENT
- Contact - HOBART
MANUFACTURING
CO. LTD
Tel: 07002 202 202
(&30am-5.30pm
- 7 days per week)
FALCON
EQUIPMENT
- Contact - FALCON
(SERVICELINE)
Tel:01438751 111
RATIONAL
EQUIPMENT
- Contact - RATIONAL
Tel: 01582 480 388
Fax: 01582 485 001
WINTERHALTER
DISHWASHER
- Contact - WINTERHALTER
Tel: 01582 495862
Fax: 01582 495531
PANASONIC
MICROWAVE
- Contact - PANASONIC
Tel: 08701 591590
Fax: 01344 853740
COUNTERS/
CHILLED DISPLAY
- Contact - CATERSERV
Tel: 01773 836 300
Fax: 01773 830 370
If you require any further assistance, please do not hesitate to contact us.
(a::,~
ii!gC~afle~tio~s Ltd.
Four Lane
Ends
Chesterfield
Ockerthorpe,
Derbyshire.
Tel: 01773
Fax: 01773
Raad,
Wlfretan,
DE55 7kM
836300
836333
kmeril:iuttonn~Gkl#6.com
-.tidil~~id~sgn~~~Qi~(o~
SISt3NS
SISSONS
SISSO-L-IS
SLSONS
SUPPlY.
After
conducting
metallurgical
examinations
on sinks which
had pitting
in service,
none had a metallurgical
or
fabrication
fault
which
could
account
for the failure.
British
Standard
Specification
B.S. 1244
for stainless
steel sinks
lays down
the
quality
of stainless
steel to be used and
it is invariably
found
that the quality
of
steel
in
the
pitted
sinks
met
the
requirements
of that specification.
This
appears
to indicate
that
it was some
feature
of the service
condition
which
accounted
for the failure.
Stainless
steel contains
chromium
as an
essential
constituent
and this alloying
imparts
to the steel the same property
as
that possessed
by chromium
steel - it
has a resistance
towards
corrosion.
This is due to the fact that an invisible
passive
chromium-rich
oxide film forms
on the surface
of the steel and this film
remains
intact
providing
conditions
remain
oxidizing,
these exist under
most
normal
domestic
conditions.
This
oxide
film
can,
however,
be broken
down
and pitting
can occur,
if it is
reducing
conditions.
exposed
to
acids,
chemicals
and
Certain
particularly
the
halogens
(iodine,
chlorine,
fluorine,
bromine)
can provide
these conditions.
1994
Domestic
bleaches
contain
chlorine
in
the form
of a hypochlorite
and such
bleaches
are sometimes
used
to soak
cloths
in overnight,
using
a diluted
solution,
these bleaches
being
supplied
under
the name of Domestos,
chloros,
Biotex
etc.
If cloths
are soaked
even in
a weak solution
of this type of liquid,
or
if these
are soaked
in the liquid
in a
plastic
bucket
and the contents
poured
down
the sink and not finally
washed
away,
extended
contact
with the bleach
can break
down
the passive
oxide
film
and in time cause corrosion
and pitting
of the stainless
steel.
Normal
detrimental.
dish
washing
liquids
are
SISSONS
SISWNS
W. & G. Sissons Ltd., Calver Mill, Calver, Nr. Sheffield,

Telephone:
0433 630791, Telex 547465, Fax: 0433 631932
Summary of a report by a Consultant Metallurgist on the

effects of hypochlorite bleaches on stainless steel sinks
The
following
report
was made
by a
consultant
metallurgist
to advise
on
pitting
problems
in connection
with
stainless
steel
sinks.
This
type
of
problem
involves
all makes
of sinks
made
from
various
,sources
of steel
not
It is strongly
recommended
to all users
of stainless
steel sinks
that they
avoid
contact
with
domestic
hypochlorite
contained
in bleaches
(these
can
be
recognised
by their smell of chlorine)
as
almost
inevitably,
in time,
pitting
and
probable
complete
perforation
will
occur.
Cleaning
S30 1XA
of Stainless Steel
All grades
of stainless
steel
will stain
and discolour
due to surface
deposits
and can never
be accepted
as completely
maintenance
free.
In order
to achieve
maximum
corrosion
resistance
the
surface
of the stainless
steel
must
be
kept clean.
Surface
contamination
and
the
formation
of
deposits
must
be
prevented.
These
deposits
may
be
minute
particles
of iron
or rust
from
other
sources
used on the building
of
new
premises
and not removed
until
after
the stainless
steel items
have been
fixed.
Industrial
and even
naturally
occurring
atmospheric
conditions
can
produce
deposits
which
can be equally
corrosive,
e.g. salt deposits
from marine
conditions.
Strong
acid solutions
are
sometime
used
to clean
masonry
and
tiling
of buildings
but
these
should
never
be permitted
to come into contact
with metals,
including
stainless
steel.
In some
situations
bleach
(or other
hypochlorate
based cleaners)
are used to
clean
stainless
steel
- this
should
be
avoided
wherever
possible.
The
consequences
of bleach
coming
into
prolonged
contact
with stainless
steel is
surface
pitting
which
is illustrated.
Other
liquids
which
cause
a similar
effect
are
some
toilet
cleaners,
photographic
developing
liquids,
acids,
concentrated
disinfectants,
chlorine
and
strong
alkalis
(ie caustic
soda).
If any of
these
solutions
do come
into
contact
with
the
surface
these
should
be
thoroughly
rinsed
off with clean water.
Regular
Cleaning
1. Wash
down
the surface
regularly
using
water
containing
soap
or mild
detergents.
2. Always
rinse
the surface
with
clean
water.
3. A thorough
cleaning
operation
can be
completed
by polishing
the surface
with
a soft dry cloth.
Cleaning
Aids
Always
avoid
using
coarse
abrasive
materials
such as harsh
scouring
pads,
wire
wool
etc. which
can scratch
the
In addition,
stainless
steel
surface.
metal
particles
left on the surface
can
quickly
turn to rust and leave rust stains
on the stainless
steel.
Use brushes
and
scrubbers
etc. which
utilise
mild or soft
bristles
such as nylon
(or similar).
SE-
3NS
Care and Maintenance
SISSONS
of Stainless
To maintain
the appearance
of stainless
steel sanitaryware
it should
be regularly
cleaned
with
cleaning
agents containing
sulphamic
acid.
Sulphamic
acid
chemically
removes
scale and deposits
which
form
on urinals
and W.C.s
and
is suitable
for stainless
steel.
These
cleaning
agents
also kill
bacteria
and
deodorize
the surface.
Suitable
cleaning
agents
are
Freshaloo,
for
regular
cleaning,
and
T.D.30,
for
periodic
cleaning,
from
Premier
Products,
Cheltenham.
Both cleaners
can also be
used on chrome,
ceramic
and vitreous
china
sanitary
fittings.
(Further
details
from
Contracts
Division,
Premier
Products,
Bouncers
Lane,
Cheltenham,
GL52
5JD
Tel: 024243421
Fax: 0242-528445.
SI
SONS
Steel Sanitaryware
Important
Warning
Most
common
bleaches,
toilet
cleaners,
photographic
development
liquids,
acids,
concentrated
disinfectants,
chlorine
(often
present
as hypochlorate)
and strong
alkalis,
i.e. caustic
soda, can
lead
to pitting
of the stainless
steel
surface.
If any of these
solutions
do
come into contact
with the surface
they
should
be thoroughly
rinsed
off with
clean water.
SISSOlJS
Care and Maintenance

Eaubment
SISSONS
of Stainless
Important
Warning
Most
common
bleaches,
toilet cleaners,
photographic
development
liquids,
acids,
concentrated
disinfectants,
chlorine
(often
present
as hypochlorate)
and strong
alkalis,
i.e. caustic
soda, can
lead to pitting
of the stainless
steel
surface.
If any of these
solutions
do
come into contact
with the surface
they
should
be thoroughly
rinsed
off with
clean water.
SISLCDNS
Steel Catering
To maintain
the appearance
of stainless
steel
catering
equipment
it should
be
cleaned
regularly
with
non
or mild
abrasive
cleaning
agents.
Chlorine
based
cleaners,
such as bleach,
should
not be
used
on stainless
steel
as prolonged
contact
will cause surface
pitting
which
cannot
be repaired.
Spray
a non-abrasive
general
cleaner
(such
as Stainless
Steel
Polish
from
Dimex
Ltd)
on to the surface
of the
product.
For stubborn
stains
or where
deep
cleaning
is required
a mild
abrasive
cleaner
is required
(such
as Fresh-nClean from
Dimex
Ltd).
For
further
details
of
Dimex
Ltd
products
contact:Dimex
House,
116 High Street,
Solihull,
West
Midlands,
B91 3SD
Tel: 021-704-3551
Fax: 021-704-4024
& G. Sissons Ltd.,
Calver Mill,
Calver,
Desk
Nr. Sheffield,
S30 lXA,
Tel: 01433 630791
Fax: 01433 631932
Ition
The 4, I x 400 x 180mm bowl has a 38mm

d ome rated w;tiste to act as a strainer for
cloth\ Intl 0lhc.r debris in the dirty water.
Thr 11%
1nt 1~1:vlpports can be fixed to the
floor tl~rou~l~ 11~ chrome plated adjustable
feet; with tht~ w ;111bracket holding the sink
rigidly in pl:lcc. The splash back fits over
the IIpst;mtl :II rhe rear of the sink and is
secured to rhc wall with 3 screws (not
supplied).
The hinged gricl is fully polished and made
from stainless steel bar for ease of cleaning
and strength.
Ilan
Application
The bucket sink is ideal for kitchens,

cleaners rooms or workshops to dispose of
dirty water.
ld
Front
Elevation
Material
The unir
(18SWGl
t.nd
is manufactured
from 1.2mm
stainless steel, with the bowl
being
pressed
from 0.9mm (ZOSWG)
stainless
steel. All stainless steel is type 304.
..
..
., :
Code No. Description
-3Ncket
sink with splashback..
Extras
Wall mounted bib tap (cold): --F107 l/Z
F1073/72
Wall mounted bib tap (hot) _ 1,1
-,.*
FT927
Stainless steel bucket
Elevation
:T Description
The two sizes of wall hung bucket sinks

incorporate a pressed bowl, splashhack and
simple grid to provide a basic facility for the
dispbsal of dirty water. The sinks are fixed
by two screws on the bowl upstand and a
\ . bracket under the waste fitting. Screw holes
for the splashback line up with those on the
bowl upstand. The grid isremovahle
to
enable the bowl and grid to be kept clean.
End Elevation
Dir
-
tension
Cot
- le No.
F-- 7lJ79
F- 7 180
Table
Dimension
-Code No.
A
490
560
F 7079
~_
F-- 7083
F___-.
7080
F 7084
iimen;ions
390
450
340
400
D
440
500
E
245
280
INFORMATION
ORDERING
._
Table
~-
Description
Small bucket sink 490 x 390 x 175
Grid for small bticket sink
Large bucket sink 560 x 450 x 190
Grid for large bucket sink
REQUIRED
1. Code Numhcr
2. Any extras required
WHEN
Extras
F1071/72
F1073/72
F7927
--Wall mounted bib tap (cold)

-Wall mounted bib tap (Ilot)
Stainless steel bucket
Cabinet
and
Counter
Range
Gastro-Pro
Cabinets
and Counters
.
---,I_-
-.
?*
,.:a ,:
._
1. CABINET DESCRIPTION
AND
SPECIFICATION
.--.. ,..__C.p*.--..-..,l.-_
_,... . _.._.
.d,%_Im--.
-
The cabinetsconstructionconsistsof a one piece WC free foamed shell.

Internalwalls are of aluminiumand the internalbaseis 304 StainlessSteel.
Thecabinethasan aluminiumexteriorwith a 304 StainlessSteeldoor and unit
cover.
Oncabinetmodels,doorsarefitted with selfclosinghingeswhich incorporate
a dwellat 90 with full door openingof 180. Magneticgasketsarefitted for a
positiveseal.
All cabinetmodels have a top mounted refrigerationsystem fitted and the
controlsarelocatedabovethedoor.Thispanelabovethe door incorporatesthe
TemperatureController, complete with function LEO indicators and an
illuminatedOn/Offswitch.
Gastro-ProCabinetsare availablein fivestorageformatsand a choiceof four
)temperaturerangesto meetthe preciseneedsof the end user, Single door
cabinetshave500 or 600 litrecapacity,and doubledoor modelsoffer 1120 or
1330 litres. Broadwayoptions are also available,as is a Dual temperature
model.
Gastro-ProCountersoffer a one, two, three or four door formtt, suitablefor
eitherGastro-norm1 x 1 or 2 x 1 sizing.The draweroption enhancestheir
usageevenfurtherwith a choiceof any configurationof two and three drawer
units.Thestoragecapacityfor the countersis listedon TechnicalDatapage.
Therefrigerationusedfor High (t4 to 6%) and Meat (0 to -2Y;) temperature .
modelsas standard,will be R134a,with R22 being an option, while the Low
(-18 to -21C) temperaturemodels will use R404aas standardand R69L
being an option on all low temperaturemodels. On all models,refrigeration
controlwill be by capillaryoperation.
Defrostingon high temperaturemodelswill be achievedby a timed off cycle
systemcontrolledby the microprocessorcontroller.On all meat and low
temperafuremodels defrosting is by hot gas which is injected into the
evaporatorcoil from the compressor,again controlledby the microprocessor
controller.The condensatewater dischargedduring the defrost period is
containedin the vaporisertray and is evaporatedby utilising the hot gas
)dischargefrom the compressorwhich passesthroughthis tray.
Maximumoperatingambienttemperaturefor all modelsis t 40C.
.a_
-.--
--.
---.
.-.
_-
.I
2. .SPECIFICATIONS
OPTIONS
Dimensions
(mm) *._*- . ,. .-..-.. .-. AND
. -...,.,.^-~_-.
.. _. . _.,_. . ..-._-.
WI_. ...,ri,-
- ---
.-.1-.. ..+-I
y,
_. +A......- I
Capacity/litres:131
Shelves:2
Capacity/litres:506
Shelves:3
Internaldimensions:565 x 700 x 1285
Capacity/litres:293
Shelves:4
Capacity/litres:
601
Shelves:3
Internaldimensions:565 x 700 x 1525
Capacity/litres:455
Shrlves:6
W--
705
Capacity/litres:1120
Shelves:6
internaldimensions:565 x 700 x 1285 (persection)
2320
Capacity/litres:617
Shelves:8
1
kernal dimensions&boor section:365 x 595 x 610 (Series1)
.
.
Jacitybtres:1330
bnelves:6
Internaldimensions:565 x 700x 1525 (per section)
PROB600 External:825 x 700 x 2026 Internal:685 x 595 x 1525
PRO290/290 External:as PRO600 Internal:565 x 600 x 600 (pe; section)
I
!
,-3
Capacity/litres:240
Shelves:2
I
.-_-.-
I
-.--,
-.__--- ..-- -__-..l
.-.-. -
-I----
__.d
--.
Capacity/litres:
517
Shelves:4
.,
__
._ _- ..- --
..--i
Capacity/litres:793
Shelves:6
/-____--
.-_.._....
._. ^.__ _,-_._-__
.I
-_-_..----.
Capacity/litres:
1069
Shelves:8
Internaldimensionsper door section:565 x 70: x 610 (series2)
.;.
1
I
3.
CONTROL
._-.-......m*--
SYSTEM
--
_I
-e-
.*e .-
j.
.-1-
TechnicalData
#able 1 GastroProCabinets
hble 2 GastroProCounters
Model
i/l H
RsfriPersnt
Charge
(Std & Op)
A134a/R22
Electrical
SUPPlY
230/l/50
Watts
2.2
280
--I
Heat
output
EXtk
Rat0
580
330
-8
1,
0.28
Qoa
Charge
(Qmms)
380
.I b
..J@J. .:
57.5
132
-'
57.6,,
132 i$
;.
62.5
132 ,'
I$&
l/l M
R134e/R22
230/l/50
2.3
300
560
2Q5>
-9
VI L
R404eR691
230/l/50
2.5
430
660
275
-28
: 1 0.30
/ .>
.. 0.43
1/2H
R134aR22
230/l/50
2.2
260
580
-8
0.28
57.5
293
380
II2 M
R134a/R22
230/l/50
2.4
330
590
-9
0.33
57.5
293
360
l/2 L
R404a/R69L
230/l/50
2.6
450
690
i-t- -28
0.45
62.5
293
335
1/3H
R134elR22
230/l/50
2.6
330
720
-8
0.33
58.0
456,
315
1/3M
R134iUR22
230/l/50
3.0
410
750
-9
0.41
58.0
455:
315
l/3 L
R404a/R691
230/l/50
3.8
570
1020
-28
.'" 0.57
85.0
455::
360,'.
l/4 H
R134a/R22
230/l/50
3.2
490
1180
-8
0.49
60.0
617:
1/4M
R134aR22
230/l/50
3.6
-9
0.58
60.0
617.
370
II4 L
1 R404aR69L
2/l H
RKWR22
230/l/50
2.2
2/1M
R134aR22
23011150
2.3
2/l L
R404a/R69L
230/l/60
2.5
U2H
Rl34a/R22
230/l/50
2.6
2/2 M
R13W22
230/l/50
3.1
2i2 L
R404069L
230/l/50
3.2
213 H
R134aiR22
230/l/50
3.7
2l3M
R134iVR22
230/i/50
4.1
213 L
R404a!R69L
230/l/50
5.1
920
1530
684
2l4H
RlWR22
230/l/50
3.3
520
180
2l4M
R134a#722
230/l/50
3.9
640
"214 L
R4WR69L
230/l/50"
5.3
1 230/1/50
-"
--
1-4
4.0
-~
590
1240
730
1150
280
580
310
"
,'
'
30
0.73
66.0
617:.
325
330
-8
0.28
57.5
240
360
570
295:
-9
0.31
51.5
240
380
430
670
270
-28
0.43
62.5
240
335
330
720
420
-8
0.33
58.0
517
365
430
740
380
0.43
58.0
517
640
1181
Iii
-22
0.66
66.0
517'
360
460
920
52p
-8
0.46
59.0
793
380
550
970
49;
-9"
0.55
59.d
793 '
380
-28
d 0.92
67.5
793 '
415
720
-8
0.52
60.0
105F
366
; 1260
690
-9
0.83
60.0
1057
365
1660
680
-28
0.96
67.5
la57
415
'-9
,-
950
'
,379
,385.
I'
'Under designed operating conditions.

L
Amps
storage
Cap
(mes)
----
Table 3
The instrument is supplied to Fosterin two versions identified by a I

attachedto the top of the instrumentcasing.
MDCU 1l/l FOSTER
- FOSTER
PROD.CODE15246140
--
11101/4L
R404a
325
3mx054
CA124322
PRO500H
R134a
300
3mxO42 t-i
AEz4425Y
R134a
300
PRO500L
R404a
400
PRO6OOH
R134a
300
PRO6OOM
R134a
300
PRO6ooL
R404a
370
PROWOH
R134a
380
PRO5OOM
'
-SINGLEPROBE3.5m LONG
1, Colour blackattachedto probepositionA.
Relays2 and 3 not connected.
MDCU11/2 FOSTER
- FOSTER
PROD.CODE15246150
-l
PRO?i3M
R134a
380
3mxO54
:cAE444OY1
PRO2l3L
R134a
415
3mxO54
.W24462
PRO214H
R134a
365
3mxO54
CAE4448Y
PRO2/4M
R134a
365
3mxO54
CAE4448Y
PRO2/4L
R404a
415
3mxO54
CA124462
.
-1
2 PROBES
3.&rrLONG
1. Colour blackattachedto probepositionK(Air temperahre).
2. Colour greyattachedto probepositionB (Defrost)/FanlIelay.
3 off relaysfitted as standard.
'
75x35x7rjnm 1 Relays
Powerrating 7 anlp/240Vac,
2
Dirfrensions
scwwterminal
41
Ranae
I 60 to t150C 1 Connections
The LAEMCDUis an adjustablemicroprocessordigital temperaturecontroller

complete with integral function indicator neons and temperaturesensing
probes.
Thefollowingfunctionsare incorporated:
Thermostat
Defrostcontrol
Automaticand manualdefrost
Fancontrol(MCDU 1i/2 only)
12vac/dc;1
bym@r
ptasticbrat
Operating
-10 to t6oC
temperature
Sensitlvitv
to EMI IEC801
ElectSUDDk
Frontprotedion
I12v6O/wHz
1,
Casino(black)
fire retar,
V. Pel MCDU11
--
-3
Defrostcyclecomprisesall the functionsregardingdefrostwhich are carried

out by the MCDU 11/l from the start of any defrostperiod to the start of the
nextone:
0 DEFROST
STARTCONTROL
0 DEFROST
EXECUTION
:
-4
- -
Functionof Keys
The faciakeysallow programmingof all control parameters,startirllfmanual
fasts andcheckingthe evaporatortemperature.It allowsaccesstc two of the
lllreedifferentmodesof the instrument:PROGRAMMING
mode, in !/hich Set
Pointand intervalbetweenDefrostscan be displayedor changedaillf SET-UP
mode for configuringthe parameters.The third, NORMALmode, ir tvhichthe
programmedcontrolsequencesarecarriedout, is selectedautomaticallywhen
the unit is turned on.
By pressingkey [ll in NORMALmode, the PROGRAMMING
of :et point is
activated.By pressingthis keywhenthecontrolleris in PROGRAMM:NG
mode
the programmedvalueis storedimmediatelyand the controllerSWtzhesback
to NORMALmode. Storageand returnto NORMALmodeoccuratNt?matically
if no keyis pressedwithin 5 seconds.
By pressingkey12)in NORMALmodeyou haveaccejsto the PROIJ1AMMING
of the intervalbetweenDefrosts.(Thesevaluescan(relybe change,1within the
prrset limitsenteredin the SET-UPmode).
Key [4] hasa dual function. By keepingit pressedwhile the corll~olleris in
NORMALmode and by pushingkey [2] simultaneo~sly,a manualdefrostwill
bestarted.If pressedwhenthecontrolleris in PROGRAMMING
mrlde,the displayedvaluewill be decreased:if pressedbrieflyit will changein o;le unit at a
time, on the contraryif keptpressedthe valuewill changewith progressively
Agherspeed.
The statusLEDs(5), (6) and (7) indicatethe operationof coolirlg,fans and
defrost.
ThermostatFunction
The probeis the measuringelementof the thermostat;it should l,e locatedin
a spotwheretemperaturevariationsof thecabinetmaybe correctlyand quickly
measured.
By pressingkey [II, Set Point,in other words the temperatureto be maintained, is displayed; SEt is digitally displayed for 2 seconds,
followedby the pre-programmedvalue.By pressingkeysI31 and 141,the Set
Pointvaluecan be changedwithinthe pre-programmedminimum <vSP>and
maximum,<*SP>limits.
The Hysteresis(differential) between the switching off anti on of the
cooleris obtainedwith the programmed<dt>.
Anotherparameterfor coolercontrol is <Ph - ProbeFailure-.
By setting<ON>or <OFF>,it is possibleto selectthe relaysstatusin caseof
a probefailure.If OFFis programmed,in caseof a probe failunl the contacts
I of RLl will open.With ON,thecooler(RLl) and the fan will workcontinuously.
The self-diagnosticsof the MCDU 11/l will displaythe natureof the defect
found by meansof the symbolsPFA.

: .=
_,_
2, U DEFROST
IFRMINATION
CIDRIPPINGTIME
By pressingthe key [21whenthe controlleris in NORMALmode, dEFis displayed for 2 seconds, followed by the J&rval.&~&?&Defrosts
previouslyprogrammed.This time representsthe hourswhich should elapse
betweena defroststartand the startof the nexlone. Bypressingkeys131or I41,
thedisplayedvaluecan be changedwithinthe minimumtvdS> and maximum
c*dS> pre-programmedlimits.
Thetime to startdefrostis calculatedbythe Programmable
built into the
MCDU11, TheCONTINUOUS
TIMEmodeprovidesregulardefroststarts,conditionedonly by the programmedtime and no othervariables.
If the evaporatoris coveredwith a thicklayerof ice,a Manual Starlof defrost
is possibleby pressingand holding key I41and then pressingkey 12)simultaneously.In addition, this action resultsin timera: from that moment the
timerwill .tartcalculatingthe time for the nextdefroststart.
Thedefrostexecutionmethod should be selectedas <El-E>.
ONALLHRMODELS
Defrostwill be terminatedafter the Maximum Time
<dd> has elapsed. At this point the Dripping Time starts, the
duration of which is programmable with the parameter <dr>.
Duringtemperaturecontroland defrostthe fan workscontinuously.
ONALLLRMODELS
Defrostwill be terminatedeitherwhen the Temperature
@&&r!st Terminm <Etzis measured(by B probe)or after the Maximum
Iimc: <dd> haselapsed,whicheveroccursthe sooner.At this point all relays
drop out and the Driooino
starts,the durationof which is programmable
withthe parameter<dr>.TheDriDoina
(thecoolerdoes not work),allows
the waterformedfrom the melting iceto drip from the coil thus preventingits
suden cooling.
.P
Duringtemperaturecontrol the fan workscontinuouslyand is stopped when
defrostst?lts. FanB.&& is w
from
ON,BOTHMODELS
Whenthe DrippingTimehas finished,the cooler relay
is enabled, but will be switched on only if ambient temperature has
riseneverthe thresholdformed by SETPOINTt Dt.
MCDU11/l programmingparametermode
The MCDU 11/l can carry out all the functions requested for a specific
application,after the paraqetershave been programmedin SET-UPmode.
Accessto thi$mode is possiblethrough a sequenceof operationspreventing
accidentalactivation..
Turnoff the unit, presskey[I] and I21 and, by keepingthem pressed,turn on
the unit. If this operationhas beencorrectlymade,WSwill appearon display.
Accessto all parametersand to their own pre:programmedvaluesis obtained
by pressingthe key111repeatedly.The specificvalueof the parametercan be
changedwith keys[3] and 141within the limits shown in Table1 . Quickskip
throughthe menu is achievedwith keys[31and I41usedas shown in the table.
Afterprogramming,switch backto the main menu (YHS,dEF, AdJ)and
turn off the unit. Whenthe MCDUII/l is switchedon, it will enter NORMAL
mode and will workwith the new configuration.
:
, ..,
-,
:<
.,.:.,,
,.
: :,,i.
5.
CASTRO-PRO
-.__...
HT DESIGN
--
PARAMETE-
?S AND SETTINGS
- MCDU
I l/l
._I
Minimum &et Point
Mulmum
% F----l
Set Point
RLl Rest lime

(min. OFF time)
c
,PF
RU in Probe Failure
(run or stop)
k.J
Temperature of
Defrost End
Maximum Defrost
Duration
min[
Max. Time Between Hrs6]

Defrosts
Drtpping Time
.:
Timer Increment
(Frost or Continuous)
Defrost Heater
(Electrical or Gas)
Display Control
(Ta or dEF)
Fan delay
Probe A
offset.
*_
:
Probe B
offset
Set point cut Oul
Temperature
IS
---
CASTRO-PRO
MT DESIGN
---
PARAMETERS
AND
~~-
SETTINGS
- MCDU
,LC(
Mulmum ,.,Sat Point

; _
RLl Rest Tlfnd :
(min. OFF time)
+-Y-J
OFF
El
RLl in Probe Failure

(run of stop)
..
Probe A
offset
:,
Probe 8
,offsrt
Sot Point Cut Out

Temperature
Ii/2
*cpT-j
+--I
I
-2
GASTRO4RO II-- LT DESIGN

--w-w.
PARAMETERS
AE
,-. D-. SETTINGS
- MCDU
Hysteresisof
tflrmo8taf
43
Mfnlmum Set Pdnl
+i--j
MaxImum Set Point
+T-]
11/2
AL1 F&t Tfme

(min. OFF Urn4
RLl In Probe Failure
m or rrop)
Temperature of
Defros~~nd
3
. p:,
Maximum Defrost
Ouratfon
.w-a,
f;;oz
C +30
I
+---j
6erween ~rs
Max. Time Betweh

oefro6ts
desk!
Orlpping Time
mfn[[
Timer Increment
(Frost of Continuous)
[-z&q
Defrost Heeter
(EplctrkalorGas)
1-A
... dEF
I,
Display Control
fla 01 UEF)
7
001 ... 010
Fan Defay .
1
./ ;
Pmbe6
offset
Set Point Cut Out
Tempsr8turr
El
J
GASTRO-PRO
290L ...-DESIGN
,--.
..*- ,._.---I_._l_.----l
PARAMETERS
.
-. AND
.- -- SETTINGS
--..___
-___
___-
--- MCDU
___-_ --__.
.__
I_
1 l/2
_._.
. ....--
Hysteresis of
thermostat
Minimum Set Point --C -
Maximum Set Point --C L
.
_ RLl Rest Time -min(min. OFF time)
0
cl
_ RLI in Probe Failure

(run or stop)
-dr
-Dripping Time -min
-dH
- Defrost Heater
(Electrical or Gas)
e1
rl
- Fan Delay
C-
?
. a
f
_ Probe A
offset
.*.
-ProbeB
Offset
- i,*
.;.2)
3 s,.
zl
I_-
,.
._
__-.-
..-.
-.-
--
-..
_._.._L__-.--
ELE
1
.
cl
C-
0
cl
0C-..
El
-F-.l.--l.---CI-.-.
11
I-T-l
....
-A
__
-.I.
-8--
_.
___
.,
-c..---
.._-._.___
...--D
..__
-..-
--.--
,.
--
_-.
E.
._
-,
-.
_-
-..F-.
-.
.,_.
,-.-
~_T1---~-.
..L._
lK.
.~,_:
-.
TRANYORYERLM
SUPRY LM
w/m-f
SwllM
fvAP fiN
lfUP.CONT.(4)
IfuP.coNr.(s)
CDND UNIT
SUPLY NEUTRAL
ON/offswim
NAP FAN
I
ON/OFF SWITCH
lRANSfORlJfR NfUTRAl
i -.
:4
5
-
BI
NOTES:-
6
7
._
I.
ML UBLES MC Imm UNLESSSlATED
COLOURCODf
BROWN
BLUE
GREEN/YELLOW
BR
s
3.
lfWfR~lURf
4.
CMXIII SHOBN DE-ENfRCMD AND Al WMNI
CONTROLLERIUS TIMED Off CYCLf DEFROST
5.
fll 1fWOfWiY Wllf LINKS 10 IERMIWS 2 & 3

Rfuwt BEfORE lfUPfRAlURf IESI
6.
MATfR DEIAH,:- I,
2.
i
i
IfMPfRAlURf
OfIkMAL UULLION HfAlfR

OPIKMAL BACK-UP HWfR
OR OflKMAL VAPORISERHEATIR (RfMOlE MODflS)
FOSTER REFRIGERATOR
(U.K)
LTD
WIRING DIAGRAM FOR
CASTROPRO MODELS
OLDMEDDW
ROAD
KINGS
LYNN
NORFOLK
PE30
4JU
Llsll
ABO,,E
-- _7_-_.-..---.-.-.
- -... - -- -- -- --- ----
-- -
..NPPIY IIK
ON/M F FWllCH
SUPPLY Nt urful
ON/OFF SWIICH
ON/OFF WICH
YULLION HE4lER
WAJN HEAIER
1
-
ff1 (4)
4
RI
(5)
RI
RR
I
I
1.
a
BR
RI (1)
ON/OFF SWlKH
1fuNSfoRUCR LNE
TEUP CONI. (1)
COND. UNll
IWP. CONI. (2)
YxENoa VAlM
TEUP. CONI. (3)
EVAP FANS
ml? CONI. (5)
UU.LlC+dHEAIER
DRAJNHCllER
CCNO. IJW
SaENoM VUK
WP. FANS
rfwfsmwR
t4EUlRu
.I
EK
RI
a
:.
. .. .
,.-,
En
:
--:.
6
7
-
-NOTES:
1.
ML UBLES Mf
2.
foff wLnalR[. CME cc+u4Ec1uNS SEE

wvc. No. R&326/A
CaucCl RC MlWWfKS 10 WMNMS
.
7 & Il. 9 & 12 AN0 6 & II.
3.
5.
Imm UNLfa
SIMD.
Fll wawlv
Wit
LNKS 10 IERUWMS 5. 6. 7. 8.
IaRM EffoRf mPfRAllJRf lfs1
i
_
~~BTER
GASTROFRO MODELS
.~
:
Ii
.-_.
CPCGasControlpanel
On/off switch
ClimaPtus function
J- El
l- -El
-El
button
with control arrows (green)
Clima window
Moist
heat button
Dry heat
button
(steam)
(hot air)
El Button for cooking cabinet temperature

El Cooking cabinet temperature readout
for time setting
-El Button
Continuous operation: Press button twice
-191Time readout
izl Core temperature

-mlCore temperature
a Expert button
-ElReadout for expert
Program/start
--
Cooii down
button
readout
button
button
button
-Ed Phased ventilation for

-El Humidifying button
-@I RESET button
and programming
fan impeller
button
Central dial to set the cooking data
FeaturesCPCGas
@Unit serial number (bottom of insideof installationdoor).
@Draft (liverter.
@Interior light
(heat and shock-resistant
ceranefret glassand halogen lightin)I).
@Unit door with double glass.
@Door handle
(Tablemodels:one-handedoperation with slam function.
Floormodelsand 10 x 211GN: one-handed operation\.
@Unlocking device for opening the double glass (inside!.
0 Integrated self-emptying door drip collector.
@-@--
@I-Go-@a--
@Unit drip collector connected to the main drainage.

I
@ Contactless door contact switch.
@I Legs
(adjustable).
@Unit data plate
(containingall important electricaldata suchas power input,
voltage,number of phasesand frequency,as well as unit model
and serialnumber).
ClimaPlus Comb1 Gas 6 x 111;identical for IO x 111
@JControl panel
(seepage 5).
@Protection cover for the electrical iI stallation area.
@Service door
@I Hand shower
(with automaticrewind).
(i%J
Run-in guide
(floor models).
ClimaPlus Combi Gds 20 x l/I GN: identical for 20 x 211 GN.
i Generalhints / for your safety

Checks before
switching
on each day
l Secure the air baffle at the top and bottom.
l Ensure the grid shelf or mobile oven rack is properly locked
in place in the cooking cabinet
l When starting the Moist heat mode, the display may
show WATER. This means the steam generator has not
yet been filled with water. Once this has been done, the
indicator lamp will automatically go out.
l If the indicator is still on, check whether the water valve
is open and ensure that the strainer on thp water supply
is not blocked.
l If the ambient temperature is below +SC, the cooking
cabinet is heated up to room temperature before starting
to operate.
i
Unloading
Open the door slowly.
Take great care not to scald yourself with
the hot steam! The containers are hot!
When the door is opened the unit automatically switches
itself off. The fan will continue to rotate for a while.
Using mobile
oven racks
Use the handle supplied to pull the mobile oven rack
out of the unit.
Fixing and swivelling
the grid shelf
(6x1/1,
10x1/1,
10x2/1 GN)
Removing
Push the grid shelf upwards and lift it out of the mountings.
Reverse the procedure to replace the rack.
Swivelling
Take care when rernovins~~~ht-!?,e~~~~
from this heigh$be carefl6f contain
1,I 8:;,:: ,t;;*
$j$$
with hot liquids in them.,
,:
Gently raise the grid shelf, lift it out of the front

locking device and swivel it.
:.t .&tl,
Loading
Only slide in GN containers or grids if the grid shelf
is properly fixed or the mobile oven rack has been pushed
in as far as it will go.
Caution!
On all 10x211, 20x111 and 20x211 GII units, ensure that
the GN containers on the mobile overt rack are properly
secured on both sides!
Using mobile
oven racks and transport
trolCeys
with table-top
units (optional)
- Remove the grid shelf.
- Place the rail on the floor of the unit and engage it.
- Push the oven rack in.
RESET
BUTTON
If there is a fault in the incinerator, RESET will light
up in the EXPERT key indicator panel. After 15
seconds you will hear an acoustic signal. Press
RESET to re-start the automatic ignition procedure.
If the RESET indicator does not light up again after
about 15 sec., the flame is burning and the equipment is ready for operation. If the indicator is lit in
spite of pressing the button several times, please
call customer service.
ATTENTION:
In case the gas connection is interrup Ied
or the connected flow pressure is below
15mbar, the unit is without function.
A!
Picture: Hail
General hints / for your safety
-Working
l
l
with
core temperatures
The core temperature prc e may be hot.

Never allow the probe to hang loose outside
the cooking cabinet.
Before removing a load, take the probe out of the food.
Cool down
l Caution!
During the Cool down phase the fan impell
ler is running when the door is open!

Only activate the Cool down function if the air baffle
system is properly locked.
Never usethe handshowerto coolthe cookingcabinet

down,asthis canput excessivestrainon the materials.
Never use cold water to cool the unit down.
Cleaning
l Do not cleanthe unit with high-pressure
cleaner.
Do not use acids or let acid fumes come into contact with
the protective layer of stainless steel, as otherwise it will be
damaged and could cause discolouring.
l Follow the instructions on the cleaner canister.
. The cleaning routine is described in the chapter on
Cleaning.
l
SC automatic function I descaling

l Dont forgetthat the steamgenerator
hasto be descaled
at regular intervals (see tile chapter on the SC-Automatic
function/lnrervals betwee, lescaling).
Mobile oven rack
Servicing
l
l
Push the mobile oven rack in as far as it will go and lock it

in place.
Inspection work to be carried out by qualified electricians:

Caution! Disconnect the ClimaPlus Combi at the mains
before openng the service door and working with live
parts!
Working with the transport trolley

l
The transport trolley must be properly secured in the unit

with the retainers.
Use the handle supplied to pull the mobile oven rack
out of the unit.
When transporting the mobile oven rack on the
transport trolley, always make sure the rack is eng&jged
in the transport safety catch.
10
General
l The temperature of the glass door may increase
l
by more than 60C.

If there are Lx-rg breaks between operation
the built-in water stop valve should be closed.
If the low water alarm flashes, check the water supply.
) Generalinformation
Switching
the
unit
on
ON appears in the clock display for 2 seconds
The current time is then displayed
I ..,.
1
Cooking
settings
All cooking data (such as temperature andClimaPlus
settings) is set using the central dial. Pressthe desired
function (e.g. time setting) and enter the desired value
using the central dial. You can enter settings while
the relevant display is still flashing.
Timer
Press the timer.
The following will appear in the display.
Continuous
operation
Pressthe timer twice in quick succession, or press it once and
keep it depressed.
The following will appear in the display.
Generalinformation
-Heating-up
display
Dry heat
A flashing ,, 0 in the temperature display means
that the hot-air heating has been activated.
Magic eye
1he indicator arrow in the ClimaPlus function display
t
lights up if Moist heat is being fed in.
Caution!
Do not load the ClimaPlus Combi until
the preheating temperature is reached.
Unit too hot
Depending on the cooking mode selected,
tire keys for Dry or Moist heat will flash.
( hecking
the
current
cooking
data
f Iessthe temperature key for one second.
1 he following
values are displayed:
0 Current humidity in the cooking cabinet

(The blue barcode shows the percentage)
1 Current temperature in the cooking cabinet

1 Time elapsed (cooking time)
Current core temperature
Program number I program step

(only when working with programs)
12
j ChaPlus Control
Advantages
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Intensive browning
Food is always evenly cooked
Ease of operation
All products are ready to serve (part and full loads)
Extra quality
More slices
Reduced cooking times for many pro-ducts
Perfect crackling and juice for rqasting
I
Users can decide on the following at the touch of a button:

l Crispiness (perfect crackling, crispy skin)
l Moistness
(meat, pies, mince)
l Consistency
(bakery products are deliciously light,
and not greasy)
l Surface (tasty crackling, typical roast taste, mouth-watering appearance)
l Rising (various doughs: yeast, flaky pastry, etc., rolls,
croissants, etc.)
What ClimaPlus
Control
does
,,ClimaPlus is a patented piece of technology which allows

chefs to precisely measure and control not only temperatures,
cooking times and cooking modes, but also humidity in the
cooking climate, which may be between 30 C and 300 C.
ClimaPlus checks on the humidity level set and controls it
completely automatically.
The cooking climate/desired climate selected is permanently
displayed in the Clima window.
Blue represents the moist heat being actively fed in
from the steam generator and/or the humidity escaping
from the food.
In other words, in the Combination of moist and dry heat
mode, the more blue in the Clima window display,
the more humid the cooking climate.
Red represents the dry heat generated by the heating
elements in the cooking cabinet.
In other words, in the dry heat and Combination of moist
and dry heat modes, the more red in the Clima window
display, the drier the cooking climate.
13
ClimaPlusControl
The green figure above the red/blue display shows
the exact percentage of humidity.
Control of the cooking cabinet climate is represented

by two control arrows in the Magic eye.
h
t
If the arrow is illuminated

pointing upwards, humidity is being
fed into the cooking cabinet.
Examples:
Pies,strudels, quiches, choux pastry, sponges, flaky pastry,
all types of joints, flash fried food, crackling, all types of poultry, frozen convenience food (side dishes, roasts, desserts).
In other words, whenever the quality and appearance of the product are particularly important.
Cooking
If the arrow is illuminated
pointing downwards,
humidity is being extracted.
-
Operating:
l
Select the
cooking mode
Press the
Magic eye key
Use the central dial

to select the
Checking
the current
humidity
level
Press the key for the cooking cabinet temperature.
The cmrent humidity level in the cooking cabinet appears
in the (Ilima window. The blue bars only display
the percentage of humidity.
14
mode
) Cookingwith theClimaPlusCombi
The ClimaPlusCombi has two cooking modes:
The ClimaPlusCombi allows almost all traditional cooking processesto be used in just
one unit!
15
Cooking modes
mu
-Moist heat (steam)

The steam generator produces hygienic steam. This is fed, unpressurized,
into the cooking cabinet and is circulated at high speed by the fan.
The patented control system regulates the input of steam; only as much
steam is fed in as tile food is able to absorb. The cooking temperature
can be set to between 30 C and 130 C.
Dry heat (/lotair)

High-capacity heating elements heat the dry air. The fan circulates
this hot air evenly throughout the cooking cabinet. The temperature
can be set to between 30 C and 300 C.
Moist heat + Dry heat (Conlbi-steallling)

The Moist heat and Dry heat cooking modes are combined by a
control system. This creates a hot, humid climate for particularly intensive
cooking. The temperature can be set to between 30 C and 300 C.
The combination of moist and dry heat, in conjunction with ClimaPlus
Control, guarantees the right cooking climate for all products and the ideal
level of humidity.
The additional functions and the ClimaPlus automatic control

system mean that there are now no limits on the individual range
of food.
Depending on how you want to cook the food, you can choose
or combine the relevant modes either singly, in sequence or in
combination.
16
--
__I
_--
---
--
--
j Noist heat mode

--
The Clima window is illuminated in blue and signals

10(1% humidity in the cooking cabinet.
Selcct Moist heat
Set the temperature, if necessary
Set i.he time/continuous operation or core temperature.

Clit iaPlus Control is preset at maximum saturation
and cannot be changed. All additional functions
(exc.?pt for humidifying and cool down) can be integrated.
Prc heating
Prel eat until steam condenses on the glass door.
Chwking
The food can be checked at any time by:
l R[,ading the displays
l M jnual checks (using a finger or a needle,
01 applying pressure)
l In ierting the automatic core probe.
Loi\ding/unloading
- En ;ure that the grid shelves and/or mobile oven racks
arc: properly secured.
-The door of the unit can be opened at any time. The unit
automatically switches itself off; the fan continues to rotate.
:
po@oes are,~Qo~~~_rnbie~quicklyand,,more W.er!slyely.;

Vegetable st&k &,,.bt collected by inserting a.container
. in &e botiom of ttiemobile oven rack.
-.b,P
l It I&etter
touse.w? shallow containers rather,,than
i one, high oneJhe @d is not piled so high and:so is not
,:!*
t packed so tightly.tggether.,
.:
l Dumplings $?!I!
,be placed in shallow contair&s
1
.sI
(not too c!ose together). ::
l Rick ;$nd cereals are the oply type of food where Water
negbfj to be$dded.(lpart
rice to l.5,- 2 parts water).
l Tor&toes cdn be-skinnedeasily. Steam them for :
3O-E;Oseconds andihen chill them in cold water.
.1
l
l
l
l
raution! Hot steam! The containers are hotl

Caution! Take care not to scald yourself!
Make sure the mobile oven rack is properly secured!
Moist heat 30-99X:

l The fan operates
intermittently
up after
a set time in order to delivt!r the heat
to the food slowly.
A!
17
Moistheatmode
Advantages
Extremely short preheating periods
Excellent quality food
l vitamins are conserved
l
Colour is preserved
l
Less fat
l
Food is not overcooked
. Different products can be cooked simultaneously
l
No taste transfer
l
Partial batches can be unloaded at any time, e.g. a la
carte/right on time.
l
Sample dishes
l
Mise en place
Tomato concassee, garnishes (vegetables or fruit),
mushrooms, blanching juliennes and brunoises, blanching
vegetables for stuffings, roulades, etc., peeling onions and
chestnuts, soaking pulses.
Starters
Scrambled eggs, poached eggs, hard-boiled eggs,
vegetable pies, steamed salads, asparagus, vegetable flans,
stuffed vegetables (onions, leeks, celery, etc.), cannelloni.
Taster are not translerred when dillerent products are cooked together
Soup garnishes
Dumplings, ravioli, royale of vegetables.
Cooking
l
Main courses
Boiled beef, cured ham, tongue, turkey legs, steamed fish.
Side dishes
Rice, dumplings, noodles (spaghetti), fresh and frozen
vegetables, vegetable casseroles, boiled/jacket potatoes.
Desserts
Fresh or frozen fruit (e.g. hot raspberries), stewed fruit,
rice pudding.
18
methods
Steaming, stewing, blanching, poaching, simmering,

soaking, vacuum cooking, thawing, regenerating (reheating),
preserving.
, Moist heat mode under 100c
Advantages
l Extremely short preheating periods
Advantages of Gentle cooking:
l Excellent quality food
l The intrinsic taste of the food is preserved
l Excellent consistency and elasticity for different sorts of
meat and fish dishes. Improved handling\duri,ng service.
l Prevents curdling and crumbling
..
l No blistering = flat surface
l Large joints and pieces for exhibition purposes are cooked
gently, resulting in less weight loss and less shrinkage
l Less fat
l Temperatures are regulated precisely during cooking
without having to be constantly checked
l Reduced cooking times compared to traditional methods
l Partial batches can be unloaded at any time, e.g. a la
carte/right on time.
Sample
l
dishes
Mise en place
Blanching bacon and ham, poaching fish garnishes,
pasteurizing soups, sauces, stocks, funlets, etc.
(off-premises sales).
Delicate prodircrs turn out well every time with little effort and no risk
Starters
Galantines, fish cakes, terrines, mousselines,
vacuum cooking (e.g. scallops), etc.
Soup garnishes
Dumplings, royales.
l
Main courses
Fish (salmon, sole, etc.), poultry, diet food,
vacuum cooking (chicken breasts, tongue, liver),
turkey fillets, chicken breasts, fillet of beef, sausages, etc.
Side dishes
Flans, vegetable casseroles
Desserts
Fruit, creme caramel, cabinet pudding, semolina pudding.
Cooking
methods
Scalding, simmering, soaking, poaching, blanching,
vacuum cooking, thawing, regenerating (reheating),
pasteurizing, main cooking.
19
Moist heat mode unclerloo oc
Vacuum
l
ving food in a vacuum. The most important requirement is

that the raw material must be 100% vacuum packed. It
shourd be either shrink-wrapped or sealed in vacuum bags.
After being cooked in a vacuum the food is cooled down
very quickly to +2C.
Moist heatcookingat ,JOOY.,

Generally,the lowerthe cookingtemp
! theIcookingtime. ,$, ,: ,
. ,Guidelinesfor cooking temper&r
,; Soup&rnishes:,
cooking
Vacuumcookingdevelopedout of the methodof preser-
Recommended cooking times are the same as those for

Moist heat.
.t,:,fJ _,, :: ..
: Fishandshellfish:1,J;
Meatproductsandsausages:
Whitemeat:
Darkmeat:
Poultry:
Practical experience:
l
The higher the standard of vacuuming, the shorter

the cooking time.
Application methods:
l Fish,meat,poultry,
vegetables,sidedishesandfruit can
beprepared in the conventional way. Various garnishes
the lntiilnsictasteof the food is intensiffed;:$$

Donot usetoo muchalcohol,fumet;esse&ce
and special fillings can be prepared with particular care.

Goods to be vacuum cooked should be placed on grids
Vacuum cooking:
Fish, stuffing, goose livers:
White meat:
Vegetables, mushrooms, fruit:
Dark meat, side dishes:
Teniperatureguide: 74 -100C
I.,,,;g$ ;:;;
rj
l Scalding :
,
Theprocessis verygentle,with no weight,$os$>&$:~,: ;
l Advantages compafed with cooking in boiling bans::
yQ;;.*d#$ :! : .,/ ::
- Firmstructureof fillingsi
yy :Lg?$:1; _ ;,
-- Intensifiedaromaandtasteof products$~~,&& ). 1;
; Weight loss is very low for fatty foods. $$$$;:
- Burstscanbe avoided,especiallywhen,i$ngnatural
:., ):
. :;ljS1 .*t
1,
::
,j ;2
skinswhicharedamaged.
,!,:,
Recommendedtemperature: 72C 80$$
l
I
20
) Moistheat mode over looT

Advantages
The food is intensively steamed.
Cooking times are reduced.,
Dont forget the advantages of Moist heat cooking.
l
l
l
Examples
steaming
of food cooked using forced
\
Side dishes
Potatoes, firm cooking vegetables (e.g. kohlrat!, carrots)
Checking
r l Reading the display
l Manual checks (using a finger or a needle,
or applying pressure)
l Inserting the automatic core probe.
l
l
Caution! Hot steam!

Take care not to scald yourself!
Caution1The containers and grids are ho1!
Make sure that the mobile oven rack
is properly secured!
A!
..
1
21
._-.._ _.
--.
---
"Dryheat mode
Two red bars light up,in the Clima window

and indicate 100% hot air.
Select Dry heat
Set temperature
Set time/continuous operation or core temperature
If need be, select ClimaPluslhumidity.

Press the ClimaPlus function key and set
the desired humidity with the cntral dial.
The setting can be anywhere between
100 and 0%.
ClimaPlus Control can be used to restrict the humidity in

the cooking cabinet.Red barsand the relevantpercentageshow
the humidity levelin the cooking cabinet.The more red in the display,
the drier the atmospherein the cooking cabinet (in other words the
humidity levelis lower).
All additionalfunctions(exceptCool down) can be integrated.
Preheating
Preheat the unit until the set temperature is reached.
Generally,
the preheating temperature
the cooking temperature.
is the same as
With pan-fried food, frozen products or gratins,

preheat the unit to 300C.

l Reading the display
l Manual checks (using a finger or a needle,
or applying pressure)
l Inserting the automatic core probe.
Loadin$lunloading
- Ensure that the grid shelves and/or mobile. oven racks are
properly secured.
-The door of the unit can be opened at any time. The unit
automatically switches itself off; the fan continues to rotate
Take care not to burn yourself1

c Caution! The containers and grids are hot!
e Make sure that the mobile oven rack
is properly secured!
A!
;Dry heatmode
-.
Advantages
l 300C back-up capacity - especially vhen fully loaded
. Very short warm-up times
:
l Excellent quality food
l Food is browned simultaneously on l ,ifferent levels
without having to be turned
. Less fat
l Cooking is possible on all level:
.k
l Less cooking time needed comf lred to traditiorpal methods
l Partial batches can be unloader (It any time,
e.g. a la carte/right on time.
Sample
l
dishes
Mise en place
Sweating bacon, roasting bones, preparing natural meat
juices, allowing dough (yeast) to rise.
. Starters
Meatballs, meat puddings, gratin&d vegetables, vegetable
pies, sirloin, chicken wings, finger food, fast food, duck breasts,
quiches, shortcrust pastry,tartlets, blind baking.
l
Soup garnishes
Profiteroles, cheese croutons, cheese straws.
Food is browked tvenly on all sides without having to be turned
Roasts/main courses
Steak, rump steak, T-bone steak, porterhouse steak,
liver, hamburgers, chicken legs and breasts, half or whole
r chickens, turkey, pheasant, quail, meat in breadcrumbs,
breaded convenience food, fried chicken, vegetarian cutlets,
loin, duck breasts, sausages in n Itural skins, pizzas.
Side dishes
Potato pancakes, fried, roast and baked potatoes, potato
souffles, duchesse potatoes, etc.
Desserts
Sponges, marble cakes, plain cakes, fancy cakes,
flaky pastry, fleurons, croissants, bt ead, rolls, baguettes,
shortcrust pastry, frozen apple puffs.
Cooking
methods
Roasting, grilling, baking, gratinating.
23
Dry heatmode
Use granite enamelled trays for cooking fish
24
--.
Place pan-fried food on grids
--
----
Dry heat + Moist heat
The combination of moist and dry heat is visible in

the Clima window. The moisture level is set to 90%
(shown in blue).
Select Dry heat and Moist heat together
Set temperature
i
Set time/continuous operation or core temperature
if need be, select ClimaPlus Control/humidity.

Pressthe ClimaPlus function key and set the desired humidity
with the central dial.
The setting can be anywhere between 100 and 0%.
I
I
I
/
,
ClimaPlus Control will be used to measure and regulate

the humidity in the cooking cabin It.
A blue/red bar and the relevant p !rcentage show
the humidity level in the cooking cabinet.
The more blue in the display, the moister the atmosphere
in the cooking cabinet (in other words, the higher the
humidity level), The more red irl the display, the drier
the atmosphere in the cooking caninet (in other words,
the humidity level is lower).
All additional functions (except Humidif$rg and Cool down)
can be integrated.
Checking
The food can be checked at any time by;
l Reading the display
l Manual checks (using a finger or a needle, or applying
pressure)
l InserVng the automatic core probe.
- Ensure that the grid shelves and/or mobile oven racks
are properly, secured.
: The door of the unit can be opened at any time. The unit
automatically switches itself off; the fan continues to rotate.
Preheat the unit until the set temperature is reached.

Generally, the preheating temperature is the same
as the cooking temperature
(except with frozen bakery products).
l
l
Caution1 Hot steam and vapours!

Take care not to burn yourself1
Caution! The containers and grids are hot!
Make sure the mobile oven rack
A1
b
25

Advantages
Extremely short preheating periods
Excellent quality food :,
l Food does not dry out and has excellent crusts
and crackling
l Automatic basting, which reduces weight loss
l Joints are moist and have the right consistency
.k
l Intensive, gentle cooking
t
l Less fat
l Large joints of meat are cooked evenly
l Roasts have a firm consistency which makes portioning
easy
. Less cooking time needed compared to traditional methods
l Partial batches can be unloaded at any time,
e.g. a la carte/right on time.
l
l
Sample
Moist
l
dishes
and dry
heat
in combination
Mise en place
Roasting bones.
Starters
Quiches, vegetable pies, flans, moussaka, lasagne,
cannelloni, paella.
Roasts/main courses
Roasts (beef, veal, pork, lamb, poultry, game), roulades,
stuffed vegetables (peppers, aubergines, onions, cabbage,
etc.), vegetable gratins (cauliflower), turkey legs, stuffed
breast of veal, ham noodles, leg of pork, belly pork,
various omelettes.
Side dishes
Gratinated potatoes, frozen products, baked potatoes.
Desserts
Yeast doughs, choux pastry, cream puffs, apple strudel.
Miscellaneous
Bread, rolls (frozen dough)
Cooking
methods
Combi-steaming, combi-roasting, combi-baking, glazing,
gratinating, humidifying, basting.
!
26
Large !oints of meat are cooked evenly
.%
will reduce the cooking time.,,
j:;>..$~~$& ,: :::;,
i ,T Jointswith rindsor larger@&esofqeat..$$$ ,J$;. :, :

Yi( steamed for approximately me third of !!,
i<* Catch the condensat!otl in!&~$ontainer)lat
;../.+ shelf and add it to thejligl$f,roasted boneS;:f@fh&
,,
:#t
1 ,
: :* i ( ..r..,
.
Operating
l
Reheating temperature
For best results, average temperatures
should be between 100C and 140X,
but the temperature can be varied f
or different products.
Reheating time
The reheating time depends on the product,
product temperature, number of plates,
fullness and desired serving temperature,
but as a general rule should be approximately
5 to 8 minutes for food arranged on plates.
ClimaPlus
Control
for reheating
To avoid puddles of water
and dried-up edges, the ClimaPlus
setting should be between 40% and 60%.
Checking
The food can be checked at any time.
l
Ideal serving temperature:

70-75 C
The serving temperature can be controlled by using
the automatic core temperature function.
Change the set values as required.
17
: "Dv heid + "Moistheat

Advantages
l
l
l
l
No loss of heat
Quality is retained or even improved, since you have
more time to arrange the plates and dishes, and can
ensure that the food looks attractive
All food can be reheat >d without being covered
.
There is no time limit between cookingland reheating
or serving
Can be used for banquets, large functions, travel groups,
a la carte meals, free-flow and convenience loading,
and relay cooking
Can be used anywhere (in canteens, large industrial
kitchens or the catering trade)
Staff work more efficiently.
Sample
l
dishes
Starters
Spaghetti, cannelloni, lasagne, vegetable dishes,
cheese noodles, quiches, spring rolls, onion flans.
Soup garnishes
Dumplings, pancakes, vermicelli, noodles, pasta squares.
Roasts/main courses
Roasts,meatloaf, pies, frozen meat and fish, vegetable
burgers, leg of pork, leg of veal, roasts with crackling (cooked
in beer), roulades, stuffed vegembles, ready-to-serve meals.
Side dishes
Rice, potato pancakes, noodles, vegetables, potatoes
(mashed, gratinated, souffle:J, french fries.
Desserts
Apple ,;trr del, cheesecak t, hoI fruit, stewed fruit.
Time !:av ing

No morr w; rming food up and keeping it warm.
Pre-cool ed ood can be reheated using the cook chill
method. ForId can be reheated on plates and dishes and
in contalnei ;.
28
) Dry heat + Moist heat

-
Porcelaln~plates,
eart~enware~$la!s~sil~~~~~
d&is;brassbeakers,
aluminium,stain
T_
,
... Heat retainina hood: for bridaina%%tr%

:) transporting
foid.
(I
Arrangethefoodevenlyon the plat
placetoo closetogether,:;
i
7I
l Mise-en-place:
seasonand
lightly
brushingthefoodwith.butterwhile
; .<
.I
i+.I
r,,:
l Sauces:
.,:,Pourover,thefood&$ reheating
....<
on the plates: . <i.:
y$, ?j,
.&
,
l
Reheating on plates using the special transport trolley. Available for table and floor models.
Procedures
whichfrequentlyre-occuil~~~~~~~~~~~~~i
individually,
): !.
,I: j .;~~$~,,
/,_/,
.<,!.
-iv
0:b,:y>.
.
c
l ClimaPlus Control: Humidityin the&kl
canbecontrolledindividually,
to ensurethatlti j%?
forall kindsof products.
Thehumiditysetting~&b$)
.chanaedat anvtime.evenwhilethe foodis b&ra%d
Dontforgetthe setprograms
(seepage44). , (,..!;
Y:.,: !
i,?
, ,d.;d
,./ ;:.
Variable reheating .r.,j;11:
Youcanselectyourindividual
particulartypesof food,,inany
mode, ,..; ;i-: : .:;<;..,
!I _ .,
Heal retaining hoods for the mobile plate rack. Available for table and floor mod&
r:
(,:
:_&..:.3
P iw
cl+!p :7.
Cooking with core temperatures

Advantages
l Food is cooked perfectly.
l Less weight loss.
l Stops joints being overcooked.
l Easier and precise conirol of cooking, thanks to a digital
display.
l Staff are free to get on with other work while the food
is being cooked.
l Guarantees high, constant quality standards as oppased
to traditional methods such as insertinga needle or a fork,
testing using a finger or the lips, or cutting test slices.
Function
To measure the core temperature of food, thereby ensuring
that food is cooked perfectly. No risks.
Cooking
mode
Can be used in all mode:.
Operating
Insert the clean, cold tip of the probe into centre of the food
at the point where it is thickest.
Select the cooking mode.
Set the cooking temperature.
Set the core temperature - the preselected temperature

is displayed.
The timer does not operate.
A buzzer sounds when the preselected core temperature

is reached and the unit automatically switches itself off.
30
The tore temperature cooking method enwres your food is cooked perfectly.
Insert the probe into the thickest part of the meat.
Target temp.
Current temp.
)Cookingwith coretemperatures
Working with core temperAtures

a. Checking the duration of the core temperature process
Press,and the time elapsed is shown
in the timer display.
.\
b. Checking the cooking time remaining
If the timer is set before using the automatic core
temperature function, the clock continues to run in the
background, but does not control the cooking process.
Pressand holddown
Press simultaneously
The cooking time remaining is shown

in the timer display.
l
l
t
l
The core temperature probe may be hot.

Never allow the probe to hang loose outside
the cooking cabinet.
Before removing a load,
take the probe out of the food.
A!
Food /I perfectly cooked and weight loss is reduced. Roasts are juicier.
31
Cookingwith coretemperatures
Meat
Core .
temperature
Meat
-Pork
Beef
Core
temperature
Rare
bleu
rare
45C
Medium rare
Saignant
medium rare
50C
Medium
a point
medium
55-60C
Medium
medium
65C
Full./ cooked
75-80C
--
Cured
65C
Lamb
Well done
bien cuit
well done
75 - 85 C
Fully cooked
79C
Mutton
Veal
Fully cooked
--
Fully cooked
over 77C
82C
-Poultry
Fully cooked
-.
85C
-.
--
Notes
-
-. -
~...__
.-
..--~
-.__-I
32
.-
,Cookingwith coretemperatures
State
Core
temperature
-.
--Mutton
-.Saddle
~_.
Beef
Fillet of beef
medium
55-58C
Sirloin
medium
, 55-60C
Beef rose
well done
Roast beef
well done
85~9OY
80-85C
--Aitchbone
well done
90C
State
A-
light pink
Core
temperature
Saddle
-.Leq
A.-
well-done
_ 70-75C
80C
light pink
75-78C
-LeY
well done
82-85C
--
Pork
Leg
well done
75C
Leg
light pink
65-68C
Saddle
Shoulder
slightly light pink 65-70C
Belly/stuffed
well done
well done
70-90C
Belly
well done
80-85C
Knuckle, roasted
80-85C
Knuckle, cured
well done
well done
Ham
juicy
Smoked pork chops

(buffet slices)
75C
Lamb
-.~When the meat is well done, the core temperature
varies between 79C and 85C. The colour of the me< t (ore
-is grey, slightly pale pink. The meat juice is clear.
---
--Poultry
Chicken
---
85C
75-80C--
65-70C
55-60C
Goose
-Goose
well done
pink
well done
90-92
-Turkey, duck
well done
80-85C
---
80-85C
64-68C
Knuckle, pickled
Ham in breadcrumbs
well done
75-80C
well done
65-70C
longue
well cooked
85-90C
Pigs head
75-82C
Pie:;, path,
etc.
KY,
Me;ltloaf
---
72-74C
__-.
Veal
Terrines
---.Galantines
-.
60-70C
70C
1
65C
Saddle
light pink
65-70C
Leg, top-side,
fricandeau
-.
Kidney
well done
78C
Balloiines
----Foie gras
65C
45C
well done
75-80=X
Shoulder
well done
75-80C
- .Salmon
-..
--
60C
Breast
(often stuffed or boned)
well done
75-90C
--
Pike
--.
--Fish mousse
.- -
63C
65C
-__
---
33
Humidifying additional function
Advantages
l
Doughs rise exceptionally well due to the quick addition
of moisture
l
Pastries shine slightly :
l
Sudden addition of moisture.
Function
Sudden addition of moisture.
\
t
Sample
Mise en place
Blind baking (tartlets, etc.).
Starters
Profiteroles, vol-au-vents, baguettes, fleurons, flutes.
Soup garnishes
Profiteroles.
dishes
Roasts/main courses
Ham in bread dough, fillet of beef in yeast dough, etc.
Desserts
Eclairs, cream puffs, flaky pastries, croissants,
poppy seed cake, nut strudel.
Cooking
mode
Dry heat.
Pedoated aluminium sheets conduct the heat more quickly and evenly to the underside of the food.
Temperature
range
120C - 250C cooking temperature.
Operating
l
Press Humidify key
Duration of humidifying: The moisture is produced

for as long as the key is depressed, or is restricted to four
seconds (when activated a green digital display lights up).
34
Humidifying
in a program
The additional Humidifying! function can be used in all
program steps using dry heat between 120C and 250C.
Moisture will be injected at intervals of 120 seconds for
a period of 4 seconds at a time. The green LED only lights up
when humidifying is in operation.
) Half fan speedadditional function

Advantages
l Quiet in operation
l Light pastries retain their shape
l Light and sensitive products such as cheesecakes rise evenly.
Function
Fan rotates at half speed.
.
Cooking
mode
Can be selected with any cooking mode.
Sample
dishes
/Light items such as sponges, small pastries (e.g. profiteroles,
cheesecakes, meringues), cheese straws, flaky pastries, souffles, stuffings, fillings (e.g. stuffed sole, stuffed fillet of beef).
I icyht pastries retain their shape
Operating
l Select cooking mode
Selected desired temperature, time or core temperature.
I* Select Half fan speed

(green LED shows the function is activated).
35
Phasedventilationadditionalfunction
.--____ .-Advantages
l
l
l
l
l
Gentle cooking climate.

Less weight loss.
Less power consumption.
Ideal cooking at low temperatures.
Gentle heat transfer.
Function
The fan operates at set intervals.
Cooking
i
mode

l-------
30a
C
Sample dishes with

l
Phased ventilation
Starters
e.g.
C
150CT
cooking
Joints
with
binding
time
200
---~---------*---I---I---
Constant
cooking
temperature
Sirloin (Cold/warm), saddle of venison, saddle of lamb,

loin of pork, turkey breast, duck breast, goose liver,
poultry breast.
l
Roasts/main
courses
Leg of iamb, sirloin (cold/warm), turkey,

smoked pork chops, ham, topside, legs of beef,
lamb and pork (exhibition pieces).
--
Cooking
Oh
ventilatiori
Operating
l
Select cooking mode
Selected desired temperature and time or core temperature.
Select Phased ventilation

(green LED shows the function is activated).
36
or
time
;Phased
ventilationadditionalfunction
Advantages
l A gentle cooking process which cooks the meat
(finishes it off) slowly and retains its intrinsic taste.
l
Less weight loss: The meat juice is retained in the food,

so that the meat stays moist and the weight loss is further
1 .
reduced.
.k
t
Edges cannot be overcooked. The c&r of the meat is uniform when it is carved.
Food does not need to be checked while it is being cooked,

as setting a low cooking cabinet temperature and core
temperature makes it impossible for it to be overcooked.
Lerr. ICISSof moisture when meat is cooked and then portioned.
Less moisture is lost when the food is portioned.
Operating
l Preheat to operating temperature.
I
The cooking process is split into at least two phases:
300
l CTempnratute
range
A
lC0
C-
1, Initial cooking at temperatures over 100C

(120C to 180C).
2. Finishing off at low temperatures (50C to 90C)

and Phased ventilation.
o hours
0.5 hours
up to 24 hours
Half power and Half fan speed can be used if

necessary (see also the descriptions of these functions),
The meat can then be kept warm using the same cooking
mode, if need be also using Half power, Half fan
speed and Phased ventilation.
37
---
j Phasedventilation additional function-___
Temperature
Flnfshfng/holdlng
Cooklng
5,
oc- .m m I I I
I - I I;-
Constant
f&C---Core
U hours
cooklng
-
temperature
------
temperature
Cooking
t&e
, "Cool downadditionalfunction
Advantages
l The cooking cabinet temperature is reduced quickly
and without harming materials.
Staff are free to do other things
Function
Cools the cooking cabinet down quickly- Nthout harming .
materials
t
_
Operating
l Close the door.
Select the Cool down key.
The following appears in the display:
Open the door.
The following appears in the display:
The green LED shows the function is activated.

The current cooking cabinet temperature flashes on and off.
I
I
Caution1 The fan does not switch itself off

when the door is opened during Cool down.
Use the Cool down function only if the
air baffle system is properly closed.
Caution! Close the door before selecting
the Cool down function.
The Cool down function
cannot be programmed.
Never use cold water to cool
the cooking cabinet down!
A!
39
-..
.
--
-.
r.
.-..
-.
---
Expertkey
-Expert
--
key
The Expert key lets you select the applications

1. Special function and
2. Program library.
1. Special
functions
-.
Special functions are applications which in general
are less rrsed in day-to-dayoperation. This is why they
are not 8Irown on the control panel, but can be called
up as required.
The special functions can be integrated into all manual or
programmed cooking processes.
The following special functions are available:
- Half-power
- Delta-T cooking
- HACCP logging
Operating
l Enter the cooking process with: cooking mode,
temperature and time/core temperature
Press the Expert key
Select the desired special function with the central dial.
Confirm with the Program/start key.
-_-._
.-
---
Expertkey: Half-power additiowl function

---
Advantages
l Power overloads are avoided by reducing the power draw.
Function
Uses only 50% of the mains poker.
Cooking
mode
Operating
Pressthe Expert key.
Select Half-power (E112) with the central dial.
Activate using the Proglstart key
---
-___
41
Expert key: Delta-T cooking additional

.- function (Delta)
Advantages
An especially gentle way of producing hams and large,
marinated joints of meat (topside of beef).
The meat protein is coagulated at the start of cooking,
but the meat fibres can still expand.
This stops the protein escaping, as this process does not
allow.the surface to stretch as a result of a crust forming
at too early a stage.
k
t
Function
Because the temperature in the cooking cabinet rises slowly,
with a constant difference from the relevant core temperature, the meat undergoes a longer cooking process.
-380 Clemperature
range
Delta-T = the temperature difference between the

core temperature and the cooking cabinet temperature.
Cooking
mode
0 hours
Ihe Delta-T temperature is the diflerente betwt
the cooking cabinet temperature.
Operating
l
Pressthe Expert key.
SelectDelta with the central dial.
Activate using the Prog/start key
The following appears in the cooking cabinet display:
Set the target core temperature.
Pressthe temperature key and enter the delta temperature

in the cooking cabinet display.
i
42
Depending on experience, the Delta-T temperature is

between 25C and 60C. Delta-T can be programn ed.
C&lng
-_~
he core temperature and
time
j Expert key: HACCPadditional function

Advantages
l The standard interface (g-pin SubD plug) allows you to
print out data on cooking processes online and to log it
at any time.
l
For your safety: reference logs document your standard
of work.
The following data is logged:
Data output every 60 seconds (in ASCII format)
t
- batch number
.-time
- cooking program number or name
- cooking cabinet temperature
- core temperature
- door open I door closed
Function
The process data can be output via the interface.
The data can be output in the following ways:
- via a printer connected to an interface
- via a Windows PC
-via an MSDOS PC
- via PSION Workabout
Operating
l
Connect the output device
l
Press the Expert key.
Select HACCP with the central dial.
Confirm using the Proglstart key
A flashing dot appears in the display to show the logging:
The output of cooking data is terminated by:

l
the timer expiring
l
the core temperature being reached
l the cooking mode being deselected
43
Expert key: Program ld.mry

-2. Program
library
The program library contains cooking programs for

various products and applications. 1 he programs have been
developed and extensively tested by RATIONAL and give
you the assurance of excellent results every time.
Advantages:
- Programs developed by Rational chefs
- Excellent results without testing in advance
- No need to enter programs
Program for cooking meat at low temperatures.

Recommended products: Beef (e.g. rib roast)
Cured food (e.g. smoked pork chops)
Preparation as desired.
Please use the core temperature!
Eat h program is stored under its own name which allows

the product to be easily identified.
De/lending on the user language chosen, the names
appear in german, english, french, Spanish or Portuguese.
You can also assign a name in your own language.
Thr! names are documents under User.
Proceed as described under Programming,
naming programs.
The following programs are stored in the program library:
Program for grilling whole chickens.

The chickens are cooked in a vertical position on the Rational
chicken grids. This ensures they are cooked evenly from inside
and our side. A special cooking profile guarantees the chickens
are always moist inside and crispy on the outside. Because
the chickens are cooked in a vertical position, the cooking
process is reduced to 35 minutes.
The chit kens are ready for serving immediately.
Recommended products: Fresh chickens weighing 1000 g to
1lOOg.
44
Cook-chill chickens (1 st grilling phase)

Program for cooking chickens. The chickens are fully cooked,
but the skin is only lightly browned. A second grilling phase
is used to reheat the chickens to serving temperature and
to achieve the desired level of browning and crispiness
of the skin. The chickens are cooked in a vertical position
on RATIONAL chicken grids. When they are subsequently
reheated tlrey can if desired be left on the grids.
Recommended products: Fresh chickens weighing
1000gto 1lOOg.
Program for reheating precooked chickens using

the 2nd grilling phase.
The program described about should preferably be used
for the 1st grilling phase. The chickens are reheated in
a vertical position on chicken grids.
..x
Product: Precooked, chilled chickens.
-_
_
._
-_-
--
.-
-h-P-
___
--
.--
-_
Expertkey: Program library
Program for baking croissants.

Recommended products: preprepared, frozen products.
Hint: Use aluminium trays coated with Teflon.
Program for reheating in day-to-day

A la carte business.
For loading precooked food on plates or dishes,
or in containers, on an ongoing basis.
Recommended products: See Reheating in the section
on Moist & Dry Heat.
Program for baking baguettes.

Recommended products: preprepared, frozen products.
Hint: Use aluminium trays coated with Teflon.
Program for gentle slow roasting of hams and

cured foods in moist heat.
Remember to use core temperatures!
Also see the section on Delta-T Cooking.
Program for reheating food arrat ged on plates.
The prepared plates are stored on a pl jte regeneration rack,
chilled, reheated and taken to be served. This ensures a
quicker turnaround for batches and quicker service.
The program comprises two steps:
1. Preheating: The CPC is preheated to a temperature
higher than the subsequent reheating temperature in order to
create a reservoir of heat.
The RATIONAL cooking profiles are stored ideal procedures for cooking meat, mainly slow roasting (see next page).
Once the preheating temperature is reached, the following

appears in the display
Flashes
and the buzzer sounds intermittently.
The CPC is ready for loading.
..
Program for cleaning ClimaPlus Combis.

Duration of cleaning: 40 minutes.
See the section on Cleaning.
All programs in the library are fixed. In other words,
they cannot be altered. They are always retained in their
original form. Fixed programs are indicated by the asterisk
at the beginning of the name.
. ,
..,:
i
Expert key: Program library
Operating:
l Deselect cooking modes and programming
l Pressthe Expert key
l Select the desired program using the central dial
l Activate the program with the program/start key
Modifying
fixed
programs
To change fixed programs (for instance, because you want
the outside of the food to be crispier), mo&fications can
be made as follows:
Copy the fixed program to your variable program memory
(1-99) and make the changes you require.
Operating:
l Select the fixed program using the Expert key
and the central dial
l
l
Start the program

Press the Expert key again
The program number is displayed.
If the number flashes, the program has not been allocated.

Use the central dial to select the program nunlber.
Pressthe Expert key and then the ptogram/start key.
The name of the selected program is retained,
but the initial asterisk disappears.
If a fixed program is copied into the variable memory several

times, you can attach an index number to the program name
for ease of identification.
E.g.
Proceed as described under Programming,
naming programs.
46
, Cookingprofiles
What are ,,cooking profiles an I how do they work?

RATIONAL cooking profiles are store I ideal procedures for
cooking meat, in particular fir roast, like roast of pork, leg of
lamb etc.
What is special about them is that ti ey adjust automatically
to the size of the pieces of meat, gi\ ng you top-quality
results in terms of the following irnlj lrtant points:
l The meat fibres inside the joint atI real{9 tender (with just
the right texture) and are beautiftr.ly moist ribht the way
through until just below the brow1 ed outer skin.
l The outer skin is browned to perfc,ction. The colour, real
,,roast flavour (and crispy crust vhere appropriate) are
achieved entirely automatically, at I any drying out of the
meat just under the surface cause I I)y the browning is
,
minimal.
l Weight loss in the joint is therefot ! ,lutomatically kept to a
minimum.
1
I
To achieve these top-quality results compared to meat cooked in a conventional combi-steamer - the cooking process for
a profile runs through a sequence of changing temperature
and humidity settings in the product specific ideal climate. The
,,intelligent software needed for 011 profiles keeps the food
under ,,observationn by automatic, Ily and continously measuring and recalculating the data for the relevant cooking
process. It can automatically tell hov big the joint is, thereby
ensuring that the desired core tempc,rature is always reached
at the same time as the desired icieal degree of browning.
s
3
Easy to operate
The only thing you have to do yours 4f is to set the final cooking cabinet temperature and the de sired core temperature.
The Clima Plus Combi takes cate of everything el:e. The
recommended settings are given in he table below.
2
I
--
What can and cant be cooked using the profiles?

Basically,the cooking profiles require Ihe pieces of meat to be of
a minimum size so that the tip of the core temperature sensor,
which is important for the cooking process, can be inserted
properly.
The tip of the probe must be surrounded by at least 2 cm of
meat on all sides.
The emphasis with the profiles is also on ,,roasting. In other
words, the minimum cooking time sl ljuld not be less than
30 minutes.
Thismeans that the profiles are not SIlitable for:
- chickens,ducks or other small birds ( rse Clima Grilling for these)
- pan-fried food and smaller fillets of neat, etc.
This is what you do:

l
l
l
l
l
l
Deselect the cooking modes and programming

Pressthe ,,expert key
Use the central dial to select the desired program (PROFILE).
Load the Clima Plus Combi. Remember that the pieces of
meat should as far as possible all be the same size
Insert the core temperature sensor carefully. Close the
cookir:g cabinet door
Activaie the prlrlrarn using the Program/Start key
Set the cookin cabinet temperature
Set the final core temperature
The program starts automatically
Note:
The preset RATIONAL cooking profiles cannot be copied.
Recommended
settings for final core
temjleratures
and final cooking cabinet
temperatures
.-
Slow roasting
Recommended
cot2 temp.
Roast pork
Leg of pork
Belly of pork
Beef
75
82
., 75
75
Leg of lamb
Lighter
meat
-furkey breast
Turkey roll
Veal
Knuckle of veal
Suckling pig
MeatlGaf
Salted meat
- 82C
- 85C
- 82C
82C
65C
72C.
75C :
75 - 78C
80C
78C
72C
70C
Recom. final cooking

cabinet temp.
ca. 165 - 180C
130 - 150C
47
weal-timesettings
Operating
l
Select the cooking mode and program
Pressthe timer for 10 seconds

(Skip start-time display)
Display
I
l
Set the desired real time using the central dial.
Press the timer.

The real time is stored.
l
Notes
-.-
49
Presetthg the start time

Entering
the start time
Depending on how your kitchen is organized, the ClimaPlus
Combi can be set to switch itself on. The cooking modes
and programs must be deactivated.
Press the.timer for 5 seconds
Display
Set the rlesired start time using the central dial
Press the timer.

The start time is stored.
The preset start time is stored in the memory

and does not have to be entered afresh every day.
Operating
l Enter tile cooking process
Activate the start time by simultaneously pressing
While \he unit is in standby mode waiting tc, switch itself

on, the current time and the start time appear alternately
in the display.
*
\
.
Starting stored programs

Select the first step of the program, press the timer al Id
proglstart key at the same time until the current time and
the start time appear alternately in the display.
50
.,
:,:!u:.;,
Cooking pro$%
entered in$%
existing progij%s cariallbe starte
Caution1 We must point out that keeping food

in a cooking cabin& for lengthy periods which
is neither chilled nor heated cannot be
1 ;oc;~;;&&
from the hygiene
A
Programming
Operating
Deactivate the cooking mode and open the door of the unit.
Pressthe program/start key
Select the desired program number using the central dial.

Unallocated program settings flash on and off
Enter cooking steps

Display (program number/program step)
Cooking climate
Cooking temperature
Cooking time or core temperature
Any additional functions
Save the program
Check
the program by pressing the program/start key several times
until nothing appears in the display and the buzzer sounds.
Programming
Advantages
l Savestime, because the programs are available all the time.
l Staff are free to get op with other work while the food is
being cooked.
.il :
l The cooking program is fully automatic.
l Quality is assured for calibrated and convenience products.
l Standar,l cooking processes can be used even by untrained staif, completely in line with y!ur settings.
t
_
Working
with
a stored
program
1. Switch the unit on

Press Ihe program/start key
2. Select the desired program number using
the central dial.
3. Press the program/start key.
The cc)oking steps are executed automatically

in sequence.
When the program finishes a buzzer sounds and the unit

automatically switches itself off.
,.
/
i
,,,
Lockor unlock programmingmode

Unallocated
program
settings
do not flash
and off! Activate
and deactivate
as follows:
New password
Factor settings
Passwtirt = RATION, L/CLIMA+
General:
Enter the old password for authorization,
then enter the new password twice.
- Press the expert key

and use the central dial
to call up
!!LOCK ONVLOCK OFF!! .
- Press the start key.
The timer display shows
*******,
and the first
digit flaslres on and off
on
.k
. !+y-p$ .!,
iProg !ii
I!
bJt(l,r:l
- Use the central dial

to enter the password
- Use the timer key to move

forward, and the cooking cabinet
temperatue key to confirm.
- Pressthe expert key

and use the central d al
to call up
!!LOCK 0FFILOCK ON!! .
,;: f,::
i
Ii.:;Pro%,, i
- Pressthe start key.

********,
and the first digit
flashe:, on and off
- Select the characters
for the old password
with the central dial.
Use the timer key to
move forward until
the password is complete.
/#$$f$
<
I
-
- The p,rssword can have fewer than eight digits

- Once 41 characters have been entered correctly,
use the cooking cabinet temperature key to select
!!LrXK ON or LOCK OFF!!
- Save lhe desired status
using 1he stat t key.
- If the program lock is active, no programs
can b 1stored and ! !LOCK ON! !
appe(.ls in the expert display
- Once all characters have been entered correctly,

usi the cooking cabinet temperature key to select
I I LOCK ON or LOCK OFF ! I
- Pressthe central dial.
I********
and the first digit
flashes on and off.
- Use the central dial to select and enter
the charactqrs Ior tire new password.
. Move on to the ne>:t digit by
- Pressing the start k?y.The timer display

shows @Q@@@@@@, and the first digit
flashes on and off.
In case of not knowing the password
anymore an authorised service agency
has to be consulted for a reset.
-
- Repeat the new password (confirm!)
- Save the desired status using the star1 key.
Programming/naming
programs
Deleting
a program
setting
Programs can be deleted as follows and need
not be overwritten.
:
Select the appropriate program number
Select the coo :ing mode
,.
Touch the timer

00.00 is automatically displayed
Press ProglStart, the program location

issnce again unallocated and will flash on and of
To identify your programs faster and more reliably you can name
them individually.Each name can contain up to nine letters and
appears in the text display.
Operating
l
Deselect the cooking medium or program step
Call up the program
Press the Expert key until an underscore or cursor

flashes under the first digit
Select letters with the central dial and confirm with the
Expert key
The cursor flashes under the next letter.

Select and confirm it...
To save, press the Expert key until the underscore

disappears.
54
---
) Programming/naming
programs
Facility
for
in the first
storing
program
pre-heating
step:
Operating
- Deselect the cooking mode
Storing
saved programs
The programs you save are stored by
- program number or
- program name.
.L
I
Storing by program number

-The ClimaPlus Combi does this automatically.
All saved programs are indicated by illuminated digits.
Unallocated programs flash on and off when selected.
- Select the number of the desired program

with the central dial
- Select the cooking mode for preheating
- Set the cooking cabinet temperature
Storing by program name

- Each program can be named individually. See the section on
Naming programs.
- Programs which have been named are automatically sorted
and stored in alphabetical order.
-When the program mode is called up, all named
programs are displayed first in alphabetical order,
followed by numbered ones in numerical order.
- Program numbers which have been given a product name
are no longer listed in the numeric display.
Notes
- Press the timer key

until PREHEAT
appears in the display
- Now continue with the next programming step
(see Programming).
-, Programmingaids
Program
Product:
number:
Step 1
Mod?
Step 2
Step 3
Belly
of pork
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step 7
Step 8
Step 9
step 4
Step 5
Step 6
step 7
Step 8
Step 9
Program
number:
Product:
Step 1
cl
Mode
El
Spatial
Iunctions
56
Step 2
Step 3
\ Programming aids
Program
number:
qMode
Program
hog
cl
,
Product:
Step 1
Step 2
number:
Step 3
Step 4
Step 5
Step 4
Step 5
Step 6
Step
Step 8
Step 9
Step 8
Step 9
Product:
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 6
Step
I-l
Special
funclionr
57
, Nationalsettings
The ClimaPlus Combi can be adapted to suit your own
national requirements and can talk to you in your own
language. Users can choose time and temperature settings
and the language in line with their own preferences.
Time format
You can choose between two different formats for displaying
the time.
Language setting
The ClimaPlus Combi talks to you in your language.
In other words, all text entries can be called up in the
following languages:
l DEUTSCH
l ENGLISH
l FRANCAIS
l ESPANOL
l PORTUG
- 24-hour clock
- 12-hour clock
If you would like ClimaPlus to use another language, you can

program in everything that appears in the text display in your
own language via the user setting. The advantage of this
is that everyone in your kitchen is able to understand the
ClimaFlus Combi messages.
Converting the temperature
from C to F
The ClimaPlus Combi can use either Celsius or Fahrenheit.
You can choose between:
~ Unit
C
F
1 Mode x,,
58
CPC display
[CELSIUS]
[FAHRENH]
Temperature range
30C - 300C
85 F - 575 F
, National settings
Operating:
l Switch the unit off and on again.
l
Press the temperature key:and timer together for about

10 seconds.
1. Selecting the time format

Use the central dial to choose the desired time format, .
and press the cooking cabinet temperaturetkey.
2. Selecting the language

Use the central dial to choose the desired language,
and press the cooking cabinet temperature key.
3. Selecting the teml,erature

unit
l Use the central dial t1 I hoose the desired temperature,
and confirm all entries with the proglstart key.
l
I
\
,
If you have chosen the user language, press the

cooking cabinet key instead of the prog/start key.
The first term appears in the display for
cooking cabinet temperature, e.g.
I
l
I
j
I
!
1
,
!
j
,
6I
The term is repeated in the text display, and there

is a flashing underscore (the cursor) ut~rler the first letter.
The central dial can be used to replace the letter
individually.
Confirm the letter by pressing the Expel t key
The cursor flashes under the next letter. Proceed as above.
j
I
Go to the next term by pressing the cooking cabinet key.

Proceed as above.
i
l
To end the entry, confirm with
I
i
59
_.-..
Accessories
Perforated
Stainless steel:
Rust free
More stable through double flanging design1
Better handling quality
Long lasting
l
l
l
l
l
l
stainless steel:
Petiorated sides and corners - allows better steam circulation

large perforation diameter - better cooking quality
Perforation even on the side walls
SiZC
-iii
GN
Item
__.--..
Container
CNI
325:
175m
Deptl
mm
112
GN
Illustration
Example
for Equlpment
for
ClimaPlur
Comb1 CPC
6x11 1
10x1
lOXZl1 I
Example
-1
20
40
for vegetables. meat loaf

vegetabl? casseroles,
steamed and poached fish,
hamburgers
Container
CNS
325 x
265
mm
for fried potatoes.

hamburgers patatoe dumplings
thawing. vegetables, poaching
fish, sffe dishes
65
-
20
40
for stuffed peppers stews,

different fruit. egg royal,
vegetables, rice
for fried potatoes,

hamburgers, potatoe dumplings,
thawing, vegetables, poaching
fish side dishes
for vegetables, meat loaf,
vegetable casseroles,
hamburgers
65
for stuffed peppers, stews,

drlferent In& egg royal,
vegetables. rice
55
for vegetables without

juice, side dishes
dumplings etc.
-.
Container
perforated
CNS
for vegetables, eggs,

blanching
90
-
for potatoes
140
-111
GN
530 Y
325
mm
60
-..-
Container
CNS
20
fw roast potatoes, gratin;Ying

different dishes saddle of hare,
. .\
thawing etc.
6
-
40
for vegetables, meat loaf,

parr~y, duck goose etc.
65
for smffed peppers, rice,

noodles, vegetables.
drllerent fruits, stews etc
100
for collecting stock,

boiled ban. preparation
of saxes etc.
--.-.
---.--
._
) Accessories
Granite enamelled
l
l
l
l
l
l
containers:
Better heat conductivity

Better baking quality - no greasy base
No sticking
Minimum fat consumption
No loss in portioning - edges well formed
Better raising
Perforated
l
l
l
aluminium:
Better heat conductivity

Better crusts, crackling
With or without Teflon coating
High gloss nickel plated gt ids:

. Good heat conductivity
Combi-Steamer
CD
61
.--
) Accessories
Granite enamelled
containers:
Perforated
Excellent heat trans er

l
Very good baking r( suits - no greasy bases
l
MiGnum fat consulnption
l
Mitlimum fat consuinption
l
No loss in portionin 1- edges well formed
. I asy to clean
l
aluminium:
Top-quality bakery products

Better crusts, crackling
With or without Teflon coating
l
l
l
High gloss nickel plated
k
Item
)epi
mm
-
Container
CNS
20
40
lllustra\ion
grids:
For roasting, grilling and baking
Example
T
-
lw roast potatoes,
saddle of hare, gratinating.
thawing, vegetabfes dumplings,
hamburgers etc.
foc vegtsbles, meat loaf,
hamburgers, steamed OTpoached
fish, duck. goose, vegetable
casseroles, paslrier etc.
6x1
Example for Equipment

for
ClimaPlus
Comb1 CPC
10X11
20x11
2Ox2lI
20
IO
for stufkl peppers, rice,

vegetables, noodles, stewr etc.
65
for collecting%k. boiled ham,

preparaticrl of sauces etc.
Container
for veg?tabic, without stock,

dump lrlgr etc.
perforated
CNS
for vegetdble:. ?ggs, potatoes etc.
90
-Container
granw
enamelled
20
for baking plain take, sponge rolls,

pastries, biscuits, gratinating.
bratsing. loasting etc
40
65
Container
aluminium
perforated
Grids
CNS or
high gloss
nickel plated
aluminium tray,
Teflon coating
62
foe large roa<r (eg. potk, beef etc.),

grilled meats, toas& chiiken. duck.
goox grafmatiq, thawing.
baking in moulds etc.
for vaious pastries
) Accessories
The high operational
performance of the ClimaPlus:
Combi is complemented by an
efficienty coordinated accessory
line of accessories.Therefore,
the Combi-Steamer can be
easilyadjusted to meet individual requirements.
The stands and cabinets are

made out of stainless steel
and they guarantee a stable
practical installation of the
ClimaPlus Combi.
Stand UG I
Stand UG II
Frame completely out of

stainless steel with shelf and
adjustable feet.
Frame complete with shelf

base and adjustable feet;
also features 14 pairs
of rails to take grids and
GN containers.
Cabinet US III
Frame complete with
For wide baking trays.
(without picture)
h
t
Enabler easy transport and quick load changes.

Made completely of stainless steel. They can be locked into
the unit, includes 4 revolving casters (two with brakes).
Locks secure mobile oven rack to transport trolley, while
U-profiles prevent pans from tilting.
Cabinet US IV
Frame complete with shelf
shelfbase,adjustablefeet,
baseandadjustablefeet;
and sides; also features

14 pairs of rails for l/l GN
containers.
also features 14 pairs of rails

closed on all sides, with two
duplex swing doors.
Size of stands:
Model
-CPC 6x1/1 + 10x1/1 GN
Size inch (mm)

depth
638
788
720
641
904
720
Model
688
904
720
CPC
6x111 GN
depth
901
10x1/1 GN
901
UG II
us III
us IV
CPC 10x2/1 GN
UG 1. low
720
638
UG II
height
788
UG I
IIG I
--
width
Size of Tranmort
I
.
trollev
Size inch (mm)
height
541
1051
541
1051
707
1220
720
707
1220
720
10x211 GN
1047
780
1063
707
1>20
320
10x2/1 GN-low
1047
708
950
width
63
Accessories
Completely made of nickel chromium steel
All rails feature
- tilt-resistant U profiles, to prevent GN containers tilting in
the mobile oven rack
- notched recesses, for fast loading ,-lnd unloading
Extra mobile oven racks and transnort trolleys increase the
cooking capacity, make work more efficien\and enable loads
to be exchanged more quickly. I.
Table-top
units
With:
- locking devices to prevent anything rolling out by accident
- tilt security
6 x I/l GN
10 x l/l GN
lOx211GN
Floor models
With:
- GN container locks at the front and back,
for loading and unloading from both sides
- four smooth-running castors (two with brakes)
- drip pan with drain valve
Size of Mobile oven racks:

Size mm
64
width
height
431
480
431
607
715
808
740
740
1790
1790
20 x l/l GN
20x 211 GN
_ _ - _ I _ .
- .
. . -
. -
. -
) Accessories
Forreheating precooked food ot I plates, e.g. for banquets.
The plates, which can be up to 310 mm in diameter,
are positioned exactly on suj port rings. The plate rack
is completely made of high-grade nickelct tromium steel.
The pkrte racks for 6x1/1 GN, lrrxlll GN ,jnd 10x2/1 GN should
only I )I used in conjunction wit1I the transpcrt trolley.
I
Reheated dishes
on the plate rack
may be kept at
serving temperature for
up to 20 minutes by
using the optional
heat-retaining
hood.
Sizes of Mobile Plate Racks:
62
.-_
IOU
1
--
835
___
YUb
1
1
715
___
MUU
1
1
1790
.---
1IYU
lot plates covered with clothes, the max. total height of plate and clothes Is limited to 72 mm
Example: 10 x l/l GN
Example: 10 x 2/l GN
Example: 20 x t/1 GN
Example: 20 x 211 GN
65
:---..-
---
L.
$arnplesbeefandveal
Proper
Amounts
per container
load per containe

20x24
40xM
Food
2OxM
GN
GN
GN
fillet steak
Season. nil lightly, preheat to 3WC,

approx. 3-_-cm thickness: med lm
2OxM
20 x24
40 x l/l
Rump steak
Season, oil lighlly, preheat lo KKK,

approx. 2 cm dikn., medium not llatten
20x vl
20 x l/l
40 x l/l
Slrloln
Season, oil lightly, medium
10x M
1OxM
-__.---~M
12 PCS.
--
10 PCs.
20 pu
6 kg
12kg
-__SirloIn*
Season, oil lightly, medium
1OxM
lOx.?il
Prime r/b***
Season, medium
6xVl
6x2A
Beef joint
(braised)
Choose flat pieces,

80-100 mm in diameter, matured
.-
6 kg
- -.~.1 PCS.
12kg
2 PCs.
6-8 kg
12-16 E
90-l 50 mm unperl
I
Season lightly as required
M
24 pcs
3 x 111 grid
5xWgrid
! Sx21lgrid
1 10 x l/l grid
1 x l/l 40mm 1 1 x 111 40mm 1 x 211 40mm 1 x l/l 40mm
grid
40 mm unperf
65 mm unperfaated
3xvl
5xM
6-8 kg
12-16 k
1OxM
10x Vl
20-25
PCS.
40-50
PCS.
10 PCS.
20 pcs
ef olives
P
Season, pour over hot sauce,

if necessary cover with 20 mm 111 GN
Beef liver
Cut into equal slicek preheat to 300C
20xvl
20X2/l
Filet Wellington
Score fillet
10xM
10X2/l
6-8 kg
12-16 k
10X2/l
6-8 kg
12-16 k
lOx2A
8 PCS.
16pcs
5xM
10 x 2/l grid
1x2/1 40mm
---_~
Blanch cabbage leaves in the CPC,

cook fillet in hot air initially
Filet Colbeft
loin of veal
10x VI
_ .-_--10x M
Season, oil lightly, preheat to 300C
..-
--Season shortly before loading, score,

preheat to 300C
Veal cutlets
Veal joint
leg of veal
Season, lard lean parts (fricandeau),

use container for sauce
( Lard as necessary,
use container for stodc
Osso bucco
Do not stuff too firmly,

baste from time to time
lagout fin
Fill warm into cocottes, cover with

hollandaise sauce, gratinate
meat
3xtl
5xM
10x IA
5xu1
10x M
3 x VI grid
lxVl65mm
5 x v1 grid
lxM65mm
5 x u1 grid
lxul
65mm
10 x 1/1 grid
IxM65mm
grid
40 mm unperf.
3 x M grid
lxM4Omm
5 x Vl grid
lxM4Omm
5 x 24 grid
1x8
40mm
10 x Vl grid
IxM40mm
3xM
SxM
5X2n
10x M
grid
65 mm unped.
3 x M grid
lxM65mm
1 5xQlgrid
lxM65mm
1 Sx2A,i~f
1x2/l 40mm
Add lard, use container for meat juices
Veal tongue
(vacuum cooking)
Add stock to vacuum pack
Veal sweetbread
rinse 3x in cold water, prepare again
40 mm
unperf.
6xVl
1OxM
10X2/l
15 PCS.
30 pcs
~.10x &I grid

IxU165mm
1 PCS.
2 PCS.
10x M
1oxul
6-8 kg
12-16 k
6xM
6x24
1 pcs.
2 PCS.
-.
.--..
10 x M grid
Ix Vl 40 mm
10x &I grid

IxU140mm
6-8 kg
12-16 k
10x M
1oxul
3-4 kg
6-8 kg
1oxzn
.-
.-
,lT ;,(owtemperature
12 pcs
accS0
size
6 PCS.
according
010-12
):,;..
,,t.$?! .k.v I
;*;$
,\,
16kg
10X2/l
I
,
cooking (hot air under 100C + Phased ventilation)
CT = core temperature.
**
= low-temperature
20 pcs
--
8 kg
__-
Baste from tirnb to time
Shoulder of veal
1Oxtigrid
Ix2465mm
_~-___10x3
grid
IxU140mm
10 x Vl grid
IxM65mm
._-_._ --10x Vl
Add bouquet-garni when needed
Saddle of veal
10 PCS.
.__.-.
grid
65 mm unperf.
65 mm
unperforated
Marinate, cut equal slices
Breast of veal
Mite
grid
Remember that the capacities given always [elate to a full load. In some casesreducing the sizeof the load
can improve the quality of the food. Food is a n&Ural product. The temperatures and times given are therefore
for guid; rice only, and may need to be individually adapted.
I--
1stStep
260
S-10 min.
i
I
1
;
;
140-160
25.30 min.
&
I
process
ZndStep
250-270
7 min.
iq
Cooking
l0
I
I
f
:
I
I
I
I
160
20 min.
.._ __
I
lrd Step
Approx.
6x111
72pcs.
-.-
60 pa.
..___
i
I
loading
capacity
-- 10x111
10x211120x111
170 PCS.
--100 PCS.
--
1 ClimaPlus
Adthtional
20x2/1
240pa.
Control
information
-200 PCS.
400 pcs.
-18kg
30kg
-___
30 kg
-3 PCS.
18kg
2 PCS.
?D
B
,,n
2nd Step
Useprodlibrary
L7 2nd Step
Use prog. library
3
2nd Step
--
___
El
+--
l$iJ
160-180
CT52
I
;
L-.
220-240
:
lo-12 min. j
.-
10nlill.iq q
-.
40kg
24 kg
40kg
-75 PCS. 125 PCS.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
-100 pcs.
60 PCS.
--
15 min or I
CT55
I
1
I
I
1
I
l
9
I
,
;;u7;-80
oiq
24 kg
24 kg
40kg
24 kg
_40 kg
24 PCS.
-45 pcs.
6Opcs.
;iiI, 24kg
--I
100 PCS.
-40kg
L
30 PCS.
160
10 min.
r
El
250
6-8 min.
;
!
CT75O
i
I
----
I
I
I
I
I
0
I
45pc.s.
75pcs.
3 pcs.
5pcr
3opcs.
50 pa.
24kg
40kg
3 PCS.
40 kg
f#j
80
20kg
1oopcs.
Q Cooking time: you will need to try this out yourself1
67
Remember that the capacities given always relate to a full load. In some casesreducing the sizeof the load
can improve the quality of the food. Food is a natural product. The temperatures and times given are therefore
for guidance only, and may need to be individually adapted.
Cooking
1st step
zndstep
-
250 "
12-l II min.
-.--
El
::I:,,
- ..-.. --.-
mEl
140 Ii00
50 60 min.
El
;;-
I
I
I
II
I
I
I
I
I
II
I. .
8
#,
200-220
15-18 mill.o
I:O,iifl,
-.-.~
fg
;I
3rd Step
~~-
~- ;y&
loadina
6x111
10X1/l
72 PCS.
120 PCS.
60 pcs.
loo pcs.
.,. <
I
canacitv
I0x2/1/20x1/1
.__-
I ClimaPlus
Additional
J-
Control
information
20X211
240 PCS.
480 pal
200 PCS.
400 pcs.
1110pcs.
320 PCS. -
IL3
a0 PCS.
48 pcs.
x!
60 PCS.
_---
100 per.
2cro pcs.
400 I'CS.
150 PCS.
-..
300 pcs.
600 PCS.
225 1x5
- 450 PCS.
900 PCS. ma
90 PCS.
mw
ma
-,.--.-
ia0
5 win.
Approx.
I
1.-,
0
250 a
a-10 min..-..-
process
Mr
L
135 pcs.
I
I
--__
16kg
24 kc1
-1800
20 min.
;;;,
220"
10 min.
24 kg
40 ky
35kg
kg
24 kg
40 kg
24 pcs.
40 PCS.
2pcs.
2ndStep
48 kg
96 kg
2ndStep
80 kg
160 kg
3rdStep
sops.
1 16Opu
LA[l 3rd Step
3pcs.
-12kg
18kg
18kg
30 kg
..-
30 kg
18kg
9kg
-;Skg
.---
@' Cooking time: you WIN #leed to try this out yourself1
69
sausages,
frozenfood
1;:I;EIxamples
Proper
container/grid
Food
Hints
Home-made
sausages
Fill the skins even% do not tie toa tightly
Amounts per container

10x3
GN
10xMGN
20xMGN
20xMGN
6xMGN
Reheating
sausages
Black pudding
Semf-presefved
busages
in glass jars
050g)
1OxM
10X2/l
2oxVl
2xvl
5xVl
5x24
IOxtl
80 Paar
160P
30 pcs.
60 pr
6xVl
1OxM
10X2/l
20xM
Do not cook, merely warm

thoroughly to serving temperature,
2omm
6xM
1OxM
10x24
2OxM
40 pc
6xVl
1bxM
10x24
2OxM
loop
20 mm
6xM
1oxVl
10x24
2OxM
60 pc
Contents 200 g
grid 0120 mm
3xM
5xvl
5x&l
1OxM
80 pc
Check glass for resistance to

high and low temperatures
grid or 20 mm
3xVl
5x l/1
5X2/l
10x M
80 pc
foods
Chicken legs
grid or 20 mm
6xM
10x vl
lox24
20x M
Precooked, preheat to 300C
20 mm
6xVl
1OxM
10X2/l
20x M
20 mm
6xVl
10x&l
10x21
2OxM
100 pc
20mmor
per .~
I aluminium
6xM
1OxM
10x3
20x vl
90 pc!
with full load
Fish fingers
Breaded, preheat to 300C with full load
Quiche lorraine
Precook in aluminium tins

8 cm in diametw, 2 cm high
I Precooked
CtlS65mrn
II-
1 -1oxu1
20 x 211
3xVl
-
Pizzas
---
Precooked, preheat to 300C

with full load
Veal escalope
cordon bleu
liuagne
ca. 60
-~
I
/
Frozen
6xM
20 mm unperf.
Form into balls, lightly grease container,

cover with foil
food
Load per contair
Use automatic core temperature,

reference time
1
liver dumplings
grid 01
20 mm unperf.
Precooked
Arminium
baking tray 111 GN
6xy1
1OxM
1OxM
20X2/l
10x211
20x M
60 pc
8~3
10x2/1
--20x II
20x .?A
--- 40x II
10 pcs
20 pu
2 pcs.
4 pcs.
--
1
..
.
16pc!
Remember that the capacitiesgiven always relate to a full load. In some casesreducing the size of the load
Cooking
process
Approx.
loading
10x1/1
lOXz/l/ 20x111
300 PCS.
-.
160 PCS. 400ptr.
18Opcs.
1 ClimaPlus
1 Additional
capacity
2Wl
--
600~~s.
12OOpcs.
L-u
lm
800 PCS.
16OOpcs.
-300pm.
6OOpcs.
1200pIs
-L-27
-.
2oopc>
4OOpc.c
800 PCS. -0
1000 PCS.
2ooopcs.
6OOpcs.
12OOpcs
__5OOpCj.
--3OOptr.
Control
information
2ndStep
Lc17
m,Lm
g
I
I
!
0
I
I
40 min.
50 min.
1
I
I
I
I
I
8
0
I
1
1
12opcs.
200 PCS.
120 PCS. 2OOprs
4oopts.
8OOpcs.
,100 PCS.
800 PCS.
L,
Ln
~-
--.
--
~
t
--
--
I
-i----
--I---l
El
q
180"
I
20-25 min. I
180"
25-30 min.
j
!
--
I
I
,
t
1
0
I
I
El
200-220"
i
20-25 min. I
3oopcs
200"
20-25 min.
I
i
27Opcs
a--
itp3;
1.
IB
--~-
-500 pcs.
320~~s.
!a
1000 PCS.
2Oaopcs.
900 PCS.
18OOpcs.
-:d7
900 pcs.
18OOpcs.
900 pa.
18OQpcs.
-45opcs
--270 PCS.450 PCS.
min. i
200"
I
IO-12 min. I
,
I
0
180 PCS. 300 PC!,.

I I00 pu.
__--48~s.
80pts I160 PCS.
'i-7
--270
PCS.450
--
pts
--..
~--1
_- .__1 1 -Y-t--t
---
---
--
1
71
._._
., *
-.? *c,.
_-
.._
Vacuum cooking, approx. 2 Lg
Marinate, season, pour on hot sauce
Chicken
halves
CT - core temperature;
LT = low-temperature
cooking (hot air under 100C + Phased
ventilation)
..
-.
Remember that the capacities given always relate to a full load. In some casesreducing the sizeof the load
can improve the quality of the food. Food is n natural product. The temperatures and times given are therefore
for guidance only, and may need to be indivi~luallyadapted.
Cooking
process
Approx.
I
3rdStcp
6X111
10x1/1
6 PCS.
1opcs.
loading
capacity
ClimaPlus
Additional
10x111/ 20x111
Contrci:
inforn.atlon
20x2/1
2opcs.
40 PCS.
---I--
18kg
30kg
60kg
18kg
30kg
60kg
12Okg
12kg
20kg
160 PCS.
IfI
150.i
200-220"
15-20 min.
;
!
24 PCS.
El
'10 PCS.
80 pcs.
i
I
36 pcs.
120 PCS.
ml
140-160"
50 min.
-..I '111
130-140"
90-120 min
[
,
24 kg
7R
~~";~~i~,
BEI
140-160"
60 -70 min.
Ia
85"
CT78"
1
I
I
I
I
!
1a pcs.
I
I
!
I
I
0
6
9 PCS.
12Okg
uy W
mw
240~s.
t-
--.4Okg
30pts
--15 PCS.
-a
2nd Step
ma
2ndStep
_18kg
30ky
60kg
4 PCS.
6 pcs
12 PCS.
9 pcs.
--15 ptr.
30 PCS.
60 PCS.
4 PCS.
_.-.
fi pr,
12 PCS.
24 PCS.
80 PCS.
160 PCS.
1oOpcs.
2oopis.
--
120kg
~Lll
---
iia
~ 24~s.
2nd Step
--.~24pcs.
4opc;.
----
30 PCS.
16pcs.
El
130'
nfl A.3
0
t
I
:
! --I
I
-.
(
50 PCS.
16pcs.
16~s.
-24 PCS.
24pcs.
40 pcs.
72pcs.
120 pcs.
24 per.
40 DCS.
12 PCS.
-20 PCS.
18kg
48pcs.
24 PCS.
--24 [a.
96
4apG.
8Opcs.
pcs. Use
1. cl.;?. SEHY
program library
96 pcs.
Use
program library
2.
Use
program library
3. H?I
LL-eHY
tft?N
16OpCS.
c
/ 30kg
50 kg
1OOkg
I
@' Cooking
time: you will need to try this out yourself1
73
Proper
container/grid
6xMGN

10x24 GN
10xMGN
20xMGN
20xMGN
40x21
Support the salron with potatoes,

open out belly flanks, use CT
Salmon fille&
salmon steak
Place in serving dishes,

add fumets or wine
Salmon souffle
Use dartoles, cocottes timbales; bear In

mind how the material conducts heat
ntrhot
Add julienne of vegetabfes if desired;
Rolled fillet of sole
Season, add bouquet poisson, etc.
Plaice
Place the light underside uppermost,

preheat to 300C
20 mm granite
Fried trout
Season, oil lightly, preheat to 300C
20 mm granite
Blue trout
Season lightly inside if desired,

open out belly flanks sideways
20mmor
40 mm unped.
3xM
5xM
5x3
1OxM
Perch (on a julienne

of vegetables)
Blanch the julienne first
40 mm unperf.
3xkl
5xkl
5X2/l
1oxkl
Mussels
Add tine, julienne of vegetables, etc.
40mmor
65 mm pdlunperf.
3xkl
5xM
5X2ll
10x M
Fish balls
Shape well, cover with foil
40 mm unped
6xTl
1OxM
10X2/l
20x M
Fish terrine
Level off well, cover
grid
3xkl
5xkl
5X&l
10x M
Salmon mousseline
Cover with flat container
grid
3xvI
I 5xy
/
i 5xM
I
5xuI
10x M
-5xu1
1OxM
i 5xkl
;
,
1
5X2/T
10x M
Shrimp darloles
Cover with flat container
Ballottine
of lobster
Fill evenly
gii
3xM
20 mm unperf.
3xM
Vacuum
cooking:
Sole
Vacuum cooking
grid
6xM
1OxM
1OxM
zoxkl
Scampi
Vacuum cooking
grid
6xM
1oxkl
lOx2A
20x VI
-k
i
I
Remember that the capacitiesgiven alwaysrelate to a full load. In some casesreducing the sizeof the load
for guidance only, and may need to be individually adapted,
-.
t
Cooking
process
Appr~xt.
loadino
caoacitv
I ClimaPlus
Additional
120
PCS.
2Okg
24Opcs.
40 kg
1000 pcs.
Control
informatbn
1I-r
2ooopG.
mm
60 PCS.m
3opcs.
I
~llil
70"
35 min.
,I
72"
CT62"
I
I
I
1
I
I
;
I
I
i
70 o
15 min.
i
I
I
I
,
1
I
I
I
I
I
./
60 PCS.
1oopcs.
75 pcs.
125
6Opcs.
100 pcs.
200
PCS.
400 pcs.
250
PCS.
5oow.
200
PCS.
m
-
PCS.
160 PCS.
320pcr
16OOpcs.
32OOpu
,,/I,
.I
1800
30 min.
El
160
20min.
;
i
180'
25min.
I
i
:
1
t
0
I
I
I
175"
20 min.
:
I
I
I
I
,
I
..
480~
3OOpcs
6M)pcs
18Opcs.
360pcs.
720 PCS.
18Opcs
3apcl
72Opcs
120~
9opcs.
15ops
108pcs.
108pcs.
-.
m&
_.
24Opcs
72~s.
m
Ln
+-
El
mn
ma
m
L%
-
75
Examplesvegetables,
cannedoods
L--
riii
I
20xMGN
Frozen (fresh, use perforated contamner,
Brussels sprouts
Frozen, seawn while frozen,

add butter just before serving
SplllXh
Fresh
2OxM
40xM
load per contalne!

M
lOxZl
10x M
5 kg
i-----i ~-
.,
10x Vl
10x21
1OxM
10x21
1oxzi
IOX Vl
--.
\
Turnips
(i N
6N
frozen, slice
10x VI
10x 2.1
5kg
25~~s.
-.carrots
Frozen, spread out ever&

just one deep
10x M
10x21
Young peas
Frozen, spread out evenly,

just one deep
10x Vl
10 x bl
Asparagus
Tied together in meat juices,

loose with or without meat juices
10x M
10x21
Tomatoes
Blanch for tomatoes concass&,

salad, etc.
20x M
1OxM
Beans
frozen, whole or sliced;

fresh, blanch, cold water
lox!4
2OX2l
-. IOx3
10x2~
Mushrooms
Sprinkle with lemon,

add tiite wine if desired
Savoy cabbage
(blanching)
Remove stalks
Stuffed peppers
Place in the container with

the opening facing downwards
Cauliflower
65 mm unperf
fi5mmped
cheese
Use every other shelf, preheat
3xvl
II
5xvl
3xM
1 ~mmunperf
5xM
5x24
1OxM
5x24
1Oxvl
10x2,
10x2
II
3xM
5xM
10k
-.
5X2/l
10 x 7,.
1OxM
grid or 20 mm
1OxM
10x 2
--
Vegetable
platters
Tinned vegetables
1oxVl
Bear the diameter of the tins in mind;

capacity 1 litre
10x M
Distribute the vegetables evenfy
Vegetable
casseroles
Vegetable
Pre-cooked, add butter

just before servfng
flans
Cabbage rolls
Blanch cabbage leaves M ell

(frozen, preheat to 3OOr 1
Omelettes
Soaked grain
-.Wholefood
casseroles
10x21
-.-
T-1,:::
Grease the dish well,

coverwith foil or a container
10x?,
10x M
10x21
10x I4
10X2
65 mm per.
3xvl
10x Vl
10x21
Distribute the mixture eve&

fill to approx. l-2 cm under the rim
40mmof
65 mm granite
3xM
10x M
10x2,~
Prepare cold and leave to soak;

shortens cooking time
40mmor
65 mm granite
6xVl
2OxM
20X2'
Bear the various soaking times

in mind
40mm
-- or 65 mm granite
4omm
3xvl
1oxVl
10x2.
Moussaka
Fill to 2 cm under the rim

or 65 mm granite
Vacuum cooking
carrots, fennel
Sliced, turned, seasoned,

in single- or multi-portion bags
I
grid
--.__
~~
10x VI
3xM
6xM
10x M,
10X2/l
20x2,
20xM
--
10x2
---l
__
Perforated containers
76
reduce the cooking time
3-9 kg
57
iI
Remember that the capacities given always relate to a full load. In some cases reducing the size of the load
.Cooking
pmCKS
Apprcx.
--- 10x I/l
loading
I
capacity
1 ClimaPlus
1 Additional
1oRYlI20rlll
25 kg
50kg
25 kg
50kg
10kg
20kg
25 kg
50kg
Control
informahon
20x2/1
100kg
Lm
45opcs.
-225~~
25kg
900 PCS.
450~~s.
l-0
18OOpcs.
900~~s.
m
m
5Okg
1OOkg
10kg
20kg
40kg
12h:ads
30 heads
60 heads
125pcs.
25Opcs.
5OOpci.
-15opol-t.
3OOport.
6OOport.
m;o
4opG.
8Opcs.
-bD
.--
9!J
20 pcs.
-.75pu.
160"
15min.
160"
15 min.
)
i
0
'
j
1 l5Opcs.
125Opc.s.
1st Step
2nd Step
1st Step
2nd Step
I
I
t
I
I
77
Sidedishes
1,.
h..
..
I
Prow
,
/
I
I
Amountspercontainer
1 ll0xMGN1
l20xMGN
I
1
II
60-100
--EL
Coy ti
foil w container if necesy
grid
3xM
5xM
5x8
1oxvl
1oxul
5xM
5xiYl
IOxvl
10x20
4 litre
pz
--
Eggswffl~s
Scrambled
eggs
Use c&es or GN contaiw
9rM(Jr
65 mm unperf.
3xvl
ttoll milk, add beaten egg,

am with foil
65mmunpf.
3xy1
5xM
SXM
1OxM
10x24
4 litre
3xM
5xM
5x21
10x M
IOx2l
4 litre
V&k
-.
. k.
egm add milkor creay, cove
I65 mm tmpeif.
2 litre
lOpc%
..-
8-14 kg
16-28 kg
4
6-12 kg
14-24 kj
I
30 PCS.
2 kg
40 lxlj
30 pat.
60 pan
40 pu
80w
--
kg
E-9 kg
2 kg
4 kg
2 kg
4 kg
2 kg
4 kg
2 kg
4kg
30 port.
apor
20 port.
4opol
20 port.
40 w
I-
.,
4b-1
20 pu
4-4.5
@PCS.
Remember that the capacitiesgiven always relate to a full load. In some casesr Aduc:ingthe size of the load
can improve the quality of the food. Food is a natural product. The temperature: antI times given are therefore
Cooking
process
Approx.
II .ldilq -. capacitv
1 ClimaPlus
Additional
Control
information
-t
20x211
40 litre
8Olitre
LiI
40 litre
80 litre
X 3
20 litre
40litre
-7
200 pa.
4oOpu
101.2HIzoxlll
-
60-72
120-154
kg
kg
mpcs.
mL3
12OOpcs.
40kg
1 80kg
20 kg
40kg
1.
13
20 kg
40kg
iu
20 kg
40kg
iu
20 kg
40kg
in
79
)Examplespastry,bread, rolls, desserts- part 1

Proper
container/grid
Food
Hints
Apple strudel
Glaze with egg, milk or sugar water
20 mm granite
or pert aluminium
3xM
Frozen apple strudel I Glaze with liaison if desired, preheat
20 mm granite
or perf aluminium
6xVl
20 mm granite
6xM
6xMGh
Swiss rolls
Spread evenly,
preheat
to cooking temperature
I
26 cm in diameter,
use every other shell, preheat
Sponges
Flaky pastry
pies, fleurons
,
Glaze
with egg, preheat
Flaky pastry
pies. fleurons

lO;Ur
GN
10xM
GN
20xMGN
~-20xMGN
_--5xM
5X2A
10x M
--~
lOxM
--10x M
---
grid
3xM
5xvl
\
6xVl
HumidJy
in the first few minutes
I
for lo-30 seconds
20 mm granite
or perf. aluminium
6xM
1oxv
Puff pastries
I every other shelf

Use
20 mm granite
or perf aluminium
6xM
IOX vl
Puff pastries
Illse every other shelf,

I,xrmidify if desired
20 mm granite
or pert aluminium
6xkl
Puff pastries
with fillings
,4rrange evenly,
rjaze with egg if desired
20 mm granite
or ped. aluminium
6xM
Sponge cakes
flat tin
IJse every other shelf
20 mm or 40 mm
Choux pastry*
(cream puffs)
ipe evenly
Christmas
Jse every other shelf
cakes
ilice fruit evenly,

itlow
-~ to stand after steaming
65 mm unperf
JialIe or core apples, pears, etc.
20 mm
:rozen raspberries, strawberries,

)lackberries in serving utensils
grid
1Stewed fruit
in glass jars
Iiameter lo-12 cm, e.g. pears.

Iapacity 1 litre
grid or 20 mm
Cabinet pudding
.ine loaf tin with foil

K grease-proof paper
20x M
2ox2A
---
10X2/l
20x M
2ox2A
depending
10X2/l
20x M
-__2oxzn
IOXM
1ox.M
20x ifI
2oxzl
5xVl
5X2/l
10x M
IOX vl
c
-
5XM
5X2n
10x Vl
5xM
5X2A
10x Vl
.__lOx2A
5XM
5X2A
---
3xM
-___
3xM
---
10x M
~.
5X2/l
5XVl
10x 1/1
--___
5xM
5x&l
10x VI
-___
10x Vl
lOx2.A
20x M
10X2/l
20x M
SXVI
5X2/l
10x M
5XM
5X2A
10x M
--10x M
6xM
3xM
~
3xvi
3xM
-.-
5xM
5x24
-____
I
..
---
--
--___
---
--
-__
--.10x 2A
---
--1OxM
lOx2A
___10X2/l
2ox.Y
-.___
-_--*When
80
baking fresh pastries preheat to normal baking temperatures.
20X2/l
15pcs
3opcs
10X2/l
1opcs.
20 pu ;I
10X2/l
--__
4 PCS.
-__
10X2/l
--I
-1=j
dependingh:
10x 2A
-__~
10x24
--
grid or 20 mm
.--
12-15 pcs
--
grid
lOx2A
-
2ox2A
3xM
i
20 mm granite
or ped. aluminium
Stewed fruit
Iarioles cocottes, timbales, etc.
10x 2A
--
2oxkl
3xM
grid
40 mm granite
enamelled
Creme caramel
(in glass containers)
10x VI
--
20 mm granite
heavy sponge (for l/l GN). (7 eggs,

30 g sugar and 40 g flour per egg)
Hot fruit
5X2/l
--
Upside-down
fruit cake
______
Fruit for garnishes
2OxM
2ox2n
-.____
20X2/l
lOx2.A
--
-1
.eave to rise.
sdd steam at 30C
1oxvi
---
--
I
Croissants
10x24
GN
GN
10X2/l
20x tl
-L29 mm granite
or perf. aluminium
Ii.
10x24
Load per container

20x2/l
40xM
--___
40 PCS.
8 PCs. ;I
_L
_-
__^.
..--_-.
..--.
_----
~-
.__~..
Cooking
1
I
170-190"
40-50 min.
I
I
180"
25min.
1
]
y?;"
process
1
3rd Step
I
I
I
I
I
I
0
b
as
170-160"
':
30-40 min. ]
I
160"
$3
12 min.
!!m
180
20 min.
:
I
I
fr&
200"
15-18 min.
1
j
R
P
JJ
0I
I
I
1
4
200"
Smin.
200"
15 min.
t
-
7.j
I
I
I
I
8
;
!
0
I
I
I
6x111
10x1/1
6 PCS.
1opcs
6Opcs.
Approx.
ZndStep
~__
Rememberthat the capacitiesgiven always relate to a full load. In some casesreducing the size of the load
can improve the qualily of the food. Food is a natural product. The temperatures and times given are therefore
1rtstep
___.
loading
capaci
10x2/1/20x1/1
20 PCS.
1oopG
2OOpc.i.
6 kg
10kg
20kg
6
Formen
10
Formen
20
Formen
45 pcs.
75pcs.
150 PCs.
75 PCS.
15opu
itv
ClimaPlus
Additional
Control
information
20x211
4opcs.
I-
f.'L7
45 JIGS.
60 PCS.
-.
depnding
on size
loo PCS.
2oopcs.
120 PCS.
240~~s.
I150 port
3ooport
6OOpot
15opc.t
300 pu
20kg
40kg
-75 PCS,
10kg
60 pcs
100"
8-10min.
i
i
I
;
!
1
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
100"
6-8 min.
I
I
I
I
I
170-180"
25-30 min.
!!!I
120 PCs.
24Opcs.
--
12oport.
;!oo port.
400 port.
--
90 port.
115opat
300 port.
-.
18Opts.
300 pci
6OOpcs.
-_
90 PCS.
30 PCS.
15opc>
3oopcs.
SOpc!
1OOpcs.
-12 PCS.
2Opc!.
4opu
-120 PCS.
200 PCS.
400 per
1
--
..
r- -.
bi
I--@i!
81
T;,xamples
pastry,bread,rolls,desserts
- part2
I

1Oxvl
GN I
1OxMGN
I
20xMGN
I 20xMGN
Food
Hints
Proper
container/grid
Yeast cake
Use every other shell
20 mm granite
3xM
5xM
5X2A
10x M
10x24
Cheesecake
Spread the mixture evenly
40 mm granite
3xv1
5xM
5X2A
1OxM
lOx2A
3xM
5x?/l
5x&l
10x M
lOx2l
3xM
5xv1
5X.24
1OxM
10X2.4
6x M
10x M
10x24
20x vl
2oxul
20 mm granite
or pert aluminium
6xVl
10x lA
10x24
20x M
5x11
5xuI
I
6xMGN
Marble
Spread evenly into fins
cake
I
grid
I
-~
Bread half white
let dough rise
Shortcrust
Ensure even thickness
load per container
2Ox21GN
40xMGN
20 mm granite
.
pastry
20
m granite
24 pcs.
48 Wi
20 x 7/l
10 pcs.
20w
10x M
10x24
4v-5.
8 PCS.
Puff pastry
Adjust baking temperature

to suit the tilling
Plain cake
Place tins on grids
grid
3xM
cavarin
j
tine tins well, preheat
grid
3xM
5xvl
5X2/l
10x M
10x,3
20mmor
40 mm granite
3xM
!i,-.vl
5x24
1Oxvl
10X2/l
20 mm granite
6xM
-1OxM
10X.24
20x 1/1
20 x 2/l
perforated aluminium
3xI4
5xM
5X2A
10x VI
1oxzn
~__I___
Spread crumble evenly
Cake with
crumble topping
.._
Spread mixture evenly
Bread rolls
Depending on amount, use every

other shelf humidify, preheat
White bread
(700 g)
Use every other shelf
20 mm granite
or perlaluminium
3xM
5xM
5X2n
10x M
10X2/l
Rolls,
French bread
Put into tins
20 mm granite
or ped. aluminium
3xM
5xM
5x24
1OxM
10X2.4
10x M
10x24
20x M
2ox2A
10x M
10x24
20x VI
20X2/l
5x24
10x VI
Butter lightly if desired
Toast
I
grid
I
--
Vacuum cooking
Fruit
Add tine, liqueur, etc.
Danish pastries
leave to rise, Steam at 30C
6x1/1
I
grid
=-I-10 PCS.
20 pcs
40 port.
8Op~
Sponge base
6xM
lOx2l
I
Plum cake
Spread evenly with fruit
5xu1
1OxM
1oxul
=F
-.
--.
\
..
=I=
_ii
When baking fresh pastries preheat to normal
82
Iraking temperatures.
--.
Rememberthat the capacities give11always relate to a full load. In some casesreducing the size of the load
--Cooking
I
trtstep
'I
process
I
1
2ndStcp
--
Approx.
10x111
3rd Step
loading
capac :ity
ClimaPlus
Additional
Control
information
10x211120x111 -- 20rZll
10kg
250pnrl.
-20
stiatps
2Okg
40kq
500 port.
1000p0rt.
mm
2ndStep
-w
15 prs.
40
shapes
sh:;cs
87
3opcL
60~~s.
112 fan
900 pis.
170-180"
16-18 min.
:
I
I
160-180"
I
16-18 min. I
-7
190"
i
lo-12 min. I
160-180"
I
30-35 min. I
I
180"
1
lo-12 min. !
i!!m
170"
17 min.
I
I
--
I3
180-200"
30-40 min.
;
i
BR
180"
6-8 min.
I
j
--.-.
250"
5 min.
i
I
1
80-100"
;
20-30 min. 1
190"
10 min.
I
I
-___
-.
,
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
0
I
0
I
I
I
0
0
1
I
I
I
I
I
8
I
0
I
t
I
0
I
1
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
@JP=
12fKs.
3opcs.
120 pod
45pcs.
75pci.
-t--I2 PCS. 2otKL
150pcs.
4opcs
60 PCS.
108pcs
24kg
40 "4
80kg
--36 PCS. 60 1~s.
---l---t--
--t--f-
83
i Cle:ming
Cleaning
procedure
For hygiene reasons and to avoid interruptions
to
oper#ltion, it is essential that the ClimaPlus Combi
is cle.lned every day at the end of operations.
l
l
l
Let 111ecooking cabinet cool down (to below 60 C).

Swiich the appliance off
Spr<~ythe cooking cabinet and inside of the door, the door
gas;et, the space behind the swiveLair baffle and .
botlr sides of the air baffle with special cleaner.
InIPORTANT: ::: , .
Follow the &f&i&ruction
R/\TIONAL spray, bottle and
cl,janer cont&er;
,,r:
Clo, t the cooking cabinet door and leave the cleaner to

wo1.k for about 20 minutes.
l Set the cooking mode / mode selector to Moist
Heat
(steam).
l Set the timer to 15 minutes.
l Shut the cooking cabinet door.
l After 15 minutes, rinse the appliance thoroughly
(including the space behind the air baffle)
with the integrated hand shower.
l Wipe the cooking cabinet and door gasket with a damp
cloth, and if necessary open the inner glass out and wipe
it too.
. Dry the cooking cabinet for 10 minutes with dry heat
(hot air) at 150 C.
l After cleaning, do not close the door of the
cooking cabinet, but leave it slightly ajar.
l
Alternatively:
Spray on the cleaner.
l Use the Expert key and central dial to select and start
the Clean program (takes 40 minutes)
l When the program is completed, rinse the cooking cabinet
and the space behind the air baffle thoroughly with the
hand shower.
l Wipe the door and door gasket with a damp cloth.
l Dry the cooking cabinet for 10 minutes with hot air at 150C.
l The best way of cleaning the outside of the ClimaPlus
Combi is with a soft, damp cloth.
Replacing the door gasket: look at page 87
84
Rinse thoruughiy using the hand shower
To clean between the

double glass door panel,
press the release bdr and
pull open (open the door).
Cleaning
l
l
l
i
l
If the cabinet is heavily soiled, apply moist he& to the ./

residue for ten minutes before clean bg to soften it up,
and if necessary repeat the cleaning outine.
Even if the ClimaPlus Combi is only sed with moist
heat, it must be cleaned daily.
Thecookicg cabinet, oven rack and floor of the cooking
cabinet must be thorn lughly rinsed out with water,
so that all residues ale removed.
I
[hen dry the cabinet <ISdescribed.
Leave the oven rack, Irids and containers in the
cooking cabinet durir g cleaning.
Residues on grids antI containers which have first been
softened up but are I ot removed by rinsing can be
cleaned by placing in the dish-washer.
Never use acidic or COIrosive liquids on the aluminium trays
as this could cause da1nage to the material and discolouring.
l
l
Do not use a high-pressure cleaner.

Do not use acids or let acid fumes come
into contact with the protective layer of the units
stainless steel, otherwise it will be damaged and
could cause discolouring.
Observe the handling instructions
on the cleaner canister.
A!
Hand pressure spray gun

(always use the original RATIONAL spray pistol!)
The practical cleaning aia1.
Robust pressurized cont<liner with pump handle.
Fitted as standard with IWO different spray nozzles
and separate extension.
Holds 1.5 litres.
Special cleaner
Dissclveseven encrusted dirt without scrubbing. Easyto use,
gent1 3 to surfaces and bit tlogically degradable. 11 kg container.
Folh w the safety instl uctions 011 the cleaner container.
An E#:safety data sheet i, available )n request.
Hanlling the spray bti)ttle
Fill tile spray bottle
- Fill the bottle with liqu d no higher than the max level.
- Put the pump in pItIce, screw it on and tighten it so that
the pressure needeJ f( r spraying can be built up.
- Pur,~pair into the cont.liner using the pump lever.
- Depress the pump lever while pointing the spray
nozzle into the unit.
-Wear the prop&protection:

protective glasses
..
and gloves.
- Never leave the container unrlsed and under
pre ure for any length of time. Slowly unscrew the
pu11 p head so that the cornpi essed air can escape.
mRinse the nozzle, nozzle extension and nozzle tips
after each use.
- Clean and rinse the cleaning bottle with
warm water two or three times a week.
- If the pump piston becomes stiff,
A !
apply 2 or 3 drops 01 oil.
~85
,..-.,
Pa
-
- .__._-_ -- _____
^______-
- .__--.
--
\ Descahg
SC - Self clean
The steam generator is automatically drained and rinsed at regular
intervals.The SC automatic function greatly increasesthe intervals
between descaling.
If the-&$n generator is notgoing to be used for a white

(over the holiday period, for instance), it should be drained
as folfows: I
*
.
j,,,;
8 ,.!t, .
l
Set the Moist heat mode.

.
We recommend the following intervals beveen descaling, ,

bastedon 8 hours a day in steaming mode:
,
up IO 18dH* (up to 3.2 mmolllitre)
at least once a year
up to 24dH* (up to 4.3 mmolllitre)
at least twice a year
ovel 24dH*
(over 4.3 mmolllitre) at least three times a year
* German scale of hardness for water
The recommended intervals between descaling may vary
from the above guidelines, depending on the hardness of the
water. We recommend that the steam generator is thoroughly
cleaned by trained customer support personnel.
. Select a cooking cabinet temperature

of 31qc.
,.,S~
I.,.
,./
l
Note for appliances in continuous use:

If the active heating periods of the steam generator Exceed
60 minutes, and if the door of the cooking cabinet is open for
longer than a minute, the generator is automatically rinsed.
The recommended intervals between descaling
should nevertheless still be adhered to.
Important
note!
If there is a fault in the SC automatic cleaning function,
the Water display will start to flash. Check whether
the water valve is open or the strainer at the entrance
to the solenoid valve is blocked. As soon as these problems
are cleared, the unit will automatically restart, If it does not
do so within 3 minutes, call your local service department.
86
::
,.r
Fressthe tvfoist heat key.
The steam generator will be drained

for as long as the key is pressed.
Flote: the temperaturein the steam generator
nrust be less than 75C.
, Maintenance
Caution! Disconnect the C!imaPlus Combi at the

mains before opening the service door and working
on live parts!
Interior lighting rcompl. (wews. frame, glass, gasket. reflector trt11l4
1. Changing
the interior
lighting
When the interior lighting fails to wqrk change1
the halogen bulb.
First, switch off the unit at the mains.
Cover the outlet inside the unit with a cloth and remove the
lamp glass by loosening the 4 nuts with an 8 mm spanner.
1 Remove the frame, the glass and gasket.
Replace the bulb with a new 12 volt, 10 W, 300C
heat-resistant one (Spare Parts No. 3024.0201).
Also replace both the gaskets.
External gasket frame: Spare Parts No. 5 110.1022
Internal gasket frame: Spare Parts No. 5 I 10.1023
Insert the halogen bulb
Do not come into contact with the hot bull).

Replace the gasket and glass, and secure illto place.
2. Replacing
the door gasket
The door gasket consists of a vulcanized frame which slots
into a guide on the cooking cabinet. If a gasket needs
to be changed, pull the old gasket out of the guide.
, Clean the guide rails to removeanysoiling.Whenfitting
the gasket, ensure that the rectangular part of the gasket
is placed into the frame correctly.
It is recommended that the retaining lip: are dampened with
soapy water during assembly.
Door
Door
Door
Door
Door
gasket
gasket
gasket
gasket
gasket
6 x l/l
10 x l/l
10 x 211
20 x 111
20 x 211
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Spare
Parts
Parts
Parts
Parts
Part:
No.
No.
No.
No.
No.
5105.1020
5105.1021
5105,1022
5105.1023
5105.1024
Door gasket guide
Note:
When di$posing of the PC board or the unit, the battery
of the c@trol PC board must be disposed of separately.
.
,
87
P aintenance
Changing the quenching
temperature
Vapour quenching is not necessary for the ClimaPlus Combi

to function correctly, as it also Forks without quenching.
The quenching temperature can be set as desired.
The factory setting ensures that the waste water temperature
is 65C. However, you can determine water cx?xumption
. .
individually.
t
*\
The factory setting for the quenching temperature is 75C.
< 75 C
I
> 75 C
the quenching temperature is reduced,

and water consumption is increased.
the quenching temperature is increased,
and water consumption is reduced.
Operating:
l
Select cooking mode at which the quenching temperature

is to be changed,
,
Press the temperature key and the core temperature key

simultaneously for 10 seconds.
The quenching temperature appears in the display
. Select the desired quenching temperature

using the central dial.
Confirm with
Clean the air filter

area.
under the installation
1. Remove screws
2. Push filter unit to the right and lift out downwards
3. Remove mat and rinse it with slightly soapy water
4. After drying the mat, replace it and follow the process
in reverse.
(I
CPC CPCGas
l
CD Kurzbetriebsanleitung
0 Operating
Instructions
03 Modedemploi
CD Instrucciones
brevesdemanejo
@D Kortegebruiksaanwijzing
1(3 Kortfattadbruksanvisning
Tescri@o
b;Fvtideopera@es
D Breviistruzioni
0 Kortvejledning
CD Enkelbruksanvistiing
(GD Lyhytkgyttiiohje
@Jl Etiv~opq 06qyia xpljaqq
For more information

on operation, cleaning and
customer support, please see the manual.
On/off switch
ClimaPlus function
(greed
button
with control
arrows
Clima v rinrlow
Moist
heit
button
(steam)
1. Moist heat, 30 - 130C

Cookina methods:
30-97C: Poaching, simmering, vacuum cooking
100C: Steaming, stewing, blanching, soaking
105-l 30C: Forced steaming for firm cooking vegetables
Temperature presetting: 100C
Dry ht at button (hot air)

Button for cooking cabinet temperature
Cooking c; binet temperature
readout
Button for time setting

Continucus Jperation: Press button twice
Time reads ut
\\
Moist heat basic setting, ClimaPlus changeable
Core temi)erature
button
Core temoerature
readout
2. Dry heat
30 - 300 C
Cookina methods:
30-97C: Low-temperature cooking, cook & hold
lOO-300C: Roasting, grilling, baking, gratinating
Expert but ton

Readout for expert button and programming
Program/St art button
Cool dow 11 button
Phased wntilation
for fan impeller
button
Half fan impeller speed button

Humidifying
button
Central dial to set the cooking data

The central tlial is used to set all cooking data,
such as the emperature or time.
Press the desired function, e.g. time setting or CGmaPlus
function button, and enter the value using the
central dia.
Dry heat basic setting, can bl%changed with ClimaPlus
3. Moist and dry heat (30 - 300 C)

Cookina methods:
Roasting and basting, baking and humidifying, regenerating
RESET birtton
Displaying the current cooking data
Presson cooking cabinet temperature button E to display
the following dat 1:
- Current humidity (blue barcode shows percent le)
r- Current cookinc_cabinet temperature
- Time elapsed (ccjoking period)
- Program numbcrlprogram stage (only when WC king with
programs)
-7
.--.\ *(
I--\
Press together
Moist and dry heat basic setting, can be changed with ClimaPlus
Checks before switching on each day

l
Lock air baffle at the top and bottom
l
Ensure insertable rack or mobile oven rack are properly
locked in place in the cooking cabinet
l
When starting Moist heat, the Water indicator may
appear in the display. This means the steam generator has
not yet been filled with water. Once this has been done, the
readout will automatically disappear.
l
If the readout still appears, check whether the water valve
is open and whether the strainer on the water supply is free
l
If the ambient temperature is below +SC, note that the
cooking cabinet is heated up to room temperature before
starting to operate.
General notes on safety
l
Caution!
When opening the cooking cabinet, steam and hot vapor
can escape!
l
Caution! Containers are hot!
l
Take care not to scald yourself!
l The temperature of the glass door can rise by more
than 60C.
l
If there are long breaks between operation the warn3r cock
should be closed.
l
Never use cold water to cool the unit down!
l
The cool down function should only be used when the air
baffle is locked in accordance with the instructions!
l
Never clean the Combi-Steamer with high-pressure
cleaners!
Steam generator with SC automatic function
The steam generator is generally automatically discharged,
rinsed out and filled with fresh water at the start of work
every day. This extends the intervals between descaling,
depending on the hardness of the water, from 2-4 weeks
without the SC automatic function to 6-l 2 months with the
SC automatic function (see the SC automatic manual).
cl20
RESET button
If there is a fault in the incinerator, RESET will light up in
the EXPERTkey indicator panel.
After 15 seconds you will hear an acoustic signal. Press
RESETto re-start the automatic ignition procedure.
If the RESETindicator does not light up again after about
15 sec., the flame is burning and the equipment 1sready
for operation, If the indicator is lit in spite of pressing the
button several times, please call customer service.
ATTENTION:
In case the gas connection is interrupted or the connected
flow pressure is below 1 Smbar, the unit is without function.
Cleaning
For hygiene reasons and to avoid interruptions to operation, it
is essential that the Combi-Steamer is cleaned every day at
the end of operations
Use
the hand pressure spray gun
l
cleaner. Follow the instructions on the can.
l
Cleaning routine
l
Let the cooking cabinet cool down (below 60C)
l
Spray on the cleaner in the cooking cabinet with the hand
pressure spray gun (including the door, door seal and the
space behind the air baffle)
l
Leave cleaner to work for about 20 minutes
l
Set Moist heat
l
Set the timer to 15 minutes
l
Next spray out the cooking cabinet and the space behind
the air baffle thoroughly with the handshower
l Wipe
the door and door seal over with a damp cloth
l
Dry the cooking cabinet for 10 minutes with hot air
at 150C.
Alternatively:
First spray on the cleaner!
l
Using the expert button and quick selection dial program,
select and start Clean (takes 40 minutes)
l When the program is completed, spray
out the cot :ing
cabinet and the space behind the air baffle thorouglrly with
the handshower.
l
Wipe the door and door seal over with a damp cloth
l
Dry the cooking cabinet for 10 minutes with hot air
at 150C
The best way of cleaning the exterior of the Combi-Steamer is
with a soft, damp cloth.
Warning indicators
Equipment is too hot
The selected cooking medium flashes
Low water
Water appears in readout 13
Maximum loads:
6x111 GN
30 kg
10x1/1 GN
45 kg
10x211 GN
90 kg
20x1/1 GN
90 kg
20x211 GN
180 kg
Right of new developments and technical modifications
reserved.
Opera tin 1 Instructions

Winterhalter
Gastronom
Dishwashing
Machine
GS 42 and GS 72
Summary
1. Application
2.
Installati.on and ititial start-up
3.
Safety instructions
4.
Operating
5.
Before the wash
for the,operator
and indicating
elements
6. The wash cycle

7.
After the wash
8.
Faults
9.
Special information
10 Emission values
11 Optional extras
1. Application
The Winterhalter
Gastronom dishwashing
machines (23 42 and GS 72 are designed for
cleaning all kinds of tableware used in the catering trade. The machines may only be used for
this purpose and must be operated in accordance with these operating instructions.
Any deviation from the machines intenced purpose or alteration of its design without our
written consent shall exen pt us from all guarantee and product liability.
2. Installation
and initial
start-up
The machine must be installed and connected to the customers water supply and waste
pipes in accordance with tire Installation lnstructipns for Winterhalter Glass and Dish Washers.
..
The initial start-up and staff briefing must be performed by the Winterhalter after-sales service team according to the Start-up Instructions for Winterhalter Gastronom Dish and Utensil
Washing Machines. You should therefor
contact the responsible Winterhalter factory representative once the machineihas bt?en CC rectly connected to your supply pipes.
Your dishwasher
is not ready for start-up until all corlnections
have been completed.
VJlnterhaller
Gastronom
Gmbti
Pf
i 152
D-88070
Meckenbeuren
890009-:
10198 Si
P 1
n!
3. Safety
instructions
for the operator
The following Instructions
are designed
to ensure safe operation
of the machtne
Only use the machine if you have been instructed in Its operation
:Operate the machine only as described in these operating instructions.

.
Do not open any panels or machine parts for which a tool is required.
and clear rinse, observe the warnings

I
and workings
When handling detergeht

spective packages.
pnnted on the re-
Wear protective gloC,esfor,any jobs which have to be performed inside the tank
while the machive is in operation or during the daily shut-down process.
In the event of faults not attributable

the Winterhalter after-sales service.
Do not put any ,;afety devices (e.g. door catches, etc.) out of operation.
to the on-site water or power supply, contact
4. Operating and indicating elements

1
2
3
T
t
Press once = machine on (lamp illuminated).
Mains switch
Press twice = machine off (lamp extinguished).

Heating
lamp
Programme
up
indicator
Press twice = Program preselection

extinguished).
Programme
I5
Main wash manual
@101
Manual rinse I tank

cleaning
twice
Keep button
= Main wash
guished).
pressed
1
cancelled
(lamp
prese(lamp
Press once = Main wash cycle on (lamp Illuminated).

Press
Programme
lamp
cancelled
-Press once = Long (2-minute) programme

lected (lamp illuminated).
Press twice = Program preselection

extinguished).
soluti-
Press once = Short (1 -minute) program preselected (lamp illuminated).
When this lamp is extinguished, the detergent

on has reached the prescribed temperature.
indidator
cycle
off (lamp
extin-
= Activate rinse for cleaning

inside of tank.
.,.
\
Lights up while programme
is in progress.
WInterhalter
GT,;tronom
GmbH
Pf. 1152
D-88070
Mecltenxuren
89000971
10198 scn
P 2
5. Before
the wash
Before the wash can be started, the machine must he made ready for operation
Open the on-sde shut-off valve for the wafer supply.
Turn on themain
-.
Insert
Check
Make
Close
switch.
the standpipe into fhe wash lank and turn slightly to make sure it is sealed tight
that the surface strainers are inserted correctly.
sure the pump suction strainer is inserted correctly.
the hood.
Press the power switch (1) (lights up when sw/:ched on).

The tank is filled automatically
When the neccesary water level is reached, the machine is heating up to tl : operating temperature.
During the heating process, the white indicator lamp Heating up (2) is Illuminated. The
heating time depends on the temperature of the incoming water.
Check whether there is sufficrent clear rinse in Ihe container,
and top up if necessary.
Never let the clear rinse container get c,ompletely empty after filling it for the first time. The
amount of clear is dosed automatically. We recommend,. that you use our own Winterhalter
1
Gastronom clear rinse.
To start with, add de!ergent (powder) to the heated tank water.

GS 42: approx. 1509; GS 72: approx. 2409
After adding the detergent, switch on the machine briefly by pressing the programme switch
(3) in order to distribute the powder evenly, so that It does not sink to the bottom of the tank.
Snce the detergent concentration
decreases steadily with the number of racks Inserted dur1f-q the washing process it is necessary to top up the detergent after approx 10 wash cycles
WInterhalter
Gastronom
Gmbti
Pf
1152
D-88070
Meckenbeuren
89000971
10198 SCh P 3
-..
-,.-
Add approx. ICI ,- of detergent (powde, J as a top-up

After adding. ih,l Trogramme should bc~started /mmei!/ateiy
tergent uniform/
If the machine is ecji ipped l,vith an autorn,atic dispenser

extra, manual dosinrt s not n.zcessaty.
.
6. The wash
:n crcer to
for liquid detergent
:,le .!e-
d/sir;bufe
as an optIonal
cycle
This machine is equipped with two set programmes of different lengths.

Select programme. &itch 1 for slightly soiled dishes, and programme switch 2 for normal
purposes. The.required Wash programme is activated on closing the hood. The Programme
indicator lamp (7) lights up while the prograrnme is in progress.
Load the dishes correctly ,A the appropn;jte

Slide the rack into the machine.
rack.
Press the appropriate prograhme

switch (3 of 4) according
Close the hood to start the wash prograil?me.
to the degree of soiling.
/
The main wash cycle, during which the dish ?s are cleaned intensively from above and below,
is followed by a 12s rinse with freshwater m xed with clear rinse at a temperature of 85C.
The programme
indicator lamp(7) lights 11pwhile the programme is in progress.
extinguished, the hood can be opened and the rack taken out of the machine.
Once it is
Thanks to the specific heat of the dishes ;~nd the influence of the clear rinse added to the
rinse water, the dishes dry squeaky clean vlithin a short time, so that there is no need to dry
them with a cloth.
Heavily soiled dishes or dishes with dried-o 1 food remnants may require a longer wash time.
For this purpose, simply press the manual main wash button (5) (there is no need to press
a programme button) and the main wash ccle will be activated for as long as required. The
button lights up during operation.
Press again the button (5) and start a progr;lmme
by bressing
.~
the button (3).
In exceptional cases, the rinse cycle can Aso be activated by pressing the manual rinse
button (6). However, care must be taken to ensure that this cycle is not operated for longer
than 12s, as otherwise the rinse.water cools down too far.
i Jlnterhaller
Gastronom
GmbH
Pf. 1152
D-88070
Meckenbeuren
8900097
1O/98
sch
7. After
1
Ihe Nash
Turn o J I, ? programme switch (3 or 4)

Turn o f li ? power sw/lch (1).
Open I le rood and take the rack out of the machine.
Remet e 1 6 standpipe.
This caus ?s i le tank to be emptied.

\
-
I
Close the /rood again ,3nd turn on the power switch (I)
Clean the inside of tht? lan

10-S).
Check to make sure t/le ta! k is clean. If necessary, remove any remaining dirt with a sof?
scraper or brush. The/I rep1 at the above cleaning procedure
?d emptied and cleaned:
Remove the pump suction <trainer from the machine and clean it thoroughly.
Insert the pump suction ar; I surface strainers.
Insert the rack support (on i/ GS 42).
Switch off the on-site main
the manual rinse button (6) briefly (approx. !5-
Turn off the power sti,itch , I).

Remove the rack support I In/y GS 42)
Remove Ihe surface :;train rs
Once the wash tank is comple
by operating
witch
Close Ihe on-site shci-Off \ ?/~,e
Leave the hood of the mat !IW oilen to allow any residual moisture rnsrde Ihe mach\ne to
escape.
-Wlntertl
dtor Gastronom
GmbH
Pf
1152
D-BR070
Meckenbeuren
89000971
10198 sch
P 5
Machines
with built-in
drain pumps:
Eernove rhe ;tandpipe
Ckxe the dc: ITS of the machine.
Turn on t4e 3ower switch (1). This switches

gent solulior. oul of the k3nk.
Machines
as descrrbec! above
with pre-rinsing
devices:
on the drain pump.
which pumps the deter-
Shut off Lle vater supply to ihe spray hose and then actuate
relieve tht? pressure in the hose.
the spray valve
in order to
Clean the outer surfaces of the m;xhine with a sot? cloth and suitable cleaning agents.
We recommen@the
Winterhalter SI !inless steel cleaner and Winterhalter stainless steel
polish.
t
8. Faults
The machine is equipped with a Thermo-Stop,
which causes the wash programme to i)e
aborted if the boiler heater continues heating for longer than 15 min. (programme
indicalJr
lamp (7) flashes).
-
In this case, turn the power switch (I) off and on again abler a brief pause.
If the indicator lamp continues
9. Special
to flash, contact your after-sales
setvice representative
information
Please use only detergents

machines. We recommend
oped for our machines.
and clear rinses which are suitable for commercial glass washing
that you use our own products, which have been specially devel-
Should the tank water become exceptionally dirty on certain days due to intensive washing,
should be drained hff and the tank cleaned and refilled.
it
During the daily cleaning procedure, make sure that no rusty foreign bodies remain on the
floor and walls of the tank, as these can even cause stninless steel to rust. Such rust particles may originate from cleaning utensils or npn-rustprocbf supply pipes.
Besides daily cleaning, the machIne must also undergo thorough maintenance
at least twice
a year. This should be performediby an expert (trained at the Winterha ter works).
-.
,
1
.\
The machine is not hoseproof,

steam-jet cleaning devices.
and must not therefore
be sprayed with high-pressure
or
89000971
P 6
Protect the machine? from frost
W~nlerhaller
Gastronom
GmbH
Pf. 1152
D-88070
Meckenbeuren
10196 sch
IO. Emission
values
Noise emission
WorkiAace-related
emission
GS 42: LpAq
= 62 db
GS 72: LpAeq
= 67 dB
11. Optional
extras
value
accordbg
to DIN EN IS0
. 11 .I Automatic
11202
cold rinse
The boiler heater is switched off by pressing the rinse temperature button (8), which lights up accordingly. The rinse
cycle is then performed at the water temperature in the supply
pipe.
The boiler heater is switched on again by pressing the button
a second time (light is extinguished).
il.2
lariable
rinse temperature
By pressing the rinse temperature

button (8), it is possible to
select a lower temperature
for the rinse water (indicator lamp
lights up accordingly).
If the button is pressed again, the machlne switches back to
the high rinse temperature,
and the indcator lamp is extinguished.
Wm.?rhalter
~aslrmom
Cdnbt-!
Pf
I 152
D-88070
Meckcnl
lren
89000971
10/-X3 sch
P 7
Model
C3OO/C400
When the water
softner
method of regeneration,
Operatins
Instructions
has been instal.Led,

the Engineer will advise you the
also how often regeneration
should take place.
HOWTO REGENERATESOPTNER
Ensure that the glasswasher

or dishwasher
is, not in use when carrying
out this regeneration
programme.
Obtain a bucket or suitable
receptacle
to collect
water when draining
2)
off the water softner.
handle "C" on tap "A" to the right
3) Turn control
(half a turn clockwise)
180.
With the use of bowl, put hose "E" into this,
to allow the air
and the water to drain.
As to sketch "A".
4) Once all water has drained from hose "El', then turn handle "D" on valve
(half a turn clockwise)
180C.
'23" , to the right
Ensure hose "F" is
put into water receptacle.
As to sketch "B".
then turn locking cap "G"
5) Once all water has drained from hose F,
anti-clockwise,
when fully
undone, then remove "G" and the fixing
bracket and lid from the top of the softener.
Now pour in approximately
2 kilograms
of coarse grain salt into the top
6)
of water softener.
Do not overfill
with salt.
The salt level should
be just below the rim on top of the water softner,
as to sketch "C".
Now
clean
off
salt
etc.,
7)
from the rubber seal on the lid.
Insert
lid,
locate lid bracket,
and screw on locking
cap "G" in a clockwise
direction.
Ensure that the lid is placed evenly and the securing cap
is not over tightened.
handle "C" on valve "A" to the left
43) Turn control
(half a turn
anti-clockwise)
180.
As to sketch 'ID".
9) Water will now run from valve "B" down P.V.C tube "F" into drain.
Ensure you have a suitable
container
to collect
water from hose 'F" if
not going into a drain or open gully.
This water should flow until
the water is free of salt,
this normally
takes 45 minutes.
10) Now turn handle "D" on valve "B" to the left
(half
a turn anticlockwise)
180.
As to sketch "E".
1)
Regeneration
SKETCH
SK!3CH
SC)MCtF~C,Ai
DISWJASHERS
is now completed.
SKETCP
31SYSTEMS
IJtilT S CRADOCK
I i,ii,
LUTON IL4 O.,F TEL :,%Qi
sKErcH0
490077 FAX Ir)l5821 582150
SKER3
.
.
880/NE-1580
watts Microwave
FOR COMMERCIAL
USE,
it\:
(I~.
.
: .I
,bif
,t
I Jv
_.%
Pahsonica
Please
read these instructions
completely
before operatil~~ this oven.
Oven
.a...
.,:7
1
.
.(
Table of Contents
....................
, , .............
. Outline Diagram .........
...........................
Safety Information , , ... , .. , .. , .... ,
Important Information on Application and Operation ................
.............................
Definitions and Feature Explanations
:.
How to Operate
1
2
3, 4
5
A. Manual Single Stag.3Heating:(................................

B. Manual 2 or 3 Stagt : Heating ................................
Memury Pads fbr Single Stage Heating .............
Memory Pads for 2 or 3 Stage Heating .............
E. Memory Pad Heating for Both Single and 2 or 3 Stage Heating .....
C. Programming
D. Programming
F. To Read the Cycle Counter 111.1. ...........................

G. To Activate Program Lock ..................................
j, H. To Release Program Lock, .... :..., ... , ......................
j, ......................
I ~ 1. T& Read Pro&d
fl&!?ij,...;..........,A#.,*-
J. To Select Beep Tone Options . ...) ..........................
Self Diagnostics Failure Code Explanation . , ......................
Care of Your Microwave Oven ....f
I ............................
.......
Microwave Basics ......
,
/. ............................
General Guidelines for Heating in a Panasonic Microwave Oven .......
/. ............................
Defrosting Frozen Food , .........
..i ............................
Helpful instructions ...........
Cookware .................................................
Two Level Cooklng .............
General Tips for Reheating ... ....
BreaMast
.....................
. ............................
............................
. ............................
BakedGoods..................;
............................
. ......................................
Starters ............
Plated Meals and Cooked Dishes ............................
Fish ...........
..... ... .....................................
Rice and Pasta .............................................
SaucesandGravies
.........................................
Vegetables ..... . .................

Sweets.........:,..,.....................~
.., ................
................
Snacks ....................................................
......................................
Technical Specifications
6
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
13
14
14
15
15
15
16
16
17
18
19
20,21
22
23
23
24,25,26
27
28
29
,,...
behind
i
c
t
t:i,
.
Air Fillers
,I,,~(!
,.. , ,,g
<I,
0
0
Q
0
@
Digital Display Window (see below)

Power Level Selector Pad (17)
Memory Shift Pad (m)
Memory Pads
Stop Cancel Pad (0)
@ Start Pad (<9)

@ Timer Dial
0 Door Handle
;:,
,
I ,
i
, ._) I
_
/
.
+.i .I( j
.i, I;,
1:ii:..;
,I. /
I
+i*h ht.*; : t j :l$J i j
; E
A , x;..
!
i
I
I
0 Oven Lamp Cover

@Air Filters
@ Program Entry Switch
(behind Air Filters)
@Buzzer Switch (behind Air Filters)
@ Program Lock Switch
(behind Air Filters)
@ Control Panel
(0 Middle Shelf
@ Power Level indicator Display
I
E-Heating
Time Display
(min. sec.)
F-Power
Level indicator
W HIGH
m MEDIUM
u LOW
I3 DEFROST
:$ STAND
A-Program
Display
B-Memory
Area Code Display
C-Memory
Pad Number Display
D-Stage
Heating Indicator
-l-
How to replace the fuse

Open the fuse compartment with a screwdriver
and replace 11le fuse.
Safety Information
WARNING:
(NE-l 880)
This appliance must be connected to an

. outlet having a rated current greater than
13 amps. A 13 amp, B.S. 1363 plug is,
therefore, not suitable. It is recommended
that this unit should be installed by a
professional contractor, as the Installation
wiring should be in accordance with current
IEE regulations.
When
Earthing Instructions
an outlet
Is not earthed:
It is the personal responsibility and obligation of

the customer to have it replaced with a properly
earthed outlet.
WARNING: THIS APPLIANCE MUST BE

EARTHED.
This appliance is supplied with a moulded three
pin mains plug for your safety and convenience. A
13 amp fuse is fitted in this plug (for model !
NE-1580). Should the fuse need to be replacad,
please ensure that the replacement fuse has a
rating of 13 amps and that it is approved by ASTA
or BSI to BS1362. Check for the ASTA mark @J or
the BSI mark v on the body of the fuse.
If the plug contains a removable fuse cover, you
must ensure that it is refitted when the fuse is
replaced. if you lose the fuse cover, the plug must
not be used until a replacement cover is obtained.
A replacement fuse cover can be purchased from
your local Panasonic Dealer,
IF THE FITTED MOULDED PLUG IS
UNSUITABLE FOR THE SOCKET OUTLET
THEN THE FUSE SHOULD BE REMOVED AND
THE PLUG CUT OFF AND DISPOSED OF
SAFELY AND AN APPROPRIATE ONE FIT-l-ED.
THERE IS A DANGER OF SEVERE
ELECTRICAL SHOCK IF THE CUT OFF PLUG IS
INSERTED INTO ANY 13 AMP SOCKET.
If a new plug is to be fitted, please observe the
wiring code as shown below. If in any doubt,
please consult a qualified electrician.
IMPORTANT: The wires In this mains lead are
coloured in accordance with the following code:
Green-and-yellow:
Earth
Neutral
Blue:
Brown:
Live
As the colours of the wire in the mains lead of this
appliance may not correspond with the coloured
markings Identifying the terminals in your plug,
proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured GREEN-ANDYELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the
plug which is marked with the letter E or by the
Earth symbol & or coloured GREEN or GREENAND-YELLOW.
The wire which Is coloured BLUE must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is
marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The
wire which is coloured BROWN must be
connected to the terminal in the plug which is
marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Voltage and Power

The voltage used must be the same as specified
the oven. Using a higher voltage than that

which is specified is dangerous, and may result in
a fire or other type of accident causing damage.
on
Service
it is dangerous for anyone other than a service
technician trained by the manufacturer to perform
repair service.
Do not remove the outer casing of the oven.
High voltages are present inside the cabinet.
Repairs and adjustments should be done only by
qualified servicx personnel, using manufacturers
genuine replactiment parts. Contact the
manufacturer.
Door seals
Do not attempt to tamper with or make any
adjustments or repairs to door, control panel
housing, safety interlock switches or any other part
of the oven. Do not remove outer panel from oven.
The door seals and door seal areas should always
be kept clean-use a damp cloth.
Operation
when empty
The appliance must not be operated WITHOUT

FOOD IN THE OVEN. Operation when empty will
damage the appliance.
Cord/Plug
If the supply cord of this appliance is damaged, it
must be replaced by the special cord with metal
plate available only from manufacturer.
Do not immerse cord, plug or oven in water.
Keep cord away from heated surfaces. Do not let
cord hang over the edge of table or work top. Do
not plug your oven in via an extension cable as
this can be dangerous. It is important to plug the
oven directly into a wall socket.
Placement
-2
of Oven
Locate the oven on a smooth, fiat and stable

surface. Do not place the oven in a hot or steamy
area, i.e. near a stove or fryer. For safe and
efficient operation, the oven must have sufficient
air flow to the air vents i.e. 5 cm (2 inches) at the
side and rear; 20 cm (8 inches) at the top.
I
,
Maximum
Shelves
Room Temperature
Do not operate the oven when the room

temperature is higher than 40C (104F) and/or the
humidity Is more than 90%. Free airflow around
the oven is important.
Do not place the oven on a shelf directly above or

beside a gas or electric hob or cooker. The oven
may be damaged. It is dangerous to position this
oven on a shelf which is so high that food cannot
. be safely removed by the user.
If a shelf is used in a suitable position, ensure that
it is capable of supporting the weight of the oven.
Interference
There is a possibility of a small amount of
interference with weak broadcast signals if the
oven is too close to a radio or TV.
ImportantInformationon Application and Operation-Read Carefully

Short Cooking Times
4. Boiled Eggs
Do not boil eggs in their shell in your
microwave. Raw eggs boiled in their shells
can explode causing injury.
As microwave cooking times are much shorter

than other cooking methods it is essential that
recommended
cooking times are not exceeded
without first checking the food. Cooking times
given in the time charts are approximate.
Factors
that may affect cooking times are: preferred
degree of cooking, starting temperature,
altitude,
volume, size and shape of foods and utensils
used. As you become familiar with the oven, you
will be able to adjust these factors.
!
;
It is better to undercook rather than overcook
foods. If food is undercooked,
it can always be
returned to the oven for further cooking. If food is
overcooked, nothing can be done. Always start
with minimum cooking times.
Important
It the recommended
cooking
times
5. Foods wlth Skins

Potatoes, apples, egg yolk, whole vegetables
and sausages are examples of food with non
porous skins. These must be pierced using a
fork before cooking to prevent bursting.
6. Liquids
When heating liquids, e.g. soup, sauces and
beverages in your microwave oven,
overheating the liquid beyond boiling point
can occur without evidence of bubbling. This
could result in a sudden boil over of the hot
liquid. To prevent this possibility the following
steps should be taken:
a) Avoid using straight-sided
containers with
narrow necks.
b) Do not overheat.
c) Stir the liquid before placing the container
in the oven and again halfway through the
heating time.
d) After heating, allow to stand in the oven for
a short time, stirring again before carefully
removing the container.
are
exceeded the food will be spoiled

extreme
circumstances
could
and I I
catch flr : a ~1
possibly damage the interior of the ov( n.

1. Small quantities of food
Take care when heating small quanti.ies of
food as these can easily burn, dry 0111 or catch
on fire if cooked too long. Always set short
cooking times and check the food frequently.
N.B. If materials inside the oven shol tld ignite,
keep oven door closed, turn oven off, and
disconnect the power cord, or shut off power
.
at the fuse or circuit breaker panel.
l
7. Lids
Always remove the lids of jars and containers
and takeaway food containers before you
microwave them. If you dont then steam and
pressure might build up inside and cause an
explosion even after the microwave cooking
has stopped. When foods require a cover use
a suitable plate or pierced cling film.
NEVER OPERATE THE OVEN WITHOUT

FOOD INSIDE.
2. Foods low In molsture
6. Deep Fat Frylng
Take care when heating foods low In

moisture, e.g. bread Items, chocolate, biscuits
and pastries. These can easily burn, dry out
or catch on fire if cooked too long.
Do not attempt
to deep fat fry in your oven.
9. Temperature Probe
Use a temperature
probe to check the degree
of cooking of food only when it has been
removed from the microwave. If undercooked,
return to the oven and cook for a little longer
at the recommended
power level. Do not
leave a probe in the oven when microwaving.
3. Christmas Pudding
Christmas puddings and other foods high in
fats or sugar, e.g. jam, mince pies, must not
be over heated. These foods must never be
left unattended
as with over cooking these
foods can ignite.
-3-
10. Paper, Plastic

Carefully attend the appliance if paper, plastic
or other combustible
materials are used as
containers or for coverfng. Do not use wire
twist-ties with roasting bags as arcing will
occur.
. . Do not use recycled
paper products, e.g.
Kitchen roll unless they say they are
specifically designed for use in a microwave
oven. These products contain impurities
which may cause sparks and/or fires when
used.
Caution
Examine
Removal of protective film

A protective film is used to prevent scratching of
the outer case during transportation.
Peel this film
off before installation or use.
11. Reheating
It is essential that reheated food is served at
the required temperature
according to current
food safety (temp. control) regulations.
Remove the food from the oven and check
that it is piping hot, ie steam is being emitted
from all parts and any sauce is bubbling.
Check the food has reached the required
temp. with a temperature
probe-but
I
remember do not use this inside the
microwave.
I
Even if cooking instructions have been
followed always check the food before serving
and if in doubt return your 1, od to the oven for
further heating.
Attach caution label

Before using this appliance, the caution label must
be attached. Please attach to top of appliance.
Do not block the air vents.
This Microwavl3 Oven requires free airflow in the
back for maximum cooling efficiency. You should
keep the air vents clear while cooking.
Do not dry fabric in the oven.

Do not dry fabric in the Microwave Oven since
there is a possibility of the cloths burning if left in
the oven for too long of a time.
Outdoor
12. Standing Tlme
Use
Do not use outdoors.
Standing time refers to the period at the end

of cooking or reheating when food is left
before being eaten, I.e. it is a rest time which
allows the heat in the food to continue to
conduct to the centre, thus eliminating cold
spots.
Smoke/Fire
During heating, if smoke is observed, keep the
oven door closed, and switch off or disconnect
the
oven from the supply. II materials inside the oven
should ignite, keep oven door closed, press STOP
Pad.
Switch off at socket and remove plug. If possible
shut off power at the fuse or circuit breaker panel.
13. Keeping Your Oven Clean

It is essential for the safe op ration of the
oven that it is wiped out regl ,arly. Use warm
soapy water or a food sanitizar solution,
squeeze the cloth out well and use to remove
any grease or food from the interior. The oven
should be unplugged when cleaning.
WARNING
14. Containers
Before use check that utensils/containers
suitable for use in microwave ovens.
your Oven
Unpack oven, retain all packing material, and

examine the oven for any damage such as dents,
broken door latches or cracks in the door. Notify
supplier immediately if unit is damaged.
N.B. DO NOT install if unit is damaged.
1. The appliance should be inspected for damage

to the door seals and door seal areas and if
these areas are damaged the appliance should
not be operated until it has been repaired by
service technician trained by the manufacturer,
using genuine replacement
parts.
2. Storage of accessories.
When the oven is not
being used, do not store any objects inside the
oven in case it is accidently turned on. In case
of electronic fGlure, oven can only be turned off
at wall socket.
3. Liquids or other foods must not be heated in
sealed containers since they are liable to
explode.
are
15. Babies Bottles and Food Jars

When reheating babies bottles always remove
top and teat. Liquid at the top of the bottle will
be much hotter than that at the bottom and
must be shaken thoroughly before checking
the temperature.
The lid must also be
removed from babies food jars, the contents
must also be stirred or shaken before the
temperature
is checked.
16. Removable Shelf

Do not slide the removable shelf in or out
when placing or removing food. This action
could cause damage to the shelf or cause hot
food to tip towards the operator.
-4-
Definitions
and Feature
Explanation
This oven has many features not typicallyfound on other commercial Microwave Ovens.
1.
FEATURE
Manual Heating
EXPLANATION
,
I
Gives the user maximum flexibility to set the oven to desired heating time and
power level. Ideal for menus that require variations in heating.
Single Stage Heating
Allows the oven to run at the selected power level for the selected heating time.
Two or Three Stage

Heating
Allows the oven to be set to begin heating at one power level the,1 shift
automatically to a different power level after designated amount of heating time.
Memory Heating
Memorizes 16 different heating programs.
Interrupt Function
Allows the oven door to be opened to check the food in the oven cavity. Closing the
door and touching @ pad resumes heating. The Cooking Time is retained in the
display window while you check the food.
NOTE: Interrupt Feature is de-activated in Program Lock.
Repeat Function
After you remove your food from the oven the timer is automatically reset to repeat
(For Manual Heating Only) the last heating time and power level. This is especially convenient for Daily
Specials that you do not want to program into a memory pad.
Two Step Operation
(In Program Unlock
Only)
Gives you time to confirm and or revise the selected heating program before starting
the heating cycle. (Select heating program either manually or by pad number then
touch @ pad.)
Cycle Counter
The oven can display the total number of times the oven has been operated
cumulatively, Great for analyzing usage of the oven and traffic flow at the location.
Program Lock
1. Locks the control panel Memory pads into their programmed heating times and
power levels.
2. Deactivates Program Entry Switch.
3. Allows one touch operation of the Memory pads.
Prevents unwanted erasing of Memory Pads. Simplifies operation-Great
for Fast
Food, Convenience Store and Vending applications.
Program Unlock
Deactivates Program Lock and activates all other features.
Self Diagnostics
The oven constantly monitors its operation. If an operational problem develops, the
Display window displays a Failure code. By checking the code number against the
list in this manual you will know the nature of the problem and whether you can
solve the problem yourself, or need to call the Service Agent or Electrician. If a
service agent is required, the Failure code number will let him know which parts to
bring on the service call.
Tone Loudness Control
Allows setting of the loudness of the Beep Tone to one of 4 different levels.
Tone Length Control
Allows you to choose the length of the end of heating cycle beep tone to either short
beeps or 60 seconds of long beeps.
Program List
Allows you to review all currently programmed pad number, heating time and Power
level for each stage.
How to Operate
This oven is preset at the factory
for the following:
1. Manual operation
2. Number Pads preset to high power at the indicated heating times for single stage heating.
6= 1 min. 15 sec.
l=lOsec.
7= 1 min. 30 sec.
2=20 sec.
6-2 r$n.
3=30 sec.
4=45 sec.
5=1 min.
3. Program unlock.
I
If you desire any other feature please consult the owners manual to find how to activate the feature.
A. Manual Single Stage Heating

1. Make sure the oven is connected to a properly earthed electrical outlet.
2. Open the door. The oven lamp will be turned on. 0 will appear in the display
window.
3. Put the food Into a suftable container, place it in the centre of the oven and then
close the door securely. The oven lamp will go off.
4. Select the desired power level by touching U pad. The selected Power Level
will be displayed in the display window and the single stage heating indicator, 1
will start to blink.
[Example]: Touch V pad once for m power, twice for IIW and 3 times for U,
4 times for lZJ and 5 times for <: .
5. Select the desired heating time using the Timer Dial. The selected time will
appear in the display window. (up to 15 min. on I or 11 power-or 60 min. on
0, m and tJ) power. The minimum time that can be programmed for Defrost is
2 minutes.)
6. Press @ pad:
A. The oven lamp and cooling fan will be turned on.
B. Heating will start.
C. The Power Level and the single heating indicators stage 1 will start to blink.
D. The time on digital display will count down.
7. At the end of the cooking cycle, the Beep Tone will sound and all heating will
stop, The oven lamp will go off. The display will blink 0 until the door is opened.
1 minute later cooling fan will stop.
8. Open the door and take the food out. The digital display will return to the
originally selected time and power. The oven lamp will be turned on.
9. Close the door. The oven lamp will go off and 1 minute later the digital display
window will go blank.
-6-
. .
SPECIAL NOTE: For both single and 2 or 3 stage heating

1. While heating, one touch on QJ pad stops the oven. Two presses on Q pad will
cancel the selected program. The program will continue to operate by pressing
the 0 dad.
2. One tap on the Q pad before the heating cycle is started, will cancel the selected
programme.
REPEAT +EATURE
1. You can repeat exactly the same manually selected heating time by touching Q
pad, if you use the oven again within 1 minute (within 30 minutes when the door
has been left open.)
2. Atter 1 minute of non-use with door closed (30 minutes with the door open), the
repeat feature will be cancelled.
B. Manual 2 or 3 stage Heating
[L-g
pm-]EJ
1, Follow Steps 1 to 5 on page 5.

2. Select the desired power level for the second stage heating by touching lX! pad
the appropriate
number of times. The power level will be displayed in the display
window and the second stage indicator 2 will start to blink.
(Example]:
Touch U pad 4 times for m power.
3. Set the desired
heating
time for the second
stage using the Timer Dial.
4. Touch a> pad:

A. The total time for both stages will be displayed.
B. The oven lamp will be turned on.
C. The single stage indicator 1 will start to blink while the second stage
indicator 2 will stay on. The power level indicator for the first stage will start
to blink.
D. The time on digital display will count down.
5. After the first stage heating lime expires, a single beep tone will sound, the
power level indicator and the 2 stage heating indicator for the second stage will
start to blink and the time on digital display will continue to count down.
6. At the end of the cycle the Beep Tone will sound and ail heating will stop. The
oven lamp will go off, The time display will blink 0 until the door is opened.
1 minute later the cooling fan will stop.
1,. I@]
I 0
7. Open the door and take the food out. The digital display will return to the
originally selected time and power. The oven lamp will be turned on.
6. Close the door. The oven lamp will go off and 1 minute
NOTE:
Fbr a 3 stage heating cycle, select a further

between steps 3 and 4 above.
See Special
Note Above.
-7-
later the digital display
power level and dial in a time,
C. Programming Memory Pads for Single Stage Heating
I,M-53-l
1. Make sure the oven Is connected to a properly earthed electrical outlet.
2. Touch the Program Entry Switch and PROG sign will start to blink in the display
window. (The door may be open or closed at this stage).
3. Touch the Memory Pad you wish to program. The pad number and the
previously selected time and power level will appear in the display. PROG and
the single stage heating indicator 1 will blink. A small A will appear beneath
the flashing PROG.
[Example]: Touch Memory Pad Number 5.
4. Select the desired power level by touching the Power Level Selector Pad U, the
selected power level will be displayed in the window.
[Example]: Touch 0 pad 4 times for n power.
5. Set the desired heating time using the Timer Dial.
(Up to 15 min. on I and lX power or 60 min. on 0,
lX and :!: power.)
6. Touch the Program Entry Switch again. The PROG sign will stop blinking. This
means that you have completed programming the selected Memory Pad for
single stage heating.
7. Three seconds after programming is completed the display will go blank.
8. Program the remaining Memory Pads as desired by repeating Step 2-7 above.
TO PROGRAMME MEMORY AREA B: Follow steps 1 and 2 above. Then touch
the Memory Shift pad IA,el and a small B will appear beneath the flashing
PROG. Touch the memory pad you wish to programme, and the previously
selected time and power level will appear in the display window. Follow steps 3-7
above.
NOTE: Once the Memory Area B has been selected it can not be changed back
to Memory Area A. If you do not require Memory Area B, cancel it by
touching the cancel pad Q and begin again,
D. Programming Memory Pads for 2 or 3 Stage Heating

1. Complete steps 1 to 5 above.
2. Select Power.level for the second stage by touching U pad. The selected
power level will be displayed in the window and the second stage indicator 2
will start to blink.
[Example]: Touch U pad 1 time form power.
:r. Set the deslred heating time uslng the Timer Dial.
(Up to 15 min. on I and W power or 60 min. on II, lD and :<: power.)
4.
Touch Program Entry Switch again and the PROG sign will stop blinking and
the STAGE Indicators (1 and 2) will remain illuminated. The total time for both
stagos will be displayed. This means that you have completed programming the
desired Memory Pad for 2 stage heating.
5. Threl3 seconds after programming is completed, the display will go blank.

6. Prog:am the remaining pads as desired by repeating the steps above.
ROTE: For a 3 stage I (eating cycle, select a further power level and dial in a time
between steps 3 and 4 above.
-8-
E. Memory Pad Heating for Both Single and 2 or 3 Stage Heating

Make sure the unit Is properly
programmed
(see page 7.)
1. Make sure the unit Is connected
to a properly
earthed
electrical
outlet.
2. Open the door. The oven lamp will come on.

3. Put the food into a suitable
container
and place it in the centre of the oven.
4. Touch the desired Memory Pad.

l 1 Stage Heating:
PRO&
Pad number, heating time, power level and 1
and Memory Area Code will be displayed.
02 or 3 Stage Heating: PROG Pad number, total heating time for both
stages, 1 and 2 (or l, 2 and 3) and power
levels and Memory Area Code will be displayed.
(Exa,mple]:
Memory
Memory
Pad 5. (1 stage)
Pad 3. (2 stage)
TO SELECT A PROGRAMME
IN MEMOAY AREA B: Place the food in
the oven and close the door. Select the Memory Pad IA,el and then select
the de&red Memory Pad.
5. Touch @ pad.
l 1 Stage Heating:
,
c
I
-
1 and power level indicator blink while heating time

counts down.
02 or 3 Stage Heating: First stage indicator 1 and the first stage power
level blink while heating time counts down.
At the end of the first stage heating time, one beep
tone will sound and the oven will shift to second
stage heating. Count down continues but now the
2 and second power level blink.
6. At the end of the cycle, the Beep Tone will sound and all heating will siq I.
The oven lamp will go off. The display will blink 0 until the door is opent!d.
1 minute later cooling fan will stop.
7. Open the door and remove the food. Close the door. One minute later the
display window will go blank.
F. To read the Cycle Counter
1. Make sure the unit is connected
into a properly
earthed
electrical
outlet.
2. Open the door, The oven lamp will come on. 0 will appear in the display.
3. Close the door,
NOTE: Carry out Step 4 within 60 seconds of closing the door, or the
display will go blank.
4. While touching Buzzer Switch, press Program Entry Switch. The display
shows the total cumulative
number of times the oven has been used.
(Example]:
99999
5. Three seconds later, the display window will go blank.

NOTE: Three seconds late;, when the door & opened,
the display window.
-9-
0 will appear in
G. To Activate
Program
Lock
1, Make sure the unit Is connected to a properly earthed electrical outlet.

2. Press and hold in the Program Lock Switch for 5 seconds, until the display
shows PROG, P and L.
IP
LJ
3. The Program Lock feature Is now activated. Three seconds later, the display
4. 00 not press Prdgram Lock Switch for longer than 10 seconds continuously, or a
false failure code may result.
+
NOTE: In Program Lock

a. The oven is started by touching the desired memory pad. Thera is no
need to touch the @ pad.
b. The Interrupt feature is deactivated-opening
the door cancels the
rema/nlng time on the program.
c. The oven can not be programmed until the program lock feature is
deactivated.
H. To Release Program
Lock
1. Make sure theunit is connected to a properly earthed electrical outlet.
2. Press and hold in the Program Lock Switch for 5 seconds, until the display
shows PROW and P.
NOTE: 00 notpress Program Lock Switch continuously for longer than
10 seconds, or a false failure code may result.
3. The Program Lock feature is deactivated, the oven is now in Program Unlock
mode. Three seconds later, the display window will go blank.
NOTE: In Program Unlock
a. Oven reverts to a 2 touch operating mode (Memory Pad plus @ Pad).
b. Repeat and interrupt features are operational.
c. Memory Pads can be programmed.
d. Tone loudness control and length control are operational.
-lO-
I. To Read Program
List
1, With the door open, while touching the Q pad, press and hold in the Q> pad.
[Example]:
Program Memory number l, the Memory Area Code A---first
stage w 10 minutes, second stage 171 5 minutes.
[ml
ST,,,
2. Display
and the
Memory
second
C#
3. Two seconds later the same information will be displayed for Program Memory
Pad 1, Memory Area Code B. Display will continue to sequence through the
pad numbers. (form Al to Bf3).
[.q]
STAGE I
!bE
window will display: Program Memory Pad 1, the Memory Area Code A
first stage heating time and power level currently programmetl
on
Pad 1. Two seconds later the same information will be displayed for the
heating stage.
EP J
STAGE
4. After all memory pad settings have been displayed, the display then shows the
beep tone settings followed by the Program Lock: PI, L (or Program Unlock
P.).
5. 0 will appear
in the display
window.
J. To Select Beep Tone Options

The Beep Tone can be set for Loudness-(4
Levels) and Length of Tone-(2
combination of Loudness and Length that best suits your needs.
The Beep Tone is set at the factory for the loudest level (#3) and for 3 Beeps.
To Select
Loudness
Options).
You can select the
Level
1. Make sure the unit is connected
to a properly
earthed
electrical
outlet.
2. Touch Program Entry Switch, PROG sign will start to blink in the display
window (The door may be open or closed at this stage).
I-w-
3. Touch Buzzer Switch.

the display window.
[VI
3 bEEP and first stage heating
indicator
1 will appear
in
STAGE
STAGE
4. Select the desired sound loudness level by touching Buzzer Switch. Repeated
touching of Buzzer Switch will lower the loudness of the tone all the way to silent.
The tone will sound at its loudness level and the display window will display
loudness level in digits (3 to O-loud
to silent) followed by the word bEEP.
[Example]:
3 bEEP-Loudest
0 bEEP-Silent
5. Touch Program Entry Switch again, PRtIG will stop blinking. YOU 1 Ive
completed setting the loudness level.
6. Three seconds later, the display window will go blank when the dao. ,s closed.
-ll-
To Select Lengthof Tone

There are two options for the Beep Tone at the end of the heating cycle.
A. 3 Short Beeps (Factory Setting)
6. 60 seconds of Long Beeps
To program for 60 seconds of Long Beeps
1, Complete steps l-4 (Select loudness level).
2. Touch Program Entry Switch and quickly select the desired tone length by
touching the Buzzer Switch.
A. PROG will blink.
B. Current loudness level will ba displayed.
C. Second Stage Heating indicator will illuminate.
[Example]: First Stage Indicator 1 illuminated=3 BEEPS
Second Stage Indicator 2 illuminated=60 Seconds of BEEPS
3. When the desired length of tono has been selected (1, or 2), press the Program
Entry Switch again.
A. PROG will illuminate.
B. 3 seconds later, the display window will go blank.
Self Diagnostics
Failure Code Explanation
This oven monitors its operation and displays a Failure Code in the display window when a problem OCCUI:
What to do when a failure code appears:
I
CODE
CAUSE
WHAT TO DO
l Unplug
the appliance to stop beep.

l Wait for appliance to cool down to reset
operation.
elf food ignites, do not open the door.
elf normal operation does not resume, call
the service agent with information of failure
code.
l Overcooked food.
of exhaust air tbo high.
l Temperature
aDefective Memory IC.
l Unplug
F33-34
@Defective thermistor circuit.

l
t- F44
F81-F84
F86-F89
l Defective control panel.
the appliance and wail more that,

1 minute and reconnect.
If normal operation does not resume, call
the service agent with information of fail[ire
code.
*Defective relay circuit.
Note: Above Codes shown in the display do not indicate all the possible failures on the unit.
-12-
Care of Your Microwave
Oven
3. The outside surface of this Microwave Oven

should be cleaned with soap and water, then
dried with a soft cloth. Make sure that water
does not get into the back ventilation opening
since this can damage the unit.
4. The window of the door should be washed with
very mild soap and water. Be sure to use a soft
cloth. Never use window cleaner. The door
front can be scratched by harsh soap or
cleaners.
1. Disconnect the appliance from the electricity

supply before cleaning.
2. Keep the inside of the oven clean. If pieces of
food or spilled liquids stick to the oven walls, or
between door seal and door surface, they will
absorb microwaves and may cause arcing or
sparks. Wipe up all spills with a damp cloth.
Kitchen detergent may be used if the oven gets
very dirty. Do not use harsh detergents or
abrasives.
Cleaning the Alr Filters

,
Clean the Air Filters occasionally according to the
following instructions, Problems may occur with
the oven if the filters become clogged with dirt or
dust.
I
1. Remove the right Air Filter from the front bottom
skirt by pulling the Right Pop Pin straight out.
Then slide the filter to the right and lift it off the
post at the centre. Remove the left Air Filter the
same as right one.
2. Wash the filters with soap and water.
3. To replace, align the filter with the centre post,
and holding the front of the Pop Pin forward,
located the back of the pin into its hole. Press
the front of the pin and it will pop pin to place.
Be sure to replace the air filters before using
this oven.
If the Air Filter becomes clogged with dust or
grease this will cause an overheat problem on the
oven.
Pbst
\ \
Pop Pin
-13-
.
Pop Pin \
Microwave
Fundamental
They include:
principles
determine
the success
Basics
of microwave
DO NOT HEAT foods in a SEALED container

or bag. Foods expand when heated and can
break the container or bag.
5. AVOID METAL because it bounces the
microwaves, causing uneven heating and
sometimes even flashes (arcing), which may pit
or mar the interior of the oven, the metal
container or plate trim.
6. When heating liquids, e.g. soups, sauces and
beverages in your microwave oven,
overheating the liquid beyond boiling point can
occur without evidence of bubbling. This could
result in a sudden boil over of the hot liquid. To
prevent this possibility the following steps
should be taken:
1. Avoid using straight-sided
containers with
narrow necks.
2. Do not overheat.
3. Stir the liquid before placing the container in
the oven and again halfway through the
heating time.
4. After heating, allow Is stand in the oven for a
short time, stirring again before carefully
removing the container.
1. Temperature
of Foods-Frozen
or
refrigerated food items will require longer
heating times to reach a desired sewing
temperature than foods from room temperature.
2. Food Components-Foods
high in sugar, salt,
fats and moisture content heat faster because
these properties attract microwave energy.
Denser foods high in protein and fibre, absorb
microwave energy slower which means a
lengthier heating time.
3. Bulk/Volume-The
greater the mass of food,
the longer it takes to heat.
4. Containers-Ceramic,
paper, china, gla& and
plastic are suitable for use in microwave

with the following caution:
food preparation.
ovens
Heating foods with either high sugar or high

fat content should be done ONLY in high
temperature-resistant
containers since these
foods get very hot. Using plastic containers
for these foods will cause the plastic to warp.
General Guidelines for Heating in a

Panasonic
Microwave
Oven
Heating Foods From Room Temperature
For specific time, see each food category for

appropriate
heating techniques, plus necessary
pre-preparation
of foods.
Food items such as canned entrees, vegetables,

etc. will require significantly less heating time than
those from refrigerated temperatures.
Heatlng Foods From Refrigerated Temperature
Important Recommendatlons
Foods slored in the refrigerator (5C) should be

covered betore reheating v, th the excepllon of
breads, pastries or any breaded product, which
should be heated uncovered to prevent sogginess.
1. Most conventionally
prepared foods should bo
slightly undercooked,
and held in the
refrigerator,
so that overcooking
does not occur
during microwave heating.
2. REMEMBER
that after the heating cycle has
been completed, internal food temperatures
continue to rise slightly during the standing time.
3. A major abuse of microwave applications
is the
category of breads and baked goods. Because
crusts of breads, pastries and pies are drier
than insides or fillings, they heat more slowly.
Therefore, baked goods should ONLY be
heated until the crust is warm to the touch
(50C-55C).
4. DO NOT OVERHEAT
YOUR FOOD: 99% of all
food quality complaints of microwave heated
foods can be traced to overheating.
Cooked items, such as vegetables,

may be
portioned plated and covered for reheating without
loss of colour, texture or nutritional content.
14-
Defrosting
Cookware
Frozen Food
1. Before using the oven always check that

containers are suitable. DO NOT MICROWAVE
sealed containers as they may explode.
N.B. Always check manufacturers
instructions
as some food manufacturers
are producing
food in containers that do not require piercing.
2. DO NOT leave the appliance unattended
if
paper, plastic or other combustible
containers
are used. Do not use re-cycled paper products,
as they may contain impurities which may
cause sparks and/or fires when used, unless
packaging states they are specifically designed
for MICROWAVE
use.
3. Heat-proof glassware, such as Pyroceram and
Pyrex, is best suited for use in the Microwave
Oven.
4. Do not use metal ware, ceramics trimmed with
gold or silver, or any container with a metal
content.
5. if arcing should occur, check the cookware
carefully again for metal.
6. You may use ordinary glassware, chinaware,
plastic-ware
and paper-ware,
when cooking
food that requires a low temperature.
Using this
tyre of cookware for high temperature
cooking
rnE y cause cracking or warping.
1. if you try to completely defrost frozen food in

the Microwave Oven, uneven defrosting may
occur due to the differences in the thickness
and shape of the food. In actual usage of frozen
food, you should not normally defros? them
loo%, 70% defrosting in the Microwave Oven
is ideal and helpful for the next cooking
operation.
2. To defrost evenly, turn the food 160: or turn it
over during defrosting.
3. To defrost fatty meat, heat it in the Microwave
Oven for a short time and leave it to stand at
room temperature,
or heat it intermittently until
defrosted.
4. When you defrost a whole chicken, or any
frozen food of irregular shape, wrap legs or thin
parts witt aluminum foil. Otherwise thin parts
will be defrosted faster and sometimes cooked
before other parts have properly defrosted.
5. ice should be removed at times during
defrosting.
Other Helpful Instructions

For best results
1. When determining
time for a particular food,
always calculate the minumum time and check
occasionally during cooking for progress. The
Microwave Oven cooks so quickly, it is easy to
overcook your food.
2. Be careful of the cooking time for small
quantities of food, or food with low water
content. They may burn if cooked too long.
3. Do not use the oven for drying kitchen towels or
napkins. They may burn if heated too long.
4. Do not try to boil eggs in the oven.
5. When you cook an egg be sure to pierce the
yolk membrane prior to placing into the oven to
prevent the egg bursting.
CAUTION
Do not use METAL
How to get a browned finish

Generally food does not brown when cooked by a
Microwave Oven. This is one of the features of the
equipment. To brown foods such as chicken,
brush sauce on the surface or sprinkle inrith
microwave browning powder before or buring
cooking. You can also brown meat in a
conventional frying pan before cooking in the oven
For even finished cooking

Open the door and give the dish a half turn, or turn
the food over during cooking. This helps to
achieve more even cooking.
-15-
UTENSILS
in this oven.
Two Level Cooking

When heating more than two plates, place the
dishes evenly on the two shelves.
When healing, one item always place the

container in the centre of the base shelf.
. ..
When using the microwave mainly for reheating
one item at a time, remove the shelf and work on
the base plate.
Allow some space between each plate, do not

cram too much food into the oven.
When defrosting or cooking in the oven, only work
on the bottom shelf, do not use the two shelves
simultaneously.
When reheating two items at a time place both

dishes on the base shelf side by side, unless the
containers are too large and then place one on
each shelf.
General Tips for Reheating

Reheat pastry and bread items, such as sausage
rolls, pies and croissant, on a rack to reduce the
chance of sogginess.
The rack allows the air to
circulate beneath the food and remove steam
which causes moist, limp pastry. A pie heated in a
microwave will never be crisp as there is no hot air
in the cavity to dry it out.
A round dish will heat food more evenly than a

square dish. The corners of a square dish receive
double microwave energy and this is characterised
by bubbling overcooked
corners, whilst the:centre
of the food is still cold.
I
A shallow dish will heat more quickly than a deep
dish as the microwave energy may not always
penetrate deep into the food. The depth of
microwave penetration
differs from food to food
depending on their ingredients.
When reheating uneven shaped pieces of food,

place the thick part of one piece against the thin
part of the second piece. For example, place the
meaty end of one chicken drumstick against the
boney end of the other. This helps the food to heat
more evenly.
Heavy earthenware
and china dishes will slow the
heating process by absorbing some of the heat
from the food itself. A thinner, lighter china is a
better choice as this will not impede the cooking
time. An oven to tableware plastic dish also offers
a good alternative.
&-j+
Always choose a glazed dish for reheating. An

unglazed or chipped container can absorb water
into the porous china when it is washed up. As
-e
+-._
microwave energy is attracted to moisture, the

water molecules contained in the china heats up,
not only causing the dish to get extremely hot, but
also slowing down the reheating time.
After reheating
before serving.
liquids
in the microwave,
stir well
Note: All heatlng tlmes In the following
charts are APPROXIMATE.

We
recommend
you test your own recipe items and plating techniques in this oven
to establish the correct heating times for your recipe items.
Maximum programmable
tlme for single stage heating Is
HI (w) and MED (a) power 15 min.
LOW (U), DEFROST (l3) and STAND (:I:) power 60 min.
For items that

program oven
For example:
1st Stage:
2nd Stage:
cook longer than 15 minutes

for two-stage cooking.
To program 20 minutes:
Program HIGH 15 min.
Program HIGH 5 min.
-16-
on HIGH and MEDIUM power, please
Breakfast
When cooking or reheating poached eggs, ensure
that you pierce the whites and yolk to prevent the
pressure that may build up from causing the egg to
explode. Always allow a poached egg to stand for
a minute prior to cutting into it, again to allow the
pressure to subside.
When preparing foods, (tither conventionally
or in
the microwave, undercook slightly and store,
covered, in the refrigerator for reheating later.
For some foods it is betler to cook and reheat on a
lower power setting to prevent the possibility of
overcooking.
ALWAYS REMEMBER
TO ALLOW THE STAND
TIME AT THE END OF THE COOKING TIME.
N.B. Do NOT cook eggs in shells in the microwave
oven.
A wide range of breakfast Items can be cooked

and reheated in the microwave oven. All foods that
are reheated are taken from refrigerated
temperature
(5C).
It is not usual to cover breakfast items when
cooking, with the exception of bacon; this can be
covered with a piece of kitchen paper to prevent
the fat from splattering the interior of the oven.
When reheating foods, always cover either with
kitchen paper, a plastic plate cover or microwave
safe cling film.
If you are reheating foods on toast, ensure that the
topping completely covers the toast right upto the
edges. If this is not possible, dot the exposed
edges with butter to prevent the toast from drying
out. Cut away the crust from the toast, prior to
servina.
Special Instructions
Bacon, streaky
1 rasher
2 rashere
Scrambled egg 2 eggs & 30 ml
milk
Place on pla&c rack and

cover with kitchen paper.
Beat eggs arid milk In jug.
Stir halfway through and at
the end of the cooking time.
Poachedeggs
legg&120ml
boiling water
Mushrooms,
slii
Smoked
haddock
Porridge
100 g/4 02
Break egg Into ramekin

containing water. Pierce
whlte and yolk.
Place in shallow container
wlth 60 gt2 oz fat.
Kipper fillets
, 500 a/l lb 2 02
I
200 g/0 02
I oats & 500 ml/l
pt milk
Frozen, boll in
bag, 200 g/8 02
, Place fillets on Plate and
Approximate Times
NE-l .--880
NE-1580
1
._34-40 sets.
30-34 sets.
1 min.
55 sets.
30-40 sets.
24-30 WCS.
Power
I Setting
HIGH
I
HIGH
t
LOW
I3
HIGH
w
,
1 min.
1 min.
1 min. 45 sets.1 min.2 mins.

1 min. 30 sets.
-HIGH
,
II MED
,
end ofcooklng time.

Cut corner of bag. Place on
plate.
HIGH
I
2 mins. 30 sets.3 mins.
2 mins. 30 sets.
12 sets.
26 sets.
16 sets.
22 sea.
50 sets.
2 mins.-2 mins.
30 sets.
20 sets.
54 sets.
1 min. 10 sets.
3 mins. 45 sets.
10 sets.
20 sets.
12 sets.
16 sets.
40 sets.
1 min. 40 secs.2 min.
16 sets.
44 sets.
54 sets.
3 mln.
30 sets.
22 sets.
1 mln. 40 sets.
1 min. 20 sets.
4 mins. 45 sets.
3 mins. 45 sets.
To Reheat
Bacon, streaky
1 rasher
2 rashers
Place on plate and cover

with kitchen DaPer.
HIGH
I
Poached egg
on toast
Full breakfast
1 piece
4 pieces
1 plate
4 plates
HIGH
I
HIGH
I
Kidneys on
toast
1 piece
Dot exposed corners of

toast wlth butter.
Arrange 2 sausages and
tomato halves to the outside
of the plate, and 50 g/2 02
mushrooms and 2 rashers
bacon towards the centre.
Ensure kidneys cover the
toast.
Arrange on shallow platter.
Cover.
Pour into jug. Stir before

serving.
HIGH
m
---
Stand
Time
2 mins.
1 min.
in
water
5 mins.
5 mins.
Baked Goods
Do not be t2mpted to overheat the food; they
should only be heated until the crust feels warm to
the touch. If breads are overheated they soon dry
out and become very hard. Allow the food to stand
for a minute after healing to equalise the
temperature.
Always heat baked products such as breads and

pastries on a plastic rack, and not directly on a
plate. A rack allows the air to circulate under the
product and remove the steam which would
otherwise cause the food to go soggy. A piece of
kitchen paper placed over the item also helps to
absorb some steam.
After the defrosting time, the food should feel icy in

the centre, this will disappear after the standing
time.
Food
Approximate
NE-1580
1
Power
Setting
Times
NE-1880
Stand
Time
To Warm
Croissant
Fruit Pies
I
1x5Ogl2oz
I 2x50 o/2 oz
1x50 g/2 02
2x60 e/2 OL
Freshen Rolls
1 x50 g/2 oz
2x50 g/2 02
Douahnuts
1x50 o/2 02
2x 50 $2 oz
Place on rack and cover

I with kitchen paper.
Remove from foil container
and place on rack. Cover
with kitchen paper.
Place on kitchen paper.
Place on kitchen oaoer.
. .
I
1 2
HIGH
I
I
HIGH
I
HIGH
1 I
10 sets
16 sets:
10 sets
12 sets.
12s,,
8 sets.
10secs.
I
8 sets.
10 sets.
10 sets.
14 sets.
6 sets.
8 sets.
6 sets.
10 sets.
-.
I
To Defrort
ROIIS
tx50gl2ot
Place on kitchen paper.
2x50 gl2 02
Gateau
150-180 mm
6-T
Remove all packaging.

Place on plate. i
.
.
- 18-
DEFROST
El
DEFROST
l3
30 sets.
46 sets.
3 mins.
30 sets.
46 sets.
5 mlns.
5 mins.
3 mins.
10 mins.
1 Starters
It may be possible to heat a number of products
with the sal ne heating time per portion together.
All temperE lures are from the refrigerator.
Starters are usually prepared conventionally

and
the microwave oven reheats them quickly when
required.
They may be placed directly on the serving plate,
and garnished at the end of the standlng time. It is
usual to cover the food, although this may not
always be necessary.
Power
Setting
Food
Approximate
NE-1590
Times
NE-1980
Stand
time
To Reheat
Spare Ribs
215g/a02
Chlcken wings
150 e/602
Enchllades
135 g/5 02
Chlcken tikka
1009/40z
Corn on cob
To cock:
16Og/602&
15 ml/2 tbls
water
1 x 170 ml/6 floz
2x
4x
Place on plate. Cover.
I Stand.
I
soup
Place on plate. Arrange

thinner ends to centre.
Cover. Stand.
Place on plate. Do not
cover. Stand.
Stand.
Place In dish. Add water.
Cover. Stand at end of
cooking time.
1 min. 15 sees.
1 min.
2 mins.
56 sets.
44 sets.
2 mins.
HIGH
w
HIGH
I
HIGH
I
1 min. 15 sets.
1 mins.
2 mins.
1 min.
46 sets.
2 mins.
HIGH
I
Place In bowl. Stir at the

end of the heatlng time.
-19-
HIGH
I
HIGH
I
2 mins. 10 sets.
1 min.
1 min. 50 sets.
3 mlns. 45 sets.
--I1 min. 45 sets.
5 mins.
2 mins.
50 sets.
1 min. 30 sacs.
3 mins.
1 .-- _
Plated Meals and Cooked

A plated meal Is very easy to reheat in the
microwave, although some care is required In the
artanging of the food on the plate. Always place
the thicker and more dense food to the outside of
the plate, and the thinner or less dense foods to
the centre. For example, place meats and thick,
vegetables to the outside and peas and smaller
items to the centre. Always slice meat thinly and
cover with gravy or a sauce as this helps the food
to heat faster. Dot vegetables with butter or add
gravy. Do not pile foods on the plate but flatten
them as much as possible as this allows them to
heat faster. For example flatten mashed potato,
Food
1Rehaatina
Roast Meal
I
Wherever possible stir foods before serving, as

this allows the heat to be distributed evenly
through the food.
All the foods are for heating from refrigerated
temperature,
NOT from the freezer.
When reheating ready prepared meals of the type
that can be purchased from a wide range of
manufacturers,
always cover the dish. Do not
forget to allow the standing time; this is particularly
important for dense dishes and those that can not
be stirred. Never attempt to heat these dishes from
frozen as they will not heat evenly, always ensure
thej an! defrosted first.
Arrange food correctly on

plate. Add gravy and cover.
Leave to stand covered.
HIGH
m
X4-
Beef stew with

Dumplings
Cauliflower
Cheese
1 Ratatouille
340 g/12 oz
Place In a dlsh. Cover and

reheat. Stand covered.
Place In a suitable dish.
Cover and heat. Stand
I covered.
225 g/0 oz
1 160 n/s oz
Bombay potato
160 g/6 oz
Moussaka
300 Q /lo/2
Curry and rice
Chicken
portion
160 g/6 oz rice,

170 s/6& oz
curry
21ognoz
chlcken 100 g/
4 oz rice
To cook;
210 Q/i% OZ
Chicken
portlon
Gammon
steak
210 g/7h oz
cooked
To cook;
240 Q/6/+ oz
Gammon
steak
Lamb chops
240 SJ&~ oz
cooked
100 g14 oz
Chicken In
sauce with rice
OZ
1 Place In a dish. Cover and

heat. Stir and leave to stand.
Place in a dlsh. Cover and
heat. Stir and leave to stand.
Place In dlsh. Cover and
heat. Stand covered.
Arrange food correctly on
plate. Cover and heat.
Leave to stand.
Arrange correctly on plate.
Cover and heat. Stand
covered.
Place on plastic rack in
dish. Score skin. Cover and
cook. Stand covered.
Arrange on plate. Cover
and heat. Stand.
Place on plastic rack In
dish. Cover and cook.
Stand covered.
Arrange on plate. Cover
and heat. Stand.
Stand.
-2o-
Approximate
Power
Settlng
Spedal Instructions
75 g/3 02 meat,
Xl
75 g/3 02 Veg,
x2
75 Q/3 02 pots.
Dishes
HIGH
w
HIGH
I
I
HIGH
I
HIGH
I
HIGH
I
NE-1580
Tlmes
NE-1880
Stand
Time
1 min. 25 sets.
2 mins. 50 sets.
6 mlns.
2 mins. 15 sets.
1 min. 10 sets.
2 mlns. 20 sets.
4 mlns. 45 sets.
2 mins.
1 min. 50 sets.
2 mins.
1 min. 40 sets.
1 min. 20 sets.
2 mins.
I
1 1 min. 15 sets.
1 min.
1~2 miis.
1 min. 15 sets.
I min.
2 mins.
2 mins. 50 sets.
2 min5;. 20 sets.
2 mins.
HIGH
I
2 mins. 30 sets.
2 mins.
2 mins.
HIGH
a
3 mins.
2 mins. 50 sets.
2 mins.
HIGH
2 mins.2 mlns. 30 sets.
56 sets.
B MED
3 mins.
30 sets.-4 mins.
44 sets.
2 mins.
I HIGH
1 min. 30 sets.
0 MED
3 mlns.
2 mins.
HIGH
1
1 min.
50 sets.
2 mins.
HIGH
f
40 sets.
34 sets.
2 mins.
HIGH
0
-
2 mins.
Cottage pie
Settin
Approximate
NE-l 580
Times
NE-1 880
Stand
time
Approximate
NE-l 580
Times
NE-1 880
Stand
Time
2 mins3 mins. 30 sets.
2 mins.
328 gll 1% oz
To Rehear Ready Prepared

Average
lx326 gl
prepared meal 11 h oz
Power
Special lnstructlons
Food
Setting
Meals
4x
Average
prepared meal
Power
Speclel InstructIona
Food
1.36 kg/3 lb
F.,..
Food
HIGH
I
Prepare as Instructed. Do
not heat from frozen.
Cover. Stand at end of time.
The dense products which
can not be stirred wlll take
the longer time. Products
which can be stlrred will
take a shorter time: do not
forget to stir the food
halfway through and at the
end of the heating Hme.
Prepare as Instructed. Do
not heat from frozen.
Cover. Stir if possible.
~~
9 mlns.-10 mins. 7 mins. 30 secs.8 mins.
HIGH
Special
Power
InstructIons
2 mins. 30 sets.4 mins. 30 sets.
Setting
7 mins. 30 sets.-
ii;
6 mins.-8 mins.
Approximate
NE-1580
;ff;
Times
NE-1880
2 mins.
1::::
Stand
Time
Defrosting
Minced meat
454 9/l lb
Pork chops
365 9/13 oz
2 chops
Lamb chops
340 g/12 oz
4 chops
Steaks
Prepared meal
300 gll0 OZ
2 steaks
326 g/l 1I4 oz
Prepared meal
1.36 kg/3 lb
Place in shallow container.

Hemove any food that
defrosts within the time.
Stand.
Place on plate, thick side to
the outslde. Turn during
time. Stand.
Place on plate, thicker ends
to the outside. Turn dutlng
time. Stand.
Place on plate. Turn dudng
defrost time. Stand.
Prepare as Instructed.
Break up If possible during
time. Stand.
Prepare as Instructed.
Break up If possible during
time. Stand.
-2l-
DEFROST
lx3
8 mins.
8 mins.
10 mins.
DEFROST
El
10 mins.
10 mins.
10 mins.
DEFROST
Er
8 nrins.
8 mins.
10 mins.
DEFROST
l3
7 1nins.
7 mins.
10 mins.
Fish
Fish defrosts, cooks and reheats be \utifully in the

microwave oven.
.
When cooking fillets or whole fish, always

remember to arrange the thicker part of the food to
the outside of the container. Wherever possible
make even shaped parcels by rolling fish fillets
so that the head and tail overlap. Shield the head
and tail of a whole fish with aluminium foil halfway
through the cooking time to prevent over cooking.
Score the sides of whole fish to prevent the skin
frorn bursting during cooking.
Before freezing fish down, ensure 111at it is packed

in manageable
parcels. It is better t( freeze fish in
a single layer as it defrosts more eve nly and is
much easier to break apart. Always I lefrost using
the DEFROST power level, do not tr to hurry
things along by using a higher powe# setting.
Always check the fish as it defrosts i nd rearrange
into a single layer as soon as is post ible if this has
not already been done. It may be net :essary to
shield some areas ot the fish to prev !nt
overdefrosting.
To do this simple chc zk the fish
and if any area feels defrosted, wrap a small piece
of aluminum foil, shiny side out, ovet that part and
hold in place with a wooden cocktail .tick, It is
usually necessary to do this with sin{ le fillets or
whoke fish. The fish should feel icy ar the end of
the defrosting time, so allow it to stand before :
I
washing well in cold water.
1
Food (For 500 s/l lb 2 oz)
Cover fish with a sauce or dot with butter when

reheating.
N.B. When shielding food, ensure the foil does not
touch the side of the cavity or arcing may occur.
Special Ins~ructlons
Approximate
NE-1580
1
Power
Setting
Times
NE-1880
Stand
Time
Defrosting
Fish fillets
Place on plate. hover

Ilghtly. Break fillets apart
halfway through the time.
Wash under cold water at
the end of the time.
Place on plate. Cover
lightly. Break steaks apart
halfway through time.
Wash under cold water at
the end of the time.
Flsh steaks
Whole
fish
1 x 280 g/9 oz
Prawns
Place on plate. Cover

tightly. Wash under cold
water.
Place In dish. Stir halfway
through time. Run under
cold water.
DEFROST
Et
15 mins.
15 mins.
DEFROST
15 mins.
15 mins.
Et
:
8 mins.
8 mins.
10 mins.
10 mins.
DEFROST
Et
DEFROST
El
t
To Cook
--l-Fish fillets
Fish steaks
Nhole
fish
lx28Og/9oz
Place on plate. Arrange in a

parcel. Place smaller fillets
to the centre of the plate.
Cover. Stand at end of time. -Place on plate. Arrange
thinner areas to the centre.
Cover. Stand at end of time.
Place on plate. Cover. After
-half the time shield head
and tall wlth aluminium foil.
Stand.
-22-
II
HIGH
3 mlns.
I
3 mins
HIGH
15 sets.
0
MED
4 mins. 50 sec.
5 mins.
U
4 mins.
5 mins.
MED
30 sets.
Rice and Pasta

Do not be tempted to heat a dish such as Lasagne
from frozen, as this will only result in a cold or
possibly frozen centre. Always remember to allow
the standing time at the end of cooking to allow the
food to complete cooking. When heating dense
foods such as Lasagne, try to place the food in a
shiIllow, round dish as this will give the most
efficient absorption of the microwave energy. The
col,king of rice and pasta is no faster in your
mi,:rowave than by traditional methods. All times
below are for pre-cooked reheating only.
Rice reheats without the grains sticking together in

the microwave. Simply place in a shallow dish, this
helps the food to heat faster, and cover. Stir the
rice before it is served.
Pasta reheats better if it is covered with a sauce or
is part of a dish, for example canneloni. If covered
with a sauce, always stir during the heating time
and at the end. It is not usual to stir pastas that are
part of a dish, so always ensure the food Is
thoroughly defrosted before heating it if the food
has been frozen.
Food
Power
Setting
Approximate
NE-1560
Times
NE-1660
Stand
Time
Reheat
Pilau rice
150 s/S oz
Place cooked rice In

shallow container. Cover.
Stand covered. Stir.
HIGH
I
36 sets.
30 sets.
2 mins.
Basmati rice
150 g16 ot
HIGH
w
36 sets.
30 sets.
2 mins.
Fried rice
150 g16 oz
HIGH
w
40 sets.
32 sets.
2 mins.
Tagliatelle
with sauce
290 gll0 02
HIGH
I
1 min. 50 sets.
1 min. 30 sets.
2 mins.
Lasagne
326 glllh
Place cooked rice In

shallow container. Cover.
Place cooked rice in
shellow container. Cover.
/
Place In shallow container.
Cover. Stir durlng cooking
time and at end. Stand.
Place In shallow cooklng
container. Cover. Stand at
end of time.
HIGH
w
4 mins. 15 sets.
mins. 30 sets.
2 mins.
oz
Sauces
and Gravies
To reheat transfer the sauce to a large, shallow
container; this ensures that the sauce heats
quickly and does not bubble out of the heating
container. Always stir the sauce at least twice
during the heating time and at the end. Strain and
serve.
It is very quick and easy to reheat sauces and

gravies in the microwave oven. Prepare the
sauces conventionally
or In the microwave oven
and store, covered in the refrigerator.
Food
1To Reheat
Becharnel
sauce
Veloute saucs
Gravy
1 litre/2 pts.
1 litre/2 pts.
Power
Senlng
Speclal lnstructlons
Place in large,
container. Stir
during heatlng
Place In large,
container. Stir
durlnn heating
shallow
at least twice
time.
shallow
at least twice
time.
1 1 Iltrel2 pte.
HIGH
I
HIGH
I
Approximate
NE-1580
1
5 mins.
Times
NE-1880
Stand
Time
4 mins
2 mins.
5 mins. 30 sets. 1 4 mins. 30 sets.
3 mins.
-23-
2 mins.
2 mins.
Vegetables
Frozen vegetables can be cooked on HIGH power
without the need to defrost first. They will require
little or no water, but stir the vegetables halfway
through the heating time to ensure the food cooks
evenly.
Always cover vegetables when cooking and
reheating and at the end of the cooking time
always stir the food and allow the correct standing
time before testing and serving.
When cooking vegetables, either conventionally
or
by microwave, that are to be reheated, slightly
undercook and then plunge into cold water for
several minutes. Portion the vegetables and cover
before refrigerating.
Most vegetables defrost, cook and reheat very

successfully in the microwave oven. They retain
their &our, texture, flavour and nutritional value.
The thicker more fiberous parts of the vegetables
will take longer to cook or reheat, so ensure that
these parts are always placed to the outside of the
dish. Most vegetables will require a small amount
of liquid, about 60 ml/4 tbls, per 500 g/l lb when
cooking; do not be tempted to add additional liquid
as this will only increase the cooking time. Do not
salt vegetables directly as this will cause the food
lo overcook; If necessary add the salt to the water
in the cooking container before adding the
vegetables. Several vegetables of the same

cooking time per 500 g/l lb may be cooked
together in the same dish. Again, the small amount
of liquid used means that the flavours do not
mingle.
Food
To Reheat Refrlgerated
Times
Stand
NE-1 860
Time
1 min. 30 sacs.
2 mins
NE-1560
Vegetables
500 s/l lb 2 oz
lOOg/40r
4x100g/402
Broccoli
Approximate
Power
Setting
Cover portloned vegetables

and reheat. Stir at end of
heating time and stand
HlGH
1 min. 50 sets.
36 sets.
2 mins.
30 sets.
1 min. 35 sets.
before serving.
Cabbage
500 9/i lb 2 oz
100 g/4 02
4x 100 g14 02
500 g/l lb 2 oz
Carrots
100 g/4 02
4x1009/402
Zauliflower
500 g/i lb 2 oz
100 g/4 02
4x100g/402
Zourgettes
500
g/l lb 2 oz
100 g/4 02
4x1oogl4oz
%ench
beans
2 mlns. 10 sets.2 mins. 30 sets.

40 sets.
2 mins.
1 min.
2
32
1 min.
45 sets.
mins.
sets.
40 sets.
2 mins.
30 sets.
HIGH
HIGH
I
2 mins. 10 sets.2 mlns. 30 sets.

38 sets.
1 min. 50 sets.
HIGH
I
1 min. 50 sets.-
2 mins. 10 sets.
32 sets.
1 min. 40 sets.1 min. 50 sets.
1 min. 45 sets.-
2 mins.
2 mins.
30 sets.
1 min. 30 min.
1 min.
1 min.
26
1 min.
1 min.
30 sets.45 sets.
sets.
20 sets.30 sets.
Cover portioned vegetables

before serving.
HIGH
I
1 min.
2 mins.
1 min. 40 sets.
1 min. 20 sets.
1 min. 30 sets.
30 sets.
1 min. 20 sets.

heatlng time and stand
before setvlng.
HIGH
w
2 mlns. 45 sets.
40 sets.
2 mins. 10 sets.
2 min. 15 sets.
32 sets.
1 min. 45 sets.
2 mins.
1x29g/1002
2
Place on kitchen paper and

reheat. Stsnd before
HIGH
1 min. 30 sets.
2 mins.
servlng.
1 min. 15 sets.
2 mins.
3 mins.
4 mins. 30 sets.
500 s/l
lb 2 02
500 g/l
lb 2 02
lOOe/402
lOO,gt4
02
4
-24-
40 sets.-
1 min. 50 sets.
36 sets.
2 mlns. 45 sets.
4 mins.
5 mins. 30 sets.
min. 45 sets.
2 mins.
4x
ag:ket
45 sets.mins.
sets.
20 sacs.
2 mins.
1 min. 40 sets.
1 min.
2
24
1 min.
2 mlns. 10 sets.
36 sets.
1 min. 50 sets.
lOog/4Oz
+)tatoes,
2 mins. 10 sets.2 mins. 30 sets.
HIGH
u
4x 100 g/4 02
otatoes,
Aled

before serving.
before serving.
HIGH
I

before serving.
500 g/l lb 2 02
100 g/4 02
4xtoog/4o2
.eeks

and reheal. Stir at end of
before serving.
before serving.
2 mins.
30 sets.
1 min. 30 sets.
Food
Sprclal
Power
Setting
Instructions
To Reheat cooked, chilled Vegetables

Sprouts
500 e/l lb 2 oz
100 g14 02
and reheat. Stlr at end of
;.
4x 100 gl4 02
heating tlme and stand
before serving.
36 kg/6 lb 10 oz Portlon vegetables into a
Mixed
plastic gastronorm
vegetables
container, cover and reheat.
I mln. 30 sets.
22 sets.
1 min. 20 sets.
2 mins.
HIGH
I
11 mins.
9 mins.
5 mins.
HIGH
I
4 mins.4 mins. 30 sets.
3 mins. 30 sets.
10 mins.
Trim leaves and shred.

Aemove very thick parts of
the stem.
I
Prepare and slice into even
pieces. Do not cut too thick.
Stir at end of time.
HIGH
m
4 mins. 4 mins. 30 sets.
3 mins. 30 sets.
10 mins
HIGH
b
3 mlns. 30 sets4 mins. 15 sets.
3 mins-3 mins.
30 sets.
10 mins
HIGH
w
4 mins.4 mins. 30 sets.
3 mins.
30 sets.-4 mins.
2 mins. 30 sets.3 mins.3 mins. 15 sets. 2 mins. 45 sets.
5 mins4 mins.-4 mins.
5 mins. 30 sets.
30 sets.
3 mins2 mins. 45 sets.
3 mins. 30 sets.
10 mins
160 ml/l 2 tbls

water
Carrots
60 ml/4 tbls
water
Cauliffower
60 ml/4 tbls
water
no water
Trim leaves and divide into

florets.
Trim ends and slice evenly.
60 ml/4 tbls
water
30 ml/2 tbls
water
Trim ends.
Leeks
Potatoes,
boiled
60 ml/4 tbls
water
Potatoes,
facket
Sprouts
2
3
4
60 ml/4 tbls
water
Stand
Time
1 min. 50 sets.
30 sets.
1 min. 40 sets.
Cabbage
French beans
Times
NE-1880
HIGH
I
To Cook Fresh Vegetables (500 g/l lb 2 oz)

60 ml/4 tbls
Trim stems and cut a cross
Broccoli
water
In the base of any thick
stems. Arrange In the
cooking container wlth the
stems to the outside.
Courgettes
Approximate
NE-l 580
Trlm ends and wash well.

Slice into 40 mm/l W
pieces.
Peel and cut into even
shaped pieces. Stir at end
of cooklng lime.
Wash and prick with a fork.
Turn over after hall the
cooklng time. Wrap in foil
and leave to stand after the
cooking time.
Trim and cut a small cross
In the base of each sprout.
Stir at end of cooklng time.
- 25 -
HIGH
I
HIGH
w
HIGH
w
10 mins
10 mins
IO mins
HIGH
w
4 mins. 15 sets.
3 mins. 30 sets.
10 mins.
HIGH
w

8 mins.
11 mins.
15 mlns.
4 mlns. 15 sets.
4 mlns. 45 sets.

6 mins. 30 sets.
9 mins.
12 mins.
3 mlns. 30 sets.3 mins. 45 sets.
10 mins.
HIGH
I
10 mins.
Food
To Cook Frozen Vegetabkr (500 e/l lb 2 01)

Place shredded cabbage In
Cabbage
60 ml/4 tble
water
a sultable container. Add
water. Stlr halfway through
...
and at the end of the
cooklng time. Stand.
Carrots, baby
30 ml/2 tbls
Place In a sultable
water
container. Add water. Stir
end of the cooklng time.
Stand.
tCourgettes,
sliced
15 ml/l tbls
water
Place courgettes In a
suitable container. Add
water. Stir halfway through
and at the end of the
cooking time. Stand.
1French beans
30 ml/2 tbls
water
Leeks, sliced
30 ml/2 tbls
water
Place beans In a suitable

end of the cooking time.
Stand.
Place leeks in a sultable
end of the cooklng time.
Stand.
Potatoes,
jacket
Precooked,
raw weight
290 Q/10 02
30 ml/2 tbls
water
L
Peas
Sprouts
30 ml12 tbls
vater
To Reheat Canned Vegetables

Carrots, sliced
3 kg/6 lb 10 OL
I
Wrap potatoes in kitchen

paper, Turn over after half
the cooklng time. Stand.
Place in a sultable
halfwav throuah and at the
and of ihe c&king time.
Place In a suitable
:ontalner. Add water. Stir
ialfway through and at the
and of the cooking time.
stand.
(strained)
Place in a suitable
container. Cover. Stir
end of the cooking time.
Stand.
Place In a sultable
container. Cover. Stir after
half and at end of cooking
time.
-26-
Approximate
NE-1 580
Times
NE-1 890
Stand
Time
5 mlns. 30 sets
4 mins. 45 sets.
10 mins
HIGH
u
t5 mins. 30 sets
5 mins. 30 sets.
10 mins
HIGH
u
!5 ~wxs. 30 sets
4 mins. 30 sets.
IO mins
HIGH
I
6 mins.
5 mins.
IO mins.
HIGH
u
6 mlns.
5 mins.
IO mins.
HIGH
u
! mins. 30 sets
2 mins.
2 mins.
HIGH
u
5 mins.
4 mins.
0 mins.
HIGH
u
) mins. 30 sets.
I mins. 30 sets.
0 mins.
Power
Settfng
HIQH
I
--
--
--
--HIGH
HIGH
I
11 mins.
9 mins. 30 sets.
8 mins.
2 mins.
sweets
The chart below gives a few suggestions
for hot
sweets 6nd puddings. Do not exceed these times
or the food may overcook and become dry and
hard.
75 g/3 02
Power
Setting
Speclel Instructions
Food
To Reheat
Baked apple
CAUTION:
Jams and syrup heat very quickly to a high
temperature.
They will cause serious burning
consumed immediately.
Place on plate. Stand.
Times
NE-1 560
NE-1880
Stand
Tlme
14 sets.
12 sets.
1 min.
HIGH
w
HIGH
m
HIGH
I
14 sets.
12 sets.
1 min.
12 sets.
10 sets.
1 min.
14 sets.
12 sets.
1 min.
HIGH
m
14 sets.
12 sets.
1 min.
HIGH
I
HIGH
30 sets.
24 sets.
1 min.
42 sets.
38 sets.
1 min.
HIGH
roll
Approximate
if
Slice of apple
pie
Suet Topped
sweet
Sponge
pudding
75 g/3 02
75 g/3 02
100 g/4 02
Baked
roll ,
75 g/3 02
Place
Christmas
nudding
115gl5oz
Portion
150 g/6 oz
Place In shallow
container.
Stir halfway
through
and at
f
end.
1
syrup
custard
on plate.
Stand.
- 27 -
Snacks are very quickly and easily reheated

mlcyowave.
in the
Do remember
that products
with the same heating
time may be placed in the cavity and heated

together. The heating times will vary if the
products
Any bread or pastry based snacks should be

reheated on a non metallic rack, covered with a
are bigger or smaller than those
suggested in the charts.
piece of kitchen paper. This allows the air to

circulate under the food to help prevent sogginess.
Remember that pastries reheated in the
microwave oven will never be crisp as there is no

hot air in the cavity to dry the pastry out, but the
food should never be wet and soggy.
Food
Approxlmate
NE-1 580
Power
Setting
Times
NE-I 880
Stand
Time
To Reheat
Pizza,Fresh
Sausage roll
Pastle
Jacket Potato
with cheese
Pizza, frozen
lx180mmn
Remove wrappings. Place
2x
1 x 70 g/2/??02
2x
1 HEH
1 St&d before serving.

!
Place on plastic rack. Cover
with a piece of kitchen
paper.
;,lace on plastic rack. Cover
I with kitchen paper.
Place on plate. Cut open
and fill with cheese. Stand.
250 g/8 oz
Cooked raw
weight 290 gl
1002
lx125mnV5
2x
Remove wrapping. Place on

plate. Do not cover. Stand.
Mushy peas
Placeon a plasticrack and
IX
cover with kitchen paper.

Stand.
Put In shallow container.
Stir halfway through time
and at end. Stand;
3aked beans
&kg&lb1202
lOOg/4OZ
3eefburger in
)un
Frozen,
137 g/5 02
Cheeseburger
n bun
;;Isse
~
Preparea5 instructlonsor
remove from packaging and
wrap In kitchen paper, place
on olasHc rack.
To cook quarter
lounder
2 mins.
1 min. 40 sets.
1 min. 20 sets.
2 mins.
I
HIGH
I
1 min. 15 sets.
1 min.
2 mins.
1 min. 25 sets.
1 min. 50 sets.
1 min. 10 sets.
1 min. 30 sets.
2 mins.
32 sets.
56 sets.
26 secs.
46 sec.%
2 mins.
40 sets.
32 sets.
2 mins.
28 sets.
22 sets.
2 mins.
HIGH
I
9 mins.
50 sets.
7 mins.
48 sects.
2 mins.
HIGH
W
1 min. 10 sets.
56 sets.
2 mins.
HIGH
I
1 min. 15 set,.
1 min.
2 mins.
HIGH
w
16 sect.
14 sets.
3 mins.
1 min. 45 sets.
1 min. 25 sets.
HIGH
m
.-
--
Dast
iaefburger
2 mins.
HIGH
HIGH
1
1thinly, do not mound.
:heese on
HIGH
E
HIGH
I
HIGH
I
Meat pies
-lot dog in bun
( 1 min. 10 sets.
54 sets.
2 mins. 15 sets. 1 1 min. 50 sacs.
I
!
24 sets.
20 sets.
40 sacs.
34 sets.
I on plate. Do not cover.
Place on plastic rack. Stand.
-28-
2 mins.
Technical
Specifications
NE-1 580
.:
NE-1880
Power Source
230-240 V, 50 Hz
output
Frequency
3.4 kW/14.8 A
2.7 kW/12.3 A
Required Power
m
7X
13
m
e,
1500 W (IEC-705)
HI
MED
750 w
LOW
340 w
DEFROST 170 W
STAND
0 \N
I
IX
u
IZ?
:<:
1800 W (IEC-705)
HI
ME0
900 w
LOW
340 w
DEFROST 170 W
STAND
0W
2450 MHz
Outer Dimensions (W x Dx H)
850 mmx528 mmx471 mm
Cavity Dimensions (WxDxH)
535 mmx330 mmx250 mm
Net Weight
Timer
54 kg
54 kg
Maximum programable time for single stage heating

I
HI and MED power= 15 min.
I LOW, DEF and STAND power=80 min.
16 programs
Memory Capability
- i9 -
FLY)NOINSSCt
CONTROL EP)UIP?#I!NT
MODEL.3EX1'6,EX30,EX40,
atartcrr removal
BEFORE
CLEANING
ALWAYS
MAr(E
SURETHATTHEUNlTlSDlSCOlJNECTED
FROMTHEMAiNS
SUPFLY,
Cleaningshculdbe dc;le et regtlar Intervals,depetdlq

upw the entironmcntin <which
the gnit ooerates,
norma!lyeveryweek
Firstremovetie tray andcispo!,: of the insectbelies.
Thencleanwith a danlc cIo:k.
a
The exteriorof the LII~ISfinish&dwith

stainlesssteelor store enamelpaint, wtlichcan 128
cleanedwith a damp cloth,rtmovil!gth hormald;:t and
greasefoundin most opwatlng conditions.Allthti (netalused
in the equipmentis eitherncncorrosive,stave erzmelledor
elcctfo platedand ?heraforssh0ul.dremainIn gcqcicr;nditlon
for manyyears,if not subjectedto extreme operatng
conditiorr.
BEFORE
REPlACINGTHETUBEALWAYSMAKE:;UKEThAT'
THEUNITIS DISCONNECTED
FPOMTM MAINSS..lPPLY.
POWER
SUPPLY
IS ISOLATED
81 SAFETY
SWITG ACTIVATOR
WHENTR4YISREMOVE0,
Removethe tray and twist the ttloe to remove.
Seeti.tgram.
mountingoptlon8
SUSPENSIONCENTRES
Ex16 356mm
W30 5J6mm
EX4a 668mm
.*
.;&q E pfi;;: -,:

I DESCRlPllON 'Wl6
2X1610
'NM
STARTER
2XI154
EX30
2iI603
LX40 '-7
2xxJM
2xust;
3
WHiFiCI(OERiE(Q
SPARES
PLySEQllOTE
M&L AM SEMAL
NUM#PS.
,I
,
.l. 1.
.I ,-,
I.1
, .,J$.
.
;~ .!.
him
1
2X1154
>.i
..,, ,
.
P &L SystemsLtd now rranufedure I renge of ExecutorInsect

Killers,which confortr to tne EurcpcanStrndard F.N 60
335-2-69.
ELECTRONIClNSEc!T KI&LERS
Executor18tiw modern r? swerto flying Insectcontrol,&re
hygieneis an important : 14eratlon. Threesires of u lit ore
availableand tech IS : ;tabB! for well mounkd, zsiling
*
suspendedand free stanu 5.
The instructionsgiven he Jre intendedto help Y;IUoperate
ExoGutorequipmtnt.rt mr !nw efflclency.
Shouldyou haveanyq?lefi i y0i.rrupolieror the manufacturer
willbe ab!cto advlseyou.
nplacament fuse cdvar la required,ensurJIt !s of the same

colour es ,thrt vislb,bon the ptn face of the plug 00, red or
ormge), Fusecowl am Lvailablefrom the
depJrtment
Indloted In your user Instructions.If the plug supclledla not
suitable for your Jockat outlet, It should be cut off md
destroyed,
Theend of the flexiblecord Jhouldbe sultablypreparedanothe
correct plugfitted, ,
WARNING!A PLUGWITH BAREDFLEXl8LECORDSIS
HAZARDOUSIFENGAGEbIN6,LlVES~CKET,OUTLfT,
~~ARTN~MB~R FOR:ARE~&MENTI$ 1813~'
parts
SITINQ
'
.'
'
'
YourExecutoruntt.JhouldIdeallybe fbrd at leoet hvo metres

WARNING
EXCCUTOR
MUSTONLYB USEID
IN AREASWHICHAREFREE
OFDUSTANDANYPO-9 1E EXPLOSlVEVAPOUR
MIXTURE.
SHOULD
YOUHAVEANYI !ERIESCONiACTYOULOCALFIRE
AUTHORlPi
FORADVICEF :OR.C:
INSTALLATION.
EXOCUTOR
IS SUlTABLE
f R !Ni)OORUSEONLYAN0 IS NOT
SUITABLEFOR U9E IN !ARI.S,STABLESANO SlMlLAR
LOCATIONS.
INSTALLATION
Your Executorunit fef&irf csrlain conditionsto onsurethe

effectivecontrolof flyingI ects in yourpremises:
1. It must be cornxtiy SI d.
2. Ii must bc the correct h&l for the ana to be protected.
3, It muat be in operatior !4 hoursa day.
4. Tubesmustbe repiacr er~~y12 months.
POWER REQUIREK
iNTS
Ewocutormodels are d&i Ed+3operate from two kinds Of

powersupply:
I. 230VAC
50 I%
2. 115LAC
SOHI.
Therefore, please ensur that your Executer model Is
compatlblrwith the electr ty supplyin your~prpmws, note
the voltage rcting of the u t givenon the rJt!ngplste. Make
sure the unit IL connccte to IIH etrthrd r&ctPk:Jlsupply.
connectedviaa socket out ! 31I%moatiblrrating,
WARNlNQ - THIS APPi ANC:EMUST BE EA@THED.
The mains IeJcl supplied fi 1 thl!i unit is slresdyfItlid WM i
moulded plug incorporctir a fuse, the value ef which is

Indicatedon the pin free o 78 plug, Shouldthe fuse needto
be replacedan ASTAapprc Id
fuse must be USO~Of
the same rating, marked us
, If the fuse coder is
detachable,never use the lug 4th Jhe cover oMtt@d. If II
aboveihe ground, prefenbly In the darkest @#a wtthfnthJ

area t0 be prOtJCtJd,lwsy from viMdOW!Jnd skylightsIhut
y,Yoldlngartycompetftfonwkh naturaldayffgh!or sunffght.
In I tsqe openma wherenir, or moreuni!srre requlrtd citing
needs carefulconsider&on to ensurJ maxknumprotectldn.
Eachunit witblna certsinarea shouldbe csntrstlyposltioned
and lnstructblr given ln thJ flrStpJrJgrJph should be followed,
Remember too that light travels in stfri&t Jlnes.-so any

barriers,.le. suspendedcanopiesor my other,large objects
may flake it neceekryfo lnstrli 4 garter numberof unitsIn
order: to RchieMoptlinum effectlvtntrs. As J genersl ruk tlrr
UVliflht from the Executorunit rhould bsvialblefrom every
puff of thr 8reJto be protected,
Appficationrof Executorobviouslya& dspshdlng on th;
loc&k Shculdanyqueries@se on Slbng,ate, pleaseconkact
your suppler or tho manufacturers, .
&&,#&,
: :
:;;,
,,
BEFORE
SERWCING
ALWAYS
MAKESURETHATiHE UNITIS
DIgCONNECTED
FROMTHEMAINSSUPPLY
To ~malntin the unite efficlcky ryllacr the &ra violet
fluorescent es at apprdrlmrtclyone year IntervJjs,making,
sure nplaccY ant tubas JrJ of the correct,type.- obtainable
lrom the ruppller Ot+iJnufJcfurJr.
IF ANYDOUBTSARWREGA?DINII lWE,SEINSTRUCTIONS
PlJASECONTACT
YOURSUPPI.IERORl'HE
MANUFACTLJRIIR,
YourExecutorIs guJrJnteedfor two yJ8rt (excludingtubul, If

a fault occur&wIthIntwelvemonthaWJ will replacevgwunh:.If
J fault o&i
betwaentwthn nlohths.JndWWItyfOUr montk3
we williiiti.repair or replacetit DUToption providedthe rink
:I8 rtturnedtd P 6 L System8Ltd;
Thisgkarmtsc only rppllo,.i( @twin0 P b L aPan Part5Ixb
u&d,
. .
NOTE:TUREQAAE,EjOT
Ii.ffti~TED~
1 I
.
Please refer to section
7.6.2 for as built drawings
SECTION 06
7.6.4
SECTION 06
7.6.5
MILLENNIUM
DOME
CDM
RESIDUAL RISKS
POST CONTRACT
1HAZARD IDENTIFICATIONCHECKLIST
SERIES 1. GENERAL BUILDERS ITEMS
1 REF No 1
ACTIVITY
1 FUME
FALL
C= where hazard is during construction

0= where hazard is during operation
#= where hazard is to be assessed by Other
foodservice
operations.
SLI
Member
of Design
Team
or no hazard
exists to
HAZARD IDENTIFICATIONCHECKLIST
SERIES 4
FABRICATED EQUIPMENT DESIGN
?EF No
ACTIVITY
CHEM /
FUME
FALL
SLIP
FALL-G
OBJECT
HYGNE
SAFETY
FIRE
NOISE
INJURY
MAN1
HANDL
4.01
MATERIALS/COMPONENTS
()
4.02
CONSTRUCTION
4.03
OVERSHELVES
4.04
ACCESSIBILITY
4.05
SERVICE PIPES
4.06
DRAWERS
4.07
CLEANABILITY
4.08 NOISE
NOISE
#
#
4.09
LIGHTING

#= wtiere hazard is to be assessed by Other
foodservice
operations.
Member
of Design
Team
or no hazard
exists to
4AZARD IDENTIFICATION CHECKLIST

;ERlES 5 GOODS RECEIVING/ACCESS
Cl-EM /
?EF No
ACTIVITY
FUME
FALL
SLIP
FALLG
OBJECT
HYGNE
SAFETY
FIRE
NOISE
INJURY
5.01
LOADING
RAMP
5.02
LIFTING DEVICES
5.03
TEMPERATURE CONTROL

foodservice
operations.
co
Member
of Design
Team
or no hazard
MAN-L
HANDLI
#
co
#
exists to
HAZARD IDENTIFICATION CHECKLIST

SERIES
7 REFRIGERATED STORAGE
I
?EF No
ACTIVITY
Cl-EM 1
FUME
FALL
SLIP
FALLG HYGNE
OBJECT SAFETY
FIRE
NOISE
MAN1
INJURY HANDL
7.01 FLOOR LEVEL
7.02 CONSTRUCTION
7.03 TEMPERATURE CONTROL
7.04 SAFETY DEVICES
7.05 FINISHES
7.06 SHELVING
7.07 FOOD CONTROL
7.08 LIGHTING

foodservice
operations.
Member
of Design
Team
or no hazard
exists to

SERIES
8 CHEMICALS STORAGE
,
REF No
ACTIL
UTY
.. .
CHEM I
FUME
FALL
SLIP
FALLG
OBJECT
HYGNE
SAFEW
FIRE
NOISE
INJURY
MAN-L
HANDLI
8.01
STORAGE/lRANSPORTATIO
N
8.02
SHELVING
8.03 VENTILATION
8.04 FINISHES

O= where hazard is during operation
foodservice
operations.
Member
of Design
Team
or no hazard
exists to
SERIES
9 REFUSE MANAGEMENT
ACTIVITY
9.03FTORAGE
9.04
9.05 FINISHES
C= where hazard is during constructlon

foodservice
operations.
Member
of Design
Team
or no hazard
exists to
-lAZARD IDENTIFICATIONCHECKLIST
;ERIES10 SERVICE COUNTERS

CHEM /
FUME
HYGNE
SAFETY
FIRE
NOISE
INJURY
# co
FALL
SLIP
0.04 NEEZE SCREENS

I
0.05 ~vERSHELVES
ACTIVITY
0.0 1
0.02
ATERIALS
GLASS COMPONENTS
0.03FOOD
0.06
DISPLAY TEMPERATURE
FALL-G
OBJECT
MAN-L
HANDLE
#
M. E. 8 P. SERVICES
,0.07COOKING
C= where hazard is during con! uction

foodservice
operations.
Member
of Design
Team
or no hazard
exists to
2a Avenue Road,
Grantham
Lincolnshire
NG3 1 6TH
Tel: 01476 590141
Fax: 01476 590142
E-Mail 106207.1117@compuserve.com

SERIES
14 VENTILATION CANOPIES
CHEM I
FUME
FALL
SLIP
14.0 1 MATERIALS
14.02 FILTERS
14.03 CONSTRUCTION
14.04 LIGHTING
14.05 FIRE SUPPRESSION
REF No
ACTIVITY

foodservice
operations.
FALLG HYGNE
OBJECT SAFElY
MAN-L
INJURY HANDLE
FIRE
NOISE
Member
of Design
Team
co
or no hazard
exists to
2a Avenue
Road, Grantham
Lincolnshire
NG3 1 6TH
42
m
HAZARD IDENTIFICATIONCHECKLIST
SERIES
15
M. E. & P. SERVICES
CHEM I
FUME
FALL-G
OBJECT
HYGNE
SAFETY
FALL
SLIP
15.03 TAPS
15.04 WASTES
15.05 ISOLATORS/SOCKETS
15.06 ISOLATING VALVES
15.07
REF No
ACTIVITY
15.0 1 MATERIALS
MAN1
HANOL
15.08 SOLENOID VALVES
15.09 BMS CONNECTION
15.10 SERVICE DUCTS
EMERGENCY ISOLATION
15.1 1 CHLORINATION
CO#

foodservice
operations.
Member
of Design
co
INJURY
FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS
co
NOISE
15.02
co
FIRE
Team
or no hazard
exists to
2a Avenue Road,
Grantham
Lincolnshire
NG3 1 6TH
Tel: 01476 590141
Fax: 01476 590142
E-Mail 106207.1117@cotipuserve.com

SERIES 16
DELIVERY/OFFLOADING
ACTIVITY
CHEM I
FUME
FALL
SLIP
FALL-G
OBJECT
HYGNE
SAFETY
FIRE
NOISE
INJURY
MAN1
HANDL
16.01
HEAVY ITEMS
16.02
WEIGHT LIMITS
16.03 GLASS
COMPONENTS

foodservice
operations.
Member
of Design
Team
or no hazard
exists to

SERIES
17 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION
FALL-G
OBJECT
HYGNE
SAFETY
MAN1
HANDL
CHEM I
FUME
FALL
SLIP
17.01 LIFTING/CARRYING
17.02 OVERHEAD WORKS
17.03 PART INSTALLED
17.04 SITE LIGHTING
17.05 SITE WELDING
17.06 SITE TOOLS
17.07 TEST8 COMMISSION
17.08 SITE CLOTHING
17.09 SITE PERSONNEL
17.10 SEALANT
co
REF No
ACTIVITY
FIRE
NOISE
INJURY
EQUIPMENT

foodservice
operations.
Member
of Design
Team
or no hazard
exists to

SERIES
18 KITCHEN STAFF TRAINING
REF No
ACTIVITY
CHEM I
FUME
FALL
SLIP
FALL-G
OBJECT
HYGNE
SAFETY
FIR E
1 NOISE
1 INJURY
lH%-li
18.01
STAFFTRAINING
18.02
0 8 M MANUALS
18.03 CLEANING

foodservice
operations.
Member
of Design
Team
or no hazard
exists to

Ep 3 51

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Ep 3 51

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

THE M I L L E N N I U M E X P E R I E N C E

The following drawing 1001 R indicates the location of the

Updated following decommissioning/demolition

WHERE ANY WORKS ARE CARRIED OUT ON THE P R O J E C T THAT

LOCATION OF GREENWICH PAVILION

HEALTH & SAFETY FILE GREENWICH

As Built Drawings - Architectural/Structural

Mechanical Services Installation

Electrical Services Installation

Fit-out (C-Beck - Pavilion Exhibitions)

Catering Facilities - Part 1

Catering Facilities - Part 2

road. The works

Twin layer metal roof incorporating

& Safety File has been prepared

to meet the requirements

and Basis of Designs

& Trade Details

These give information

Design Criteria & Basis of Design

Materials, Maintenance & Trade Details Sheets

Mechanical Services - Please refer to V o l u m e 3 o f 7

Electrical Services - Please refer to V o l u m e 4 o f 7

Ceramic Wall Tiles

MATERIALS, MAINTENANCE & TRADE DETAILS SHEET

-Residual Risks~Method Statements

Refer to above O & M

Dra wings/Sch edules

Useful Trade Literature

Refer to above O & M

Refer to above O & M

Guaran tees/Warran ties

COSHH Data Sheet

Refer to above O & M

Refer to above O & M

-Special Disposal Instructions

MATERIALS, MAINTENANCE & TRADE DETAILS SHEET

Residual Risks/Method Statements

Useful Trade Literature

Refer to above O & M

Refer to above O & M

Guaran tees/Warran ties

COSHH Data Sheet

Refer to above O & M

Refer to above O & M

Special Disposal Instructions

Refer to above O & M

Refer to above O & M

MATERIALS, MAINTENANCE & TRADE DETAILS SHEET

Residual Risks~Method Statements

Dra wings/Sch edules

Useful Trade Literature

COSHH Data Sheet

As main works contract douments

Special Disposal Instructions

Number of Pages (/ndud;ng this sheet):

phone 01978 661991 if this transmission is inoomplete.

An original brochure will be forwarded by post.

Registered in ~nglanU N o 1022~99

Spillages of liquid or dry contaminants should be mopped or brushed up

Dirt & Debris -

The floor surface should be swept regularly to avoid a build up &dirt

The First Stage

The Cleanin~ Proeramme

Heavy Duty Neutral Detergent

Solvent Containing lteavy Duty